Contents

8.1 Definitions

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

8.2 Responsibility to provide

8.3 Selection, use and maintenance
8.4 Workplace evaluation
8.5 Program
8.6 Annual review
8.7 Instruction
8.8 Supervisor's responsibilities
8.9 Worker's responsibilities
8.10 Personal clothing and accessories

SAFETY HEADGEAR

8.11 General requirement

8.12 Use with all-terrain vehicles, snowmobiles, motorcycles
8.13 Use with bicycles and skates

EYE AND FACE PROTECTION

8.14 Eye protection

8.15 Glass lenses
8.16 Side protection
8.17 Face protection
8.18 Contact lenses [Repealed]

LIMB AND BODY PROTECTION

8.19 General requirement

8.20 Cleaning or replacement
8.21 Leg protection
Schedule 8-A WorkSafeBC Standard — Leg Protective Devices

FOOTWEAR

8.22 General requirement

8.23 Slippery surfaces

HIGH VISIBILITY AND DISTINGUISHING APPAREL

8.24 High visibility apparel

8.25 Distinguishing apparel

BUOYANCY EQUIPMENT

8.26 When required

8.27 Compliance with standards
8.28 Working alone
8.29 Record of inspection and maintenance
8.30 Retroreflective material

FLAME RESISTANT CLOTHING

8.31 When required

RESPIRATORS

8.32 When respirator required

8.33 Selection
8.34 Maximum use concentration
Table 8-1: Respirator protection factors
8.35 IDLH or oxygen deficient atmosphere
8.36 Emergency escape respirators
8.37 Respirable air quality
8.38 Corrective eyewear
8.39 Face seal
8.40 Fit tests
8.41 User seal check
8.42 Medical assessment
8.43 Optional use
8.44 Records
8.45 Maintenance and inspections
Personal Protective Clothing and Equipment Definitions

8.1 Definitions

(1) In this Part

"flame resistant" in reference to clothing, means made of a material that, due to its inherent properties or as a result of treatment by a flame
retardant, will slow, terminate or prevent flaming combustion;
"lifejacket" means a device that, when worn correctly, provides a specified buoyancy that will turn the wearer face-up on entering the water, and
will keep the wearer in this position;
"personal flotation device (PFD)" means a device that, when worn correctly, provides a specified buoyancy to support a conscious person in
an upright or backward leaning position, but is not designed to turn a person from a face-down to a face-up position in the water;
"specific location" means a yard, plant, or other clearly defined and limited area in which mobile equipment is operated, but does not include an
entire municipality, district, transient forestry operation, construction site, pipeline or road right-of-way.
(2) In this Part, "8-hour TWA limit", "ACGIH", "ceiling limit" and "short-term exposure limit" have the same meaning as in section 5.1.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 20/2006, effective May 17, 2006.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 139/2021, effective September 1, 2021.]
General Requirements

8.2 Responsibility to provide

(1) A worker is responsible for providing

(a) clothing needed for protection against the natural elements,
(b) general purpose work gloves and appropriate footwear including safety footwear, and
(c) safety headgear.
(2) An employer is responsible for providing, at no cost to the worker, all other items of personal protective equipment required by this Regulation.
(3) If the personal protective equipment provided by the employer causes allergenic or other adverse health effects, the employer must provide
appropriate alternate equipment or safe measures.
(4) Nothing in this section precludes or alters an existing or future agreement between a worker or workers and an employer to the effect that the
employer will be responsible for the provision either at no cost or some cost to the worker, of any or all of the items described in subsection (1).
Note: Part 8 provides requirements for most types of protective clothing and equipment. See Part 7 on Noise for hearing protection requirements.

8.3 Selection, use and maintenance

(1) Personal protective equipment must

(a) be selected and used in accordance with recognized standards, and provide effective protection,
(b) not in itself create a hazard to the wearer,
(c) be compatible, so that one item of personal protective equipment does not make another item ineffective, and
(d) be maintained in good working order and in a sanitary condition.
(2) If the use of personal protective equipment creates hazards equal to or greater than those its use is intended to prevent, alternative personal
protective equipment must be used or other appropriate measures must be taken.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

8.4 Workplace evaluation

If an evaluation of workplace conditions is required to determine appropriate personal protective equipment, the evaluation, where practicable,
must be done in consultation with the joint committee or the worker health and safety representative, as applicable, and with the worker who will
use the equipment.

8.5 Program

If personal protective equipment is required to protect against a chemical exposure or an oxygen deficient atmosphere the employer must
implement an effective protective equipment program at the workplace which includes
(a) a statement of purpose and responsibilities,
(b) written procedures for selection, use, inspection, cleaning, maintenance and storage of protective equipment, when required,
(c) instruction and training in the correct use and maintenance of the equipment,
(d) for respirators, medical assessment of respirator wearers, when required,
(e) documentation when required, and
(f) program review.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]

8.6 Annual review

(1) The personal protective equipment program must be reviewed annually by the employer in consultation with the joint committee or the worker
health and safety representative, as applicable.
(2) The annual review must
(a) assess exposure control measures to ensure their continued effectiveness,
(b) determine the need for further control,
(c) ensure the adequacy of instruction, and
(d) for respirators, assess the adequacy of exposure monitoring data and assess the need for further monitoring, and ensure the adequacy of the fit
test program.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]

8.7 Instruction

The employer must ensure that a worker who wears personal protective equipment is adequately instructed in the correct use, limitations and
assigned maintenance duties for the equipment to be used.

8.8 Supervisor's responsibilities

The supervisor must ensure that appropriate personal protective equipment is

(a) available to workers,
(b) properly worn when required, and
(c) properly cleaned, inspected, maintained and stored.

8.9 Worker's responsibilities

(1) A worker who is required to use personal protective equipment must

(a) use the equipment in accordance with training and instruction,
(b) inspect the equipment before use,
(c) refrain from wearing protective equipment outside of the work area where it is required if to do so would constitute a hazard, and
(d) report any equipment malfunction to the supervisor or employer.
(2) A worker who is assigned responsibility for cleaning, maintaining or storing personal protective equipment must do so in accordance with
training and instruction provided.

8.10 Personal clothing and accessories

(1) The personal clothing of a worker must be of a type and in a condition which will not expose the worker to any unnecessary or avoidable
hazards.
(2) If there is a danger of contact with moving parts of machinery or with electrically energized equipment, or if the work process presents similar
hazards
(a) the clothing of the worker must fit closely about the body,
(b) dangling neckwear, bracelets, wristwatches, rings or similar articles must not be worn, except for medical alert bracelets which may be worn
with transparent bands that hold the bracelets snugly to the skin, and
(c) cranial and facial hair must be confined, or worn at a length which will prevent it from being snagged or caught in the work process.
Back to Top

Safety Headgear

8.11 General requirement

(1) Before a worker starts a work assignment in a work area where there is a risk of head injury to the worker from falling, flying or thrown
objects, or other harmful contacts, the employer must take measures to
(a) eliminate the risk, or
(b) if it is not practicable to eliminate the risk, minimize the risk to the lowest level practicable by applying the following control measures in order
of priority:
(i) engineering controls;
(ii) administrative controls;
(iii) requiring the worker to wear safety headgear.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 139/2021, effective September 1, 2021.]
(2) Safety headgear must meet the requirements of one of the following standards
(a) CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.1-05 or CAN/CSA-Z94.1-15, Industrial protective headwear – Performance, selection, care, and use;
(b) ANSI Standard ANSI/ISEA Z89.1-2009 or ANSI/ISEA Z89.1-2014, American National Standard for Industrial Head Protection.
(3) If a worker may be exposed to an electrical hazard the safety headgear must have an appropriate non-conductive rating.
(4) Chin straps or other effective means of retention must be used on safety headgear when workers are climbing or working from a height
exceeding 3 m (10 ft), or are exposed to high winds or other conditions that may cause loss of the headgear.
(5) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 381/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
(6) Damaged headgear or headgear with missing, mismatched, or modified components must be removed from service.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]

8.12 Use with all-terrain vehicles, snowmobiles, motorcycles

(1) Operators and passengers on all-terrain vehicles, snowmobiles and motorcycles must wear headgear meeting the requirements of
(a) CSA Standard CAN3-D230-M85, Protective Headgear in Motor Vehicle Applications,
(b) British Safety Institution Standard BS5361.1976, Specification: Protective Helmets for Vehicle Users, (as amended to 1981),
(c) Snell Memorial Foundation 1995 Standard for Protective Headgear for Use with Motorcycles and Other Motorized Vehicles, or
(d) US Federal Standard for Motorcycle Helmets (Title 49 - Transportation - Part 571.218).
(e) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
(2) Headgear in good condition meeting earlier editions of a standard listed in subsection (1) may remain in service if purchased before April 15,
1998.
(3) When an all-terrain vehicle is operated within a specific location, with no rollover hazard area and no area containing a significant hazard that
may cause loss of control and at a speed not exceeding 20 km/h (13 mph), safety headgear meeting the requirements of section 8.13 may be used
in place of headgear specified in subsection 8.12(1).
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 139/2021, effective September 1, 2021.]

8.13 Use with bicycles and skates

(1) A worker riding a bicycle or using in-line skates or similar means of transport must wear headgear meeting the requirements of
(a) CSA Standard CAN/CSA-D113.2-M89, Cycling Helmets,
(b) Snell Memorial Foundation 1994 Standard for Protective Headgear for Use in Non-Motorized Sports, or
(c) Snell Memorial Foundation 1995 Standard for Protective Headgear for Use in Bicycling.
(d) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
(2) If a bicycle or similar conveyance is operated at speeds not exceeding 20 km/h (13 mph) within a specific location, safety headgear meeting the
requirements of section 8.11 is acceptable when worn with a chin strap.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
Eye and Face Protection

8.14 Eye protection

(1) In this section and sections 8.15 to 8.17, "eye protection" means personal protective equipment for the eyes.
(2) A worker must wear eye protection if the worker is in an area of the workplace where one or more hazards involving the eyes exist, or are
created, due to conditions or activities conducted in the area.
(3) Eye protection that is required to be worn under subsection (2), or under any other provision of this Regulation, must meet all of the following
requirements:
(a) the eye protection must fit the worker properly;
(b) the eye protection must provide the worker with appropriate protection from the eye hazards referred to in subsection (2);
(c) the eye protection must meet the requirements set out in one of the following standards:
(i) CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.3-07 or Z94.3-15, Eye and Face Protectors;
(ii) ANSI Standard ANSI/ISEA Z87.1-2015, Occupational and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices.
(4) To determine whether eye protection provides a worker with appropriate protection from the eye hazards referred to in subsection (2), all
factors relevant to the nature and extent of each of those eye hazards must be considered, including, without limitation, the following:
(a) the form of the hazard;
(b) the manner in which the hazard may be transmitted;
(c) the injury or occupational disease that could occur as a result of the hazard.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]
8.15 Glass lenses

(1) Except as permitted by subsection (2), eyeglasses or eye protection with glass lenses must not be worn by a worker in an area of the
workplace where there is a risk, due to conditions in the area or the activities conducted in it, that something could damage the glass lenses and
cause an injury to the eye.
(2) Eyeglasses or eye protection with glass lenses may be worn by a worker in an area of the workplace described in subsection (1) if, covering
the glass lenses, the worker wears eye protection that meets one of the following:
(a) the impact resistance requirements set out in clause 6.1 of a standard referred to in section 8.14(3)(c)(i);
(b) the impact rated requirements set out in section 6 of the standard referred to in section 8.14(3)(c)(ii).
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]

8.16 Side protection

(1) Eye protection must have side protection if an eye hazard referred to in section 8.14(2) could reach a worker's eye through an unprotected
area beside the eye.
(2) Despite section 8.14(3)(c)(i), removable side shields may be used for eye protection under subsection (1).
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]

8.17 Face protection

(1) In this section, "face protection" means personal protective equipment for the face.
(2) A worker must wear face protection covering the worker's eye protection if the worker is in an area of the workplace where one or more
hazards involving the face exist, or are created, due to conditions in the area or the activities conducted in it.
(3) Face protection that is required to be worn under subsection (2), or under any other provision of this Regulation, must meet all of the following
requirements:
(a) the face protection must fit the worker properly;
(b) the face protection must provide the worker with appropriate protection from the face hazards referred to in subsection (2);
(c) the face protection must meet the requirements set out in one of the standards referred to in section 8.14(3)(c).
(4) To determine whether face protection provides a worker with appropriate protection from the face hazards referred to in subsection (2), all
factors relevant to the nature and extent of each of those face hazards must be considered, including, without limitation, the factors described in
section 8.14(4)(a), (b) and (c).
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]

8.18 Contact lenses

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]

Limb and Body Protection

8.19 General requirement

(1) The employer must provide appropriate skin, hand, foot or body protection if a worker is exposed to a substance or condition which is likely
to puncture, abrade or otherwise adversely affect the skin, or be absorbed through it.
(2) If there is a danger of injury, contamination or infection to a worker's hands, arms, legs, or torso, the worker must wear properly fitting
protective equipment appropriate to the work being done and the hazards involved.

8.20 Cleaning or replacement

If a glove, apron, or other protective equipment used to protect the skin against contact with a hazardous substance is rendered ineffective due to
contamination with the substance, the protective equipment must be promptly replaced with clean or decontaminated equipment to maintain the
required protection.

8.21 Leg protection

(1) Leg protective devices must be worn by a worker operating a chain saw.
(2) Leg protective devices referred to in subsection (1) must meet or exceed
(a) the general requirements of section 4 of the WorkSafeBC Standard - Leg Protective Devices, as set out in Schedule 8-A of this Part, and
(b) the performance requirements of one of the following standards, using the cut-resistance testing protocol set out in that standard except as
varied in subparagraph (ii):
(i) WorkSafeBC Standard - Leg Protective Devices, as set out in section 5 of Schedule 8-A of this Part, applying a threshold chain speed of
18.3 metres per second or 3 600 feet per minute;
(ii) ASTM F 1414-04 Standard Test Method for Measurement of Cut Resistance to Chain Saw in Lower Body (Legs) Protective Clothing,
but applying a threshold chain speed of 16.8 metres per second or 3 300 feet per minute;
(iii) ISO 11393-2 Protective clothing for users of hand-held chain-saws - Part 2: Test methods and performance requirements for leg
protectors, applying a Class 2 threshold chain speed of 24 metres per second or 4 724 feet per minute;
(iv) BS EN 381-5:1995 Protective clothing for users of hand-held chain saws - Part 5: Requirements for leg protectors, applying a Class 2
threshold chain speed of 24 metres per second or 4 724 feet per minute.
(3) A leg protective device worn by a worker must have a label that
(a) is permanently affixed,
(b) uses lettering that is at least 6 mm (1/4 in) high, and
(c) clearly indicates all of the following information:
(i) the name or trademark of the manufacturer;
(ii) the standard met or exceeded under subsection (2) (a);
(iii) the standard met or exceeded under subsection (2) (b);
(iv) the year of manufacture of the device unless otherwise marked on the device.
(4) The requirement to wear leg protective devices does not apply to a firefighter using a chain saw at the scene of a structural fire.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]

SCHEDULE 8-A

(section 8.21 [leg protection])

WORKSAFEBC STANDARD — LEG PROTECTIVE DEVICES

1 Scope
This standard provides specifications and performance criteria for leg protection for a worker using a chain saw.
2 Definition
In this standard, "leg protection" or "leg protective device" means personal protective equipment worn for protection from leg injury due to
contact with a moving saw chain.
3 Types of leg protection
Leg protection must be of one of the following types:
(a) pant type: the protective pad is secured to and held in position by the trousers;
(b) apron type: the protective pad is secured to an apron style garment normally worn outside the trousers and secured around the worker's legs
and waist;
(c) chap type: the protective pad is secured to a chap style garment normally worn outside the trousers and secured around the worker's legs.
4 General requirements
(1) Leg protection must be of materials suitable for the intended application.
(2) Leg protection
(a) must not unduly restrict the manoeuvrability of the worker, and
(b) must not shrink more than 10% when cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions during its service life.
(3) The protective pad of leg protection must be at least 711 mm (28 in) long and of a width covering 180° in the front of both legs from inseam to
outseam plus 100 mm (4 in) on the left side of both legs.
(4) If the length requirement in subsection (3) results in a tripping hazard, the protective pad may be shorter, as long as it meets the requirements
set out in subsection (5).
(5) When leg protection is worn by a worker, the protective pad
(a) must extend at minimum from the crotch to within 75 mm (3 in) of the ankle, and
(b) must be effectively secured in this position.
(6) Effective measures must be taken to prevent unravelling or fraying of material along any edges or other area of leg protection where unravelling
or fraying is likely to occur.
(7) A heat seal used to control unravelling or fraying of synthetic fibres of leg protection
(a) must be effective over the life of the product, and
(b) if subject to cracking, must be covered to prevent abrasion of the worker's skin.
(8) Instructions on the proper care, maintenance and repair of leg protection must be provided by the manufacturer.
(9) Leg protection showing damage that will affect its performance must be removed from service.
5 Cut-resistance testing protocol and performance requirements
(1) Leg protection must meet or exceed the "threshold chain speed test" in which the protective pad must be able to consistently resist being cut-
through by a running saw chain operating at a speed of 1 098 m/min (3 600 ft/min) or more for at least 1.01 seconds.
(2) Threshold chain speed tests must be conducted
(a) on leg protection samples assembled in the manner in which the leg protection will be produced for distribution, and
(b) using the test apparatus described in subsection (3) in accordance with the procedures and methodology described in this section.
(3) The test apparatus to be used in conducting a threshold chain speed test must include a simulated "leg", chain saw and instruments as follows:
(a) a simulated "leg" (see Figure 1) that is
(i) made of wood approximately 150 mm (6 in) in diameter with a 20 mm (¾ in) layer of resilient covering (Ensolite or similar material) attached
to simulate the resilience of flesh,
(ii) designed to allow the leg protection to be mounted and tested similar to the configuration the leg protection will take when worn by a worker
while the worker's leg is extended, and
(iii) mounted to allow rotation about the longitudinal axis of up to 75 mm (3 in) at the outer circumference, against an applied torque of at least 1.7
Newton-metres (15 inch pounds) and which torque may increase as the leg rotates;
(b) a chain saw, with Oregon 72 LP chisel chain and capable of a chain speed of at least 1 220 m/min (4 000 ft/min), that must pivot in a vertical
plane to contact the "leg" (see Figure 1) with a downward force of 50 ± 1 Newtons (11 ± 0.1 lb);
(c) instruments to measure and record chain speed and cut-through time.
(4) The test procedure and methodology are as follows:
(a) start the saw and set the chain speed to the constant level selected for the test cut;
(b) allow the bottom of the running saw chain to freefall 6 mm (¼ in) onto the test specimen mounted on the "leg";
(c) record the time from contact of the saw chain with the test specimen to the nearest 0.01 second;
(d) record the chain speed during each test;
(e) repeat the tests on the same material until the maximum chain speed (± 15 m/min or ± 50 ft/min) at which cut-through does not occur for at
least 1.01 seconds or more is determined;
(f) maintain the chain saw in good repair throughout the testing and keep the saw cutters sharp in accordance with the saw chain manufacturer's
recommendations.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]
Back to Top

Footwear

8.22 General requirement

(1) A worker's footwear must be of a design, construction, and material appropriate to the protection required and that allows the worker to safely
perform the worker's work.
(2) To determine appropriate footwear under subsection (1), the following factors must be considered:
(a) slipping;
(b) tripping;
(c) uneven terrain;
(d) abrasion;
(e) ankle protection and foot support;
(f) potential for musculoskeletal injury;
(g) crushing potential;
(h) temperature extremes;
(i) corrosive substances;
(j) puncture hazards;
(k) electrical shock;
(l) any other recognizable hazard.
(2.1) An employer must not require a worker to wear footwear that does not comply with subsection (1).
(3) If a determination has been made that safety protective footwear is required to have toe protection, metatarsal protection, puncture resistant
soles, dielectric protection or any combination of these, the footwear must meet the requirements of
(a) CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z195-M92, Protective Footwear,
(b) ANSI Standard Z41-1991, American National Standard for Personal Protection - Protective Footwear,
(c) British Safety Institution Standard BS EN 345:1993 Specification for Safety Footwear for Professional Use, or
(d) British Safety Institution Standard BS EN 346:1993 Specification for Protective Footwear for Professional Use.
(e) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
(4) A worker must wear the appropriate footwear and ensure that it is in a condition to provide the required protection.
(5) If it is not practicable for workers in the performing arts to wear safety footwear meeting the requirements of subsection (3) other effective
measures must be taken for protection from injury.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 140/2017, effective April 7, 2017.]

8.23 Slippery surfaces

(1) If a workplace has slippery surfaces, appropriate non-slip footwear must be worn.
(2) Caulked or other equally effective footwear must be worn by workers who are required to walk on logs, poles, pilings or other round timbers.
High Visibility and Distinguishing Apparel

8.24 High visibility apparel

(1) A worker who is exposed to vehicles or mobile equipment travelling at speeds in excess of 30 km/h must wear high visibility apparel that meets
the requirements for Class 2 or Class 3 apparel in CSA Standard Z96-15, High-Visibility Safety Apparel.
(2) A worker who is exposed to vehicles or mobile equipment travelling at speeds equal to or less than 30 km/h must wear high visibility apparel
that meets the requirements for Class 1, Class 2 or Class 3 apparel in CSA Standard Z96-15, High-Visibility Safety Apparel.
(3) Subsections (1) and (2) do not apply to the following:
(a) a firefighter who is wearing a protective coat that meets the requirements of the 2007, 2013 or 2018 edition of NFPA 1971, Standard on
Protective Ensembles for Structural Fire Fighting and Proximity Fire Fighting;
(b) the following persons who are wearing high visibility apparel that meets the requirements for Class 2 apparel in CSA Standard Z96-15, High-
Visibility Safety Apparel as modified in accordance with subsection (4):
(i) a person who is employed by British Columbia Emergency Health Services as an emergency medical assistant or in any other capacity;
(ii) a municipal constable as defined in the Police Act;
(iii) a person who is employed in the Commercial Vehicle Safety and Enforcement branch of the Ministry of Transportation and Infrastructure;
(c) a traffic control person referred to in section 18.9 of this regulation.
(4) For the purposes of subsection (3)(b), the requirements for Class 2 apparel are modified as follows:
(a) retroreflective or combined-performance stripes and bands must have
(i) a minimum width of 25 mm,
(ii) an entirely retroreflective area with a minimum width of 25 mm,

(iii) a minimum coefficient of retroreflection of 240 cd/(lx·m2) measured at an observation angle of 0.2 degrees and an entrance angle of -4 degrees
in accordance with CSA Standard Z96-15, High-Visibility Safety Apparel, and

(iv) a minimum area of 0.05 m2 on the front of the apparel and 0.05 m2 on the back of the apparel;
(b) retroreflective or combined-performance stripes and bands do not have to form an "X" on the back of the apparel;
(c) the requirements relating to identification patches and lettering do not apply;
(d) background material, excluding identification patches, lettering and retroreflective or combined-performance stripes and bands, must have a
minimum area of 0.13 m2 on the front of the apparel and 0.13 m2 on the back of the apparel.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 193/2021, effective September 1, 2021.]

8.25 Distinguishing apparel

If distinguishing apparel is required in another Part of this Regulation for the purpose of identifying a worker's location or well-being, the apparel
must be of a colour which contrasts with the environment and must have at least 775 sq cm (120 sq in) of fluorescent trim for daytime use and
retroreflective trim for nighttime use, on both the front and back.
Buoyancy Equipment

8.26 When required

(1) A worker who is employed under conditions which involve a risk of drowning must wear a personal flotation device (PFD) or lifejacket with
sufficient buoyancy to keep the worker's head above water.
(2) Subsection (1) does not apply if other acceptable safety measures are in place which will protect workers from the risk of drowning, or the
water is too shallow to allow the lifejacket or PFD to function effectively.
(3) A personal flotation device need not be worn when a personal fall protection system, guardrail or safety net is being used in accordance with
the relevant requirements in Part 11 (Fall Protection) to prevent a fall into the water.

8.27 Compliance with standards

Buoyancy equipment must be labelled and otherwise meet the requirements of

(a) CGSB Standard CAN/CGSB-65.7-M88, Lifejackets, Inherently Buoyant Type with a minimum buoyancy of 93 N (21 lbs),
(b) CGSB Standard CAN/CGSB-65.11-M88, Personal Flotation Devices with a minimum buoyancy of 69 N (15.5 lbs),
(c) CGSB Standard 65-GP-14M, Lifejackets, Inherently Buoyant, Standard Type with a minimum buoyancy of 125 N (28 lbs), or
(d) British Safety Standard BS EN 396-1994, Lifejackets and Personal Buoyancy Aids - Lifejacket 150 N, automatically inflatable units with
a minimum buoyancy of 150 N (34 lbs).
(e) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

8.28 Working alone

If a worker working alone is exposed to risk of drowning, the worker must wear a lifejacket meeting the requirements of section 8.27(a), (c) or
(d).
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

8.29 Record of inspection and maintenance

If workers use inflatable personal flotation devices (PFDs) or automatically inflatable lifejackets, the employer must keep a record of all inspections
made and maintenance performed on those PFDs or automatically inflatable lifejackets.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]

8.30 Retroreflective material

Personal flotation devices and lifejackets must have at least 200 sq cm (32 sq in) of white or silver retroreflective material fitted on surfaces that are
normally above the water surface.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
Flame Resistant Clothing

8.31 When required

Workers must wear flame resistant clothing appropriate to the risk if working in areas where they may be exposed to flash fires, molten metal,
welding and burning or similar hot work hazards.
Back to Top

Respirators

8.32 When respirator required

If a worker is or might be exposed in a workplace to an air contaminant that exceeds

(a) an 8-hour TWA limit, ceiling limit or short-term exposure limit set by ACGIH for the air contaminant,
(b) a limit that is otherwise determined by the Board under section 5.48 for the air contaminant, or
(c) a limit set by section 5.49 for the air contaminant,
the employer must provide an appropriate respirator and ensure that the worker uses an appropriate respirator in accordance with section 8.34.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]

8.33 Selection

(1) The employer, in consultation with the worker and the occupational health and safety committee, if any, or the worker health and safety
representative, if any, must select an appropriate respirator in accordance with CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-93, Selection, Use, and Care
of Respirators.
(2) Only a respirator which meets the requirements of a standard acceptable to the Board may be used for protection against airborne
contaminants in the workplace.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]

8.34 Maximum use concentration

(1) In subsection (2):

"established 8-hour TWA limit" means the 8-hour TWA limit set by the Board for an air contaminant, or if the Board has not set an 8-hour
TWA limit for an air contaminant, the TWA limit set by ACGIH for the air contaminant;
"established ceiling limit" means a ceiling limit set by the Board for an air contaminant, or if the Board has not set a ceiling limit for an air
contaminant, the ceiling limit set by ACGIH for the air contaminant;
"established short-term exposure limit" means the short-term exposure limit set by the Board for an air contaminant, or if the Board has not set
a short-term exposure limit for an air contaminant, the short-term exposure limit set by ACGIH for the air contaminant.
(2) In subsection (3), "maximum use concentration" means the concentration of an air contaminant calculated in one of the following ways:
(a) if an established 8-hour TWA limit applies to the air contaminant to which a worker is or might be exposed, by multiplying
(i) the established 8-hour TWA limit for the air contaminant, and
(ii) the protection factor set out in Table 8-1 that applies to the respirator type that the worker is using;
(b) if there is no established 8-hour TWA limit that applies to the air contaminant to which a worker is or might be exposed, by multiplying
(i) the established short-term exposure limit for that air contaminant, and
(ii) the protection factor set out in Table 8-1 that applies to the respirator type that the worker is using;
(c) if there is no established 8-hour TWA limit or short-term exposure limit that applies to the air contaminant to which a worker is or might be
exposed, by multiplying
(i) the established ceiling limit for that air contaminant, and
(ii) the protection factor set out in Table 8-1 that applies to the respirator type that the worker is using.
(3) The employer must ensure that a worker does not use a respirator for protection against a concentration of an air contaminant in the workplace
that is greater than the maximum use concentration.
(4) The protection factor of 1 000 set out in Table 8-1: Respirator protection factors for a hood or helmet facepiece, powered (PAPR), and
equipped with a HEPA filter or a sorbent cartridge or canister or both a HEPA filter and a sorbent cartridge or canister applies only if an employer
who uses or wishes to use that respirator type has evidence from the manufacturer that demonstrates that
(a) the manufacturer has tested that type of respirator, and
(b) those tests demonstrate that a respirator of that type has a protection factor of at least 1 000.
(5) The protection factor of 25 set out in Table 8-1: Respirator protection factors for a hood or helmet facepiece, powered (PAPR), and equipped
with a HEPA filter or a sorbent cartridge or canister or both a HEPA filter and a sorbent cartridge or canister applies if the conditions set out in
subsection (4) are not met.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]

Table 8-1: Respirator protection factors

Respirator type Protection Factor

Air purifying
Half facepiece, non-powered 10
Full facepiece, non-powered 50
Full facepiece, powered (PAPR), equipped with HEPA filters for exposure to asbestos 100
Full facepiece, powered (PAPR), equipped with HEPA filters and/or sorbent cartridge or canister for exposure to 1 000
contaminants other than asbestos
Loose-fitting facepiece, powered (PAPR) 25
Hood or helmet facepiece, powered (PAPR), and equipped with a HEPA filter or a sorbent cartridge or canister 25
or both a HEPA filter and a sorbent cartridge or canister, if section 8.34 (5) applies
Hood or helmet facepiece, powered (PAPR), and equipped with a HEPA filter or a sorbent cartridge or canister 1 000
or both a HEPA filter and a sorbent cartridge or canister, if the conditions set out in section 8.34 (4) are met
Air supplying
Airline - demand (negative pressure)
Half facepiece 10
Full facepiece 50
Airline - continuous flow
Loose-fitting facepiece/hoods 25
Half facepiece 50
Full facepiece 1 000
Helmet/hood 1 000
Airline - pressure demand (positive pressure)
Half facepiece 50
Full facepiece 1 000
Full facepiece, with egress bottle 10 000
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA)
Demand (negative pressure) 50
Pressure demand (positive pressure) 10 000
Other factors such as warning properties, IDLH levels, and cartridge/canister limitations must also be taken into account when determining the
maximum use concentration. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions and standards acceptable to the Board for further information.

[Amended by B.C. Reg. 20/2006, effective May 17, 2006.]

[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]

8.35 IDLH or oxygen deficient atmosphere

(1) If a worker is required to enter or work in an IDLH or oxygen deficient atmosphere the worker must
(a) wear a full facepiece positive pressure respirator which is either an SCBA, or an airline respirator with an auxiliary self- contained air cylinder
of sufficient capacity to permit the worker to escape unassisted from the contaminated area if the air supply fails, and
(b) be attended by at least one other worker stationed at or near the entrance to the contaminated area who is similarly equipped and capable of
effecting rescue.
(2) Subsection (1)(a) applies if there is a significant risk of accidental release into a worker's breathing zone of quantities of an air contaminant
sufficient to produce an IDLH atmosphere.

8.36 Emergency escape respirators

(1) If the nature or quantity of an air contaminant and the nature of the work area could prevent a worker escaping from a contaminated area
without assistance, the worker must carry an emergency escape respirator.
(2) The emergency escape respirator must be
(a) carried on the worker's person or be within arm's reach at all times, and
(b) sufficient to permit the worker to leave the contaminated area without assistance.

8.37 Respirable air quality

(1) Compressed breathing air supplied for equipment such as an SCBA and a supplied air respirator must be tested at least annually to ensure that
the air being supplied meets the requirements of CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z180.1-00, Compressed Breathing Air and Systems.
(2) If an SCBA cylinder has not been used for a period in excess of one year, air in the cylinder must be slowly depressurized to atmosphere and
refilled with compressed breathing air that meets the requirements of CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z180.1-00, Compressed Breathing Air and
Systems.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 20/2006, effective May 17, 2006.]

8.38 Corrective eyewear

(1) If a worker who wears prescription eyeglasses is required to wear a full facepiece respirator, the employer must assess the work to be
performed, and provide appropriate specialty corrective eyewear if necessary to ensure that the work can be performed safely.
(2) The employer may permit the use of contact lenses by a worker who is required to wear a full facepiece respirator if their use is not likely to
adversely affect the health or safety of the worker.

8.39 Face seal

(1) Except for specialty eyewear approved by the Board for use with positive pressure full facepiece respirators, nothing is permitted which
intrudes between the facepiece and the face, or which interferes with the face seal of the facepiece.
(2) A worker required to wear a respirator which requires an effective seal with the face for proper functioning must be clean shaven where the
respirator seals with the face.

8.40 Fit tests

(1) A respirator which requires an effective seal with the face for proper functioning must not be issued to a worker unless a fit test demonstrates
that the facepiece forms an effective seal with the wearer's face.
(2) Fit tests must be performed in accordance with procedures in CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-02, Selection, Use, and Care of
Respirators.
(2.1) A fit test must be carried out
(a) before initial use of a respirator,
(b) at least once a year,
(c) whenever there is a change in respirator facepiece, including the brand, model, and size, and
(d) whenever changes to the user's physical condition could affect the respirator fit.
(3) Other personal protective equipment that is to be worn at the same time as a respirator and which could interfere with the respirator fit must be
worn during a fit test.
(4) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 20/2006, effective May 17, 2006.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 20/2006, effective May 17, 2006.]

8.41 User seal check

(1) Before each use of a respirator which requires an effective seal with the face for proper functioning, a worker must perform a positive or
negative pressure user seal check in accordance with CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-02, Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators.
(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to the emergency use of an escape respirator.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 20/2006, effective May 17, 2006.]

8.42 Medical assessment

If a worker is required to use a respirator and there is doubt about the worker's ability to use a respirator for medical reasons, the worker must be
examined by a physician, and the examining physician must be provided with sufficient information to allow the physician to advise the employer of
the ability of the worker to wear a respirator.

8.43 Optional use

In circumstances where section 8.32 does not apply, and either an employer chooses to provide a respirator to a worker or the worker chooses to
use a personal respirator, then the requirements of sections 8.3, 8.7 and 8.33(2) apply.

8.44 Records

The employer must maintain a record of

(a) fit test results and worker instruction,
(b) maintenance for air supplying respirators, powered air purifying respirators, and for sorbent cartridges and canisters, and
(c) maintenance and repairs for each self-contained breathing apparatus and all air cylinders in accordance with the requirements of CSA Standard
CAN/CSA-Z94.4-02, Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 20/2006, effective May 17, 2006.]

8.45 Maintenance and inspections

(1) Inspection of compressed air cylinders must be done in accordance with CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-02, Selection, Use, and Care of
Respirators.
(2) Self-contained breathing apparatus, including regulators, must be serviced and repaired by qualified persons.
(3) Compressed air cylinders must be hydrostatically tested in accordance with CSA Standard CAN/CSA-B339-96, Cylinders, Spheres, and
Tubes for the Transportation of Dangerous Goods.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 20/2006, effective May 17, 2006.]
Contents
11.1 Definitions
11.2 Obligation to use fall protection
11.3 Fall protection plan
11.4 Selection of harness or belt
11.5 Equipment standards
11.6 Anchors
11.7 Temporary horizontal lifelines
11.8 Certification by engineer
11.9 Inspection and maintenance
11.10 Removal from service
Fall Protection

11.1 Definitions

In this Part
"anchor" means a component or subsystem of a fall protection system used to connect the other parts of a fall protection system to an anchorage,
and includes an anchorage connector;
"anchorage" means a secure connection point for a fall protection system;
"fall arrest system" means a system that will stop a worker's fall before the worker hits the surface below;
"fall protection system" means
(a) a fall restraint system,
(b) a fall arrest system, or
(c) work procedures that are acceptable to the Board and minimize the risk of injury to a worker from a fall;
"fall restraint system" means a system to prevent a worker from falling from a work position, or from travelling to an unguarded edge from which
the worker could fall;
"full body harness" means a body support device consisting of connected straps designed to distribute the force resulting from a fall over at least
the thigh, shoulders and pelvis, with provision for attaching a lanyard, lifeline or other components;
"horizontal lifeline system" means a system composed of a synthetic or wire rope, installed horizontally between 2 anchors, to which a worker
attaches a personal fall protection system;
"lanyard" means a flexible line of webbing, or synthetic or wire rope, that is used to secure a safety belt or full body harness to a lifeline or
anchor;
"lifeline" means a synthetic or wire rope, rigged from one or more anchors, to which a worker's lanyard or other part of a personal fall protection
system is attached;
"personal fall protection system" means a worker’s fall restraint system or fall arrest system composed of
(a) a safety belt or full body harness, and
(b) a lanyard, lifeline and any other connecting equipment individual to the worker
that is used to secure the worker to an anchor, an anchorage or a horizontal lifeline system;
"safety belt" means a body support device consisting of a strap with a means for securing it about the waist and attaching it to other components;
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 420/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 404/2012, effective April 1, 2013.]

11.2 Obligation to use fall protection

(1) Unless elsewhere provided for in this Regulation, an employer must ensure that a fall protection system is used when work is being done at a
place
(a) from which a fall of 3 m (10 ft) or more may occur, or
(b) where a fall from a height of less than 3 m involves a risk of injury greater than the risk of injury from the impact on a flat surface.
(2) The employer must ensure that guardrails meeting the requirements of Part 4 (General Conditions) or other similar means of fall restraint are
used when practicable.
(3) If subsection (2) is not practicable, the employer must ensure that another fall restraint system is used.
(4) If subsection (3) is not practicable, the employer must ensure that one of the following is used:
(a) a fall arrest system;
(b) a rope access system that meets the requirements of Part 34.
(5) If subsection (4) is not practicable, or will result in a hazard greater than if a fall arrest system or a rope access system was not used, the
employer must ensure that work procedures are followed that are acceptable to the Board and minimize the risk of injury to a worker from a fall.
(6) Before a worker is allowed into an area where a risk of falling exists, the employer must ensure that the worker is instructed in the fall
protection system for the area and the procedures to be followed.
(7) A worker must use the fall protection system provided by the employer.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 420/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 199/2014, effective February 1, 2015.]

11.3 Fall protection plan

(1) The employer must have a written fall protection plan for a workplace if
(a) work is being done at a location where workers are not protected by permanent guardrails, and from which a fall of 7.5 m (25 ft) or more may
occur, or
(b) section 11.2(5) applies.
(c) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 420/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
(2) The fall protection plan must be available at the workplace before work with a risk of falling begins.
(3) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 420/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 420/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

11.4 Selection of harness or belt

(1) A worker must wear a full body harness or other harness acceptable to the Board when using a personal fall protection system for fall arrest.
(2) A worker must wear a safety belt, a full body harness or other harness acceptable to the Board when using a personal fall protection system
for fall restraint.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 420/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

11.5 Equipment standards

Equipment used for a fall protection system must

(a) consist of compatible and suitable components,
(b) be sufficient to support the fall restraint or arrest forces, and
(c) meet, and be used in accordance with, an applicable CSA or ANSI standard in effect when the equipment was manufactured, subject to any
modification or upgrading considered necessary by the Board.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 420/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

11.6 Anchors

(1) In a temporary fall restraint system, an anchor for a personal fall protection system must have an ultimate load capacity in any direction in which
a load may be applied of at least
(a) 3.5 kN (800 lbs), or
(b) four times the weight of the worker to be connected to the system.
(2) Each personal fall protection system that is connected to an anchor must be secured to an independent attachment point.
(3) In a temporary fall arrest system, an anchor for a personal fall protection system must have an ultimate load capacity in any direction required
to resist a fall of at least
(a) 22 kN (5 000 lbs), or
(b) two times the maximum arrest force.
(4) A permanent anchor for a personal fall protection system must have an ultimate load capacity in any direction required to resist a fall of at least
22 kN (5 000 lbs).
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 420/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 19/2006, effective May 17, 2006.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 404/2012, effective April 1, 2013.]

11.7 Temporary horizontal lifelines

A temporary horizontal lifeline system may be used if the system is

(a) manufactured for commercial distribution and installed and used in accordance with the written instructions from the manufacturer or authorized
agent, and the instructions are readily available in the workplace,
(b) installed and used in accordance with written instructions certified by a professional engineer, and the instructions are readily available in the
workplace, or
(c) designed, installed and used in a manner acceptable to the Board.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 420/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 19/2006, effective May 17, 2006.]

11.8 Certification by engineer

The following types of equipment and systems, and their installation, must be certified by a professional engineer:
(a) permanent anchors,
(b) anchors with multiple attachment points,
(c) permanent horizontal lifeline systems, and
(d) support structures for safety nets.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 420/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

11.9 Inspection and maintenance

Equipment used in a fall protection system must be

(a) inspected by a qualified person before use on each workshift,
(b) kept free from substances and conditions that could contribute to its deterioration, and
(c) maintained in good working order.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 420/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

11.10 Removal from service

(0.1) If, at any time, a permanent anchor does not meet the requirements of section 11.5(c), the anchor must not be used until it has been inspected
and recertified, by a professional engineer, as meeting the requirements of section 11.5(c).
(1) After a fall protection system has arrested the fall of a worker, it must
(a) be removed from service, and
(b) not be returned to service until it has been inspected and recertified as safe for use by the manufacturer or its authorized agent, or by a
professional engineer.
(2) Subject to subsection (3), subsection (1)(b) does not apply to a personal fall protection system designed and intended for reuse by a performer
in the entertainment industry for conducting a planned fall sequence.
(3) The following conditions must be met before a personal fall protection system described in subsection (2) will be exempt from subsection (1)
(b):
(a) the system must be designed and used in accordance with a standard acceptable to the Board;
(b) each use of the system must be carried out in accordance with the plan for the conduct of the fall;
(c) the peak arrest forces generated in the system during each use must be at or below both the planned limits and the maximum forces allowed for
the system;
(d) after each use of the system no part of the system, including the anchorage, may be reused until a qualified person has inspected it and
determined it is in serviceable condition and safe for reuse.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 420/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 404/2012, effective April 1, 2013.]
Contents

TOOLS, MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT DEFINITIONS

12.1 Definitions
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

12.2 Safeguarding requirement

12.3 Standards
12.4 Effectiveness of safeguards
12.5 Fixed guards
12.6 Lubrication
12.7 Opening and reach distance [Repealed]
12.8 Lockout [Repealed]
12.9 Safe operation [Repealed]
12.10 Identifying unsafe equipment
12.11 Operating controls
12.12 Machinery location
12.13 Marking physical hazards
12.14 Identification of piping
12.15 Restraining devices

GUARDING MECHANICAL POWER TRANSMISSION PARTS

12.16 Rotating hazards

12.17 Gears and sprockets
12.17.1 Safeguards for objects or materials
12.18 Reciprocating machinery
12.19 Drive belts
12.20 Reaching up
12.21 Flywheels and pulleys

CONVEYORS

12.22 Standards
12.23 Belt-type conveyors
12.24 Screw-type conveyors
12.25 Feed points
12.26 Lockout [Repealed]
12.27 Falling materials
12.28 Emergency stopping devices

POWER PRESSES, BRAKE PRESSES AND SHEARS

12.29 Standards
12.30 Point of operation safeguarding
12.31 Exception for custom work
12.32 Supervisory control
12.33 Flywheel guarding [Repealed]

FEED-ROLLS AND METAL-FORMING ROLLS

12.34 Feed-rolls
12.35 Guard design
12.36 Metal-forming rolls

MACHINE TOOLS

12.37 Splash guards and shields

12.38 Lathe chucks
12.39 Restriction on hand polishing
12.40 Stock projection
12.41 Shapers/planers
12.42 Carriage travel
12.43 Vertical boring mills

ABRASIVE EQUIPMENT

12.44 Standards
12.45 Protective hood
12.46 Speed of abrasive wheels
12.47 Grinding prohibitions
12.48 Work rests
12.49 Dust control
12.50 Dressing grinding wheels [Repealed]

POWDER ACTUATED TOOLS

12.51 Standards
12.52 Tool selection
12.53 Tool design
12.54 Markings
12.55 Storage
12.56 Tool use
12.57 Limitations on use

WOODWORKING TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

12.58 Hand feeding

12.59 Removing guards
12.60 Kickback fingers, splitters, spreaders, and riving knives
12.61 Radial arm saw travel limits
12.62 Jointers
12.63 Sanding machines
12.64 Tenoning machines
12.65 Hand-held circular saws
12.66 Cutting heads
12.67 Band saws

MOBILE CHIPPERS

12.68 Hand-fed chippers

12.69 Self-feeding chippers
12.70 Driven-feed chippers
12.71 Vertically fed chippers

CHAIN SAWS

12.72 Standards
12.73 Stopping chain movement

AUTOMOTIVE LIFTS AND OTHER VEHICLE SUPPORTS

12.74 Standards
12.75 Assembly and installation
12.76 Operation
12.77 Records
12.78 Inspection and testing
12.79 Rated capacity
12.80 Controls
12.80.1 Vehicle restraint
12.80.2 Swing-arm restraint

MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

12.81 Tumblers
12.82 Pneumatic nailing and stapling tools
12.83 Industrial robots
12.83.1 Chassis dynamometers - motor vehicle testing

DRILLING ROCK OR SIMILAR MATERIALS

12.84 General requirement

12.85 Drilling equipment
12.86 Control location
12.87 Boom hazard
12.88 Drill jumbos
12.89 Drilling procedures
12.90 Rod handling
12.91 Self-propelled rock drills
12.92 Cleaning drilled holes

BREAKING AND MELTING METAL

12.93 Breaking metal

12.94 Inspection of linings
12.95 Preventing eruptions
12.96 Inspection of materials

ABRASIVE BLASTING AND HIGH PRESSURE WASHING

12.97 Definitions
12.98 Risk assessment
12.99 Work procedures outside a cabinet
12.100 Substitution
12.101 Reuse prohibition
12.102 Cleanup
12.103 Engineering controls
12.104 Exhaust ventilation
12.105 Restricted work zones
12.106 Operating controls
12.107 Pressure restriction [Repealed]
12.108 Jetting gun
12.109 Holding work
12.110 Hose restraint
12.111 Personal protective equipment

WELDING, CUTTING AND ALLIED PROCESSES

12.112 Standards
12.113 Standards for completed work [Repealed]
12.114 Ventilation
12.115 Coatings on metals
12.116 Flammable and explosive substances
12.117 Silver solder
12.118 Correct equipment
12.119 Equipment inspection
12.120 Flashback prevention
12.121 Receptacles for stubs
12.122 Radiation protection
12.123 Protective clothing and equipment
12.124 Respiratory protection
12.125 Marking hot work
12.126 Fire extinguishers

PAINTING, COATING AND WORK WITH PLASTICS AND RESINS

12.127 Application
12.128 Substitution
12.129 Restrictions
12.130 Warning signs
12.131 Enclosure
12.132 Air flow
12.133 Control of ignition sources
12.134 Arrester filters
12.135 Respiratory protection
12.136 Disposal of isocyanate containers
12.137 Authorized persons [Repealed]
12.138 Airless spray equipment
12.139 Design for high pressure
12.140 Heating plastics
12.141 Resin foams

LAUNDRY AND DRY CLEANING ACTIVITIES

12.142 Definitions

Dry Cleaning

12.143 Open cleaning prohibited

12.144 Systems and equipment
12.145 Equipment labels
12.146 Solvent handling
12.147 Bulk storage
12.148 Machine ventilation
12.149 General ventilation
12.150 Inspection and repair
12.151 Open flame heaters
12.152 Combustion air supply
12.153 Vents
12.154 Servicing and maintenance
12.155 Emergency ventilation
12.156 Spotting chemicals
12.157 Supplier responsibility
12.158 Operator responsibility

Laundry Equipment

12.159 Flatwork ironers

12.160 Roller-type ironers
12.161 Press-type ironers
12.162 Interlocks
12.163 Centrifugal extractors
12.164 Laundry chutes
12.165 Laundry carts
12.166 Spillage

RAIL CAR MOVEMENT

12.167 Application
12.168 General requirements
12.169 Clearance
12.170 Riding restriction
12.171 Brakes
12.172 Tracks

PRESSURE VESSELS

12.173 Pressure relief device - when required

12.174 Pressure relief device - installation

ROLL-ON/ROLL-OFF CONTAINERS

12.175 Definitions
12.176 Container safety standard
12.177 Protection against specified hazards
12.178 Visual inspection before loading container onto vehicle
12.179 Withdrawal from service
12.180 Inspection following repair
12.181 Periodic inspection
12.182 Records of inspection
12.183 Withdrawal from service following inspection
Tools, Machinery and Equipment Definitions

12.1 Definitions

In this Part
"guard" means a type of safeguard consisting of a physical barrier which prevents a worker from reaching over, under, around or through the
barrier to a moving part or point of operation;
"jumbo" means a mobile platform having one or more levels which provides work areas for persons, machines, tools, drills or other materials;
"point of operation" means the danger area in a machine where a part is being formed or work is being done;
"power transmission part" means any moving part of a machine that transfers power from a power source to a point of operation;
"safeguard" means the use of a guard, a safety device, a shield, an awareness barrier, warning signs, or other appropriate means, either singly or
in combination, to provide effective protection to workers from hazards;
"safety device" means a type of safeguard consisting of an arrangement of operating controls, an active or passive physical restraint, an interlock,
or a presence sensing device which ensures that a worker cannot access or be in a hazardous area while a machine is operating;
"shield" means a type of safeguard consisting of a physical cover or barrier which restricts but does not prevent access to a hazardous moving
part or a point of operation.
Back to Top
General Requirements

12.2 Safeguarding requirement

Unless elsewhere provided for in this Occupational Health and Safety Regulation, the employer must ensure that machinery and equipment is fitted
with adequate safeguards which
(a) protect a worker from contact with hazardous power transmission parts,
(b) ensure that a worker cannot access a hazardous point of operation, and
(c) safely contain any material ejected by the work process which could be hazardous to a worker.

12.3 Standards

The application, design, construction and use of safeguards, including an opening in a guard and the reach distance to a hazardous part, must meet
the requirements of CSA Standard Z432-94, Safeguarding of Machinery.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.4 Effectiveness of safeguards

A safeguard must be capable of effectively performing its intended function.

12.5 Fixed guards

A fixed guard must not be modified to be readily removable without the use of tools.

12.6 Lubrication

A guard must be designed, where practicable, to allow lubrication and routine maintenance without removal of the guard.

12.7 Opening and reach distance

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.8 Lockout

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.9 Safe operation

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.10 Identifying unsafe equipment

An unsafe tool, machine or piece of equipment must be removed from service and identified in a manner which will ensure it is not inadvertently
returned to service until it has been made safe for use.
Note: The procedure for determining whether the tool, machine or piece of equipment is unsafe for use is provided by the requirements on the
correction of unsafe conditions and refusal of unsafe work in Part 3 (Rights and Responsibilities).

12.11 Operating controls

(1) Powered equipment other than portable powered tools or mobile equipment must have
(a) starting and stopping controls located within easy reach of the operator,
(b) controls and switches clearly identified to indicate the functions they serve,
(c) controls positioned, designed or shielded as necessary to prevent inadvertent activation,
(d) if two-hand controls are installed, controls designed to require concurrent use of both hands to operate the equipment, and to require both
controls to be released before another machine cycle can be initiated, and
(e) control systems meeting the requirements of this Regulation.
(2) Portable powered tools and mobile equipment must have operating controls conforming to an appropriate standard acceptable to the Board.
(3) A remote control device that operates mobile equipment must be equipped with a fail safe, or stop, mechanism that becomes operational if the
remote control device fails.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 139/2021, effective September 1, 2021.]

12.12 Machinery location

A machine must be located or safeguarded so that operation of the machine will not endanger workers using normal passage routes about the
workplace or operating an adjacent machine.

12.13 Marking physical hazards

A physical hazard must be marked in a manner that clearly identifies the hazard to the affected workers.
Note: The following standards provide guidance for the effective identification of hazards:
(a) CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z321-96, Signs and Symbols for the Workplace;
(b) ANSI Standard Z535.1-1991, Safety Color Code;
(c) ANSI Standard Z535.2-1991, Environmental and Facility Safety Signs;
(d) ISO Standard 3864:1984, Safety Colours and Safety Signs.

12.14 Identification of piping

(1) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

(2) A piping system containing substances other than hazardous products must be identified in a manner known to the affected workers.
(3) The identification markings on a piping system must be maintained in a legible condition.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 30/2015, effective August 4, 2015.]

12.15 Restraining devices

Effective means of restraint must be used

(a) on a connection of a hose or a pipe if inadvertent disconnection could be dangerous to a worker,
(b) if unplanned movement of an object or component could endanger a worker, or
(c) to secure an object from falling and endangering a worker.
Guarding Mechanical Power Transmission Parts

12.16 Rotating hazards

Rotating parts, such as friction drives, shafts, couplings and collars, set screws and bolts, keys and keyways, and projecting shaft ends, exposed to
contact by workers must be guarded.
Note: If the projection of a shaft is less than half the shaft diameter and is free of snagging hazards, no guard is required.

12.17 Gears and sprockets

(1) Every gear and chain sprocket must be completely enclosed, or if complete enclosure is impracticable, must have band-type guards with
flanges extending below the root of the teeth.
(2) If there is a hazard from rotating spokes, the spokes must be guarded on the sides accessible to workers.

12.17.1 Safeguards for objects or materials

(1) If a log loader or a rail car loader is mounted on rails, tracks or a fixed structure, the loader must not be used by an operator until
(a) a qualified person has completed a written risk assessment of any hazards created by falling, flying or intruding objects or materials that may be
present while the loader is being used, and
(b) suitable protective structures, including cabs, windows, screens, grills, shields, deflectors, guards or structures, have been installed on the
loader that are designed or approved by the manufacturer of the loader or by a professional engineer to
(i) eliminate, or reduce to the greatest extent possible, the risks identified in the risk assessment referred to in paragraph (a), and
(ii) provide an adequate view for the operator to safely use the machine.
(2) A person must not remain in a cab of a loader that is mounted on rails, tracks or a fixed structure while loads are elevated over the cab unless
that cab is protected by an adequate overhead guard.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 139/2021, effective September 1, 2021.]

12.18 Reciprocating machinery

A crank, connecting rod, tail rod, extension piston rod or other reciprocating or oscillating part exposed to contact by workers must be guarded.

12.19 Drive belts

A power transmission belt, rope or chain must be guarded to protect workers who would be endangered in the event of its failure.

12.20 Reaching up

(1) The in-running nip point of a power transmission belt, rope or chain, and any portion of a flywheel or pulley located within 2.5 m (8 ft) above a
floor, walkway or platform must be guarded to prevent contact by workers.
(2) An installation of the type covered by subsection (1) in place before January 1, 1999, which has unguarded parts more than 2.1 m (7 ft) but
less than 2.5 m (8 ft) above the floor, walkway or platform may have those portions remain unguarded unless the work process presents an undue
risk to workers if those portions remain unguarded, or until such time as the installation is substantially overhauled or renovated.

12.21 Flywheels and pulleys

(1) A pit for a flywheel or pulley must have curbs or toeboards around the upper edge of the pit.
(2) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
(3) A flywheel or pulley which is defective or has been exposed to excessive heat must be removed from service and must not be returned to
service until it has been repaired according to the manufacturer's recommendations, or certified safe for use by a professional engineer.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
Conveyors
12.22 Standards

Unless otherwise permitted by this Regulation, a conveyor must meet the requirements of ANSI Standard ANSI/ASME B20.1-1993, Safety
Standards for Conveyors and Related Equipment.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.23 Belt-type conveyors

A belt conveyor must have accessible nip points of spools and pulleys guarded to prevent contact by a worker.

12.24 Screw-type conveyors

(1) The moving parts of a screw-type conveyor must be guarded from contact by a worker.
(2) Each guard on a screw-type conveyor must be secured by fasteners requiring a tool for removal.
(3) The openings in mesh and grid guards must meet the requirements of Appendix A of CSA Standard Z432-94, Safeguarding of Machinery.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.25 Feed points

If the feed point for a conveyor cannot be guarded because of the work process, any workers required to be in the area must have and use
suitable devices and tools which prevent the worker from contacting moving parts of the conveyor system.
Note: Suitable devices include safety belts and lanyards rigged to prevent the worker from contacting moving parts. Suitable tools include
materials-handling tools such as shovels or rakes, except shovels or other tools with "D" handles must not be used.

12.26 Lockout

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.27 Falling materials

A conveyor must have guards or sideboards to prevent material from falling from the conveyor into areas occupied by workers if the falling
material presents a hazard of impact injury or burn.

12.28 Emergency stopping devices

(1) A conveyor must have an emergency stopping system unless worker access to the conveyor is prevented by guarding.
(2) The conveyor emergency stopping system must be designed and installed so that the system will activate as a worker falls onto the conveyor,
or if a fallen worker on the conveyor moves an arm or leg off to one side of the conveyor.
(3) If a conveyor emergency stopping system uses a pull wire, the system must activate by a pull of the wire in any direction, or by a slack cable
condition.
(4) The conveyor emergency stopping system must be designed and installed so that after an emergency stop, manual resetting is required before
the conveyor can be restarted.
(5) A conveyor must not be restarted after an emergency stop until inspection has determined it can is be operated safely.
Power Presses, Brake Presses and Shears

12.29 Standards

Point of operation safeguarding, and the design, construction and reliability of operating controls of a power press, brake press, ironworker or
shear must meet the requirements of the following applicable standard:
(a) CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z142-M90, Code for Punch Press and Brake Press Operation: Health, Safety, and Guarding Requirements;
(b) ANSI Standard B11.4-1993, American National Standard for Machine Tools — Shears — Safety Requirements for Construction,
Care, and Use;
(c) ANSI Standard B11.5-1988 (R1994), American National Standard for Machine Tools — Ironworkers — Safety Requirements for
Construction, Care, and Use.
(d) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.30 Point of operation safeguarding

(1) The point of operation of a power press, brake press or shear must be safeguarded to prevent injury to the operator or any other worker.
(2) A hand feeding or extraction tool must not be used as a substitute for point of operation safeguarding.
(3) A guillotine or alligator shear must have a guard or other device which protects the operator from flying particles or material emanating from the
shears.
(4) The point of operation of a manually powered press, shear or cutter must be effectively guarded.

12.31 Exception for custom work

The safeguarding for the point of operation of a brake press may be removed if custom or different bends are being done with each cycle of the
machine, provided that safe work procedures are followed, and safeguarding is replaced upon completion of such custom work.

12.32 Supervisory control

If a power press or brake press is being used in a production mode the keys for all control selector switches must remain under a supervisor's
control.

12.33 Flywheel guarding

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

Feed-Rolls and Metal-Forming Rolls

12.34 Feed-rolls

Feed-rolls must have a guard or safety device to prevent the operator from contacting any in-running nip points.

12.35 Guard design

A feed-roll guard must be effective for the material thickness being processed, and the clearance between the guard and the material passing
through the feed-rolls must not exceed 6 mm (1/4 in).

12.36 Metal-forming rolls

If the work process on metal-forming rolls precludes the use of guards, an emergency stopping system must be installed across the machine, and
also across the rear (offside) of the machine if a worker is exposed to the hazard on that side, and the emergency stopping system must activate
automatically when contacted.
Back to Top
Machine Tools

12.37 Splash guards and shields

Cutting or cooling fluids, metal chips, swarf or turnings from machine tool work must be contained.

12.38 Lathe chucks

Dogs that extend beyond the circumference of a lathe chuck must be safeguarded from contact by the operator.

12.39 Restriction on hand polishing

Lathe stock must be polished with tools designed for this purpose, and the use of hand held strips of abrasive cloth is prohibited.

12.40 Stock projection

Safeguards must be provided to prevent a worker from contacting stock projecting from a machine tool.
12.41 Shapers/planers

A shaper or planer bed opening must be covered or safeguarded to eliminate shearing hazards.

12.42 Carriage travel

Safeguards must be installed at the farthest points of travel of the carriage or table of a shaper, planer, surface grinder or similar equipment to
protect workers against contact with moving parts.

12.43 Vertical boring mills

The rim of the revolving table of a vertical boring mill must be safeguarded to prevent contact by workers.
Back to Top
Abrasive Equipment

12.44 Standards

An abrasive wheel must be guarded, used and maintained to meet the requirements of ANSI Standard B7.1-1988, The Use, Care and
Protection of Abrasive Wheels.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.45 Protective hood

(1) An abrasive wheel must have a protective hood that will contain fragments of the wheel should it break apart while turning.
(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to
(a) an abrasive wheel used for internal work,
(b) a mounted wheel of any shape or type which is 50 mm (2 in) or less in diameter,
(c) a threaded-hole, cone or plug type of wheel if the nature of the work provides protection, or
(d) a portable grinder when it is being used for grinding root passes in welded pipe, provided it has a protective hood covering at least 120° of the
wheel periphery and the operator wears adequate eye and face protection.

12.46 Speed of abrasive wheels

(1) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

(2) The allowable arbor or shaft speed of abrasive equipment must be clearly marked on the equipment.
(3) A pneumatic grinder must have a governor which limits maximum shaft speed to that specified by the tool manufacturer, and the maximum rated
speed must be marked on the equipment.
(4) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.47 Grinding prohibitions

The side of an abrasive wheel must not be used for grinding and non-ferrous materials must not be ground unless the wheel is designed for such
use.

12.48 Work rests

When the work is hand-held, a grinding machine must have an adjustable work rest with its upper edge at or above the centreline of the abrasive
wheel and within 3 mm (1/8 in) of the cutting surface.

12.49 Dust control

Dust from a grinding or buffing operation must be controlled to prevent a hazard to any worker.

12.50 Dressing grinding wheels

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
Powder Actuated Tools

12.51 Standards

A powder actuated fastening system, consisting of the tool, power loads and fasteners must meet the requirements of ANSI Standard A10.3-
1995, American National Standard for Construction and Demolition Operations — Safety Requirements for Powder-Actuated Fastening
Systems.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.52 Tool selection

A low velocity powder actuated tool, with a fastener test speed rating of less than 100 m (330 ft) per second, must be used unless no low velocity
tool available on the market is capable of doing the fastening task.

12.53 Tool design

(1) Two separate and distinct operations must be required to activate a powder actuated tool and the final firing movement must be separate and
subsequent to depressing the tool into the firing position.
(2) The tool must be designed so that positive means of varying the power level is available, or can be made available, so that the operator may
select a power level appropriate to perform the desired work.

12.54 Markings

(1) A powder actuated tool must be marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark, model number and serial number.
(2) A guard or accessory for use with a powder actuated tool must be marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark.

12.55 Storage

(1) When not in use, a powder actuated tool must be unloaded and the tool and power loads must be securely stored and be accessible only to
qualified and authorized persons.
(2) Power loads of different power levels and types must be kept in different compartments or containers.

12.56 Tool use

(1) Only a qualified person may handle or use a powder actuated tool or power loads.
(2) The operator must have immediately available when using or servicing a powder actuated tool
(a) a copy of the manufacturer's operating instructions for the tool,
(b) a copy of the power load and fastener charts for the tool, and
(c) any accessories or tools needed for use or field servicing of the tool, including personal protective equipment.
(3) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
(4) A powder actuated tool must not be used in an explosive or flammable atmosphere.
(5) A powder actuated tool may only be loaded when it is being prepared for immediate use, and must be unloaded at once if work is interrupted
after loading.
(6) A powder actuated tool must not be pointed at any person.
(7) If a powder actuated tool misfires, the operator must hold the tool firmly against the work surface for at least 5 seconds, then follow the
manufacturer's instructions for such occurrences, and until the cartridge has been ejected, keep the tool pointed in a direction which will not cause
injury to any person.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.57 Limitations on use

(1) A powder actuated tool fastener must not be driven into very hard or brittle materials, such as cast iron, glazed tile, hardened steel, glass block,
natural rock, hollow tile, and most brick.
(2) A powder actuated tool fastener may only be driven into easily penetrated or thin materials or materials of unknown resistance if the receiving
material is backed by a material that will prevent the fastener from passing completely through.
(3) A powder actuated tool fastener must not be driven into steel within 13 mm (1/2 in) of an edge, or within 5 cm (2 in) of a weld except for
special applications permitted by the tool manufacturer.
(4) Except for special applications recommended by the manufacturer, a powder actuated tool fastener may not be driven into masonry materials
(a) within 7.5 cm (3 in) of an unsupported edge with a low velocity tool, or
(b) within 15 cm (6 in) of an unsupported edge with a medium or high velocity tool.
(5) A powder actuated tool fastener must not be driven
(a) into concrete unless material thickness is at least 3 times the fastener shank penetration,
(b) into any spalled area, or
(c) through existing holes unless a specific guide means, as recommended and supplied by the tool manufacturer, is used to assure positive
alignment.
Woodworking Tools and Equipment

12.58 Hand feeding

A template, jig, or pushstick must be used if there is a risk of injury to a worker's hands when feeding woodworking machinery.

12.59 Removing guards

(1) If the use of a guard on woodworking machinery is clearly impracticable for a specific operation, the guard may be removed, but an
appropriate pushstick, jig, feather board or similar device must be used to prevent the operator encroaching into the cutting area, and upon
completion of the operation the guard must be replaced.
(2) A guard may otherwise only be removed if the guard itself creates a hazard, or if its removal is necessary for maintenance.

12.60 Kickback fingers, splitters, spreaders, and riving knives

(1) If a hand-fed circular saw is used for ripping wood, or is used for any other purpose where there is a risk of kickback, the circular saw must
have
(a) anti-kickback fingers and a splitter or spreader designed to prevent kickback, or
(b) a riving knife designed to prevent kickback.
(2) Subsection (1) does not apply when the circular saw is used for grooving, dadoing or rabbeting.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 312/2012, effective February 1, 2013.]

12.61 Radial arm saw travel limits

The cutting table and the saw travel stop on a radial arm saw must be designed and maintained so that no part of the saw blade can travel past the
forward edge of the cutting table.

12.62 Jointers

A hand-fed wood jointer must have a self adjusting guard over the cutting head on the working side and a guard over the portion of the cutting
head behind the fence.

12.63 Sanding machines

(1) The revolving drums, pulleys, nip points, and unused runs of a sanding belt of a sanding machine must be effectively guarded.
(2) Guards must be arranged so that only the portion of the belt necessary for the operation is exposed.

12.64 Tenoning machines

A hand-fed tenoning machine must have a device which holds the material being cut.

12.65 Hand-held circular saws

A hand-held circular saw must have a guard which automatically adjusts to the thickness of the material being cut, and which, when the saw is
withdrawn from the material, completely covers the cutting area of the blade.

12.66 Cutting heads

(1) A cutting head on a woodworking tool or piece of equipment such as a router, a shaper or a sticker must be properly adjusted and secured.
(2) If two or more knives are used in one head, they must be balanced.
(3) A cutting head protective hood fitted on woodworking equipment must be strong enough to contain fragments which result from failure of
cutting head components.
(4) A small hand-held router using a one piece cutting bit is exempt from the requirements of subsection (3).

12.67 Band saws

(1) A band saw blade must be enclosed or guarded, except for the working side of the blade between the guide rolls and the table.
(2) A band saw wheel must be fully encased.
Back to Top
Mobile Chippers

12.68 Hand-fed chippers

A hand-fed mobile chipper must have a barrier or baffle installed on the feed side of the rotor to prevent the ejection of chipped material.

12.69 Self-feeding chippers

A self-feeding chipper must have a table or apron extending at least 1.5 m (5 ft) back from the rotor with sides sufficiently high to prevent a worker
from reaching in and contacting the rotating knife.

12.70 Driven-feed chippers

(1) A driven-feed chipper must have

(a) a feed table that meets both of the following requirements:
(i) the feed table, including the drop-down extension, if any, must extend at least 150 cm (59 in) from the nip point of the feed rollers;
(ii) the total distance from the nip point of the feed rollers to the ground must be at least 210 cm (82 in), as measured along the centre line of the
feed table to the lip of the feed table and then vertically from the lip of the feed table to the ground,
(b) side walls on the feed table, including any drop-down extension, and on the guard chute that are of sufficient height to prevent a worker who is
standing on the ground from reaching the feed rollers, and
(c) a feed control bar that is
(i) located across the top and close to the feed end of the guard chute, and
(ii) designed so that a worker endangered by the feed rollers is able to stop or reverse the feed rollers both by
(a) pushing the feed control bar to its forward travel limit, and
(b) pulling the feed control bar to its rearward travel limit.
(2) No part of a person's body may be on the feed table or in the guard chute unless
(a) the feed rollers have stopped, and
(b) the motor of the driven-feed chipper is turned off and locked out.
(3) Despite subsection (1), a driven-feed chipper that is in use in British Columbia before February 1, 2012 may continue to be used if
(a) the driven-feed chipper meets the requirements of subsection (1) (a) and (b),
(b) the feed control bar meets the requirements of subsection (1) (c) (i), and
(c) the feed control bar is designed so that a worker endangered by the feed rollers is able to stop or reverse the feed rollers by at least one of the
means set out in subsection (1)(c)(ii).
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

12.71 Vertically fed chippers

On a mobile chipper which gravity feeds material through a vertical hopper to the rotor, the sides of the hopper must be of a depth which prevents
the operator from reaching in so as to contact the rotor, but which, in no case, is less than 90 cm (3 ft) measured from the top edge of the hopper
to the periphery of the rotor.
Back to Top
Chain Saws

12.72 Standards

(1) A chain saw must meet the requirements of CSA Standard Z62.1-95, Chain Saws.
(2) A chain saw must have a chain brake that activates automatically upon kickback regardless of the position of the power head or operator's
hands.
(3) A chain saw manufactured before January 1, 1999, with a guide bar exceeding 66 cm (26 in), measured from the top of the cutters at the bar
tip to the point of the "dogs" or "bumper spikes", is exempt from the requirement for a chain brake.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.73 Stopping chain movement

A chain saw chain must be stopped before the saw operator moves from cut to cut, unless the next cut is in the immediate area and the saw
operator can safely move to the next cutting position.
Back to Top
Automotive Lifts and Other Vehicle Supports

12.74 Standards

(1) An automotive lift must meet the requirements of ANSI Standard ANSI/ALI ALCTV-1998, American National Standard for Automotive
Lifts — Safety Requirements for Construction, Testing and Validation.
(2) The operation, inspection and maintenance of an automotive lift must meet the requirements of ANSI Standard ANSI/ALI ALOIM-2000,
American National Standard for Automotive Lifts — Safety Requirements for Operation, Inspection and Maintenance.
(3) Portable automotive lifting devices and vehicle supports must meet the requirements of the applicable section of ANSI Standard ASME
PALD-2003, Safety Standard for Portable Automotive Lifting Devices.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 17/2006, effective August 15, 2006.]

12.75 Assembly and installation

An automotive lift, portable automotive lifting device or other vehicle support must be assembled and installed by qualified personnel.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 17/2006, effective August 15, 2006.]

12.76 Operation

Operation, inspection, repair, maintenance and modification of an automotive lift, portable automotive lifting device or other vehicle support must
be carried out according to the manufacturer's instructions or the written instructions of a professional engineer.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 17/2006, effective August 15, 2006.]
12.77 Records

The employer must keep a maintenance, inspection, modification and repair record for each automotive lift.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 17/2006, effective August 15, 2006.]

12.78 Inspection and testing

An automotive lift must be inspected and tested monthly in a manner acceptable to the Board, unless the manufacturer requires more frequent
inspection and testing.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 17/2006, effective August 15, 2006.]

12.79 Rated capacity

(1) The rated capacity must be marked on each automotive lift, portable automotive lifting device or other vehicle support and must not be
exceeded.
(2) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
(3) If the rated capacity of a device listed in subsection (1) is dependent on the concurrent use of 2 or more devices, the number of devices
required to achieve the rated capacity must be clearly marked on the devices.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 17/2006, effective August 15, 2006.]

12.80 Controls

The control for an automotive lift must require continuous pressure by the operator when raising or lowering the unit, and the control must return to
the neutral position when released.

12.80.1 Vehicle restraint

Before a runway type automotive lift is used,

(a) manual wheel chocks must be used as the primary means to restrain the vehicle from movement, and
(b) automatic or fixed stops, or a combination of them, must be provided and used as a secondary means to prevent the vehicle from inadvertently
rolling off either end of the runway.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 17/2006, effective August 15, 2006.]

12.80.2 Swing-arm restraint

(1) An automotive lift that has swing arms must have swing-arm pivot restraints if
(a) no part of the rigid superstructure is under the raised vehicle, or
(b) the lift has 2 or more superstructures and the clearance between the rigid parts of the superstructures on each side of the vehicle is 1.3 m (51
in.) or more.
(2) Swing-arm pivot restraints required under subsection (1) must be designed and maintained to prevent unintentional removal or disengagement
of the swing-arm pivot restraints when a vehicle is being supported by the automotive lift.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]
Miscellaneous Equipment

12.81 Tumblers

A tumbler drum must be guarded or enclosed, and any access door in a guard or enclosure must have interlocks which prevent the access door
from being opened while the drum is rotating, and the drum from operating while the access door is open.

12.82 Pneumatic nailing and stapling tools

(1) A hand held pneumatic nailing or stapling tool capable of driving fasteners larger than 1.2 mm (0.05 in or 18 gauge ASWG) must not activate
unless the operator performs 2 actions, one of which is to place the tool against a work surface.
(2) The trigger of a pneumatic nailing or stapling tool must not be taped or otherwise secured in the "on" position, or held in the "on" position while
moving between operations.
(3) The air supply to a pneumatic nailing or stapling tool must be disconnected before adjusting or servicing the tool.
(4) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.83 Industrial robots

An industrial robot or robot system must be installed, safeguarded, maintained, tested and started, used, programmed and workers trained to meet
the requirements of
(a) CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z434-94, Industrial Robots and Robot Systems — General Safety Requirements, or
(b) ANSI Standard ANSI/RIA R15.06-1992, American National Standard Industrial Robots and Robot Systems - Safety Requirements.
(c) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.83.1 Chassis dynamometers - motor vehicle testing

(1) In this section:

"guard screen" means a screen manufactured from shock-absorbing material and designed to prevent any material striking the screen from
ricocheting;
"motor vehicle" means a wheeled vehicle that is propelled by motorized or electric power, but does not include a vehicle that is designed to be
used on rails or tracks.
(2) Only a qualified worker may
(a) test a motor vehicle on a chassis dynamometer, or
(b) operate a motor vehicle, chassis dynamometer or other test equipment for the purpose of testing a motor vehicle on a chassis dynamometer.
(3) Before a motor vehicle is tested on a chassis dynamometer, the wheels and tires of the motor vehicle must be inspected by a qualified worker.
(4) A motor vehicle must not be tested on a chassis dynamometer if any of the following apply:
(a) the tires on the motor vehicle contain rocks, stones or other foreign material embedded in the tire treads;
(b) the tires on the motor vehicle are studded;
(c) the wheels or tires on the motor vehicle are incapable of operating safely at the speeds to be reached during testing;
(d) the wheels or tires on the motor vehicle bounce during testing in a manner that is likely to cause the motor vehicle to move laterally off the rolls;
(e) the motor vehicle is likely, without continuous corrective steering, to move laterally off the rolls during testing.
(5) The following safety measures must be taken when testing a motor vehicle on a chassis dynamometer:
(a) the chassis dynamometer must be equipped with front-mounted idler safety rolls unless the motor vehicle is chained or otherwise secured to
anchor points to prevent runaways;
(b) wheel chocks must be used to block the non-driving wheels to prevent runaways;
(c) in the case of a motor vehicle with front-wheel drive, the motor vehicle must be prevented from moving laterally during testing;
(d) guard screens of a size that is appropriate for the motor vehicle must be positioned behind the rear of the motor vehicle to block any materials
that may be ejected from or by the wheels or tires;
(e) the exposed portions of the moving rolls of the chassis dynamometer must be fitted with adequate guards while the rolls are in motion during
testing;
(f) exhaust gases from the motor vehicle must be removed from the work area.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 9/2017, effective May 1, 2017.]
Drilling Rock or Similar Materials

12.84 General requirement

The employer must ensure that before drilling

(a) the back, face and sides of the work area have been scaled and stabilized,
(b) the working face and surrounding area have been thoroughly washed, and
(c) remnants of holes have been inspected for explosives and distinctively marked.

12.85 Drilling equipment

The employer must ensure that

(a) a rock drill is not used unless equipped with a water jet or other device capable of suppressing rock dust, and
(b) adequate restraining devices are installed on hose connections under pressure, if inadvertent disconnection could endanger workers.

12.86 Control location

Operating controls must not be installed on the feed slide of a top-hammer percussion drill.

12.87 Boom hazard

A worker must not proceed beyond the front of the drill controls of a drill jumbo if the drills are in operation, unless the drilling equipment is
specifically designed and certified for that purpose.

12.88 Drill jumbos

(1) A drill jumbo that contains decks must be

(a) fitted with guardrails and toeboards, meeting the requirements of Part 4 (General Conditions), around the upper decks,
(b) equipped with a rack or receptacle for securely storing drill rods and other equipment,
(c) provided with safe access to each working level,
(d) provided with a visual warning system to warn workers located below the upper decks, before a worker above collars a hole or removes the
boom stabilizer from the face after finishing a hole, and
(e) securely fixed in position at the face to prevent inadvertent movement during drilling operations.
(2) Explosives must not be brought onto or under a drill jumbo during a drilling operation, nor may holes be loaded until drilling is complete.

12.89 Drilling procedures

A driller must ensure that

(a) the cut is not drilled in the same location as the previous round,
(b) holes are not drilled within 15 cm (6 in) of any part of a bootleg as defined in section 21.1, and
(c) there is no drilling at a face when a hole is loaded or being loaded with explosives except in conformity with the requirements on drilling to refire
a misfire, as specified in Part 21 (Blasting Operations).
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 207/2021, effective December 1, 2021.]

12.90 Rod handling

(1) A drill operator working without a helper must not manually add or remove drill steel or a drill bit, or service drilling equipment, while the drill is
rotating under power.
(2) A worker assisting the drill operator with drill bit or drill steel handling must remain clear of rotating parts of the drill system.
(3) Except as provided in subsection (4), a boom-mounted percussion drill being used with multiple lengths of coupled drill steel must have a rod
changer or other effective device installed and used to add or remove drill steel.
(4) If it is not practicable to fit a rod changer to a boom-mounted percussion drill, adequate written safe work procedures for adding and removing
drill steel must be available, and the drill must be operated in accordance with those procedures.

12.91 Self-propelled drills

A self-propelled rock drill without a ROPS

(a) must have controls for machine travel that allow the operator to access the controls
(i) while standing on the upslope side of the machine, or
(ii) from a position off the machine and upslope from it, and
(b) may only be moved under its own power if the operator is in a position referred to in paragraph (a)(i) or (ii), so that the operator is already off
the machine or in a position to safely step off the machine should it roll or slide downhill.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 139/2021, effective September 1, 2021.]

12.92 Cleaning drilled holes

If a drilled hole is being cleaned using an air or water pressure blowpipe, the operator must ensure that everyone is clear of the area made
hazardous by blowback.
Breaking and Melting Metal

12.93 Breaking metal

An effective guard or barrier must be installed to protect workers from flying metal fragments if a drop weight or other impact device is used to
break castings or other metal.

12.94 Inspection of linings

A furnace, crucible, ladle, mould or other equipment for handling or containing molten metal must be inspected at regular intervals to determine the
condition of the lining, and if any abnormal deterioration is observed the equipment must be removed from service without delay.

12.95 Preventing eruptions

All practicable means must be used to prevent eruptions caused by moisture in furnaces, ladles, crucibles, molds and other equipment containing
molten metal.

12.96 Inspection of materials

(1) Material to be put in a melting furnace must be carefully inspected to ensure that a cylinder, tank or similar closed vessel of any description is
not placed in the furnace.
(2) Before being exposed to the intense heat of a furnace, a closed vessel must be cut open to eliminate the explosion hazard, but must not be cut
open using a method involving the application of heat or flame.
(3) If a worker must be situated near an open furnace during charging operations, the material to be melted must be carefully examined and, if
necessary, must be sufficiently preheated to ensure that moisture and foreign substances are eliminated.
(4) Preheating must be done under controlled circumstances to ensure that no worker is endangered by the process.
Back to Top
Abrasive Blasting and High Pressure Washing

12.97 Definitions

In sections 12.97 to 12.111

"cabinet" means an enclosure designed to permit abrasive blasting, high pressure washing or a similar operation to be conducted safely inside the
enclosure by a worker who is outside the enclosure;
"enclosure" means a temporary or permanent enclosure of a work area provided with exhaust ventilation and makeup air to reduce exposure of
workers inside the enclosure and prevent the uncontrolled release of air contaminants from the enclosure;
"high pressure washing" or "jetting" means the use of water or other liquid delivered from a pump at a pressure exceeding 34 MPa (5,000
psi), with or without the addition of solid particles, to remove unwanted matter from a surface or to penetrate into the surface of a material for the
purpose of cutting that material.

12.98 Risk assessment

The employer must ensure that a risk assessment is done before any abrasive blasting activity, high pressure washing process, or related cleanup is
started which may cause release of a harmful level of an air contaminant from a surface or coating containing a toxic heavy metal or asbestos.

12.99 Work procedures outside a cabinet

If abrasive blasting, high pressure washing or a similar operation is conducted by a worker outside a cabinet, written safe work procedures
addressing the hazards and necessary controls must be prepared and implemented by the employer.

12.100 Substitution

Abrasive blasting materials containing crystalline silica must be replaced with less toxic materials, when practicable.

12.101 Reuse prohibition

(1) An abrasive material must not be reused if it

(a) contains crystalline silica, or
(b) becomes contaminated with any harmful impurities including metals such as lead, chromium, nickel or mercury.
(2) The requirements of subsection (1) do not apply to a fully enclosed, vented cabinet designed to recirculate the abrasive material.

12.102 Cleanup

(1) Used abrasive blasting materials which contain a substance designated under section 5.57 must be removed from the work area by using
effective procedures designed to minimize the generation of airborne dust, and suitable personal protective equipment.
(2) Removal under subsection (1) must take place by the end of each shift unless
(a) a risk assessment establishes that the risks from removal will exceed the risks from leaving the materials in place,
(b) no workers will be exposed to the materials before removal occurs, or
(c) the materials cannot be separated from the environment in which the abrasive blasting takes place.
(3) If removal is delayed pursuant to subsection (2), the employer must assess the risks arising from delaying the removal and develop safe work
procedures.
(4) The work procedures developed under subsection (3) must be in writing.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 253/2001, effective January 28, 2002.]
Note: Section 4.41 of this Regulation requires that waste abrasive blasting materials not be allowed to accumulate so as to become hazardous to
workers. Part 8 (Personal Protective Clothing and Equipment) of this Regulation provides requirements for respiratory and other forms of personal
protective equipment to be used in the workplace.

12.103 Engineering controls

Engineering controls such as an enclosure or local exhaust ventilation with dust collection must be used to maintain airborne contaminant levels
below exposure limits, where practicable.

12.104 Exhaust ventilation

(1) When abrasive blasting or a similar operation is conducted within a structure, the process must be isolated in a separate, properly ventilated
enclosure or cabinet to minimize worker exposure to air contaminants generated by the process.
(2) When abrasive blasting or a similar operation is conducted inside an enclosure or cabinet, the enclosure or cabinet must have exhaust
ventilation that
(a) maintains air pressure below the air pressure outside the enclosure or cabinet, so as to prevent the escape of air contaminants from the
enclosure or cabinet to other work areas, and
(b) minimizes worker exposure inside the enclosure.

12.105 Restricted work zones

(1) When abrasive blasting or a similar operation is conducted outside a structure, the process must be restricted to a work zone which is identified
by signs or similar means as being a contaminated area.
(2) Only properly protected workers who are necessary to perform the work are permitted inside an enclosure or a restricted work zone where
abrasive blasting or a similar operation is conducted.

12.106 Operating controls

(1) The operating controls for a sandblasting machine or jetting gun must be
(a) located near the nozzle in a position where the operator's hands will be when using the device,
(b) the continuous pressure type that immediately stops the flow of material when released, and
(c) protected from inadvertent activation.
(2) Subsection (1)(a) does not apply to sandblasting machines or jetting guns used in operations where hand operated controls are clearly
impracticable, in which case the operator must use a foot operated control or equivalent safety device, both of a design acceptable to the Board.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 253/2001, effective January 28, 2002.]
Note: An example of a work process in which the hand operation of a sandblasting machine or jetting gun is impracticable is the cleaning of small
diameter pipes when the lance must be inserted completely inside the piping for effective cleaning.

12.107 Pressure restriction

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.108 Jetting gun

A jetting gun must not be modified except as authorized by the manufacturer.

12.109 Holding work

A worker must not hand hold an object while it is being cleaned or cut by a jetting gun.

12.110 Hose restraint

High pressure hoses, pipes, and fittings must be supported to prevent excessive sway and movement.

12.111 Personal protective equipment

(1) A nozzle or jetting gun operator must wear personal protective clothing and equipment on the body, hands, arms, legs and feet, including the
metatarsal area, made of canvas, leather or other material which will protect the worker's skin from injury in the event of contact with the flow from
the nozzle.
(2) Unless the process is isolated from the operator in a separate cabinet, a suitable respirator must be provided and worn whenever abrasive
blasting or a similar operation is conducted.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]
Back to Top
Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes

12.112 Standards

Welding, cutting and similar processes must be carried out according to the requirements of CSA Standard W117.2-94, Safety in Welding,
Cutting, and Allied Processes.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.113 Standards for completed work

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.114 Ventilation

Effective local exhaust ventilation must be used at any fixed work station to minimize worker exposure to harmful air contaminants produced by
welding, burning or soldering.

12.115 Coatings on metals

A coating on metal which could emit harmful contaminants (such as lead, chromium, organic materials, or toxic combustion products) must be
removed from the base metal, whenever practicable, before welding or cutting begins.
Note: If materials are to be welded and painted, coordination is necessary. See section 12.129(3) which restricts the application of coatings
before welding operations.

12.116 Flammable and explosive substances

(1) A container which may have held a combustible substance must be thoroughly cleaned before any welding or burning operation is carried out
on the container.
(2) Burning, welding or other hot work must not be done on any vessel, tank, pipe or structure, or in any place where the presence of a flammable
or explosive substance is likely until
(a) tests have been made by a qualified person to ensure the work may be safely performed, and
(b) suitable safe work procedures have been adopted, including additional tests made at intervals that will ensure the continuing safety of the
workers.

12.117 Silver solder

Silver solder containing cadmium must not be used without prior written approval from the Board.

12.118 Correct equipment

Welding equipment, including regulators, automatic reducing valves and hoses, must be used only for the gas for which it is designed.

12.119 Equipment inspection

Before using gas welding or burning equipment, the operator must ensure that the equipment is free from defects, leaks, oil and grease.

12.120 Flashback prevention

Suitable safety devices to prevent reverse gas flow and to arrest a flashback must be installed on each hose in an oxyfuel system, between the
torch and the regulator.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.121 Receptacles for stubs

Receptacles for electrode stubs must be provided and used.

12.122 Radiation protection

(1) Arc welding must not be carried out unless workers who may be exposed to radiation from the arc flash are protected by adequate screens,
curtains or partitions or wear suitable eye protection.
(2) A screen, curtain or partition near an arc welding operation must be made of or be treated with a flame resistant material or coating, and must
have a nonreflective surface finish.
Note: 12 m (40 ft) is the recommended minimum distance from which an electric welding arc should be seen by the unprotected eye.

12.123 Protective clothing and equipment

A worker involved in welding or burning operations must wear
(a) flame resistant work clothing,
(b) gauntlet gloves of leather or other suitable material and arm protection,
(c) an apron of leather or other suitable material for heavy work,
(d) eye and face protection against harmful radiation, particles of molten metal, and while chipping and grinding welds, and
(e) substantial safety footwear made of leather or other suitable material.
Note: Unless specifically manufactured as flame resistant, work clothing made of polyester, acetate, nylon, acrylic or polypropylene fibres, or
mixtures of these with wool or cotton do not comply with paragraph (a). Such materials are not flame resistant and will melt while burning, causing
deep and extensive burns to the skin. Work clothing made of laminated fabric containing polyurethane sponge should not be worn as it may readily
ignite and burn.
Heavier wool or cotton fabrics are preferable to lighter fabrics because they are more difficult to ignite. The fabric should have a smooth tightly
woven finish and be maintained in good condition. Follow the manufacturer's directions for all flame resistant protective apparel to ensure that the
flame resistant properties are maintained.

12.124 Respiratory protection

A respirator must be provided and worn if an effective means of natural, mechanical or local exhaust ventilation is not practicable
(a) during short duration welding, burning or similar operations, and
(b) during emergency work.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 253/2001, effective January 28, 2002.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]

12.125 Marking hot work

Recently welded or flame cut work must be marked "HOT" or effectively guarded to prevent contact by a worker, if a worker not directly
involved in the hot work is likely to enter the work area.

12.126 Fire extinguishers

(1) At least one fire extinguisher of a suitable type and capacity must be immediately available at a work location where welding or cutting is done.
(2) Fire extinguisher locations must be marked and made known to workers.
Back to Top
Painting, Coating and Work with Plastics and Resins

12.127 Application

Sections 12.128 to 12.141 apply to a workplace in which there is spraying or use of a paint or similar coating, a fibre reinforced resin, a
thermoplastic material, an expandable resin foam, or other similar materials.

12.128 Substitution

(1) An employer must ensure that a less hazardous substance or work process is substituted for a higher hazard substance or process, whenever
practicable.
(2) The employer must ensure that a substitute for a paint containing toxic heavy metal components is used if an alternative product exists.

12.129 Restrictions

(1) A toxic or flammable chemical or chlorofluorocarbon must not be used as a propellant in spraying operations.
(2) Spraying a flammable or other hazardous product is prohibited within a general work area, unless effective controls have been installed to
control the fire, explosion and toxicity hazards.
(3) When practicable, a coating must not be applied to a material about to be welded.
12.130 Warning signs

A work area or enclosure where hazardous materials are handled or used must be posted with suitable signs or placards warning workers of the
hazards within the identified restricted access area and stating the precautions for entry into the area.

12.131 Enclosure

When practicable, a ventilated spray booth or other enclosure designed to control worker exposure must be used during
(a) any operation or process which involves spraying a paint or resin,
(b) lay-up or moulding of reinforced plastic, or
(c) any application of a paint, coating or insulation containing a sensitizer such as an isocyanate compound, or similar operations using very toxic
materials.

12.132 Air flow

(1) The air velocity through a horizontal flow spray booth, a vertical flow, down-draft booth or other enclosure required by section 12.131 must be
at least

(a) 50 cm/s (100 fpm) if the cross-sectional area is 14 m2 (150 ft2) or less, and

(b) 25 cm/s (50 fpm) if the cross-sectional area is greater than 14 m2 (150 ft2).
(2) In outdoor applications of materials listed in section 12.131, an air velocity across the work area of at least 0.25 m/s (50 fpm) must be assured,
by mechanical means if necessary, to carry vapours and aerosols away from the breathing zone of a worker.

12.133 Control of ignition sources

A ventilation system used to control airborne contaminants must have electrical and mechanical systems designed to control all potential ignition
sources.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.134 Arrester filters

(1) A ventilation system subject to heavy concentrations of overspray from the operation must have an arrester filter.
(2) An arrester filter must be maintained in good operating condition and replaced when the pressure drop across the filter exceeds the design
criteria.

12.135 Respiratory protection

Each worker who is or may be exposed to an airborne contaminant generated by a spray operation involving a sensitizing agent referred to in
section 5.57(1) must be provided with and wear a supplied-air respirator.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 315/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]

12.136 Disposal of isocyanate containers

Empty, non-returnable containers which contained isocyanates must be decontaminated by filling them with water and allowing them to stand for a
minimum of 48 hours, without being sealed, stoppered or closed, after which they must be pierced to prevent re-use.

12.137 Authorized persons

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.138 Airless spray equipment

An airless spray gun must have

(a) a means to electrically bond the gun to the paint reservoir and pump,
(b) a guard that will protect against trigger activation if the gun is dropped, and
(c) the trigger function configured to require two distinct operations by the user to activate the release of paint or fluid through the nozzle, or a
safety device which prevents the nozzle tip from coming into contact with a worker.

12.139 Design for high pressure

An airless spray gun, hose, fitting and pressure vessel must be designed and constructed to withstand the pressure involved.

12.140 Heating plastics

Emissions from operations involved in heating plastics to temperatures which may release thermal decomposition products must be removed from
the workplace by local exhaust ventilation when there is a risk of harm to a worker from exposure to these emissions.

12.141 Resin foams

(1) A foam installation process performed indoors must be controlled or contained so that unprotected workers are not exposed to emissions by
using an enclosure, portable local exhaust ventilation, or scheduling arrangements.
(2) A foam installation process performed outdoors and relying on natural ventilation must be done in an area restricted to authorized personnel
wearing adequate personal protective equipment.
Laundry and Dry Cleaning Activities

12.142 Definitions

In sections 12.143 to 12.166

"dry-to-dry machine" means a system in which the washing and drying is done in a single machine that is vented to a vapour recovery system or
to the atmosphere during the drying and deodorizing phases of the machine cycle;
"fully enclosed refrigerated system" means a system in which the washing and drying is done in a single machine that is not vented to either a
vapour recovery system or to the atmosphere during the drying and deodorizing phases of the machine cycle;
"spot cleaning" means applying spotting solvents or solutions by hand to remove spots or stains;
"transfer system" means a system in which the washing and drying is done in separate machines.

Dry Cleaning

12.143 Open cleaning prohibited

Dry cleaning in an open vessel by immersion, agitation, or spraying is prohibited except as required for spot cleaning.

12.144 Systems and equipment

(1) Dry cleaning systems and equipment must be designed, installed, operated and maintained to prevent the escape of solvent.
(2) Dry cleaning solvents may only be used in transfer, dry-to-dry, or fully enclosed refrigerated systems designed and installed for this purpose.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

12.145 Equipment labels

A dry cleaning machine must have a label specifying the chemical name of the solvent it has been designed to use.

12.146 Solvent handling

Dry cleaning solvents and additives must be stored and handled in a manner that minimizes evaporation and spillage.

12.147 Bulk storage

A dry cleaning solvent bulk storage tank located inside a building must be effectively vented to the outdoors.

12.148 Machine ventilation

(1) A transfer, dry-to-dry, or fully enclosed refrigerated system must have an effective exhaust ventilation system which operates whenever the
loading door is open to create an airflow into the door opening of at least 50 cm/sec (100 fpm) averaged across the face of the opening, and which
maintains the concentration of solvent vapour in the workplace below the applicable exposure limits.
(2) A fully enclosed refrigerated system is exempt from the requirements of subsection (1) if workers are not exposed to levels of solvent vapours
above 50% of the applicable exposure limits.

12.149 General ventilation

A dry cleaning area must have adequate general ventilation to maintain the concentration of evaporated solvents below the applicable exposure
limits.

12.150 Inspection and repair

Dry cleaning equipment must be regularly inspected for liquid and vapour leaks, and any leaks must be repaired promptly.

12.151 Open flame heaters

An open flame heating apparatus must not be located in the same work area as a dry cleaning machine and must have corrosion-resistant flue and
draft hoods to conduct products of combustion to the outdoors.

12.152 Combustion air supply

A flame heating apparatus must not obtain combustion air from areas subject to contamination with dry cleaning solvent vapours.

12.153 Vents

A vent pipe and duct which carries solvent vapour from a dry cleaning process, solvent recovery equipment or dry cleaning work area must
(a) have vapour-proof joints,
(b) discharge to the outside atmosphere at least 1.8 m (6 ft) above the roof peak and at least 3 m (10 ft) from any door, window or other building
opening, and
(c) not discharge into any flue used for combustion products, nor into any building ventilation duct.

12.154 Servicing and maintenance

(1) A worker who may be exposed to dry cleaning solvent liquid or vapour during equipment servicing such as changing solvent filters, must wear
appropriate personal protective equipment to prevent inhalation and skin contact.
(2) A filter or filter material that has been used in a dry cleaning system must be placed in a metal container with a tight fitting lid and stored in a
well ventilated area.

12.155 Emergency ventilation

(1) Supplemental floor level emergency ventilation equipment must be available within 4.6 m (15 ft) of the dry cleaning equipment for use in the
event of a spill, leak or accidental release of solvent liquid or solvent vapour.
(2) Supplemental ventilating equipment must be capable of changing the air in the dry cleaning area every 5 minutes (12 room-air changes per
hour).
(3) The control switch for supplemental ventilation equipment must be readily accessible in an emergency, and must be clearly identified by signs or
similar means.

12.156 Spotting chemicals

(1) A work surface where spot cleaning is done must be designed to contain spills and minimize exposure.
(2) Spotting chemicals must be kept in containers which will prevent skin contact, and appropriate skin protection must be used when spot
cleaning is done.

12.157 Supplier responsibility

When articles are sent for processing to a laundry or dry cleaning facility, the employer sending the articles must advise the operator of the facility,
in writing, of
(a) the identity of any materials contained with the articles which could pose a hazard to workers handling the articles,
(b) the nature of any hazard that may arise from the materials, and
(c) general precautionary measures to be followed when handling the materials.

12.158 Operator responsibility

If articles to be processed may contain materials such as hazardous biological or chemical contaminants, sharp objects, or other materials which
would pose a hazard to workers handling the articles, the operator of a laundry or dry cleaning establishment must
(a) determine the nature of any hazard to workers,
(b) develop effective written safe work procedures to minimize the risk of injury and disease, and
(c) ensure that workers are adequately instructed and directed to follow the safe work procedures.

Laundry Equipment

12.159 Flatwork ironers

Feed-rolls for a flatwork ironer must have a front mounted trip bar designed to stop the machine on contact, or a fixed guard that will prevent the
operator's hands from entering the rolls.

12.160 Roller-type ironers

(1) A roller-type ironer must have a front mounted fixed guard, designed to prevent the operator's hands from entering the rolls.
(2) The hot roll must be guarded to prevent contact by workers.

12.161 Press-type ironers

(1) A press-type ironer must have an automatic device to prevent the application of injurious pressure when the operator's fingers are between the
bed and the pressure-head, or have a device which requires both of the operator's hands to be removed from the danger zone when the machine is
tripped.
(2) Hand controls must be well recessed or effectively shrouded to prevent inadvertent activation, require concurrent use of both the operator's
hands, and require both controls to be released before another machine cycle can be initiated.
(3) Pads and covers must not be of a type that will allow the garment or fabric to slip off the buck easily, with or without vacuuming.

12.162 Interlocks

Drum-type washing machines and dryers must have devices which prevent the drum from operating while the door is open.

12.163 Centrifugal extractors

A centrifugal extractor must have devices to prevent power being applied before the cover is closed and to prevent the cover being opened while
the basket is in motion.

12.164 Laundry chutes

A laundry chute must discharge into an unoccupied area, or have baffles or other equally effective means to prevent laundry coming out of the
chute from striking workers.

12.165 Laundry carts

A laundry cart must be maintained in good mechanical condition and free of sharp corners, edges, or splintered wood.

12.166 Spillage

Curbs or other effective means must be provided to contain any liquid spilled from a washing machine, dry cleaning machine or associated
equipment.
Back to Top
Rail Car Movement

12.167 Application
Sections 12.168 to 12.172 apply to movement of rail cars except those on a federally or otherwise provincially regulated railway.

12.168 General requirements

(1) Written safe work procedures must be developed and made available to all workers involved in moving, loading or unloading railway cars.
(2) Equipment used to move railway cars must be adequately designed and have the capacity to control railway car speed and direction at all
times.
(3) Proper, designated attachment points on railway cars must be used to move railway cars.
(4) Railway cars being loaded on a siding must be protected against unexpected movement by other rail traffic on the siding by the "Blue Flag
Rule" as specified in the Canadian Rail Operating Rules.
(5) Before a railway car is coupled or moved the load must be properly secured and all vehicles and equipment used to load or unload the car
must be in the clear.
(6) Derails must be installed and used
(a) where it is possible for railway cars to move freely and to foul other tracks or create other hazards, and
(b) where required by the Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992 (Canada).

12.169 Clearance

The employer must identify clearances that are less than the standard clearance with restricted clearance signs as specified in the Canadian Rail
Operating Rules.

12.170 Riding restriction

If less than standard clearance exists, as specified in the Canadian Rail Operating Rules, workers must not ride on the top or sides of railway
equipment.

12.171 Brakes

(1) Railway cars on a siding must have an adequate number of hand brakes set to prevent inadvertent movement.
(2) Railway car air brake systems must not be used on a private siding unless authorized by the Engineering and Inspection Branch of the Ministry
of Municipal Affairs and Housing1.
1 now Technical Safety BC

12.172 Tracks

(1) All dead end tracks located in areas where workers are required to be must have a means to prevent rail-mounted equipment from travelling
off the end of the tracks.
(2) All tracks on private sidings must be maintained to standards which permit the safe transit of all rail-mounted equipment using the tracks.
Back to Top
Pressure Vessels

12.173 Pressure relief device - when required

(1) In this section "pressure vessel" has the same meaning as in the Power Engineers, Boiler, Pressure Vessel and Refrigeration Safety
Regulation, B.C. Reg. 104/2004.
(2) A pressure vessel must have a pressure relief device that is set to discharge at 103 kPa (15 psi) or less, if the pressure vessel
(a) is connected to a production facility, compressor station or other pressure source, and
(b) is not directly open to the atmosphere.
(3) Subsection (2) does not apply to a pressure vessel if
(a) the pressure vessel is subject to the Power Engineers, Boiler, Pressure Vessel and Refrigeration Safety Regulation, B.C. Reg. 104/2004, or
(b) the manufacturer of the pressure vessel or a professional engineer indicates in writing that
(i) the pressure vessel will not operate in accordance with its engineered design if the vessel has a pressure relief device that is set to discharge at
103 kPa (15 psi), and
(ii) the pressure vessel can be operated safely without a pressure relief device or with a pressure relief device that is set to discharge at greater than
103 kPa (15 psi).
(4) A pressurized system, including any lines running from the output side of a pressure relief device that may be subject to accidental restriction,
must be protected by a pressure relief device.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 312/2012, effective February 1, 2013.]

12.174 Pressure relief device - installation

(1) In this section "pressure relief device" means a pressure relief device referred to in section 12.173.
(2) A pressure relief device must
(a) have a flow capacity that is not less than the flow capacity of the pressure source, and
(b) be set to discharge at not more than the pressure rating of the component in the pressurized system with the lowest pressure rating.
(3) Any fluid or material discharged through a pressure relief device must be piped to a place where it will not endanger workers.
(4) The diameter of piping connected to the pressure side and the discharge side of a pressure relief device must not be smaller than the diameter
of the openings to the device.
(5) The piping on the discharge side of a pressure relief device must be
(a) secured to prevent movement, and
(b) sloped to drain fluids away from the pressure relief device if freezing could restrict the fluid flow.
(6) A valve must not be installed in the discharge opening of a pressure relief device, or the device's discharge pipe, unless required by engineering
design.
(7) A pressure relief device that requires block valves by engineering design must have the block valves locked in the appropriate position.
(8) A guard must be installed around the shear pin and spindle of a pressure relief device.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 312/2012, effective February 1, 2013.]
Back to Top
Roll-on/Roll-off Containers

12.175 Definitions

In sections 12.176 to 12.183:

"container safety standard" means ANSI Standard ANSI Z245.30-2008, American National Standard for Equipment Technology and
Operations for Wastes and Recyclable Materials — Waste Containers — Safety Requirements;
"roll-on/roll-off container" means a container that
(a) is typically used to receive, store and transport refuse, and
(b) is designed to be used with a vehicle equipped with hydraulic or mechanical tilt-frame and hoist-type equipment, commonly referred to as roll-
offs or hook-lifts.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 199/2014, effective February 1, 2015.]

12.176 Container safety standard

(1) A supplier of a roll-on/roll-off container manufactured on or after February 1, 2015, must ensure that the container is designed and
manufactured in accordance with the requirements of the container safety standard.
(2) Employers must ensure that workers handle roll-on/roll-off containers in accordance with the requirements of the container safety standard.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 199/2014, effective February 1, 2015.]

12.177 Protection against specified hazards

An owner of a roll-on/roll-off container, and an employer, must ensure that persons are not exposed to the following hazards in respect of a roll-
on/roll-off container:
(a) the rupture or disintegration, resulting from poor maintenance, of the lifting eye, cables, anchors, latches, doors, guards, hinges or ladder rungs;
(b) being hit or struck by the unintended or premature discharge of any thing or substance collected, used, stored or transported in the container.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 199/2014, effective February 1, 2015.]

12.178 Visual Inspection before loading container onto vehicle

(1) Before loading a roll-on/roll-off container onto a vehicle, the driver of the vehicle must
(a) visually inspect the container for defects that may be a hazard, and
(b) ensure that the container doors will not open when the container is moved between the ground and the vehicle.
(2) If the driver identifies a defect in a roll-on/roll-off container that may be a hazard, the driver must immediately inform the following, as
applicable, of the defect:
(a) the driver's employer;
(b) if the driver has no employer, the owner of the container.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 199/2014, effective February 1, 2015.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 116/2022, effective August 22, 2022.]

12.179 Withdrawal from service

(1) In this section, "notified person" means the person notified under section 12.178(2) that a roll-on/roll-off container has a defect that may be a
hazard.
(2) On receiving notification under section 12.178(2), a notified person must
(a) withdraw the container from service immediately, or
(b) if it is not practical to withdraw the container from service immediately,
(i) arrange for the safe removal of the container to a place where it can be unloaded, if necessary, and
(ii) have the container repaired.
(3) A roll-on/roll-off container that has been withdrawn from service or repaired under this section may not be returned to service until inspected
under section 12.180.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 199/2014, effective February 1, 2015.]

12.180 Inspection following repair

(1) An owner of a roll-on/roll-off container, and an employer, must ensure that a roll-on/roll-off container is inspected by a qualified person after
any of the following occur:
(a) significant structural modification or refurbishment;
(b) significant repair of a structural component;
(c) repairs made under section 12.179.
(2) The qualified person must determine whether, following the modification, refurbishment or repairs referred to in subsection (1), the container
meets the requirements of the container safety standard.
(3) An inspection under this section must occur on or before the earlier of the following:
(a) 30 days after the making of the modification, refurbishment or repairs referred to in subsection (1);
(b) the return of the container to the place where it is ordinarily stored or located.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 199/2014, effective February 1, 2015.]

12.181 Periodic inspection

(1) An owner of a roll-on/roll-off container, and an employer, must ensure that a qualified person inspects, in accordance with this section, each
roll-on/roll-off container to determine if the container meets the requirements of the container safety standard.
(2) The first inspection of a container manufactured before February 1, 2015, or for which the date of manufacture is unknown, must occur as
follows:
(a) if section 12.180 applies, as required by that section;
(b) if the container has not previously been inspected under section 12.180, before August 1, 2017;
(c) if the owner or employer, as applicable, acquires the container on or after June 2, 2017, but has no record of it being inspected in accordance
with paragraph (a) or (b) of this subsection, within 60 days of acquiring it.
(3) The first inspection of a container manufactured on or after February 1, 2015, must occur as follows:
(a) if section 12.180 applies, as required by that section;
(b) if a container has not previously been inspected under section 12.180, before February 1, 2020;
(c) if the owner or employer, as applicable, acquires the container on or after December 3, 2019, but has no record of it being inspected in
accordance with paragraph (a) or (b) of this subsection, within 60 days of acquiring it.
(4) Subsequent inspections of the container must occur within
(a) 30 months of the most recent inspection, whether made under this section or section 12.180, or
(b) a shorter period set by a qualified person, having regard to the condition of the container.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 199/2014, effective February 1, 2015.]

12.182 Records of inspection

An owner of a roll-on/roll-off container, and an employer, must keep a record for each roll-on/roll-off container that includes all of the following:
(a) the date of each inspection made under sections 12.180 and 12.181;
(b) details of any tests conducted, including testing methods and results;
(c) details of any repairs made;
(d) the date before which the next inspection must occur under section 12.181.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 199/2014, effective February 1, 2015.]

12.183 Withdrawal from service following inspection

If a qualified person determines, following an inspection under section 12.180 or 12.181, that a roll-on/roll-off container does not meet the
container safety standard, the owner of the container, or the employer, must withdraw the container from service
(a) until it is repaired to meet the container safety standard, or
(b) permanently.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 199/2014, effective February 1, 2015.]
Contents

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL

13.1 Definitions
13.2 Standards
13.3 Inspections
DIVISION 2 - LADDERS

13.4 Manufactured ladders

13.5 Position and stability
13.6 Use restrictions

DIVISION 3 - WORK PLATFORMS

13.7 Access
13.8 General requirements
13.9 Lines supporting work platforms
13.10 Hooks and clamps
13.11 Engineering required
13.12 Removal from service

DIVISION 4 - SCAFFOLDS

13.13 Responsibilities
13.14 Scaffold platforms
13.15 Manufactured components
13.16 Lumber for structural components
13.17 Scaffold stability
13.18 Connections
13.19 Electrical hazards

DIVISION 5 - MOVABLE WORK PLATFORMS

13.20 Marking of equipment

13.21 Manuals
13.22 Maintenance of records
13.23 Testing
13.24 Work platforms on wheels
13.25 Warning devices on elevating work platforms
13.26 Controls on elevating work platforms
13.27 Cranes and hoists used to suspend work platforms
13.28 Two-blocking
13.29 Hoisting and lowering work platforms
13.30 Lift truck mounted work platforms
13.31 Powered platforms
13.32 Work in high risk situations
13.33 Fall protection
Division 1 - General

13.1 Definitions

In this Part:
"boom-supported" means supported by an elevating device that telescopes, articulates, rotates or extends relative to the machine base or vehicle,
so that the platform can be positioned completely beyond the base;
"boatswain's chair" also known as a bosun's chair, means a seat attached to a suspended rope designed to accommodate one person in a sitting
position;
"elevating work platform" means a movable work platform that self-elevates to overhead work locations;
"movable work platform" means a work platform that can be re-positioned during the course of the work;
"permanent powered platform" means a movable work platform that
(a) is raised or lowered by other than manual means, and
(b) is permanently installed on or attached to a building or structure;
"portable powered platform" means a movable work platform that
(a) is raised or lowered by other than manual means, and
(b) is not permanently installed on or attached to a building or structure;
"scaffold" means any temporary elevated work platform and its supporting structure used for supporting workers, materials or equipment;
"self-propelled" means the capability of an elevating work platform to travel under power with the primary controls on the work platform;
"swing stage" means a work platform that is raised and lowered by manual or powered hoisting equipment, supported by 2 or more suspension
lines;
"work platform" means an elevated or suspended temporary work surface used for supporting workers and includes a scaffold and boatswain's
chair.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.2 Standards

(1) A ladder, window cleaner's belt or work platform must meet and be used in accordance with
(a) the applicable CSA or ANSI standard in effect when the equipment or structure was manufactured, except as otherwise determined by the
Board,
(b) another standard acceptable to the Board, or
(c) if there is no applicable standard under paragraphs (a) or (b), the requirements of a professional engineer.
(2) In designing and installing a work platform, appropriate safety factors and minimum rated loads must be used in the materials and method of
installation, in accordance with
(a) WCB Standard WPL 1, Design, Construction and Use of Wood Frame Scaffolds, 2004,
(b) WCB Standard WPL 2, Design, Construction and Use of Crane Supported Work Platforms, 2004,
(c) WCB Standard WPL 3, Safety Factor and Minimum Breaking Strength for Suspended Work Platforms and Associated Components,
2004, and
(d) WCB Standard LDR 1, Job Built Ladders, 2004.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.3 Inspections

A ladder, window cleaner's belt, work platform and associated components must be inspected before use on each shift, and after any modification,
and any condition that might endanger workers must be remedied before the equipment is used.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
Back to Top
Division 2 - Ladders

13.4 Manufactured ladders

A manufactured portable ladder must be marked for the grade of material used to construct the ladder and the use for which the ladder is
constructed.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.5 Position and stability

(1) A portable ladder must

(a) be placed on a firm and level surface, and
(b) be of sufficient length to enable the safe performance of the work activity while being used.
(2) A portable non-self-supporting ladder must,
(a) as shown in Figure 13-1, be positioned so that the ladder is leaning against the vertical plane of support at an approximate angle of 75° when
measured from the horizontal plane of support,
(b) if the ladder provides access to or egress from an upper landing,
(i) project approximately 1 m (3 ft) above the upper landing, and
(ii) be sufficiently secured in place to ensure the stability of the ladder during access to or egress from the upper landing, and
(c) if the ladder is not already secured in accordance with paragraph (b)(ii), be sufficiently secured in place to ensure the stability of the ladder
during use if conditions exist that are likely to cause the ladder to be unstable.

Figure 13-1: Ladder Angle

[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 199/2014, effective February 1, 2015.]

13.6 Use restrictions

(1) If work cannot be done from a ladder without hazard to a worker, a work platform must be provided.
(2) A worker must not carry up or down a ladder, heavy or bulky objects or any other objects which may make ascent or descent unsafe.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
Back to Top
Division 3 - Work Platforms

13.7 Access

Safe access must be provided to every work platform.

[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.8 General requirements

Each work platform must

(a) have sufficient strength to bear the load to be placed on it, and
(b) be secured against separation from the supporting equipment, structure or surface to which it is attached.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.9 Lines supporting work platforms

Rigging and lines used to suspend or support work platforms must

(a) have sufficient breaking strength to withstand the loads likely to be imposed with the required factor of safety,
(b) be free of knots or splices except for terminal eye-splices,
(c) be suitable for the purpose for which they are used,
(d) be protected from abrasion or other damage from the work environment,
(e) be secured to the platform and to an anchorage able to withstand the loads likely to be imposed on them,
(f) be of sufficient length to lower the work platform to a safe lower landing, and
(g) except for load lines, be used exclusively for suspending the work platform.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.10 Hooks and clamps

(1) Cornice hooks, parapet clamps and thrust-out beams must be secured by tiebacks to a solid anchor on the building or structure.
(2) Tiebacks for cornice hooks, parapet clamps and thrust-out beams must, as nearly as is practicable, be rigged at right angles to the building
face.
(3) Each cornice hook, parapet clamp, hanger or stirrup used to support a swing stage must be manufactured of mild steel or other material having
similar ductile properties.
(4) Counterweights must be
(a) made of solid material not subject to loss of weight through attrition, and
(b) secured to the thrust-out beam.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.11 Engineering required

(1) The following must be constructed, installed and used in accordance with the instructions of a professional engineer:
(a) bracing for a scaffold, if the scaffold is enclosed by a tarpaulin or any other cover;
(b) a scaffold exceeding 38 m (125 ft) in height;
(c) a scaffold exceeding 25 m (80 ft) in height, if stairways are included as part of the scaffold;
(d) a scaffold used to support a temporary floor;
(e) a scaffold used to support a crane or hoist, other than a scaffold used to support a manually powered crane or manually powered hoist;
(f) a scaffold suspended or cantilevered from a structure;
(g) a scaffold system supported by a catenary line;
(h) a needle beam scaffold;
(i) an outrigger scaffold.
(2) Permanent powered platforms must be constructed, installed and used in accordance with the instructions of a professional engineer.
(3) If a boat is used as a work platform in a pile driving operation, a professional engineer must certify the integrity of the boat for this purpose.
(4) A signed copy of the engineer's instructions or certification referred to in subsections (1) to (3) must be available at the workplace during
installation, disassembly and use of the system.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 9/2017, effective May 1, 2017.]

13.12 Removal from service

A work platform must be removed from service until certified safe for use by the manufacturer or a professional engineer if it has
(a) been subjected to a sudden drop,
(b) been in contact with exposed energized electrical equipment or conductors, or
(c) shows signs of any kind of structural or mechanical damage or substantial wear.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
Division 4 - Scaffolds

13.13 Responsibilities

The employer must ensure that scaffolds used by workers are in a safe condition and are able to withstand the load, regardless of who erected the
scaffold.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.14 Scaffold platforms

(1) The platform of each scaffold must

(a) be a minimum nominal width of 50 cm (20 in), except that a nominal 30 cm (12 in) wide work platform may be used with ladder jacks, pump
jack or similar systems,
(b) not leave more than one opening in the work platform, which must be no greater than 25 cm (10 in) in width, and
(c) if not level, be designed to ensure adequate footing for workers using the platform.
(2) Guardrails may be omitted from the edge of a work platform if
(a) the platform is adjacent to a structure that provides protection equivalent to guardrails, and
(b) the open space between the platform and the structure is equal to or less than 30 cm (12 in).
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.15 Manufactured components

Major components of scaffolds must be used in accordance with technical data provided by the manufacturer, or in writing by a professional
engineer, that
(a) shows the rated load, erection procedures and compliance with an applicable standard under section 13.2, and
(b) is available at the workplace for reference.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.16 Lumber for structural components

All lumber used to construct a scaffold must be graded and marked to the National Lumber Grades Authority Standard Grading Rules for
Canadian Lumber.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.17 Scaffold stability

(1) A scaffold must be erected with the vertical members plumb, and with the ledgers and bearers level.
(2) The base of a scaffold must have bearing plates or sills that rest on a solid surface and are sufficient to support the weight of the scaffold.
(3) The poles, legs and uprights of a scaffold must be securely and rigidly braced to prevent movement.
(4) A scaffold must be effectively guyed or secured to a building or structure
(a) if the height of the scaffold exceeds 3 times its minimum base dimension, or
(b) in any other circumstances if required for stability.
(5) Unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer, height adjustment devices must not extend more than 2/3 of their total length or 60 cm (24 in),
whichever is less.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.18 Connections
All connections between the parts of a scaffold must be secure.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.19 Electrical hazards

A scaffold must be effectively grounded if

(a) it is a metal scaffold and is located close to a high voltage energized electrical conductor or equipment, and
(b) a hazardous level of electrical charge is likely to be induced in the scaffold.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
Back to Top
Division 5 - Movable Work Platforms

13.20 Marking of equipment

(1) The following equipment must be clearly marked with a rated capacity:
(a) a platform that is suspended from or attached to a crane or hoist,
(b) an elevating work platform,
(c) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. Reg. 312/2012, effective February 1, 2013.]
(d) a swing stage, and
(e) interchangeable load bearing components of a suspended work platform system.
(2) The rated load for allowable thrust-out beam projections must be clearly marked on a thrust-out beam.
(3) A swing stage platform, counterweight and hoist unit must each be clearly marked with their own weight.
(4) A work platform that is suspended from a crane or hoist or attached to a crane boom must be marked with the weight of the platform and
rigging and the rated capacity.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2012, effective February 1, 2013.]

13.21 Manuals

(1) For each elevating work platform in use at a workplace,

(a) the equipment manufacturer's operation manual must be available at the workplace, and
(b) the equipment manufacturer's maintenance manual, containing maintenance instructions and replacement part information, must be reasonably
available to workers at the workplace.
(2) If either of the manuals required by subsection (1) is not available, the equipment must not be used until
(a) the manual is obtained, or
(b) written instructions for the safe operation and maintenance of the equipment are supplied by a professional engineer.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.22 Maintenance of records

(1) The employer must keep records of inspection, maintenance, repair or modification that meet the requirements of Part 4 (General Conditions)
for each
(a) elevating work platform,
(b) swing stage, and
(c) permanent powered platform.
(2) If the inspection and maintenance records, other than pre-shift inspections, are not available, the equipment must not be used until it has been
inspected and certified safe for use by the manufacturer or a professional engineer.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.23 Testing

(1) A vehicle-mounted elevating work platform and a self-propelled boom-supported elevating work platform must be
(a) inspected in accordance with good engineering practice at least every 12 months, and
(b) certified in writing by the equipment manufacturer or a professional engineer as complying with this Part and safe for use.
(2) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. Reg. 312/2012, effective February 1, 2013.]
(3) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. Reg. 312/2012, effective February 1, 2013.]
(4) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. Reg. 312/2012, effective February 1, 2013.]
(5) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 243/2006, effective January 1, 2007.]
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 243/2006, effective January 1, 2007.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2012, effective February 1, 2013.]

13.24 Work platforms on wheels

(1) If a moveable work platform on wheels is not designed for or intended to be moved along the floor or other supporting surface while a person
is occupying the platform, the platform must be secured to prevent that movement before a person accesses or occupies the platform.
(2) If a moveable work platform is designed for and intended to be moved along the floor or other supporting surface while a person is occupying
the platform, the platform must be moved only in the manner and under the conditions specified by the platform's manufacturer.
(3) Despite subsection (2), if the height of the work platform of a rolling scaffold that is occupied by a person is
(a) not more than one and one half times the least base dimension of the scaffold, the scaffold may be moved by the effort of the person occupying
the platform or by the effort of a person on the floor or other supporting surface,
(b) more than one and one half times the least base dimension of the scaffold, the scaffold must be moved only by the effort of a person on the
floor or other supporting surface, and
(c) more than two times the least base dimension of the scaffold, the scaffold must not be moved while the person is occupying the platform.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

13.25 Warning devices on elevating work platforms

(1) An elevating work platform, except a vehicle -mounted work platform, must have a warning system consisting of an intermittent horn or flashing
light that
(a) is automatically activated during any motion of the work platform, and
(b) can be seen or heard by other workers in proximity to the work platform.
(2) If the safe operation of an elevating work platform requires its carrier vehicle to be on a level surface or level within specified degrees, the
platform must be fitted, as the carrier requires, with a device to warn the operator that
(a) the carrier is not level, or
(b) the carrier is outside the permitted degrees from level.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.26 Controls on elevating work platforms

The controls for an elevating work platform must

(a) be clearly identified to indicate their functions,
(b) be "hold-to-run" (continuous pressure) type that return to the neutral or the stop position when released,
(c) be protected against inadvertent operation,
(d) for each set of controls, be provided with an emergency stop device that is
(i) within easy reach of the operator,
(ii) clearly labelled STOP, and
(iii) coloured red, and
(e) include a clearly marked overriding lowering control that will enable a worker at the lower controls to stop and lower the platform in an
emergency.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.27 Cranes and hoists used to suspend work platforms

(1) The weight of a work platform suspended from a crane or hoist or attached to a crane boom and its rigging, plus the rated capacity, must not
exceed 50% of the rated capacity of the crane or hoist at the working radius or configuration.
(2) If a work platform attached to a crane boom causes eccentric loading on the boom,
(a) the effect on the rated capacity of the crane must be determined and the rated capacity certified by the crane manufacturer or a professional
engineer, and
(b) the rated capacity of the crane must be reduced accordingly.
(3) The boom of a crane used to suspend a work platform must have a powered boom or a fixed boom.
(4) A work platform must not be
(a) suspended from an articulating boom crane, or
(b) attached to an articulating boom crane, unless the crane manufacturer approves the installation.
(5) If workers are on a work platform suspended from a crane, a secondary hoisting line on the crane must not be used.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.28 Two-blocking

(1) A crane or hoist used to raise a work platform on a load line must be equipped with
(a) a device to prevent two-blocking at all points, or
(b) in the case of a lattice boom crane, a two-blocking warning device.
(2) Despite subsection (1), a work procedure acceptable to the Board may be followed to minimize the risk of two-blocking if it is not practicable
to maintain a two-blocking prevention or warning device on a conventional lattice boom crane used for pile driving and similar applications.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.29 Hoisting and lowering work platforms

(1) Cranes, winches and other devices used for hoisting and lowering movable work platforms must
(a) be operated as slowly as practicable while supporting the work platform,
(b) be lowered under power, if the device is powered, and
(c) not be equipped with a free running boom or hoisting winch controlled only by brakes.
(2) If a moveable work platform is suspended from a crane, winch or other device over a structure that cannot safely support its weight or if other
hazards exist below the platform, lower limit travel devices compatible with the hoist system must be used to ensure the platform cannot be
lowered beyond the safe lower limit of travel.
(2.1) If the lower limit travel devices required by subsection (2) are not practicable, the employer must ensure that work procedures acceptable to
the Board are used that will minimize the risk of the platform going beyond the safe lower limit of travel.
(3) A trial lift for a work platform suspended from or attached to a crane or hoist must be performed at all work locations before the platform is
occupied.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 19/2006 effective May 17, 2006.]

13.30 Lift truck mounted work platforms

(1) In this section, "work platform" means a movable work platform that is supported by a lift truck.
(2) A work platform may be used to support workers only if other conventional means of access for the task, such as ladders, scaffolds and
elevating work platforms, are not practicable.
(3) An employer must ensure that a work platform intended for use by workers was designed, and is used by workers, in accordance with
(a) ANSI/ITSDF B56.1-2009, Safety Standard for Low Lift and High Lift Trucks, if the platform is being used with a high lift truck as defined
in Part IV of that standard, or
(b) ANSI/ITSDF B56.6-2011, Safety Standard for Rough Terrain Forklift Trucks, if the platform is being used with a rough terrain forklift
truck as defined in section 2 of that standard.
(4) The employer must ensure that a work platform intended for use by workers is legibly marked in a conspicuous place to show
(a) the name of
(i) the manufacturer of the platform, or
(ii) the professional engineer who certified the platform as having been built to meet the applicable standard referred to in subsection (3),
(b) if the platform was built by a manufacturer,
(i) the model number and serial number, or
(ii) other unique marking or identification that links the platform with the manufacturer's documentation respecting the platform's design and use,
(c) if the platform was custom built, the unique identification number or code that links the platform with the professional engineer's documentation
for the platform's design and use,
(d) the title of the safety standard or standards the platform was designed to meet,
(e) the weight of the platform when the platform is empty,
(f) the rated load of the platform, and
(g) the minimum width, as measured in accordance with subsection (5), and minimum rated capacity a lift truck must have to support the platform
in a manner that complies with the applicable standard in subsection (3) when the platform is loaded to its rated load.
(5) The width of a lift truck referred to in subsection (4) (g) must be measured in a straight line from any point on the outer part of the right load
bearing tire to the corresponding point on the outer part of the left load bearing tire.
(6) The employer must ensure that a qualified person inspects both the work platform and the lift truck supporting the work platform
(a) each time the platform is mounted on the lift truck, and
(b) at the start of each work shift, if the platform is already mounted on the lift truck at the start of the work shift,
to ensure the platform is properly secured to the lift truck and the lift truck and the platform are safe for use.
(7) The employer must ensure that the inspections referred to in subsection (6) take place before either the work platform or the lift truck is used
by a worker.
(8) Only a worker who is qualified and authorized by the employer may operate a work platform, and the lift truck supporting the work platform,
for the purpose of supporting workers on the platform.
(9) A worker must not operate either a work platform or the lift truck supporting the work platform unless
(a) there is effective two-way voice communication between the lift truck operator and a worker on the platform who is designated by the
employer to provide the lift truck operator with directions for platform movement, and
(b) the lift truck operator and the designated worker on the platform prearrange hand and arm signals, if the voice communication referred to in
paragraph (a) relies on the use of a radio or other electronic system, to allow the designated worker to signal the lift truck operator to bring the
platform to the ground or floor level in the event the radio or other electronic system fails.
(10) A lift truck operator must remain at the controls of the lift truck at all times there are any workers on the platform supported by the lift truck.
(11) Before a work platform may be used to support workers, the lift truck operator must conduct a trial lift of the platform, with no workers on
the platform, to assess the suitability of the surface bearing the weight of the lift truck and whether the platform is clear of all obstructions, unless
(a) the lift truck is on a type of surface the employer has identified as capable of safely supporting the lift truck and the platform when the platform
is loaded to its rated load, and
(b) the space in and around which the platform is to be raised is clear of all obstructions.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 312/2012, effective February 1, 2013.]

13.31 Powered platforms

If a portable powered platform is raised and lowered by two or more separately controlled hoists operated by one person on the platform, the
controls must be located so that they can be used simultaneously by that person.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

13.32 Work in high risk situations

Before a swing stage, boatswain's chair or portable powered platform is used in any of the following circumstances, a professional engineer must
have certified in writing that the design, installation and proposed use of the swing stage, boatswain's chair or portable powered platform, as the
case may be, meets the requirements of CSA Standard CAN/CSA Z271-10 Safety code for suspended platforms and CSA Standard
CAN/CSA Z91-02 (R2008) Health and Safety Code for Suspended Equipment Operations:
(a) one work platform will be used above or below any portion of another work platform,
(b) a deck or planking will be used to span a gap between two independent work platforms,
(c) the work platform will exceed 10 m (32 ft) in length, or
(d) the suspension height will exceed 91 m (300 ft).
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 199/2014, effective February 1, 2015.]

13.33 Fall protection

(1) A person on an elevating work platform must wear a personal fall arrest system secured to a suitable and substantial anchorage point.
(1.1) Despite subsection (1), a person on a scissor lift, or on an elevating work platform with similar characteristics to a scissor lift, that is on a firm
level surface with no irregularities to cause platform instability, is exempt from wearing a personal fall arrest system, provided that all manufacturer's
guardrails and chains are in place.
(2) If a person is supported on a work platform suspended by fewer than four suspension lines, the person must use a personal fall arrest system
secured to an anchor meeting the requirements of Part 11 (Fall Protection) and independent of the work platform and its suspension system.
(3) If a person is supported on a work platform suspended by four or more suspension lines, the person must use a personal fall arrest system
secured to an anchor on the platform or to an anchor meeting the requirements of Part 11 (Fall Protection) and independent of the work platform
and its suspension system.
(3.1) Despite subsection (3), a person is not required to use a personal fall protection system on an outrigger or suspended mason's scaffold with
guardrails on the open sides.
(4) Each person on a work platform suspended from a crane or hoist must use a personal fall arrest system with a shock absorbing lanyard,
secured to
(a) an anchor above the load hook, or
(b) an anchor attached to the platform and designated for that purpose by the manufacturer or a professional engineer, provided that the platform
has a safety strap that will prevent the platform from falling more than 15 cm (6 in) if the platform becomes dislodged from the hook.
(5) Each person on a work platform attached to a crane boom must use a personal fall arrest system secured to an anchor on the boom or on the
platform.
(6) The personal fall arrest system referred to in subsection (5) must be secured on the boom or on the platform to an anchor that is designated by
(a) the manufacturer, or
(b) a professional engineer.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 422/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 19/2006 effective May 17, 2006.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 243/2006 effective January 1, 2007.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]
Back to Top
Contents
14.1 Definitions
14.1.1 Application

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

14.2 Standards
14.3 Identification
14.4 Rated capacity [Repealed]
14.5 Rated capacity indication
14.6 Load charts [Repealed]
14.7 Boom angle indicator
14.8 Boom extension and load radius indicators
14.9 Logging exemption
14.10 Reeved-in devices
14.11 Support structure
14.12 Manual and instructions
14.13 Inspection, maintenance and repair
14.14 Inspection and maintenance records
14.15 Modifications
14.16 Certification required
14.16.1 Certification following misadventure
14.17 Access and egress
14.18 Audible warning
14.19 Drop stops
14.20 Rail end stops
14.21 Fenders
14.22 Securing pins
14.23 Boom stops
14.24 Molten metal
14.25 Two-block prevention [Repealed]
14.26 Sheave guards
14.27 Ungrounded supply
14.28 Controls
14.29 Operator protection
14.30 Cab windows
14.31 Operator's seat
14.32 Storage
14.33 Fire extinguisher

EQUIPMENT OPERATION

14.34 Operator qualifications

14.34.1 Operator certification
14.35 Pre-use inspection
14.36 Load weight
14.37 Calibration
14.37.1 Operator's duties
14.38 Safe lifting
14.39 Contact with loads and structures [Repealed]
14.40 Swing and shear hazards
14.41 Position of equipment
14.42 Tandem lift
14.42.1 Critical lift
14.43 Travelling with a load
14.44 Loads over work areas
14.45 Unattended loads
14.46 Vertical load line
14.47 Signals
14.48 Alternative to hand signals
14.49 Dedicated radio system
14.49.1 Communication between equipment operators
14.50 Unhooking loads
14.51 Riding hook or load
14.52 Induced voltage
14.52.1 Work near high voltage
14.53 High voltage electrical conductors [Repealed]

BRIDGE, GANTRY AND OVERHEAD TRAVELLING CRANES

14.54 Operational and running tests

14.54.1 Detailed inspection
14.55 Up travel limit
14.56 Electrical conductors
14.57 Power shutoff
14.58 Direction markings

PNEUMATICALLY POWERED HOISTS AND WINCHES

14.59 Pneumatically powered hoists

14.60 Electric hoists [Repealed]

MANUALLY POWERED HOISTS

14.61 Brakes
14.62 Crank handles

MOBILE CRANES, BOOM TRUCKS AND SIGN TRUCKS

14.63 Carrier vehicle [Repealed]

14.64 Load weight indicators
14.65 Cranes on floating supports [Repealed]
14.66 Level turntable
14.67 Outriggers and stabilizers
14.68 Tires
14.69 Supporting surface
14.70 Travelling with a load
14.71 Annual inspection
14.72 Boom inspection
14.73 Sign trucks

TOWER CRANES

14.73.1 Definition
14.73.2 Tower crane erection
14.74 Tower crane support
14.75 Before use
14.76 Identification
14.77 Structural inspection
14.78 Structures kept clean
14.79 Manual and records
14.80 Counterweights and ballasts
14.81 Limit devices
14.82 Test blocks
14.83 Operator's cab
14.84 Monitoring jib swing
14.84.1 Overlapping operating zones
14.85 Clearance and freedom to slew
14.86 Freedom to slew [Repealed]
14.87 Communication [Repealed]
14.88 Access
14.89 Jib access [Repealed]
14.90 Unobstructed passage [Repealed]
14.91 Hoisting ropes
14.92 Wind limitations
14.93 Temperature limitations
14.94 Counter jib [Repealed]

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL HOISTS

14.95 Standards [Repealed]

CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL HOISTS

14.96 Certifications and instructions

14.97 Rider restriction
14.98 Notices
14.99 Gate interlock systems [Repealed]
14.100 Hoistway entrances [Repealed]
14.101 Hoist platform [Repealed]
14.102 Hoist runway [Repealed]
14.103 Ratchets and pawls [Repealed]
14.104 Electric brakes [Repealed]
14.105 Emergency devices [Repealed]
14.106 Travel and load limit switches [Repealed]
14.107 Erection and maintenance [Repealed]
14.108 Operator qualifications [Repealed]
14.109 Operator responsibilities [Repealed]
14.110 Inspection [Repealed]
14.111 Testing safety and control devices [Repealed]
14.112 Securing the platform [Repealed]
14.113 Signal systems [Repealed]
14.114 Operating signals [Repealed]
14.115 Operating restrictions [Repealed]

CHIMNEY HOISTS

14.116 Standard to use

14.117 Certification
14.118 Support structures
14.119 Load rating
14.120 Emergency brakes [Repealed]
14.121 Safety factors [Repealed]
14.122 Drive restrictions [Repealed]
14.123 Brakes [Repealed]
14.124 Limit switches [Repealed]
14.125 Speed governor [Repealed]
14.126 Hoisting speed [Repealed]
14.127 Guardrails and gates [Repealed]
14.128 Raising materials [Repealed]
14.129 Communication [Repealed]
14.130 Fall protection [Repealed]
14.131 Operator qualifications [Repealed]
14.132 Unattended controls [Repealed]

SCHEDULE 14-A

Schedule 14-A WorkSafeBC Standard 14.116 — Chimney Hoists

Cranes and Hoists Definitions and Application

14.1 Definitions

In this Part
"chimney hoist" means a temporary hoist used for transporting personnel or materials during the construction of a chimney or similar structure;
"construction material hoist" means a material hoist consisting of a guiding and supporting structure and hoist equipment that is not a permanent
part of a building, structure, or other work and that is installed and used during construction, alteration, or demolition to raise and lower materials
required for the project;
"critical lift" means
(a) a lift by a mobile crane or boom truck that exceeds 90% of its rated capacity while it is lifting the load at a load radius of more than 50% of its
maximum permitted load radius, taking into account its position and configuration during the lift,
(b) a tandem lift if the load on any one crane, hoist or other piece of powered lifting equipment exceeds 75% of the rated capacity of that crane,
hoist or other piece of powered lifting equipment,
(c) a tandem lift involving the simultaneous use of more than two cranes, hoists or other pieces of powered lifting equipment,
(d) a lift of a person in a work platform suspended from or attached to a crane or hoist,
(e) a lift in which the centre of gravity of the load changes during the lift,
(f) a lift in which the length of one or more sling legs changes during a lift,
(g) a lift by a crane, boom truck or hoist, supported on a floating base, that exceeds 90% of rated capacity for the lifting system,
(h) a lift of a load over or between energized high voltage electrical conductors, or
(i) a lift of a submerged load;
"duty cycle work" means
(a) the use of a crane to do dragline work, clamshell work, dynamic compaction work or pile driving work, including pile extraction using a
vibratory pile extraction device, or
(b) the use of a crane with an electromagnet or grapple for the handling of scrap metal and other similar materials;
"load bearing component" means any component that transfers load through a crane or hoist to the surface supporting the crane or hoist;
"sign truck" means a truck that is
(a) capable of acting as a crane and as an aerial ladder, and
(b) used as a work platform or used for hoisting loads or accessing a work location;
"tandem lift" means a lift using
(a) more than one crane or one hoist, or
(b) a crane or hoist and another piece of powered lifting equipment.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 9/2017, effective May 1, 2017.]

14.1.1 Application

(1) This Part applies to a crane or hoist of a type required to meet a standard specified in section 14.2 and to any other equipment with a different
primary design function that is being used in a hoisting or lifting application.
(2) Except as otherwise specifically provided, this Part applies to logging equipment that uses a load line for lifting.
(3) This Part does not apply to a front end loader, an excavator or other earth moving equipment that is being used
(a) in applications consistent with its primary design purpose, or
(b) during a lifting task incidental to its primary design purpose if the manuals and operating instructions of the manufacturer of that equipment
provide criteria for that lifting task.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]
General Requirements

14.2 Standards

(1) Except as otherwise required by this Regulation, a crane or hoist must be designed, constructed, erected, disassembled, inspected, maintained
and operated as specified by the manufacturer or a professional engineer, and to meet the requirements of the applicable standard listed in
subsections (2) to (15).
(2) A bridge, jib, monorail, gantry or overhead travelling crane must meet the design requirements for electrical components and functions of CSA
Standard C22.1-94, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Section 40 and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 33-M1984 (Reaffirmed 1992),
Construction and Test of Electric Cranes and Hoists.
(3) A bridge, jib, monorail, gantry or overhead travelling crane must meet the design requirements of
(a) ANSI Standard MH27.1-2003, Specifications for Patented Track Underhung Cranes and Monorail Systems,
(b) Crane Manufacturers Association of America (CMAA) Specifications for Top Running Bridge & Gantry Type Multiple Girder Electric
Overhead Traveling Cranes - No. 70 (2004), or
(c) Crane Manufacturers Association of America (CMAA) Specifications for Top Running and Under Running Single Girder Electric
Overhead Cranes Utilizing Under Running Trolley Hoist - No. 74 (2004).
(4) A bridge, jib, monorail, gantry or overhead travelling crane must meet the safety requirements of
(a) CSA Standard B167-96, Safety Standard for Maintenance and Inspection of Overhead Cranes, Gantry Cranes, Monorails, Hoists,
and Trolleys,
(b) ANSI Standard ANSI/ASME B30.2-2005, Overhead and Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge, Single or Multiple Girder, Top Running
Trolley Hoist),
(c) ANSI Standard ANSI/ASME B30.11-2004, Monorails and Underhung Cranes,
(d) ANSI Standard ANSI/ASME B30.16-2003, Overhead Hoists (Underhung), or
(e) ANSI Standard ANSI/ASME B30.17-2003, Overhead and Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge, Single Girder, Underhung Hoist).
(5) A mobile crane, telescoping or articulating boom truck or sign truck must meet the requirements of
(a) CSA Standard Z150-1998, Safety Code for Mobile Cranes,
(b) ANSI Standard ANSI/ASME B30.5-2004, Mobile and Locomotive Cranes, or
(c) ANSI Standard ANSI/ASME B30.22-2005, Articulating Boom Cranes.
(6) A tower, hammerhead crane or self erecting tower crane must meet the requirements of CSA Standard Z248-2004, Code for Tower Cranes.
(7) A portal, tower or pillar crane must meet the requirements of ANSI Standard ASME B30.4-2003, Portal, Tower, and Pedestal Cranes.
(8) A construction material hoist, other than a light duty portable material hoist, must meet the requirements of CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z256-
M87, Safety Code for Material Hoists.
(9) A chimney hoist must meet the requirements of WorkSafeBC Standard 14.116 - Chimney Hoists, set out in Schedule 14-A.
(10) A base mounted drum hoist must meet the requirements of ANSI Standard ASME B30.7-2001, Base Mounted Drum Hoists.
(11) A guy, stiffleg, basket, breast, gin pole, Chicago boom, shearleg or A-frame derrick must meet the requirements of ANSI Standard ASME
B30.6-2003, Derricks.
(12) A side boom tractor used for pipe laying or similar operations must meet the requirements of ANSI Standard ASME B30.14-2004, Side
Boom Tractors.
(13) A manually lever operated hoist must meet the requirements of ANSI Standard B30.21-2005, Manually Lever Operated Hoists.
(14) A patient lift must meet the requirements of CSA Standard CAN/CSA Z10535-03, Hoists for the Transfer of Disabled Persons-
Requirements and Test Methods.
(15) A crane or hoist of a type not covered by the standards specified in subsections (2) to (14) must meet good engineering practice and be able
to safely perform its function.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 9/2017, effective May 1, 2017.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 222/2021, effective December 1, 2021.]

14.3 Identification

(1) A crane or hoist must be permanently identified by the legible display of the manufacturer's name, model and serial number on the structure.
(2) Each major interchangeable structural component of a crane or hoist must be uniquely identified and must be legibly marked to enable
confirmation that the component is compatible with the crane or hoist.
(3) If a crane or hoist was not commercially manufactured and does not have a model number or serial number, the crane or hoist must not be
used unless engineering documentation signed by a professional engineer, including technical specifications and instructions for use, are available at
the workplace where the crane or hoist is being used.
(4) A crane or hoist described in subsection (3) must be identified in a manner that links the engineering documentation referred to in that
subsection with that crane or hoist.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.4 Rated capacity

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.5 Rated capacity indication

(1) The rated capacity of a crane or hoist, other than a crane or hoist to which subsection (2) or (3) applies, must be permanently indicated on
each of the following:
(a) the superstructure;
(b) the hoist;
(c) the load block.
(2) The rated capacity of a monorail crane must be permanently indicated on each of the following:
(a) the hoist;
(b) the load block;
(c) the monorail beam, at intervals not exceeding 10 m (33 ft).
(3) If the rated capacity of a crane or hoist is affected by
(a) the vertical or horizontal angle of a boom or jib,
(b) the length of a boom or jib,
(c) the position of a load supporting trolley, or
(d) the use or position of outriggers to increase the stability of the structure,
a load chart must be permanently posted on the crane or hoist or must be issued to the crane or hoist operator who must keep it available at all
times when operating the crane or hoist.
(4) A load chart under subsection (3) must indicate the rated capacity for the crane or hoist for the working positions and configurations in use and
must be in a legible condition.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 9/2017, effective May 1, 2017.]

14.6 Load charts

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.7 Boom angle indicator

A crane or hoist with a boom movable in the vertical plane must have a device to indicate the boom angle if the rated capacity is affected by the
boom angle, and the device must be readable by the operator at the control station.

14.8 Boom extension and load radius indicators

A crane or hoist must have a means or device to indicate the boom extension or load radius if the rated capacity of the equipment is affected by
boom extension or load radius.

14.9 Logging exemption

Specialized equipment designed and used only for logging operations is exempt from the requirements of sections 14.5 to 14.8.

14.10 Reeved-in devices

The rated capacity of a crane or hoist with reeved-in lifting devices must be the net capacity of the equipment, except for mobile cranes.

14.11 Support structure

(1) The rated capacity of a crane or hoist must not exceed the rated capacity of the structure supporting the crane or hoist.
(2) Selector switches or other effective means must be provided to ensure that the supporting structure is not overloaded by simultaneous use of
multiple cranes or hoists installed on the supporting structure.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 9/2017, effective May 1, 2017.]

14.12 Manual and instructions

(1) In this section:

"engineer's instructions" mean instructions, approved in writing by a professional engineer, for the assembly, erection, dismantling, maintenance,
inspection and operation of the component parts of a crane or hoist and of the assembled crane or hoist.
"manufacturer's manual" means a manual, prepared by the manufacturer of a crane or hoist, that describes the approved methods of assembly,
erection, dismantling, maintenance, inspection and operation of the component parts of the crane or hoist and of the assembled crane or hoist.
(2) A crane or hoist must not be used unless the following is reasonably accessible to the equipment operator and other persons inspecting or
maintaining the equipment at the workplace where the crane or hoist is to be used:
(a) the manufacturer's manual for the crane or hoist;
(b) if the manufacturer's manual is not available, an engineer's instructions for the crane or hoist.
(3) A crane or hoist must not be used unless the following is readily available at the workplace where the crane or hoist is to be used:
(a) the portions of the manufacturer's manual related to the assembly, erection, dismantling, inspection, routine maintenance and safe operation of
the crane or hoist;
(b) if the portions of the manufacturer's manual referred to in paragraph (a) are not available, the portions of an engineer's instructions related to the
assembly, erection, dismantling, inspection, routine maintenance and safe operation of the crane or hoist.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.13 Inspection, maintenance and repair

(1) Each crane and hoist must be inspected and maintained at a frequency and to the extent required to ensure that every component is capable of
carrying out its original design function with an adequate margin of safety.
(2) A crane or hoist must not be used until any condition that could endanger workers is remedied.
(3) Any repair to load bearing components of a crane or hoist must be certified by a professional engineer or the original equipment manufacturer
as having returned the component to a condition capable of carrying out its original design function with an adequate margin of safety.
(4) Maintenance or repair of a crane or hoist must be done by or under the direct supervision of a qualified person.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.14 Inspection and maintenance records

Records of inspection and maintenance meeting the requirements of Part 4 (General Conditions) must be kept by the equipment operator and
other persons inspecting and maintaining the equipment, for
(a) a crane or hoist with a rated capacity of 900 kg (2 000 lbs) or more,
(b) a crane or hoist used to support a worker,
(c) a tower crane,
(d) a mobile crane, boom truck or sign truck,
(e) a side boom tractor or pipe layer,
(f) a construction material hoist,
(g) a chimney hoist,
(g.1) a logging truck trailer reload hoist, and
(h) any other type of hoisting equipment specified by the Board.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.15 Modifications

(1) Each crane or hoist must be erected, dismantled, operated, adjusted, inspected and maintained as specified by the manufacturer's manual
unless otherwise approved by the original equipment manufacturer or a professional engineer.
(2) If a modification that affects the rated capacity or safe operation of a crane or hoist is made to its structure, to one of its mechanical
components or to its control system, the crane or hoist must
(a) be assessed,
(b) have its rated capacity adjusted as necessary, and
(c) be certified as safe for use.
(2.1) The assessment, rated capacity adjustment and certification under subsection (2) must be carried out
(a) in accordance with the applicable design or safety standard specified in section 14.2, and
(b) by the original equipment manufacturer or a professional engineer.
(3) Modifications to a crane or hoist must be recorded in the inspection and maintenance records system and the equipment operation and
maintenance manuals must be revised as necessary to ensure that adequate and appropriate information is available for safe use and maintenance
of the equipment.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.16 Certification required

(1) Subsection (2) applies in respect of a crane or hoist if

(a) the origin or rated capacity of the equipment is not available,
(b) the continued safe use of the equipment cannot be assured because of its condition, age or history, or
(c) modifications referred to in section 14.15 that affect the rated capacity have been made to the crane or hoist.
(2) A person must not use a crane or hoist described in subsection (1) unless a professional engineer has certified the rated capacity of the crane or
hoist in accordance with the applicable design or safety standard specified in section 14.2.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.16.1 Certification following misadventure

(1) In this section, "misadventure" means

(a) a contact, other than a contact that is consistent with operation as specified by the manufacturer or a professional engineer,
(b) a shock load,
(c) a loss of a load,
(d) a brake failure,
(e) an upset, or
(f) any other circumstance that may impair the safe operation of the crane or hoist.
(2) If a crane or hoist has been subject to a misadventure, it must be removed from service until a professional engineer has
(a) supervised an inspection of, and supervised any necessary repairs to, the equipment, and
(b) certified the equipment as safe for use at the manufacturer's rated capacity for the equipment or as provided by section 14.16 if the
manufacturer's rated capacity is not available.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 223/2022, effective March 1, 2023.]

14.17 Access and egress

(1) A crane or hoist must have a safe means of access to and egress from
(a) the operator's position, and
(b) all maintenance and inspection locations on the crane and hoist.
(2) If the normal safe means of egress is not always available to the operator during crane operations, an alternative safe means must be provided
for the operator to get from the operating position to a safe area in the event of a power failure or other emergency.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.18 Audible warning

(1) An effective audible warning device must be installed on a crane or hoist, unless the hoisting equipment is operated using a pendant or remote
control and the operator walks in a safe position near the load.
(2) The operator of a crane or hoist must sound a warning signal when it is necessary to alert workers to hoisting operations.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.19 Drop stops

(1) A top-running crane, under-running crane, wheel- or rail-mounted gantry crane, tower crane and monorail hoist must have a means to limit the
drop of the crane, trolley and bridge truck frames to 25 mm (1 in) if a tire, wheel or axle fails.
(2) Drop stops must be able to support the trolley, bridge and gantry with the crane or hoist loaded to its rated capacity and must be certified to be
able to do so by the original equipment manufacturer or a professional engineer.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.20 Rail end stops

(1) End stops must be provided on crane and hoist tracks and rails to prevent the equipment running off the end of the rail or track.
(2) The stops must contact the truck frame or be of a height of at least 1/2 the diameter of the wheels if the wheels contact the stops.

14.21 Fenders

(1) Fenders must be provided on a crane or hoist which operates on rails if there is a possibility of injury to workers from contact with the
equipment wheels moving along the rail.
(2) Fenders required by subsection (1) must effectively deflect any object from the path of the wheel.

14.22 Securing pins

A heel-pin, sheave-pin, shackle-pin or similar device must be secured against inadvertent dislodgment, in the manner specified by the equipment
manufacturer or by the professional engineer who designed and certified the equipment.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.23 Boom stops

(1) Positive boom stops must be provided on a crane or hoist with a boom that may fall over backward.
(2) A boom hoist disconnect, shutoff or hydraulic relief must be provided on a crane or hoist to automatically stop the boom hoist when the boom
reaches the maximum boom operating angle specified by the manufacturer and before the boom stops are contacted.
(3) A jib on a crane or hoist must be restrained from backward overturning.

14.24 Molten metal

A crane or hoist that handles molten metal must have 2 holding brakes on the hoist mechanism.

14.25 Two-block prevention

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 19/2006, effective May 17, 2006.]

14.26 Sheave guards

A running line sheave on a crane or hoist must have a device to retain the rope in the sheave groove.

14.27 Ungrounded supply

An electrically powered crane receiving its source of power from an ungrounded supply must have a ground fault indication system that is
monitored on a routine basis.

14.28 Controls

(1) Each control for a crane or hoist must have its function clearly identified and must be maintained in good condition.
(2) Each control for a crane or hoist that causes load movement must return to neutral when pressure from the operator is released.
(3) Subsection (2) does not apply to a crane or hoist manufactured before January 1, 2000 for which continuous pressure controls were not
previously required.
(4) Each control for a crane or hoist must be located to allow safe operation of the equipment and if the control is not located in a cab it must be
located to provide a safe distance between the operator and the load being handled.
(5) A pendant control for a crane or hoist must be supported independently from its electrical conductors.
(6) A remote control panel for a crane or hoist must be designed to safeguard effectively against the unintended activation of the crane or hoist.
(7) A wireless remote control system for a crane or hoist must incorporate
(a) error checking to prevent the controlled equipment from responding to corrupt data, and
(b) identification coding methods to prevent a transmitter other than the designated transmitter for that crane or hoist from operating the equipment.
(8) A remote control system for a crane or hoist must be designed to ensure the following:
(a) if the power to the remote control system is removed for any reason, all crane or hoist functions stop;
(b) if the control signal for any crane or hoist motion becomes ineffective, the crane or hoist motion stops;
(c) the remote control panel has an operator controlled emergency stop feature that
(i) permits the operator to stop all crane or hoist movement regardless of a malfunction within the remote control system, and
(ii) requires resetting of the emergency stop feature before equipment operation can resume.
(9) A remote control panel for a crane or hoist must be marked to identify the corresponding base control unit to be used with it.
(10) The maximum distance between a remote control panel and the crane or hoist being operated by the remote control system must
(a) not exceed the limit specified by the control system manufacturer, and
(b) be communicated to the operator before the operator uses the crane or hoist.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.29 Operator protection

The operator of a crane or hoist must be protected against hazardous conditions such as falling or flying objects and excessive heat or cold that
could adversely affect the health or safety of the operator.

14.30 Cab windows

(1) Cab windows on a mobile crane must be made of safety glazing materials meeting the requirements of ANSI/SAE Z26.1-1996, American
National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials for Glazing Motor Vehicles and Motor Vehicle Equipment Operating on Land Highways
- Safety Standard.
(2) Cab windows on a hoist or crane, other than a mobile crane, must be laminated glass, tempered glass, wired glass or clear polycarbonate
plastic.
(3) Operator cab windows on a crane or hoist must
(a) be kept clear
(b) provide an unobstructed field of vision toward the load hook, and
(c) have window wipers, if necessary to maintain a clear view through the window.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 139/2021, effective September 1, 2021.]

14.31 Operator's seat

The operator's seat on a crane or hoist must be of a design that allows the operator to safely operate the equipment and the seat must be kept in
good condition.

14.32 Storage

(1) The operator's cab of a crane or hoist must be kept free of unnecessary tools, material or equipment.
(2) Adequate storage facilities must be provided if it is necessary to keep tools or equipment in the operator's cab of a crane or hoist.

14.33 Fire extinguisher

A fire extinguisher having at least a 10 BC rating must be immediately available in the cab of each crane.
Equipment Operation

14.34 Operator qualifications

(1) A crane or hoist must only be operated by a qualified person who has been instructed to operate the equipment.
(2) A person must demonstrate competency, including familiarity with the operating instructions for the crane or hoist and the code of signals for
hoisting operations authorized by the Board before operating the equipment.
(3) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 243/2006, effective January 1, 2007.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 243/2006, effective January 1, 2007.]

14.34.1 Operator certification

On and after July 1, 2007, a mobile crane, tower crane or boom truck must be operated only
(a) by a person with a valid operator's certificate issued by a person acceptable to the Board, and
(b) in accordance with any conditions stipulated on the certificate.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 243/2006, effective January 1, 2007.]

14.35 Pre-use inspection

(1) Before an operator uses a crane or hoist, the operator must ensure that
(a) the crane or hoist was inspected for that work shift, and
(b) the control and safety devices were tested for that work shift.
(1.1) The inspection and testing in subsection (1) must be carried out in the manner specified
(a) by the manufacturer,
(b) in the applicable design or safety standards set out in section 14.2, and
(c) in this Regulation.
(2) Any defects found during inspection or use of a crane or hoist must be recorded in the inspection and maintenance record system and be
reported immediately to the supervisor, who must determine the course of action to be taken.
(3) If a defect affects the safe operation of the crane or hoist, the equipment must not be used until the defect has been remedied.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.36 Load weight

(1) The weight of each load to be hoisted by a crane or hoist must be determined and communicated to the equipment operator and to any person
rigging the load.
(2) If the weight of a load to be lifted cannot be accurately determined, the crane or hoist to be used for the lift must have a load weight indicator
or an overload prevention system.
(3) Subsections (1) and (2) do not apply to logging equipment that is being used to lift logs or to lift a log trailer.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.37 Calibration

(1) The following devices or systems on a crane or hoist must be calibrated at the intervals specified by the manufacturer and whenever there is an
indication the device or system is not functioning correctly:
(a) a load weighing device;
(b) a load moment indicator;
(c) an overload prevention system.
(2) The dates of calibration under subsection (1) must be recorded in the inspection and maintenance records system for the crane or hoist.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.37.1 Operator's duties

The operator of a crane, hoist or boom truck must have full control of the equipment controls whenever the hoisting equipment is in use, and
engage in no other duties while operating the equipment.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 258/2008, effective January 1, 2009.]

14.38 Safe lifting

(1) The rated capacity of a crane or hoist must not be exceeded.

(2) The operator of a crane or hoist must not move a load unless the operator is satisfied that the load can be handled safely.
(3) A load must be secured during a lift to ensure that all or any part of the load cannot be dislodged.
(4) A load line on a crane or hoist must not contact anything other than the load block or hook and the sheaves and hoist drum.
(5) Tag lines or other effective means must be used when necessary to control hazardous movement of a load or to assist with positioning a load.
(6) If a crane or hoist is being operated at the same time and in the same location as other work activity, the employer or the prime contractor must
organize and control the work of any persons who are not involved in that operation to ensure that the operation can be carried out safely.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.39 Contact with loads and structures

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 223/2022, effective March 1, 2023.]

14.40 Swing and shear hazards

(1) If a hazard is created by the swing or shearing movement of a load, cab, counterweight or any other part of a crane or hoist, the operator of the
crane or hoist must not move the equipment when a person is within range of the swing or shearing movement of the load or equipment.
(2) If a hazard is created by the swing or shearing movement of a load, cab, counterweight or any other part of a crane or hoist, a person must not
enter or remain within the range of the swing or shearing movement of the load or equipment.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.41 Position of equipment

(1) Equipment must be positioned so that no moving part of the equipment will come within 60 cm (2 ft) of any obstruction in any area accessible
to workers.
(2) If the clearance required by subsection (1) cannot be provided, entry to such areas must be prevented by barriers or other effective means.

14.42 Tandem lift

(1) If a tandem lift is a critical lift or if the lifted load is to be moved laterally, the tandem lift must be carried out under the direction of a qualified
supervisor who
(a) is not operating a crane, hoist or other piece of powered lifting equipment, and
(b) is responsible for the safe conduct of the operation.
(2) A written lift plan must be prepared for every tandem lift and must be available at the worksite during the lift.
(3) The lift plan required in subsection (2) must include the following:
(a) rigging details;
(b) wind speed limitations;
(c) maximum hoist line speed;
(d) maximum crane travel speed, if applicable;
(e) load distribution;
(f) the need for and position of signallers.
(4) If a tandem lift involves the use of a tower crane, the lift plan required in subsection (2) must be certified by a professional engineer.
(5) At a pre-job meeting held immediately before commencing hoisting operations for a tandem lift, the lift plan required in subsection (2) must be
communicated to all people involved and the supervisor must document the meeting.
(6) The pre-job meeting required under subsection (5) must be repeated whenever there is a change in the people or equipment involved in the
tandem lift.
(7) Effective communication must be established and maintained between all people involved in a tandem lift.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.42.1 Critical lift

(1) A written lift plan must be prepared for every critical lift and must be available at the worksite during the lift.
(2) The written lift plan required in subsection (1) must include the following:
(a) rigging details;
(b) wind speed limitations;
(c) maximum hoist line speed;
(d) maximum crane travel speed, if applicable;
(e) load distribution;
(f) the need for and position of signallers.
(3) At a pre-job meeting held immediately before commencing hoisting operations for a critical lift, the lift plan required in subsection (1) must be
communicated to all people involved and the supervisor must document the meeting.
(4) The pre-job meeting required under subsection (3) must be repeated whenever there is a change in the people or equipment involved in the
critical lift.
(5) Effective communication must be established and maintained between all people involved in a critical lift.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.43 Travelling with a load

(1) When a crane or hoist is travelling with a load, the operator of the crane or hoist must ensure that the load is carried as close to the ground or
grade as possible and rigged to control load swing.
(2) When a crane or hoist is travelling with a load, adequate safety measures must be taken to ensure people are not endangered by the movement
of the crane, hoist or load.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.44 Loads over work areas

(1) If practicable, work must be arranged to prevent passing a load over any person.
(2) A crane or hoist operator must not pass a load over a person, unless no practicable alternative exists and then only after the person has been
warned of the danger by an audible alarm or other effective means.
(3) A person working at a workplace must not stand under or pass beneath a suspended load.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.45 Unattended loads

A load must not be left suspended from or supported by a crane or hoist when an operator is not at the controls.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.46 Vertical load line

The load line above the load hook or the load block of a crane or hoist must be kept vertical when lifting a load in order to prevent side loading of
the crane or the load swinging.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]
14.47 Signals

(1) When the operator of a crane or hoist does not have a clear and unobstructed view of the boom, jib, load line, load hook and load throughout
the whole range of the hoisting operation, the operator must act only on the directions of a qualified signaller who has a clear view of the things the
operator cannot see.
(2) The operator of the crane or hoist must stop the operation of the equipment on receiving a stop signal from any person.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.48 Alternative to hand signals

(1) Two-way radio or other audio or video systems acceptable to the Board must be used if distance, atmospheric conditions or other
circumstances make the use of hand signals hazardous or impracticable.
(2) Audio and video communication systems used in a hoisting operation must be designed, installed, operated and maintained according to a
standard acceptable to the Board.

14.49 Dedicated radio system

(1) A two-way radio system used for communications between the operator of a tower crane or a self erecting tower crane and the riggers and
signallers working with that operator, must operate on a frequency and at a transmitter power assigned and coordinated by the Board or by a
person acceptable to the Board.
(2) Multi-channel radios are not permitted for use to direct crane or hoist movement.
(3) Only the operator of the crane and the riggers and signallers working with the operator may have the capability to transmit on the radio
frequency assigned under subsection (1).
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.49.1 Communication between equipment operators

If, during the operation of a crane or hoist, another piece of equipment is operating in the vicinity and has the reach to interfere with the movement
of the crane or hoist, or the load being handled,
(a) each operator must have effective voice communication with every other operator, and
(b) written procedures must be developed and implemented to ensure coordination of the operation of the equipment to prevent any contact
between a component or suspended load of the equipment and a component or suspended load of the crane or hoist.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 223/2022, effective March 1, 2023.]

14.50 Unhooking loads

A load on a crane or hoist load hook must be safely landed and supported, before being unhooked.

14.51 Riding hook or load

A worker must not ride on a load, sling, hook or any other rigging equipment.

14.52 Induced voltage

(1) Before a crane or hoist is operated near a source such as a radio transmitter or energized high voltage electrical equipment which may induce
an electric charge which could pose a hazard to workers, the following precautions must be implemented:
(a) the crane or hoist must be effectively grounded;
(b) any induced electric charge on the load must be dissipated by applying grounding cables or by other effective means before workers contact
the load;
(c) flammable materials must be removed from the immediate work area.
(2) Subsection (1)(a) and (b) does not apply if work is being performed on a power system in accordance with the requirements of Part 19
(Electrical Safety).

14.52.1 Work near high voltage

A crane or hoist must be operated in a manner that prevents any part of the crane or hoist, load line, rigging or load from coming within the
minimum distance of energized high voltage electrical conductors or equipment as specified in Part 19.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.53 High voltage electrical conductors

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

Bridge, Gantry and Overhead Travelling Cranes

14.54 Operational and running tests

(1) This section applies to

(a) a bridge crane, gantry crane or overhead travelling crane that was installed after January 1, 1999, and
(b) a crane referred to in paragraph (a) or its runway that has been reinstalled, modified or rebuilt.
(1.1) The following tests must be performed before the equipment described in subsection (1) is used for the first time after it has been installed,
reinstalled, modified or rebuilt, as applicable:
(a) all crane motions, holding brakes and travel brakes must be tested to meet the manufacturer's specifications and the requirements of the
applicable design or safety standard for when the hook is carrying a load at rated capacity;
(b) all circuits, controls, interlocks and sequences of operation of the equipment must be tested to ensure they are functioning properly;
(c) all crane motions, holding brakes and travel brakes must be tested to prove the crane's ability to safely handle a load of 125% of the crane's
rated capacity;
(d) all limit switches, brakes and other protective devices must be tested to ensure they function properly when the crane is carrying a load of
100% of the rated capacity;
(e) structural deflection must be measured with a load of 100% of the rated capacity and must not exceed the allowable deflection specified by the
applicable design standard;
(f) the load must be travelled over the full length of the bridge and trolley runways during the load tests at 100% and 125% of rated capacity, and
only the parts of runways that have been successfully load tested may be placed into service.
(2) A record of all load tests must be included in the equipment record system giving details of the tests and verification of the loads used, and be
signed by the person conducting the tests.
(3) A replacement crane or hoist to be installed on an existing runway may be load tested in the manufacturer's facility and installed on the existing
runway provided that the rated capacity of the replacement crane or hoist and the loads imposed on the runway by the replacement crane or hoist
are equal to or less than the previously tested load rating for the runway.
(4) In the circumstances set out in subsection (3), the existing runway is not required to be load tested as required in subsection (1.1) unless the
runway has been modified since it was previously load tested.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.54.1 Detailed inspection

A bridge crane, gantry crane or overhead crane must be inspected by a qualified person in accordance with
(a) the inspection criteria specified by the manufacturer of the crane,
(b) the applicable design or safety standard specified in section 14.2, and
(c) the requirements of this Regulation.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.55 Up travel limit

(1) A bridge, gantry or other overhead travelling crane must have a device which will prevent hook travel beyond the safe upper limit at all design
hoist speeds.
(2) The device required by subsection (1) must be tested at the beginning of each shift.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.56 Electrical conductors

Electrical conductors for the bridge and trolley must be located or guarded to prevent contact by workers.

14.57 Power shutoff

An electrically powered crane, other than a monorail crane built prior to January 1, 1985, must have a means for the operator to safely interrupt
the main electric circuit under any load condition and this means must require a manual reset before power is restored to the crane.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.58 Direction markings

A bridge, gantry, or overhead travelling crane operated by a pendant or remote control must have markings on the crane structure or building,
visible to the operator, clearly indicating the direction of hook, bridge and trolley motions compatible with those marked on the controls.
Back to Top
Pneumatically Powered Hoists and Winches

14.59 Pneumatically powered hoists

(1) The air supply for a pneumatically powered hoist or winch must
(a) be sufficient to safely operate the hoist, and
(b) not exceed the maximum allowable pressure for the operation of the hoist, as specified by the hoist manufacturer.
(2) Air supply hoses for a pneumatically powered hoist or winch must be secured against inadvertent disconnection.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.60 Electric hoists

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

Back to Top
Manually Powered Hoists

14.61 Brakes

A manually powered hoist must have a ratchet and pawl, load brake, or other mechanism to hold the load at any height.

14.62 Crank handles

The crank handle for a crank operated winch without automatic load brakes must be
(a) prevented from slipping off the crankshaft while hoisting, and
(b) removed from the crankshaft before the load is lowered.
Back to Top
Mobile Cranes, Boom Trucks and Sign Trucks

14.63 Carrier vehicle

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

14.64 Load weight indicators

(1) A mobile crane or boom truck with a rated capacity of 10 tonnes (11 tons) or more must have a device that measures and indicates the weight
of the load on the load hook or disengages crane functions whose movement can cause the mobile crane or boom truck to lift beyond the rated
capacity.
(2) A load indicating device required by subsection (1) must meet the requirements of ANSI/SAE Recommended Practice J376-APR85, Load
Indicating Devices in Lifting Crane Service.
(3) A crane being used for duty cycle work is exempt from the requirements of subsection (1) if the load applied to the crane is safely below the
rated capacity of the crane and if the possibility of an unexpected overload does not exist.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.65 Cranes on floating supports

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.66 Level turntable

(1) A mobile crane or boom truck must be operated with the crane turntable or boom truck frame level, unless the manufacturer provides that it
may be operated otherwise.
(2) Level indicating devices must be provided to permit the operator of a mobile crane or boom truck to determine whether the crane turntable or
boom truck frame is level within the limits specified by the manufacturer.
(3) When a mobile crane or boom truck is operating on a floating support, the rated capacity must be determined by a professional engineer or the
manufacturer of the crane or boom truck, taking into account the list and trim characteristics of the floating support and the mobile crane or boom
truck operating together as a system.
(4) When a mobile crane or boom truck is used on a floating support, a device to measure the list of the floating support must be provided and
located so it can be read by the operator from the operator's position for the mobile crane or boom truck.
(5) A mobile crane or boom truck being used on a floating support must be blocked and secured as necessary to prevent it from shifting relative to
the bearing surface of the floating support.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.67 Outriggers and stabilizers

(1) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

(2) Outrigger beams and stabilizers on a crane or boom truck must be marked to indicate when the necessary extension has been achieved.
(3) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
(4) Floats must be secured to the outrigger jacks of a crane or boom truck when outriggers are used.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.68 Tires

Mobile crane or boom truck tire type, condition and inflation must be as specified by the manufacturer when lifting on rubber.

14.69 Supporting surface

(1) A mobile crane or boom truck must be used only on a surface capable of safely supporting the equipment and any hoisted load.
(2) If a mobile crane or boom truck will be used adjacent to an excavation, slope or backfilled area, a qualified person must determine the location
for the equipment for hoisting operations.(3) In subsection (2), "adjacent to an excavation" has the same meaning as in section 20.1.
(4) Blocking, shoring or cribbing must be sized and used as necessary to ensure the load from a mobile crane or boom truck support does not
exceed the bearing capacity of the supporting surface.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.70 Travelling with a load

A mobile crane or boom truck may travel with a suspended load only if
(a) the crane manufacturer specifies load ratings for this operation, and
(b) the operation is carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for this operation.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.71 Annual inspection

(1) A mobile crane or boom truck must be inspected at least once every 12 months in accordance with good engineering practice to ensure it
meets
(a) the crane or boom truck manufacturer's specifications,
(b) the requirements of the applicable design or safety standard specified in section 14.2, and
(c) the requirements of this Regulation.
(2) A mobile crane or boom truck must not be used after an inspection under subsection (1) unless a professional engineer certifies it is safe for use
on the basis of that inspection.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.72 Boom inspection

(1) A crane boom used with a vibratory hammer for driving piles must be inspected at least once every 3 months in accordance with good
engineering practice to ensure it meets
(a) the crane boom manufacturer's specifications,
(b) the requirements of the applicable design or safety standard specified in section 14.2, and
(c) the requirements of this Regulation,
(2) A crane boom used with a vibratory pile extractor or with a drop hammer or used for dynamic compaction must be inspected at least once a
month in accordance with good engineering practice to ensure it meets
(a) the crane boom manufacturer's specifications,
(b) the requirements of the applicable design or safety standard specified in section 14.2, and
(c) the requirements of this Regulation
(3) A boom must not be used after an inspection under subsection (1) or (2) unless a professional engineer certifies it is safe for use on the basis of
that inspection.
(4) A crane used in any operation described in subsection (1) or (2) must not be returned to lifting service unless a professional engineer inspects
the crane and certifies that it is safe for such use.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.73 Sign trucks

(1) A sign truck must be inspected, maintained and operated according to the requirements for mobile cranes, and for elevating work platforms in
Part 13 (Ladders, Scaffolds and Temporary Work Platforms).
(2) When a sign truck is being used, the load rating charts for the configuration in use must be available at the workplace.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]
Back to Top
Tower Cranes

14.73.1 Definition

In sections 14.73.2 to 14.93, "tower crane" means a tower crane that is erected on site from component parts or that is self erecting.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]
14.73.2 Tower crane erection

The erection, climbing and dismantling of a tower crane must be done by qualified persons and in accordance with the instructions of
(a) the crane manufacturer, or
(b) a professional engineer, if the installation varies from the crane manufacturer's instructions.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.74 Tower crane support

(1) The foundation for support of a tower crane must be certified by a professional engineer.
(2) The design of shoring and bracing to support a tower crane must be certified by a professional engineer, and the shoring and bracing must be
constructed as specified by the design.
(3) If a tower crane is supported partially or fully by, or connected to, a building or structure, the connections to and any bracing or shoring of the
building or structure necessary to support the tower crane must be certified by a professional engineer.
(4) The bearing capacity of the supporting surface for a tower crane must be determined by a professional engineer.
(5) The loads from a tower crane must be distributed onto its supporting surface to prevent the bearing capacity of the supporting surface being
exceeded.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.75 Before use

(1) Before a tower crane is put in service, the erector of the tower crane must verify that the crane has been erected according to
(a) the manufacturer's specifications, or
(b) the specifications of a professional engineer, if the engineer has authorized the crane to be erected otherwise.
(2) If a tower crane is not erected according to the manufacturer's specifications a professional engineer must certify before the crane is put in
service that
(a) the variations from the manufacturer's specifications meet the requirements of the applicable design or safety standard,
(b) the load charts are adjusted as necessary, and
(c) the crane is safe for use.
(3) The erector of a tower crane must adjust the overload prevention system as necessary to meet the load chart for the crane as erected.
(4) Before a tower crane, other than a self erecting tower crane, is put in service after its mast has been repositioned, a professional engineer must
certify that the parts of the crane affected by the repositioning process have been properly installed and any required reshoring for, and bracing to,
the supporting structure is in place.
(5) Before a tower crane is put in service following its erection or the repositioning of its mast, the person responsible for the erection of the crane
or the repositioning of its mast must make available at the workplace where the crane is installed a report verifying that
(a) the certification documents required by section 14.74 and subsections (2) and (4) of this section are available at the workplace, and
(b) the overload prevention system of the crane has been adjusted as required in subsection (3), including specifying the load limits set for the
various devices.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.76 Identification

The interchangeable structural components of tower cranes must be uniquely identified and that unique identification must be used when referring to
structural components in reports for inspection and testing, and certifications for repairs and modifications.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.77 Structural inspection

(1) Subject to subsection (4), before the erection of a tower crane, the structural components of the crane must be
(a) inspected to determine their integrity by a qualified person using non-destructive testing (NDT) methods meeting the requirements of the
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB), and
(b) certified by a professional engineer as safe for use after the inspection in paragraph (a) and any necessary repairs.
(2) If a tower crane remains erected at a workplace for more than 12 months,
(a) its structural components must be inspected to determine their integrity by a qualified person using NDT methods meeting the requirements of
the CGSB, and
(b) after the inspection required by paragraph (a), the crane, including any necessary repairs, must be certified by a professional engineer as safe
for use.
(3) If a tower crane is scheduled to be dismantled within 15 months of its being erected, subsection (2) does not apply provided that a visual
inspection, conducted 12 months after erection of the crane and supervised by a professional engineer, shows no evidence of cracking or other
structural weakness.
(4) A self erecting tower crane must be
(a) inspected visually by a qualified person each time it is erected, and
(b) inspected and certified under subsection (1) at least once every 12 months.
(5) Subsection (3) does not apply to a self erecting tower crane.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.78 Structures kept clean

Tower crane structures must be kept clean and free of concrete and other debris that can hinder inspection and the base area must be clear of
debris and the accumulation of water.

14.79 Manual and records

The following documents respecting operation, inspection, maintenance and repair of a tower crane must be kept at the workplace where and
while the crane is erected:
(a) the portions of the manufacturer's manual or engineer's instructions required by section 14.12 (3);
(b) all records dated from the date of structural certification under section 14.77, including those specified in section 14.75 (5);
(c) in the case of a self erecting tower crane, all records dated from the date of the last certification of the crane.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.80 Counterweights and ballasts

(1) Counterweights and ballasts used on a tower crane must be as specified by the original equipment manufacturer or by a professional engineer.
(2) Each counterweight and ballast element must be accurately weighed and the weight of the counterweight or element must be clearly and
durably marked on it.
(3) The weight of counterweight and any ballast installed on a tower crane must be recorded in the report required by section 14.75 (5).
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.81 Limit devices

(0.1) In this section:

"limit device" means a device on a tower crane that is designed to control the loads or motions of the crane, and includes the switches and
devices described in subsections (1) and (5);
"warning device" means a device, such as a visual signal, audio signal or gauge, attached to a limit device that indicates when the limit device
malfunctions.
(1) A tower crane must have automatic travel limit switches and automatic overload prevention devices that prevent overloading at any trolley
position, the load block from travelling beyond the highest allowable position specified by the manufacturer and the trolley from travelling beyond
the allowable limit specified by the manufacturer.
(2) Subject to subsection (4), limit devices on a tower crane must be tested before the crane is first used on each work shift
(a) in accordance with the manufacturer's testing procedures, or
(b) if the manufacturer's testing procedures are not available, in accordance with testing procedures approved by a professional engineer.
(3) Any malfunction of a limit device, warning device or safety device on a tower crane that is discovered after testing or at any other time must be
remedied before the crane is used.
(4) If it is not practicable, due to the configuration of the workplace, to position sufficient test weights to test the maximum load limit switch before
the crane is first used on each work shift, the maximum load limit switch must
(a) be set to activate at a load of less than 80% of the maximum rated capacity for the crane and tested using test blocks, and
(b) be reset to the maximum load limit for the crane and tested using test blocks before making any lift that is greater than the load limit setting
established under paragraph (a).
(5) A tower crane with a luffing boom must have an automatic limit device that prevents the boom being raised beyond the maximum permitted
boom angle.
(6) In subsection (5), "luffing boom" means a boom that is raised and lowered about a pivot point to change the load radius.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 9/2017, effective May 1, 2017.]

14.82 Test blocks

(1) Test blocks for testing overload prevention devices on a tower crane must be available at the tower crane site.
(2) The weights of test blocks required by subsection (1) must be as specified by
(a) the crane manufacturer if the crane is erected in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, or
(b) a professional engineer if the crane has been erected other than in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
(2.1) The weight of each test block required by subsection (1) must be accurately determined and durably and legibly marked on that block.
(3) Test blocks, including the lifting point, must be designed by the crane manufacturer or a professional engineer.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.83 Operator's cab

(1) The design, location and method of attaching a tower crane operator's cab must be approved by the crane manufacturer or by a professional
engineer.
(2) The rated capacity of a tower crane must be adjusted as necessary if using a cab type and location not approved by the crane manufacturer.

14.84 Monitoring jib swing

(1) The operator of a tower crane must have a clear view of the jib of the crane whenever the jib is being slewed.
(2) Subsection (1) does not apply if a signaller or a rigger who is able to see the jib of the crane is in communication with the operator of the crane
and provides directions to the operator.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.84.1 Overlapping operating zones

(1) In this section:

"operating zone" means,
(a) in the case of a tower crane, the complete circular area covered by the swing of the tower crane's jib as it rotates, and
(b) in the case of any other equipment, the area covered by the swing or movement of the equipment;
"overlapping operating zone" means the area where the operating zone of a tower crane intersects the operating zone of another tower crane or
other piece of equipment.
(2) If practicable, an employer must ensure that a tower crane is erected to avoid creating an overlapping operating zone.
(3) If the operating zone of a tower crane overlaps the operating zone of another tower crane, the following procedures apply:
(a) the cranes must be erected and maintained so that the lowest point of any component of the higher crane is at least 3 m (10 ft.) above the
highest component of the lower crane that crosses into the overlapping operating zone;
(b) the boundaries of the overlapping operating zone must be marked so the boundaries are visible to the operators of all the affected cranes;
(c) any load suspended by the higher crane must be positioned at a location that ensures at least 3 m (10 ft.) lateral clearance between it and an
operator's cab on the jib of the lower crane;
(c.1) if practicable, each crane must be equipped with and operated under the control of a zone-limiting device with anti-collision control;
(d) written operating procedures in accordance with subsection (4) must be developed and implemented to coordinate lifting tasks in the
overlapping operating zone to prevent contact between a component or suspended load of one crane and a component or suspended load of
another crane.
(4) The procedures required by subsection (3)(d) must do the following:
(a) minimize the time each crane spends in the overlapping operating zone;
(b) establish that the lower crane has priority for working in the overlapping operating zone;
(c) establish that the operator of the higher crane requires temporary permission from the operator of the lower crane for each lifting sequence in
the overlapping operating zone;
(d) establish a means and protocol for communication between the operators of the cranes when a crane operates in the overlapping operating
zone, including a requirement for the operator of the higher crane to contact the operator of the lower crane before the higher crane enters the
zone;
(e) establish that, when the lower crane is being operated or when a person is on the lower crane, the higher crane will not pass a load over the
lower crane unless
(i) the activity meets one or both of the following criteria:
(A) the higher crane is being used to erect, service or dismantle the lower crane;
(B) there is a minimum clearance of 18 m (60 ft.) between the underside of the jib of the higher crane and the highest point on the lower crane that
is within the tip radius of the higher crane, and
(ii) written operating procedures for the activity are developed and implemented to ensure the safety of workers.
(5) If the operating zone of a tower crane overlaps the operating zone of another piece of equipment with a reach capable of interfering with the
movement of the crane or hoist, or the load being lifted
(a) written operating procedures must be developed and implemented to coordinate lifting tasks in the overlapping operating zone to prevent
contact between a component or suspended load of the tower crane and a component or suspended load of the other equipment, and
(b) the boundaries of the overlapping operating zone must be marked so the boundaries are visible to the operators of all affected cranes and
equipment.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 223/2022, effective March 1, 2023.]

14.85 Clearance and freedom to slew

(1) Except as otherwise required by this Regulation, at all times and under all load conditions, a tower crane must have vertical and lateral
clearances, between any component of the tower crane jib and counter jib and any obstruction, that are the greater of
(a) the vertical and lateral clearances specified by the crane manufacturer, and
(b) a vertical clearance of 1 m (3.3 ft.) and a lateral clearance of 30 cm (1 ft.).
(2) At all times and unless otherwise specified by the crane manufacturer, a tower crane must be able to slew 360 degrees.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.86 Freedom to slew

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

14.87 Communication

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.88 Access

(1) A tower crane must have a fixed ladder installed in or on the mast to provide access to the jib and crown of the crane.
(2) The ladder under subsection (1) must meet the following requirements:
(a) the ladder must be able to support two 1.1 kN (250 lbs.) point loads between any two consecutive points where the ladder is attached to the
crane;
(b) there must be a minimum horizontal distance of 15 cm (6 in.) between the rungs and the object to which the ladder is attached;
(c) landing platforms must be provided at least every 9 m (30 ft.) on the ladder;
(d) each section of the ladder must be offset horizontally from adjacent sections or the landing platforms must have trap doors;
(e) if a section of the ladder has a climb exceeding 6 m (20 ft.) in length, that section of ladder must have a ladder safety cage 68 cm to 76 cm
(27 in. to 30 in.) in diameter or a ladder safety device must be used.
(3) Each tower crane jib must have a continuous walkway from the mast to the tip.
(4) The walkway referred to in subsection (3) must meet the following requirements:
(a) the walkway must be at least 30 cm (12 in.) wide and constructed with a non-skid surface;
(b) a handline, which is approximately 1 m (39 in.) above the level of the walkway, and a midline must be provided on both sides of the walkway
not more than 30 cm (12 in.) out from the edge of the walkway and supported at intervals not exceeding 3 m (10 ft.);
(c) the handline and midline referred to in paragraph (b) must be wire rope of at least 1 cm (3/8 in.) diameter;
(d) if it is not practicable to provide handlines in accordance with paragraph (b), alternative means of fall protection, such as a horizontal lifeline
system, must be provided in accordance with the requirements of Part 11 (Fall Protection) and must be set out in the fall protection plan.
(5) If, due to the design or size of the tower crane, it is not practicable to meet the requirements set out in subsections (1) to (4), alternative safe
means of access must be provided.
(6) The climbing space of a tower crane mast must be clear of protruding objects and must provide a safe and unobstructed passage.
(7) A written fall protection plan, which addresses the requirements of fall protection when a person is operating, inspecting, servicing and
maintaining the tower crane, must be developed and implemented.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.89 Jib access

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.90 Unobstructed passage

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.91 Hoisting ropes

(1) A rotation resistant hoisting rope on a tower crane must be shortened by the removal of 3 m (10 ft) of rope at the dead end after every 500
hours of use unless
(a) otherwise specified by the rope manufacturer,
(b) the rope has 14 or more outer strands, or
(c) the rope has a plastic coated inner core.
(2) The hoisting rope on a tower crane must be properly seized before cutting.
(3) The equipment records for a tower crane must contain the following information about the hoisting rope installed on the crane:
(a) the name of the manufacturer or supplier of the rope;
(b) the type of rope installed as described by the rope construction, number of outer strands, type of lay, direction of lay and type of core;
(c) the diameter and the length of the rope;
(d) the nominal or minimum rated breaking strength of the rope;
(e) the rated working load limit for the rope;
(f) the date the rope was installed;
(g) if the rope was not new at the time of installation, the name of the qualified person who inspected the rope before installation on the crane to
ensure that the rope was in a suitable condition for use as the hoist line on the crane;
(h) the name of the qualified person who installed the rope.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 243/2006, effective January 1, 2007.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.92 Wind limitations

(1) An anemometer must be mounted on the crown, apex or operator's cab of each tower crane.
(2) The readout for the anemometer required by subsection (1) must be readable by the operator while at the crane controls.
(3) Tower crane operations must stop when a load cannot be handled safely because of wind.
(4) In the absence of the manufacturer's specifications for maximum permitted wind speed during crane operation, the maximum allowable wind
speed in which a tower crane may be used is 50 km/h (30 mph), or less if a load cannot be handled safely because of wind.
(5) A sign or other item that would increase the surface area of a crane structure exposed to wind must not be installed unless authorized by the
crane manufacturer or a professional engineer.
(6) A tower crane must not be erected, operated or dismantled when the wind speed exceeds the upper limit specified by the crane manufacturer
for erection, operation or dismantling of the crane.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.93 Temperature limitations

Tower crane operations must stop when the ambient temperature drops below -18°C (0°F) or as otherwise specified by the crane manufacturer
or a professional engineer.

14.94 Counterjib

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

Miscellaneous Material Hoists

14.95 Standards

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

Back to Top
Construction Material Hoists

14.96 Certifications and instructions

(1) Before a construction material hoist is put into use, a professional engineer must certify that
(a) the hoist is safe for use, and
(b) the installation of the hoist complies with
(i) the design criteria for that installation,
(ii) the hoist manufacturer's specifications,
(iii) the requirements of CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z256-M87, Safety Code for Material Hoists, and
(iv) the requirements of this Regulation.
(2) If, after certification under subsection (1), a modification is made to the structure, mechanical components or control system of a construction
material hoist or it is changed through the addition or removal of a support section of the hoist, the hoist must not be used until it is recertified as
safe for use by a professional engineer.
(3) Subsections (1) and (2) do not apply to a light duty portable material hoist installed and operated in accordance with the hoist manufacturer's
instructions.
(4) A copy of the certifications required in subsections (1) and (2) or the manufacturer's instructions referred to in subsection (3) must be available
at the workplace where the hoist is installed.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.97 Rider restriction

A worker must not ride on a construction material hoist unless it is necessary to do so for inspection and maintenance of the hoist.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.98 Notices

(1) The net rated capacity of each construction material hoist must be clearly and durably marked upon the hoist structure in letters or figures at
least 5 cm (2 in) high in a location which is visible to persons involved with operation of the hoist.
(2) Each construction material hoist must prominently display a notice stating that no person may ride on the equipment.

14.99 Gate interlock systems

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.100 Hoistway entrances

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.101 Hoist platform

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.102 Hoist runway

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.103 Ratchets and pawls

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.104 Electric brakes

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.105 Emergency devices

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.106 Travel and load limit switches

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.107 Erection and maintenance

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.108 Operator qualifications

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.109 Operator responsibilities

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.110 Inspection

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.111 Testing safety and control devices

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.112 Securing the platform

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.113 Signal systems

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.114 Operating signals

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.115 Operating restrictions

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

Back to Top
Chimney Hoists

14.116 Standard to use

If it is not practicable to provide safe access to a work platform on a chimney or similar structure using stairs or other means acceptable under the
BC Building Code or this Regulation, a chimney hoist meeting the requirements of WorkSafeBC Standard 14.116 - Chimney Hoists, set out in
Schedule 14-A, may be used to provide access for any person.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

14.117 Certification

(1) Before a chimney hoist is used, a professional engineer must certify that
(a) the chimney hoist is safe for use, and
(b) the installation of the hoist complies with
(i) the design criteria for that installation,
(ii) the hoist manufacturer's specifications,
(iii) the requirements of WorkSafeBC Standard 14.116 - Chimney Hoists, set out in Schedule 14-A, and
(iv) the requirements of this Regulation.
(2) A copy of the certification required in subsection (1) must be available at the workplace where the chimney hoist is installed.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

14.118 Support structures

The structure supporting a chimney hoist, together with all hoisting gear and equipment, must be well constructed, accurately aligned, securely
anchored and have the required strength and stability to safely withstand the loads imposed.

14.119 Load rating

The rated capacity of the hoist of a chimney hoist must be conspicuously marked on the hoist and must not be exceeded.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

14.120 Emergency brakes

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.121 Safety factors

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.122 Drive restrictions

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.123 Brakes

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.124 Limit switches

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.125 Speed governor

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.126 Hoisting speed

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.127 Guardrails and gates

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.128 Raising materials

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.129 Communication

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.130 Fall protection

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.131 Operator qualifications

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

14.132 Unattended controls

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 320/2007, effective February 1, 2008.]

Back to Top
Schedule 14-A WorkSafeBC Standard 14.116 - Chimney Hoists (sections 14.2(9), 14.116 and 14.117)

WorkSafeBC Standard 14.116 — Chimney Hoists

1 Scope

1 This standard sets out the minimum requirements that are in addition to those set out in sections 14.116 to 14.119 of this Regulation for the
design and use of a chimney hoist to transport personnel to a fixed work platform on a chimney or similar structure.

2 Definitions and interpretation

(1) In this standard:

"cage" means the fully enclosed platform of a chimney hoist, which platform is used to raise or lower one or more persons to a fixed work
platform on a chimney or similar structure;
"hoist", in respect of a chimney hoist, means the apparatus that is used to raise or lower the cage;
"rated capacity", in respect of a cage or a hoist, means the maximum weight the cage or hoist is rated by its manufacturer to carry.
(2) The definitions set out in ANSI/ASSE Standard A10.22-2007, Safety Requirements for Rope-Guided and Non-Guided Workers' Hoists,
apply in this standard.

3 General Requirements

(1) A chimney hoist must

(a) be designed, constructed, erected, disassembled, inspected, maintained and operated as specified by the manufacturer or a professional
engineer, and
(b) meet the requirements of ANSI/ASSE Standard A10.22-2007, Safety Requirements for Rope-Guided and Non-Guided Workers' Hoists,
except as otherwise specified in this standard.
(2) A chimney hoist must have a cage.

4 Certification after alteration

(1) Following any alteration to a chimney hoist, other than ordinary adjustments or repairs,
(a) the chimney hoist must be tested by a professional engineer and certified as required under section 14.117 of this Regulation, and
(b) the design documents and operating instructions must be updated by the professional engineer as necessary to ensure the documentation is
complete and allows for safe use of the chimney hoist.
(2) A copy of the certification required under subsection (1) must be available at the workplace where the chimney hoist is installed.

5 Emergency stopping devices

A chimney hoist must be outfitted with emergency stopping devices on at least two separate guide wire ropes that will apply automatically to
prevent the cage from falling if a wire rope fails

6 Safety factors

Suspension and guide wire ropes, supporting structures, slings and metal fittings used on a chimney hoist must have a safety factor of 10.

7 Drive restrictions

A hoist must have a positive drive and there must not be a clutch between the transmission and the hoist drum.
8 Brakes

A hoist must have two independent braking systems: one that applies automatically when the controls are in the neutral position, and one that
applies automatically in the event of loss of power.

9 Terminal stopping devices

A chimney hoist must have upper and lower terminal stopping devices that automatically stop the cage from normal travel speed, within the top and
bottom travel limits.

10 Speed governor

A hoist must have a governing device that will effectively prevent the drum speed from exceeding 110% of the design speed.

11 Equipment condition

The hoist, wire ropes and cage of a chimney hoist must be in good working order with all components, controls and functions meeting, and
operating in accordance with, the manufacturer's specifications, the professional engineer's design specifications and this Regulation.

12 Cage markings

The cage must be legibly marked to show

(a) the name of the manufacturer or certifying professional engineer,
(b) a unique identification number or code that links to the design and certification documentation for the chimney hoist from the certifying
professional engineer,
(c) the weight of the cage, and
(d) the rated capacity of the cage.

13 Load restrictions

(1) The rated capacity of the cage must not be exceeded.

(2) A chimney hoist must not use a hoist with a rated capacity that is less than the rated capacity of its cage.

14 Cage layout and guarding

The cage must be constructed so that

(a) it does not cause a hazard to the occupants, and
(b) the occupants cannot reach any hazard created by movement of the cage or the hoisting mechanism.

15 Fall protection at landings

A landing that is 3 m (10 ft) or more above grade must have gates, hinged guardrails, hinged covers or other effective guarding that protects
persons who are at or near the landing from the hazard of falling off of or through the landing platform when the cage is not at that landing.

16 Guarding at the lower landing

The lower landing for a chimney hoist must be guarded by perimeter guards or guardrails and a gate.

17 Instructions for use and maintenance

The instructions from the professional engineer who designed the chimney hoist and from the manufacturers of its component parts, relating to safe
use and maintenance of the chimney hoist, must be available in the workplace.

18 Chimney hoist must be in good condition

The chimney hoist, including its cage, must be in good condition at the beginning of each shift and during use.

19 Operator training and authorization

(1) A chimney hoist operator must not operate a chimney hoist unless authorized by the employer.
(2) A chimney hoist operator must not be authorized under subsection (1) unless the operator has demonstrated
(a) competency in operation of the chimney hoist, and
(b) familiarity with the operating instructions required under section 17 and the communication systems required under sections 22 and 23.

20 Daily testing

Before the first use on each work shift, the cage of the chimney hoist must be raised to its maximum operating height and lowered back to the
ground or base to ensure that
(a) all functions are operating correctly,
(b) all limit devices are functioning properly, and
(c) there is adequate clearance between the cage and any surrounding object such as a structure, overhead obstruction, storage rack, or scaffold,
and any hazard such as energized electrical wires and equipment.

21 Attending the controls

The operator of a chimney hoist must not leave the hoist controls unattended or engage in any other tasks unless the cage is at the lowest landing
level, which is usually at ground or grade level, and no persons are in the cage.

22 Communication with the operator

(1) There must be effective voice communication, using single channel two-way radios, among the chimney hoist operator, occupants of the cage
and people at each hoist landing.
(2) If there is more than one occupant in a cage, one person in the cage must be designated to be the primary person to signal the chimney hoist
operator regarding cage movement requests.

23 Backup communication plan

(1) An effective signalling system must be developed and implemented as an alternative in the event the primary voice communication system
becomes ineffective while the chimney hoist is in use.
(2) If the voice communication system becomes ineffective while the chimney hoist is in use, the signalling system required under subsection (1)
must be used to bring the cage down to the lowest landing and the hoist must not be used until the voice communication system is effectively
restored.

24 Persons or materials

Materials, equipment or supplies must not be raised or lowered by the chimney hoist with a person in the cage.

25 Getting in or out of the cage

The cage must be at a designated landing before a person gets into or out of the cage.

26 Hoisting speed

A cage must not be raised or lowered at a speed greater than 76 m/min (250 fpm).

27 Position of gates

All the gates of a chimney hoist must be kept closed, except at a landing designated for loading and unloading the cage.

28 Emergency evacuation

(1) Before a chimney hoist is used, a plan must be developed for the evacuation of personnel from the cage in the event of loss of power or
equipment malfunction.
(2) While a chimney hoist is in use, personnel and equipment must be immediately available to implement the plan required under subsection (1).
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]
 Back to Top
Contents
15.1 Definitions

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

15.2 Qualified riggers

15.3 Detaching loads
15.4 Use of rigging
15.5 Component identification
15.6 Design factors
Table 15-1: Minimum Design Factors for Rigging
15.7 Wire rope on mobile cranes
15.8 Natural fibre rope
15.9 Wedge socket connections
15.10 Open hook restriction
15.11 Securing pins
15.12 Replacing pins
15.13 Wire rope lubrication [Repealed]
15.14 Securing ropes to drums
15.15 Wraps required
15.16 Reeving lines
15.17 Sheaves
15.18 Guylines
15.19 Spooling rope
15.20 Hand signals
Figure 15-1: Standard hand signals for controlling crane operations- Crawler, locomotive and truck cranes
15.21 Termination efficiencies
Figure 15-2: Termination efficiencies
15.22 Wire rope clips
15.23 Wire rope splices
Table 15-2: Installation and use of wire rope clips
15.24 Restriction on fold back eyes
15.25 Wire rope rejection criteria
15.26 Nonrotating wire rope
15.27 Contact with electric arc
15.28 Welding
15.29 Hook rejection criteria

SLINGS

15.30 Standards
15.31 Inspection before use
15.32 Makeshift fitting prohibition
15.33 WLL of slings
15.34 Sling angles
Table 15-3: WLL reductions for slings at an angle
15.35 Adverse conditions [Repealed]
15.36 Proof-testing slings
15.37 Storage
15.38 Knots
15.39 Sharp edges
15.40 Slinging loads
15.41 Multiple piece lifts

WIRE ROPE SLINGS

15.42 Sling identification

15.43 Rejection criteria
15.44 Prohibited slings
15.45 Temperature restrictions

ALLOY STEEL CHAIN SLINGS

15.46 Sling identification
15.47 Chain for hoisting
15.48 Chain removal criteria
15.49 Chain wear
Table 15-4: Allowable chain wear
15.50 Periodic inspection
15.51 Temperature restriction

SYNTHETIC WEB SLINGS

15.52 Sling identification

15.53 Temperature restriction
15.54 Synthetic web sling rejection criteria
Figure 15-3: Examples of synthetic web sling rejection criteria

METAL MESH SLINGS

15.55 Sling identification

15.56 Rejection criteria

BELOW-THE-HOOK LIFTING DEVICES

15.57 Standards
15.58 WLL
15.59 Identification
15.60 Part of lifted load
Rigging Definitions

15.1 Definitions

In this Part
"design factor" means the theoretical reserve capability of a product, usually determined by dividing the breaking strength by the working load
limit;
"proof test" means a test applied to a product to determine material or manufacturing defects;
"rigging" means fibre ropes, wire ropes, chains, slings, attachments, connecting fittings and associated components;
"working load limit" or "WLL" Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
General Requirements

15.2 Qualified riggers

Rigging and slinging work must be done by or under the direct supervision of qualified workers familiar with the rigging to be used and with the
code of signals authorized by the Board for controlling hoisting operations.

15.3 Detaching loads

Loads to be unhooked by a worker must be safely landed and supported before the rigging is detached.

15.4 Use of rigging

(1) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

(2) The load applied to any rigging or rigging assembly must not exceed the working load limit.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

15.5 Component identification

(1) Rigging fittings must be marked with the manufacturer's identification, product identifier and the working load limit or sufficient information to
readily determine the WLL.
(2) The WLL of existing fittings not identified as specified in subsection (1) must be determined by a qualified person, marked on the fitting and
such fittings must be removed from service by January 1, 2001.

15.6 Design factors

(1) The design factors based on breaking strengths for rigging components must be at least equal to the values given in Table 15-1, except as
otherwise specified in this Regulation.

Table 15-1: Minimum Design Factors for Rigging

Item Component Minimum design factor
1 Nylon fibre rope sling 5
2 Polyester rope sling 5
3 Polypropylene rope sling 5
4 Alloy steel chain sling 4
5 Wire rope sling 5
6 Metal mesh sling 5
7 Synthetic web sling 5
8 Synthetic roundsling 5
9 Chain fittings 4
10 Wire rope sling fittings 5
11 Other fittings as specified by manufacturer
12 Non-rotating wire rope as specified by manufacturer but not less than 5
13 Conventional wire rope 5

(2) The design factors specified by subsection (1) may be reduced for a dedicated rigging assembly designed and certified by a professional
engineer for a specific lift, but the dedicated assembly must be re-rated according to the requirements of subsection (1) for continued use.
(3) The design factor for any rigging assembly used to support workers must be at least 10.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]

15.7 Wire rope on mobile cranes

The minimum design factor based on breaking strength for wire rope on a mobile crane, unless otherwise specified by the crane or wire rope
manufacturer, is
(a) for conventional wire rope
(i) 2.5 for pendant lines, 3 for boom hoist reeving and 3.5 for load lines, during erection, and
(ii) 3 for pendant lines, 3.5 for boom hoist reeving and 3.5 for load lines, at all times except during erection, and
(b) 5 for wire rope of nonrotating construction.
<<

15.8 Natural fibre rope

Natural fibre rope must not be used for hoisting with a powered hoist.

15.9 Wedge socket connections

If a wedge socket is used as a wire rope termination, the dead end of the rope must be secured to prevent release of the wedge or rope slippage
at the socket.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 381/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]
15.10 Open hook restriction

(1) A hook must have a safety latch or other means that will retain slings, chains, or other similar parts, under slack conditions.
(2) A hook used in an application where manipulation of a safety latch or other retaining means may cause a hazard to a worker or where there is
no hazard to a worker if the load becomes dislodged is exempt from the requirements of subsection (1).

15.11 Securing pins

(1) A shackle-pin, heel-pin and similar device must be secured against dislodgement.
(2) The pin in a screw-pin type shackle must be wired or otherwise secured against rotation when used in applications that may cause the pin to
loosen.

15.12 Replacing pins

A shackle-pin must not be replaced with a bolt or other makeshift fitting.

15.13 Wire rope lubrication

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

15.14 Securing ropes to drums

(1) A rope must be secured to its winding drum, unless the line is required to automatically disengage from the drum.
(2) A rope must not be fastened to a drum by a knot tied in the rope.

15.15 Wraps required

At least 2 full wraps of rope must remain on winding drums when the load hook is in the lowest position.

15.16 Reeving lines

Pulling and pulled lines must be connected by a suitable splice, or a cable pulling sock must fully enclose both line ends whenever a worker may be
endangered by failure of the connection between the two lines while reeving lines through sheaves or blocks.

15.17 Sheaves

A sheave must
(a) be correctly sized for the rope,
(b) have a device to retain the rope within the groove, and
(c) be removed from service if it has a damaged groove or flange.

15.18 Guylines

(1) The strength of each guyline and its anchor must exceed the breaking strength of the load-line rigging arrangement.
(2) A guyline anchor must be placed so that the interior angle, between the guyline and the horizontal plane, does not exceed 45°.
(3) Guylines must be arranged so that the hoisting line pull in any direction is shared by 2 or more guys.
(4) Guylines and anchor systems, if certified by a professional engineer, may deviate from the requirements of subsections (1) to (3).

15.19 Spooling rope

(1) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

(2) Except as provided in subsection (3), workers must not use their hands or feet or any hand held object to guide the rope when spooling the
rope onto a drum.
(3) In an emergency a steel guide bar of acceptable design may be used to guide the rope onto the drum, but the line speed must be kept as low as
practicable and the worker must be positioned to be clear of the drum.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

15.20 Hand signals

If hand signals are used between a signaller and the operator of a crane or hoist to control hoisting operations, the signals shown in Figure 15-1
must be used.
Figure 15-1:
Standard hand signals for controlling crane operations — crawler, locomotive and truck cranes

Figure 15-1 (continued):

Standard hand signals for controlling crane operations — crawler, locomotive and truck cranes
Figure 15-1 (continued):
Standard hand signals for controlling crane operations — crawler, locomotive and truck cranes
Figure 15-1 (continued):
Standard hand signals for controlling crane operations — overhead and gantry cranes
15.21 Termination efficiencies

The working load limit must be reduced in accordance with the efficiency rating for the type of termination specified in Figure 15-2, unless
otherwise permitted by the manufacturer.
Figure 15-2: Termination efficiencies
15.22 Wire rope clips

(1) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

(2) If the manufacturer's specifications for installing and using wire rope clips cannot be determined, the number of clips and the installation torque
must be as shown in Table 15-2.
(3) The U-bolt part of a wire rope clip must be installed so that it bears on the unloaded end of the wire rope.
(4) Malleable cast iron wire rope clips must not be used for hoisting or other critical applications unless approved by the manufacturer for that
purpose.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

15.23 Wire rope splices

(1) A turnback eye splice made using wire rope clips must use the number of clips
(a) specified by the manufacturer for each turnback eye termination, or
(b) if not specified by the manufacturer, specified in Table 15-2.
(2) A lap splice made using wire rope clips must use double the number of clips
(a) specified by the manufacturer for a turnback eye termination, or
(b) if not specified by the manufacturer, specified in Table 15-2.
Table 15-2: Installation and use of wire rope clips

Diameter of rope Number Spacing between clips (centre to Torque

of clips centre)
millimetres inches millimetres inches newton foot
metres pounds

6 1/4 2 38 1 1/2 20 15
8 5/16 2 51 2 41 30
10 3/8 2 57 2 1/4 61 45
11 7/16 2 64 2 1/2 88 65
13 1/2 3 76 3 88 65
16 5/8 3 102 4 129 95
19 3/4 4 114 4 1/2 176 130
22 7/8 4 133 5 1/4 305 225
25 1 4 152 6 305 225
29 1 1/8 5 178 7 305 225
32 1 1/4 5 203 8 488 360
38 1 1/2 6 229 9 488 360
44 1 3/4 7 267 10 1/2 630 465
51 2 8 305 12 881 650
54 2 1/8 8 330 13 881 650
57 2 1/4 8 356 14 881 650

[Amended by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

15.24 Restriction on fold back eyes

(1) A wire rope termination using a swaged fold back eye must be identified with a serial number or other unique identification code, proof tested
before being placed in service, and a record of the proof test kept available for the service life of the termination.
(2) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
(3) A swaged fold back eye termination must be identified with the WLL as required by section 15.42.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

15.25 Wire rope rejection criteria

Wire rope must be permanently removed from service if

(a) in running wire ropes, there are 6 or more randomly distributed wires broken in one rope lay or 3 or more wires are broken in one strand in
one lay,
(b) in stationary wire ropes, such as guylines, there are 3 or more broken wires in one lay in sections between end connections, or more than one
broken wire within one lay of an end connection,
(c) wear, or the effects of corrosion, exceed 1/3 of the original diameter of outside individual wires,
(d) there is evidence of kinking, bird-caging or any other damage resulting in distortion of the rope structure,
(e) there is evidence of heat or arc damage, or
(f) there are reductions of normal rope diameter, from any cause, in excess of
(i) 0.4 mm (1/64 in) for diameters up to and including 8 mm (5/16 in),
(ii) 1 mm (3/64 in) for diameters greater than 8 mm (5/16 in) up to and including 19 mm (3/4 in),
(iii) 2 mm (1/16 in) for diameters greater than 19 mm (3/4 in) up to and including 29 mm (1 1/8 in), or
(iv) 3 mm (3/32 in) for diameters greater than 29 mm (1 1/8 in).

15.26 Nonrotating wire rope

Wire rope with nonrotating construction must be removed from service if
(a) the rejection criteria in section 15.25 are met,
(b) there are 2 randomly distributed broken wires in 6 rope diameters, or
(c) there are 4 randomly distributed broken wires in 30 rope diameters.

15.27 Contact with electric arc

A rigging component or a wire rope that has been contacted by an electric arc must be removed from service until certified safe for continued use
by a professional engineer.

15.28 Welding

(1) Rigging and fittings which have been repaired by welding must not be placed in service until certified safe for continued use by a professional
engineer.
(2) Alloy steel chain must not be welded or annealed.

15.29 Hook rejection criteria

A worn or damaged hook must be permanently removed from service if

(a) the throat opening, measured at the narrowest point, has increased by more than 15% of the original opening,
(b) the hook has twisted more than 10° from the original plane of the hook,
(c) the hook has lost 10% or more of its cross-sectional area,
(d) the hook is cracked or otherwise defective, or
(e) wear or damage exceeds any criteria specified by the manufacturer.
Slings

15.30 Standards

Unless otherwise required by this Regulation, wire rope, alloy steel chain, metal mesh, synthetic fibre rope, synthetic roundslings and synthetic fibre
web slings must meet the requirements of ASME B30.9-2006 Slings.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]

15.31 Inspection before use

Slings and attachments must be visually inspected before use on each shift, and defective equipment must be immediately removed from service.

15.32 Makeshift fitting prohibition

Makeshift couplers, shorteners, hooks or other load bearing attachments for slings, including those made from concrete reinforcing steel, must not
be used unless the working load limit has been determined and certified by a professional engineer.

15.33 WLL of slings

(1) The determination of the working load limit of a sling assembly must ensure that the WLL of any individual component of the assembly is not
exceeded.
(2) The WLL of a sling with more than 3 legs is limited to the WLL of any 3 legs of the sling.
(3) The load carried by any single leg of a bridle sling must not be greater than the WLL of the leg.

15.34 Sling angles

If a sling is used to lift at any angle from the vertical

(a) the design factors required by this Part must be maintained, and
(b) a qualified person or the manufacturer must determine the required reduction of the WLL of the sling, or it must be reduced according to Table
15-3.
Table 15-3: WLL reductions for slings at an angle

Angle between the sling leg and vertical Reduce WLL to

up to 30° 90%
over 30° up to 45° 70%
over 45° up to 60° 50%
over 60° not permitted unless part of an engineered lift

15.35 Adverse conditions

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

15.36 Proof-testing slings

Before being placed in service any new, repaired or altered sling having welded couplers or other welded load bearing attachments must be proof
tested by the manufacturer, or the manufacturer's representative or an agency acceptable to the Board in the manner specified by the manufacturer.

15.37 Storage

A sling must be stored to prevent damage when not in use.

15.38 Knots

A sling with a knot must not be used.

15.39 Sharp edges

When a sling is applied to a sharp edge of a load, the edge or the sling must be protected to prevent damage to the sling.

15.40 Slinging loads

(1) A sling must be selected and used to prevent slipping or overstressing the sling or the load.
(2) A load consisting of 2 or more pieces of material over 3 m (10 ft) long must be slung using a 2 legged sling arrangement positioned to keep the
load horizontal during the lift, and each sling must be choked around the load with a double wrap.

15.41 Multiple piece lifts

For a multiple piece lift

(a) each member of the lift that is being delivered to a different spot must be independently slung back to the main load hook or master link using
graduated length slings,
(b) a lifted member must not support another lifted member, and
(c) a crane with power controlled lowering must be used.
Wire Rope Slings

15.42 Sling identification

A wire rope sling with a swaged or poured socket or a pressed fitting must be permanently identified with
(a) its working load limit,
(b) the angle upon which the WLL is based, and
(c) the name or mark of the sling manufacturer.

15.43 Rejection criteria

(1) A wire rope sling must be permanently removed from service when the applicable rejection criteria of section 15.25 are found.
(2) A sling with damaged end fittings must not be used.

15.44 Prohibited slings

Wire rope of nonrotating type construction or of Lang's lay type construction must not be used in a sling.

15.45 Temperature restrictions

(1) A wire core rope sling must not be exposed to or used at a temperature above 205°C (400°F) unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer.
(2) A fibre core wire rope sling must not be exposed to or used at a temperature above 100°C (212°F) unless otherwise specified by the
manufacturer.
Back to Top
Alloy Steel Chain Slings

15.46 Sling identification

An alloy steel chain sling must be permanently identified with

(a) the size,
(b) the manufacturer's grade and the WLL,
(c) the length and number of legs, and
(d) the name or mark of the sling manufacturer.

15.47 Chain for hoisting

(1) Chain used for hoisting must be approved by the chain manufacturer for hoisting.
(2) Proof coil and transport chain must not be used for hoisting.

15.48 Chain removal criteria

A chain sling must be permanently removed from service or repaired by a qualified person to the original manufacturer's specification or to the
specifications of a professional engineer if the chain has defects such as stretch or deformation, cracks, nicks or gouges, corrosion pits or burned
links.

15.49 Chain wear

(1) A chain sling must be permanently removed from service when the chain link wear is more than the maximum allowed by the manufacturer.
(2) If the manufacturer does not specify removal criteria for use in subsection (1), the chain must be permanently removed from service when the
chain size at any point of the link is reduced to the values given in Table 15-4.
Table 15-4: Allowable chain wear

Chain size Minimum allowable chain size at any point of link

millimetres inches millimetres inches
6.3 1/4 5.9 15/64
10 3/8 8 19/64
13 1/2 10 25/64

16 5/8 12 31/64
19 3/4 15 19/32
22 7/8 18 45/64

25 1 21 13/16
29 1 1/8 23 29/32
 32 1 1/4 25 1

35 1 3/8 28 1 3/32
38 1 1/2 30 1 3/16
44 1 3/4 36 1 13/32

15.50 Periodic inspection

A chain sling must be thoroughly inspected at least once each year and a record of the inspection must be kept.

15.51 Temperature restriction

A chain sling must not be exposed to a temperature above 260°C (500°F) unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturer.
Back to Top
Synthetic Web Slings

15.52 Sling identification

Synthetic fibre web slings must be permanently identified with the

(a) manufacturer's name or mark,
(b) manufacturer's code or stock number,
(c) working load limits for the types of hitches permitted, and
(d) type of synthetic web material.

15.53 Temperature restriction

Synthetic fibre web slings must not be exposed to a temperature above 82°C (180°F) unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturer.

15.54 Synthetic web sling rejection criteria

A synthetic fibre web sling must be removed from service when any of the following circumstances occurs:
(a) the length of an edge cut exceeds the web thickness;
(b) the penetration of abrasion exceeds 15% of the webbing thickness taken as a proportion of all plies;
(c) abrasion occurs on both sides of the webbing and the sum of the abrasion on both sides exceeds 15% of the webbing thickness taken as a
proportion of all plies;
(d) warp thread damage up to 50% of the sling thickness extends to within 1/4 of the sling width of the edge or exceeds 1/4 the width of the sling;
(e) warp thread damage to the full depth of the sling thickness extends to within 1/4 of the sling width of the edge or the width of damage exceeds
1/8 the width of the sling;
(f) weft thread damage allows warp thread separation exceeding 1/4 the width of the sling and extends in length more than twice the sling width;
(g) any part of the sling is melted or charred, or is damaged by acid or caustic;
(h) stitches in load bearing splices are broken or worn;
(i) end fittings are excessively pitted or corroded, cracked, distorted or broken;
(j) a combination of the above types of damage of approximately equal total effect are present.
Figure 15-3: Examples of synthetic web sling rejection criteria
 Back to Top
Metal Mesh Slings

15.55 Sling identification

A metal mesh sling must be permanently identified with

(a) the manufacturer's name or mark, and
(b) the WLL for vertical basket hitch and choker hitch configurations.

15.56 Rejection criteria

A metal mesh sling must be removed from service if any of the following damage is visible:
(a) a broken weld or a broken brazed joint along the sling edge;
(b) a broken wire in any part of the mesh;
(c) reduction in wire diameter of 25% due to abrasion or 15% due to corrosion;
(d) lack of flexibility due to distortion of the mesh;
(e) distortion of the choker fitting so that the depth of the slot is increased by more than 10%;
(f) distortion of either end fitting so that the width of the eye opening is decreased by more than 10%;
(g) a 15% reduction of the original cross-sectional area of metal at any point around the hook opening or end fitting;
(h) visible distortion of either end fitting;
(i) a cracked end fitting.
Back to Top
Below-the-Hook Lifting Devices

15.57 Standards
Spreader bars and other specialized below-the-hook lifting devices must be constructed, inspected, installed, tested, maintained and operated
according to the requirements of ASME B30.20-1993, Below-the-Hook Lifting Devices.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

15.58 WLL

Spreader bars and other specialized below-the-hook lifting devices must have their working load limit certified by a professional engineer or
established by the lifting device manufacturer.

15.59 Identification

A nameplate or other permanent marking must be on a spreader bar or specialized below-the-hook lifting device and display the
(a) manufacturer's name and address,
(b) serial number,
(c) weight of the device, if more than 45 kg (100 lbs), and
(d) working load limit.

15.60 Part of lifted load

A spreader bar and any other specialized below-the-hook lifting device must be considered part of the lifted load.
Contents
[Part 16 is repealed and a new Part 16 enacted by B.C. Reg. 139/2021, effective September 1, 2021.]
16.1 Definitions
16.2 Application

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL OPERATING REQUIREMENTS

16.3 Pre-operational inspection and monitoring

16.4 Secure objects and clean surfaces
16.5 Seat belt use
16.6 Obstructed view and pedestrians
16.7 Boarding or leaving
16.8 Rider restrictions
16.9 Unattended mobile equipment
16.10 Clearance of swinging loads or parts
16.11 Loads elevated over cabs
16.12 Securing loads
16.13 Securing elevated parts
16.14 Air brake competency
16.15 Control on grades or slopes
16.16 Tire servicing
16.17 Maintenance and records
16.18 High voltage contact

DIVISION 2 - GENERAL MACHINE REQUIREMENTS

16.19 Non-slip floors and controls

16.20 Seats
16.21 Seat belts
16.22 Starter engagement
16.23 Steering wheel knobs
16.24 Alternative means of escape from a cab
16.25 Fuel tank fill point or vent
16.26 Mirrors
16.27 Lights
16.28 Warning signal device – extended component
16.29 Brakes
16.30 Load handling attachments
16.31 Load ratings
16.32 Safeguards for moving parts
16.33 Safeguards against objects, materials and tipovers
16.34 Rollover protective structure (ROPS)
16.35 ROPS standards
16.36 ROPS certification
16.37 ROPS identification
16.38 Rollover or tipover and fire

DIVISION 3 - ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIFIC PRIME MOVERS

16.39 All-terrain cycles

16.40 ATVs
16.41 UTVs
16.42 Earth-movers
16.43 Lift trucks

SCHEDULES

Schedule 16-A WorkSafeBC G601 Standard - Heavy Duty Backstops for Logs and Rocks
Schedule 16-B WorkSafeBC G603 Standard - Heavy Duty Guards for Windows
Schedule 16-C WorkSafeBC G604 Standard - Light Duty Guards for Windows
Mobile Equipment - Definitions and Application
[Part 16 is repealed and a new Part 16 enacted by B.C. Reg. 139/2021, effective September 1, 2021.]

16.1 Definitions

In this Part
"all-terrain cycle" means a motorized vehicle designed to travel on 3 low pressure tires, with a seat designed to be straddled by the operator and
handlebars for steering;
"all-terrain vehicle" or "ATV" means a motorized vehicle, designed to travel on 4 or more low pressure tires with or without endless tracks
added, with a seat designed to be straddled by the operator and handlebars for steering, but does not include an all-terrain cycle or a utility terrain
vehicle;
"earth-mover" means a machine that is designed to perform excavation, loading, transportation, drilling, spreading, compacting or trenching of
earth, rock and other materials;
"excavator" means a machine that is used or designed to perform excavation and has a platform that rotates 360°, with a cab and an articulating
or telescoping boom;
"excluded ground machine" means, in respect of a prime mover, one of the following components, vehicles or machines:
(a) a towed component, unless the towed component generates the propulsive power for the prime mover;
(b) a machine operated on a fixed pedestal or on rails or fixed tracks as in a runway;
(c) a walk-behind, offboard-operated or remotely controlled version of the following machines:
(i) stump grinder;
(ii) trencher;
(iii) tractor, tiller, hoe or turf care machine;
(iv) mechanical harvester;
(v) snowblower;
(vi) concrete saw;
(vii) buggy for concrete or gravel;
(viii) track carrier;
(ix) pavement marker or pavement grinder;
(x) pallet jack;
(xi) floor maintainer;
(d) a tugger or a pusher;
(e) an elevating work platform not designed for travel on a highway;
"mobile equipment" means a prime mover, or a prime mover with a towed component, which towed component moves relative to the ground, or
has a rider, for its work function, but does not include
(a) a prime mover, or a towed component, that is carried as a load,
(b) a commercial passenger vehicle under the Passenger Transportation Act, including a bus or a taxi, or
(c) a motor assisted cycle, scooter, minibike, skateboard or other miniature vehicle;
"pedestrians" includes workers and other persons;
"prime mover" means a self-propelled ground machine, with wheels or endless tracks, that is designed or used for work, including any
attachment, but does not include an excluded ground machine;
"utility terrain vehicle" or "UTV" means a motorized vehicle designed to travel on 4 or more low pressure tires with or without endless tracks
added, with one or more seats not designed to be straddled and a steering wheel or steering stick, but does not include a golf cart or other low-
speed vehicle.

16.2 Application

(1) This Part applies to mobile equipment.

(2) In respect of a matter that specifically applies to mobile equipment, if there is any conflict between the requirements of this Part and the
requirements of any other Part of this Regulation, then that other Part takes precedence over the provisions of this Part to the extent of the conflict,
except section 16.21, which prevails.
Division 1 - General Operating Requirements

16.3 Pre-operational inspection and monitoring

(1) Before mobile equipment is first operated on a shift, the operator must inspect the mobile equipment and report any unsafe, or potentially
unsafe, defects to the supervisor or employer.
(2) During operation, the operator must continuously monitor the performance of the mobile equipment and report any unsafe, or potentially
unsafe, defects to the supervisor or employer.
(3) The employer of the operator must ensure that a record is kept for at least 2 years of any defect reported under subsection (1) or (2).
(4) The record of defect required by subsection (3) may be
(a) included in a record of maintenance, repair or modification required by section 16.17, or
(b) prepared as a stand-alone record.
(5) Section 4.9 does not apply to the record of defect required by subsection (3) of this section.

16.4 Secure objects and clean surfaces

The controls, cab, floor, deck, steps and similar surfaces on mobile equipment must be maintained to ensure they are free of material, grease, oil,
tools and other things that could
(a) create a slipping or tripping hazard,
(b) interfere with the operation of controls, or
(c) be a hazard to the operator or other occupants in the event of an accident.

16.5 Seat belt use

(1) Riders of mobile equipment who are authorized under section 16.8 must use seat belts whenever the mobile equipment is in motion or engaged
in an operation that could cause the mobile equipment to become unstable, if the mobile equipment has seat belts
(a) required under this Regulation, another law of British Columbia or a law of Canada, or
(b) installed by the manufacturer of the mobile equipment.
(2) When the operation of a road grader requires an operator to stand, the operator
(a) is not required to use a seat belt, and
(b) must use an enclosed cab with closed cab doors or other effective restraining devices.
(3) Seat belts must be maintained in good condition.

16.6 Obstructed views and pedestrians

(1) Designated walkways or safe work areas must be used to separate pedestrians from areas of operation of mobile equipment, if practical.
(2) If it is impractical to provide designated walkways or safe work areas, at least one of the following means must be used to protect pedestrians:
(a) posted speed limits for mobile equipment;
(b) the pedestrian and the mobile equipment operator must acknowledge each other's presence before the pedestrian proceeds through the
hazardous area;
(c) another effective means.
(3) Subject to subsection (4), if an operator of mobile equipment cannot see the immediate work area where the mobile equipment will be moved,
the operator must not move the mobile equipment unless one of the following precautions is taken to protect the operator and any other person
from injury:
(a) immediately before the movement, inspection by the operator on foot of the immediate work area for hazards, including overhead hazards;
(b) direction by a signaller who is stationed in a safe position in continuous view of the operator and who has an unobstructed view of the
immediate work area;
(c) another effective precaution.
(4) If an operator of mobile equipment cannot see the immediate work area directly behind the mobile equipment where the mobile equipment will
be backing up, the operator must not back up the mobile equipment unless
(a) one of the precautions referred to in subsection (3) is taken,
(b) the mobile equipment has an audio warning device that
(i) provides a signal to persons in the vicinity that, if practical, is audible above the ambient noise level, and
(ii) is activated automatically when the mobile equipment controls are positioned to back the mobile equipment up, and
(c) an additional means of protecting pedestrians is used if hazards or conditions would prevent pedestrians hearing the audio warning device
referred to in paragraph (b).
(5) Window glazing or window openings, and rear-view mirrors or other visual aids, must be maintained to allow clear vision.

16.7 Boarding or leaving

A person must not board or leave mobile equipment while it is moving, except for operators of rock drills that are designed to be controlled by
persons in the standing position.

16.8 Rider restrictions

(1) In this section:

"barricade" means a barricade referred to as a type 1, type lA, type 2 or type 3 barricade in the Traffic Management Manual;
"buffer vehicle" means a vehicle referred to as a buffer vehicle in the Traffic Management Manual;
"drum" means a traffic control device referred to as a drum in the Traffic Management Manual;
"flashing arrow board" means a traffic sign referred to as a flashing arrow board in the Traffic Management Manual;
"multilane roadway" means a roadway that has 2 or more lanes in which traffic flows in the same direction, including climbing and passing lanes,
whether or not there are also lanes in which traffic flows in the opposite direction;
"traffic cone" means a traffic cone or tubular marker referred to in the Traffic Management Manual;
"Traffic Management Manual" means the latest edition of the Traffic Management Manual for Work on Roadways issued by the Ministry of
Transportation and Infrastructure.
(2) An operator of mobile equipment is the only person authorized to ride on mobile equipment unless
(a) the mobile equipment is a worker transportation vehicle, as defined in section 17.01, that meets the requirements of Part 17, or
(b) subsections (3) to (7) apply.
(3) A person other than the operator may only ride on a ROPS-equipped prime mover for the purpose of training or maintenance and, for that
purpose, the prime mover
(a) must not be operated in a rollover hazard area, and
(b) must not be engaged in an operation that could
(i) cause the mobile equipment to become unstable, or
(ii) cause the person to fall or be ejected, pinched or dragged.
(4) Subsection (3) does not apply if the person, other than the operator, who is riding a ROPS-equipped snowcat or a ROPS-equipped UTV is
sitting on a seat that meets the requirements of section 16.20.
(5) A person other than the operator of mobile equipment may only ride on a prime mover without a ROPS as part of a job task and
(a) must sit on a seat that meets the requirements of section 16.20, or
(b) must be protected by other safe facilities provided by the manufacturer of the mobile equipment or designed by a professional engineer, that
include
(i) a footboard or platform upon which the person stands or sits, located to protect the person from contact with roadside objects or vehicles,
(ii) hand-holds, and
(iii) a safety belt, harness, guardrail or other effective means of restraint, except where the person is a swamper riding on the back of a garbage
truck during short pickup runs not exceeding a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).
(6) Rear-mounted platforms or footboards must not be occupied when the mobile equipment is backing up.
(7) A person who is occupying a rear-mounted platform or footboard on non-ROPS equipped mobile equipment as part of a method of retrieving
traffic cones from a closed lane of a multilane roadway is not prohibited under subsection (6) or section 18.3 from occupying the platform or
footboard when the mobile equipment is backing up if all of the following conditions are met:
(a) the mobile equipment is backing up in the closed lane;
(b) the employer has
(i) identified the hazards to the persons at the workplace, and
(ii) taken measures
(A) to eliminate the hazards, or
(B) if it is not practicable to eliminate an identified hazard, to minimize the risk to persons from the hazard to the lowest level practicable;
(c) a written safe work procedure has been established by the employer and is being followed, which procedure
(i) relates to that method of retrieving traffic cones, and
(ii) includes a description of the measures referred to in paragraph (b)(ii);
(d) the mobile equipment is not exceeding a speed of 15 km/h (9 mph);
(e) the mobile equipment has both of the following operating devices:
(i) two or more 360° flashing yellow lights;
(ii) a flashing arrow board pointing toward the open lane adjacent to the closed lane;
(f) the mobile equipment has an audio warning device that
(i) makes a distinct sound that is audible, above the ambient noise level in the workplace, to both the operator and the person, and
(ii) operates automatically and continuously while the mobile equipment is backing up;
(g) there is an effective 2-way voice communication system between the operator and the person on the platform;
(h) one of the following requirements is met:
(i) behind the rear of the mobile equipment, barricades are placed across the closed lane or drums are placed in the centre of the closed lane, in
accordance with the following:
(A) the barricade or drum closest to the mobile equipment is continuously located not more than 250 m from the rear of the mobile equipment;
(B) the barricades or drums are located along the length and to the end of the closed lane at intervals of not greater than 250
(ii) directly behind and at a safe distance from the rear of the mobile equipment, in the closed lane, there is a buffer vehicle that meets the following
requirements:
(A) the buffer vehicle is continuously located not more than 100 m from the rear of the mobile equipment;
(B) the buffer vehicle has 2 or more 360° flashing yellow lights and the lights are operating;
(C) the buffer vehicle has a flashing arrow board pointing toward the open lane adjacent to the closed lane and the flashing arrow board is
operating;
(D) there is an effective 3-way voice communication system among the operator of the buffer vehicle, the operator of the mobile equipment and the
person on the platform;
(i) the maximum load capacity established for the platform by the manufacturer or by the professional engineer who designed the platform is clearly
marked on the platform and is not being exceeded.
(8) Unless otherwise provided in subsection (7), the mobile equipment, arrangements and procedures referred to in that subsection must meet all
applicable requirements in respect of the equipment, arrangements and procedures that are set out for traffic control under Part 18.

16.9 Unattended mobile equipment

(1) An operator of mobile equipment must not leave the controls unattended unless the mobile equipment has been secured against inadvertent
movement by
(a) engaging at least 2 effective braking or parking systems or devices, including
(i) the parking brake,
(ii) the manufacturer's specified park position for the transmission,
(iii) chocks for the wheels, or
(iv) in the case of 2-wheeled mobile equipment, stands, and
(b) chocking wheels, if necessary.
(2) An operator of mobile equipment must not leave unattended any elevated load, part, extension or machine, unless it has been landed in a safe
position or otherwise immobilized and secured against inadvertent movement.

16.10 Clearance of swinging loads or parts

(1) If a hazard is created by the swinging movement of the load, cab, counterweight or any other part of mobile equipment, a person must not be
within range of the swinging load or part and the operator must not move the part when any person is so exposed.
(2) Mobile equipment must be positioned so that no swinging part can come within 60 cm (2 ft) of any obstruction in any area accessible to
persons or, if it is not practical to position the mobile equipment in that manner, entry to such areas must be prevented by barriers or other effective
means.

16.11 Loads elevated over cabs

A person must not remain in a cab of mobile equipment while loads are elevated over the cab unless that cab is protected by an adequate
overhead guard.

16.12 Securing loads

(1) A load for transport on mobile equipment must be loaded, secured and unloaded in a manner that prevents a hazard to persons.
(2) If a hazard may be created due to load shift upon deceleration that would endanger the occupants of the cab of
(a) a flatbed truck, or
(b) a truck and flatbed combination used to haul long steel structural members, poles, pipes, lumber, logs or similar materials, the means used
under subsection (1) must include a cab guard, a bulkhead or another effective means to prevent the hazard.
(3) If perimeter pins are used as part of the restraint system for cylindrical objects, the pins must extend above the top of the uppermost layer
adjacent to the pin by the diameter of the largest cylindrical object stacked above the uppermost layer adjacent to the pin, and have a minimum
height of 46 cm (18 in).
(4) If cylindrical objects are individually blocked or otherwise effectively restrained by specialized dunnage, the perimeter pins specified in
subsection (3) are not required.

16.13 Securing elevated parts

(1) If a person works beneath an elevated part of mobile equipment, the elevated part must be blocked in a secure manner.
(2) Hydraulic or pneumatic jacks must not be used for blocking unless fitted with devices to prevent their inadvertent retraction in the event of loss
of hydraulic or pneumatic pressure.
(3) A tilt deck, enclosed or otherwise, on a trailer or prime mover must have a device that is capable of blocking the empty tilt deck in the raised
position.
(4) A dump truck with a chassis manufactured after January 1, 1999 must have a mechanical device permanently affixed that is capable of blocking
the empty dump box in the raised position.

16.14 Air brake competency

(1) A person operating mobile equipment with air brakes must have, as applicable in respect of the mobile equipment, a valid
(a) air brake certificate, or
(b) driver's licence with industrial air brake endorsement.
(2) Subsection (1) does not apply if a trainee operates the mobile equipment under the supervision of a qualified instructor.

16.15 Control on grades or slopes

To maintain adequate control and ensure safety, if the grade or condition of the travel surface may result in insufficient braking capability of mobile
equipment,
(a) the mobile equipment must be restrained by a wire rope or by a synthetic rope, which may include webbing, or
(b) another machine that is suitable for the purpose of restraining the mobile equipment must be used.

16.16 Tire servicing

(1) An employer must establish and implement safe work procedures for servicing tires, rims and wheels of mobile equipment, including safe
procedures for
(a) inspecting tire, rim and wheel components,
(b) mounting a tire to the rim and wheel,
(c) inflating a tire,
(d) installing and removing tire assemblies, and
(e) demounting tires from the rim and wheel assemblies.
(2) Deflation of a tire must be done in an area where ignition sources are removed or controlled.
(3) Each tire, rim and wheel part must be cleaned and inspected for damage before mounting, and cracked, broken, bent or otherwise damaged
parts replaced.
(4) A person inflating a tire must stay out of the potential explosion trajectory, if it is practical to do so, and actively monitor the tire's inflation
pressure.
(5) If a bead expander is used to seat the beads of a tire, it must be removed before the tire is inflated to more than 0.35 bar (5 psi).
(6) When a tire mounted on a single piece rim or wheel with a diameter more than 49.5 cm (19.5 in) is being inflated to more than 5.52 bar
(80 psi), after the beads are seated, the combination of the tire with the rim or wheel must be
(a) mounted on the mobile equipment,
(b) placed in a cage or other effective restraining device, or
(c) restrained by an effective barrier, other than a chain.
(7) After the components of a multipiece rim or wheel are set in place, a tire must not be inflated to operating pressure until the rim or wheel is
mounted onto the mobile equipment or has been secured in a cage or engineered containment device.
(8) Assembled rim or wheel parts must not be welded or heated, except in a limited manner to facilitate removal of a wheel from a hub after the
tire has been deflated by removing the valve core.
(9) Before loosening any wheel nuts or rim clamps, a tire mounted on a multipiece rim or wheel,
(a) if larger than 900R20 (900-20), must be deflated to less than 1.38 bar (20 psi), and
(b) if equal to or smaller than 900R20 (900-20), must be completely deflated to 0 bar (0 psi).
(10) A multipiece tire and rim or wheel assembly that has been used at less than 80% of the recommended inflation pressure for that application
must be deflated, disassembled and inspected before reinflation.

16.17 Maintenance and records

(1) Mobile equipment must not be maintained, repaired or modified while in operation unless continued operation is essential to the process of
maintenance, repair or modification and measures are taken to eliminate or minimize any risks associated with the process.
(2) Records for any maintenance, repair or modification that affects the safe performance of the mobile equipment must be kept and be reasonably
available to the operator and maintenance personnel during work hours.
(3) Section 4.9 does not apply to records required under subsection (2) of this section, except as otherwise provided in sections 13.22, 14.14,
16.43 and 20.29.

16.18 High voltage contact

(1) In this section, "high voltage contact" means contact between mobile equipment and a high voltage electrical source as defined in
section 19.1.
(2) If mobile equipment has been subject to high voltage contact, it must be removed from service until a qualified person has conducted an
inspection of, and completed any necessary repairs to, the mobile equipment.
Division 2 - General Machine Requirements

16.19 Non-slip floors and controls

Foot controls, cab floors, decks, steps and similar surfaces on mobile equipment where a person walks or stands must be constructed of, or
covered with, a suitable non-slip material.

16.20 Seats

(1) A safely located and securely mounted seat must be provided for the operator of mobile equipment and for any other authorized rider who is
required to be seated under section 16.8, unless the mobile equipment is designed to be controlled or ridden by persons in the standing position.
(2) The operator's seat must enable the operator to safely operate the mobile equipment with due regard for
(a) the type and intended use of the mobile equipment,
(b) the reach distances to the controls of the mobile equipment, and
(c) the duration of use of the mobile equipment.
(3) Seating for mobile equipment that is operated on rough terrain must provide adequate lateral restraint.

16.21 Seat belts

A ROPS-equipped prime mover must have, at minimum, 2-point lap belts that meet the requirements of one of the following standards or the
earlier version of the standard that applied on the date of manufacture of the prime mover:
(a) Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Standard J386AUG2012, Operator Restraint System for Off-Road Work Machines;
(b) SAE J2292 (2016), Combination Pelvic and Upper Torso Operator and Occupant Restraint Systems for Off-Road Work Machines;
(c) ISO 6683 (2005) Earth-moving machinery - Seat belts and seat belt anchorages - Performance requirements and tests - Second
edition;
(d) ISO 3776, Tractors and machinery for agriculture - Seat belts - Part 1 (2006), Part 2 (2013) and Part 3 (2009);
(e) Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UNIECE) ECE Regulation No. 16, Safety-belts.

16.22 Starter engagement

(1) Mobile equipment must be protected against starter motor engagement when the engine is coupled to the wheels or tracks.
(2) A dump truck is exempt from subsection (1) only
(a) if it is designed for remotely controlled alignment for coupling with its trailer, and
(b) during such coupling.

16.23 Steering wheel knobs

(1) A steering wheel knob on mobile equipment must not be used or installed if road wheel reaction forces to the steering wheel are hazardous to
the operator.
(2) A steering wheel knob must be a low profile or mushroom type and lie completely within the periphery of the steering wheel.

16.24 Alternative means of escape from a cab

(1) If mobile equipment manufactured after January 1, 2000 has a single cab entrance door, the mobile equipment must have an alternative means
of escape that is clearly marked both inside and outside the cab and that
(a) is not located on the same surface as the cab entrance door,
(b) is usable regardless of the position of movable components or accessories of the machine,
(c) does not pose additional hazards to the operator,
(d) can be opened from both the inside and outside without the use of tools when the mobile equipment is in use,
(e) requires a force of not more than 135 N (30.3 lbf) to open, and
(f) provides a clear opening, the minimum dimensions of which comply with ISO Standard 2867-2011(R2016), Earth-moving machinery -
Access systems.
(2) Mobile equipment manufactured before January 1, 2000 with a single cab entrance door must meet the requirements for an alternative means
of escape required at the date of manufacture.

16.25 Fuel tank fill point or vent

A fuel tank fill point or vent opening is not permitted within an enclosed cab of mobile equipment.

16.26 Mirrors

(1) Except as provided in this section, mobile equipment must have at least one mirror that provides an operator of the mobile equipment with an
undistorted reflected view to the rear.
(2) A lift truck may be equipped with only one parabolic mirror.
(3) A mirror described in subsection (1) is not required if the conditions of use or mobile equipment structure makes the use of mirrors impractical.

16.27 Lights

(1) Mobile equipment must have lights and the lights must be used to adequately illuminate the mobile equipment's direction of travel, the working
area within close proximity and the cab instruments, if the mobile equipment is used
(a) during the period from 1/2 hour after sunset to 1/2 hour before sunrise and work area lighting is inadequate, or
(b) when persons or vehicles are not clearly discernible at a distance of 150 m (492 ft).
(2) The lights required under subsection (1) must meet the requirements of the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J1029 2012, Lighting
and Marking of Construction, Earthmoving Machinery or the earlier version of the standard that applied on the date of manufacture of the
mobile equipment.

16.28 Warning signal device - extended component

(1) Dump trucks used to transport any material, and any other mobile equipment used to collect, transport or compact waste material or recyclable
material, must, while in transit, have a visual or audio warning device that
(a) provides a signal to the operator when a lifting mechanism, top door cover, body, tilt frame or tailgate component is extended in a manner that
(i) is likely to contact an overhead obstruction, or
(ii) creates a hazard, and
(b) meets the requirements of subsection (2) or (3), as applicable.
(2) If a visual warning device is provided under subsection (1), the visual warning signal from the device must display within the operator's field of
vision.
(3) If an audio warning device is provided under subsection (1), the audio warning signal from the device must make a distinct sound that is audible
to the operator above the ambient noise level.

16.29 Brakes

(1) Subject to subsection (2), mobile equipment must have

(a) a primary service brake system,
(b) a secondary emergency or supplementary brake system, and
(c) a parking brake, whether or not it is part of the primary or secondary brake system.
(2) Subsection (1)(b) does not apply to the following:
(a) mobile equipment that
(i) has not been equipped with a secondary brake system by the original manufacturer, and
(ii) is licensed under the Motor Vehicle Act to operate on a highway;
(b) ATVs;
(c) UTVs;
(d) high and low lift trucks;
(e) skid steers;
(f) golf carts;
(g) ride-on, sit-down turf care equipment.
(3) Except as provided in sections 14.2(5)and(l2), 16.40, 16.41, 17.10 and 26.17.1, the brake systems referred to in subsection ( 1) of this
section must meet the requirements of the following standards, as applicable, or the earlier version of the applicable standard that applied on the
date of manufacture of the mobile equipment:
(a) ISO 3450:2011 Earth-moving machinery - Wheeled or high-speed rubber-tracked machines - Performance requirements and test
procedures for brake systems;
(b) ISO 10265:2008 Earth-moving machinery - Crawler machines - Performance requirements and test procedures for braking systems;
(c) Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Standard J2118-2012, Braking Performance-Asphalt Pavers.

16.30 Load handling attachments

(1) Buckets, forks, booms, hoists and other load-handling attachments must be installed on mobile equipment as specified by the manufacturer of
the mobile equipment unless otherwise certified by a professional engineer for use on the mobile equipment.
(2) The design of the attachments referred to in subsection (1) must provide for an evaluation of the stability of the mobile equipment, including the
effect of load swing.
(3) The instructions of the manufacturer or professional engineer, as applicable, for the safe use of the mobile equipment with the attachment must
be available to the operator.

16.31 Load ratings

(1) Mobile equipment designed and used for lifting, hoisting or similar operations must have a permanently-affixed notation, legible and visible to
the operator, stating the rated load of the mobile equipment.
(2) A legible load chart must be displayed in the operator's cab of the mobile equipment, or be otherwise immediately available to the operator, if
the rated load varies with the reach of the mobile equipment.
(3) If mobile equipment is modified, the employer must ensure that the rated load and the load chart are changed as necessary to reflect the new
load ratings.

16.32 Safeguards for moving parts

(1) An exposed moving part of mobile equipment that is a hazard to the operator of the mobile equipment or to other persons must be guarded so
that no person can access the hazard area created by the exposed moving part, unless the part must be exposed for proper functioning, in which
case the part must be guarded as much as is practical and consistent with the intended function of the part.
(2) Mobile equipment with a moving part that is close to the operator's compartment must be effectively safeguarded so that no part of a person's
body will project into the hazard area created by the moving part.

16.33 Safeguards against objects, materials and tipovers

(1) In this section and section 16.38, "tipover", in respect of mobile equipment, means a roll about the longitudinal axis of up to 90°, or a rear or
frontal pitchover about the transverse axis of up to 90°, which roll or pitchover results in the contact of the cab with a surface.
(2) Operators of mobile equipment, and any other riders of mobile equipment authorized by section 16.8, must be protected against any
reasonably foreseeable hazards from falling, flying or intruding objects or materials, or tipovers, by means of cabs, windows, screens, grills, shields,
deflectors, guards or structures on the mobile equipment that
(a) are designed and installed to provide an adequate view for the operator to safely use the mobile equipment, and
(b) meet the requirements of
(i) at least one of the following standards, if the mobile equipment is in the scope of the standard:
(A) CSA Standard B352.0-16, Rollover protective structures (ROPS), falling object protective structures (FOPS), operator protective
structures (OPS), and tip-over protective structures (TOPS) for mobile machinery - General Canadian requirements;
(B) Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Recommended Practice J1356 MAR2013, Performance Criteria for Falling Object Guards
for Excavators;
(C) SAE J2267 APR2007 Minimum Performance Criteria for Operator Front Protective Structures (OFPS) for Certain Equipment;
(D) ANSI/UL 752, Standard for Bullet-Resisting Equipment, 11th edition (with revisions up to and including December 11, 2015);
(E) WorkSafeBC G601 Standard - Heavy Duty Backstops for Logs and Rocks, set out in Schedule 16-A of this Part;
(F) WorkSafeBC G603 Standard - Heavy Duty Guards for Windows, set out in Schedule 16-B of this Part;
(G) WorkSafeBC G604 Standard - Light Duty Guards for Windows, set out in Schedule 16-C of this Part, or
(ii) an earlier version of at least one of the standards set out in subparagraph (i)(A) to (D), if the earlier version applied to the cabs, windows,
screens, grills, shields, deflectors, guards or structures on the mobile equipment on the date of manufacture of the mobile equipment.
(3) A window on mobile equipment manufactured after February 1, 2002 or otherwise installed on mobile equipment after that date must be
marked to identify the manufacturer, the standard to which the window conforms and, in the case of polycarbonate windows, the thickness and
grade of material.

16.34 Rollover protective structure (ROPS)

(1) In this section, "rollover risk assessment" means an assessment of the risk that mobile equipment will experience a rollover while it is being
operated by an on-board operator, based on the relevant circumstances of the proposed operation, including the following:
(a) the stability of the mobile equipment, taking into account such factors as its configuration and any attachments or towed components;
(b) whether the mobile equipment will be operated in a rollover hazard area;
(c) the nature of the activities to be performed.
(2) Mobile equipment must be used with a ROPS unless
(a) the mobile equipment is
(i) a snowmobile, ATV or any other mobile equipment designed for a standing operator or with a straddle seat, or
(ii) a golf cart, or
(b) a qualified person has completed a rollover risk assessment respecting the mobile equipment and determined there is no, or only a minimal, risk
of rollover.
(3) A rollover risk assessment and determination referred to in subsection (2)(b) must be in writing if the assessment and determination pertains to
one of the following types of mobile equipment:
(a) tractors, dozers, loaders, skidders, trenchers, graders, scrapers, roller-compactors, pipe layers and rough terrain lift trucks;
(b) rock drills operated by a seated on-board operator;
(c) ride-on turf care equipment heavier than 400 kg (882 lbs) manufactured after September 1, 2021;
(d) UTVs manufactured after September 1, 2021;
(e) excavators manufactured after September 1, 2021 and used in a rollover hazard area.
(4) The written risk assessment and determination referred to in subsection (3) must be available at the worksite.
(5) The Board may require a ROPS to be installed on any mobile equipment if the design of the mobile equipment or circumstances of use indicate
the need.
(6) A ROPS must be designed and installed so that it does not obstruct the operator's view or ability to operate the mobile equipment safely.

16.35 ROPS standards

(1) A ROPS installed on mobile equipment other than

(a) an excavator between 6 tonnes (13 250 lbs) and 50 tonnes (110 231 lbs),
(b) powered ride-on turf care equipment heavier than 400 kg (882 lbs), or
(c) a UTV
must meet the requirements of the CSA Standard B352.0-16 - Roll-over protective structures (ROPS), falling object protective structures
(FOPS), operator protective structures (OPS), and tip-over protective structures (TOPS) for mobile machinery - General Canadian
requirements or the earlier version of the standard that applied on the date of manufacture of the mobile equipment.
(2) A ROPS installed on an excavator between 6 tonnes (13 250 lbs) and 50 tonnes (110 231 lbs) must meet the requirements of the ISO 12117-
2: 2008 Earth-moving machinery - Laboratory tests and performance requirements for protective structures of excavators - Part 2: Roll-
over protective structures (ROPS) for excavators of over 6 t.
(3) A ROPS installed on powered ride-on turf care equipment heavier than 400 kg (882 lbs) must meet the requirements of ISO 21299:2009
Powered ride-on turf care equipment- Roll-over protective structures (ROPS) - Test procedures and acceptance criteria.
(4) A ROPS installed on a UTV must meet the requirements of section 16.41(1).

16.36 ROPS certification

A ROPS must be certified by the ROPS manufacturer or a professional engineer as meeting the applicable standard specified in section 16.35,
including after any modification or repair to the ROPS.

16.37 ROPS identification

A modified or repaired ROPS must be permanently marked with the following information:
(a) an identification of the modifications or repairs effected;
(b) the date of recertification;
(c) the name and address of the recertifying professional engineer or manufacturer, as applicable.

16.38 Rollover or tipover and fire

(1) This section applies to the following mobile equipment:

(a) a feller buncher;
(b) a timber harvester;
(c) a timber processor with a significant risk of rollover or tipover when operating on a sloped forest worksite other than a road or a landing.
(2) In addition to meeting the requirements of section 16.24, the mobile equipment referred to in subsection (1) must be equipped with the
following:
(a) attached to the inside of the cab, a powered cutting tool able to effectively cut through steel guard bars and polycarbonate windows in a timely
manner to provide an emergency means of escape;
(b) attached to the mobile equipment, in a position that is outside of the cab, a fire extinguisher in good working order with a UL Rating of at least
4-A:60-B:C;
(c) if the mobile equipment is manufactured more than 2 years after September 1, 2021, an effective engine fire suppression system that will
discharge when needed in the event of a rollover or tipover.
Division 3 - Additional Requirements for Specific Prime Movers

16.39 All-terrain cycles

An all-terrain cycle must not be used in any workplace.

16.40 ATVs

(1) An ATV must meet and be used in accordance with ANSI Standard SVIA-1 2017, American National Standard for Four Wheel All-
Terrain Vehicles or the earlier version of the standard that applied on the date of manufacture of the ATV.
(2) An ATV must be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
(3) The manufacturer's instructions for an ATV must be kept in a secure place with the ATV or at another location readily accessible to the
operator.
(4) If the manufacturer's instructions do not include limits for the operation of the ATV on sloping ground, 5% is the maximum allowable slope
unless the employer has developed and implemented written safe work procedures appropriate for any steeper slope on which the mobile
equipment is to be used.
(5) The training program for an ATV operator must include training by a qualified person for the following:
(a) operating skills, according to the ATV manufacturer's instructions;
(b) the ATV operator's pre-operational inspection;
(c) basic mechanical requirements;
(d) loading and unloading the ATV for transport, if a job requirement.
(6) Loading and unloading an ATV onto or off a carrier vehicle must be done in a safe manner.
(7) If ramps are used when loading or unloading an ATV, they must be secured at a suitable angle, be sufficiently wide and have a surface finish
that provides an adequate grip for the tires of the ATV.
(8) A modification or attachment to an ATV that may affect its stability must be certified by the manufacturer or a professional engineer.

16.41 UTVs

(1) A UTV must meet and be used in accordance with ANSI/OPEI B71.9-2016 Multipurpose Off-Highway Utility Vehicles or the earlier
version of the standard that applied on the date of manufacture of the UTV.
(2) A UTV must be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
(3) The manufacturer's instructions for a UTV must be kept in a secure place with the UTV or at another location readily accessible to the
operator.

16.42 Earth-movers

An earth-mover must meet ISO Standard 9244:2008 Earth-moving machinery - Machine safety labels - General principles or the earlier
version of the standard that applied on the date of manufacture of the earth-mover.

16.43 Lift trucks

(1) The design, fabrication, use, inspection, maintenance and repair of a lift truck must meet
(a) CAN/CSA Standard B335-15-Safety standard for lift trucks, or
(b) as applicable,
(i) ANSI/ITSDF B56.1a-2018, Safety Standard for Low Lift and High Lift Trucks,
(ii) ANSI/ITSDF B56.6-2016, Safety Standard for Rough Terrain Forklift Trucks, or
(iii) ISO 10896 Rough-Terrain Trucks - Safety Requirements and Verification: Part 1 (2012): Variable-Reach Trucks; Part 2 (2016):
Slewing Trucks; Part 4 (2015): Additional Requirements for Variable-Reach Trucks Handling Freely Suspended Loads
or the earlier version of the applicable standard that applied on the date of manufacture of the lift truck.
(2) Operator training for lift trucks must meet the requirements of Clause 6 of the standard referred to in subsection (1)(a).
(3) In addition to complying with the applicable requirements in this Part, a variable reach rough terrain lift truck, as defined in section 2 of the
standard referred to in subsection (1)(b)(ii), must meet and be used in accordance with the requirements of sections 14.5(3), 14.7, 14.8, 14.12,
14.43 and 14.69 of this Regulation.
(4) A record of inspections and maintenance meeting the requirements of section 4.9 must be kept for a variable reach rough terrain lift truck, as
defined in section 2 of the standard referred to in subsection (1)(b)(ii).
(5) In areas where lift truck use is separated from pedestrian traffic, a lift truck may travel forward with an elevated load if such operation will
improve the operator's view of the path of travel, provided that operating conditions are maintained to ensure vehicle stability and the specifications
of the mobile equipment manufacturer are not compromised.
(6) A unitized load being transported on a lift truck must not project a distance greater than half its height above the fork carriage, back rest or
back rest extension of the lift truck.
(7) No part of a load of loose objects may project above the fork carriage, back rest or back extension of a lift truck.
(8) A load that could shift during transportation must be restrained if such shifting would result in the load or the lift truck becoming unstable.
(9) Subsections (6) and (7) do not apply if the load is assembled and handled in such a way that there is no possibility of any part of the load falling
off.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 116/2022, effective August 22, 2022.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 223/2022, effective March 1, 2023.]
Schedules

Schedule 16-A

WorkSafeBC G601 Standard - Heavy Duty Backstops for Logs and Rocks

1 Scope, definitions and measurements

(1) This standard describes minimum requirements for the design of a framework, grid elements and supports of a protective structure, referred to
as a "backstop", over any exposed side of an operator's cab on cable log loaders and log yarders, which backstop is designed to protect the
operator from head-on or side-on penetration into, or crushing of, the cab by large logs or rocks without excessive visual interference to the
operator.
(2) In this standard:
"framework" means the main structural members of a backstop, consisting of horizontal and vertical edge beams;
"grid element" means a vertical or horizontal member of a backstop inside the framework;
"HSS" means hollow structural section;
"main frame" means the structural part of the undercarriage;
"supports" means the structural members connecting the backstop to the main frame, boom or substructure.
(3) In this standard, common industry practices are followed in expressing numerical measurements.

2 Design requirements

(1) A backstop must be built in accordance with one of the following:

(a) in a manner that is able to protect the operator's cab from penetration or crushing by a log that is 1 m (39.4 in) in diameter at the butt of the log
and 12.8 m (42 ft) in length, weighing 4 439 kg (9 786 lbs), travelling 16 km/h (10 mph), or an equivalent combination of mass and speed of one
or more rocks or more than one log, and imparting a total kinetic energy to the backstop of 44.2 kilojoules (32 600 foot-pounds);
(b) in accordance with the following minimum structural details, as applicable:
(i) for edge beams
(A) up to 3 ft long, HSS 4 in x 3 in x 1/4 in,
(B) over 3 ft and up to 6 ft long, HSS 6 in x 4 in x 1/4 in, or
(C) over 6 ft and up to 9 ft long, HSS 7 in x 5 in x 1/4 in;
(ii) for grid element sizes
(A) that are vertical grid elements, 1/2vin x 4 in ASTM A36 flat bar, or
(B) that are horizontal grid elements, 1 in diameter mild steel rod or steel elements of equivalent strength.
(2) A backstop must be positioned at least 10 cm (4 in) away from the glazed windows and exterior faces of the cab.
(3) Wire rope is not permitted for use as a grid element in a backstop.
(4) The framework must be secured to the main frame, boom or substructure of the mobile equipment.
(5) The supports, main frame, boom or substructure of the mobile equipment must be adequately designed and constructed to resist the impact
loads imposed by the backstop.
(6) Gusset plates must be incorporated into each comer of the backstop if the length of an edge beam of the exterior frame exceeds 3 ft.

(7) Each grid opening must not be greater than 400 cm2 (62 in2).
(8) Minimum visual interference to the operator must be one of the governing criteria in the design and positioning of the vertical members of the
guard.
(9) If flat bars are used as grid elements, they must be in a radiating pattern in line with the operator's line of sight (see Figures 1 and 2).
(10) Steel must be used for all parts of the backstop and must meet the performance requirements, including the performance requirements for
cold temperatures, of the standard CAN/CSA-M3471-05 (R2015) - Earth-Moving Machinery - Roll-Over Protective Structures - Laboratory
Tests and Performance Requirements (Adopted ISO 3471:1994,first edition, 1994-02-01).

3 Certification

(1) Subject to subsection (2),

(a) a backstop must be certified by the backstop manufacturer or a professional engineer as meeting this standard, and
(b) any addition, modification, welding or cutting on a backstop must be carried out in accordance with the instructions of, and the backstop must
be recertified by, the backstop manufacturer or a professional engineer.
(2) Backstops manufactured prior to September 1, 2021 are exempt from subsection (1)(a) but not from any other part of this standard.
Figure 1
Mainframe-mounted Heavy Duty Backstop

Figure 2
Boom-mounted Heavy Duty Backstop
Schedule 16-B

WorkSafeBC G603 Standard - Heavy Duty Guards for Windows

1 Scope, definitions and measurements

(1) This standard describes minimum requirements for the design of heavy duty guards (see Figure 1) for front, side and rear windows in mobile
equipment where the operator is exposed to hazards of intruding or flying objects, such as snapped or whipping cables, logs and tree limbs, falling
rocks or concrete, and loose debris.
(2) In this standard:
"grid element" means a vertical or horizontal member of a heavy duty guard inside the framework;
"HSS" means hollow structural section.
(3) In this standard, common industry practices are followed in expressing numerical measurements.

2 Design requirements

(1) A heavy duty guard must be able to protect the operator from one or more objects imparting an absorbed kinetic energy level of 11 526 joules
(8 500 foot-pounds).
(2) When steel is used, a heavy duty guard must provide protection for the entire surface area of the window and must be positioned as follows:
(a) to allow for window cleaning, at least 10 cm (4 in) away from the exterior face of the window;
(b) to prevent side intrusion, not more than 20 cm (8 in) away from the exterior face of the window.
(3) When steel is used for a heavy duty guard, it must be suitable for cold temperatures as meeting the requirements of the standard CAN/CSA-
M3471-05 (R2015) - Earth-Moving Machinery - Roll-Over Protective Structures - Laboratory Tests and Performance Requirements
(Adopted ISO 3471:1994, first edition, 1994-02-01), which may be satisfied by using steel that is equivalent to ASTM A36, CSA G40.21 33G,
44W for plates, bars and angles and CSA G40.21 50W for HSS.
(4) The exterior frame of a steel heavy duty guard must be secured to the structural parts of the cab, which must be adequately designed and
constructed to resist the impact loads imposed by the guard.
(5) The minimum edge beam size of a steel heavy duty guard must not be less than HSS 2.5 in x 1.5 in x 0.125 in.
(6) Gusset plates must be incorporated into each comer of a steel heavy duty guard if the length of an edge beam of the exterior frame exceeds 3
ft.
(7) Each grid opening in a steel heavy duty guard must not be greater than 20 cm x 20 cm (8 in x 8 in).
(8) The minimum size of the grid element in a steel heavy duty guard must be 1.9 cm (3/4 in) mild steel rod or a steel element of equivalent strength.
(9) The minimum mild steel rod diameter or steel element, as applicable, set out in subsection (8) must be proportionately increased if a steel heavy
duty guard is longer or wider than 3 ft.
(10) Minimum visual interference to the operator must be one of the governing criteria in the design and positioning of the vertical members of a
steel heavy duty guard.
(11) If steel flat bars are used as grid elements, they must be in a radiating pattern in line with the operator's line of sight.
(12) Effective September 1, 2021, wire rope is not permitted for construction of a new steel heavy duty guard.
(13) If nuts and bolts are used in the fabrication of a heavy duty guard, they must be Grade 8, at minimum.
(14) Materials with equal or better properties, including polycarbonate, may be used in place of those stipulated in this standard.
Figure 1
Typical Heavy Duty Guard

Schedule 16-C

WorkSafeBC G604 Standard - Light Duty Guards for Windows

1 Scope, definitions and measurements

(1) This standard describes minimum requirements for the design of light duty guards for front, side and rear windows in mobile equipment such as
dozers, loaders, skidders, excavators and mulchers, where the operator is exposed to hazards of intruding or flying objects such as jill-pokes,
individual brick-sized objects, rock or wood chips, and metal shrapnel.
(2) In this standard, "HSS" means hollow structural section.
(3) In this standard, common industry practices are followed in expressing numerical measurements.

2 Design requirements - general

(1) Light duty guards must each be able to protect the operator from one or more objects imparting the equivalent of a static load of 17 800
newtons (4 000 lbf) applied to an area of 64 cm2 (10 in2) anywhere on the guard.
(2) If a window is made of tempered glass, a light duty guard must be made of polycarbonate or steel mesh.
(3) If a window opening without glazing requires light duty guarding against metal shrapnel or other objects small enough to pass through steel
mesh, the guard must be made of polycarbonate, whether or not there is already a steel mesh guard over the window opening.
(4) Minimum visual interference to the operator must be one of the governing criteria in the design and positioning of the light duty guard.
(5) On ROPS-equipped mobile equipment, a light duty guard may be attached to parts of the ROPS provided that the attachment does not
adversely affect the performance of the ROPS and all the attachments must be clamped unless welding is permitted by the ROPS manufacturer or
a professional engineer.

3 Design requirements - polycarbonate guards

Polycarbonate guards (see Figure 1) must

(a) be a minimum of 9.5 mm (3/8 in) thick,
(b) not be drilled into or have been drilled,
(c) overlap the window by 2.54 cm (1 in) all around, and
(d) be mounted to the cab in accordance with Figure 1 and the cab must be adequately designed and constructed to resist the impact loads
imposed by the guard.
Figure 1
Mounting Detail for Light Duty Polycarbonate Guard

4 Design requirements - steel mesh guards

(1) Steel mesh guards (see Figure 2) must be suitable for cold temperatures as meeting the requirements of CAN/CSA-M3471-05 (R2015) -
Earth-Moving Machinery - Roll-Over Protective Structures - Laboratory Tests and Performance Requirements (Adopted ISO 3471:
1994, first edition, 1994-02-01), and may be satisfied by using steel that is equivalent to ASTM A36, CSA G40.21 33G, 44W for plates, bars
and angles and CSA G40.21 50W for HSS.
(2) A steel mesh guard must provide protection for the entire surface area of the window and must be positioned at least 10 cm (4 in) away from
the exterior face of the window to allow for window cleaning.
(3) The exterior frame of a steel mesh guard must be secured to the structural parts of the cab, which must be adequately designed and
constructed to resist the impact loads imposed by the guard.
(4) Minimum edge beam size of the exterior frame must be at least HSS 1 in x 1 in x 0.125 in.
(5) Wherever there is an unsupported area of mesh greater than 0.5 sq m (5.4 sq ft), an interior intermediate stiffener must be installed to add
rigidity and transfer loads from the mesh to the exterior frame and must be welded to the exterior frame.
(6) The minimum size of intermediate stiffeners must be 1 in x 0.5 in flat steel bar.
(7) Gusset plates must be incorporated if the length of an edge beam of the exterior frame exceeds 3 ft.
(8) Each opening in the steel mesh must not be greater than 4.5 cm x 4.5 cm (1 3/4 in x 1 3/4 in), and the mesh must be made of a welded or
woven wire of a minimum of 6 mm, which is welded to the exterior frame.
(9) If nuts and bolts are used in the fabrication of the guard, they must be Grade 8, at minimum.
(10) Effective September 1, 2021, wire rope is not permitted for use in a steel guard.
Figure 2
Typical Light Duty Steel Mesh Guard

Contents
20.1 Definitions

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

20.1A Qualified contractor

20.2 Notice of project
20.2.1 Notice of project - hazardous substances
20.3 Coordination of multiple employer workplaces

SAFE WORK AREAS AND SAFE ACCESS

20.4 Safe access

20.5 Temporary floors
20.6 Design loads
20.7 Fall protection [Repealed]
20.8 Floor and roof openings [Repealed]
20.9 Protection from falling materials
20.10 Chutes
20.11 Safety headgear [Repealed]
20.12 Glass panels
20.13 Thrust-out crane landing platforms
20.14 Temporary support
20.14.1 Fills
20.14.2 Stockpiles
20.14.3 Unstable face of a stockpile

BRIDGES AND SIMILAR STRUCTURES

20.15 Drawings and special procedures

20.16 Walkways

CONCRETE FALSEWORK AND FORMWORK

20.16.1 Definitions
20.16.2 Application
20.17 Worksite-specific plans required for specified formwork
20.18 Certification of worksite-specific plans by professional engineer
20.19 Continuity of engineering
20.20 Information for worksite-specific plans
20.21 Application drawings and supplementary instructions for flyforms
20.22 Flyform handling
20.23 Supervision
20.24 Equipment requirements
20.25 Concrete placing hazards
20.26 Inspections

CONCRETE PUMPING

20.26.1 Definition
20.26.2 Application of regulation
20.26.3 Standards
20.26.4 Duty to ensure operator's competence
20.26.5 Certification authority
20.26.6 Operator certification
20.27 Equipment identification
20.28 Manufacturer's, supplier's or integrator's manual
20.29 Inspection and maintenance records
20.30 Pre-use inspection
20.30.1 Design and construction
20.31 Controls
20.32 Hydraulic cylinders
20.33 Marking weight
20.34 Lifting a pump
20.35 Securing a pump
20.36 Emergency shutoff
20.37 Agitator guarding
20.38 Engine exhaust
20.39 Housekeeping
20.40 Outriggers
20.41 Use of placing boom [Repealed]
20.42 Pipe diameter and thickness
20.43 Pipe clamps
20.44 Delivery pipe
20.45 Restraining devices
20.46 Concrete pump lines
20.47 Equipment inspection
20.48 Repair and modification
20.48.1 Installation of mast
20.49 Boom and mast weight
20.50 Restriction on use [Repealed]
20.51 Compressed air cleaning [Repealed]
20.52 Operator's duties [Repealed]
20.53 Work near powerlines [Repealed]
20.54 Hopper signal device

TILT-UP BUILDING CONSTRUCTION

20.55 Specifications and plans

20.56 Design requirements
20.57 Panel handling
20.58 Inspections
20.59 Brace removal

CONCRETE PRE-STRESSING AND POST-TENSIONING

20.60 General requirements

20.61 Signalling devices and restricted areas
20.62 Strand measuring
20.63 Guarding during pre-stressing operations
20.64 Deflecting devices
20.65 Detensioning and strand cutting procedures
20.66 Strand vises and hydraulic devices
20.67 Hydraulic equipment
20.68 Platform width
20.69 Blowouts
20.70 Tendon handling
20.71 Securing jacks

OPEN WEB JOISTS AND TRUSSES

20.72 Erection instructions

ROOF WORK

20.73 Fall protection [Repealed]

20.74 Crawl boards and ladders
20.75 Steep roof requirements
20.76 Chutes and hoists
20.77 Mechanical equipment

EXCAVATIONS

20.78 Work standards

20.79 Underground utility services
20.80 Removing nearby hazards
20.81 Sloping and shoring requirements
20.82 Timber shoring and grades
20.83 Safe shoring procedures
20.84 Manufactured shoring [Repealed]
20.85 Trench support structures
20.86 Spoil piles
20.87 Entry and exit
20.88 Guarding
20.89 Excavation crossings
20.90 Excavated materials
20.91 Use of skips or buckets
20.92 Scaling and trimming
20.93 Height limitations
20.94 Positioning equipment
20.95 Water accumulation
Table 20-1: Trench support structures
Figure 20-1: Sloping in lieu of shoring
Figure 20-2: Benching in lieu of shoring
Figure 20-3: Combined supporting and sloping

SCALING OPERATIONS

20.96 Definitions
20.97 Work from top down
20.98 Rappelling and work positioning systems
20.99 Rappelling ropes
20.100 Anchors and other hardware
20.101 Harnesses

MARINE CONSTRUCTION, PILE DRIVING AND DREDGING

20.102 Suspended work platforms

20.103 Hoisting piles
20.104 Operator protection
20.105 Exhaust discharge
20.106 Chocking the hammer
20.107 Pile heads
20.108 Cracked hammer
20.109 Splicing
20.110 Walkway on discharge line

DEMOLITION

20.111 Structural integrity

20.112 Hazardous materials
20.113 Disconnecting utility services
20.114 Glass removal
20.115 Overloading floors [Repealed]
20.116 Protection from falling materials
20.117 Throwing material
20.118 Stabilizing walls
20.119 Dismantling buildings
20.120 Housekeeping
20.121 Stairways

WORK IN COMPRESSED AIR

20.122 Medical fitness

20.123 Compliance with standards
Construction, Excavation and Demolition Definitions

20.1 Definitions

In this Part
"adjacent to an excavation" means within a distance less than or equal to the overall depth of the excavation, measured from a vertical line
through the toe of the excavation face;
"application drawings", also known as erection drawings, means drawings that contain the information necessary for the erection, use and
dismantling of formwork, falsework, reshoring and associated components and equipment of the formwork, falsework and reshoring;
"asbestos-containing material" has the same meaning as in section 6.1;
"construction project" means any erection, alteration, repair, dismantling, demolition, structural or routine maintenance, painting, land clearing,
earth moving, grading, excavating, trenching, digging, boring, drilling, blasting, concreting, the installation of any machinery or any other work
deemed to be construction by the Board;
"demolition" means tearing down, destruction, breakup, razing or removal of the whole or part of a building or structure, or of free standing
machinery or equipment that is directly related to the function of the structure;
"excavation" means any cut, cavity, trench or depression in the earth's surface resulting from rock or soil removal;
"falsework" means a temporary support structure used to support loads during a construction project;
"fill" means any soil or other loose material that is constructed to form an embankment or a part of the foundation of a structure or improvement;
"formwork" means a temporary support system used to contain cast-in-place concrete during a construction project, but does not include
falsework;
"reshoring" means a temporary support system used to support a slab or other structure and withstand loads during a construction project after
formwork and falsework have been removed;
"stockpile" means any soil or other loose material that is placed in an area for storage but that is not intended to function as fill;
"tilt-up construction" means a system of building construction in which concrete wall panels are placed in position in the permanent structure and
temporarily braced or supported;
"trench" means an excavation less than 3.7 m (12 ft) wide at the bottom, over 1.2 m (4 ft) deep, and of any length.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 258/2008, effective January 1, 2009.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]
General Requirements

20.1A Qualified contractor

If a person agrees with the owner to be the prime contractor as provided in sections 13 and 24 of the Workers Compensation Act, then that
person must be qualified.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 279/2019, effective April 6, 2020.]

20.2 Notice of project

(1) Subject to subsection (4), either the owner or the person engaged by the owner to be the prime contractor on a construction project must
ensure that the Board receives, in writing, a notice of project that contains the information required by subsection (2) at least 24 hours before work
on the construction project begins at the worksite if any of the following apply:
(a) the estimated total cost of labour and materials for the work exceeds $100 000;
(b) all or part of the construction project, project, whether a temporary or a permanent aspect of the project, is designed by a professional
engineer except for pre-engineered or pre-manufactured building and structural components;
(c) the construction project is a new erection, a major alteration, a structural repair or a demolition of
(i) a building more than 2 storeys or 6 m (20 ft) high,
(ii) a bridge,
(iii) an earth or water retaining structure more than 3 m (10 ft) high, or
(iv) a silo, chimney or other similar structure more than 6 m (20 ft) high;
(d) workers will be working in a cofferdam or in a compressed air environment other than an underground working as defined in section 22.1;
(e) a worker may be required to enter
(i) a trench over 30 m (100 ft) long, or
(ii) an excavation, other than a trench, over 1.2 m (4 ft) deep.
(2) The notice of project must contain the following information:
(a) the name and contact information of the owner and of the person engaged by the owner to be the prime contractor, if any;
(b) the address of the construction project or its location in relation to the nearest highway;
(c) the scope of the construction project, including a list of the items referred to in subsection (1) that apply to the construction project;
(d) the starting date and the estimated duration of the construction project;
(e) the estimated total cost of labour and materials for the construction project;
(f) if the construction project involves construction of a cofferdam, confirmation by the owner or the person engaged by the owner to be the prime
contractor that drawings for all temporary or permanent ground support will be available at the worksite for the duration of the construction
project, if ground support is used.
(3) Subject to subsection (4), if a notice of project is required under subsection (1), the owner or the person engaged by the owner to be the prime
contractor must ensure that a copy of the notice of project is posted at the worksite before work on the construction project begins at the worksite
and is kept posted for the duration of the construction project.
(4) If it is necessary to do immediate work on a construction project to which subsection (1) applies in order to prevent the risk of injury to
workers or other persons or damage to property, work on the construction project may begin at the worksite immediately and the owner or the
person engaged by the owner to be the prime contractor on the construction project must ensure that
(a) the Board receives, in writing, a notice of project that contains the information required by subsection (2) as soon as possible, and
(b) a copy of the notice of project is posted at the worksite as soon as possible and is kept posted for the duration of the construction project.
(5) If any of the information required by subsection (2) changes significantly, the owner or the person engaged by the owner to be the prime
contractor must ensure that
(a) the Board receives, in writing, the new information as soon as possible, and
(b) a copy of the new information is posted at the worksite as soon as possible and is kept posted for the duration of the construction project.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 9/2017, effective May 1, 2017.]

20.2.1 Notice of project - hazardous substances

(1) Subject to subsections (3) and (6), if a construction project involves a work activity set out in subsection (2), all employers responsible for the
work activity and either the owner or the person engaged by the owner to be the prime contractor on the construction project must ensure that the
Board receives, in writing, a notice of project that contains the information required by subsection (4) at least 48 hours before the work activity
begins at the worksite.
(2) The following are work activities for the purposes of subsection (1):
(a) a work activity that involves working with or in proximity to asbestos-containing material, as defined in section 6.1, that is a moderate risk work
activity or a high risk work activity as defined in that section;
(b) the alteration, repair, dismantling or demolition of all or part of a building or structure in which asbestos-containing material has been processed,
manufactured or stored;
(c) a work activity that significantly disturbs lead-containing material in buildings or structures;
(d) a work activity that is similar to those described in paragraphs (a) to (c) and that may expose workers to a significant risk of occupational
disease from a biological or chemical agent or ionizing radiation.
(3) Subsection (1) does not apply if the work activity is carried out
(a) for the purposes of section 20.112(2) or (6) [hazardous materials],
(b) during a site inspection conducted to identify hazards,
(c) to determine the types of tasks required for the construction project, or
(d) to estimate the cost of labour and materials for the construction project.
(4) The notice of project must contain the following information:
(a) the name and contact information of all employers responsible for the work activity, of the owner and of the person engaged to be the prime
contractor, if any;
(b) the address of the construction project or its location in relation to the nearest highway;
(c) the scope of the construction project and of the work activity;
(d) the starting date and the estimated duration of the construction project and of the work activity;
(e) the safe work procedures specific to the work activity, and the hazardous substance involved in the work activity, that will be used to minimize
the risk of occupational disease to the workers;
(f) if section 20.112 applies, a written report made under section 20.112(3)(e) and, if applicable, section 20.112(6)(e).
(5) Subject to subsection (6), all employers responsible for the work activity and either the owner or the person engaged by the owner to be the
prime contractor must ensure that a copy of the notice of project is posted at the worksite before the work activity begins at the worksite and is
kept posted for the duration of the construction project.
(6) If it is necessary to do immediate work in order to prevent the risk of injury to workers or other persons, the risk of occupational disease or
damage to property, a work activity referred to in subsection (2) may begin at the worksite immediately, and all employers responsible for the
work activity and either the owner or the person engaged by the owner to be the prime contractor must ensure that
(a) the Board receives, in writing, a notice of project that contains the information required by subsection (4) as soon as possible, and
(b) a copy of the notice of project is posted at the worksite as soon as possible and is kept posted for the duration of the construction project.
(7) If any of the information required by subsection (4) changes significantly, all employers responsible for the work activity and either the owner or
the person engaged by the owner to be the prime contractor must ensure that
(a) the Board receives, in writing, the new information as soon as possible, and
(b) a copy of the new information is posted at the worksite as soon as possible and is kept posted for the duration of the construction project.
(8) All employers responsible for a work activity to which subsection (1) applies must retain a copy of the notice of project respecting the work
activity for at least 10 years from the starting date of the construction project as set out in the notice of project.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 9/2017, effective May 1, 2017.]

20.3 Coordination of multiple employer workplaces

(1) If a construction project involves the work of 2 or more employers or their workers, each employer must notify the owner, or the person
engaged by the owner to be the prime contractor, in advance of any undertaking likely to create a hazard for a worker of another employer.
(2) If a work location has overlapping or adjoining work activities of 2 or more employers that create a hazard to workers, and the combined
workforce at the workplace is more than 5,
(a) the owner, or if the owner engages another person to be the prime contractor, then that person must
(i) appoint a qualified coordinator for the purpose of ensuring the coordination of health and safety activities for the location, and
(ii) provide up-to-date information as specified in subsection (4), readily available on site, and
(b) each employer must give the coordinator appointed under paragraph (a)(i) the name of a qualified person designated to be responsible for that
employer's site health and safety activities.
(3) The duties of the qualified coordinator appointed under paragraph (2)(a)(i) include
(a) informing employers and workers of the hazards created, and
(b) ensuring that the hazards are addressed throughout the duration of the work activities.
(4) The information required by subsection (2)(a)(ii) includes
(a) the name of the qualified coordinator appointed under subsection (2)(a)(i),
(b) a site drawing, which must be posted, showing project layout, first aid location, emergency transportation provisions, and the evacuation
marshalling station, and
(c) a set of construction procedures designed to protect the health and safety of workers at the workplace, developed in accordance with the
requirements of this Regulation.
Note: The information required by subsection (4) is a part of the overall health and safety program required by Part 3 of this Regulation (Rights
and Responsibilities). See sections 24 and 25 of Part 2 of the Workers Compensation Act for the statutory requirements for coordination at
multiple employer workplaces and the general duties of owners.
Safe Work Areas and Safe Access

20.4 Safe access

(1) Where practicable, suitable ladders, work platforms and scaffolds meeting the requirements of Part 13 (Ladders, Scaffold and Temporary
Work Platforms) must be provided for and used by a worker for activities requiring positioning at elevations above a floor or grade.
(2) There must be suitable access for the safe delivery of equipment and materials to locations in the workplace where they will be used.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 420/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 243/2006, effective January 1, 2007.]

20.5 Temporary floors

(1) During the erection of a building or structure of skeleton construction, a temporary floor, decking or formwork must be installed at the main
working level where work is being done.
(2) If compliance with subsection (1) is not practicable, a temporary floor or other effective means of protection must be installed not more than
two levels or 8 m (25 ft) below the main working level.
(3) Subsections (1) and (2) do not apply during the initial connection of structural members where it is not practicable to provide a floor or
decking.
(4) There must be a safe means of access and egress to each main working level referred to in subsection (1).
(5) A stairway comprised of at least framing, treads and a handrail must be provided to each floor level before construction of the next floor or
deck surface is undertaken, and the treads on the stairway must not create a tripping or slipping hazard.

20.6 Design loads

(1) A temporary floor, decking, floor opening cover or formwork must be

(a) capable of supporting a uniformly distributed live load of at least 2 kPa (40 psf), or
(b) designed and installed in accordance with the written instructions of a professional engineer if the anticipated live load will be different than 2
kPa (40 psf) in which case a copy of the engineer's plan and specifications must be available at the workplace.
(2) Workers delivering materials to or working on a temporary floor, decking, floor opening cover or formwork must be aware of the safe carrying
capacity of the surface and of precautions necessary to prevent overloading.

20.7 Fall protection

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 420/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

20.8 Floor and roof openings

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

20.9 Protection from falling materials

(1) If falling material could endanger workers

(a) the danger area must be barricaded or effectively guarded to prevent entry by workers, and conspicuous warning signs must be displayed on all
sides and approaches, or
(b) adequate protective canopies must be installed over the danger area, or
(c) adequate catch platforms or nets must be provided to stop materials from falling into areas accessible to workers.
(2) Temporary washroom facilities, offices and similar structures on a construction site must be
(a) located outside areas where there is the potential of being hit by falling materials, or
(b) covered by adequate protective canopies.
(3) Protective canopies must be designed and constructed to safely support all loads that may reasonably be expected to be applied to them, but in
no case less than 2.4 kPa (50 psf).

20.10 Chutes

(1) Chutes must be provided if the free fall of materials or debris being removed exceeds 6 m (20 ft).
(2) Vertical chutes must be completely enclosed and have gates at each point of entry.
(3) The discharge area of a chute must be barricaded or effectively guarded to prevent workers being injured by falling or flying debris and
conspicuous signs must be posted near chute outlets to warn of the danger.
20.11 Safety headgear

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

20.12 Glass panels

Glass panels installed during construction or alterations must be marked to clearly indicate their presence or effectively guarded at the time of
installation.

20.13 Thrust-out crane landing platforms

(1) A professional engineer must certify each thrust-out crane landing platform and certify that the building structure can adequately support loads
to be imposed by use of the platform.
(2) Thrust-out crane landing platform drawings and certification must be available on site when the platform is in place.
(3) The rated capacity of a thrust-out crane landing platform must be clearly marked on the platform and not be exceeded.
(3.1) Control measures acceptable to the Board must be implemented to ensure all loads placed on a thrust-out crane landing platform
(a) are safely supported, and
(b) can be safely attached to and detached from the rigging.
(4) Thrust-out platform decking and supporting members must be designed to safely support any concentrated loads that may be landed.
(5) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 420/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 420/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 19/2006, effective May 17, 2006.]

20.14 Temporary support

During the erection or dismantling of a structure or equipment the employer must ensure that all partially assembled structures or components are
supported as necessary to safely withstand any loads likely to be imposed on them.

20.14.1 Fills

A fill must be planned, constructed, used and maintained so that no person working at the workplace is endangered by any failure or instability of
the fill.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 258/2008, effective January 1, 2009.]

20.14.2 Stockpiles

A stockpile must be planned, constructed, used and maintained so that no person working at the workplace is endangered by any instability of the
stockpiled material.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 258/2008, effective January 1, 2009.]

20.14.3 Unstable face of a stockpile

The height of an unstable face of a stockpile must not exceed the maximum safe reach of the equipment being used to remove material from the
stockpile.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 258/2008, effective January 1, 2009.]
Back to Top
Bridges and Similar Structures

20.15 Drawings and special procedures

During the construction of a bridge or a structure involving erection of skeleton structural members, documentation of all construction details that
require engineering, including erection procedures, temporary bracing and falsework must be
(a) available at the worksite at all times during such work, and
(b) updated as necessary to show changes in details or site conditions, and each update must be certified by a professional engineer.

20.16 Walkways

A worker must not walk upon the surfaces of structural members that have shear connectors, dowels or other protrusions unless suitable
walkways and runways are provided to eliminate the tripping hazard.
Back to Top
Concrete Falsework and Formwork

20.16.1 Definitions

In sections 20.17 to 20.26:

"specified formwork" means formwork of a type listed in section 20.17(1)(a) to (n);
"worksite-specific plans" means worksite-specific application drawings and any associated specifications and supplementary instructions.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]

20.16.2 Application

Sections 20.17 to 20.26 apply only to cast-in-place concrete.

[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]

20.17 Worksite-specific plans required for specified formwork

(1) The employer must ensure that worksite-specific plans are prepared for the following types of formwork and any associated falsework or
reshoring:
(a) flyforms;
(b) ganged forms;
(c) jump forms;
(d) vertical slip forms;
(e) formwork over 4 m (13 ft) in height;
(f) suspended forms for beams, slabs, stairs and landings;
(g) single-sided, battered or inclined forms over 2 m (6.5 ft) in height;
(h) cantilever forms;
(i) bridge deck forms;
(j) shaft lining forms;
(k) tunnel lining forms;
(l) formwork into which concrete will be pumped through an injection port below the upper concrete surface;
(m) formwork over 3 m (10 ft) in height into which self-consolidating concrete will be placed;
(n) formwork designated by the designer of the structure.
(2) The employer must ensure that a professional engineer certifies the following in accordance with section 20.18:
(a) worksite-specific plans;
(b) any changes to worksite-specific plans.
(3) The employer must ensure that certified worksite-specific plans are available at the worksite during the erection, use and dismantling of
formwork, falsework and reshoring.
(4) The employer must ensure that any changes to the certified worksite-specific plans are available at the worksite
(a) as soon as practicable, and
(b) before the inspection required for placement of concrete or other intended loading of formwork, falsework and reshoring.
(5) The employer must ensure that formwork, falsework and reshoring are erected, used and, if applicable, dismantled in accordance with up-to-
date certified worksite-specific plans.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]

20.18 Certification of worksite-specific plans by professional engineer

For the purposes of section 20.17 (2), a professional engineer must certify that worksite-specific plans, and any changes to worksite-specific
plans, meet the requirements of
(a) CSA Standard S269.1-16, Falsework and formwork,
(b) section 20.20 of this Regulation, and
(c) if the worksite-specific plans are prepared for flyforms and any associated falsework or reshoring, sections 20.21(1) and (2) and 20.22(1) and
(2) of this Regulation.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]

20.19 Continuity of engineering

In the event of a change of professional engineers or if the separate work of 2 or more professional engineers is involved, the continuity of design,
construction and inspection of formwork and any associated falsework or reshoring must be ensured by
(a) the employer, or
(b) the owner or prime contractor, if the formwork, falsework or reshoring affects workers of more than one employer.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]

20.20 Information for worksite-specific plans

(1) For the purposes of section 20.18 (b), worksite-specific plans must, subject to subsection (2),
(a) clearly show all the information necessary to accurately and safely erect, use and, if applicable, dismantle formwork, falsework and reshoring,
and
(b) include the following information:
(i) sufficient plan view, section views and connection details, enlarged where necessary, to clearly describe the formwork, falsework and reshoring
and permit accurate erection;
(ii) the quality and grade of materials to be used for the components and their connection;
(iii) an accurate description of proprietary items, including fittings, to permit field identification;
(iv) the load bearing capacity required of the material upon which sills are to be placed and, if necessary, details of procedures to be used to
develop and maintain the required capacity;
(v) the minimum dimensions of sills and other foundation members;
(vi) erection, use and dismantling procedures that require special attention including, where applicable, handling multi-use formwork panels;
(vii) details of supports necessary to maintain lateral stability and resist sidesway and racking, specifying the materials, dimensions and locations of
external braces, ties and other support devices;
(viii) if structural components connect together, the connection details necessary to prevent accidental displacement or rotation of the components;
(ix) details of the form or mould into which concrete will be placed;
(x) the maximum concrete slump that the form or mould is able to withstand;
(xi) sufficient load and deflection information to permit a professional engineer to understand the design of the formwork and falsework;
(xii) the sequence, method and rate of load placement necessary to prevent overloading of any part of the formwork or falsework.
(2) If any information cannot be provided to meet the requirements of subsection (1), worksite-specific plans must include special notation of the
information that is incomplete and that will require further design.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]

20.21 Application drawings and supplementary instructions for flyforms

(1) Application drawings for flyforms must be detailed to show

(a) a plan view, a longitudinal section and a cross-section for each type of flyform panel, and
(b) the weight, calculated position of the centre of gravity and the position of the pickup points for each type of flyform panel.
(2) The design on the application drawings and any supplementary instructions for a flyform panel must provide that, as soon as the panel is landed
on a supporting surface, before anyone climbs or walks on the panel and before placement of concrete or reinforcing steel on the panel, the panel
must
(a) be able to resist a minimum horizontal load of 3.6 kN (800 lbs) applied in any direction on the top edge,
(b) have a minimum safety factor against overturning about any possible axis of
(i) 1.6 when dead load plus most severe live load configuration plus horizontal loads are considered, and
(ii) 2.0 when dead load plus most severe live load configuration or dead load plus horizontal loads are considered,
(c) have a minimum safety factor of 1.5 against the panel sliding against the supporting surface, and
(d) have flyform legs placed as necessary to attain the required safety factor against overturning.
(3) If any of the requirements of subsection (2) cannot be met for a panel, the employer must ensure that the panel, before being unhooked from
the crane or hoist, is secured to the permanent structure or an adjacent panel in a manner specified by the designer of the formwork.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]

20.22 Flyform handling

(1) Application drawings and any supplementary instructions for flyforms must show a step-by-step procedure for all phases of each cycle of
assembly, flying, use, dismantling and reuse of each flyform panel, including special procedures for non-typical floors.
(2) If any flyform panel is not inherently stable for all possible conditions of load, special notation on the flyform application drawings and any
supplementary instructions must draw attention to the procedure for obtaining stability.
(3) The employer must ensure that the application drawings and any supplementary instructions required by subsections (1) and (2), including
special procedures required for non-typical floors, are made available to workers involved in any part of the assembly, flying, use, dismantling or
reuse of each flyform panel.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]

20.23 Supervision

The employer must ensure that

(a) a qualified supervisor supervises the erection, use and dismantling of formwork, falsework and reshoring, and
(b) workers are instructed in
(i) the hazards that the workers may be exposed to, and
(ii) the precautions to be taken while around or on formwork, falsework or reshoring.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]

20.24 Equipment requirements

The employer must ensure that equipment, materials and hardware used in the erection, use or dismantling of formwork and any associated
falsework and reshoring meet the requirements specified in up-to-date worksite-specific plans.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]
20.25 Concrete placing hazards

(1) The employer must ensure that protruding objects that create a risk of injury are removed or effectively guarded.
(2) During placement of concrete or other significant loads on the formwork, a person must be restricted from the areas underneath where the
loads are placed.
(3) After placement of concrete or other significant loads on the formwork, a person must be restricted from the areas underneath where the loads
were placed until it can be confirmed by a qualified person that the formwork is withstanding the loads.
(4) Placement of concrete or other loads
(a) must stop if any of the following occurs:
(i) weakness;
(ii) undue settlement;
(iii) excess distortion of specified formwork or any associated falsework or reshoring;
(iv) an unanticipated or dangerous condition not set out in subparagraph (i), (ii) or (iii), and
(b) may restart only after the formwork, falsework or reshoring has been repaired or strengthened as specified by a professional engineer.
(5) Loads must not be applied to uncured concrete structures except as permitted by the worksite-specific plans.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]

20.26 Inspections

(1) Subject to subsection (4), immediately before placement of concrete or other intended loading of specified formwork and any associated
falsework or reshoring, the employer must ensure that
(a) the formwork, falsework and reshoring are inspected by a professional engineer, and
(b) the professional engineer issues a certificate that
(i) indicates the specific areas inspected, and
(ii) certifies that the formwork, falsework and reshoring have been erected in accordance with up-to-date worksite-specific plans.
(2) The certificate required by subsection (1)(b) must be available at the worksite for inspection by an officer.
(3) If ganged forms are being reused on the same worksite with any modification to the design or method of erection of the ganged forms,
subsection (1) applies in relation to the reuse of the ganged forms.
(4) If ganged forms are being reused on the same worksite without modification to the design or method of erection of the ganged forms certified
under subsection (1), immediately before placement of concrete or other intended loading of the ganged forms, the employer must ensure that the
ganged forms are inspected by a qualified person who
(a) confirms that the ganged forms have been erected in accordance with up-to-date worksite-specific plans, and
(b) documents the inspection and the confirmation, including the specific location where the ganged forms are being reused and the date of the
inspection.
(5) The documents required by subsection (4)(b) must be available at the worksite for inspection by an officer.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]
Concrete Pumping

20.26.1 Definition

In sections 20.26.2 to 20.54, "mast" means a mounting or support structure, other than a truck or trailer, for a concrete placing boom.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.26.2 Application of regulation

Sections 20.31, 20.32, 20.37, 20.38, 20.40 (3), 20.43 (4) and 20.45 do not apply in relation to concrete pumps or placing booms manufactured
on or after August 1, 2012.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.26.3 Standards

(1) The operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of a concrete pump or placing boom manufactured before August 1, 2012 must meet the
requirements of CSA Standard Z151-09, Concrete pumps and placing booms, as set out in clauses 1.1 to 3 [definitions], 4.1.9.2.3, 4.1.18.2,
4.1.19.1, 4.2.1.1, 4.2.2, 5.1.1 to 5.3.4, 5.3.7 to 6.3.4 and 6.5.1 to 6.7.3, including any table, figure or annex referred to in those clauses.
(2) The design, manufacture, installation, operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of a concrete pump or placing boom manufactured on or
after August 1, 2012 must meet the requirements of CSA Standard Z151-09, Concrete pumps and placing booms, as set out in clauses 1.1 to 3
[definitions], 4.1.1.2 to 5.3.4, 5.3.7 to 6.3.4 and 6.5.1 to 6.7.3, including any table, figure or annex referred to in those clauses.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.26.4 Duty to ensure operator's competence

(1) The employer must ensure, before a person operates, or supervises a person who operates, a concrete pump or placing boom at a workplace,
that the person can operate the concrete pump or placing boom at that workplace in a competent and safe manner, taking into account
(a) the class or type of concrete pump or placing boom being operated, and
(b) the circumstances of the workplace.
(2) The duty imposed on the employer under subsection (1) also applies to the following:
(a) in the case of a multiple-employer workplace, the prime contractor for the workplace;
(b) in any other case, the owner of the workplace.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 222/2021, effective December 1, 2021.]

20.26.5 Certification authority

(1) The Board may designate an organization to be the certification authority for the purposes of section 20.26.6 if
(a) the Board has reviewed the certification program proposed by the organization and is satisfied that the certification program meets the
requirements of
(i) ISO/IEC 17024:2012, Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons, or
(ii) ANSI/ICE 1100:2019, Standard for Assessment-Based Certificate Programs, and
(b) the Board is satisfied that the organization will be able to provide, throughout British Columbia, the written tests and practical assessments that
applicants must take to obtain a concrete pump operator's certificate.
(2) The Board may revoke the designation of an organization as the certification authority if
(a) the Board is satisfied that
(i) the certification program provided by the organization does not meet the certification requirements of either of the standards referred to in
subsection (1)(a),
(ii) the organization is not providing, throughout British Columbia, the written tests or practical assessments that applicants must take to obtain a
concrete pump operator's certificate, or
(iii) the organization is not performing or exercising the organization's duties and powers with respect to concrete pump operator's certificates in
accordance with section 20.26.6, or
(b) the organization requests the revocation.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 222/2021, effective December 1, 2021.]

20.26.6 Operator certification

(1) In this section, "certification authority" means an organization designated as the certification authority under section 20.26.5(1).
(2) On and after January 1, 2024, a person must not operate a concrete pump or placing boom at a workplace unless the person
(a) holds a valid concrete pump operator's certificate, issued by the certification authority, for the class or type of concrete pump or placing boom
being operated and operates the concrete pump or placing boom in accordance with any conditions set out on the certificate, or
(b) operates the concrete pump or placing boom
(i) under the supervision of a person who holds a valid concrete pump operator's certificate for the class or type of concrete pump or placing
boom being operated, and
(ii) in accordance with the directions of the certificate holder.
(3) The employer must ensure that a person who operates a concrete pump or placing boom at a workplace complies with subsection (2).
(4) The duty imposed on the employer under subsection (3) also applies to the following:
(a) in the case of a multiple-employer workplace, the prime contractor for the workplace;
(b) in any other case, the owner of the workplace.
(5) The certification authority must issue a concrete pump operator's certificate to an applicant for a class or type of concrete pump or placing
boom if the applicant
(a) has reached the minimum age specified by the certification authority,
(b) takes a written test established by the certification authority and achieves a minimum score established by the certification authority,
(c) takes a practical assessment administered by the certification authority and achieves a minimum score established by the certification authority,
and
(d) pays to the certification authority a fee that is established by the certification authority to cover the costs of administering the written test and
practical assessment.
(6) The certification authority must determine the term of a concrete pump operator's certificate and must set out on the certificate the date that it
expires.
(7) The certification authority must renew a concrete pump operator's certificate if the certificate holder
(a) submits, before the certificate has expired, a completed application, in a form established by the certification authority, to take the written test
for the renewal of the certificate,
(b) takes a written test established by the certification authority and achieves a minimum score established by the certification authority,
(c) subject to subsection (8), takes a practical assessment administered by the certification authority and achieves a minimum score established by
the certification authority, and
(d) pays to the certification authority a fee that is established by the certification authority to cover the costs of administering the written test and, if
the practical assessment is required, the assessment.
(8) The requirement to take the practical assessment under subsection (7)(c) does not apply if the certificate holder has, during the term of the
certificate, acquired practical experience of a type and in an amount established by the certification authority.
(9) The certification authority may, at any time, set out conditions on the concrete pump operator's certificate that deal with the following matters:
(a) the classes or types of concrete pumps or placing booms to which the certificate applies;
(b) safety matters applicable to a particular certificate holder.
(10) The certification authority may cancel a concrete pump operator's certificate if the certification authority is satisfied that one or both of the
following apply:
(a) the certificate holder has contravened one or more of the conditions of the certificate;
(b) the certificate holder does not have the knowledge or skill to operate the equipment specified in the certificate in a competent and safe manner.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 222/2021, effective December 1, 2021.]

20.27 Equipment identification

(1) A mast must bear a legible identification plate specifying

(a) the manufacturer's name,
(b) the year of manufacture,
(c) the model and serial number, and
(d) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]
(e) the allowable load.
(2) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.28 Manufacturer's, supplier's or integrator's manual

(1) The manufacturer's, supplier's or integrator's manual for a concrete pump or placing boom, comprised of the documentation listed in clause
4.1.18.1 of CSA Standard Z151-09, Concrete pumps and placing booms, must be readily accessible to the operator and to maintenance
personnel.
(2) The manufacturer's
(a) operation and maintenance manual for a mast must be readily accessible to the operator and to maintenance personnel, and
(b) instructions for erection and use of a mast must be readily accessible to the installer, the operator and to maintenance personnel.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.29 Inspection and maintenance records

Records of inspection and maintenance as required by Part 4 (General Conditions) of this regulation must be made by the equipment operator and
other persons inspecting and maintaining a concrete pump, placing boom or mast.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.30 Pre-use inspection

(1) The operator must inspect a concrete pump, placing boom and mast and test its safety and control devices before use on each shift and record
the results of the inspection and tests in accordance with section 20.29.
(2) Any defects found in the concrete pump, placing boom or mast must be recorded according to section 20.29 and reported immediately to the
supervisor or employer, who must determine the course of action.
(3) If a defect may affect the safe operation of the concrete pump, placing boom or mast, the equipment must not be used until the defect has been
remedied.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.30.1 Design and construction

A concrete placing boom, mast and other structural supports must be designed and constructed so that, when this equipment is operated in
accordance with the manufacturer's intended use, stresses to the load bearing components do not exceed the components' structural limits and the
equipment is capable of carrying out its design function with an adequate margin of safety.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.31 Controls

Controls for a concrete pump, placing boom or mast must have their function clearly identified, and be located and maintained to allow safe
operation of the concrete pump, placing boom and mast.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.32 Hydraulic cylinders

(1) Hydraulic cylinders on a concrete pump, placing boom and mast must have pressure relief valves to prevent cylinder and boom damage due to
excess pressure.
(2) Hydraulic holding valves must be used on a concrete pump, placing boom or mast if hydraulic hose or coupling failure could result in
uncontrolled movement of mechanisms.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.33 Marking weight

A trailer or skid mounted concrete pump must have a permanent, legible notice stating the total weight of the unit.

20.34 Lifting a pump

A concrete pump may only be lifted using the lift points specified by the manufacturer or a professional engineer.

20.35 Securing a pump

The trailer or skid on which a concrete pump is mounted must be secured to prevent movement during pumping.

20.36 Emergency shutoff

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.37 Agitator guarding

(1) Concrete pump agitator guarding must be maintained to the pump manufacturer's specifications, with reasonable allowance for wear.
(2) Bent bars in a concrete pump agitator grill guard must be repaired.
(3) Concrete pump grill bar spacing may be increased to a maximum bar spacing of 8 cm (3 1/4 in) when pumping concrete mixes with a slump of
5 cm (2 in) or less and provided specific instructions are given to the crew regarding the hazard present due to the larger openings in the grill guard.
(4) The distance from the grill bars to the concrete pump's agitator must be at least 7.5 cm (3 in).
(5) A concrete pump agitator grill guard must be hinged or bolted in place.
(6) A person must not stand on the grill when the concrete pump or agitator is running.

20.38 Engine exhaust

A concrete pump's engine exhaust system must be arranged to prevent exhaust exposure to the operator and hopper area.

20.39 Housekeeping

The deck area of a concrete pump must be kept clean and free of unnecessary objects.

20.40 Outriggers

(1) Outriggers must be used in accordance with the concrete placing boom manufacturer's specifications.
(2) Extendible outriggers for a concrete placing boom must be marked to indicate maximum extension.
(3) A concrete placing boom manufactured after January 1, 1999 must have its outriggers or jacks permanently marked to indicate the maximum
load they will transmit to the ground.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.41 Use of placing boom

(1) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

(2) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
(3) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.42 Pipe diameter and thickness

(1) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

(2) The wall thickness of pipe mounted on a concrete placing boom must be sufficient to withstand a pressure greater than the maximum pressure
that the concrete pump can produce in the concrete being pumped.
(3) Pipe sections must be replaced when thickness measurements indicate that wall thickness has been reduced to the limits specified by the
manufacturer.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.43 Pipe clamps

(1) Concrete must not be pumped through pipe with grooved ends, such as those for Victaulic-type couplers.
(2) Pipe clamps used with pipe carrying concrete must have a pressure rating at least equal to the pipe pressure rating.
(3) To ensure proper connection of concrete delivery pipes, pipe and pipe clamp contact surfaces must be free of concrete and other foreign
matter when a connection is being made.
(4) Quick connect clamps used on a concrete delivery pipe must be pinned or secured after installation to keep them from inadvertently opening.

20.44 Delivery pipe

Delivery pipe between the concrete pump and the placing system must be supported and anchored to prevent movement and excessive loading on
pipe clamps.

20.45 Restraining devices

Restraining devices providing a safety factor of at least 5 must be used on attachments suspended from the placing boom or mast tip.

20.46 Concrete pump lines

(1) Concrete pump discharge line couplings, if located where inadvertent disconnection could cause injury to workers, must be guarded.
(2) The guards on a discharge line coupling must be positioned to effectively deflect in a safe direction any jet of concrete which might result from
disconnection of the coupling.

20.47 Equipment inspection

(1) A mast must be inspected in accordance with good engineering practice at intervals not exceeding 12 months, repaired as necessary, and
certified safe for use by a professional engineer, the manufacturer or the manufacturer's authorized agent.
(2) A concrete pump and placing boom must be inspected in accordance with good engineering practice at intervals not exceeding 12 months to
ensure that they meet
(a) the manufacturer's specifications,
(b) the requirements of the applicable standard referred to in section 20.26.3, and
(c) the requirements of this Regulation.
(3) Without limiting subsection (2), an inspection under that subsection must include an inspection of the structural, mechanical and control system
components of the concrete pump and placing boom.
(4) On and after January 1, 2021, a concrete pump and placing boom must not be used after an inspection under subsection (2) unless a
professional engineer certifies that, on the basis of that inspection, they are safe for use.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 14/2019, effective June 3, 2019.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 82/2020, effective July 14, 2020.]

20.48 Repair and modification

(1) Replacement parts used for repair of a concrete pump, placing boom or mast must meet or exceed the original manufacturer's specifications or
be certified by a professional engineer.
(2) If a repair is made to a load bearing component of a concrete pump, placing boom or mast,
(a) the repaired component must meet or exceed the original manufacturer's specifications, or
(b) the repair must be certified by a professional engineer,
before the concrete pump, placing boom or mast may be operated.
(3) If a modification affecting the safe operation of a concrete pump, placing boom or mast is made to
(a) the structure,
(b) one or more mechanical components, or
(c) the control system
of the concrete pump, placing boom or mast, the concrete pump, placing boom or mast must be certified as safe for use by a professional
engineer, the manufacturer or the manufacturer's authorized agent before it may be operated.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.48.1 Installation of mast

The design and installation of a mast must be

(a) in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications, or
(b) in the absence of manufacturer's specifications, certified by a professional engineer that the mast will safely support an allowable load.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.49 Boom and mast weight

The weight of each removable section of a concrete placing boom or mast must be permanently and legibly marked on the section.

20.50 Restriction on use

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.51 Compressed air cleaning

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.52 Operator's duties

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 188/2011, effective February 1, 2012.]

20.53 Work near powerlines

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

20.54 Hopper signal device

If a concrete placing boom operator cannot see and monitor the hopper on the concrete pump from every location the operator must be at during
the pumping activity, there must be a device at the hopper for the concrete delivery truck driver and other workers to signal the pump operator if
there is a problem at the pump or hopper.
Tilt-Up Building Construction

20.55 Specifications and plans

(1) Before a tilt-up project begins the employer must ensure that a comprehensive set of plans and specifications is prepared, detailing
(a) all erection and bracing procedures,
(b) the type, size and location of all lifting inserts, brace inserts, braces, fittings and anchors for each panel,
(c) the required strength to be reached by the concrete before panel lifting can begin,
(d) the design wind pressure used to determine temporary bracing requirements,
(e) the wind gust speed above which the site must be cleared of workers when panels are supported by the temporary bracing,
(f) the requirements for supplementary reinforcing steel, strongbacks, or other reinforcement to be used during panel erection,
(g) the method of rigging for lifting and handling each panel,
(h) procedures for unique job conditions such as the method of temporary storage on site, and
(i) the weight of each panel.
(2) The plans and specifications for tilt-up panel erection and bracing must be certified by a professional engineer.
(3) Any change to the plans and specifications required by subsection (1), including the use of alternate accessories or erection and rigging
procedures, must
(a) provide at least the same margin of safety as required by the original design and specifications, and
(b) be detailed on the documents and be certified by a professional engineer before it is carried out.
(4) One set of up-to-date certified plans and specifications must be maintained on site during lifting and as long as bracing is required to be in
place, and the documents must be available for inspection by an officer.

20.56 Design requirements

(1) The plans and specifications for tilt-up panel erection and bracing must ensure that the load to be imposed on each lifting and bracing insert and
anchor during panel lifting, moving and bracing will not exceed
(a) if a working load limit for the insert or anchor is not specified by the manufacturer, a maximum working load on the component determined by
dividing the manufacturer's guaranteed minimum failure load by the applicable safety factor required by subsection (2) or (3), or
(b) if the working load limit or the manufacturer's guaranteed minimum failure load is not available, a maximum working load determined by
calculating the ultimate load capacity in accordance with accepted engineering practice and the BC Building Code, and dividing this value by the
applicable safety factor required by subsection (2) or (3).
(2) The minimum safety factor for cast-in lifting inserts is 2.5 except as provided in subsection 20.57(5); and for lift-points secured by drilled-in
anchors, the minimum safety factor is 4.0.
(3) The minimum safety factors for bracing components are
(a) 1.67 for braces, and for the uplift or sliding of an anchor slab,
(b) 2.0 for cast-in brace inserts, and
(c) 2.5 for drilled-in bolt or expansion anchors, or greater if so specified by the manufacturer.
(4) The number of lift inserts for a panel must not be less than the total weight of the panel divided by the working load limit for the inserts in pullout
and in shear.
(5) The temporary bracing for a tilt-up panel must be designed to resist the greater of
(a) an unfactored design wind pressure of 700 Pa (15 psf), or
(b) wind pressure calculated in accordance with the BC Building Code based on the probability of 1 in 10 of being exceeded in any year, as listed
in the Supplement to the National Building Code of Canada 1990 or as otherwise specified by the local building authority, multiplied by a
pressure coefficient of 1.5.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

20.57 Panel handling

(1) Tilt-up panel lifting and bracing operations must be done under the direct supervision of a qualified person.
(2) Tilt-up panel lifting must not start until the specified minimum concrete strength has been achieved, as verified through testing in a manner
acceptable to the professional engineer responsible for the lifting and bracing design.
(3) A suitable bond breaker must be used to minimize adhesion of each tilt-up panel to the casting surface and wedges and pry bars must be used
to assist in releasing the panel from the casting surface.
(4) Crane positions must, where practicable, be chosen to avoid blind lifts.
(5) If a blind lift is necessary, the crane must be located so that if a lift component fails the tilt-up panel will not contact the crane, and if such a
crane position is not possible, the safety factor for the lifting inserts must be at least 4.0.
(6) Workers are not permitted in the danger area of the downside face of a tilt-up panel until all bracing components for the panel have been
installed.
(7) If bracing or other attachments are required on the downside face of a tilt-up panel, they may only be installed after the panel is erect and is
temporarily braced from the upside face as specified in the erection procedures.
(8) All specified tilt-up panel bracing including knee braces and any welded connection specified for temporary support must be installed as
detailed before the hoisting rigging is slackened.
(9) Cross-lacing of knee bracing may be done after the hoisting rigging is disconnected but must be no more than one panel behind the lifting
process.
(10) All specified bracing must be installed on erected tilt-up panels before leaving the site at the end of the work day.
(11) Drilled-in expansion bolts may only be used to secure braces if specifically authorized by the engineer responsible for the lift and bracing
design.
(12) Tilt-up panel lifting must not be done if wind gust velocities exceed 55 km/h (35 mph).
(13) The job site and areas adjacent to braced tilt-up panels must be cleared of personnel if wind gust velocities exceed 100 km/h (60 mph).

20.58 Inspections

(1) The professional engineer who certified the erection procedure or the engineer's designated representative must inspect the site prior to the start
of tilt-up panel lifting to ensure that lift procedures and temporary bracing requirements are understood, and a follow-up inspection must occur on
the last day of tilt-up panel lifting to ensure that temporary bracing requirements have been met.
(2) Following each inspection required by subsection (1) the person inspecting must issue an inspection report addressing the matters specified in
subsection (1) and a copy of the report must be maintained at the site while the temporary bracing system is in place.
(3) Work must not proceed on tilt-up panel lifting or in proximity to panels which have been temporarily braced until the relevant requirements of
subsections (1) and (2) have been met.

20.59 Brace removal

The temporary bracing installed to support tilt-up panels must not be removed until the structural design engineer for the building provides a written
statement that the tilt-up panels have been adequately connected into the overall structure and the temporary bracing is no longer needed.
Back to Top
Concrete Pre-Stressing and Post-Tensioning

20.60 General requirements

(1) Concrete pre-stressing and post-tensioning operations must be done according to the specifications and instructions of a professional engineer,
and a copy of such information must be available on site while the work is being done.
(2) Stressing operations must be carried out under the direction of a qualified supervisor.
(3) Workers involved in pre-stressing or post-tensioning must be instructed in and follow safe work procedures.
(4) Appropriate eye protection must be worn by all workers involved in grouting, stressing and cable trimming operations.
(5) Tendons, including bars, strands and wires, used for tensioning purposes must be protected against physical damage and corrosion during
handling, transportation and storage.
(6) Strand couplers must not be reused until they have been inspected by a qualified person and determined to be safe for reuse.
(7) Welding, burning or other work must not be permitted on any surface where strands have been strung or tensioned unless proper care is taken
to protect the strands from sparks or other heat sources and from stray electric currents.

20.61 Signalling devices and restricted areas

(1) Visual or audible signalling devices, or both must be provided and used in the area of tensioning operations to warn workers approaching the
area.
(2) Workers not directly involved in tensioning or detensioning operations must be kept clear of the danger area and must remain clear until
operations are completed and the visual and/or audible signals specified in subsection (1) are turned off or removed.
20.62 Strand measuring

Strand elongation and strand deflection must be measured by a means which does not expose the worker to a risk of injury.

20.63 Guarding during pre-stressing operations

(1) During pre-stressing operations workers must be protected by guards or other suitable devices at the tensioning ends and anchoring points to
contain the flying strands and the strand vises in the event of strand failure.
(2) Guards must be fabricated from mild steel plate, not less than 6 mm (1/4 in) thick, or steel mesh with openings 25 mm x 25 mm (1 in x 1 in) or
less that provides at least equivalent strength.

20.64 Deflecting devices

Deflecting devices must be designed to prevent slipout and to allow backing off of strands from the deflected position.

20.65 Detensioning and strand cutting procedures

(1) Written detensioning procedures must be prepared by a professional engineer and followed so that workers are not exposed to danger from
equipment or strand failure or structural failure.
(2) Written procedures must be developed and implemented to safeguard the operator and other workers from hazards while cutting strands.

20.66 Strand vises and hydraulic devices

(1) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

(2) Strand vises must not be reused until they have been inspected by a qualified person and determined to be safe for reuse.
(3) Damaged or worn vises and hydraulic equipment must be removed from service.
(4) The supervisor must ensure that operators are given the maximum allowable values for both stretch of the tendon and hydraulic pressure at the
pump.
(5) If there is a significant difference between the expected value and the measured value for either stretch of a tendon or hydraulic pressure at the
pump, the workers must stop operations on that particular tendon and consult with the professional engineer in charge to obtain instructions on
how to proceed.
(6) Each jack pressure gauge must be checked at frequent intervals against a master gauge, and the site engineer must be furnished with a
calibration chart.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

20.67 Hydraulic equipment

(1) Only hydraulic pressure hoses with self-seating couplings may be used, and care must be taken to ensure that end connections are not
subjected to bending stresses at any time.
(2) Hydraulic equipment must have a bypass valve which is adjusted and maintained to limit the hydraulic pressure so that the tension exerted by
the jack on the tendon does not exceed 90% of the minimum specified ultimate strength of the tendon.
(3) Hydraulic hoses must be inspected for flaws, leaks or bubbles after each stressing operation, and any damaged hoses immediately removed
from service.
(4) The hydraulic system must be regularly inspected for oil leaks and other damage and necessary corrective action taken.

20.68 Platform width

Where adequate clearance exists, the platform width at jacking locations must be at least 80 cm (32 in).

20.69 Blowouts

(1) Each blowout must be reported to the structural design engineer, investigated and logged.
(2) A copy of the logged entry must be available on site for reference purposes.

20.70 Tendon handling

If there is risk of injury from handling coiled post-tensioning tendons a suitable coil handling device must be used.

20.71 Securing jacks

All jacks must be secured to suitable anchors before they are installed on a cable for tensioning, and must not be unsecured before they are
removed from the cable, if a falling jack could endanger workers.
Back to Top
Open Web Joists and Trusses

20.72 Erection instructions

(1) Work must not be undertaken on the erection of premanufactured open web joists and trusses until clear and appropriate written instructions
from a professional engineer or the manufacturer of the joists or trusses, detailing safe erection procedures, are available at the worksite.
(2) Erection and temporary bracing of open web joists and trusses must be done in accordance with the written instructions required by subsection
(1).
Back to Top
Roof Work

20.73 Fall protection

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 420/2004, effective January 1, 2005.]

20.74 Crawl boards and ladders

(1) Crawl boards or ladders used for roof work must be securely fastened over the ridge of the roof, or must be otherwise effectively anchored.
(2) The use of an eavestrough to support a crawl board or ladder on a roof is prohibited.

20.75 Steep roof requirements

If a worker is employed on a roof having a slope ratio of 8 vertical to 12 horizontal or greater, the worker must use a personal fall protection
system or personnel safety nets must be used, and 38 mm x 140 mm (2 in x 6 in nominal) toe-holds must be used if the roofing material allows for
it.
Note: Exposed horizontal roof strapping may be used as toe-holds as long as it provides safe footing.

20.76 Chutes and hoists

The roof edge about a chute, bitumen spout and material hoist must have guardrails meeting the requirements of Part 4 (General Conditions) or
barriers of at least equivalent strength to at least 2 m (6.5 ft) on each side of such a work area.

20.77 Mechanical equipment

Mechanical or powered equipment which has the potential to push or pull a worker over an unguarded edge must not be used unless operated
according to procedures acceptable to the Board.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
Excavations

20.78 Work standards

(1) Subject to this section, excavation work must be done in accordance with the written instructions of a qualified registered professional if
(a) the excavation is more than 6 m (20 ft) deep,
(b) an improvement or structure is adjacent to the excavation,
(c) the excavation is subject to vibration or hydrostatic pressure likely to result in ground movement hazardous to workers, or
(d) the ground slopes away from the edge of the excavation at an angle steeper than a ratio of 3 horizontal to 1 vertical.
(2) Despite subsection (1), excavation work described in that subsection must be done in accordance with the written instructions of a professional
engineer if the excavation requires or uses support structures.
(3) The written instructions required by this section must
(a) be certified by the qualified registered professional concerned,
(b) be available at the site, and
(c) specify the support and sloping requirements, and the subsurface conditions expected to be encountered.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 258/2008, effective January 1, 2009.]

20.79 Underground utility services

(1) Before excavating or drilling with powered tools and equipment, the location of all underground utility services in the area must be accurately
determined, and any danger to workers from those utility services must be controlled.
(2) Excavation or drilling work in proximity to an underground utility service must be undertaken in conformity with the requirements of the owner
of that utility service.
(3) Pointed tools must not be used to probe for underground petroleum and electrical utility services.
(4) Powered equipment used for excavating must be operated so as to avoid damage to underground utility services, or danger to workers.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]

20.80 Removing nearby hazards

Trees, utility poles, rocks and similar objects adjacent to an area to be excavated must be removed or secured if they could endanger workers.

20.81 Sloping and shoring requirements

(1) Subject to section 20.78, before a worker enters any excavation over 1.2 m (4 ft) in depth or, while in the excavation, approaches closer to
the side or bank than a distance equal to the depth of the excavation, the employer must ensure that the sides of the excavation are
(a) sloped as specified in writing by a qualified registered professional,
(b) sloped at angles, dependent on soil conditions, which will ensure stable faces, but in no case may the slope or combination of vertical cut and
slope exceed that shown in Figure 20-1,
(c) benched as shown in Figure 20-2,
(d) supported as specified in writing by a professional engineer,
(e) supported in accordance with the minimum requirements of section 20.85, or
(f) supported by manufactured or prefabricated trench boxes or shoring cages, or other effective means.
(2) If the end of a trench over 1.2 m (4 ft) in depth is not adequately sloped, end shoring must be installed unless
(a) a worker in the trench is not required to approach closer to the end of the trench than a distance equal to the depth of the trench at that end,
(b) where, for the prevailing soil conditions at the end of the trench, the permissible spacing of uprights equals or exceeds the width of the trench,
or
(c) otherwise authorized in writing by a professional engineer or professional geoscientist.
(3) If end shoring is required, the walers for the end shoring must be installed to bear against the walers that extend along the sides of the trench, or
in a manner that will provide equivalent structural restraint.
(4) End shoring must be designed by a professional engineer if the end shoring waler length exceeds 1.8 m (6 ft).
(5) Shoring must extend from at least 30 cm (1 ft) above ground level to as close to the bottom of the trench as the material being installed will
allow, but in no case more than 60 cm (2 ft) from the bottom.
(6) Shoring need not extend above ground level where traffic crossing plates need to be used, provided that other measures are taken to prevent
excavated or other material from entering the excavation.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 253/2001, effective January 28, 2002.]
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 258/2008, effective January 1, 2009.]

20.82 Timber shoring and grades

(1) Timber shoring materials must be lumber graded Number 2 or better from the following species groups: Douglas fir-larch, hemlock-fir, spruce-
pine-fir or coast-Sitka-spruce.
(2) All lumber must be graded to the National Lumber Grades Authority Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

20.83 Safe shoring procedures

(1) Shoring materials must be installed from the top down and removed in reverse order.
(2) Workers must not enter an excavation to remove shoring materials if ground conditions have deteriorated so as to make entry for shoring
removal unsafe.
(3) Shoring or manufactured or prefabricated support systems must be installed in firm contact with the faces of the excavation, and in a manner
which ensures no loss of soil from behind or below the bottom of the shield or shoring while the excavation is open.
(4) Unless otherwise indicated by the manufacturer or a professional engineer, in writing, voids between the shoring and the excavation face must
be backfilled or blocked.

20.84 Manufactured shoring

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

20.85 Trench support structures

(1) Trench support structures, other than those designed by a professional engineer, must comply with Table 20-1 for the following relevant soil
conditions:

Soil type Description of soil

A hard and solid
B likely to crack or crumble
C soft, sandy, filled or loose

(2) If Table 20-1 is to be used for a combination of supporting and sloping, the selection of shoring elements must be based on the overall depth of
the excavation, and the arrangement must conform to Figure 20-3.
(3) Cross braces and trench jacks must be installed in a horizontal position and must be secured against dislodgment.
(4) The minimum number of cross braces at each cross bracing location is determined by the trench depth as follows:

Depth at location Number of braces

up to 2.4 m (8 ft) 2
2.4 m to 3.7 m (8 ft to 12 ft) 3
3.7 m to 4.6 m (12 ft to 15 ft) 4
4.6 m to 6 m (15 ft to 20 ft) 5

(5) At each cross bracing location the cross braces must be less than 1.2 m (4 ft) apart, and the uppermost cross brace must be within 60 cm (2 ft)
of ground level.
(6) Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
(7) Hydraulic or pneumatic trench jacks must have a means of ensuring that they will not collapse in the event of loss of internal pressure.
(8) Uprights must not spread outwards more than 15 degrees from the vertical when viewed along the trench.
(9) Plywood may be substituted for two inch thick shoring elements provided that
(a) the plywood is not less than 19 mm (3/4 in) thick,
(b) the trench is not over 2.7 m (9 ft) in depth,
(c) uprights are installed at not over 60 cm (2 ft) centres,
(d) cross braces do not bear directly on plywood, and
(e) cross braces bearing on uprights or walers are located at all joints in plywood sheathing.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

20.86 Spoil piles

If the average depth of a spoil pile which is adjacent to a supported excavation exceeds 60 cm (2 ft), the selection of the shoring or shielding must
take into account the resulting increase in lateral soil pressure.
Note: Table 20-1 includes an allowance for 60 cm (2 ft) of spoil pile adjacent to the excavation. In such cases shoring or shielding will be deemed
acceptable if rated adequate for a tabulated depth equal to the depth of the excavation plus the average depth of the spoil pile minus 60 cm (2 ft).
For other systems consult the manufacturer's instructions.

20.87 Entry and exit

(1) Safe means of entry and exit must be provided for an excavation a worker enters.
(2) If workers are required to enter a trench over 1.2 m (4 ft) deep, the safe point of entry and exit must be located within 8 m (25 ft) of the
workers and the excavation must be safely supported or sloped to the entry and exit location.
(3) Walkways must be secured to prevent dislodgment.
(4) The open side of an access route into an excavation used by mobile equipment must have a curb.

20.88 Guarding

If an excavation is a hazard to workers, it must be effectively covered or guarded.

20.89 Excavation crossings

A walkway across an excavation must be at least 50 cm (20 in) wide, and if crossing an excavation over 1.2 m (4 ft) deep, be equipped with
guardrails, meeting the requirements of Part 4 (General Conditions), on both sides.

20.90 Excavated materials

(1) Excavated material must be kept back a minimum distance of 60 cm (2 ft) from the edge of a trench excavation and 1.2 m (4 ft) from any other
excavation.
(2) Under no circumstances may excavated material be piled so that it endangers workers.

20.91 Use of skips or buckets

If a skip or bucket is used to remove material from an excavation, horizontal shoring members must be shielded from dislodgment with vertical
planking.

20.92 Scaling and trimming

The sides of an excavation must be scaled and trimmed or otherwise stabilized to prevent slides of material or falls of rock which could endanger
workers.

20.93 Height limitations

In pits, quarries and similar excavations the height of unstable faces must not exceed the maximum safe reach of the excavating equipment being
used.

20.94 Positioning equipment

Whenever possible, power machines excavating banks must be positioned so that the operator is on the side away from the bank and with the
boom positioned closest to the side of the excavation.
20.95 Water accumulation

(1) Water must not be allowed to accumulate in an excavation if it might affect the stability of the excavation or might endanger workers.
(2) Erosion of slopes by surface water must be prevented if workers may be endangered.
Table 20-1: Trench support structures

Size and spacing of members1 (metric figures)

UPRIGHTS WALERS CROSS BRACES
Trench depth Minimum dimen- Max- Minimum dimen- Max- width of trench Maximum
(m) sions (mm)2 imum spacing sions (mm)2 imum vertical (m) spacing (m)
(m) spacing (m) Up to 1.8
1.8-3.7
Minimum
dimensions
(mm)2
Vert- Hori-
ical zontal
Type A: Hard and solid soil
1.2-3 3 38 x 235 1.8 89 x 140 1.2 89 x 89 140 x 1.2 1.8
140
3-4.6 38 x 235 1.2 140 x 140 1.2 89 x 140 140 x 1.2 1.8
191
4.6-6 38 x 235 Close tight 140 x 140 1.2 140 x 191 x 1.2 1.8
191 191
Type B: Soil likely to crack or crumble
1.2-3 3 38 x 235 1.2 89 x 140 1.2 89 x 140 140 x 1.2 1.8
140
3-4.6 38 x 235 0.9 140 x 191 1.2 140 x 140 x 1.2 1.8
140 191
4.6-6 38 x 235 Close tight 140 x 191 1.2 140 x 191 x 1.2 1.8
191 191
Type C: Soft, sandy, filled or loose soil
1.2-3 3 38 x 235 Close tight 140 x 191 1.2 140 x 140 x 1.2 1.8
140 191
3-4.6 38 x 235 Close tight 191 x 191 1.2 140 x 191 x 1.2 1.8
191 191
4.6-6 64 x 235 Close tight 191 x 241 1.2 140 x 191 x 1.2 1.8
191 241
Size and spacing of members1 (imperial figures)
UPRIGHT WALERS CROSS BRACES
Trench depth Minimum dimensions Max- Minimum dimensions Max- width of trench Maximum
(feet) (inches)2 imum spacing (inches)2 imum vertical spacing (feet) spacing
(feet) (feet) Up to 6 (feet)
6-12 Vertical Hori-
Minimum zontal
dimensions
(inches)2
Type A: Hard and solid soil
4-10 3 2 x 10 6 4 x6 4 4 4 x4 6 x6 4 6
10-15 2 x 10 4 6 x6 4 4 x6 6 x8 4 6
15-20 2 x 10 Close tight 6 x6 4 6 x8 8 x8 4 6
Type B: Soil likely to crack or crumble
4-10 3 2 x 10 4 4 x6 4 4 x6 6 x6 4 6
10-15 2 x 10 3 6 x8 4 6 x6 6 x8 4 6
15-20 2 x 10 Close tight 6 x8 4 6 x8 8 x8 4 6
Type C: Soft, sandy, filled or loose soil
4-10 3 2 x 10 Close tight 6 x8 4 6 x6 6 x8 4 6
10-15 2 x 10 Close tight 8 x8 4 6 x8 8 x8 4 6
15-20 3 x 10 Close tight 8 x 10 4 6 x8 8 x 10 4 6

1 The dimensions shown are minimum and must be increased if necessary to meet job conditions.

2 The dimensions of members in millimetres are actual dimensions for surfaced dry materials. The dimensions in inches are the nominal values for
surfaced dry materials.
3 Trenches less than 1.2 m (4 ft) deep must be shored when hazardous ground movement may be expected, as in ground subject to hydrostatic
pressure or vibration.
4 Walers may be omitted in trenches not exceeding 2.4 m (8 ft) in depth provided that it has been confirmed that the soil is sufficiently hard and
solid to safely permit waler deletion, and provided that the trench is not in proximity to previously excavated ground.
Figure 20-1: Sloping in lieu of shoring

Case 1 (trench or bulk excavation) - maximum slope of excavated face, shown as line AB, in hard and solid soil is 3 horizontal to 4 vertical.
Case 2 (trench or bulk excavation), maximum height of vertical portion, shown as line AB is 1.2 metres (4 feet).
For Case 2 (trench or bulk excavation), the maximum permissible slope of the excavated face BC for the corresponding height of the lower
vertical cut AB is as follows:

Height of line AB Maximum slope of line BC

(in hard and solid soil)
centimetres feet

up to 30 up to 1 1 horizontal (H) to 1 vertical (V)

30 to 60 1 to 2 3H to 2V

60 to 90 2 to 3 2H to 1V

90 to 120 3 to 4 3H to 1V

Figure 20-2: Benching in lieu of shoring

Figure 20-3: Combined supporting and sloping

Scaling Operations

20.96 Definitions

In sections 20.97 to 20.101

"rappel" means the method of moving down a face or other steep slope by means of a rope secured above and placed around a controlled
descent device secured to a belt or harness worn by a worker, and payed out gradually in the descent;
"sit harness" means a body support device consisting of thigh and waist loops;
"work positioning" means a form of fall restraint that holds a worker in a work position.

20.97 Work from top down

Rock scaling and like work must be undertaken from the top down, and any area into which material will fall must be kept clear of workers and
equipment.

20.98 Rappelling and work positioning systems

(1) A worker on a rock face or other steep slope must be protected from falling by a work positioning or rappelling system, or by a fall arrest
system as required by Part 11 (Fall Protection).
(2) A single rope work positioning system may be used by a worker to rappel to and remain in work locations on a rock face or other steep slope
if tension is maintained in the rappel rope at all times so that the worker is not exposed to a free fall.
(3) If the work practice could result in a slack line in the rappel or work positioning system and a fall could occur, a personal fall arrest system,
independently anchored, meeting the requirements of Part 11 (Fall Protection) must be used.
(4) Rappelling techniques must provide for automatic stopping by means of a mechanical fall arrestor, Prusik sling or other device acceptable to the
Board.
(5) A rappelling or fall protection system must be used in a manner that minimizes the swing-fall hazard.

20.99 Rappelling ropes

A rappelling rope must

(a) be synthetic fibre rope with a breaking strength specified by the manufacturer of at least 27 kN (6,000 lbs) or be at least 16 mm (5/8 in)
diameter wire-cored fibre rope,
(b) be long enough to reach a safe landing spot from which egress without rappelling is possible, and
(c) not be lengthened by tying ropes together.

20.100 Anchors and other hardware

(1) The ultimate load capacity of an anchor for a rappelling or fall protection line must be at least 22 kN (5,000 lbs).
(2) Each rappel line and fall arrest lifeline that is tied to a natural anchor such a suitable tree, stump or rock outcrop must also be tied to a second
anchor of at least equal load capacity.
(3) A rappelling rope must be attached to an anchor and, where practicable, must be positioned to avoid bearing on any sharp edge or surface
likely to cause rope damage, and if it is not practicable to avoid sharp edges or surfaces, rope protectors or wire-cored rope must be used.

20.101 Harnesses

A sit harness with rope attachment below waist level may be used for work positioning or rappelling.
Back to Top
Marine Construction, Pile Driving and Dredging

20.102 Suspended work platforms

(1) Suspended work platforms such as gilley boards, small boats and buckets used to support workers must meet the requirements for suspended
work platforms in Part 13 (Ladders, Scaffolds and Temporary Work Platforms).
(2) Despite section 13.27(5), a secondary hoisting line on a crane may be used to suspend workers on a work platform in a marine construction or
pile driving operation if
(a) it is not practicable to provide another means for positioning workers to perform work tasks,
(b) all of the crane's hoisting gear that is being used conforms to section 13.29 (1), and
(c) the total load attached to or suspended from all load lines of the crane does not exceed 50% of the rated capacity of the crane for the reach
and configuration.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 19/2006 effective May 17, 2006.]

20.103 Hoisting piles

When a pile is being hoisted in the leads only workers engaged in that operation may remain on the superstructure or in any area into which the pile
could fall.

20.104 Operator protection

Each hoisting winch must have a suitable roof or shelter to protect the operator from falling objects, rigging failures and from the weather.

20.105 Exhaust discharge

Any exhaust gases and any air or steam discharge must be controlled so as not to harm workers or interfere with the ability of the operator or
other workers to see the operation as necessary to work safely.

20.106 Chocking the hammer

(1) The pile driver operator must ensure that a suspended hammer is securely chocked when not in use.
(2) On a pile driver with swinging or suspended leads the hammer must not be raised until necessary.

20.107 Pile heads

(1) A head of a wooden pile must be

(a) cut square and cleaned of debris, bark and slivers before being driven, and
(b) trimmed to fit the follower or pile driving cap.
(2) The follower or pile driving cap being used must be of a size and type suitable for the type of piling being driven.

20.108 Cracked hammer

A drop hammer that is cracked must not be used.

20.109 Splicing

Ropes used to support the hammer of a pile driver must not be spliced.

20.110 Walkway on discharge line

(1) A worker must not be on a floating discharge line unless a walkway has been provided.
(2) The walkway on a floating discharge line must be at least 50 cm (20 in) wide, have guardrails meeting the requirements of Part 4 (General
Conditions), and be adequately illuminated during night use.
Back to Top
Demolition

20.111 Structural integrity

(1) If a structure is to be demolished in whole or in part, the structure and any adjoining structures, the integrity of which could be compromised by
the demolition, must be supported to the extent and in a manner prescribed by a professional engineer.
(2) Design of the support system described in subsection (1) must include a schedule, based on the stages of demolition, for installation of the
components of the support system, and a copy of the support system plan must be available at the demolition site.
(3) While salvage is taking place before or during the demolition process, the integrity of the structure must be maintained.
(4) If the nature and method of demolition will not endanger workers and the stability of adjoining grounds and structures will not be compromised,
engineered demolition plans and designs are not required.

20.112 Hazardous materials

(1) In this section:
"hazardous material" means a hazardous substance, or material containing a hazardous substance, including
(a) asbestos-containing material,
(b) lead or any other heavy metal, or
(c) toxic, flammable or explosive material,
that may be handled, disturbed or removed in the course of the demolition or salvage of machinery, equipment, a building or a structure, or the
renovation of a building or structure;
"qualified person", except in subsections (7) and (8), means a person who
(a) has, through education and training, knowledge of the management and control of the hazardous materials that the qualified person is made
aware of by the employers, and the owner, or that are reasonably foreseeable by the qualified person, as being
(i) on or in the machinery, equipment, building or structure that is the subject of the demolition, salvage or renovation, or
(ii) at the worksite, and
(b) has experience in the management and control of those hazardous materials.
(2) Before work begins on the demolition or salvage of machinery, equipment, a building or a structure, or the renovation of a building or structure,
all employers responsible for that work, and the owner, must ensure that a qualified person inspects the machinery, equipment, building or structure
and the worksite to identify the hazardous materials, if any.
(3) In conducting an inspection and identifying the hazardous materials, if any, under subsection (2), a qualified person must do the following:
(a) collect representative samples of the material that may be hazardous material;
(b) identify each representative sample and determine whether it is hazardous material;
(c) if the actions under paragraphs (a) and (b) are not practicable, or not appropriate in the circumstances, use other sufficient means to identify the
hazardous materials, if any;
(d) based on the actions taken under paragraphs (a) and (b) or (c), determine the location of each of the hazardous materials identified;
(e) make a written report of the inspection, including,
(i) if the actions under paragraphs (a) and (b) were taken,
(A) the location of each representative sample, and
(B) the identity of each representative sample and whether it is hazardous material,
(ii) if the actions under paragraph (c) were taken, the identity of each of the hazardous materials, if any,
(iii) a description of the methods used under paragraph (b) or (c),
(iv) the location, as determined under paragraph (d), of each of the hazardous materials identified, including by using drawings, plans or
specifications, and
(v) the approximate quantity of each of the hazardous materials identified.
(4) All employers responsible for work being carried out on the worksite where the demolition or salvage of the machinery, equipment, building or
structure, or the renovation of the building or structure is taking place, and the owner, must ensure that the following information is available at the
worksite:
(a) a report made under subsection (3)(e);
(b) a report made under subsection (6)(e);
(c) a written confirmation under subsection (8).
(5) All employers responsible for containing or removing any of the hazardous materials identified under subsection (2) or (6) must safely contain
or remove those hazardous materials.
(6) If, after written confirmation is provided under subsection (8), a person discovers material that may be hazardous material on or in the
machinery, equipment, building or structure or at the worksite, not previously determined to be hazardous material under this section, all employers
responsible for the demolition or salvage of the machinery, equipment, building or structure, or the renovation of the building or structure, and the
owner, must ensure that a qualified person does the following:
(a) collects representative samples of the material;
(b) identifies each representative sample and determines whether it is hazardous material;
(c) if the actions under paragraphs (a) and (b) are not practicable, or not appropriate in the circumstances, uses other sufficient means to determine
if the material is hazardous material;
(d) based on the actions taken under paragraphs (a) and (b) or (c), determines the location of the hazardous material, if any;
(e) makes a written report, including,
(i) if the actions under paragraphs (a) and (b) were taken,
(A) the location of each representative sample, and
(B) the identity of each representative sample and whether it is hazardous material,
(ii) if the actions under paragraph (c) were taken, the identity of the hazardous material, if any, and
(iii) if hazardous material was identified, the location of the hazardous material, including by using drawings, plans or specifications.
(7) All employers responsible for the demolition or salvage of the machinery, equipment, building or structure, or the renovation of the building or
structure, and the owner, must ensure that, with respect to the hazardous materials identified under subsection (2) or (6),
(a) no demolition, salvage or renovation work that may disturb the hazardous materials, other than work necessary to safely contain or remove the
hazardous materials, is carried out until the hazardous materials are safely contained or removed, and
(b) a qualified person complies with subsection (8).
(8) A qualified person must ensure, and confirm in writing, that the hazardous materials identified under subsection (2) or (6) are safely contained
or removed.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 199/2014, effective February 1, 2015.]

20.113 Disconnecting utility services

Demolition must not proceed until all utility services which may endanger a worker have been disconnected in the manner required by the owner of
the applicable utility service.
[Enacted by B.C. Reg. 312/2010, effective February 1, 2011.]

20.114 Glass removal

(1) If glass in a building or other structure could endanger workers it must be removed before other demolition commences.
(2) Glass removal must proceed in an orderly manner from the top to the bottom of the structure.

20.115 Overloading floors

Repealed. [B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]

20.116 Protection from falling materials

(1) If falling material could endanger a worker, the danger area must be guarded to prevent entry by workers or protected by adequate canopies.
(2) A floor or roof opening through which material may fall and endanger workers must be adequately covered.

20.117 Throwing material

If material is to be dropped or thrown from upper floors, the area into which the material will fall must be barricaded to prevent workers from
entering the area and conspicuous warning signs must be displayed to advise of the danger.

20.118 Stabilizing walls

If a dangerous or unstable wall is to be left standing, it must be adequately braced.

20.119 Dismantling buildings

During the dismantling or renovation of a building or structure, materials of a size or weight which may endanger workers must not be loosened or
allowed to fall, unless procedures are used that will adequately protect workers.

20.120 Housekeeping

Material and debris must not be allowed to accumulate on floors or on the ground outside the building or structure if workers will be endangered.

20.121 Stairways

Stairways, complete with handrails, must be left intact until access to the level they serve is no longer required.
Work in Compressed Air

20.122 Medical fitness

Whenever work is carried out at an air pressure greater than 7 kPa (1 psi) above atmospheric pressure, the employer must ensure that the
workers are medically examined by a physician knowledgeable in hyperbaric medicine, as required by the Board.

20.123 Compliance with standards

The employer must ensure that equipment and work processes carried out at an air pressure greater than 7 kPa (1 psi) above atmospheric
pressure meet the requirements of CSA Standard CAN/CSA Z275.3-M86, Occupational Safety Code for Construction Work in Compressed
Air.
[Amended by B.C. Reg. 312/2003, effective October 29, 2003.]
Back to Top
Contents

RESPIRATORS

R8.33-1 Respirators - Interchanging Air Cylinders

R8.33-2 Respirators - Interchanging Air Lines
Policies Part 8 - Respirators

R8.33-1
Respirators - Interchanging Air Cylinders

BACKGROUND
1. Explanatory Notes
Section 8.33 outlines the general requirements for the selection of respiratory protective equipment.
2. The OHSR
Section 8.33:
(1) The employer, in consultation with the worker and the occupational health and safety committee, if any, or the worker health and
safety representative, if any, must select an appropriate respirator in accordance with CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-93,
Selection, Use and Care of Respirators.
(2) Only a respirator which meets the requirements of a standard acceptable to the Board may be used for protection against
airborne contaminants in the workplace.
POLICY
Compressed air cylinders may be interchanged with different makes of self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) provided the cylinders are fully
compatible with the SCBA on which they will be used. The cylinders must have the same pressure rating and fittings with the same type of thread
and thread length.
When interchanging is being done, the user should be aware that using cylinders originally made for one make of SCBA on another make will void
the NIOSH approval for that SCBA. This may affect the user's ability to successfully recover damages from the SCBA manufacturer in the event
of an equipment problem or malfunction.

EFFECTIVE DATE: August 1, 2001

AUTHORITY: Section 8.33 of the OHSR.
CROSS REFERENCES:
HISTORY: April 6, 2020 - Housekeeping changes.
February 1, 2011 - Housekeeping changes to reflect regulation changes effective on that date.
September 15, 2010 - Housekeeping changes to delete practice reference and make formatting
changes.
March 1, 2005 - Housekeeping changes to reflect the October 29, 2003 changes to the OHSR. This
Item originally replaced Policy No. 14.23(2)-1 of the former Prevention Division Policy and
Procedure Manual.
October 29, 2003 - The reproduction of section 8.33(1) of the OHSR in this Item was revised to
reflect its amendment.
This Item results from the 2000/2001 "editorial" consolidation of all prevention policies into the
Prevention Manual. The POLICY in this Item merely continues the substantive requirements of
Policy No. 14.23(2)-1, as they existed prior to the Effective Date, with any wording changes
necessary to reflect legislative and regulatory changes since Policy No. 14.23(2)-1 was issued.
APPLICATION: This policy applies to interchanging compressed air cylinders on self-contained breathing apparatus on
and after August 1, 2001.

R8.33-2
Respirators - Interchanging Air Lines

BACKGROUND
1. Explanatory Notes
Section 8.33 outlines the general requirements for the selection of respiratory protective equipment.
2. The OHSR
Section 8.33:
(1) The employer, in consultation with the worker and the occupational health and safety committee, if any, or the worker health and
safety representative, if any, must select an appropriate respirator in accordance with CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-93,
Selection, Use and Care of Respirators.
(2) Only a respirator which meets the requirements of a standard acceptable to the Board may be used for protection against
airborne contaminants in the workplace.
POLICY
Air lines on respirators can generally be interchanged provided they:
are NIOSH approved;
are of the same inside diameter and length as recommended by the manufacturer; and
have compatible end fittings.
When interchanging is being done, the user should be aware that using air lines originally made for one make of respirator on another make will
void the NIOSH approval for that respirator. This may affect the user's ability to successfully recover damages from the respirator manufacturer in
the event of an equipment problem or malfunction.

EFFECTIVE DATE: August 1, 2001

AUTHORITY: Section 8.33 of the OHSR.
CROSS REFERENCES:
HISTORY: April 6, 2020 - Housekeeping changes.
February 1, 2011 - Housekeeping changes to reflect regulation changes effective on that date.
September 15, 2010 - Housekeeping changes to delete practice reference and make formatting
changes.
March 1, 2005 - Housekeeping changes to reflect the October 29, 2003 changes to the OHSR. This
Item originally replaced Policy No. 14.23(2)-2 of the former Prevention Division Policy and
Procedure Manual.
October 29, 2003 - The reproduction of section 8.33(1) of the OHSR in this Item was revised to
reflect its amendment.
This Item results from the 2000/2001 "editorial" consolidation of all prevention policies into the
Prevention Manual. The POLICY in this Item merely continues the substantive requirements of
Policy No. 14.23(2)-2, as they existed prior to the Effective Date, with any wording changes
necessary to reflect legislative and regulatory changes since Policy No. 14.23(2)-2 was issued. A
caution has been added regarding the voiding of NIOSH approval in certain situations.
APPLICATION: This policy applies to interchanging air lines on respirators on and after August 1, 2001.
Contents

CONCRETE FALSEWORK AND FORMWORK

R20.17-1 Concrete Falsework and Formwork - Specifications and Plans

OPEN WEB JOISTS AND TRUSSES

R20.72-1 Open Web Joists and Trusses - Erection Instructions (All-Wood Plate-Connected Open Web Trusses)
Policies Part 20 - Concrete Falsework and Formwork

R20.17-1
Concrete Falsework and Formwork - Specifications and Plans

BACKGROUND
1. Explanatory Notes
Section 20.17 sets out the requirements for specifications and plans for concrete falsework and formwork.
2. The OHSR
Section 20.17:
(1) The employer must ensure that worksite specific plans are prepared for the following types of formwork and any associated
falsework or reshoring:
(a) flyforms;
(b) ganged forms;
(c) jump forms;
(d) vertical slip forms;
(e) formwork over 4 m (13 ft.) in height;
(f) suspended forms for beams, slabs, stairs and landings;
(g) single sided, battered or inclined forms over 2 m (6.5 ft.) in height;
(h) cantilever forms;
(i) bridge deck forms;
(j) shaft lining forms;
(k) tunnel lining forms;
(l) formwork onto which concrete will be pumped through an injection port below the upper concrete surface;
(m) formwork over 3 m (10 ft.) in height into which self-consolidating concrete will be placed;
(n) formwork designated by the designer of the structure.
(2) The employer must ensure that a professional engineer certifies the following in accordance with section 20.18:
(a) worksite specific plans;
(b) any changes to worksite specific plans.
(3) The employer must ensure that certified worksite specific plans are available at the worksite during erection, use and dismantling
of the formwork, falsework and reshoring.
(4) The employer must ensure that any changes to the certified worksitee specific plans are available at the worksite
(a) as soon as practicable, and
(b) before the inspection required for placement of concrete or other intended loading of the formwork, falsework and reshoring.
(5) The employer must ensure that the formwork, falsework and reshoring are erected, used and, if applicable, dismantled in
accordance with up-to-date certified worksite specific plans.
POLICY
Occasionally a portion of concrete falsework and formwork may be designed as part of a sales or rental subcontract by a scaffold and shoring
supplier, or designed as part of the permanent structure by the design engineer for the structure.
Generally, the "partial designs" supplied in such cases are certified by a professional engineer, but do not contain all the information and instructions
required by section 20.20(1) of the OHSR. Typically, documents are deficient in the area of section views, packing, blocking, and form details.
Reshoring, where required, is either not specified or not referenced. There may also be a statement in such documents indicating or implying the
documents do not satisfy the requirements of the OHSR without further detailing.
These documents are not acceptable unless additional detailing and documentation, certified by a professional engineer, are available at the site for
the portions of the design not covered by the "partial designs" referred to above.
Worksite specific plans must be complete and comply with the OHSR. Under section 20.20(2), if any information required by subsection (1)
cannot be provided, the worksite specific plans must include special notation of the information that is incomplete and that will require field design.
An "inspection certificate" issued by an engineer prior to pour, based on incomplete worksite specific plans, is not valid.
Officers will order concrete placing stopped if the inspection certificate is not available at the site or is not valid.

EFFECTIVE DATE: April 1, 2001

AUTHORITY: Section 20.17 of the OHSR.
CROSS REFERENCES: Sections 20.18 to 20.26 of the OHSR.
HISTORY: April 6, 2020 - Housekeeping changes.
June 3, 2019 - Housekeeping changes to reflect the June 3, 2019 changes to the OHSR.
September 15, 2010 - Housekeeping changes to delete practice reference and make formatting
changes.
March 1, 2005 - Housekeeping changes to reflect the October 29, 2003 changes to the OHSR. This
Item originally replaced Policy No. 34.28(6) of the former Prevention Division Policy and
Procedure Manual.
October 29, 2003 - The reproduction of section 20.17(1) of the OHSR in this Item was revised to
reflect its amendment.
This Item results from the 2000/2001 "editorial" consolidation of all prevention policies into the
Prevention Manual. The POLICY in this Item merely continues the substantive requirements of
Policy No. 34.28(6), as they existed prior to the Effective Date, with any wording changes necessary
to reflect legislative and regulatory changes since Policy No. 34.28(6) was issued.
APPLICATION: This policy applies to certified plans and specifications for concrete falsework and formwork on and
after April 1, 2001.

Policies Part 20 - Open Web Joists and Trusses

R20.72-1
Open Web Joists and Trusses - Erection Instructions (All-Wood Plate-Connected Open Web Trusses)

BACKGROUND
1. Explanatory Notes
Section 20.72 requires that written instructions from a professional engineer or the manufacturer be available at the worksite before work is
undertaken on the erection of premanufactured open web joists and trusses.
2. The OHSR
Section 20.72:
(1) Work must not be undertaken on the erection of premanufactured open web joists and trusses until clear and appropriate written
instructions from a professional engineer or the manufacturer of the joists or trusses, detailing safe erection procedures, are available
at the worksite.
(2) Erection and temporary bracing of open web joists and trusses must be done in accordance with the written instructions required
by subsection (1).
POLICY
This policy applies to all-wood plate-connected open web flat and pitched trusses. It does not apply to multi-member chord types or pin-
connected, wood chord-metal tube web-type trusses (Trus Joists).
The employer responsible for the handling and installation of the trusses must have clear and appropriate written instructions from the truss
manufacturer or a professional engineer, stipulating safe erection procedures. The truss manufacturer will normally provide some General
Recommended Erection and Bracing Instructions with delivery of the trusses.
Officers will stop truss erection when:
erection and bracing instructions are not available at the site or are obviously incomplete;
work is not being done in accordance with the erection and bracing instructions;
the side walls or skeletal structural building frame are inadequately braced (Typically, the recommended maximum spacing braces on walls is
30 feet or 10 metres.);
damaged trusses (including twisted webs, bent connector plates, cracked chords) are being or have been installed; or
heavy loads are being applied to trusses before all bracing, bridging and decking has been installed.

EFFECTIVE DATE: April 1, 2001

AUTHORITY: Section 20.72 of the OHSR.
CROSS REFERENCES: Sections 90, 91, and 92 of the Act.
HISTORY: April 6, 2020 - Housekeeping changes consequential to implementing the Workers Compensation
Act, R.S.B.C. 2019, c. 1.
September 15, 2010 - Housekeeping changes to delete practice reference and make formatting
changes.
Replaces Policy No. 34.42-1 of the Prevention Division Policy and Procedure Manual.
APPLICATION: This Item results from the 2000/2001 "editorial" consolidation of all prevention policies into the
Prevention Manual. The POLICY in this Item merely continues the substantive requirements of
Policy No. 34.42-1, as they existed prior to the Effective Date, with any wording changes necessary
to reflect legislative and regulatory changes since Policy No. 34.42-1 was issued.

Contents

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

G8.2(3) Responsibility to provide

G8.3 Ensuring adequate fit of personal protective equipment
G8.5 Program
G8.5(b) Special program option for pulp and paper industry
G8.10 Personal clothing and accessories

SAFETY HEADGEAR

G8.11(1) Safety headgear

G8.11(2) Activity specific safety headgear
G8.11(2)-1 Safety headgear standards
G8.11(2)-2 Activity specific safety headgear - Ski helmets
G8.11(3) Protection from electrical hazards
G8.11(4) Chin straps
G8.12/8.13 Use of safety headgear for workers on ATVs and similar equipment in agricultural operations
G8.13 Use of safety headgear with bicycles and skates

EYE AND FACE PROTECTION

G8.15(1) Prescription safety eyewear - Alternate standards [Retired]

G8.17(2) Face protection - Alternate standards [Retired]

LIMB AND BODY PROTECTION

G8.21 Leg protection [Retired]

G8.21(2) Leg protection - Alternate standards [Retired]
G8.21(2)-1 Leg protection - WorkSafeBC standards [Retired]
G8.21(2)-2 Leg protection - Alternate standard

FOOTWEAR

G8.22 Footwear
G8.22(2.1) High heels and healthy footwear
G8.22(3) Specific safety protective features
G8.22(3)-1 Footwear - Alternate standards

HIGH VISIBILITY AND DISTINGUISHING APPAREL

 G8.24 High visibility apparel
G8.24-1 Alternative standards for high visibility apparel [Retired]

BUOYANCY EQUIPMENT

G8.26(3) Buoyancy equipment and fall protection

G8.27-1 Compliance with standards
G8.27-2 Alternative acceptable standard for buoyancy equipment
G8.28 Working alone or in isolation with a hazard of drowning

RESPIRATORS

G8.33-1 Respiratory protection - Selection

G8.33-2 Scott II and IIA SCBA regulator donning switch hazard [Retired]
G8.33(1) Selection of respiratory protection - Alternate standard
G8.33(2)-1 Approved respirators
G8.33(2)-2 Interchange of equipment components [Retired]
G8.34-1 Protection factors
G8.34-2 Assigned protection factors for non-powered filtering facepiece style air-purifying respirators [Retired]
G8.34-3 Maximum use concentration and IDLH
G8.34-4 Protection factors - standard acceptable to WorkSafeBC
G8.34-5 Assigned protection factor for helmet/hood style powered air purifying respirators [Retired]
G8.35 IDLH or oxygen deficient atmophere
G8.38(2) Respiratory protection and use of contact lenses
G8.40 Respiratory protection - Fit test
G8.40(2.1)(c) Single-use respirators and fit test equivalency
G8.41 User seal check - Alternate standard
G8.42 Medical assessment
G8.44 Records
G8.45 Maintenance and inspection of self-contained breathing apparatus
Guidelines - Part 8 - General Requirements

G8.2(3) Responsibility to provide

Issued August 1999; Editorial Revision February 1, 2008

Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.2(3) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
If the personal protective equipment provided by the employer causes allergenic or other adverse health effects, the employer must
provide appropriate alternative equipment or safe measures.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide an example of selecting alternative equipment if the personal protective equipment provided by the
employer causes allergic or other adverse health effects.
Appropriate alternative equipment
An example of selecting appropriate alternative equipment would be a worker allergic to natural rubber latex gloves, but who has work duties
resulting in exposure to blood or other body fluids (a potential exposure to biological agents designated as a hazardous substance in section 5.1.1).
In such a circumstance, the worker could use gloves made of vinyl, nitrile, neoprene, copolymer, or polyethylene, which would be appropriate
alternatives to latex gloves for this particular exposure. See also OHS Guideline G6.34-2 for more information.
If a worker has an allergenic or other adverse health effect due to the protective equipment supplied and the remedy chosen is the use of "other
safe measures," such measures have to provide at least equivalent protection to the worker that the personal protective equipment normally used
would provide.

G8.3 Ensuring adequate fit of personal protective equipment

Issued November 29, 2022

Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.3(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Personal protective equipment must
 (a) be selected and used in accordance with recognized standards, and provide effective protection,
(b) not in itself create a hazard to the wearer,
(c) be compatible, so that one item of personal protective equipment does not make another item ineffective, and
(d) be maintained in good working order and in a sanitary condition.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to assist employers understand their obligation to ensure personal protective equipment (PPE) provided under
section 8.2 of the Regulation provides effective protection to workers and does not in itself create a hazard to the wearer.
Importance of proper fit
Protective clothing and other equipment are generally sized around the average height and proportions of men. This is because men have
historically made up the majority of workers in industries that require PPE. When different sized garments are created, they are often based on the
same relative proportions, and as such may not properly fit all body shapes and sizes. For example, smaller sizes may still not provide a proper fit
for women, or for others whose bodies don’t conform to this "standard."
Improperly fitting PPE may not provide effective protection and may lead to preventable injuries caused by tripping, entanglement, distractions, or
restricted movement. Furthermore, workers may be dissuaded from wearing PPE that is uncomfortable, makes accessing the toilet or personal
hygiene difficult, or that increases the effort required to perform tasks. Difficulties in finding PPE that fits properly may result in workers leaving
industries with PPE requirements.
The following table illustrates some examples of how poorly fitting PPE can lead to preventable injuries:

Type of PPE Signs of misfit Potential hazards

Head and face — hard hats, welding • Cannot tighten (or loosen) enough to provide • Poor fit may cause pinch-points, headaches,
helmets, face shields a good fit neck or shoulder strain
• May feel unbalanced and bulky, even when • May obstruct vision
properly adjusted • May result in distraction
Eye protection — safety glasses and • Safety glasses may be too wide (or small) • Glasses may slip down nose, leaving eyes and
goggles across, too long (or short) at the temple, and/or face exposed to hazards
too big (or small) in the bridge area • Poor fit may create gaps in coverage, allowing
debris to enter eyes
• Fogging may impact vision
• May result in distraction
Hearing protection • Earplugs may be too large or too small for ear • PPE may fall out or off when moving
canal • May fail to provide adequate protection from
• Earmuffs may be too heavy or not adjustable noise
enough to fit snugly and comfortably
Respiratory protection • Tight fitting respirators may not achieve • Ineffective seal with face may result in
adequately seal with all faces exposure to hazardous substances and
• Poor fit may result in failed fit test (as required associated health effects
by section 8.40 of the Regulation) • Over-tightening respirator straps to
• May have to over-tighten straps or use strap compensate for poor fit may result in
attachments to achieve seal headaches, skin irritation and injury, discomfort,
and/or distraction
• Discomfort as a result of poor fit may result in
worker adjusting respirator while in use,
decreasing effectiveness of seal
• Attachments used to tighten respirator straps
may loosen over time, resulting in loss of
protection
 Fall protection, climbing, rope access, • Harnesses that are too large may be unable to • Equipment that is too loose may result in
rescue, harnesses tighten enough to fit body properly serious injury in the event of a fall
• Harnesses that are too small may be too tight • Equipment that is too tight may hinder
and limit freedom of movement workers' movements and their ability to walk
• Improper location or alignment of load- safely
bearing straps or buckles • Ineffective protection
• Workers with significant breast tissue may find • Cross-over style harnesses may provide
standard harnesses uncomfortable and better adjustability, comfort and fit
ineffective
Torso and limbs — coveralls, Tyvek • Arms or legs that are too short or too long • Slipping or tripping
suits, fire-resistant clothing, lab coats, • Shoulder span that is too short or too long • Entanglement in moving equipment
high-visibility apparel, chainsaw pants • Tightness or looseness of fit where the legs • Restricted movement of arms or legs
meet the torso • May cause distractions
• Shirts, jackets, or vests that will not close • Inadequate protection
properly across chest or stomach, or gaping • May discourage drinking and taking healthy
when closed due to an excess of fabric washroom breaks (which can lead to heat
• Shirts, jackets, or vests that are too long or stress, kidney problems, or other illnesses)
too short
• One-piece suits that hinder personal hygiene
requirements
Hands • Gloves that are too big or too small in finger • May get hung up or entangled in equipment
length and palm width • Gloves that are too • Extra fabric may require extra exertion and
wide or too loose at the wrist undue pressure on hands
• May restrict circulation to hand, causing loss • May increase perspiration, leading to fatigue
of dexterity and related injuries
• May allow debris to fall into glove
Feet • Safety footwear that is too big or too small in • Lack of adequate toe protection
ankle, foot shape, or arch placement • Tripping hazard
• Safety footwear molded to an incorrect • Poor arch support
gender resulting in poor fit and proportion, • Blisters, infections
including incorrect flex point • Repetitive strain injuries
• Poor posture
• Plantar fasciitis
• Fallen arches
• Secondary injuries to knees, hips, spine, or
neck

Attempting to modify poorly fitting PPE may decrease or eliminate the equipment’s protective qualities, and may not be permitted under the
applicable standards.
Ensuring fit
Section 8.3(1) of the Regulation requires PPE to be selected and used in accordance with recognized standards. Current versions of CSA
standards for most PPE include requirements to ensure adequate fit.
WorkSafeBC prevention officers who observe workers wearing poorly fitting PPE may address this issue under sections 8.3(1)(a) or (b) of the
Regulation, as applicable.
What employers can do
Employers should consider the physical characteristics of the workforce requiring PPE and stock appropriate sizes and models to ensure correct
sizing and appropriate fit. Equipment suppliers may be able to assist employers and workers to identify PPE that fits properly through the provision
of sizing charts, fitting samples, and fit instructions.
For additional information on fit requirements, including information on how to measure proper fit, employers should speak with equipment
suppliers and refer to relevant safety standards. For example, the following CSA standards provide guidance on selection and use of certain
protective equipment:
CAN/CSA-Z96.1-08 Selection, Use and Care of High-Visibility Safety Apparel
CAN/CSA-Z94.3.1-16 Selection, Use, and Care of Eye and Face Protectors
CAN/CSA-Z259.17-16 Selection and Use of Active Fall-protection Equipment and Systems
CAN/CSA-Z195.1-02 Selection, Care, and Use of Protective Footwear
Under the provision of section 8.9 of the Regulation, workers who are required to use PPE must use equipment in accordance with training and
instruction, inspect equipment before use, and report any equipment malfunction to the supervisor or employer. In accordance with these
requirements, workers should confirm that PPE fits, provides effective protection, does not create a hazard itself, and does not negatively impact
their mobility or freedom of movement.

G8.5 Program

Issued August 1, 1999; Revised November 17, 2003; Editorial Revision to include February 1, 2011 regulatory amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.5 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
If personal protective equipment is required to protect against a chemical exposure or an oxygen deficient atmosphere the employer
must implement an effective protective equipment program at the workplace which includes
(a) a statement of purpose and responsibilities,
(b) written procedures for selection, use, inspection, cleaning, maintenance and storage of protective equipment, when required,
(c) instruction and training in the correct use and maintenance of the equipment,
(d) for respirators, medical assessment of respirator wearers, when required,
(e) documentation when required, and
(f) program review.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide direction in determining if personal protective equipment is required in a chemical exposure or an
oxygen-deficient atmosphere.
Personal Protective Equipment
To determine if personal protective equipment is required in a workplace to protect against a chemical exposure or an oxygen-deficient
atmosphere, the employer has to consider the requirements of section 5.55 of the Regulation. Section 5.55(1) states "If there is a risk to a worker
from exposure to a harmful substance by any route of exposure, the employer must eliminate the exposure, or otherwise control it below harmful
levels and below the applicable exposure limit established under section 5.48...." Options available to the employer include substitution, engineering
control, administrative control, or personal protective equipment. However, section 5.55(3) states: "The use of personal protective equipment as
the primary means to control exposure is permitted only when
(a) substitution, or engineering or administrative controls are not practicable, or
(b) additional protection is required because engineering or administrative controls are insufficient to reduce exposure below the applicable
exposure limits, or
(c) the exposure results from temporary or emergency conditions only."
For guidance in determining whether personal protective equipment is required, refer to OHS Guideline G5.55.
For guidance on determining if a medical assessment of a respirator wearer is required under paragraph 8.5(d), refer to OHS Guideline G8.42.

G8.5(b) Special program option for pulp and paper industry

Issued August 1, 1999; Editorial Revision June 30, 2021

Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.5(b) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
8.5 If personal equipment is required to protect against a chemical exposure or an oxygen deficient atmosphere the employer must
implement an effective protective equipment program at the workplace which includes…
(b) written procedures for selection, use, inspection, cleaning, maintenance and storage of protective equipment, when required
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to address a maintenance requirement for escape respirators used in the pulp and paper industry, specifically the
replacement schedule for chemical cartridges used for protection against reduced sulfur gases, such as hydrogen sulfide, methyl mercaptan,
dimethyl mercaptan, dimethyl sulfide and dimethyl disulfide. Escape respirators, except for workers required to ride in the pulp mill elevators, may
be half facepiece respirators and mouthpiece, or biteblock respirators, and are used by mill personnel to escape to a safe area when the mill
experiences a gas leak.
Escape respirators
The performance of escape cartridges in the pulp and paper environment was assessed in a study conducted by BC Research Incorporated, and
the findings were published in June 1994, in a report entitled "Life Expectancy of Cartridges for Escape Respirators: Final Report", BCRI Project
No. 4-02-394. Based on the findings of this study, the following guidelines are recognized as acceptable practice by WorkSafeBC. (This guide
was initially published by the Prevention Division in a letter issued October 6, 1994, to the pulp and paper industry.)
The replacement schedule for chemical cartridges for use in escape respirators, in the pulp and paper industry only, may be extended to 12 months
for unused, unexposed, and undamaged cartridges with the following provisos:
A cartridge in an escape respirator is to be changed after use in an emergency involving exposure to mill gases
Each cartridge is to be marked to show clearly its expiry date
A metal type cartridge is to be inspected prior to installation for dents in the base or threads
Any damaged unit is to be replaced
Respiratory protection program
Each pulp and paper mill is expected to have a comprehensive respiratory protection program, functioning as required by section 8.5 of the
Regulation. This is achieved when all workers who are, or may be, required to use a respirator are trained to an acceptable level of competency
and all the elements of the program are in place covering correct use, limitations, maintenance and storage requirements for the devices selected.
For respirator use in industries other than pulp and paper mills, the employer must follow the respirator manufacturer's recommendations for
cartridge replacement schedules.

G8.10 Personal clothing and accessories

Issued August 1, 1999; Revised September 22, 2015

Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.10(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
The personal clothing of a worker must be of a type and in a condition which will not expose the worker to any unnecessary or
avoidable hazards.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline provides clarification and examples of the regulatory requirements for personal clothing.
Clarifications for personal clothing
Under this section, the type and condition of clothing is a concern if a worker is exposed to injury from the material being handled, contact with an
abrasive surface or object, or contact with a surface at a temperature that could cause a burn injury. For example, a worker handling hot tar or
other material that could cause a burn through splashing, fuming, or radiant heat must wear suitable clothing covering the body and arms. A worker
exposed to the abrasive action of material, such as the carrying of lumber on the shoulder or against the body, must wear appropriate clothing.
A worker may have to change or add clothing as the worker's job duties or work conditions change.
An employer may have a dress code or policy for clothing requirements during warm weather. WorkSafeBC prevention officers will not enforce
an employer's policy of this type. Prevention officers will become involved in enforcement if the lack of appropriate clothing is exposing a worker
to any unnecessary or avoidable hazards.
Removal of clothing during outdoor work in warm weather exposes workers to UV from the sun. Ultraviolet radiation from the sun is a "natural
element," and under paragraph 8.2(1)(a) of the Regulation, a worker is responsible for providing any necessary clothing to protect against it.
Workers and employers need to be aware of the hazard from solar radiation, and need to take measures to limit exposure, such as by use of
appropriate attire and the use of sun block creams.
Guidelines - Part 8 - Safety Headgear

G8.11(1) Safety headgear

Issued September 1, 2021; Revised May 9, 2022

Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.11(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Before a worker starts a work assignment in a work area where there is a risk of head injury to the worker from falling, flying or
thrown objects, or other harmful contacts, the employer must take measures to
(a) eliminate the risk, or
 (b) if it is not practicable to eliminate the risk, minimize the risk to the lowest level practicable by applying the following control
measures in order of priority:
(i) engineering controls;
(ii) administrative controls;
(iii) requiring the worker to wear safety headgear.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide information on identifying the risk of head injury from falling, flying, or thrown objects, or other harmful
contacts, and controlling the risk by following the hierarchy of controls. This guideline also provides information about what to do if workers have
concerns about the appropriateness of the control measures selected.
Background
Controlling exposures to hazards in the workplace is fundamental to protecting workers, but often personal protective equipment (PPE) such as
safety headgear is used as a blanket first line of defense from a serious safety hazard. The Sikh community has raised concerns that those
employers who use safety headgear as a blanket safety requirement are excluding turban-wearing Sikh workers from being able to fully participate
in the workforce.
PPE is considered the least effective control measure as it does not eliminate a hazard but merely puts a barrier between the hazard and the
worker. Following the hierarchy of controls ensures measures such as elimination, engineering controls, and administrative controls are applied
before relying on safety headgear.
Worker participation
Creating and managing a safe and healthy workplace involves everyone. For workers to be truly engaged in health and safety, they need to know
their employer and supervisor value their well-being and their input. Consult with workers in the identification of any workplace hazards and in
assessing the risks of injury as they will have direct knowledge of workplace conditions.
Identify hazards, and assess and control risks
To help eliminate or reduce the risk of head injury, employers, in consultation with their workers, can take these steps:
1. Identify the hazards
2. Assess the risks
3. Control the risks
The first step is to determine if there are any hazards that may cause a head injury to a worker. A "hazard" is anything with the potential to cause an
injury to a worker. An example of a hazard would be any tool or other object that could fall on a worker from above. Consider the workplace and
its layout, as well as the work tasks or activities that pose hazards to workers.
A "risk" is the chance of injury when an individual is exposed to a hazard. In determining the level of risk a hazard poses, the following factors are
considered:
What kind of injury or illness could be suffered, and how severe would it most likely be?
How long workers are typically exposed to the hazard? The longer the exposure, the higher the risk.
How frequent is the exposure? If the task is repeated many times each shift, it carries more risk than a task done only occasionally.
Examples include if there is a risk of a worker being struck by a falling tool or other object, or if there is a potential for workers to enter an area
where the hazard exists.
Where a hazard exists and there is a risk of injury to any worker, the employer must take reasonable measures to eliminate that risk. Eliminating the
dangers of worker head injury eliminates the need for head protection. If it is not reasonably practicable to eliminate the risk, the employer must
continue to follow the hierarchy of controls and minimize the risk to the lowest level practicable.
For further information on hazard identification, risk management, and controls please refer to Managing risk webpage on worksafebc.com.
The hierarchy of controls
The hierarchy of controls is a system for controlling risk in the workplace. It is a step-by-step approach to eliminating or reducing risks, and it
ranks risk controls from the highest level of protection and reliability to the lowest. The hierarchy of controls, in the order of priority, is shown
below.
While the controls are listed in order of effectiveness, reducing the risk may involve using a single risk control or two or more different controls in
combination. For example, first responders may encounter circumstances where the risks cannot be completely eliminated before entering a
burning building, but engineering controls, administrative controls, and/or PPE can be used to minimize the risks to workers.
1-2 Elimination or substitution
The most effective control measure involves eliminating the hazard and its associated risk. Eliminating the dangers of worker head injury eliminates
the need for head protection. Substitution involves replacing the material or process with a less hazardous one.
When considering these options, determine if there is a safer way to perform the task. For example, if materials need to be delivered to a
construction site where there is a risk of head injury to the worker from falling, flying, or thrown objects, can a safe zone be set up on the site
where no risk exists? This is an example of an elimination control measure removing the hazard and its associated risk.
3 Engineering controls
If it is not practicable to eliminate the hazards or if there are no safer alternatives, engineering controls are the next best option. These involve using
work equipment or other means to prevent workers from being exposed to a hazard. Engineering controls are physical changes to the workplace.
Engineering controls focused on head injury risks may include measures such as the following:
Safety nets to prevent objects from falling
Temporary or permanent solid barriers to prevent objects from falling, being thrown, or sent flying from work areas
Temporary or permanent barriers to prevent workers from entering hazard areas
Tethering and securing tools, materials, and equipment so they cannot fall
Changing the workplace so workers do not need to enter areas where a risk of head injury exists — for example, in a manufacturing plant,
ensuring manual assembly or packing areas are separated from the areas where overhead bridge cranes operate
4 Administrative controls
Administrative controls involve identifying and implementing safe work procedures so workers can perform their job duties safely. The assessment
will form the basis of these safe work procedures, which may include the following:
Procedures requiring work to stop when other workers are beneath their work areas
Creating work practices that eliminate the exposure to the hazard — for example, workers delivering materials by truck to a worksite with
overhead hazards may need to be restricted to a designated area where no overhead hazard exists
Creating designated pedestrian walkways that keep workers out of head injury hazard zones — this would be similar to those used in
distribution warehouses for forklift traffic
Using signs to alert workers to overhead hazard areas, and provision for safety headgear for entering those areas
Using spotters to alert workers to vacate areas when moving elevated loads or long loads that have the potential to fall or swing and strike a
worker — for example, on an industrial site where a stinger is moving a long pipe, or a fabrication shop where an overhead crane is moving
a steel beam section
5 Personal protective equipment
PPE is another important control to protect workers and refers to anything workers use or wear to minimize risk to a hazard. However, PPE, such
as safety headgear, provides the lowest level of protection and should ideally be used in combination with other control measures. Safety headgear
such as hard hats must be worn by workers if it is not practicable to eliminate the risk of head injury, or engineering and/or administrative controls
are not adequate to minimize the risk of head injury to the lowest level practicable.
An example of where safety headgear may be necessary is if the work environment is constantly changing and it is not possible to use engineering
or administrative controls to minimize the hazards to the level needed to protect workers from the risk of head injury.
Employers must take reasonable measures to eliminate or control those hazards for which PPE is required, including safety headgear.
Document, communicate, and review the safety headgear assessment
Employers have a duty under the Workers Compensation Act to provide workers with the information, instruction, training, and supervision
necessary to ensure their health and safety. Documenting and communicating the assessment and controls to everyone affected will help employers
meet these obligations. A failure to do so severely undermines a worker’s knowledge of the risks that may be encountered in their work
environment.
Communicate with:
All affected workers, particularly if the controls involve changes in their work processes (e.g., use of spotters, new signage to be followed,
tethering tools and materials)
Supervisors of affected workers
The joint health and safety committee (or worker health and safety representative), if applicable
All other people (e.g., visitors, clients) who need to follow safety procedures in areas with a risk of head injury
Monitor and update
Managing workplace risks is an ongoing process. Employers need to monitor the effectiveness of the control measures in place and improve those
that are not working as intended. Continue to engage workers throughout the monitoring and updating of the risk management plan.
Role of WorkSafeBC prevention officers
If a worker has a concern about the measures taken to eliminate or reduce the hazard they should first speak to their employer or supervisor to
determine if further control measures are possible. If there is still a concern regarding the appropriateness of the control measure(s) selected, the
worker or employer may choose to call a prevention officer for assistance. In these circumstances, the prevention officer will review the employer's
assessment and determine whether the hierarchy of controls has been followed and applied before relying on safety headgear.
In some situations, employers may have to balance their health and safety obligations with their obligations under human rights legislation. For more
information on this please refer to OHS Guideline G-P2-21(1).
Additional resources
To help with assessing and controlling the risks of head injury in the workplace, WorkSafeBC has developed a resource, Safety headgear:
Assessing and controlling risk of head injury. A Safety headgear: Risk management template is also available to help document workplace risks
and the steps to take to control those risks.
Safety headgear: Rights and responsibilities is also available for workers, with information on their rights and what they can do if they have a
concern with an employer's application of section 8.11 of the Regulation in their workplace. This resource includes a process map that outlines
what workers can do if they have concerns with the employers' decision to rely on safety headgear.

G8.11(2) Activity specific safety headgear

Issued August 1, 1999; Editorial Revision April 2005; Revised August 1, 2013; Editorial Revision consequential to February 1, 2015 Regulatory
Amendment; Editorial Revision consequential to June 3, 2019 Regulatory Amendment; Editorial Revision consequential to September 1, 2021
Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.11 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Before a worker starts a work assignment in a work area where there is a risk of head injury to the worker from falling, flying or
thrown objects, or other harmful contacts, the employer must take measures to
(a) eliminate the risk, or
(b) if it is not practicable to eliminate the risk, minimize the risk to the lowest level practicable by applying the following control
measures in order of priority:
(i) engineering controls;
(ii) administrative controls;
(iii) requiring the worker to wear safety headgear.
(2) Safety headgear must meet the requirements of one of the following standards:
(a) CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.1-05 or CAN/CSA-Z94.1-15, Industrial protective headwear – Performance, selection,
care, and use;
(b) ANSI Standard ANSI/ISEA Z89.1-2009 or ANSI/ISEA Z89.1-2014, American National Standard for Industrial Head
Protection.
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation states:
(2) When this Regulation requires a person to comply with
(a) a publication, code or standard of the Board or another agency, the person may, as an alternative, comply with another
publication, code or standard acceptable to the Board …
Purpose of guideline
This guideline outlines alternate standards for safety headgear for specific types of activities and describes when they are applicable.
Acceptable standards
WorkSafeBC accepts the following alternate standards for safety headgear designed for specific types of activity:
1. Union of International Alpine Association Standard (UIAA) Standard 106 Mountaineering and Climbing Equipment Helmets
"Rock Climbers Helmets" (for emergency rescue operations, rock scaling, silviculture operations, window washers, and workers doing
boatswain's chair work)

Headgear meeting this standard protects against blunt impact hazards to the head, but must not be used in place of conventional safety
headgear whenever the ventilation holes may expose the worker to hazards from small rigid objects such as nails or if flame resistance is
required.

2. CAN/CSA Z262.1-M90 (R2007) Ice Hockey Helmets (for on-ice activities)

3. CAN/CSA Z611-M86 Police Riot Helmets and Face Shield Protection (for crowd control/riot squad duties)
Since helmets meeting these three standards are not made or tested for dielectric properties, they are not suitable for environments where exposed
energized electrical wires or equipment may be present.
This guideline and these standards do not apply to ski helmets. Please refer to OHS guideline G8.11(2)-2 Activity specific safety headgear — Ski
helmets.

G8.11(2)-1 Safety headgear standards

Issued September 21, 2012; Revised consequential to June 3, 2019 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.11(2) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(2) Safety headgear must meet the requirements of one of the following standards:
(a) CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.1-05 or CAN/CSA-Z94.1-15, Industrial protective headwear – Performance, selection,
care, and use;
(b) ANSI Standard ANSI/ISEA Z89.1-2009 or ANSI/ISEA Z89.1-2014, American National Standard for Industrial Head
Protection.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to help clarify the requirements in the approved standards around the use of Type 1 or Type 2 safety headgear.
Acceptable standards
Both 2005 CSA Standard and 2009 ANSI Standard classify safety headgear into two types: Type 1 and Type 2. Type 1 safety headgear
provides protection from impacts and sharp objects from above. Type 2 safety headgear provides protection from impacts and sharp objects from
above and sides. WorkSafeBC permits the use of both types of safety headgear providing the other requirements in the applicable standards are
met.
Type 2 safety headgear provides more protection where there is a possibility of objects striking the side of the head.

G8.11(2)-2 Activity specific safety headgear — Ski helmets

Issued August 1, 2013; Editorial Revision consequential to June 3, 2019 Regulatory Amendment; Editorial Revision consequential to September 1,
2021 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Sections 8.11(1) and (2) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") state:
(1) Before a worker starts a work assignment in a work area where there is a risk of head injury to the worker from falling, flying or
thrown objects, or other harmful contacts, the employer must take measures to
(a) eliminate the risk, or
(b) if it is not practicable to eliminate the risk, minimize the risk to the lowest level practicable by applying the following control
measures in order of priority:
(i) engineering controls;
 (ii) administrative controls;
(iii) requiring the worker to wear safety headgear.
(2) Safety headgear must meet the requirements of one of the following standards
Section 8.3(2) of the Regulation states:
If the use of personal protective equipment creates hazards equal to or greater than those its use is intended to prevent, alternative
personal protective equipment must be used or other appropriate measures must be taken.
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation states:
(2) When this Regulation requires a person to comply with
(a) a publication, code or standard of the Board or another agency, the person may, as an alternative, comply with another
publication, code or standard acceptable to the Board …
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to clarify the requirements for safety helmets for workers engaged in skiing or snowboarding, and to identify
acceptable alternate standards for these helmets.
Use of helmets for skiing or snowboarding
Section 8.11(1) of the Regulation states that, where there is a risk of head injury from harmful contacts, employers must attempt to eliminate or
minimize those risks. If the risk cannot be eliminated or minimized, workers must wear safety headgear.
Work activities performed while engaging in alpine, or downhill, skiing or snowboarding present a danger of harmful contacts. These harmful
contacts include possible contact with the ground, moving or stationary objects, and other persons. Risks of harmful contacts cannot be easily
eliminated or minimized in this type of environment. Accordingly, workers engaged in sliding activities will usually be required to wear safety
headgear.
In ski areas, examples of workers typically engaged in skiing or snowboarding include ski patrollers, ski instructors, avalanche control workers,
and workers transiting on skis or snowboards between work locations.
Acceptable standards
Section 8.11(2) lists standards that safety headgear must meet. In addition, section 4.4(2)(a) permits the reliance on other standards that are
acceptable to WorkSafeBC. WorkSafeBC has identified the following standards for safety headgear for skiing and snowboarding work activities
as acceptable for use by workers:
CE-EN1077 Helmets for alpine skiers and snowboarders — Class A or Class B
ASTM F2040 Helmets Used for Recreational Snow Sports
Snell RS-98 Protective Headgear for Recreational Skiing and Snowboarding
Risk assessment
Where an employer can show that a particular sliding activity is performed in a way that the danger of harmful contacts is not present, or the risk
has been minimized to the lowest level practicable, workers may perform that activity without headgear. In making such a determination, the
employer is required to perform a thorough risk assessment showing that the danger of harmful contacts is not present.
Employers should consider whether wearing safety headgear for a particular activity where headgear would normally be required, would itself
create a hazard to the worker in the circumstances. As stated in section 8.3(2), personal protective equipment must not itself create a hazard to the
wearer. For example, a worker engaged in avalanche control blasting whose ability to communicate clearly with co-workers is impaired by
headgear, may need to remove it for the duration of that activity.

G8.11(3) Protection from electrical hazards

Issued August 1, 1999; Editorial Revision consequential to June 3, 2019 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.11(3) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
If a worker may be exposed to an electrical hazard the safety headgear must have an appropriate non-conductive rating.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to define the appropriate type of safety headgear required under section 8.11(3) of the Regulation when a worker
may be exposed to electrical hazards.
Background
Only electricians, powerline technicians (formerly known as linemen), and certified utility arborists will normally be exposed to electrical hazards,
which result when exposed and energized electric wires or electrical equipment is present in the workplace. Firefighters may be exposed to
electrical hazards during fire or other emergency incidents, and their headwear requirements during such activity are specified in Part 31 of the
Regulation.
The CSA (CAN/CSA-Z94.1-05 and CAN/CSA-Z94.1-15) and ANSI (ANSI/ISEA Z89.1-2009 and ANSI/ISEA Z89.1-2014) Standards for
safety headgear designate headgear as Class G (General) for a dielectric test rating, when new, of 2,200 volts.
The CSA (CAN/CSA-Z94.1-05 and CAN/CSA-Z94.1-15) and ANSI (ANSI/ISEA Z89.1-2009 and ANSI/ISEA Z89.1-2014) Standards for
safety headgear designate headgear as Class E (Electrical) for a dielectric test rating, when new, of 20,000 volts.
Both the CSA and ANSI standards warn that dielectric rated headgear is intended to reduce risks arising from accidental contact with energized
electrical equipment, not to provide a primary means of insulating a worker from intentional contact with such equipment.
Appropripate dielectric rating
An electrician working only on "residential type" circuits, of 240 volts or less, may wear Class A, B, G, or E rated CSA or ANSI safety headgear.
This upper voltage limit for work around residential type circuits may seem conservative, but the 2,200 volt dielectric rating for these classes of
headgear is achieved when testing a new sample, and the protection degrades with use and is also dependant on the cleanliness of the headgear.
Powerline technicians, electricians, and any other workers who work on circuits that have the potential for voltages above 240 volts need to wear
Class B or E rated CSA or ANSI headgear, or equivalent.
Class C (Conductive) CSA or ANSI safety headgear does not provide dielectric protection. Any safety headgear that has had holes drilled in the
shell to install accessories is considered to have lost its dielectric rating. Workers (other than electricians, certified utility arborists or powerline
technicians who should not be exposed to energized electric wires or equipment in the normal course of their work), may wear headgear with
whatever class of dielectric protection they desire. If workers receive special training and are given work assignments requiring work near exposed
energized electrical sources, they must have and wear headgear with the appropriate dielectric rating. For example, workers assigned to clean and
paint utility poles may be exposed to electrical hazards, and should wear electrically protective headgear.

G8.11(4) Chin straps

Issued August 1, 1999; Editorial Revision consequential to June 3, 2019 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.11(4) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Chin straps or other effective means of retention must be used on safety headgear when workers are climbing or working from a
height exceeding 3 m (10 ft), or are exposed to high winds or other conditions that may cause loss of the headgear.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline outlines that chin straps are an effective means for the retention of safety headgear as required by section 8.11(4) of the Regulation.
Background
Industrial safety headgear has traditionally been designed and tested to provide protection from an impact directed more or less downward onto
the top of the head. The CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.1-92 introduced a new requirement for protection of the head from an impact landing on
the side of the head. This was in response to injury studies that indicated a significant incidence of injury due to people being struck on the side of
the head by objects, even when wearing a safety headgear. During the development of the Regulation, expert advice provided to the Personal
Protective Equipment Subcommittee drew attention to the severity and high cost of head injuries, particularly the many injuries which result from an
impact to the side of the head. This type of head injury will typically occur when someone falls and strikes the floor, ground, or some other object.
Head protection must remain in place on the head to provide any protection when the head strikes something during or at the end of a fall. This is
the reason why bicycle helmets and headgear for many other sports have a chin strap. The expert advice to the regulation development process
was industrial safety headgear should have a mandatory headgear retention criteria, to assist with keeping safety headgear in place during work,
including the headgear remaining effectively in place during a fall. Hence, section 8.11(4) was established.
Criteria of safety headgear
This section has three main objectives:
1. To keep safety headgear in place on the wearer's head during a fall.
2. To keep safety headgear from becoming a falling object and a danger to workers working below.
3. To ensure the worker remains protected by safety headgear while doing work tasks. (For example, a rock scaler losing the safety headgear
part way down a rappel of a rock face would have to descend the rest of the way down the rock face without head protection to recover
the hat or get a replacement.)
Headgear may be accidentally knocked off a worker's head in any situation. Generally speaking, a means of retention should be used when the
circumstances of the work create a likelihood of the loss of the headgear. Some examples are work on a ladder or scaffold over 10 feet high, or
during work in an area with high wind (either natural wind or wind created by equipment such as a helicopter). Generally it is not expected a chin
strap would need to be worn by a worker on a floor or deck enclosed by guardrails.
Retention test
CSA Standards Z94.1-05 and Z94.1-15 specify a retention test for hard hats that is intended to evaluate the stability of the headgear during
normal use. The standard states that the "test does not assess the ability of the headgear to remain in place during extreme conditions (e.g., windy
conditions, during an impact or fall)." Therefore, headgear meeting this aspect of the CSA standard does not automatically comply with section
8.11(4). At this time, for the purposes of section 8.11(4), a chin strap system is an effective means known to WorkSafeBC for the retention of
safety headgear.

G8.12/8.13 Use of safety headgear for workers on ATVs and similar equipment in agricultural operations

Issued May 25, 2005; Editorial Revision June 30, 2021

Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.12 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Operators and passengers on all-terrain vehicles, snowmobiles and motorcycles must wear headgear meeting the requirements of
(a) CSA Standard CAN3-D230-M85, Protective Headgear in Motor Vehicle Applications,
(b) British Safety Institution Standard BS5361.1976, Specification: Protective Helmets for Vehicle Users, (as amended to
1981),
(c) Snell Memorial Foundation 1995 Standard for Protective Headgear for Use with Motorcycles and Other Motorized
Vehicles, or
(d) US Federal Standard for Motorcycle Helmets (Title 49 — Transportation — Part 571.218).
(2) Headgear in good condition meeting earlier editions of a standard listed in subsection (1) may remain in service if purchased
before April 15, 1998.
(3) When an all-terrain vehicle is operated within a specific location, with no rollover hazard area and no area containing a significant
hazard that may cause loss of control and at a speed not exceeding 20 km/h (13 mph), safety headgear meeting the requirements of
section 8.13 may be used in place of headgear specified in subsection 8.12(1).
Section 8.13 of the Regulation states:
(1) A worker riding a bicycle or using in-line skates or similar means of transport must wear headgear meeting the requirements of
(a) CSA Standard CAN/CSA-D113.2-M89, Cycling Helmets,
(b) Snell Memorial Foundation 1994 Standard for Protective Headgear for Use in Non-Motorized Sports, or
(c) Snell Memorial Foundation 1995 Standard for Protective Headgear for Use in Bicycling.
(2) If a bicycle or similar conveyance is operated at speeds not exceeding 20 km/h (13 mph) within a specific location, safety
headgear meeting the requirements of section 8.11 is acceptable when worn with a chin strap.
Purpose of this guideline
This guideline provides information on the requirements for safety headgear, under sections 8.12 and 8.13 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation"),
when workers use various types of small mobile equipment and other conveyances in agricultural operations. (Note that the responsibilities for
providing safety headgear and other personal protective equipment are covered in section 8.2 of the Regulation).
ATVs, snowmobiles, and motorcycles
These types of equipment are often used for work purposes in farming or ranching operations. Section 8.12(1) requires workers on such mobile
equipment to wear head protection which meets at least one of the listed Canadian, American, or British standards. These standards are common,
and suppliers will typically have headgear that is compliant.
Section 8.12(2) recognizes that older helmets may in some cases meet an earlier edition of the protective standard listed in the Regulation. In
addition, it should be noted that under section 4.4 of the Regulation, WorkSafeBC can consider other standards as well. A farmer or rancher who
would like to have an alternative standard considered should contact WorkSafeBC for a review of it.
For workers on ATVs, section 8.12(3) also permits the use of helmets meeting the bicycle and other non-motorized sports helmet standards listed
in section 8.13(1), if the ATV is operated at speeds not exceeding 20 km per hour (13 mph) within a specific location where there is no significant
hazard of rollover.
A "specific location" is defined in the Regulation as "a yard, plant, or other clearly defined and limited area in which mobile equipment is operated,
but does not include an entire municipality, district, transient forestry operation or construction site." This definition indicates a specific location
would be a particular defined area of a ranch or farm in which mobile equipment is used, rather than the whole property, unless the property was
relatively restricted in size. Typically, such areas might be those in the vicinity of the dwellings, outbuildings, and nearby areas frequently used by
mobile equipment.
A key factor is that the area must have "no significant hazard of rollover," which is defined in the Regulation as "an area in which there are no
grades exceeding 10%, no operating areas with open edges, no open ramps, loading docks, ditches or other similar hazards which might cause a
rollover." In the case of ranches, the slope criterion will often be a limiting factor. On farms, areas adjacent to drainage or irrigation ditches would
be considered to have a significant hazard of rollover.
Bicycles and similar conveyances
Bicycles are used in some agricultural operations such as greenhouses. When using bicycles, or similar conveyances such as in-line skates, section
8.13(1) requires that the worker wear safety headgear meeting one of the standards listed. The standards are common, and suppliers will usually
have headgear that is compliant. Additional acceptable standards are identified in OHS Guideline G8.13.
In lower hazard circumstances, section 8.13(2) permits the use of "hard hats" with chin straps. To permit this use of a lower standard of protection,
the bicycle is to be operated at speeds of not more than 20 km per hour (13 mph), within a specific location. Greenhouses are considered to be a
specific location.
Utility vehicles
Sections 8.12 and 8.13 do not require the use of safety headgear while riding in utility vehicles or other such equipment not identified in the
requirements. A utility vehicle typically has a steering wheel and seating that permits two persons to sit side by side, in contrast to an ATV which is
equipped with a handle bar and a straddle seating arrangement. Examples of utility vehicles include "Gators" and "Argos".
In addition to the requirements of sections 8.12 and 8.13, section 4.3(1) of the Regulation requires that equipment be operated in conformity with
manufacturers' instructions. If such instructions for utility vehicles require the use of safety headgear, then it is appropriate to select headgear
meeting a standard listed in section 8.12. In all cases, to help ensure safety the operator should ensure the utility vehicle is operated in accordance
with manufacturers' instructions, at prudent speeds, avoiding holes, debris and steep slopes.
Recreational use
Sections 8.12 and 8.13 apply only to the use of conveyances for work purposes. They do not apply to the personal use of such equipment for
recreational purposes. When engaged in recreational use, people must comply with protective helmet requirements of the public authority with
jurisdiction. Even if safety headgear is not required, it is recommended, for the purposes of safety, that it be worn.

8.13 Use of safety headgear with bicycles and skates

Issued June 30, 2021

Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.13(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) A worker riding a bicycle or using in-line skates or similar means of transport must wear headgear meeting the requirements of
(a) CSA Standard CAN/CSA-D113.2-M89, Cycling Helmets,
(b) Snell Memorial Foundation 1994 Standard for Protective Headgear for Use in Non-Motorized Sports, or
(c) Snell Memorial Foundation 1995 Standard for Protective Headgear for Use in Bicycling.
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation states:
(2) When this Regulation requires a person to comply with
(a) a publication, code or standard of the Board or another agency, the person may, as an alternative, comply with another
publication, code or standard acceptable to the Board …
Purpose of guideline
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation provides WorkSafeBC the authority to accept alternative standards to those listed in the Regulation. The
purpose of this guideline is to identify alternative bicycle helmet standards acceptable to WorkSafeBC.
Alternative standards
When using bicycles, or similar conveyances such as in-line skates, section 8.13(1) requires that the worker wears safety headgear meeting one of
the standards listed. Alternative bicycle helmet standards acceptable to WorkSafeBC include the following:
American Society for Testing and Materials Standard ASTM F1447-94 (Standard Specification for Protective Headgear Used in
Bicycling), as amended from time to time
Snell Memorial Foundation Standard N-94 (1994 Standard for Protective Headgear for Use in Non-Motorized Sports), as amended
from time to time
Snell Memorial Foundation Standard B-95 (1995 Standard for Protective Headgear for Use with Bicycles), as amended from time to
time
Snell Memorial Foundation Standard B-90 (1990 Standard for Protective Headgear for Use in Bicycling), as amended from time to
time
The United States Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) bike helmet standard is required by law in the United States. A CPSC sticker
on a bike helmet is an indication that it meets the ASTM F1447-94 standard.
Guidelines - Part 8 - Eye and Face Protection

G8.15(1) Prescription safety eyewear – Alternate standards

Issued June 18, 2008; Revised May 9, 2014; Retired consequential to June 3, 2019 Regulatory Amendment

G8.17(2) Face protection - Alternate standards

Issued July 9, 2009; Revised October 28, 2015; Retired consequential to June 3, 2019 Regulatory Amendment
Guidelines - Part 8 - Limb and Body Protection

G8.21 Leg protection

Issued August 1, 1999; Editorial Revision October 2004; Retired May 31, 2021

G8.21(2) Leg protection - Alternate standards

Retired February 1, 2011

This guideline is not required since the referenced alternative standards have been incorporated into OHS Regulation section 8.21.

G8.21(2)-1 Leg protection - WorkSafeBC standards

Issued February 1, 2011; Retired June 30, 2021

G8.21(2)-2 Leg protection - Alternate standard

Issued May 29, 2018

Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.21(2) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(2) Leg protective devices referred to in subsection (1) must meet or exceed
(a) the general requirements of section 4 of the WorkSafeBC Standard - Leg Protective Devices, as set out in Schedule 8-A of this
Part, and
(b) the performance requirements of one of the following standards, using the cut-resistance testing protocol set out in that standard
except as varied in subparagraph (ii):
(i) WorkSafeBC Standard - Leg Protective Devices, as set out in section 5 of Schedule 8-A of this Part, applying a threshold chain
speed of 18.3 metres per second or 3 600 feet per minute;
(ii) ASTM F 1414-04 Standard Test Method for Measurement of Cut Resistance to Chain Saw in Lower Body (Legs)
Protective Clothing, but applying a threshold chain speed of 16.8 metres per second or 3 300 feet per minute;
(iii) ISO 11393-2 Protective clothing for users of hand-held chain-saws - Part 2: Test methods and performance
requirements for leg protectors, applying a Class 2 threshold chain speed of 24 metres per second or 4 724 feet per minute;
(iv) BS EN 381-5:1995 Protective clothing for users of hand-held chain saws - Part 5: Requirements for leg protectors,
applying a Class 2 threshold chain speed of 24 metres per second or 4 724 feet per minute.
Section 4.4(2) of the Regulation states:
(2) When this Regulation requires a person to comply with
(a) a publication, code or standard of the Board or another agency, the person may, as an alternative, comply with another
publication, code or standard acceptable to the Board...
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to specify, for the purposes of section 8.21(2) of the Regulation, an alternate standard acceptable to WorkSafeBC
for leg protection devices.
Acceptable standards
Section 4.4(2)(a) permits WorkSafeBC to accept another standard as an alternative to one referred to in the Regulation. WorkSafeBC had
determined that ASTM F1414-15 is an acceptable alternate standard under section 8.21(2), when applying a threshold chain speed of 16.8
metres per second or 3,300 feet per minute.
Guidelines - Part 8 - Footwear

G8.22 Footwear

Issued August 1, 1999

Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.22(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
A worker's footwear must be of a design, construction, and material appropriate to the protection required and that allows the
worker to safely perform the worker's work.
Section 8.22(2) of the OHS Regulation states:
(2) To determine appropriate footwear under subsection (1), the following factors must be considered:
(a) slipping;
(b) tripping;
(c) uneven terrain;
(d) abrasion;
(e) ankle protection and foot support;
(f) potential for musculoskeletal injury;
(g) crushing potential;
(h) temperature extremes;
(i) corrosive substances;
(j) puncture hazards;
(k) electrical shock;
(l) any other recognizable hazard.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to outline the requirement that the employer must determine the appropriate protection required for the feet and
ankles based on the work assigned to each worker, and ensure each worker wears appropriate footwear, as stated in sections 8.22(1) and (2) of
the Regulation.
Assessment
The assessment is based on whatever work procedures and arrangements exist in the workplace at any time. An employer may change the work
procedures and arrangements to reduce or remove the risk. For example, an employer may limit the number of workers doing tasks that cause a
risk of foot injury. Alternatively, the employer may change the way the tasks are done. Protective footwear need only be worn while a worker is
exposed to the risk that requires it.
When determining the requirements for appropriate protective footwear, an employer should not consider training and supervision as a substitute
for protective footwear.
The risk assessment to determine appropriate footwear will result in persons or activities being placed into one of three categories:
1. The hazards present require "safety footwear." As safety footwear is only certified with respect to certain features to protect from specific
types of hazard, regard must be had to whether there should be additional requirements to cover all hazards of a worker's job.
2. There are some hazards present that require footwear to provide protection, but not necessarily protection to the level of "certified safety
footwear." For example, a lifeguard at a beach likely will not need to wear footwear with safety toe protection, but needs to wear footwear
that will protect against cuts from objects on a beach where there is a risk from such objects.
3. There are no hazards of foot injury for which specific requirements are necessary. For example, this will be the case for most office
workers.

G8.22(2.1) High heels and healthy footwear

Issued April 28, 2017
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.22(2.1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
An employer must not require a worker to wear footwear that does not comply with subsection (1).
Section 8.22 of the Regulation states, in part:
(1) A worker's footwear must be of a design, construction, and material appropriate to the protection required and that allows the
worker to safely perform the worker's work.
(2) To determine appropriate footwear under subsection (1), the following factors must be considered:
(a) slipping;
(b) tripping;
(c) uneven terrain;
(d) abrasion;
(e) ankle protection and foot support;
(f) potential for musculoskeletal injury;
(g) crushing potential;
(h) temperature extremes;
(i) corrosive substances;
(j) puncture hazards;
(k) electrical shock;
(l) any other recognizable hazard.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline provides clarification of the section 8.22(2.1) requirement that an employer must not require a worker to wear footwear that does
not comply with section 8.22(1).
High heels
Under section 8.22(1), footwear must both allow the workers to perform their work safely and provide the protection required for the particular
environment. In order to determine whether certain footwear is appropriate within the meaning of section 8.22(1), the factors listed in section
8.22(2) must be considered.
Walking in high heels (typically > 1.5 inches high) has been shown to significantly reduce ankle muscle movement as well as balance control. High
heels have also been shown to result in musculoskeletal injury, particularly ankle and foot sprains and strains. High heels are therefore not
appropriate with consideration to the factors of ankle protection and foot support, potential for musculoskeletal injury, and slipping, tripping, and
uneven terrain. Where any of those hazards are present, high heels will not allow the workers to safely perform their work.
OHS Guideline G8.22 Footwear explains that the risk assessment employers must make to determine what constitutes appropriate footwear is
based on the work assigned to each worker and on the work procedures and arrangements that exist in the workplace at any given time. The risk
assessment should also consider the workplace floor and stair surfaces and whether there may be liquids or items on them that could be slip and
trip hazards.
As an example, hospitality workers (e.g., servers, hosts, bus-people, and bartenders in bars, clubs, restaurants, or other hospitality venues) walk
on different surfaces, including slippery surfaces and stairs, often while carrying food and drinks. With consideration to the factors referred to in
section 8.22(2)(a), (b), (c), (e), and (f), high heels would not be appropriate footwear. A dress code requiring hospitality workers to wear high
heels while serving, bussing, or hosting would violate section 8.22(2.1).
Healthy footwear
Section 8.22(2.1) is not intended to interfere with a worker's choice of footwear where there are no hazards of foot or ankle injury or potential for
musculoskeletal injury (such as office or other predominantly sedentary work) as in the third risk category described in OHS Guideline G8.22
Footwear.
In deciding whether certain footwear is appropriate, consideration should be given to factors that promote foot and musculoskeletal health.
Questions to ask include: Does the toe box allow for normal foot function and natural toe positioning, or does it squeeze toes together unnaturally?
Does this footwear distribute body weight over the whole foot, or does it place more weight on the forefoot? Does the heel make sufficient contact
with the walking surface to provide a stable base for good musculoskeletal alignment and balance, or does it detract from them? If the answer to
the first part of any of these questions is "no" and the answer to the second part is "yes," that footwear is likely not appropriate for the worker's
work.

G8.22(3) Specific safety protective features

Issued August 1, 1999; Editorial Revision April 2005; Revised September 22, 2015
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.22(3) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
If a determination has been made that safety protective footwear is required to have toe protection, metatarsal protection, puncture
resistant soles, dielectric protection or any combination of these, the footwear must meet the requirements of:
(a) CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z195-M92, Protective Footwear,
(b) ANSI Standard Z41-1991, American National Standard for Personal Protection - Protective Footwear,
(c) British Safety Institution Standard BS EN 345:1993 Specification for Safety Footwear for Professional Use, or
(d) British Safety Institution Standard BS EN 346:1993 Specification for Protective Footwear for Professional Use.
Section 8.3(2) of the Regulation states:
If the use of personal protective equipment creates hazards equal to or greater than those its use is intended to prevent, alternative
personal protective equipment must be used or other appropriate measures must be taken.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline explains the grades of safety footwear. It also provides guidance on the selection of appropriate footwear for stated hazards.
Grades of safety footwear
The levels of footwear certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) as meeting CAN/CSA Z195-M92 are set out in the following table.

Grade 1 2 3
Internal CSA label colour denoting only grade of toe protection Green Yellow Red
External triangular CSA patch colour denoting sole plate puncture protection Green Yellow Red
with toe protection
External rectangular patch colour with Greek letter omega (Ω) in orange White White White
denoting only electrical shock resistant soles
External rectangular patch colour with green "SD" notation and an electrical Fluorescent Yellow Fluorescent Yellow Fluorescent Yellow
grounding symbol, denoting static dissipate footwear

Protective Toecap Impact Resistance, joules (ft*lb) 125 (93) 90 (65) 60 (45)

The degree of protection to the toe based on the table above is approximately as follows:
Grade 1 - Dropping a 30 pound weight from 3 feet onto toe
Grade 2 - Dropping a 20 pound weight from 3 feet onto toe
Grade 3 - Dropping a 15 pound weight from 3 feet onto toe
Sole plate puncture protection is only available in CSA certified footwear in combination with toe protection. All sole plates are designed to
withstand the same puncture force using a pointed tester, and the colour of the external triangular patch varies only with the grade of toe protection.
The external triangular patch may be positioned in any conspicuous location on the right footwear upper. The top of the tongue is an acceptable
patch location; provided the patch is visible when the footwear is laced up.
Section 4.4(2)(a) permits the reliance on other standards which are acceptable to WorkSafeBC.
The following American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and British Standards Institution (BSI) Standard Impact and Compression
classification combinations are acceptable substitutes for the named CSA Grades:

CSA Grade Equivalent ANSI Classifications Equivalent BSI Designations

 1 I/75 combined with C/751 Safety General, Heavy Duty, or Clog; Safety Footwear
with toe impact energy protection levels of either 120
joules, 160 joules, or 200 joules (88, 118, or 148 ft. lb)
2 I/50 or higher, combined with C/50 or higher2 Protective Footwear with toe impact energy protection
levels of 80 joules (59 ft. lb.)
3 I/30 or higher, combined with C/30 or higher3 Protective Footwear with toe impact energy protection
levels of 40 joules (30 ft. lb)

NOTES:
1 This is any of the safety footwear meeting British Standard BS 1870: Part 1:1988, Safety Footwear, Part 1. Specification for safety footwear
other than all-rubber and all-plastics moulded types, as amended.
2 This is protective footwear meeting British Standard BS 4972 Specification for Women's Protective Footwear, as amended.
3 This is protective footwear meeting British Standard BS 4972 Specification for Women's Protective Footwear, as amended.

Safety footwear considerations

External strap-on or glue-on "safety toecaps" do not meet any recognized safety standard and should not be used as an alternative to recognized
safety footwear. Strap-on toecaps may be used to provide additional protection over the top of CSA Grade 1 safety footwear. Strap-on toecaps
are not suitable replacements for integral metatarsal protectors.
Slip-on rubber type footwear with integral safety toecaps, which slip on over existing footwear, and have evidence of independent testing proving
that they meet the impact criteria of CSA Standard Z195, may be used.
If a hazard requires metatarsal protectors, the metatarsal protectors should be an integral part of the footwear. (This form of protection is typically
required in foundries and heavy manufacturing where steel plate, beams, or rails are handled, but it is not normally required in the construction
industry.) Metatarsal protectors that only attach to the laces or are only strapped in place do not meet the CSA Standard Z195 and should not be
used because there is no assurance the metatarsal protector is properly supported by the toecap.
There are activities and work environments where, although the dangers of injury to the worker do not require the specific protective footwear
meeting the requirements of one of the standards referred to in section 8.22(3), appropriate footwear must be worn to prevent injury to the
worker. Section 8.22(2) specifies some of the hazards for which protection may be required, such as slipping, uneven terrain, abrasion, ankle
protection, and foot support, temperature extremes, and corrosive substances. The footwear standards, such as the CSA Standard CAN/CSA-
Z195-M92, do not provide performance requirements to guide the selection or assessment of footwear for protection from these hazards. The
employer must assess each worker's exposure to these dangers and ensure the worker's footwear is of a type and construction that minimizes, as
far as is practicable, the risk of injury to the worker. Refer also to OHS Guideline G8.22 Footwear.
In addition to the appropriate approved safety devices for metatarsal, sole penetration and toe protection, the following criteria need to be
considered in the selection of "appropriate" footwear:
1. If the possibility of ankle cuts or abrasion exists, the footwear should be at least 13 cm (about 5 inches) high and provide adequate
protection from cuts and abrasion. (The height of footwear is the measurement from the top of the sole at the arch to the top of the upper.)
2. For walking on uneven surfaces, footwear should provide adequate ankle support and be worn tight fitting around the ankle to provide
sufficient ankle support. Appropriate footwear would generally be lace-up boots. Cowboy style and rubber boots would not provide
sufficient ankle support on uneven surfaces. Lace-up style 20 cm (8 inch) leather-upper winter boots generally provide sufficient ankle
support on uneven surfaces.
3. Athletic shoes are acceptable for occupational use provided the style and construction provides protection from the hazards to which the
worker will be exposed. For example, mesh-type covering over the toe area would not be appropriate in a laboratory where there is danger
of chemicals dropping onto the foot. Low cut uppers will not be appropriate if there is danger of abrasion to the ankle.
Guidelines for certain types of workers are as follows:
1. A worker in the construction industry, or any other similar working environment where there is risk of toe injury, should wear safety
footwear with CSA Grade 1 toe protection.
2. A worker in the construction industry, or any other industry with a possibility of sole punctures, should wear footwear with protective sole
plates.
3. A worker in any industry with a potential for electric shock, for example an electrician or powerline technician, should wear footwear with
dielectric protective soles, in addition to any other protective features required by the circumstances of the work.
4. A worker using high pressure washing or cutting equipment should wear footwear or footwear cover devices which protect the whole top
area of the foot from accidental contact with the washing or cutting stream. Conventional safety toe and metatarsal protectors do not cover
a sufficient portion of the worker's foot to protect the foot during this type of work.
5. A worker in a warehouse should wear safety footwear with CSA Grade 1 toe protection.
6. A worker in a retail store environment using pallet jacks, forklifts, or other rolling equipment should wear footwear with CSA Grade 1 toe
protection.
The circumstances at a particular workplace may justify a variation from the above recommendations. For example, an employer may arrange the
work in a manner that eliminates all hazards of foot injury.
There are activities and work environments where a heavy work shoe or boot, or a specific protective feature, might normally be required but
wearing such footwear could endanger the worker. In this circumstance, section 8.3(2) of the Regulation requires that alternative personal
protective equipment be used or that other appropriate measures be taken to adequately control the hazard.
The following measures/practices are generally recognized as being acceptable to WorkSafeBC:
1. A carpet layer or similar finishing trade requiring a worker to constantly kneel down will generally not wear safety-toed footwear.
2. A worker (steel erector) climbing or walking on steel will generally not wear safety-toed footwear. However, the worker should wear
substantial footwear having leather uppers reaching past the ankle.
3. A worker in the logging industry walking on logs, steep sidehills, or uneven ground will generally not wear safety-toed footwear, although
safety-toed footwear will be necessary when using tools such as axes or chain saws. Note that section 8.23(2) of the Regulation requires
"Caulked or other equally effective footwear must be worn by workers who are required to walk on logs, poles, pilings or other round
timbers."
In addition to the above, a worker exposed to an environment requiring rubber boots extending above the ankle for protection from chemicals,
water or other liquids, is not expected to have tight fitting leather uppers if walking on uneven surfaces.
These exceptions apply while the worker is performing the particular job function. When the worker is performing other job functions or walking
through surrounding hazards, the worker must wear footwear appropriate to the hazard.

G8.22(3)-1 Footwear – Alternate standards

Issued September 28, 2007; Revised June 14, 2013; Editorial Revision June 3, 2019
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.22 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states in part:
(1) A worker's footwear must be of a design, construction, and material appropriate to the protection required.
(2) To determine appropriate protection under subsection (1) the following factors must be considered: slipping, uneven terrain,
abrasion, ankle protection and foot support, crushing potential, temperature extremes, corrosive substances, puncture hazards,
electrical shock and any other recognizable hazard.
(3) If a determination has been made that safety protective footwear is required to have toe protection, metatarsal protection,
puncture resistant soles, dielectric protection or any combination of these, the footwear must meet the requirements of:
(a) CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z195-M92, Protective Footwear,
(b) ANSI Standard Z41-1991, American National Standard for Personal Protection - Protective Footwear,
(c) British Safety Institution Standard BS EN 345:1993 Specification for Safety Footwear for Professional Use, or
(d) British Safety Institution Standard BS EN 346:1993 Specification for Protective Footwear for Professional Use.
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation states:
When this Regulation requires a person to comply with
(a) a publication, code or standard of the Board or another agency, the person may, as an alternative, comply with another
publication, code or standard acceptable to the Board.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to specify, in the case of section 8.22(3) of the Regulation, alternate standards acceptable to WorkSafeBC.
Background
Regulation section 8.22(1) specifies that a worker's footwear must be of a design, construction, and material appropriate to the protection
required. Regulation section 8.22(2) specifies the factors that must be considered to determine footwear protection appropriate to the protection
required.
Acceptable standards
When a determination has been made that safety protective footwear is required to have toe protection, metatarsal protection, puncture resistant
soles, dielectric protection, or any combination of these factors, the footwear must meet the requirements of a standard listed in section 8.22(3) of
the Regulation.
As safety footwear is manufactured and certified to the edition of the standard in place at the time of manufacture, WorkSafeBC has reviewed the
current versions of these standards, as well as new footwear standards. It has determined that in addition to those listed in section 8.22(3),
WorkSafeBC will accept under that provision the following standards for footwear for the factors addressed by the standard:
 CSA Standard Z195-14, Protective Footwear
CSA Standard Z195-02, Protective Footwear
ANSI Standard Z41-1999, American National Standard for Personal Protection - Protective Footwear
ASTM Standard F 2413-05, Specification for Performance Requirements for Foot Protection
ASTM Standard F 2413-11, Specification for Performance Requirements for Foot Protection
ASTM Standard F 1818-04, Specification for Foot Protection for Chain Saw Users
ISO Standard 20345:2004(E), Personal Protective Equipment - Safety Footwear
ISO Standard 20346:2004(E), Personal Protective Equipment - Protective Footwear
Guidelines - Part 8 - High Visibility and Distinguishing Apparel

G8.24 High visibility apparel

Issued August 1, 1999; Editorial Revision April 2005; Revised consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.24 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) A worker who is exposed to vehicles or mobile equipment travelling at speeds in excess of 30 km/h must wear high visibility
apparel that meets the requirements for Class 2 or Class 3 apparel in CSA Standard Z96-15, High-Visibility Safety Apparel.
(2) A worker who is exposed to vehicles or mobile equipment travelling at speeds equal to or less than 30 km/h must wear high
visibility apparel that meets the requirements for Class 1, Class 2 or Class 3 apparel in CSA Standard Z96-15, High-Visibility
Safety Apparel.
(3) Subsections (1) and (2) do not apply to the following:
(a) a firefighter who is wearing a protective coat that meets the requirements of the 2007, 2013 or 2018 edition of NFPA 1971,
Standard on Protective Ensembles for Structural Fire Fighting and Proximity Fire Fighting;
(b) the following persons who are wearing high visibility apparel that meets the requirements for Class 2 apparel in CSA Standard
Z96-15, High-Visibility Safety Apparel as modified in accordance with subsection (4):
(i) a person who is employed by British Columbia Emergency Health Services as an emergency medical assistant or in any other
capacity;
(ii) a municipal constable as defined in the Police Act;
(iii) a person who is employed in the Commercial Vehicle Safety and Enforcement branch of the Ministry of Transportation and
Infrastructure;
(c) a traffic control person referred to in section 18.9 of this regulation.
(4) For the purposes of subsection (3)(b), the requirements for Class 2 apparel are modified as follows:
(a) retroreflective or combined-performance stripes and bands must have
(i) a minimum width of 25 mm,
(ii) an entirely retroreflective area with a minimum width of 25 mm,

(iii) a minimum coefficient of retroreflection of 240 cd/(lx·m2) measured at an observation angle of 0.2 degrees and an entrance angle
of -4 degrees in accordance with CSA Standard Z96-15, High-Visibility Safety Apparel, and

(iv) a minimum area of 0.05 m2 on the front of the apparel and 0.05 m2 on the back of the apparel;
(b) retroreflective or combined-performance stripes and bands do not have to form an "X" on the back of the apparel;
(c) the requirements relating to identification patches and lettering do not apply;
(d) background material, excluding identification patches, lettering and retroreflective or combined-performance stripes and bands,
must have a minimum area of 0.13 m2 on the front of the apparel and 0.13 m2 on the back of the apparel.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline provides information on the different classes of high visibility apparel in the standard referenced in section 8.24 of the Regulation. It
also provides guidance on the selection of appropriate high visibility apparel.
Requirements for high visibility apparel
Section 8.24 of the Regulation requires a worker exposed to vehicles or mobile equipment to wear high visibility apparel appropriate to the
hazard. To determine the nature of the hazard, it is necessary to consider the speed of the moving vehicles, as well as the duties and the work
location of the worker relative to the vehicles or mobile equipment.
Section 8.24(1) requires a worker exposed to vehicles or mobile equipment travelling at speeds in excess of 30 km/h to wear high visibility apparel
that meets the requirements for Class 2 or Class 3 apparel in CSA Standard Z96-15, High-Visibility Safety Apparel. For example, this section
applies to a worker on a highway construction project with public traffic or workplace vehicles passing by at a speed greater than 30 km/h.
Section 8.24(2) requires a worker exposed to vehicles or mobile equipment travelling at speeds equal to or less than 30 km/h to wear high visibility
apparel that meets the requirements for Class 1, Class 2, or Class 3 apparel in CSA Standard Z96-15 High-Visibility Safety Apparel. For
example, this section would apply to workers engaged in the following types of activities:
On a construction site assisting with the positioning, loading, or unloading of dump trucks
Grading lumber on a sawmill yard where forklifts or front end loaders are used to move logs or lumber
Collecting shopping carts in a parking lot
On a road construction project where work takes place inside of an area protected from public traffic by barricades
Classes of high visibility apparel
A basic description of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 high visibility apparel is provided below. A fluorescent material is one that absorbs ultraviolet
light in daylight and emits it in the visible light region. This property allows the material to radiate more visible light than is incident on it, thus it
appears and is brighter than a non-fluorescent material which at best can reflect all the visible light that falls on it. A retroreflective material is one
that reflects light back to the same direction as the source of the light. Combined-performance material has both fluorescent and retroreflective
properties.

Class 1 Basic harness or stripes/bands over the shoulder(s) and encircling the waist. Provides the lowest recognized
coverage and good visibility. Examples: harness and striped apparel.
Class 2 Full coverage of upper torso (front, back, sides, and over the shoulders). Provides moderate body coverage
and superior visibility. Examples: vest, jacket, hooded coat, bib overalls.
Class 3 Class 2 apparel, plus bands encircling both arms and both legs. These bands shall be composed of combined-
performance stripes/bands or a combination of retroreflective and background material. Provides the greatest
body coverage and visibility under poor light conditions and at great distance. Examples: jacket & pants,
coveralls, long coat or slicker.

For more detail, refer to CSA Standard Z96-15, High-Visibility Safety Apparel.

G8.24-1 Alternative standards for high visibility apparel

Issued June 6, 2006; Editorial Amendment February 3, 2010; Revised September 19, 2014; Revised June 29, 2016; Retired consequential to
September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
This guideline is being retired consequential to the September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment as CSA Standard Z96-15 High-Visibility Safety
Apparel is now listed in the revised OHS Regulation.
Guidelines - Part 8 - Buoyancy Equipment

G8.26(3) Buoyancy equipment and fall protection

Issued August 1, 1999; Editorial Revision June 30, 2021

Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.26(3) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
A personal flotation device need not be worn when a personal fall protection system, guardrail or safety net is being used in
accordance with the relevant requirements in Part 11 (Fall Protection) to prevent a fall into the water.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide guidance when a personal flotation device need not be worn as stated in section 8.26(3) of the
Regulation.
Temporarily unprotected
There may be circumstances where a worker generally protected from falling into the water by a fall protection system has to be temporarily
unprotected. For example, a worker may have to briefly disconnect a personal fall protection system to move to a different position. This needs to
be limited as much as possible by choosing a means of fall protection that minimizes the need to disconnect; for instance, using horizontal lifelines or
retractable lifelines, or by using a safe work procedure covering the interval when the worker is not connected. Refer to OHS Guideline G11.2.

G8.27-1 Compliance with standards

Issued August 1, 1999; Editorial Revision April 2005; Editorial Revision April 30, 2015
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.27 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Buoyancy equipment must be labelled and otherwise meet the requirements of
(a) CGSB Standard CAN/CGSB-65.7-M88, Lifejackets, Inherently Buoyant Type with a minimum buoyancy of 93 N (21 lbs),
(b) CGSB Standard CAN/CGSB-65.11-M88, Personal Flotation Devices with a minimum buoyancy of 69 N (15.5 lbs),
(c) CGSB Standard 65-GP-14M, Lifejackets, Inherently Buoyant, Standard Type with a minimum buoyancy of 125 N (28 lbs),
or
(d) British Safety Standard BS EN 396-1994, Lifejackets and Personal Buoyancy Aids - Lifejacket 150 N, automatically
inflatable units with a minimum buoyancy of 150 N (34 lbs).
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide information about the standards adopted in section 8.27 of the Regulation.
Standards
A summary of information from each of these standards describing how the life jackets perform and how they are to be identified follows below.
CGSB Standard CAN/CGSB-65.7-M88, Lifejackets, Inherently Buoyant Type
A life jacket meeting this standard provides a minimum buoyant force of 93 N (21 lb.), and is often of the "keyhole" style. The colour may be
bright yellow, orange, or red. The life jacket is designed to provide support for the head so the face of an unconscious person is held above the
water with the body inclined backwards from the vertical position. The jacket must have a permanent label identifying the following:
Standard it meets
Size of the jacket
Mass (weight) of person the jacket is designed for
Name of the manufacturer
Lot number
Date of manufacture
Transport Canada approval number
CGSB Standard CAN/CGSB-65.11-M88, Personal Flotation Devices
This is the most common and generally the most comfortable personal flotation device, offering a minimium 69 N (15.5 lb.) buoyancy (Type I). A
device meeting this standard is not required to turn an unconscious person from a facedown position in the water to a position where the wearer's
face is out of the water. The shell colour is bright yellow, orange, or red. These units can be either the vest or "key hole" style. The device must
have a permanent label or marking identifying the following:
Standard it meets
Date of manufacture
Acceptable chest size
Name of manufacturer
Transport Canada approval number
These flotation devices are acceptable for use only by a worker in situations where rescue help is readily available. Readily available in this context
means the worker wearing this flotation device is within eyesight or earshot of another worker who is in a position to immediately come to the
worker's aid, should the worker enter the water.
CGSB Standard 65-GP-14M, Lifejackets, Inherently Buoyant, Standard Type
A lifejacket meeting this standard provides a minimum 125 N (28 lb.) buoyant force. The device requires a permanent label or marking identifying
the standard met.
British Safety Standard BS EN 396-1994, Lifejackets and Personal Buoyancy Aids
A life jacket or personal buoyancy aid meeting this standard is designed to be inflatable by blowing into the bladder, pulling a cord to puncture a
gas cylinder which inflates the unit, or by automatic activation of the gas inflation system when the device is immersed in water. Acceptable units
inflate and turn the wearer face up within 10 seconds of going into the water. A wearer of this type of unit is provided with at least 150 N (34 lb.)
buoyancy and should float face up with the mouth considerably above the water surface.
The jacket must have a permanent label or marking confirming the unit meets the above standard. These jackets are normally worn uninflated and
may be in protective covers. The jacket fits around the back of the neck and ends drape down the left and right of the front of the body. These
units require strict regular maintenance to remain effective, and caution must be taken to prevent damaging the bladder.
Also, section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation permits the reliance on other standards which are acceptable to WorkSafeBC.
G8.27-2 Alternative acceptable standard for buoyancy equipment

Issued November 19, 2008; Revised September 21, 2012; Editorial Revision April 30, 2015; Editorial Revision August 4, 2015; Revised
April 30, 2020; Editorial Revision July 14, 2020
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.27 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Buoyancy equipment must be labelled and otherwise meet the requirements of
(a) CGSB Standard CAN/CGSB-65.7-M88, Lifejackets, Inherently Buoyant Type with a minimum buoyancy of 93 N (21 lbs),
(b) CGSB Standard CAN/CGSB-65.11-M88, Personal Flotation Devices with a minimum buoyancy of 69 N (15.5 lbs),
(c) CGSB Standard 65-GP-14M, Lifejackets, Inherently Buoyant, Standard Type with a minimum buoyancy of 125 N (28 lbs),
or
(d) British Safety Standard BS EN 396-1994, Lifejackets and Personal Buoyancy Aids - Lifejacket 150 N, automatically
inflatable units with a minimum buoyancy of 150 N (34 lbs).
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation states:
(2) When this Regulation requires a person to comply with
(a) a publication, code or standard of the Board or another agency, the person may, as an alternative, comply with another
publication, code or standard acceptable to the Board
Purpose of guideline
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation provides WorkSafeBC the authority to accept alternative standards to those listed in the Regulation. The
purpose of this guideline is to specify acceptable alternative standards under section 8.27.
Alternative acceptable standard to CAN/CGSB-65.7-M88
The CAN/CGSB-65.7-2007 standard is an updated version of the CAN/CGSB-65.7-M88 Lifejackets, Inherently Buoyant Type standard. It is
considered an acceptable alternative to the CAN/CGSB-65.7-M88 Lifejackets, Inherently Buoyant Type standard. However, manually inflatable
units are not acceptable.
Alternative acceptable standards to BS EN 396-1994
The ISO 12402-3:2006, Lifejackets, performance level 150 – Safety Requirements standard is considered an acceptable standard to
comply with section 8.27(d).
For devices sold in Canada, ANSI/UL 1180 Fully Inflatable Recreational Personal Flotation Devices, as updated from time to time and as
modified by the Canadian addendum, is also considered an acceptable alternative to BS EN 396-1994. These devices will be marked as meeting
ANSI/UL 1180 with the Canadian addendum. It should be noted that manually inflatable units are not acceptable.
For devices sold in the United States, devices meeting type I or type II performance requirements of ANSI/UL 1180 without the Canadian
addendum are also acceptable. These devices will be marked with a United States Coast Guard (USCG) approval number. The USCG approval
number will start with 160. These devices will be marked as type I or type II. Devices marked as type III are not acceptable. Only automatically
inflatable units are acceptable.
In some cases, inflatable buoyancy equipment may not meet ISO 12402-3:2006, ANSI/UL 1180, or BS EN 396-1994, but will meet another
standard. In these cases, an application can be made to WorkSafeBC to have an alternate standard accepted.

G8.28 Working alone or in isolation with a hazard of drowning

Issued August 1, 1999; Editorial Revision April 2005; Editorial Revision June 30, 2021
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.28 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
If a worker working alone is exposed to risk of drowning, the worker must wear a lifejacket meeting the requirements of section
8.27(a), (c), or (d).
Purpose of guideline
The purposed of this guideline is to explain that section 8.28 of the Regulation applies to a worker who is not within eyesight of or within earshot
of another worker in a position to immediately come to their aid, should the worker enter the water.
Working alone or in isolation
A personal flotation device of the type described under section 8.27(b) is not to be worn by a worker working alone or in isolation. This type of
device, which provides minimum buoyancy of 15.5 lb., is not designed to turn an unconscious person face up in the water. Therefore, if a person
working alone falls in the water and is rendered unconscious, the individual might float face down and drown. Further, if the water is rough, the
individual's mouth might not be raised sufficiently above the water to provide adequate protection against drowning if the individual is unconscious.
Guidelines - Part 8 - Respirators

G8.33-1 Respiratory protection - Selection

Issued August 1, 1999; Revised February 11, 2004; Editorial Revision April 2005; Editorial Revision to include February 1, 2011 regulatory
amendment; Revised February 14, 2020
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.33(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) The employer, in consultation with the worker and the occupational health and safety committee, if any, or the worker health and
safety representative, if any, must select an appropriate respirator in accordance with CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-93,
Selection, Use and Care of Respirators.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to aid in the selection of an appropriate respirator. There are two acceptable CSA standards (see Guideline
G8.33(1)): the standard referenced in the Regulation, CSA Standard ("CSA Standard") CAN/CSA-Z94.4-93, Selection, Use, and Care of
Respirators; and the current standard CAN/CSA Z94.4-18, Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators.
Selection
CSA Standard states "knowledge of respiratory hazards and respiratory protection is essential to ensure appropriate selection of respirators. The
respirator selection then becomes a step-by-step elimination of inappropriate respirators until only those which are appropriate remain."
To select an appropriate respirator, the employer should to ensure the selection process includes the following:
Identifies and determines the airborne concentrations of the contaminant(s) of interest
Determines the physical1, chemical2, and toxicological properties of the contaminant(s)
Determines the general use conditions for the respirator3
Assesses the potential for exposure via the skin and mucous membranes of the eye
Considers odour threshold information, as well as any warning properties4 of the contaminant(s)
Determines the exposure limit(s) for the contaminant(s) of interest5
Identifies the immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) concentration, as well as the lower explosive limit6
Evaluates the potential for oxygen deficiency
Considers any service life information available for the chemical cartridge or canister
Determines the hazard ratio (HR)7
Determines the protection factor (PF) for the class of respirator from Table 8-1 of the Regulation. For a respirator to be appropriate, the
PF must be greater than the HR. Refer to OHS Guideline G8.34-1 for additional information regarding protection factors.
1 The employer must consider the state in which the substance is likely to be encountered. That is, whether it is a gas or a vapour, a particulate, or
a combination thereof.
2 For example, chemical reactivity and vapour pressure.

3 That is, the employer must evaluate the following: job task, duration, frequency, and physical demands of the task, the health status of the
worker, as well as comfort of the respirator.
4 This is particularly relevant for gases and vapours. A substance is considered to have adequate warning properties when an individual can detect
the substance by persistent odour, taste, and/or irritation effects, such as irritation of the eyes or respiratory tract, in concentrations at or below the
exposure limit. Warning properties can provide some indication to a worker wearing a respirator that it is not working effectively, such as a
breakthrough has occurred, or the facepiece doesn't fit properly.
5 Exposure limits are specified in the Table of Exposure Limits for Chemical and Biological Substances (see OHS Guideline G5.48-2). All relevant
exposure limits must be considered, such as the 8-hour TWA limit, short-term exposure limit, and/or ceiling limit.
6 Concentrations in excess of the lower explosive limit are considered to be IDLH concentrations.

7 The hazard ratio is the airborne concentration of a substance divided by its exposure limit.

8.33-2 Scott II and IIA SCBA regulator donning switch hazard

Issued June 14, 2002; Editorial Revision to include February 1, 2011 regulatory amendment; Retired February 14, 2020
This guideline has been retired as the respirators it referred to have not been manufactured since 1996.
G8.33(1) Selection of respiratory protection - Alternate standard

Issued February 8, 2007; Editorial Revision to include February 1, 2011 regulatory amendment; Editorial Revision October 28, 2019; Revised
February 14, 2020
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.33(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) The employer, in consultation with the worker and the occupational health and safety committee, if any, or the worker health and
safety representative, if any, must select an appropriate respirator in accordance with CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-93,
Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators.
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation states:
(2) When this Regulation requires a person to comply with
(a) a publication, code or standard of the Board or another agency, the person may, as an alternative, comply with another
publication, code or standard acceptable to the Board...
Purpose of guideline
Section 8.33(1) of the Regulation requires that an appropriate respirator be selected in accordance with CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-93,
Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators. Section 4.4(2)(a) permits WorkSafeBC to accept another standard to be used for the selection of
respiratory protection.
The purpose of this guideline is to provide an acceptable standard to the requirement in section 8.33(1) of the Regulation.
Acceptance of CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-18, Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators
A person that is required to comply with the CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-93 specified in section 8.33(1), may comply with CSA Standard
CAN/CSA-Z94.4-18, Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators as an alternative standard.

G8.33(2)-1 Approved respirators

Issued August 1999; Revised May 9, 2006; Editorial Revision February 1, 2008; Editorial Revision to include February 1, 2011 regulatory
amendment; Revised October 23, 2012; Revised April 8, 2020; Editorial Revision May 28, 2020; Revised September 18, 2020; Revised
February 11, 2021; Revised May 12, 2022
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.33(2) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(2) Only a respirator which meets the requirements of a standard acceptable to the Board may be used for protection against
airborne contaminants in the workplace.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to to identify a standard acceptable to WorkSafeBC for respirators and to provide information on the U.S.
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) certification of respirators, particularly for filtering facepiece respirators used to
protect against airborne particulates, as well as elastometric facepiece respirators. It also includes a list of standards of other jurisdictions for
certain respirators that are also considered acceptable to WorkSafeBC under section 8.33(2) of the Regulation.
Respirators acceptable to WorkSafeBC
a) NIOSH certification
WorkSafeBC accepts NIOSH certification requirements for respirators as a standard acceptable to WorkSafeBC under section 8.33(2) of the
Regulation.
The requirements for NIOSH certified respirators are found in Part 84 of Title 42 of the U.S. Code of Federal Regulations on respiratory
protective devices (Part 84). Certifications in Part 84 cover various types of respirators including non-powered air-filtering particulate
respirators, chemical cartridge respirators, self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), airline respirators, and powered air-purifying respirators
(PAPRs).
All respirators approved under Part 84 carry a certification label bearing the emblems of NIOSH and the U.S. Department of Health and Human
Services (DHHS).
Particulate respirators with approvals in jurisdictions other than NIOSH and CSA
For non-powered air-purifying particulate respirators, the sequence of NIOSH approval numbers is "TC-84A-xxx." These respirators include
particulate filtering facepiece respirators, as well as respirators with elastomeric facepieces.
Filtering facepiece respirators, in which the entire facepiece acts as the filter, cover only half the face, and are sometimes termed "disposable" or
"single use" respirators. Respirators with elastomeric facepieces made of silicone, thermoplastic, or rubber material are available in half or full
facepiece models. In these designs, one or more filters or cartridges are attached to the facepiece.
Under Part 84, particulate respirators are classified on the basis of their resistance to oil. Oil degrades and reduces the filtering efficiency of the
filter material. NIOSH certifies the following three classes of filters: N-series (for Not resistant to oil), R-series (for Resistant to oil), and P-series
(for oil Proof).
Each of these three classes of filters is also certified according to its level of filter efficiency (rated as 95%, 99%, or 99.97% efficient at removing
particles 0.3 micrometres in diameter). For example, a filter marked N95 means that the filter is not resistant to oil and is at least 95% efficient at
removing particles 0.3 micrometres in diameter. In total, nine classes of filters are certified, as shown in the table below.
Classes of filters certified by NIOSH under Part 84

Filter series Filter type Minimum efficiency Comments

"N" Series N100 99.97% May be used for any solid or non-oil-containing particulate.
N99 99%
N95 95%
"R" Series R100 99.97% May be used for any particulate contaminant. May only be used for 1 shift
R99 99% if used for an oil-containing particulate.
R95 95%
"P" Series P100 99.97% May be used for any particulate contaminant.
P99 99%
P95 95%

Note: Oil aerosols include lubricants, cutting fluids, and glycerin.

All nine classes of filters, as discussed in the above table, are considered appropriate for protection against tuberculosis and other airborne
biological agents. (Refer to OHS Guidelines G6.34-1 to G6.40 for further information on protection against biological agents designated as a
hazardous substance in section 5.1.1 of the Regulation.)
b) Canadian Standards Association (CSA) certification
WorkSafeBC accepts CSA certification requirements for respirators as a standard acceptable to WorkSafeBC under section 8.33(2) of the
Regulation.
Respirators that have received certification approval from CSA are listed in the CSA Group Product Listing webpage: csagroup.org/testing-
certification/product-listing/.
Filtering respirators
The performance requirements for filtering respirators are outlined in the CSA Z94.4.1:21 Standard – Performance of filtering respirators.
Respirators meeting the standard have required markings on the packaging and respirator components as outlined in the standard. For example, as
a minimum, filtering facepiece respirators must be marked with the following:
Manufacturer name, logo or identifying mark
Means of traceability of the product , e.g., lot number
Reference to CSA Z94.4.1
Part number or type identifying mark
Filter classification (refer to table of filter classes below)
Indication if for single-use only
CSA mark
If tested, airflow resistance suffix for CA-N95/CA-N95F particle filtering respirators, with "-100Pa," "-175Pa," or "-343Pa"
If tested, fluid/flammability classification for N-type filters meeting the requirements for resistance to fluid penetration and flammability is
indicated by "F" (e.g., CA-N95F)
Classes of filters approved under CSA certification

Filter series Filter type Minimum efficiency Comments

CA-N series CA-N95 95% Intended for removal of any particles excluding oil-based liquid particles
CA-N99 99%
CA-N100 99.97%
CA-R series CA-R95 95% Intended for removal of any particles including oil-based liquid particles for
CA-R99 99% one work shift (8 hours)
CA-R100 99.97%
CA-P series CA-P95 95% Intended for removal of any particles including oil-based liquid particles for
CA-P99 99% a duration not restricted by loss of filter efficiency
CA-P100 99.97%

c) Particulate respirators with approvals in jurisdictions other than NIOSH and CSA
NIOSH- and CSA-approved respirators are deemed acceptable to WorkSafeBC, however, there are situations where WorkSafeBC accepts
respirators from other jurisdictions.
The following filtering facepiece types from other countries have been deemed acceptable as equivalent to NIOSH N95 under section 8.33(2):

Country Acceptable Products Performance Standard

Australia P2 AS/NZS 1716:2012
P3
PFF2 ABNT/NBR
Brazil
PFF3 13698:2011
KN 95, KP 95 GB 2626-2006
China
KN 100, KP 100 GB 19083-2010
FFP2 EN 149-2001
Europe
FFP3
DS/DL2 JMHLW-2000
Japan
DS/DL3
1st KMOEL-2017-64
Korea
Special
N95, P95, R95 NOM-116-2009
Mexico N99, P99, R99
N100, P100, R100

The alternative particulate filtering facepiece respirators listed above are considered acceptable by WorkSafeBC for protection against airborne
particulates, like biological agents, where a risk assessment deems that an N95 is appropriate. Refer to Table 8-1 in the Regulation and OHS
Guideline G8.34-1 for information on protection factors.
Known issues with international supplies
Employers should be aware of the risks of counterfeit or poor quality products that may be associated with sourcing NIOSH, CSA, or other
equivalent approved respirators from international suppliers. Risks may increase during periods of global shortage.
Counterfeits and misrepresentation
NIOSH publishes a list of known counterfeit products claiming to be NIOSH-approved respirators. It also provides useful advice on what to look
for in a potential counterfeit respirator, which may include the following:
No markings at all on the filtering facepiece respirator (i.e., no NIOSH markings)
No TC (approval) number on filtering facepiece respirator or headband
"NIOSH" spelled incorrectly
Presence of decorative fabric or add-ons
Claims of approval for children
Filtering facepiece respirator has ear loops or one headband instead of two headbands
Be cautious about buying products sold through third-party marketplaces or from merchants that use free email account services (e.g., Hotmail,
Gmail) to conduct business. When purchasing from a website, be sure to check the source and ownership of the site to ensure it's legitimate.
It's also important to be wary of counterfeits of alternatives to CSA and NIOSH-approved respirators, such as the KN95 (manufactured in China)
and the FFP2 and FFP3 (manufactured in Europe).
Filter efficiency issues
There have been reports that some alternative respirators manufactured in other jurisdictions are not achieving the required minimum filter efficiency
of at least 95 percent as claimed.
For instance, NIOSH evaluated the filter efficiencies of certain brands of KN95 respirators and results indicated that many did not meet the
filtration requirements (some had a filter efficiency as low as 20-50 percent). Refer to Recalls and safety alerts from Health Canada for a list of
respirators that have been recalled for not meeting the minimum 95 percent filtration efficiency.
Fit test issues
There have been issues with fitting workers to some alternative N95 respirators even when the respirators meet the filtration efficiency criteria of
95 percent.
NIOSH evaluations of some N95 alternatives have indicated that products that rely on ear loops or are folded in the middle vertically (like some
KN95 respirators) may pose some difficulties in achieving a proper fit. Workers that require a N95 respirator equivalent will need to pass a fit test
on the alternative respirator.
Quality issues
Counterfeit respirators are often poorly constructed and may show signs of physical damage to the straps or filter material in the original packaging,
such as delamination of the filter material. Ensure the respirator has been well made (e.g., strap attachments are secure, material is good quality)
and is in good condition before using it. Any respirator that is damaged must not be used and should be discarded.
d) Elastomeric air-purifying respirators with approvals in jurisdictions other than NIOSH
The following performance standards for half-face or full-face elastomeric air-purifying respirators with corresponding particulate filters and/or
chemical cartridges from other countries have been deemed acceptable as equivalents to NIOSH-approved respirators for the purposes of section
8.33(2):

Country Acceptable Products Performance Standard

Australia Facepiece with: AS/NZS 1716:2012
P3 particulate filters
Class 3 gas and vapour filters
Facepiece with: EN 140:1998
Europe P3 particulate filters EN 143:2000
Class 3 gas and vapour filters EN 141:2000
Facepiece with: NOM-116-STPS-2009
Mexico
N100, R100, or P100 filters
BS EN 140:1999
Facepiece with:
BS EN 136:1998
United Kingdom P3 particulate filters
BS EN 143: 2000
Class 3 gas and vapour filters
BS EN 14387:2004

More recent editions of the performance standards in the tables above would also be acceptable to WorkSafeBC.
Employers should be aware that the colour coding for filters and chemical cartridges from Australia, Europe, and the United Kingdom differ from
the NIOSH-approved products (e.g., NIOSH P100 filters are magenta while the European products are white or have a white stripe).
e) Use of "expired" NIOSH-approved particulate respirators
As part of pandemic and emergency planning, many organizations have stockpiled particulate respirators, such as N95 filtering facepiece
respirators. Many of the manufacturers of these respirators have provided a manufacturer-designated shelf life. In times when supply issues are
critical like a pandemic, employers may have to use respirators beyond the "expiry date." A NIOSH study has indicated that these respirators may
meet the performance standards if the manufacturers' storage recommendations are followed.
WorkSafeBC accepts the use of these "expired" NIOSH-approved particulate respirators with the following provisions:
The expired respirators can only be used in an emergency and should only be used as a last resort
The employer uses them in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, including instructions relating to the use of expired respirators
The respirators have been stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
The workers are informed of their use
The employer must ensure the following precautionary measures are followed:
Workers must visually inspect the respirator to determine if its integrity has been compromised;
Before use, the worker checks that components such as straps, nose clip, and foam material did not degrade, which can affect the
quality of the fit and seal
Workers have been fit tested to the respirator, and can perform user seal checks and know how to don and doff the respirator
properly

G8.33(2)-2 Interchange of equipment components

Retired November 23, 2010
This guideline has been retired since the reference to air cylinders conflicts with Prevention Manual Policy Item R8.33-1 and the reference to air
lines is a duplication of the information in Policy Item R8.33-2.

G8.34-1 Protection factors

Issued as G8.34 August 1999; revised March 22, 2004, and further revised April 20, 2004; Editorial Revision to include February 1, 2010
regulatory amendment; Editorial Revision February 14, 2020
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.34 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) In subsection (2):
"established 8-hour TWA limit" means the 8-hour TWA limit set by the Board for an air contaminant, or if the Board has not set an
8-hour TWA limit for an air contaminant, the TWA limit set by ACGIH for the air contaminant;
"established ceiling limit" means a ceiling limit set by the Board for an air contaminant, or if the Board has not set a ceiling limit for
an air contaminant, the ceiling limit set by ACGIH for the air contaminant;
"established short-term exposure limit" means the short-term exposure limit set by the Board for an air contaminant, or if the
Board has not set a short-term exposure limit for an air contaminant, the short-term exposure limit set by ACGIH for the air
contaminant.
(2) In subsection (3),
"maximum use concentration" means the concentration of an air contaminant calculated in one of the following ways:
(a) if an established 8-hour TWA limit applies to the air contaminant to which a worker is or might be exposed, by multiplying
(i) the established 8-hour TWA limit for the air contaminant, and
(ii) the protection factor set out in Table 8-1 that applies to the respirator type that the worker is using;
(b) if there is no established 8-hour TWA limit that applies to the air contaminant to which a worker is or might be exposed, by
multiplying
(i) the established short-term exposure limit for that air contaminant, and
(ii) the protection factor set out in Table 8-1 that applies to the respirator type that the worker is using;
(c) if there is no established 8-hour TWA limit or short-term exposure limit that applies to the air contaminant to which a worker is or
might be exposed, by multiplying
(i) the established ceiling limit for that air contaminant, and
(ii) the protection factor set out in Table 8-1 that applies to the respirator type that the worker is using.
(3) The employer must ensure that a worker does not use a respirator for protection against a concentration of an air contaminant in
the workplace that is greater than the maximum use concentration.
(4) The protection factor of 1 000 set out in Table 8-1: Respirator protection factors for a hood or helmet facepiece, powered
(PAPR), and equipped with a HEPA filter or a sorbent cartridge or canister or both a HEPA filter and a sorbent cartridge or canister
applies only if an employer who uses or wishes to use that respirator type has evidence from the manufacturer that demonstrates that
(a) the manufacturer has tested that type of respirator, and
(b) those tests demonstrate that a respirator of that type has a protection factor of at least 1 000.
(5) The protection factor of 25 set out in Table 8-1: Respirator protection factors for a hood or helmet facepiece, powered (PAPR),
and equipped with a HEPA filter or a sorbent cartridge or canister or both a HEPA filter and a sorbent cartridge or canister applies if
the conditions set out in subsection (4) are not met.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline explains how the maximum use concentration is calculated and what the assigned protection factor of a respirator means.
Maximum use concentration
The maximum use concentration (MUC) is determined by multiplying the exposure limit for the air contaminant by the appropriate respirator
protection factor or assigned protection factor (APF). Exposure limits are found in the Table of Exposure Limits for Chemical and Biological
Substances (see OHS Guideline G5.48-2). Respirator protection factors, also known as assigned protection factors (APFs), are found in Table 8-
1 of the Regulation or may be determined by WorkSafeBC.
Always use the 8-hour time-weighted average (TWA) limit for an air contaminant, where there is one, as the exposure limit in the calculation, even
if the substance has a short-term exposure limit or a ceiling limit as well. In the case where a substance has only a ceiling limit, then the ceiling limit
is used.
The APF of a respirator reflects the level of protection that a properly functioning respirator would be expected to provide to a population of
properly fitted and trained users. For example, an APF of 10 (half facepiece air-purifying respirator) means that a user could expect to inhale no
more than one-tenth of the airborne contaminant present; an APF of 50 (full facepiece air-purifying respirator) means that a user could expect to
inhale no more than one-fiftieth of the airborne contaminant.
The MUC is the maximum airborne concentration to which a particular respirator can be used by a worker. For example, if a worker wearing a
respirator with an APF of 10 is exposed to an atmosphere containing a substance with an 8-hour TWA limit of, for example, 100 parts per million
(ppm), the maximum airborne concentration the worker can be exposed to is 1000 ppm(10 X 100 ppm = 1000 ppm). If the worker is exposed to
levels exceeding 1000 ppm, a respirator with a higher APF is required.
It is important to note that other factors, such as the immediate danger to life or health (IDLH) concentration, will also need to be
considered since the IDLH concentration may place limitations on the maximum use concentration. Refer to OHS Guideline G8.34-3
for additional information on IDLH.
Note: For extended workshifts where there is exposure to a substance with an 8-hour TWA, do not use modified TWA limits as determined
under section 5.50 for extended work shifts. To accommodate for 10-hour, 12-hour, or other work shifts, one should consider modifying the
change-out schedule for the respirator cartridge being used. Contact the respirator manufacturers for direction on recommended change-out
schedules. Refer also to clause 10.2 of CSA Standard Z94.4-18, Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators for additional advice on change-out
procedures, schedules, and service times.
If there are exposures to more than one chemical at one time (such as to a complex solvent mixture), the possibility of additive or synergistic effects
should be assessed. Normally, additive and synergistic effects should be considered when profiling a worker's exposure to airborne contaminants -
- a requirement of Regulation section 5.51 (see OHS Guideline G5.51). It is prudent to consider additive/synergistic effects for the respirator
selection process as well. However, at this time, NIOSH, OSHA, WorkSafeBC, other agencies, as well as respirator manufacturers, have not
finalized the method for incorporating additive and synergistic effects into the selection process. Until such time the methodology has been finalized,
WorkSafeBC Prevention officers and persons responsible for a company's respirator program are advised to use the instructions in OHS
Guideline G8.33-1 or CSA Standard Z94.4-18, Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators for selecting the appropriate device when confronted
with multi-contaminant exposures. A detailed chart is available in CSA Standard Z94.4-18, Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators to facilitate
the selection process. Rather than using the maximum use concentration, however, CSA uses the highest hazard ratio (HHR), which is the ratio of
airborne concentration to the exposure limit, for selecting the appropriate respirator.
Technical background information
The concept of the assigned protection factor is based on work originally conducted by the U.S. Bureau of Mines and first published in 1965 as
decontamination factors. A decontamination factor was defined at the time as "the ratio of the concentration of dust, mist, fume or mist within the
facepiece [relative to outside the respirator] while the respirator is being worn." The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) along with the
American Industrial Hygiene Association's Respirator Committee further developed the concept, resulting in the present-day assigned protection
factor (APF). The APF of a respirator reflects the level of protection that a properly functioning respirator would be expected to provide to a
population of properly fitted and trained users. For example, an APF of 10 for a respirator means that a user could expect to inhale no more than
one-tenth of the airborne contaminant present.
Fundamentally, the protection factor of a respirator is an expression of performance based on the ratio of two measured variables, CI and CO as
described in NIOSH's 1987 document NIOSH Respirator Decision Logic (DHHS Publication No. 87-108). CI is the measured concentration of
a contaminant inside the respirator facepiece cavity, and CO is the measured concentration of a contaminant outside the respirator facepiece. The
relationship between these two variables can be expressed not only as the protection factor (CO/ CI) but also penetration (CI/ CO) or efficiency
[(CO/CI)/ CO]. Furthermore, the protection factor (PF) can be related to the penetration (P) and efficiency (E) as follows:

PF = CO/CI= 1/p = 1/(1- E)

Since CI < CO, the PF will always be greater than unity.

Protection factor assessments are made exclusively on person/respirator systems while penetration and efficiency assessments are made only on
component parts of the respirator system. It is important to recognize that on a person/respirator system, the measured variable CI becomes a
complicated function of many individual sources of penetration (for example, penetration of any of the following components -- air-purifying
element, exhalation valve, and face seal). Also those environmental conditions that would affect penetration need to be considered (for example,
high humidity, sweat, activity level of the user, and comfort level provided by the device).

G8.34-2 Assigned protection factors for non-powered filtering facepiece style air-purifying respirators

Issued March 22, 2004; Editorial Revision February 8, 2007; Retired February 14, 2020
This guideline is retired due to duplication of information. For additional information on approved respirators see OHS Guideline G8.33(2)-1.

G8.34-3 Maximum use concentration and IDLH

Issued originally as part of G8.34 August 1999; revised March 22, 2004; Editorial Revision April 4, 2007; Editorial Revision May 12, 2022
Regulatory excerpt
The last row of Table 8-1 in Part 8 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Other factors such as warning properties, IDLH levels, and cartridge/canister limitations must also be taken into account when
determining the maximum use concentration. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions and standards acceptable to the Board for
further information.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to explain how the immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) concentration must be taken into account when
using the maximum use concentration to select a respirator.
Effect of IDLH on respirator selection
Most of the selection criteria in the CSA Standard CAN/CSA Z94.4-93 are summarized in OHS Guideline G8.33-1. As stated in Regulation
section 8.35, one of the most critical factors to be considered when selecting a respirator is whether the concentration anticipated in the workplace
is at or near immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) concentrations. For some substances, the IDLH concentration is very low, such as the
following:

Chemical Name IDLH concentration (ppm)

Toluene 500
Xylene 900
Syrene 700

Depending on the type of respirator selected, the IDLH concentration for the substance of concern may be lower than the maximum use
concentration calculated using the substance's exposure limit and the respirator's assigned protection factor. The employer must ensure that air
purifying respirators are not used in conditions that exceed either the maximum use concentration of the respirator or the IDLH concentration for
the substance. For example, an air purifying respirator must not be used in IDLH concentrations even if the conditions are below the calculated
maximum use concentration for the respirator. If workers may be exposed to conditions approaching or exceeding IDLH concentrations, then air-
supplying or self-contained positive pressure respirators must be used, rather than air purifying respirators, in accordance with section 8.35 of the
Regulation.
The following example is provided using styrene as the air contaminant:
1. A full facepiece air-purifying respirator, with an organic vapour chemical cartridge, is being considered to protect against exposure to
styrene.
2. In the Table of Exposure Limits for Chemical and Biological Substances), the 8-hour TWA limit for styrene is 20 ppm. In Table 8-1, the
assigned protection factor for a full facepiece non-powered air-purifying respirator is 50.
3. The maximum use concentration in which it appears this respirator can be used to protect against exposure to styrene calculates out to
50 X 20 ppm = 1000 ppm.
4. Although it appears from the calculation in item 3 above that the respirator could be used to protect against styrene exposure to a
concentration of 1000 ppm, section 8.35 of the Regulation must also be met. The IDLH concentration for styrene is 700 ppm. Section
8.35 does not permit an air-purifying respirator to be used in an IDLH atmosphere. Only an air-supplying or self-contained positive
pressure respirator may be used for situations where the concentration is above or may go above the IDLH value. Thus a full-facepiece, air-
purifying respirator with an organic vapour cartridge may only be used if the maximum expected concentration of styrene will be below
700 ppm.
For information on current IDLH concentrations, refer to OHS Guideline G8.35(1) or go to the NIOSH web site: cdc.gov/niosh/idlh/intridl4.html.

G8.34-4 Protection factors - standard acceptable to WorkSafeBC

Issued May 17, 2006; Editorial Revision to include February 1, 2011 regulatory amendment; Editorial Revision February 14, 2020
Regulatory excerpt
The last row of Table 8-1 in Part 8 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Other factors such as warning properties, IDLH levels, and cartridge/canister limitations must also be taken into account when
determining the maximum use concentration. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions and standards acceptable to the Board for
further information.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to identify a standard acceptable to WorkSafeBC under the last row in Table 8-1.
Acceptable standard
CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-18, Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators has been determined to be acceptable to WorkSafeBC.

G8.34-5 Assigned protection factor for helmet/hood style powered air purifying respirators

Retired on February 1, 2010

This guideline is not required after amendment of this section on February 1, 2011 to include the protection factor in OHS Regulation (refer to
OHS Regulation 8.34).

G8.35 IDLH or oxygen deficient atmosphere

Issued August 1, 1999; Editorial Revision February 14, 2020

Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.35 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) If a worker is required to enter or work in an IDLH or oxygen deficient atmosphere the worker must
(a) wear a full facepiece positive pressure respirator which is either an SCBA, or an airline respirator with an auxiliary self- contained
air cylinder of sufficient capacity to permit the worker to escape unassisted from the contaminated area if the air supply fails, and
(b) be attended by at least one other worker stationed at or near the entrance to the contaminated area who is similarly equipped and
capable of effecting rescue.
(2) Subsection (1)(a) applies if there is a significant risk of accidental release into a worker's breathing zone of quantities of an air
contaminant sufficient to produce an IDLH atmosphere.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide information and current references for IDLHs (immediate dangerous to life or health).
Reference documentation for IDLH concentrations
IDLH concentrations are based on research and information gathered by National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH). IDLHs
were originally determined for 387 substances in the mid-1970's as part of the Standards Completion Program, a joint project by NIOSH and
OSHA for use in assigning respiratory protective equipment. NIOSH re-evaluated the scientific adequacy of the criteria in the early 1990's and
published their findings in Documentation for immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) concentrations.
For more information on current IDLH concentrations, visit the current edition of the NIOSH pocket guide to chemical hazards and the NIOSH
table of IDHL values.

G8.38(2) Respiratory protection and use of contact lenses

Issued August 1, 1999; Editorial Revision June 30, 2021

Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.38(2) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
The employer may permit the use of contact lenses by a worker who is required to wear a full facepiece respirator if their use is not
likely to adversely affect the health or safety of the worker.
Purpose of guidelines
The purpose of this guideline is to provide guidance regarding the use of contact lenses as it relates to section 8.38(2) of the Regulation.
Use of contact lenses
Contact lenses may be worn with a full-face air-supplying respirator if all of the following criteria are met:
The employer is notified that contact lenses will be worn
The user puts the respirator on in an atmosphere which does not cause the eyes to be irritated or which does not cause irritating gases or
vapours to be absorbed by the contact lens
The wearer does not wear contact lenses if the eyes are irritated or inflamed. If use of the respirator is necessary for planned work or in the
event of an emergency situation, appropriate alternative corrective eyewear should be used with the respirator.
Note: If fit testing for the full facepiece respirator was done with the worker wearing contact lenses, another form of prescriptive eyewear should
only be used if a fit test has confirmed an effective seal with the face using the respirator with the alternative eyewear. Section 8.38(1) of the
Regulation requires the employer to provide specialty corrective eyewear if necessary to ensure the work can be performed safely.
G8.40 Respiratory protection - Fit test

Issued August 1, 1999; Editorial Revision April 4, 2007; Editorial Revision February 14, 2020
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.40 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states, in part:
(1) A respirator which requires an effective seal with the face for proper functioning must not be issued to a worker unless a fit test
demonstrates that the facepiece forms an effective seal with the wearer's face.
(2) Fit tests must be performed in accordance with procedures in CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-02, Selection, Use, and Care
of Respirators.
Section 8.41 of the Regulation states, in part:
(1) Before each use of a respirator which requires an effective seal with the face for proper functioning, a worker must perform a
positive or negative pressure user seal check in accordance with CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-02, Selection, Use, and Care of
Respirators.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to describe acceptable methods for performing qualitative and quantitative fit tests.
Note that the CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-18 is considered an acceptable standard for the purpose of fit testing.
General requirements
Section 8.40(1) of the Regulation specifies that a worker must not be issued a respirator which requires an effective seal with the face for proper
functioning unless a fit test demonstrates the facepiece forms an effective seal with the wearer's face.
A "fit test" is defined in CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-18, Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators ("Standard") as "the use of a qualitative
or a quantitative method to evaluate the fit of a specific make, model, and size of respirator on an individual." The Standard prescribes the
following two general fit test methods - WorkSafeBC will accept either method:
Qualitative fit testing (QLFT)
Quantitative fit testing (QNFT)
The following elements of the Standard apply regardless of whether the fit test performed is qualitative or quantitative:
A respirator must be fit tested while being worn by the user to demonstrate that the facepiece forms an effective seal.
The person undergoing the fit test must be clean shaven where the facepiece seals to the skin.
The person performing the fit test should address a number of topics with the user prior to performing the test. These topics include
explanations of the test procedure, description of the test agent, and proper donning of the respirator. The topics are identified in the
Appendices of the Standard.
Before a fit test is carried out, the respirator wearer must perform a positive or negative pressure user seal check. The requirement for a
user seal check is provided in Regulation section 8.41.
For a respirator that requires a tight face-to-facepiece seal (this includes SCBA equipment), the Standard requires that fit testing be
conducted in the negative pressure mode. A fit test can be conducted by temporarily converting the face piece from a positive pressure
device to a negative pressure device through attachment of particulate or chemical cartridges or canisters to the end of the facepiece
breathing hose or directly to the facepiece itself. Alternatively, the fit test can be conducted by using a negative pressure air-purifying
respirator with identical facepiece sealing surface.
When other personal protective equipment, such as eye, face, head, and hearing protectors, are required to be worn, they must be worn
during the respirator fit tests to ensure that they are compatible with the respirators and do not break the facial seal.
For additional information, refer to the Standard and to the WorkSafeBC publication "Breathe Safer."
Qualitative fit testing (QLFT)
A qualitative fit test relies on a person's response to a test agent due to taste, smell, or irritation. Acceptable qualitative fit test methods are listed
below.
Acceptable QLFT Methods

Test agent Response based

on
1. Isoamyl acetate (banana oil) Smell
2. Saccharin solution aerosol Taste
3. Irritant smoke Irritation
4. Bitter aerosol Taste
Appendix B of the Standard includes procedures and explanatory information for the isoamyl acetate, saccharin solution, irritant smoke, and bitter
aerosol methods. Test equipment and supplies are available from safety equipment suppliers.
For the isoamyl acetate, saccharin solution, and bitter aerosol tests, the following applies:
Prior to proceeding with the fit test, the worker receiving the test is subjected to a threshold-screening test without a respirator to ensure
sensitivity to the selected test agent. If the worker does not respond to the selected test agent, an alternate agent or method is chosen.
Conduct a negative or positive pressure user seal check prior to proceeding with the fit test.
A fit test chamber, hood or enclosure is used to ensure an adequate concentration of test agent is generated and maintained for the duration
of the test. The chamber can be a plastic hood, available commercially, or can be created using the method described in Appendix B of the
Standard.
Appendix B of the Standard.
For the irritant smoke test, the following applies:
Only smoke tubes approved for fit testing are used.
Check with the manufacturer of the smoke tube to determine if there is a gaseous component to the irritant smoke. If so, a combination of
an organic vapour/acid gas cartridge with a N100, P100 or R100 prefilter or HEPA prefilter is used; otherwise a N100, P100, R100 or
HEPA-rated filter can be used.
The worker receiving the test is subjected to a weak concentration of the irritant smoke to ensure sensitivity to this test agent.
Conduct a negative or positive pressure user seal check prior to proceeding with the pressure user seal test.
A fit test chamber, hood or enclosure is not used for fit testing due to the generation of hydrogen chloride during the test.
The test is conducted in a location with adequate ventilation to prevent general contamination of the testing area by the irritant smoke.
See Appendix B of the Standard for specific details.
Quantitative fit testing (QNFT)
The following quantitative methods are acceptable:
Measure ambient aerosol levels and compare them with levels inside the respirator facepiece.
Generate a known concentration of a test aerosol (such as corn oil, polyethylene glycol 400, di-2-ethyl hexyl sebacate, or sodium choride)
inside a test chamber and compare the concentration of the generated aerosol with levels inside the respirator facepiece.
Measure the volumetric leak rate of a facepiece using controlled negative pressure.
The first two QNFT methods measure the concentration of a test agent inside the respirator facepiece. The tests are conducted using electronic
equipment (such as a condensation nuclei counter) capable of counting airborne particles. The third method relies on measurement of the exhaust
air stream that is required to hold the sealed respirator to the face.
Unlike qualitative fit tests, quantitative tests do not depend on a person's response to a test agent.
These methods are described more fully in Appendix C of the Standard.

G8.40(2.1)(c) Single-use respirators and fit test equivalency

Issued September 30, 2009; Editorial Revision February 14, 2020; Revised May 28, 2020
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.40(2.1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(2.1) A fit test must be carried out
(a) before initial use of a respirator,
(b) at least once a year,
(c) whenever there is a change in respirator facepiece, including the brand, model, and size, and
(d) whenever changes to the user's physical condition could affect the respirator fit.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline provides information on equivalency for single-use respirators (e.g., N95 type) when manufacturers produce a respirator type with
several model numbers. It also provides suggestions for achieving efficiencies in the deployment of N95 filtering facepiece respirators and fit testing
of the respirators.
Model number differences and changes
The Regulation specifies that a fit test must be carried out whenever there is a change in a facepiece model. A respirator manufacturer, however,
may change the model number of a respirator without making any material changes to the facepiece. This may be done for marketing or other
business purposes. In addition, a manufacturer may sell different yet equivalent respirators with different model numbers based on the industries to
which they are marketing.
An employer may be able to use respirators marketed for different applications if the respirators are essentially equivalent. For example, an N95
respirator sold for an industrial application can be used by health care workers under specified conditions. Health care employers do not have to
restrict their respirator types to those marketed specifically to the health care industry. An advantage of using equivalent respirator types is that
once a worker has been fit tested on one model, the fit test will apply to the equivalent model without further testing.
Accepted equivalent manufacturers' model numbers
For WorkSafeBC to consider the respirator models to be equivalent for the purpose of fit testing, the respirators will need to have been produced
by the same manufacturer. Also, there will need to be a statement from the manufacturer that is available to employers stating that the respirators
are identical for fit purposes, and that the manufacturer recognizes that a fit test for one of the respirators is suitable evidence of adequate fit for the
other respirator.
It is the employer's responsibility to consult with the manufacturer of the respirator to obtain this information and to note this in its respirator
program.
Maximizing use and availability of respirators
There are means of maximizing efficiencies in the use and availability of single-use respirators including the following:
Workers keeping the respirators that were used to fit test them, rather than discarding them immediately after the fit test (provided the
respirators were not damaged during the test).
Developing and maintaining up-to-date respirator programs.
Fit testing of large groups of workers at a time.
Selecting the most practical respirator for the intended purpose (e.g., moving to reusable elastomeric types as appropriate rather than using
single-use N95s, where workers are repeatedly entering hazardous areas during a shift).
In order to avoid a shortage of respirators, employers should consider purchasing respirators from a number of different manufacturers.
Different respirators could be used in various departments or for different cohorts of workers. If one manufacturer is unable to supply a
particular make or model of respirator the employer may be able to use an alternate (workers will still have to be fit tested for the new
respirator).
Where an N95 filtering facepiece respirator is required for worker protection, any other filtering facepiece respirator that provides equal or
greater protection (e.g., R95, P100) could be considered as a substitute. The requirement for fit testing would still apply to these respirators.

G8.41 User seal check - Alternate standard

Issued February 14, 2020

Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.41 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states in part:
(1) Before each use of a respirator which requires an effective seal with the face for proper functioning, a worker must perform a
positive or negative pressure user seal check in accordance with CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-02, Selection, Use, and Care of
Respirators.
…
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation states:
(2) When this Regulation requires a person to comply with
(a) a publication, code or standard of the Board or another agency, the person may, as an alternative, comply with another
publication, code or standard acceptable to the Board…
Purpose of guideline
Section 8.41 of the Regulation requires that a worker must perform a positive or negative pressure user seal check in accordance with CSA
Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-02, Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators. Section 4.4(2)(a) permits WorkSafeBC to accept another standard
to be used for the selection of respiratory protection.
The purpose of this guideline is to provide an acceptable alternate standard to the requirement in section 8.41 of the Regulation.
Acceptance of CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-18, Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators
A person that is required to comply with the CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-02 specified in section 8.41 may comply with CSA Standard
CAN/CSA-Z94.4-18, Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators as an alternative standard.

G8.42 Medical Assessment

Issued August 1999; Editorial Revision October 2004; Editorial Revision February 14, 2020; Editorial Revision June 30, 2021
Section 8.42 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
 If a worker is required to use a respirator and there is doubt about the worker's ability to use a respirator for medical reasons, the
worker must be examined by a physician, and the examining physician must be provided with sufficient information to allow the
physician to advise the employer of the ability of the worker to wear a respirator.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide sources of information for medical evaluation regarding wearing of a respirator.
Medical assessment
When being evaluated for medical fitness to wear a respirator, the worker needs to bring the respirator that is to be worn to the physician doing the
assessment. Some guidelines for medically assessing a worker's ability to use a respirator are provided in the following references:
CSA Standard CAN/CSA Z94.4-18, Selection, Use and Care of Respirators
ANSI Standard Z88.6-1984, Physical Qualifications for Respirator Use
"Respirator Decision Logic", published by NIOSH (DHHS/NIOSH Pub. No. 87-108)
For additional information, consult occupational physicians of WorkSafeBC.

G8.44 Records

Issued February 14, 2020

Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.44 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
The employer must maintain a record of
(a) fit test results and worker instruction,
(b) maintenance for air supplying respirators, powered air purifying respirators, and for sorbent cartridges and canisters, and
(c) maintenance and repairs for each self-contained breathing apparatus and all air cylinders in accordance with the requirements of
CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-02, Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators.
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation states:
(2) When this Regulation requires a person to comply with
(a) a publication, code or standard of the Board or another agency, the person may, as an alternative, comply with another
publication, code or standard acceptable to the Board …
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide an acceptable alternate standard to the requirement in section 8.44 of the Regulation.
Section 8.44 of the Regulation requires that maintenance and repairs for each self-contained breathing apparatus and all air cylinders be done in
accordance with CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-02, Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators. Section 4.4(2)(a) permits WorkSafeBC to
accept another standard to be used for the selection of respiratory protection.
Acceptance of CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-18, Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators
A person that is required to comply with the CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-02 specified in section 8.44, may comply with CSA Standard
CAN/CSA-Z94.4-18, Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators as an alternative standard.

G8.45 Maintenance and inspection of self-contained breathing apparatus

Issued May 17, 2006; Revised October 23, 2012; Revised August 28, 2020; Revised October 20, 2020
Regulatory excerpt
Section 8.45 (Maintenance and inspections) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Inspection of compressed air cylinders must be done in accordance with CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-02, Selection, Use,
and Care of Respirators.
(2) Self-contained breathing apparatus, including regulators, must be serviced and repaired by qualified persons.
(3) Compressed air cylinders must be hydrostatically tested in accordance with CSA Standard CAN/CSA-B339-96, Cylinders,
Spheres, and Tubes for the Transportation of Dangerous Goods.
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation states:
(3) When this Regulation requires a person to comply with
 (a) a publication, code or standard of the Board or another agency, the person may, as an alternative, comply with another
publication, code or standard acceptable to the Board...
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to accept two alternate (revised) standards under section 4.4(2)(a). It accepts CSA Standard CAN/CSA Z94.4-
18 as an alternate standard to CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.4-02 and CAN/CSA B339-18 as an alternate standard to CAN/CSA B339-96.
This guideline also provides information on the application of the three requirements of section 8.45 of the Regulation on the inspection of self-
contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), servicing and repair, and hydrostatic testing.
An SCBA includes a full facepiece incorporating a second stage regulator, compressed air cylinder, first stage regulator, pressure gauge, alarm,
connecting tubes, harness assembly, and associated fittings. An SCBA offers one of the highest levels of respiratory protection available and is
designed to provide protection in oxygen-deficient atmospheres and in situations where high or unknown concentrations of toxic air contaminants
are present.
Section 8.45(1) - Inspection
Under this requirement, compressed air cylinders may also be inspected in accordance with CSA Standard CAN/CSA Z94.4-18, Selection, use,
and care of respirators. This Standard covers inspection of SCBA cylinders, including those made of steel, aluminum, and composites.
Inspections require an examination of both the exterior and interior of cylinders. Inspections must be done according to the requirements of the
following:
CAN/CSA-B339
CAN/CSA-B340
CGA C-6, C-6.1, or C-6.2 as appropriate
Transport Canada regulations under the Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act
Manufacturer's instructions
Cylinder manufacturers typically provide detailed inspection instructions.
Internal inspections
Internal inspections are required for all cylinders at the time of hydrostatic testing. Transport Canada or the manufacturer may specify more
frequent internal inspections. The purpose of the internal inspection is to look for the presence of corrosion, moisture, oil, or other deposits.
CSA Z94.4-18 requires at least annual inspections of steel and aluminum cylinders over 15 years old when the cylinders are in current use. CSA
Z94.4-18 requires composite cylinders to be removed from service if they are at least 15 years old.
External inspections
External inspections are conducted on a more frequent basis than internal inspections. CSA Z94.4-18 requires that cylinders be inspected
externally after each use and before refilling. In addition, cylinders for emergency use, such as emergency escape SCBA cylinders, must be
inspected on a schedule to ensure readiness for the anticipated emergency use.
The purposes of the external inspection include the following:
Identifying any obvious damage to the cylinder
Verifying that the hydrostatic test date is current
Defective equipment is to be identified as "out of service" and removed from service until repaired and replaced.
Section 8.45(2) - Servicing and repair
This provision requires that SCBAs, including regulators and components like hose connectors, hoses, cylinders, facepieces, head straps,
regulators, harness components, warning devices, and gauges are serviced and repaired by a qualified person. "Qualified," as defined by section
1.1 of the Regulation, means being knowledgeable of the work, the hazards involved, and the means to control the hazards, by reason of
education, training, experience, or a combination thereof. For the purposes of section 8.45(2), qualified SCBA maintenance personnel will
Be qualified through training and experience to inspect, maintain, and repair respirators in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions
Inspect, maintain, and repair SCBAs as required
Ensure that maintenance tools are kept in good repair and properly calibrated
Maintain appropriate records of maintenance and repair in accordance with section 8.44 of the Regulation
Only registered facilities can repair and requalify SCBA cylinders. Contact Transport Canada to locate a facility.
Section 8.45(3) - Hydrostatic testing
This provision requires that compressed air cylinders be hydrostatically tested in accordance with CSA Standard CAN/CSA-B339-96, Cylinders,
Spheres, and Tubes for the Transportation of Dangerous Goods. CAN/CSA B339-18 Cylinders, Spheres, and Tubes for the
Transportation of Dangerous Goods is an acceptable alternative to the 1996 edition referenced in section 8.45(3) of the Regulation.
CSA Standard CAN/CSA-B339 specifies the requirements for the manufacturing, inspecting, testing, marking, requalifying, repairing, and
rebuilding of cylinders, spheres, and tubes for the transportation of dangerous goods. Clause 24 of this Standard specifies the requirements for
retesting, inspecting, reheat treatment, repairing, and rebuilding of used containers. The minimum frequency of hydrostatic testing is specified in
Table 29.
For more information on Transport Canada requirements contact the Transportation of Dangerous Goods Pacific office at 604-666-3955 or
[email protected].
Contents

FALL PROTECTION

G11.1 Definitions - Anchor and anchorage

G11.2-1 Calculation of fall distance when on a sloped roof
G11.2-2 Selecting a method of fall protection
G11.2-3 Defining a fall restraint versus fall arrest system
G11.2-4 Tilt-up construction
G11.2-5 Fall protection in agriculture
G11.2(5)-1 Safety monitor system as a work procedure acceptable to WorkSafeBC
G11.2(5)-2 Fall protection and structural concrete block construction
G11.2(5)-3 Other acceptable work procedures
G11.2(5)-4 Work procedures to minimize risk of injury due to a fall in fixed-seating areas such as stadiums, arenas, or theatres
G11.2(6)-1 Instruction in fall protection system
G11.2-6 Fall protection during stunt work
G11.3 Fall protection plan
G11.4 Belts and harnesses
G11.5-1 Equipment standards
G11.5-2 Equipment standards - Vertical lifelines
G11.5-3 Equipment standards - Lanyards
G11.5-4 Equipment standards - Prusik sling/Triple sliding hitch
G11.5-5 Equipment standards - Double line system controlled descent devices
G11.5-6 Equipment standards - Connecting equipment
G11.5-7 Equipment standards - Protection against abrasion or burning
G11.6-1 Anchors
G11.6-2 Anchor selection and use
G11.6-3 Anchors - Cornice hook and parapet clamp use
G11.7 Temporary horizontal lifelines
G11.8 Requirements for engineering - Permanent horizontal lifelines
G11.9 Inspection and maintenance - Fibre rope suspension
G11.10(0.1) Fall protection anchors - Inspection and removal from service
Guidelines Part 11 - Fall Protection

G11.1 Definitions - Anchor and anchorage

Issued consequential to April 1, 2013 Regulatory Amendment; Editorial Revision June 30, 2021
Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.1 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states, in part:
"anchor" means a component or subsystem of a fall protection system used to connect the other parts of a fall protection system to
an anchorage, and includes an anchorage connector;
"anchorage" means a secure connection point for a fall protection system;
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to clarify the application of the Regulation to anchors and to provide examples to help clarify use of the terms
anchor, anchorage, and anchorage connector.
Anchors and anchorages
An anchor is a component or subsystem of a fall protection system and is subject to the regulatory requirements for a fall protection system. Under
Regulation section 11.5(c), an anchor must meet and be used in accordance with an applicable standard. Refer to OHS Guidelines G11.5-1
Equipment standards and G11.6-2 Anchor selection and use for an explanation of applicable standards.
The following diagrams show examples of an anchor, anchorage, and anchorage connector.
G11.2-1 Calculation of fall distance when on a sloped roof

Issued August 16, 2000; Revised January 1, 2005

Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.2(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Unless elsewhere provided for in this Regulation, an employer must ensure that a fall protection system is used when work is being
done at a place
(a) from which a fall of 3 m (10 ft) or more may occur, or
(b) where a fall from a height of less than 3 m involves a risk of injury greater than the risk of injury from the impact on a flat surface.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to explain how to calculate the fall distance when workers are on a sloped roof.
Calculating fall difference
At a minimum, the fall distance will be the distance from the bottom edge of the roof to the next safe lower surface or ground below. The vertical
distance from the worker's position to the unguarded roof edge should be added when on a roof with a slope greater than 4 vertical in 12
horizontal. Section 20.75 of the Regulation requires a worker on a roof with a slope ratio of 8 vertical in 12 horizontal or greater to use personal
fall protection, or a safety net must be used; toe holds must be used if the roofing material allows for it. Refer to OHS Guideline G20.75.

G11.2-2 Selecting a method of fall protection

Issued August 16, 2000; Revised January 1, 2005; Editorial Revision consequential to February 1, 2015 Regulatory Amendment; Revised
December 18, 2015; Editorial Revision July 27, 2016
Regulatory excerpt
Sections 11.2(2) to (5) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") state:
(2) The employer must ensure that guardrails meeting the requirements of Part 4 (General Conditions) or other similar means of fall
restraint are used when practicable.
(3) If subsection (2) is not practicable, the employer must ensure that another fall restraint system is used.
(4) If subsection (3) is not practicable, the employer must ensure that one of the following is used:
(a) a fall arrest system;
(b) a rope access system that meets the requirements of Part 34.
(5) If subsection (4) is not practicable, or will result in a hazard greater than if a fall arrest system or a rope access system was not
used, the employer must ensure that work procedures are followed that are acceptable to the Board and minimize the risk of injury to
a worker from a fall.
Purpose of guideline
Section 11.2 of the Regulation prescribes a hierarchy of controls in sections (2) to (5). This guideline explains the hierarchy of controls and gives
examples of how the circumstances of the workplace affect the selection of fall protection.
Selection of fall protection method
The employer must use "guardrails … or other similar means of fall restraint" under section (2) if it is practicable for the work process. If it is not
practicable, the employer can use another fall restraint system under section (3). However, the employer cannot use a fall arrest system or a rope
access system under section (4) unless it is impracticable to use any fall restraint system under sections (2) and (3). Only if it is impracticable to use
a fall restraint, fall arrest, or rope access system under sections (2) to (4), or if the use of a fall arrest or rope access system will result in greater
hazards, is the employer permitted under section (5) to use work procedures alone to minimize the risk of injury to a worker from a fall.
The selection of a method for fall protection under section 11.2 depends on what is practicable. Employers are expected to make a reasonable
assessment and use good judgment in making this decision. What is practicable depends on the circumstances of each workplace and is a matter
of assessment and judgment. The following examples cover some typical situations:
Guardrails will generally be considered practicable in work areas where numerous workers are working at or near the edges of elevated
floors and roofs on buildings or structures under construction.
Where a roof is under repair, it may not be practicable to install guardrails because of such factors as the small number of workers involved
and the short duration of the job. In this situation, it will generally be practicable to use a fall restraint system that consists of a belt or harness
and a lifeline connected to a suitable anchor and rigged to prevent the worker from going beyond the unguarded edge(s).
When a worker needs to position and fasten joists or trusses to the top plate of a wood frame structure, fall protection is required if a fall of
3 metres (10 feet) or more may occur, or if a fall from a height of less than 3 metres involves a risk of injury greater than the risk of injury
from the impact on a flat surface. Generally this condition will exist along the outer side of the perimeter walls. It will normally be practicable
to erect guardrails along the outer side of the wall, or to work from a single pole scaffold (with guardrails if necessary) from either side of the
wall, or to use another method of fall restraint or arrest.
It may be necessary to remove a guardrail to accommodate work. If so, under section 4.58.1 of the Regulation, only that portion of the
guardrail necessary to allow the work to be done may be removed. Workers exposed to a fall hazard must be protected by another fall
protection system when the guardrail is absent. The guardrail must be replaced when the unguarded area is left unattended, and after the
work is completed if the circumstances still require guardrails.
If guardrails currently exist, an employer cannot tear them down and substitute another form of fall protection, such as a safety monitor and
control zone system, simply because it will make the work easier. The fact that guardrails currently exist suggests that it is practicable to use
that form of fall protection (refer to section 4.58.1 of the Regulation).
A fall arrest system or rope access system will likely be practicable where there is no sizable work platform (e.g., on a bridge girder) or
where it would not be cost-effective to build platforms on which guardrails or other fall restraint systems could be used because the work is
of short duration and uses relatively few workers.
Some provisions outside of Part 11 of the Regulation that require fall protection in particular areas limit the range of choices that might otherwise
exist. Notably, section 13.33 of Part 13 (Ladders, Scaffolds and Temporary Work Platforms) contains specific requirements for fall protection.
Determining the fall hazard area
Section 11.2(1) of the Regulation requires the use of a fall protection system when work is being done at a place from which a fall of 3 metres (10
feet) may occur, or where a fall from a height of less than 3 metres involves a greater risk of injury. The place from which a fall may occur is also
referred to as the "fall hazard area."
The employer is responsible for determining the fall hazard area (i.e., the safe distance from the unguarded edge). Some of the factors that the
employer will need to take into consideration include, but are not limited to, the following:
The nature of the work to be conducted
The hazards that are present in the workplace
Environmental conditions, such as temperature, ice, rain, or heavy winds
Whether the work is carried out at an elevation relative to the unguarded edge (e.g., working on an air-handling unit from a ladder)
Whether the risk is increased by the use of tools or other equipment in the work area
In the case of flat or low-sloped work surfaces (not exceeding 4 vertical to 12 horizontal or 4/12), that distance will be at least 2 metres (6.5 feet)
from the unguarded edge.

G11.2-3 Defining a fall restraint versus fall arrest system

Issued August 16, 2000; Revised January 1, 2005; Editorial Revision consequential to February 1, 2015 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Sections 11.2(3) to (4) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") state:
(3) If subsection (2) is not practicable, the employer must ensure that another fall restraint system is used.
(4) If subsection (3) is not practicable, the employer must ensure that one of the following is used:
(a) a fall arrest system;
(b) a rope access system that meets the requirements of Part 34.
Purpose of guideline
When assessing the requirement for personal fall protection where there is a relatively short potential fall distance, it is sometimes unclear if a
situation should be treated as fall restraint or fall arrest. This guideline clarifies the difference between a fall restraint and a fall arrest system.
Fall restraint
Fall restraint normally means a fall protection system arranged such that a worker cannot fall lower than the surface on which the worker was
supported before the fall started. For example, a personal fall restraint system for a worker on an elevated flat surface would be arranged so the
worker could go up to the edge of the work surface, but not beyond the edge in the event of a slip or fall. The system, in the event of a slip or fall,
would result in the worker landing on the work surface, and perhaps very close to going over the edge. Other work positioning arrangements, such
as a firefighter secured to an aerial ladder, or a tree trimmer or power line technician using a climbing belt and pole strap, will normally result in the
worker going through some vertical drop in the event of a slip. To allow their fall protection to be considered as fall restraint, their equipment
should be arranged to limit the vertical drop as much as possible, and in no case, should the total fall distance be more than 30 centimetres (1 foot).
A fall restraint system should only be used where a worker likely can regain footing or otherwise self-rescue immediately after a slip or fall. Fall
protection equipment and components that are intended only for fall restraint applications should be clearly and permanently marked to indicate
such a limitation.
Fall arrest
If the equipment cannot be arranged to limit the vertical drop to 30 cm, then the personal fall protection system should be a fall arrest type, and the
system will need to address the additional requirements for fall arrest. For example, section 11.4(1) of the Regulation requires workers to wear a
full body harness or other harness acceptable to WorkSafeBC when using a personal fall protection system for fall arrest. Further, the anchor the
worker is connected to must meet the requirements of section 11.6(3) of the Regulation.

G11.2-4 Tilt-up construction

Issued August 16, 2000; Revised January 1, 2005; Revised October 23, 2009; Revised April 13, 2011; Editorial Revision consequential to
February 1, 2015 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Sections 11.2(2) to (4) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") state:
(2) The employer must ensure that guardrails meeting the requirements of Part 4 (General Conditions) or other similar means of fall
restraint are used when practicable.
(3) If subsection (2) is not practicable, the employer must ensure that another fall restraint system is used.
(4) If subsection (3) is not practicable, the employer must ensure that one of the following is used:
(a) a fall arrest system;
 (b) a rope access system that meets the requirements of Part 34.
Section 4.58(4) of the Regulation states:
Guardrails temporarily installed during the construction, demolition, maintenance or renovation of a work area must be able to
withstand a load of 550 N (125 lbs.) applied perpendicular to the span in a horizontal or vertically downward direction at any point
on the top rail, or be built to the criteria of subsection (5).
Section 4.58(4.1) of the Regulation states:
If part or all of the top rail or a midrail of a guardrail that is temporarily installed during the construction, demolition, maintenance or
renovation of a work area is made of fibre rope, wire rope, chain or other non-rigid material, that part of the guardrail must meet the
requirements of WorkSafeBC Standard - Guardrails using rope or other non-rigid material, as set out in Schedule 4-A to this
Part.
Section 4.54 of the Regulation provides the following definitions:
"guard" means a protective barrier around an opening in a floor or along the open sides of stairs or a ramp, landing, balcony,
mezzanine, raised walkway or any other area to prevent a fall to a lower level, or inadvertent entry into a dangerous area;
"guardrail" means a guard consisting of a top rail 102 cm to 112 cm (40 in to 44 in) above the work surface, and a midrail located
approximately midway between the underside of the top rail and the top of the toeboard, if one is provided, or the work surface if no
toeboard is provided.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to explain the process for converting a perimeter horizontal lifeline at a tilt-up construction site into a temporary
guardrail system.
Use of wire rope guardrail
Once the roof deck is in place, a perimeter horizontal lifeline at a tilt-up construction site may be converted into a guardrail system by adding a
suitable rope at midrail level. Section 4.58(4.1) of the Regulation specifies that guardrails made of fibre or wire rope temporarily installed during
the construction, demolition, or renovation of a work area must meet the requirements of WorkSafeBC Standard - Guardrails using rope or
other non-rigid material (Schedule 4-A).
Note that while it may be permissible to use a horizontal lifeline system as the basis for a wire or fibre rope guardrail system if modified according
to the criteria set out in WorkSafeBC Standard - Guardrails using rope or other non-rigid material, as set out in Schedule 4-A, it is not the
case that a system designed as a rope guardrail can readily be converted and used for the purposes of a horizontal lifeline. The strength
requirements for rope guardrail systems are far lower than those for horizontal lifelines.

G11.2-5 Fall protection in agriculture

Issued January 1, 2005; Editorial Revision consequential to February 1, 2015 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.2 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Unless elsewhere provided for in this Regulation, an employer must ensure that a fall protection system is used when work is
being done at a place
(a) from which a fall of 3 m (10 ft) or more may occur, or
(b) where a fall from a height of less than 3 m involves a risk of injury greater than the risk of injury from the impact on a flat surface.
(2) The employer must ensure that guardrails meeting the requirements of Part 4 (General Conditions) or other similar means of fall
restraint are used when practicable.
(3) If subsection (2) is not practicable, the employer must ensure that another fall restraint system is used.
(4) If subsection (3) is not practicable, the employer must ensure that one of the following is used:
(a) a fall arrest system;
(b) a rope access system that meets the requirements of Part 34.
(5) If subsection (4) is not practicable, or will result in a hazard greater than if a fall arrest system or a rope access system was not
used, the employer must ensure that work procedures are followed that are acceptable to the Board and minimize the risk of injury to
a worker from a fall.
(6) Before a worker is allowed into an area where a risk of falling exists, the employer must ensure that the worker is instructed in the
 fall protection system for the area and the procedures to be followed.
(7) A worker must use the fall protection system provided by the employer.
Purpose of guideline
There are several circumstances in agriculture, for example in greenhouse, dairy, and some other animal husbandry operations, which may present
some unique challenges for fall protection. This guideline describes the application of the fall protection hierarchy in those circumstances.
Fall protection hierarchy
In greenhouse operations, equipment designed to provide fall protection for use on roofs during work activities such as repairing, glazing, and
cleaning greenhouse glass may provide a practicable means of hazard control. The use of such equipment is increasingly common in this sector.
In the dairy and some other animal husbandry sectors, haylofts may be an area of concern. In some cases it may be feasible to use guardrails,
particularly along edges that are not in use. Another option that may be appropriate is a system of retractable netting to provide fall restraint next to
the work area, which is drawn into place when workers are on the loft. If such systems are not practicable in a workplace, personal fall restraint or
fall arrest systems may be feasible.
In circumstances where systems of fall restraint or fall arrest, or rope access are not practicable, or a system of fall arrest or rope access will result
in a hazard greater than if the system is not used, a further option provided by the fall protection requirements is the use of other acceptable work
procedures that will minimize the potential for a worker to fall. Refer to the OHS Guidelines for G11.2(5) for more information on the use of
control zones, safety monitors and other procedures.

G11.2(5)-1 Safety monitor system as a work procedure acceptable to WorkSafeBC

Issued August 16, 2000; Revised January 1, 2005; Revised December 2, 2011; Editorial Revision consequential to February 1, 2015 Regulatory
Amendment; Revised December 18, 2015
Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.2(5) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
If subsection (4) is not practicable, or will result in a hazard greater than if a fall arrest system or a rope access system was not used,
the employer must ensure that work procedures are followed that are acceptable to the Board and minimize the risk of injury to a
worker from a fall.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline describes the use of a safety monitor system as an acceptable work procedure under section 11.2(5).
Control zones and safety monitors
Section 11.2 of the Regulation prescribes a hierarchy of fall protection controls in sections (2) to (5). A safety monitor system may be used as the
means of fall protection under section 11.2(5) where it is not practicable to use a method of fall restraint, fall arrest, or rope access; or where the
use of a fall arrest or rope access system will result in a greater hazard.
In this guideline the following definitions apply:
"Control zone" means the area between an unguarded edge of a building or structure and a safe distance of at least 2 metres (6.5 feet).
"Safety monitor system" means a system in which a trained worker is designated to monitor work activities in a control zone to ensure that
work is done in a manner that minimizes the potential for a worker to fall.
The safety monitor system is intended for level or low-sloped work surfaces. It is not to be used on a working surface where the slope of that
surface exceeds 4 vertical to 12 horizontal (4/12), for skeletal structure work, or for scaffold erection and removal. If workers will at all times
remain further from the unguarded edge than the width of the control zone, no safety monitor or other fall protection system is required.
Width of the control zone
The width of a control zone is to be at least 2 metres (6.5 feet), with additional distance if any of the following conditions exist:
The working surface is slippery or sloped
The work is carried out at an elevation relative to the unguarded edge (e.g., working on an air-handling unit from a ladder)
The risk is increased by the use of tools or other equipment near the control zone
The risk is increased by environmental conditions such as ice, rain, or heavy winds
Raised warning line
A line defining the control zone is to be established along the internal edge of the control zone by a raised warning line or other equally effective
means at all times during such work. For example, an acceptable raised warning line includes a line with both of the following:
A high-visibility material, or a line flagged or clearly marked with high-visibility materials at intervals not exceeding 2 metres (6.5 feet).
Rigged and maintained to be between 0.85 metres and 1.15 metres (34 and 45 inches) above the working surface.
For clarification purposes, a raised warning line is only required when the safety monitor system will be used as the means of fall protection under
section 11.2(5). A raised warning line is not required when other methods of fall protection are used, such as fall restraint. However, an employer
may choose to use a raised warning line to increase the workers’ awareness of the fall hazard area.
Safety monitor
Only workers directly required for the work at hand will be inside the control zone. The role of the safety monitor is to ensure that the work activity
in the control zone is performed in accordance with the fall protection plan and in a manner that minimizes the potential for a worker to fall. A
safety monitor will:
Be experienced in the work overseen and trained in the role of safety monitor
Be present at all times when a worker is in the control zone
Have complete authority over the work as it relates to the prevention of falls
Engage in no other duties while acting as the safety monitor
Be positioned to have a clear and continuous view of the work
Also, a safety monitor will:
Be able to have normal voice communication with the workers being protected
Monitor no more than eight workers
Be instantly distinguishable from other workers
The written fall protection plan for the workplace (required by section 11.3) will specify the name of each safety monitor.
On a narrow roof, such as one less than 12 metres (40 feet) wide, an employer may proceed with a safety monitor system without using a raised
warning line by declaring the entire work surface the control zone. This will be specifically noted in the fall protection plan. The safety monitor will
be positioned in a safe location and have a clear view of the work.

G11.2(5)-2 Fall protection and structural concrete block construction

Issued March 28, 2002; Revised January 1, 2005

Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.2(5) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
If subsection (4) is not practicable, or will result in a hazard greater than if a fall arrest system or a rope access system was not used,
the employer must ensure that work procedures are followed that are acceptable to the Board and minimize the risk of injury to a
worker from a fall.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to outline an acceptable work procedure under section 11.2(5) for structural concrete block construction when fall
restraint or fall arrest systems or rope access systems are not practicable.
Masonry construction
The use of guardrails or other fall protection is practicable for most masonry construction, but is impracticable in some situations during the
placement of structural concrete block during wall construction. Structural masonry is the use of 200 mm (8 inches) or wider concrete block or
structural clay brick laid and reinforced as stand-alone walls. Typical applications are for warehouses, schools, or commercial buildings, with wall
heights generally of 3 to 7 metres (10 to 23 feet), occasionally reaching 9 metres (30 feet).
Generally masonry work more than 1.5 metres (5 feet) above ground or floor level is done from a scaffold work platform. For platform heights of
less than 3 metres (10 feet), guardrails or other fall protection is not required. Work off platforms 3 metres or more high requires fall protection.
This is generally provided on the backside and ends of the work platform through use of guardrails. If the masonry or block is being laid against an
existing building wall, there is no forward fall hazard, so no guardrails need to be on the front or working side of the work platform. However, if the
structural wall is a stand-alone wall, there is no "front wall" or barrier immediately behind the new wall. As the wall construction progresses beyond
3 metres in such cases, section 11.2 of the Regulation requires fall protection measures be taken. It is not practicable to have guardrails and
support posts in the same workspace where the structural masonry units are being laid. This guideline describes work practices acceptable in these
circumstances.
For the first 3 courses of block (approximately 60 centimetres or 24 inches) above the level of the work platform, a personal fall restraint system is
to be used by workers laying block and working on the forward edge of the work platform. After the completion of at least 3 courses of block
being laid, the worker(s) laying block may remove the personal fall protection and continue laying block with the newly laid block wall being
considered as effective fall protection for masons working at the front or working face of the work platform.
Note that the work platform is always positioned at least 3 courses (60 centimetres) below the top of the last full course of structural masonry laid,
so personal fall protection is not needed. However, if the work platforms are repositioned so that the distance from the platform surface up to the
top of the last full course of masonry laid is less than 60 centimetres, personal fall protection needs to be used.
If the above procedure is to be used, a written fall protection plan for the work is required by section 11.3(1)(b) of the Regulation.

G11.2(5)-3 Other acceptable work procedures

Issued August 16, 2000; Revised January 1, 2005; Revised December 2, 2011
Regulatory excerpts
Section 11.2(5) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
If the use of a fall arrest system is not practicable, or will result in a hazard greater than if the system was not used, the employer must
ensure that work procedures are followed that are acceptable to the Board and minimize the risk of injury to a worker from a fall.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline provides examples of typical situations where work procedures (other than control zones and safety monitors) may be used and
describes some acceptable work procedures under section 11.2(5) to minimize the risk of injury to a worker from a fall. If work procedures are
used under section 11.2(5) of the Regulation, section 11.3 requires there be a written fall protection plan for the work site.
Work procedures other than control zones and safety monitors
Installation or removal of fall protection equipment (first person up/last person down rule).
Light duty work for short duration. The use of a ladder may be acceptable for certain "light duty" tasks, as long as the work is completed
under certain circumstances:
Working off of a portable ladder doing a "light duty task," such as an inspection or painting, where the ladder will be set up with its
base at the same physical location for sporadic, short-term work. Some examples of sporadic short-term work include the following:
inspecting exterior vents, gutters, and window seals; caulking; touch-up painting; and maintenance-type work (such as changing light
bulbs). While performing the task, the worker should keep his/her centre of gravity (worker's waist) between the side rails of the
ladder, and should generally have one hand available to hold on to the ladder or other support to maintain three points of contact. The
ladder is not to be positioned near an edge, drop in height or floor opening that would significantly increase the potential fall distance.
(Note that if the work on a ladder is likely to exceed 15 minutes at one physical location, some form of fall restraint or fall arrest
protection should be used.) Where terrain and accessibility allow for other means of performing the work (e.g., a scissor lift or
movable work platform), the use of other such means is to be considered prior to completing the work from a portable ladder.
Where work duration is approximately 15 minutes or less and the tasks are "light duty," the work may be completed from a portable
ladder where use of a work platform is not practicable.
Work done from a ladder must be done in full compliance with Part 13 of the Regulation (especially Division 2 - Ladders, including
sections 13.4, 13.5, and 13.6). Section 13.6(1) of the Regulation states that "if work cannot be done from a ladder without hazard
to a worker, a work platform must be provided." If the work cannot be completed in full compliance with the requirements for safe
ladder use under Part 13 a ladder must not be used for that work.
In circumstances where frequent ladder movement is required to complete multiple short duration tasks, each task may be considered
as a separate instance of "short duration" work (e.g., light work such as touch-up painting at a residential dwelling may require
multiple set-ups at various locations, and exceeding a total of 15 minutes for such a project is acceptable.)
The total duration of the entire job should also be considered in determining situations where other work safety measures should be
used (e.g., work to be completed at a specific site over the course of several days may not be considered as "short duration,"
depending on the specific circumstances at the time.)
Employers should consider
The frequency with which a ladder is being used at a site (overly frequent use may indicate that other means of completing the
work are more appropriate)
The duration of use at a site (if length of use tends toward longer periods of use, other means should be considered where
practicable)
The overall practicability of using other work platforms to complete use (e.g., scissor lifts, boom lifts, scaffolding, etc.)
Roof inspection or estimation. Provided the worker minimizes exposure to any unguarded edge as much as possible and provided other
factors such as environmental conditions (e.g., wind or ice), roof slope, and surface finish do not present an undue hazard.
Transfers between fall protection systems. Brief transfers between fall protection systems where the worker is protected by having a
three-point contact (two feet placed firmly on a suitable supporting surface along with one hand supporting the worker, while the other hand
is used to transfer a connection from one fall protection system to another).
Work requiring constant repositioning. For example, during the primary connection of skeletal structures, workers employed in the initial
placement of skeletal members requiring climbing and walking on the bare structure may, depending on the particulars of the work to be
done, be covered by section 11.2(5). Trades with activities of this nature typically include scaffold erectors, tower erectors, blowpipe
ventilation erectors, structural steel erectors, and tower crane erectors. Workers on the structure engaged in welding, bolt installing, other
fitting out work, and climbing or walking on skeletal members should be able to use the fall protection methods referred to in sections
11.2(2), (3), and (4).
Workers on roofs engaged in a process that may damage lifelines. For example, workers doing roofing tar work (such as hot
bitumen application on flat roofs), may have to work under the protection of work procedures under section 11.2(5), such as control zones
and the safety monitor system.
Use of the normal fall protection methods results in greater hazard. For example, in emergencies such as the correction of an unsafe
condition or in firefighting - refer to section 31.17(4).
Refer to G20.75 Roof work - Fall protection for a description of different fall protection systems for work on roofs, according to the amount of
slope, using the hierarchy in section 11.2 of the Regulation.

G11.2(5)-4 Work procedures to minimize risk of injury due to a fall in fixed-seating areas such as stadiums, arenas, or theatres
Issued August 23, 2011; Editorial Revision consequential to February 1, 2015 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.2 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Unless elsewhere provided for in this Regulation, an employer must ensure that a fall protection system is used when work is
being done at a place
(a) from which a fall of 3 m (10 ft) or more may occur, or
(b) where a fall from a height of less than 3 m involves a risk of injury greater than the risk of injury from the impact on a flat surface.
(2) The employer must ensure that guardrails meeting the requirements of Part 4 (General Conditions) or other similar means of fall
restraint are used when practicable.
(3) If subsection (2) is not practicable, the employer must ensure that another fall restraint system is used.
(4) If subsection (3) is not practicable, the employer must ensure that one of the following is used:
(a) a fall arrest system;
(b) a rope access system that meets the requirements of Part 34.
(5) If subsection (4) is not practicable, or will result in a hazard greater than if a fall arrest system or a rope access system was not
used, the employer must ensure that work procedures are followed that are acceptable to the Board and minimize the risk of injury to
a worker from a fall.
(6) Before a worker is allowed into an area where a risk of falling exists, the employer must ensure that the worker is instructed in the
fall protection system for the area and the procedures to be followed.
(7) A worker must use the fall protection system provided by the employer.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide direction to employers in how the fall protection provisions are to be applied to protect workers who
engage in work at heights around fixed- seating in buildings such as stadiums, arenas, and theatres.
Safe work procedures
The Regulation sets out requirements for fall protection under section 11.2 in a set of cascading requirements. Many fixed-seating buildings such
as theatres, stadiums, and arenas contain balconies or mezzanines that are greater than 3m above a lower area. In many of these buildings, guards
exist that do not meet the requirements for guards or guardrails as outlined in Part 4 of the Regulation. Under the applicable provincial and
municipal building codes, lower guards at lower heights (e.g., 30 inches, as opposed to the 40-44 inch standard guardrail requirement under
section 4.58(1)) are allowed due to the unique purpose of the building. No such exemptions or allowances exist in the Regulation, and section
11.2 must be followed to protect workers.
Where the risk of a fall from a height of greater than 3m exists, a "cascading" series of safety measures and requirements must be followed.
Where practicable, the employer must ensure that a guardrail or other similar means of fall restraint is in place meeting the requirements under Part
4 of the Regulation. The first option for fall protection should always be a guard or guardrail where it is practicable. In some fixed-seating
buildings guards/guardrails meet the Regulation requirements, e.g., clear plastic/glass with full guardrails that do not obstruct sightlines in the
building. However, where guards or guardrails are not practicable, the employer must ensure a different fall restraint system is used. If this is not
practicable, a fall arrest system must be used. Finally, where a fall arrest system is not practicable, the employer must ensure that work procedures
acceptable to WorkSafeBC are in place and are followed to minimize the risk of injury to a worker from falling.
It is recognized that in some situations, e.g., arena, theatre, etc., a fall restraint or fall arrest system may not always be practicable due to the nature
and use of the audience seating area of the building.
Fixed-seating areas in such buildings often have configurations (e.g., balconies) that have guards at the edge that do not meet the typical
requirements for standard guardrails in other situations. This is allowed through provincial and municipal building codes so as to afford an adequate
sightline for seated spectators. The result is that the guards at lower heights are installed (e.g., 30 inches, as opposed to the 40-44 inch requirement
under section 4.58(1)).
In these buildings where other alternative methods of fall protection are not practicable or may create a greater hazard than not using such
methods, it is the responsibility of the employer to ensure that work procedures acceptable to WorkSafeBC are in place to ensure the safety of
workers. The employer must ensure that workers are adequately trained in these procedures, as required in section 11.2(6). Procedures can
include instructions for working at or near edges that are guarded by a rail less than 40 inches in height, avoidance of edges where it is not
necessary to be near them, and instructions about hazard awareness. The employer must be able to provide these safe work procedures in writing
to a prevention officer when requested, as well as be able to provide evidence that all workers that may be exposed to a hazard have been
properly trained in and are using these procedures.
G11.2(6)-1 Instruction in fall protection system

Issued October 28, 2019

Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.2(6) OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(6) Before a worker is allowed into an area where a risk of falling exists, the employer must ensure that the worker is instructed in the
fall protection system for the area and the procedures to be followed.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to outline some of the criteria that should be considered when determining the type of instruction that is required in
order to comply with section 11.2(6) of the Regulation.
Instruction
The instruction must be specific to the area where the risk of falling exists and must include the particular work procedures to be used at the
worksite. In order to satisfy the requirements of this section, it is not sufficient for employers to provide general instruction to workers about
common forms of fall protection systems and procedures, nor is it adequate to simply have workers complete a fall protection training course.
Although general instruction and/or training is beneficial in providing workers with a basic understanding of fall protection and common risks
associated with working at heights, it does not ensure that workers have been adequately instructed on the specific systems and procedures to be
used at a particular worksite.
Set out below is a non-exclusive list of different types of instruction that, depending on the particular fall protection system being used at a given
worksite and the specific tasks assigned to a worker, may be required:
Instruction on the type of fall protection system
Review of manufacturer’s instructions (or a professional engineer’s instruction) related to the fall protection system and equipment (these
instructions should be available on site for review and should include information on proper use, installation, inspection, maintenance and
storage of equipment, criteria for taking the equipment out of service, etc.)
Proper methods of donning, doffing, adjusting, and interconnecting of any personal protective equipment that is part of the fall protection
system
Proper attachment points on the equipment
Compatibility of components of the system
Limitations of the system
Anchor installation (including anchorage criteria), use, attachment points, maintenance, inspection, strength, etc.
Anchor layout
Any procedures to be followed for the specific fall protection system and/or worksite
Any fall protection plans (if required)
Emergency rescue procedures
In all cases employers need to assess each particular area where a risk of falling exists and then determine what instruction is required in order to
ensure workers have sufficient knowledge and understanding to protect themselves from a fall. All workers required to work in an area where a fall
could occur must receive appropriate instruction before being allowed to enter the area.

G11.2-6 Fall protection during stunt work

Issued May 9, 2006; Revised February 8, 2007; Revised February 1, 2008; Revised March 11, 2009; Editorial Revision consequential to
February 1, 2015 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.2 (Obligation to use fall protection) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Unless elsewhere provided for in this , an employer must ensure that a fall protection system is used when work is being done at a
place
(a) from which a fall of 3 m (10 ft) or more may occur, or
(b) where a fall from a height of less than 3 m involves a risk of injury greater than the risk of injury from the impact on a flat surface.
(2) The employer must ensure that guardrails meeting the requirements of Part 4 (General Conditions) or other similar means of fall
restraint are used when practicable.
(3) If subsection (2) is not practicable, the employer must ensure that another fall restraint system is used.
(4) If subsection (3) is not practicable, the employer must ensure that one of the following is used:
(a) a fall arrest system;
 (b) a rope access system that meets the requirements of Part 34.
(5) If subsection (4) is not practicable, or will result in a hazard greater than if a fall arrest system or a rope access system was not
used, the employer must ensure that work procedures are followed that are acceptable to the Board and minimize the risk of injury to
a worker from a fall.
(6) Before a worker is allowed into an area where a risk of falling exists, the employer must ensure that the worker is instructed in the
fall protection system for the area and the procedures to be followed.
(7) A worker must use the fall protection system provided by the employer.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline provides information to assist with implementing fall protection procedures for stunt work. Typically such work is done in the film
sector and in other circumstances such as television and live performances.
The guideline discusses
the application of the hierarchy of controls in section 11.2 of the Regulation
criteria for acceptable work procedures where other forms of fall protection are not practicable, under section 11.2(5)
a standard for personal fall protection equipment in stunt work that is an alternative to CSA or ANSI standards specified in section 11.5
criteria for inspection of a personal fall protection system and removal of equipment from service under section 11.10(2) ; (3)
The guideline refers at various points to a "qualified person." For the purposes of the sectors covered by this guideline, typically the qualified
person is a stunt coordinator or special effects rigger, a live performance technical director or rigging technician, or a professional engineer. The
qualified person must be knowledgeable of the work, the hazards involved, and the means to control the hazards, by reason of education, training,
experience or a combination of these.
Application of the hierarchy of controls
Section 11.2(2)-(5) of the Regulation provides a hierarchy of four types of fall protection, based on practicability. Section 1.1 of the Regulation
defines "practicable" as "that which is reasonably capable of being done."
When applied to stunt work, there will be occasions where the use of guardrails or other means of fall restraint are practicable to use, for example
in work positioning or where a stunt person is moved through space by means of a system designed to prevent falls. However, for many
circumstances where a stunt involves a deliberate and planned fall these measures will not be practicable, and either a fall arrest system is required,
or work procedures acceptable to WorkSafeBC.
For example, a fall arrest system would be appropriate for a stunt involving a fall over a limited distance where the fall can be designed so that
arrest is the appropriate means of ensuring worker safety. Such systems would need to meet other requirements in Part 11 of the Regulation, for
example, section 11.5 on Equipment standards.
In some circumstances the production may require that a fall be unarrested so as to obtain the needed visual effect. In these cases, the fall must be
designed and carried out to minimize the risk of injury to the stunt person, using procedures acceptable to WorkSafeBC, as required by section
11.2(5).
Note that section 11.3 of the Regulation requires that wherever work is being done at a location where workers are not protected by permanent
guardrails and from which a fall of 7.5 m (25 feet) or more may occur, or where work procedures are used as the means of fall protection under
section 11.2(5), then a written fall protection plan must be in place before work begins.
Procedures that minimize the risk in a planned, unarrested fall - section 11.2(5)
In some circumstances, for reasons of practicability, a stunt will be planned for a fall without fall arrest. This circumstance typically arises where, for
production reasons and visual effect, it is impracticable to use a system of fall arrest, or to use other measures that simulate the fall such as dummies
or camera angles.
For such circumstances section 11.2(5) of the Regulation requires that procedures be followed that are acceptable to WorkSafeBC and which
minimize the risk of injury to the stunt person.
It has been determined that acceptable procedures are those that meet at least all of the following criteria:
1. The risks to workers in the stunt are thoroughly assessed and controls adopted that minimize the risk.
2. Measures are implemented, where practicable, to minimize the height of the fall and control the rate of deceleration.
3. The fall is designed to ensure that a stunt person does not make unintended contact with a surface during a fall.
4. The area of intended contact is designed so that
the dimensions are sufficient to ensure that the stunt person lands on it
cushioning is provided to minimize any risk of injury, for example, by use of padding, collapsible boxing, air bags, safety nets or other
means approved by a qualified person
there are no protrusions or other circumstances in the area of intended contact that create a heightened risk of injury
5. Provision is made to address any circumstance where the stunt person may, after initial contact with the intended surface, be deflected into
an adjacent area.
 6. Trial tests or rehearsals are done prior to the stunt using a test torso or equivalent device, and any corrections to the stunt made as
necessary. Note: such tests or rehearsals are both appropriate and needed in typical stunt circumstances. Any determination otherwise in a
particular case will be made only by a qualified person.
7. Stunt persons and other personnel involved with the stunt are properly trained in the use of all applicable procedures and equipment
involved in the stunt.
8. Supervision is provided to ensure activities are coordinated and safety standards are met.
Standards for equipment used in a fall protection system
Section 11.5 (Equipment standards) of the Regulation requires that equipment used in a fall protection system consist of compatible and suitable
components and be sufficient to support the fall restraint or arrest forces. In addition, section 11.5(c) requires that the equipment,
"…meet and be used in accordance with, an applicable CSA or ANSI standard in effect when the equipment was manufactured,
subject to any modification or upgrade considered necessary by the Board."
There are circumstances in stunt work where a safety harness meeting CSA or ANSI standards is impracticable or otherwise inappropriate. For
example, in the actual conduct of a stunt such a harness may be too bulky or involve points of attachment that interfere with the intended fall.
Under section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation a person may, if a standard is referenced in the Regulation, comply with an alternative standard where
acceptable to WorkSafeBC.
For the purposes of stunt work, WorkSafeBC accepts the alternative standard set out in italics below in circumstances where the use of equipment
meeting CSA or ANSI standards is impracticable. The alternative standard provides several options for determining acceptable equipment.

Alternative standard for fall protection equipment

This standard applies to the selection and use of fall protection equipment in stunt work, for falls and suspended
movements that are planned and conducted in a controlled manner. During a controlled fall, the maximum arrest force
must not exceed four times the worker's weight.
Prior to selection of equipment used in a system for fall restraint or fall arrest, a risk analysis must be done to determine
the hazard to workers. Equipment must be selected on the basis of that analysis.
The equipment in the fall protection system must meet at least one of the following applicable criteria:
1. All equipment used in the system is certified as suitable for use in the manner intended in the stunt by the equipment
manufacturer, the manufacturer's authorized representative, or by a professional engineer. (See OHS guideline
G1.1 "Professional engineer" for further information on engineering practice.)
2. The system is designed
to withstand a restraint force or an arrest force of at least four times the worker's weight (4 G's), and
so that the harness and associated components will not fail when a static force representing the lesser of
either twice the restraint or peak arrest force, as applicable, or 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) is applied.
3. For fall arrest systems, prior to the stunt, a trial drop test (using a test torso or equivalent) is successfully
performed that replicates the stunt, including the free fall distance and the worker's weight. A load cell will be used
during the test to monitor the peak arrest force, and the recorded values shall not exceed four times the person's
weight.
The stunt must be designed so that all factors that could potentially cause the performance of the fall protection system to
fail are considered and hazard, exposure of the system to chemicals, alteration of equipment, lifeline abrasion,
entanglements and the attachment location of the lanyard to the harness.
Documentation must be available at the work location where the stunt is to be performed which establishes that the
equipment meets the applicable criteria.

Re-using equipment after it has arrested a fall

If a personal fall protection system has been used to arrest a fall, section 11.10(1) of the Regulation requires that the system be removed from
service, and not be returned to service until it has been inspected and recertified as safe for use by the manufacturer or its authorized agent, or by a
professional engineer. Typically, the circumstances which this requirement is intended to address are accidental falls and may involve minimal shock
absorption during the arrest of the fall.
In contrast, in the stunt performance sector, falls are planned and often involve the use of deceleration systems that substantially reduce arrest
forces in the fall, thus reducing stresses on workers and equipment. Practicability issues are also of concern in this sector given that during normal
use, a safety harness system will often be used repeatedly during a given stunt procedure.
On this basis, section 11.10(2) ; (3) provides an exemption to the recertification for personal fall protection systems designed and intended for
reuse by a performer in the entertainment industry when conducting a planned fall sequence. The exemption applies only if all of the following
conditions are met
the system is designed and used in accordance with a standard acceptable to WorkSafeBC
 each use of the system is carried out in accordance with the plan for the conduct of the fall
the peak arrest forces generated in the system during each use do not exceed the planned limits and the maximum forces allowed for the
system, and
after each use of the system, no part of it, including the anchorage, is reused until a qualified person has inspected it and determined it is in
serviceable condition and safe for reuse
Note that section 11.9 of the Regulation also addresses inspection requirements. This provision requires that equipment used in a fall protection
system be inspected by a qualified person before use on the work shift, kept free from substances and conditions that could contribute to its
deterioration, and maintained in good working order.
The information provided in the remainder of this guideline is intended to assist with the inspection of equipment, and determination of whether it
should be removed from service.
Inspecting equipment
It is important to inspect personal fall protection equipment on an ongoing basis to ensure safety. At minimum this involves inspection before use on
each work shift, and after each use to arrest a fall. It is also recommended to inspect equipment just before each use if not already covered by one
of the other inspection scenarios. Such inspections are only one aspect of the overall review and monitoring of conditions and procedures for the
performance of stunts.
Inspections must be done in accordance with manufacturer instructions, if available, and in conformity with any standards which apply to the
equipment. Inspections should cover at least the following items:
With harnesses, check on aspects that include the following:
Integrity of stitching throughout the harness, on both outer and inner surfaces
Signs of deformation, bunching, or deterioration of pick points on the harness
Signs of contact with chemicals
Signs of any part of the harness being cut, stretched, frayed, or otherwise damaged
Integrity of shackles and straps on the harness
Signs of exposure to high temperatures
With other equipment such as shackles, carabiners, lines, and deceleration control devices, the examination of equipment will include the
following:
All metal and other materials for any sign of deformation, wear, stretching, cracks, or kinking
All metal and other materials for any signs of corrosion or other chemical deterioration
All lines for wear on surfaces, and any potential or actual fraying, kinking, bird caging, heat fusion, or other damage
Moveable parts to ensure proper action, and the capability of all locking and other immobilizing devices to perform their function
Note: When evaluating the condition of equipment it is important to have an understanding of the circumstances of previous use, including
conditions and frequency of use, and any substantial loads to which the harness was subjected. This information should be tracked in order to help
ensure worker safety and to provide a means of helping to demonstrate compliance with sections 11.9 and 11.10(3)(d). A log book or other
similar record can be an effective means of recording inspection information, and may have particular application to harnesses that are used on an
ongoing basis. The log book provides a record which, among other things, can assist with a determination of the appropriate point of removal from
service. Log book information needs to be specific to the equipment involved.
Removing equipment from service
Harnesses should be removed from service in circumstances such as the following:
Any part of the harness, including stitching, has been cut, stretched, frayed or otherwise damaged
The harness has been exposed to temperatures above 200 degrees F (93 degrees C), or other temperature specified by the
manufacturer. Note: The specified temperature is just below the boiling point of water.
The harness has been exposed to chemicals (e.g. solvents, acids, alkalis) that may affect the integrity of the harness
Any part of the harness has received a shock-load in excess of 1000 pounds (4.5 kilonewtons), or other maximum shock load
specified by the manufacturer. Note: a fall arrest system designed to meet the 4 G peak arrest criterion in the alternative
standard in this guideline is not likely to experience a shock load exceeding 1000 pounds, except if a worker's weight
exceeds 250 pounds (113 kg). Further, if the system includes a personal energy absorber (PEA), a person should not
experience a peak arrest force exceeding the criterion unless the PEA fully deploys so that the lanyard extends fully and
there is in an abrupt stop. Most PEAs deploy at an average force of 630 - 810 pounds (2.8 to 3.6 kN).
The age of the harness exceeds manufacturer specifications. For example, one supplier has specified a maximum 2 years of use
beyond the date of manufacture. Note: If a harness exceeds a specified use life, as an alternative to removal from service, the
user may wish to contact the manufacturer to see if the harness could be submitted for possible recertification.
Manufacturer instructions or standards to which the equipment is manufactured would otherwise require removal
With other equipment such as shackles, carabiners, lines, and deceleration control devices, equipment should be removed from service in
circumstances such as the following:
Equipment with moveable parts is not capable of proper movement
Any locking or other immobilizing device is not capable of performing its function
Any metal or other material has signs of deformation, cracks, kinking, stretching or significant wear
Any metal or other material shows signs of corrosion or other adverse chemical deterioration
Lines show any sign of fraying, kinking, bird caging, or other damage. Note section 15.25 of the Regulation lists wire rope rejection
 criteria. Those criteria are considered absolute minimums in terms of rejection.
Manufacturer instructions or standards to which the equipment is manufactured would otherwise require removal
Any component removed from service for cause should either be disposed of in such a manner that it cannot accidentally be re-used, or must be
identified in a manner that will ensure it is not used until repairs are complete and it is safe for further use, as required by section 4.3(3) of the
Regulation.

G11.3 Fall protection plan

Issued August 16, 2000; Revised January 1, 2005; Revised consequential to April 1, 2013 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.3 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) The employer must have a written fall protection plan for a workplace if
(a) work is being done at a location where workers are not protected by permanent guardrails, and from which a fall of 7.5 m (25 ft)
or more may occur, or
(b) section 11.2(5) applies.
(2) The fall protection plan must be available at the workplace before work with a risk of falling begins.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline outlines what is expected in a written fall protection plan.
Elements of a written fall protection plan
The plan should specify the following:
The fall hazards expected in each work area
The fall protection system or systems to be used in each area
The procedures to assemble, maintain, inspect, use, and disassemble the fall protection system or systems
The inspection requirements for the anchors and anchorage used and the respective rejection criteria (refer to OHS Guideline G11.10(0.1)
Fall protection anchors - Inspection and removal from service)
The procedures for rescue of a worker who has fallen and is suspended by a personal fall protection system or safety net, but is unable to
self-rescue
In certain locations and situations, the employer may meet the need for rescue procedures by participating in the Industrial High Angle Rope
Rescue Program discussed in OHS Guideline G4.13(3)(a) Industrial high angle rope rescue program.
Where a fall protection plan may not be required by the Regulation, the employer must still consider the need for rescue or evacuation under
section 4.13.

G11.4 Belts and harnesses

Issued January 1, 2005; Editorial Revision November 29, 2022

Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.4(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) A worker must wear a full body harness or other harness acceptable to the Board when using a personal fall protection system
for fall arrest.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to explain why belts should not be used as part of a fall arrest system as required by section 11.4(1) of the
Regulation.
Belts
Belts should not be used as body support in a fall arrest system due to the possibility of death or injury from the following causes:
Slipping out of a belt
Abdominal injuries
Back injuries
Effects on the body of extended static suspension in a belt
For an additional reference refer to the WorkSafeBC booklet: An Introduction to Personal Fall Protection Equipment.
Refer also to OHS Guideline G8.3: Ensuring adequate fit of protective equipment.
G11.5-1 Equipment standards

Issued January 1, 2005; Revised consequential to April 1, 2013 Regulatory Amendment; Revised April 27, 2016
Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.5 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Equipment used for a fall protection system must
(a) consist of compatible and suitable components,
(b) be sufficient to support the fall restraint or arrest forces, and
(c) meet, and be used in accordance with, an applicable CSA or ANSI standard in effect when the equipment was manufactured,
subject to any modification or upgrading considered necessary by the Board.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline lists applicable standards for fall protection systems and components.
Applicable standards
The following is a table of some standards that apply for fall protection equipment now commonly in use.
Fall Protection Equipment Standards

Standard
Standard Number Standard Title
Agency
ANSI A10.11 Construction and Demolition Operations - Personnel and Debris Nets
ANSI A14.3 American National Standard for Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements
ANSI Z359.0 Definitions for Fall Protection and Arrest
ANSI Z359.1 Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems and Components
ANSI Z359.2 Minimum Requirements for a Comprehensive Managed Fall Protection Program
ANSI Z359.3 Safety Requirements for Positioning and Travel Restraint Systems

ANSI Z359.4 Safety Requirements for Assisted-Rescue and Self-Rescue Systems, Subsystems and Components

ANSI Z359.6 Specifications and Design Requirements for Active Fall Protection Systems
ANSI Z359.12 Connecting Components for Personal Fall Arrest Systems
ANSI Z359.13 Personal Energy Absorbers and Energy Absorbing Lanyards
ANSI Z359.14 Safety Requirements for Self-Retracting Devices for Personal Fall Arrest and Rescue Systems
CSA CAN/CSA-Z259.10 Full Body Harnesses
CSA CAN/CSA-Z259.11 Shock Absorbers for Personal Fall Arrest Systems
CSA CAN/CSA-Z259.1 Safety Belts and Lanyards*
CSA Z259.2.1 Fall Arresters, Vertical Lifelines, and Rails
CSA Z259.2.2 Self-Retracting Devices for Personal Fall-Arrest Systems
CSA Z259.2.3 Descent Control Devices
CSA Z259.2.5 Fall Arresters and Vertical Lifelines
CSA Z259.12 Connecting Components for Personal Fall Arrest Systems (PFAS)
CSA Z259.15 Anchorage Connectors
CSA Z259.16 Design of Active Fall-Protection Systems

* Newer versions of this Standard are entitled "Body Belts ; Saddles for Work Positioning and Travel Restraint."
Under section 4.4 of the Regulation, WorkSafeBC can also recognize standards other than CSA or ANSI. Contact WorkSafeBC's Prevention
Practice, Quality, and Engineering department to request acceptance of other standards.
Types of equipment that do not have applicable standards still must meet the requirements of sections 11.5(a) and (b).
Applicable standards for fall protection anchors (refer to OHS Guideline G11.6-2 Anchor selection and uses)
For fall protection anchors associated with suspended equipment operations, CSA Z259.16 references CSA Z91 and CSA Z271.
Applicable standards for fall protection anchors that are not associated with suspended equipment operation include CSA Z259.16 and the
ANSI Z359 series of standards.

G11.5-2 Equipment standards - Vertical lifelines

Issued August 16, 2000; Revised January 1, 2005; Revised November 21, 2007; Revised April 1, 2013
Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.5 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states, in part:
Equipment used for a fall protection system must
(a) consist of compatible and suitable components,
(b) be sufficient to support the fall restraint or arrest forces, and
…
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to set out some factors to be considered in determining whether vertical lifelines are suitable and compatible for the
intended application, and are sufficient to support fall arrest forces that may be imposed.
Selecting vertical lifelines
Factors to be considered when selecting vertical lifelines include the following:
Compatibility with the other fall protection system components.
Only one worker is to be attached to a lifeline, unless the vertical lifeline is used as part of a ladder safety device on a fixed ladder.
The lifeline is to have a breaking strength specified by the manufacturer of at least 27 kN (6,000 lbs).
The lifeline is to be free of knots or splices except at its termination. A termination knot or splice should not reduce the breaking strength of
the lifeline to less than 22 kN (5,000 lbs).
The lifeline and any related components are to be selected so that the resulting lifeline system minimizes the swing-fall hazard.
A vertical lifeline is to extend to within 1.2 metres (4 feet) of ground level or other safe lower surface to which the worker might descend or
fall. The intent is to ensure that a worker on a suspended stage, such as a swing stage or boatswain's chair, can be secured to a lifeline
through the full range of travel of the staging unit.

Note: In some circumstances it is not practicable or safe for the lifeline to extend to within 1.2 metres of the lower landing spot.
For example, if a stage is rigged over an underground parking entrance and the lower end of the rope were to come within 1.2
metres of the roadway, there would be a danger of the rope being caught by a vehicle, unless the use of the access was blocked.
Blocking the access may not be practicable, in which case some means to terminate the lifeline rope at a safe distance above the
danger area should be used. The stage should also be rigged to prevent it from being lowered into a zone where traffic could be a
danger to the stage. A means to rescue workers also needs to be preplanned.

Where vertical lifelines are of substantial length, particularly if more than 91 metres (300 feet), added consideration needs to be given to
factors such as the elasticity of the line and the effects of wind loading. See below for more information on wind loading.

The longer the lifeline, the longer the total fall distance of a worker due to stretching of the line, with an increased risk that a worker may
contact a hard surface before a fall is arrested. Use of lifelines with low elasticity will help control such risks.
Wind loading
On the issue of wind loading, CSA Standard Z271-98, Safety Code for Suspended Elevating Platforms and CSA Z271-10, Safety Code for
Suspended Platforms restrict lifelines used with suspended staging to a maximum length of 150 metres (492 feet) if subject to wind conditions.
Note: Where suspension heights for swing stages, boatswain's chairs, or portable powered platforms are more than 91 metres (300 feet),
section 13.32(d) of the Regulation requires certification from a professional engineer in writing. For heights over 91 meters (300 feet)
WorkSafeBC recommends 30 km/h (19 mph) as the maximum wind speed in which to operate the staging. For shorter suspension heights
WorkSafeBC and the industry recommend, subject to a site specific evaluation, 40 km/h (25 mph) as a maximum wind speed, or a lower
speed where material being carried on the staging would create a sail effect, or a single point unit is used.

G11.5-3 Equipment standards - Lanyards

Issued January 1, 2005
Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.5 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states, in part:
Equipment used for a fall protection system must
(a) consist of compatible and suitable components,
(b) be sufficient to support the fall restraint or arrest forces, and
…
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to describe the use of shock absorbers as a component of a fall protection system and management of fall arrest
where shock absorbers are not used.
Landards and the use of shock absorbers
A shock absorber is to be used with the following:
A lanyard made of wire rope or other inelastic material in a fall arrest system
A wire rope vertical lifeline unless the lifeline is part of a ladder safety device
When a shock absorber is used in a fall arrest system, allowance should be made for the potential increase in the total fall distance. If a shock
absorber is used, a free fall of up to 2 metres (6.5 feet) is allowed, or the limit specified in the manufacturer's instructions, whichever is less.
If a synthetic fibre lanyard is used without a shock absorber, the fall arrest system should be arranged to limit the free fall of a worker to 1.2 metres
(4 feet).

G11.5-4 Equipment standards - Prusik sling/Triple sliding hitch

Issued August 16, 2000; Revised January 1, 2005

Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.5 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states, in part:
Equipment used for a fall protection system must
(a) consist of compatible and suitable components,
(b) be sufficient to support the fall restraint or arrest forces, and
…
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide criteria for assessing when a Prusik sling is a suitable and compatible part of a fall protection system and
sufficient to support the fall restraint forces that may be imposed.
Prusik sling
A Prusik sling may be used in place of a rope grab if all of the following criteria are met:
The Prusik sling is made using a piece of rope of synthetic fibre kernmantle construction, or equivalent, of at least 8 millimetre (1/3 inch)
diameter, which has the ends tied together using a double fisherman's knot (also known as a grapevine knot) to create an "endless loop"
The double fisherman's knot is tied as shown in Figure 1 below
The rope on which the Prusik sling is used (main rope or lifeline) meets the general requirements for a vertical lifeline and has a diameter at
least 2 millimetres (1/12 inch) larger than the diameter of the rope used to fashion the Prusik sling and
The Prusik sling is tied to the main rope by means of a minimum two-wrap Prusik knot, as shown in Figure 2 below
A Prusik sling may be used for purposes other than a rope grab. For example, a Prusik sling may be used to deflect an equipment suspension line
or a fall arrest line between its anchor and the drop location. This technique may be used to get the suspension or fall arrest line to approach and
go over the edge at the drop location at a right angle to the face of the structure, thus reducing the risk of a swing fall. This is illustrated in Figure 3
below.
A triple sliding hitch is not to be used as part of a personal fall protection system. A triple sliding hitch is essentially a Prusik knot tied using a piece
of rope that is not formed into an endless loop. It is shown in Figure 4 below.
Figure 1
Tying a Double Fisherman's Knot
Figure 2
Tying a Two-wrap Prusik Knot

Figure 3
Prusik Sling used to deflect line from Roof Anchor to drop location
Maximum angle between sling and line 120 deg.

Figure 4
Triple Sliding Hitch
The triple sliding hitch is not to be used as part of a personal fall protection system.
G11.5-5 Equipment standards - Double line system controlled descent devices

Issued August 16, 2000; Revised January 1, 2005

Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.5 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states, in part:
Equipment used for a fall protection system must
(a) consist of compatible and suitable components,
(b) be sufficient to support the fall restraint or arrest forces, and
…
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to set out some factors to be considered in determining whether a double line system controlled descent device
consists of suitable and compatible components, is sufficient to support fall arrest forces that may be imposed, and otherwise complies with the
Regulation.
Double line system
A double line system, where both the lifeline and equipment suspension line are rigged through a common control descent device, is acceptable
under sections 11.2 and 11.5 of the Regulation if the following system characteristics and procedures are implemented:
To ensure free fall is minimized, the system provides fall arrest and descent control by maintaining both suspension lines at approximately the
same tension during use.
The system facilitates self-rescue with only one line functional.
The system is used only by a worker who has been trained and has demonstrated an ability to safely use it.
The system uses ropes of a type recommended by the manufacturer of the control descent device, or uses two nylon kernmantle ropes
having a manufacturer's rated breaking strength of at least 27 kN (6,000 pounds);
Each line is independently anchored, or alternatively the two lines are secured to one anchor and secured back to another by means of a
minimum two-wrap Prusik sling.
The descent control device is appropriate for a double line system, and automatic stopping capability ("deadman" stop feature) is provided
by either a feature of the descent device or through use of a rope grab or Prusik sling.
The worker wears a body harness meeting the requirements of the Regulation and of a type appropriate for the work to be done.

G11.5-6 Equipment standards - Connecting equipment

Issued January 1, 2005

Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.5 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states, in part:
Equipment used for a fall protection system must
(a) consist of compatible and suitable components,
(b) be sufficient to support the fall restraint or arrest forces, and
 …
Purpose of guideline
The purposed of this guideline is to set out some factors to be considered when assessing the suitability of connecting equipment under sections
11.5(a) and (b) of the Regulation.
Connecting equipment
The following factors are to be considered for suitability of connecting equipment under sections 11.5(a) and (b):
A snap hook on a lanyard or lifeline is to be self-locking.
When in use, a carabiner or similar connecting hardware is to be secured to prevent inadvertent opening.
Carabiners, links, and rings are to have an ultimate load capacity of at least 22 kN (5,000 pounds) and are to be clearly marked with their
load capacity and with a means of identifying the manufacturer.

G11.5-7 Equipment standards - Protection against abrasion or burning

Issued August 16, 2000; Revised January 1, 2005

Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.5 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states, in part:
Equipment used for a fall protection system must
(a) consist of compatible and suitable components,
(b) be sufficient to support the fall restraint or arrest forces, and
…
Purpose of guideline
This guideline explains the need to protect components of fall protection systems from abrasion or burning in order for them to maintain sufficiency
to support fall restraint or fall arrest forces as required by section 11.5 of the Regulation.
Protection of components of fall protection system
A vertical lifeline, lanyard, or safety strap should be effectively protected at points of attachment and elsewhere, as necessary, to prevent chafing or
abrasion caused by contact with sharp or rough edges. When a tool is used that could sever, abrade, or burn a lifeline, lanyard, or safety strap, the
lifeline, lanyard, or safety strap should be made of wire rope.
A worker working near an energized conductor or in another work area where a conductive lifeline, lanyard, or safety strap cannot be used safely
need not use equipment of this type provided that two nonconductive lanyards or safety straps are used, or another effective means of fall
protection is used.

G11.6-1 Anchors

Issued January 1, 2005; Editorial Revision May 17, 2006; Revised consequential to April 1, 2013 Regulatory Amendment; Editorial Revision
August 15, 2023
Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.6 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) In a temporary fall restraint system, an anchor for a personal fall protection system must have an ultimate load capacity in any
direction in which a load may be applied of at least
(a) 3.5 kN (800 lbs), or
(b) four times the weight of the worker to be connected to the system.
(2) Each personal fall protection system that is connected to an anchor must be secured to an independent attachment point.
(3) In a temporary fall arrest system, an anchor for a personal fall protection system must have an ultimate load capacity in any
direction required to resist a fall of at least
(a) 22 kN (5 000 lbs), or
(b) two times the maximum arrest force.
(4) A permanent anchor for a personal fall protection system must have an ultimate load capacity in any direction required to resist a
fall of at least 22 kN (5 000 lbs).
Purpose of guideline
This guideline provides additional information for selecting anchors that are acceptable under section 11.6 of the Regulation.
Anchors
The Regulation defines an anchor as "a secure point of attachment for a lifeline or lanyard." Types of anchors under this definition include the
following:
1. A device that has been purposefully manufactured and installed as an anchor to support a personal fall protection system.
2. A substantial structure, such as a beam, column or similar substantial portion of the structure, selected as a point of anchorage where no
dedicated anchor device is available. These points of anchorage generally require some supplemental rigging, such as a sling, to allow the
anchorage connector of a personal fall protection system to connect to the anchorage.
Natural anchors, such as large well-rooted trees or rock outcroppings can be acceptable points of anchorage as well if deemed by a qualified
person to be able to withstand the forces that may be imposed by the fall protection system.
The actual strength of an anchor is dependent on the following:
The design of the anchor
The orientation of the anchor relative to the direction of loading
The condition of the anchor
The connection of the anchor to the supporting structure
The adequacy of the structure to resist the imposed loading
Anchors in a temporary fall arrest system
If an employer proposes to use an anchor for a personal fall protection system in a temporary fall arrest system with an ultimate load capacity of
less than 22 kN (5,000 lbs), the employer will need to be able to demonstrate that the anchor has an ultimate load capacity of two times the
maximum arrest force (MAF) at the particular location. In some cases, and especially on complex fall protection systems, a professional engineer
will design the system and calculate the expected MAF. WorkSafeBC considers the upper limit of an acceptable MAF to be 8 kN (1,800 lbs).
By using other methods to reduce the arrest forces in conjunction with the anchor, the employer may not need to obtain engineering advice. At
work locations where that expertise is not readily available, the employer may choose to use a manufactured product that indicates on the label and
within the product instructions what the MAF will be in the circumstances in which it is used. Shock absorbers are an effective way to reduce and
control the MAF that can occur in the event of a fall. In the absence of advice from a professional engineer, a shock absorber should be included
in a fall arrest system when connecting to an anchor that has a load capacity of less than 22 kN (5,000 lbs) but is designed to resist two times the
maximum arrest force.
As the calculation of the MAF in any situation can be complex and dependent to some degree on the particular circumstances of the place where
the equipment is used, simply using such a product may not suffice. A person selecting an energy absorber is to consider body weight, atmospheric
conditions, and fall distance in order to make the correct choice. For additional details on selecting appropriate components of a fall protection
system, refer to the applicable CSA or ANSI standard listed in OHS Guideline G11.5-1 Equipment Standards.
A temporary anchor should be removed upon completion of the work for which it was intended.

G11.6-2 Anchor selection and use

Issued August 16, 2000; Revised January 1, 2005; Editorial Revision May 17, 2006; Editorial Revision August 11, 2010; Revised consequential
to April 1, 2013 Regulatory Amendment; Editorial Revision April 14, 2022
Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.6 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) In a temporary fall restraint system, an anchor for a personal fall protection system must have an ultimate load capacity in any
direction in which a load may be applied of at least
(a) 3.5 kN (800 lbs), or
(b) four times the weight of the worker to be connected to the system.
(2) Each personal fall protection system that is connected to an anchor must be secured to an independent attachment point.
(3) In a temporary fall arrest system, an anchor for a personal fall protection system must have an ultimate load capacity in any
direction required to resist a fall of at least
(a) 22 kN (5 000 lbs), or
(b) two times the maximum arrest force.
(4) A permanent anchor for a personal fall protection system must have an ultimate load capacity in any direction required to resist a
fall of at least 22 kN (5 000 lbs).
Purpose of guideline
This guideline describes good practice with respect to anchor (also known as an anchorage connector) design, layout, selection, and use, and lists
standards for fall protection anchors.
Good practice with respect to anchor design, layout, selection, and use
The following are guidelines for good practice with respect to anchor design, layout, selection, and use:
A permanent anchor should be made of stainless steel, hot dipped galvanized steel, or other corrosion-resistant material having similar
structural properties.
An anchor should be located so a lifeline attached to it is not deflected over a guardrail or other part of the structure which has insufficient
strength to support the maximum potential load from a fall arrest. Note also OHS Guideline G11.5-7 Protection against abrasion or
burning on protecting the line from abrasion.
An anchor in concrete should be cast in place or through-bolted with a backing plate for adequate load distribution.
An anchor mounted on concrete with drilled in fasteners (expansion or adhesive type) should use a group of at least three fasteners
supporting an anchor plate, sized, and arranged so that if any one fastener in the group is assumed to be carrying no load, the remaining
fasteners will have a design capacity to carry the full design load of the anchor.
An anchor should be located on a line perpendicular to the building edge at the drop location to eliminate the swing fall hazard. Where this is
not practicable, an anchor may be offset so the angle between the line perpendicular to the building edge at the drop location and the lifeline
or primary single point suspension line is not greater than 25 degrees or 12.5 degrees as shown in Figures 1 and 2 below. The distance from
the perpendicular line to the anchor should be less than 3 metres (10 feet), as shown in Figures 1 and 2. As an alternative, the line may be
deflected using a Prusik sling, provided the sling is made and used as outlined in OHS Guideline G11.5-4 Equipment standards - Prusik
sling/Triple sliding hitch.
A temporary anchor for fall arrest may be established by wrapping a wire or synthetic fibre rope around the base of an anchorage, such as a
the base of rooftop penthouse (refer to OHS Guideline G11.1 Definitions - Anchor and anchorage). This is illustrated in Figure 3 below. If
the rope is installed so the sling angle at the point of attachment is not in excess of 120 degrees, rope with a rated breaking strength at least
equal to that of the lifeline may be used. If the sling angle is in excess of 120 degrees, wire rope of sufficient strength to provide an anchor
capability for the installed sling angle, of at least 22 kN (5,000 lbs), must be used. Only one fall arrest lifeline may be attached to each such
independent rope wrap.
If a lifeline is anchored to a parapet clamp on the parapet on the far side of the roof from the drop location, it may not be practicable to tie
back the parapet clamp as required by section 13.10. In such cases, the lifeline may be secured to a second anchor using a Prusik sling.
Independent attachment points (referred to as "connection points" in CSA standards)
Section 11.6(2) requires that each personal fall protection system that is connected to an anchor be secured to an independent attachment point.
This means that each personal fall protection system must be independently secured to an anchor.
Applicable standards for fall protection anchors (refer to OHS Guideline G11.5-1 Equipment standards)
Fall protection anchors associated with suspended equipment operations must meet and be used in accordance with the applicable requirements of
CAN/CSA Z271, Safety Code for Suspended Elevating Platforms and CSA Z91-02, Health and Safety Code for Suspended Equipment
Operations. Please also refer to WCB Standard WPL2, Design, Construction and Use of Crane Supported Work Platforms, 2004, for
standards on the design of lifeline anchors for personal fall protection systems for workers on platforms suspended from a crane or attached to a
crane boom.
Fall protection anchors not associated with suspended equipment operations must meet and be used in accordance with the requirements of the
applicable CSA or ANSI Standard. Acceptable standards from OHS Guideline G11.5-1 Equipment standards that include requirements for
anchors and anchorages are as follows:
CSA Z259.16 Design of Active Fall-Protection Systems
CSA Z259.15 Anchorage Connectors
ANSI Z359.0 Definitions for Fall Protection and Arrest
ANSI Z359.1 Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems and Components
ANSI Z359.2 Minimum Requirements for a Comprehensive Managed Fall Protection Program
Figure 1 (Example plan view of lifeline anchor location)
Figure 2 (Example plan view of single point suspension equipment anchor location)

Figure 3 (Plan view of a temporary anchor wrapped around an anchorage)

G11.6-3 Anchors - Cornice hook and parapet clamp use

Issued August 1, 1999; Revised January 1, 2005; Editorial Revision May 17, 2006; Revised consequential to April 1, 2013 Regulatory
Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.6 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) In a temporary fall restraint system, an anchor for a personal fall protection system must have an ultimate load capacity in any
direction in which a load may be applied of at least
(a) 3.5 kN (800 lbs), or
(b) four times the weight of the worker to be connected to the system.
(2) Each personal fall protection system that is connected to an anchor must be secured to an independent attachment point.
(3) In a temporary fall arrest system, an anchor for a personal fall protection system must have an ultimate load capacity in any
direction required to resist a fall of at least
(a) 22 kN (5 000 lbs), or
(b) two times the maximum arrest force.
(4) A permanent anchor for a personal fall protection system must have an ultimate load capacity in any direction required to resist a
fall of at least 22 kN (5 000 lbs).
Purpose of guideline
This guideline discusses the safe use of a cornice hook that functions as a portable or temporary anchor for a suspension line and parapet clamp
that functions as a portable or temporary anchor for a suspension line, lifeline, or tieback line.
Guideline
A cornice hook is a device that functions as a portable or temporary anchor for a suspension line. A parapet clamp is a device that functions as a
portable or temporary anchor for a suspension line, lifeline, or tieback line. As such, each hook or clamp should be designed for a minimum
ultimate load of 5,000 lbs. Generally the suspension rigging for each end of a swing stage or portable powered platform has a safe working load of
no less than 1,000 lbs. A factor of safety of four for ductile materials and five for brittle materials should be used, based on the breaking strength of
the material.
A cornice hook should be installed so that the load from the suspended equipment acts in a vertically downward direction. A cornice hook should
not be used as a lifeline or equipment tieback anchor.
A parapet clamp may be used where the load of the suspended equipment acts either vertically down (such as the suspension line for a swing
stage), or horizontally (such as for a suspension rope deflected over the edge of a roof and anchored to a clamp on the opposite edge of the roof).
If a parapet clamp is used to anchor a lifeline, or an equipment tieback line, a minimum ultimate strength of 5,000 lbs is required for the parapet
clamp and parapet as a system, in the direction which the lifeline or tieback will apply a load. The design of a parapet clamp should anticipate
usage for loads acting either downward or horizontally, and the instructions for its use should be clear on the allowable load configurations for the
unit.
A cornice hook or parapet clamp can only function effectively as an anchor if it is positioned on a part of the building or structure that is structurally
able to support the loads the clamp or hook will apply. If the parapet supporting a parapet clamp or cornice hook is made from cast-in-place
concrete or from substantial precast elements, generally structural adequacy is not a problem. If the parapet supporting parapet clamps or cornice
hooks is made from masonry wall or brick, or light wood framing finished with stucco, the load from the clamp or hook should be distributed
through the use of adequate blocking. A 2x8 plank at least 4 feet long should be secured horizontally to the inside face of the parapet so the load
from the hook or clamp is distributed over a length of the parapet. If a parapet is deteriorated, cracked, or shows other evidence of structural
weakness, it should not be used for supporting parapet clamps or cornice hooks.

G11.7 Temporary horizontal lifelines

Issued August 16, 2000; Revised January 1, 2005; Editorial Revision May 17, 2006
Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.7 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
A temporary horizontal lifeline system may be used if the system is
(a) manufactured for commercial distribution and installed and used in accordance with the written instructions from the manufacturer
or authorized agent, and the instructions are readily available in the workplace,
(b) installed and used in accordance with written instructions certified by a professional engineer, and the instructions are readily
available in the workplace, or
(c) designed, installed and used in a manner acceptable to the Board.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline discusses "readily available" under sections 11.7(a) and 11.7(b) and describes an acceptable temporary horizontal lifeline system for
the purpose of section 11.7(c).
Readily available
Under section 11.7(a) if there are any written instructions from the manufacturer or authorized agent, the written instructions need to be readily
available. Likewise, under 11.7(b), if there are any written instructions certified by a professional engineer, they must be readily available.
Design, installation, and use of temporary horizontal lifeline systems in a manner acceptable to WorkSafeBC
For the purpose of section 11.7(c), a temporary horizontal lifeline system for fall restraint is acceptable if it provides an ultimate load capacity of at
least 3.5 kN (800 lbs) for each worker connected to it. "Ultimate load capacity" is determined with the design loads being applied perpendicular to
the span of the line and at critical locations for sizing the components.
A temporary horizontal lifeline system used for fall arrest is acceptable under section 11.7(c) if it meets the following requirements:
The horizontal lifeline is a minimum 12 millimetres (1/2 inch) diameter wire rope having a breaking strength specified by the manufacturer of
at least 89 kN (20,000 lbs).
The horizontal lifeline is free of splices except at the terminations.
Connecting hardware such as shackles and turnbuckles has an ultimate load capacity of at least 71 kN (16,000 lbs).
The span is at least 6 metres (20 feet) and not more than 18 metres (60 feet).
End anchors have an ultimate load capacity of at least 71 kN (16,000 lbs).
The horizontal lifeline has an unloaded sag of approximately the span length divided by 60.
The elevation of the line at any point is at least 1 metre (39 inches) above the working surface.
The free fall distance is limited to 1.2 metres (4 feet).
A minimum of 3.5 metres (12 feet) of unobstructed clearance is available below the working surface.
No more than three workers are secured to the horizontal lifeline.
The horizontal lifeline is positioned so it does not impede the safe movement of workers.

G11.8 Requirements for engineering - Permanent horizontal lifelines

Issued January 1, 2005

Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.8 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
The following types of equipment and systems, and their installation, must be certified by a professional engineer:
(a) permanent anchors,
(b) anchors with multiple attachment points,
(c) permanent horizontal lifeline systems, and
(d) support structures for safety nets.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to explain the requirements for the drawings and instructions to be certified by a professional engineer with respect
to a permanent horizontal lifeline system and its installation, pursuant to section 11.8(c) of the Regulation.
Drawings and instructions for permanent horiontal lifelines
The drawings and instructions required to be certified by a professional engineer should show the following:
The layout in plan and elevation, including anchor locations, installation specifications, anchor design, and detailing
Horizontal lifeline system specifications, including permissible free fall distance, clearance to obstructions below, and rope size, breaking
strength, termination details, initial sag, or tension
The number of workers permitted to connect to the lifeline, and maximum arrest force to each worker

G11.9 Inspection and maintenance - Fibre rope suspension

Issued August 1, 1999; Revised January 1, 2005

Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.9 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Equipment used in a fall protection system must be
(a) inspected by a qualified person before use on each workshift,
(b) kept free from substances and conditions that could contribute to its deterioration, and
 (c) maintained in good working order.
Standard excerpt
WCB Standard WPL 3-2004 states:
4. Minimum Breaking Strength
…
(4) A rope used to suspend a boatswain's chair by other than a block and tackle must be a synthetic rope that has a minimum
breaking strength of 27 kN (6,000 lbs).
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to outline that section 11.9 of the Regulation is required to ensure a fibre rope strength of 27kN is maintained
before use on each workshift.
Breaking strength
A common question is why a rope strength of 27 kN is required, compared with the required anchor strength of 22 kN. The "breaking strength" of
rope means the manufacturer's specified minimum (or nominal) strength of new rope under a straight pull test condition. The 5 kN difference
between rope strength and anchor strength is to allow for losses in rope strength due to factors such as the rope terminations (such as knots or
splices), the rope running over pulleys or other small radius surfaces, wear within generally accepted limits, and deterioration in the rope from
regular use up to the time when rejection criteria dictate the rope be removed from service.

G11.10(0.1) Fall protection anchors - Inspection and removal from service

Issued consequential to April 1, 2013 Regulatory Amendment

Regulatory excerpt
Section 11.10(0.1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
If, at any time, a permanent anchor does not meet the requirements of section 11.5(c), the anchor must not be used until it has been
inspected and recertified, by a professional engineer, as meeting the requirements of section 11.5(c).
Section 11.5(c) of the Regulation states:
Equipment used for a fall protection system must
(c) meet, and be used in accordance with, an applicable CSA or ANSI standard in effect when the equipment was manufactured,
subject to any modification or upgrading considered necessary by the Board.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide guidance for inspection of fall protection anchors and when they must be removed from service.
Instructions from applicable standards
Applicable standards for inspection and removal from service of fall protection anchors include the following:
CSA Z259.15 Anchorage Connectors
CSA Z259.16 Design of Active Fall-Protection Systems
ANSI Z359.2 Minimum requirements for a Comprehensive Managed Fall Protection Program
Some useful information from the standards is reproduced in this guideline. The entire standard should be consulted for complete requirements. The
standards specify that the manufacturer's instructions are to be followed, or, in the case of an engineered system, the engineer's instructions for the
removal from service of fall protection anchors.
Both CSA Z259.15 and Z259.16 require that anchorage systems be provided with instructions for inspection, maintenance, and retirement of the
system and all of its components and that employers follow the recommended frequencies and procedures for inspection and maintenance. In
addition, there are specified criteria for removal of an anchorage connector from service if it has deformed from its original installed configuration.
CSA also specifies that an anchor is not to be altered, relocated, or modified with additional anchorage connectors.
ANSI Z359.2 specifies inspections by an authorized person prior to use and at least annually by a qualified or competent person in accordance
with the manufacturer's or a qualified person's instructions. In addition, this standard recommends recertification of anchorage systems at regular
intervals. The design, type, location, size of structural members, the type of anchorage connector, and the environment and weather conditions
dictate how often such an anchorage system should be inspected and re-certified.
ANSI Z359.2 specifies that a fall protection anchorage system is to be removed from service when any inspection reveals that it may no longer
serve the required function, that it may be unsafe due to damage or wear, or if the required inspection interval has been exceeded.
Contents
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

G12.2 Safeguarding requirements for dynamometers [Retired]

G12.3 Safeguarding requirement - Alternative standard
G12.11 Operating controls (portable powered tools, mobile equipment)

GUARDING MECHANICAL POWER TRANSMISSION PARTS

G12.20 Reach distance to overhead power transmission parts

CONVEYORS

G12.28(3) Emergency stopping devices

POWER PRESSES, BRAKE PRESSES AND SHEARS

G12.29 Power presses, brake presses, and shears - Standards

G12.31 Exception for custom work

POWDER ACTUATED TOOLS

G12.56 (and 4.3(1)&(2)) Powder actuated tools - Use and service in accordance with manufacturer's instructions [Retired]

WOODWORKING TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

G12.59 Removing guards

MOBILE CHIPPERS

G12.70 Panic bars on driven-feed chippers [Withdrawn]

AUTOMOTIVE LIFTS AND OTHER VEHICLE SUPPORTS

G12.74-1 Automotive lifts and other vehicle support standards - Evidence of compliance
G12.74-2 Automotive lifts and other vehicle support standards - Applicable standards
G12.74-3 Automotive lifts and other vehicle support standards - Alternate acceptable standard
G12.76 Operation
G12.77 Records
G12.78 Inspection and testing

MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

G12.83 Industrial robots

ABRASIVE BLASTING AND HIGH PRESSURE WASHING

G12.102(1) Abrasive blasting cleanup

WELDING, CUTTING AND ALLIED PROCESSES

G12.120 Reverse gas flow and flashback prevention

G12.124 Respiratory protection during specific short duration welding, burning, or similar operations and during emergency work

RAIL CAR MOVEMENT

G12.168 Blue flag rule [Retired]

PRESSURE VESSELS

G12.173(1) Pressure vessels

ROLL-ON/ROLL-OFF CONTAINERS

G12.175 Container safety standard for roll-on/roll-off containers

Guidelines Part 12 - General Requirements

G12.2 Safeguarding requirements for dynamometers

Issued September 1999; Retired consequential to May 1, 2017 regulatory amendment

G12.3 Safeguarding requirement - Alternative standard

Issued November 21, 2006

Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.3 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
The application, design, construction and use of safeguards, including an opening in a guard and the reach distance to a hazardous
part, must meet the requirements of CSA Standard Z432-94, Safeguarding of Machinery .
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation states:
(2) When this Regulation requires a person to comply with
(a) a publication, code or standard of the Board or another agency, the person may, as an alternative, comply with another
publication, code or standard acceptable to the Board...
Purpose of guideline
Section 12.3 of the Regulation requires that safeguards be applied, designed, constructed and used in accordance with CSA Standard Z432-94,
Safeguarding of Machinery. Section 4.4(2)(a) permits WorkSafeBC to accept another standard to be used for the safeguarding of machinery.
This guideline is to specify, in the case of section 12.3 of the Regulation , an alternate standard acceptable to WorkSafeBC, and to summarize the
differences between the standards.
Acceptance of CSA Standard Z432-04, Safeguarding of Machinery
A person that is required to comply with CSA Standard Z432-94, Safeguarding of Machinery may comply with CSA Standard Z432-04,
Safeguarding of Machinery as an alternative standard. (Note: For a copy of CSA Standard Z432-04, contact CSA at 604-244-6652 or
http://shop.csa.ca/page/home, or your local library.)
Additional information
An updated edition of CSA Standard Z432 was prompted by changing technology and at the request of regulators, employers, manufacturers,
and labour representatives for a document that would reflect current trends concerning operator and equipment safety.
CSA Standard Z432-04 is expanded in scope compared to the earlier edition published in 1994. It now incorporates parts of new international
standards on machinery design and performance (e.g. ISO 12100 Parts 1 and 2, ISO 14121, ANSI B11 TR3, and BSI PD 5304), and provides
additional information for the identification of hazards, including non-mechanical hazards. This newer standard also contains expanded
methodology to perform comprehensive risk assessment and control.

G12.11 Operating controls (portable powered tools, mobile equipment)

Effective September 1999; Editorial Revision May 6, 2011; Editorial Revision September 6, 2018; Editorial Revision consequential to the
September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.11(2) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(2) Portable powered tools and mobile equipment must have operating controls conforming to an appropriate standard acceptable to
the Board.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide a list of standards that are acceptable to WorkSafeBC for the purposes of section 12.11(2) of the
Regulation.
Standards acceptable to WorkSafeBC
The following standards are acceptable to WorkSafeBC under this section for portable powered tools:
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.71.1-M89 Portable Electric Tools
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.72.2-M89 Electric Bench Tools
BS 5304:1988 British Standard Code of Practice for Safety of Machinery
ANSI/UL 45 Standard for Safety, Portable Electric Tools
ANSI/UL 987 Standard for Safety, Stationary and Fixed Electric Tools
ISO 447 Machine Tools — Direction of Operation of Controls
 ANSI B186.1-1984 Safety Code for Portable Air Tools
CAN/CSA-Z431-M89 (IEC 73-1984) Colours of Indicator Lights and Push Buttons
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 195-M1987 Motor Operated Food Processing Appliances (Household and Commercial)
ANSI Z50.1-1997 Safety Requirements for Bakery Equipment
BSI/EN 454 Food Processing Machinery-Planetary Mixer-Safety and Hygiene Requirements
ANSI SNT-101-1993 Portable, Compressed-Air-Actuated Fastener Driving Tools-Safety Requirements
CAN/CSA-Z166.1, Z166.2-M85 Powder Actuated Tools
The following Part II standards specify construction, marking, and test requirements as per B.C. Electrical Code 2015 requirements for hand-held
motor-operated electric tools.
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60745-1-04 Hand-held Motor-Operated Electric Tools – Safety Part 1: General Requirements
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60745-2-1-04 Part 2: Particular Requirements for Drills
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60745-2-2-04 Part 2: Particular Requirements for Screwdrivers and Impact Wrenches
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60745-2-4-04 Part 2: Particular Requirements for Sanders
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60745-2-5-04 Part 2: Particular Requirements for Circular Saws and Circular Knives
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60745-2-6-04 Part 2: Particular Requirements for Hammers
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60745-2-8-04 Part 2: Particular Requirements for Shears and Nibblers
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60745-2-9-04 Part 2: Particular Requirements for Tappers
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60745-2-11-04 Part 2: Particular Requirements for Reciprocating Saws
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60745-2-14-04 Part 2: Particular Requirements for Planers
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60745-2-17-04 Part 2: Particular Requirements for Routers and Trimmers
Guidelines Part 12 - Guarding Mechanical Power Transmission Parts

G12.20 Reach distance to overhead power transmission parts

Issued September 1999; Revised February 11, 2021

Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.20(2) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
An installation of the type covered by subsection (1) in place before January 1, 1999, which has unguarded parts more than 2.1 m (7
ft) but less than 2.5 m (8 ft) above the floor, walkway or platform may have those portions remain unguarded unless the work
process presents an undue risk to workers if those portions remain unguarded, or until such time as the installation is subsequently
overhauled or renovated.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to explain that an employer is not required to guard moving parts which are above the height limit of the previous
requirement (Regulation prior to 1999 required guarding at 2.1 m), but below the limit of the Regulation (2.5 m), provided a risk assessment
shows no undue risk to workers from the moving parts.
Background
The key elements to be determined by the risk assessment are the likelihood or probability of accidental contact with the overhead moving parts,
and the likely outcome of a contact in terms of the severity of injury. The ISO 31000 Risk Management standard provides guidance for doing risk
assessments.
Guidelines Part 12 - Conveyors

G12.28(3) Emergency stopping devices

Issued September 1999; Revised February 11, 2021

Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.28(3) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
If a conveyor emergency stopping system uses a pull wire, the system must activate by a pull of the wire in any direction, or by a
slack cable condition.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to outline the requirements for an emergency stop pull wire system.
Background
Many conventional emergency stop pull wire systems used for conveyors in industry use a switch that does not comply with the full requirements of
this section because the switch will not activate if the pull wire is slack or broken, or if a pull on the wire is in the direction away from the dead end
(anchor end).
Requirements
Slack or broken wire protection can be provided by installing a switch that is held by tension in the neutral or armed position, and is activated
either by a pull on the wire, or by the wire being cut or going slack. The second concern of a pull against the dead (or anchored) end can be fixed
by installing a spring counter-balanced switch that activates when moved in either direction from the neutral position. (Two springs allow the switch
to move in either direction from the neutral and therefore activate the switch.) An alternative means would be to install spring-loaded pull switches
at each end of the activation cable.
Guidelines Part 12 - Power Presses, Brake Presses and Shears

G12.29 Power presses, brake presses, and shears - Standards

Issued September 1999; Editorial Revision April 2005; Revised February 11, 2021
Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.29 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Point of operation safeguarding, and the design, construction and reliability of operating controls of a power press, brake press,
ironworker or shear must meet the requirements of the following applicable standard:
(a) CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z142-M90, Code for Punch Press and Brake Press Operation: Health, Safety, and Guarding
Requirements;
(b) ANSI Standard B11.4-1993, American National Standard for Machine Tools - Shears - Safety Requirements for
Construction, Care, and Use;
(c) ANSI Standard B11.5-1988(R1994), American National Standard for Machine Tools - Ironworkers - Safety Requirements
for Construction, Care, and Use.
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation states:
(2) When this Regulation requires a person to comply with
(a) a publication, code or standard of the Board or another agency, the person may, as an alternative, comply with another
publication, code or standard acceptable to the Board,
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide guidance that section 4.4(2)(a) permits the reliance on other standards which are acceptable to
WorkSafeBC.
Alternate standard
Under section 4.4(2)(a), WorkSafeBC recognizes ANSI Standard B11.1-1988(R1994), American National Standard for Machine Tools -
Mechanical Power Presses - Safety Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use, as a standard acceptable to WorkSafeBC for "point of
operation safeguarding" and "control reliability" for a mechanical (flywheel) power press.

G12.31 Exception for custom work

Issued September 1999; Revised March 7, 2011

Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.31 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
The safeguarding for the point of operation of a brake press may be removed if custom or different bends are being done with each
cycle of the machine, provided that safe work procedures are followed, and safeguarding is replaced upon completion of such
custom work.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline explains the application of section 12.31 of the Regulation with respect to the safeguarding of brake presses in situations where the
work being performed requires the temporary removal or disabling of safeguarding devices.
Exception for custom work
The point of operation of a brake press must meet the safeguarding requirements of the applicable standard referenced in section 12.29 of the
Regulation. The required safeguarding is intended to control the hazards normally associated with the operation of a particular brake press.
There are situations where the workpiece is not compatible with the safeguarding that is effective with the vast majority of operations performed on
the brake press. For example, additional bends may be performed on the same workpiece on the same press, where a subsequent bend breaks
the beam of the light curtain, stopping the machine. Similarly, a workpiece may have to be initially formed into a shape that stops the machine
during the press cycle by breaking a beam of light on the light curtain.
In these situations, under section 12.31, the minimum number of safeguarding devices required to facilitate this work may be temporarily disabled
(or removed) to accommodate the work. For example, a light curtain may have several beams blanked (turned off) to allow for the workpiece to
be formed. Where possible, alternative means of safeguarding should be used to replace those removed.
It is important to emphasize that only the minimum number of safeguarding devices may be removed as are required to accommodate the work
being done. When any of the safeguarding devices are removed or defeated, safe work procedures that address the new or additional hazards
created by the removal or defeating of any of the safeguarding devices, must be developed and followed by the worker(s).
As soon as the workpiece is changed to one of different dimensions and/or a different combination or sequence of bends are being formed, all the
safeguarding devices previously removed or disabled are to be replaced and enabled.
Guidelines Part 12 - Powder Actuated Tools

G12.56 (and 4.3(1)&(2))Powder actuated tools - Use and service in accordance with manufacturer's instructions

Effective April 1, 2001; Editorial Revision April 2005; Retired February 11, 2021
This guideline is no longer required.
Guidelines Part 12 - Woodworking Tools and Equipment

G12.59 Removing guards

Issued September 21, 2011

Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.59(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
If the use of a guard on woodworking machinery is clearly impracticable for a specific operation, the guard may be removed, but an
appropriate pushstick, jig, feather board or similar device must be used to prevent the operator encroaching into the cutting area, and
upon completion of the operation the guard must be replaced.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline provides guidance on determining whether it is "clearly impracticable" to perform a specific operation on a table saw, sliding table
saw, panel saw, or other similar woodworking machinery with the blade guard in place.
Temporary removal of guards on table saws, sliding table saws, panel saws, and similar woodworking machinery
The Regulation allows for the removal of the guard where its use is clearly impracticable for a specific operation. That is, the guard may only be
removed when it is clear that there is no reasonable means of performing a specific operation with the guard in place and functioning.
Prior to considering the removal of the guard, the specific operation should be assessed to determine if the equipment is appropriate for the
particular task. That is, the need to remove the guard to complete the specific operation may indicate that the equipment chosen is unsuitable for
the particular operation. If it is determined that the equipment is suitable, additional factors should then be considered to establish if keeping the
guard in place is clearly impracticable. Factors include, but are not limited to the following:
The cost and availability of effective aftermarket guards, fences, or other devices that can be used in conjunction with or in place of the
manufacturer's guard and/or fence.
The capability of the employer to fabricate effective jigs or other devices that can be used in conjunction with or in place of either the
manufacturer's guard or an aftermarket guard.
The frequency of the particular cutting operation. The greater the frequency, the more reasonable it is for an employer to purchase and/or
fabricate guards, fences, jigs, or other devices such that the specific operation can be completed with a guard in place.
The devices or combination of devices chosen must effectively prevent the operator from encroaching into the cutting area. Once the particular
cutting operation is completed, the guard must be reinstalled
Guideline Part 12 - Mobile Chippers

G12.70 Panic bars on driven-feed chippers

Withdrawn August 12, 2009

Guidelines Part 12 - Automotive Lifts and Other Vehicle Supports

G12.74-1 Automotive lifts and other vehicle support standards – Evidence of compliance

Issued August 15, 2006; Revised September 21, 2012; Revised January 29, 2014; Editorial Revision consequential to August 22, 2022
Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.74 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) An automotive lift must meet the requirements of ANSI Standard ANSI/ALI ALCTV-1998, American National Standard for
Automotive Lifts - Safety Requirements for Construction, Testing and Validation.
(2) The operation, inspection and maintenance of an automotive lift must meet the requirements of ANSI Standard ANSI/ALI
ALOIM-2000, American National Standard for Automotive Lifts - Safety Requirements for Operation, Inspection and
Maintenance.
(3) Portable automotive lifting devices and vehicle supports must meet the requirements of the applicable section of ANSI Standard
ASME PALD-2003, Safety Standard for Portable Automotive Lifting Devices.
Section 1.1 of the Regulation defines a professional engineer as follows:
"professional engineer" means a person who is registered under the Professional Governance Act as a professional engineer or
professional engineer licensee;
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide guidance on acceptable evidence that automotive lifts meet the required ANSI standard and on the
operation, inspection, and maintenance of lifts.
Evidence that lifts meet the requirements of ANSI standard ANS/ALI ALCTV-1998
Automotive lift manufacturers would typically ensure their lifts meet the ANSI standard by having their lifts certified at the manufacturer's facility by
a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). Certification cannot be performed after installation because requirements for such things as
material composition, stress calculations, and welder's qualifications cannot be verified.
The U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration provides a list of NRTLs at www.osha.gov/dts/otpca/nrtl/nrtllist.html.
Further information regarding certification of automotive lifts can be found at the website of the Automotive Lift Institute www.autolift.org/faq.php.
Refer to OHS Guideline G12.74-2 Automotive lifts and other vehicle support standards - Applicable standards.
Operation, inspection, and maintenance of lifts as required by Regulation section 12.74(2)
ANSI/ALI ALOIM-2000 is a companion standard to the ANSI/ALI ALCTV-1998. The ANSI/ALI ALOIM-2000 standard provides guidance to
owners or employers with regard to the operation, inspection, and maintenance of installed automotive lifts. The ANSI/ALI ALOIM-2000 standard
specifies the required qualifications, training, reporting, and documentation for operators, inspectors, and maintenance personnel. This ANSI/ALI
ALOIM-2000 standard also provides sample forms and checklists to help the owners or employers comply with the requirements in the standard.
Evidence of compliance to standard ANSI/ALI ALOIM-2000 consists of ongoing documentation prepared by the automotive lift owner, employer,
and qualified inspector who will verify that the requirements of the standard have been met.

G12.74-2 Automotive lifts and other vehicle support standards – Applicable standards

Issued September 22, 2006; Editorial Revision February 15, 2019; Editorial Revision September 25, 2019
Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.74 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) An automotive lift must meet the requirements of ANSI Standard ANSI/ALI ALCTV-1998, American National Standard for
Automotive Lifts - Safety Requirements for Construction, Testing and Validation.
(2) The operation, inspection and maintenance of an automotive lift must meet the requirements of ANSI Standard ANSI/ALI
ALOIM-2000, American National Standard for Automotive Lifts - Safety Requirements for Operation, Inspection and
Maintenance.
(3) Portable automotive lifting devices and vehicle supports must meet the requirements of the applicable section of ANSI Standard
ASME PALD-2003, Safety Standard for Portable Automotive Lifting Devices.
Section 4.4(1) of the Regulation states:
If this Regulation requires that a tool, machine or piece of equipment manufactured before April 15, 1998 must meet a code or
standard, the tool, machine or piece of equipment must conform to the edition of the code or standard referred to in this Regulation or
the edition of the code or standard published at the time the tool, machine or piece of equipment was manufactured, subject only to
the modification or upgrading specified to be necessary in this Regulation or in a directive issued by the Board.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline lists the standards applicable to automotive lift equipment manufactured prior to the date of the standards referenced in section 12.74
of the Regulation, and shows the design of decals used to verify certification to the standard.
In addition, the guideline provides guidance for the certification of equipment where a standard is not available, both for automotive lifts and for
portable automotive lifting devices.
Applicable standards
Automotive lifts, portable automotive lifting devices, and vehicle supports must meet the requirements of section 12.74 of the Regulation. For
equipment manufactured prior to the year of the standards listed, section 4.4(1) of the Regulation states that equipment must meet the
requirements of the edition of the standard published at the time the equipment was manufactured.
One or more of the following standards apply to automotive lifts and other portable automotive lifting devices, depending on the make, model, and
year of the equipment. The standards are published by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), Automotive Lift Institute (ALI), and
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
For automotive lifts the applicable standards are the following:
A. ANSI B153.1-1974 Safety Requirements for the Construction, Care, and Use of Automotive Lifts
B. ANSI B153.1-1981 Safety Requirements for the Construction, Care, and Use of Automotive Lifts
C. ANSI/ALI B153.1-1990 American National Standard for Automotive Lifts - Safety Requirements for the Construction, Care, and Use
D. ANSI/ALI ALOIM -1994 American National Standard for Automotive Lifts - Safety Requirements for Operation, Inspection and
Maintenance
E. ANSI/ALI ALCTV -1998 American National Standard for Automotive Lifts - Safety Requirements for Construction, Testing and
Validation
F. ANSI/ALI ALOIM -2000 American National Standard for Automotive Lifts - Safety Requirements for Operation, Inspection and
Maintenance
For portable automotive lifting devices the applicable standards are the following:
G. ANSI Standard ASME PALD-1980 Safety Standard for Portable Automotive Lifting Devices
H. ANSI Standard ASME PALD-1993 Safety Standard for Portable Automotive Lifting Devices
I. ANSI Standard ASME PALD-1997 Safety Standard for Portable Automotive Lifting Devices
J. ANSI Standard ASME PALD-2003 Safety Standard for Portable Automotive Lifting Devices
These standards are available from Automotive Lift Institute (ALI).
Evidence of compliance
OHS Guideline G12.74-1 provides information on the acceptable forms of evidence that show automotive lifts meet the applicable standard.
Automotive lifts are typically labelled to show compliance with one of the standards listed above. Examples of the decals are shown below.
Automotive lift devices manufactured since 1998
The following decals indicate compliance with the ANSI/ALI standards for automotive lifts built since 1998:
ALI Certified – Electrical & Mechanical (U.S. & Canada)

ALI Certified – Mechanical Only (U.S. & Canada)

Automotive lift devices manufactured from 1990 to 1997
The following decals indicate compliance with the ANSI/ALI standards for automotive lifts built from 1990 through 1997:

Automotive lift devices manufactured from 1974 to 1989

Automotive lifts manufactured from 1974 through 1989 may not have a compliance decal; however, evidence of compliance may be in the form of
a "Statement of Compliance" found in the manufacturer's labels, invoices, or sales literature. This statement reads as follows:
This automotive lift conforms to the requirements of American National Standard B153.1, developed cooperatively with the
industry and those substantially concerned with its scope and provisions. Responsibility for the construction of this product
to the standard is assumed by the manufacturer.
For automotive lifts manufactured from 1974 to 1989 if the manufacturer cannot confirm that the equipment meets an ANSI/ALI standard, the
process outlined below, (for those manufactured prior to 1974), may be followed.
Automotive lifts manufactured prior to 1974
The standards noted above in this guideline do not apply to automotive lifts manufactured prior to 1974. For these lifts, the employer must still
ensure compliance with the requirements of the Regulation, in particular, sections 4.3, 4.5, 4.8, and applicable sections of Part 12. In short, this
means that with the assistance of a professional engineer and a qualified automotive lift inspector, the employer must ensure each of the following:
The lift is safe to use and written instructions are provided that explain how to use it safely.
A professional engineer specifies how to install, inspect, test, repair, and maintain the lift.
Any modifications (e.g., wheel chocks, swing arm restraints) are certified by a professional engineer.
A professional engineer certifies the rated load capacity of the lift.
Compliance with sections 12.75 through 12.80 of the Regulation.
Portable automotive lifting devices
Portable automotive lifting devices (PALDs) must meet one of the standards G, H, I, or J listed earlier in this guideline. The requirements of these
standards can be summarized as follows:
1. The rated capacity must be marked on the PALD.
2. The original manufacturer or supplier must be identified on the PALD.
3. Manufacturer's (or supplier's) safety signs/labels must be affixed to each PALD. Examples of safety markings and messages for specific
types of PALDs are shown in paragraph 3.1 of each part of the standard (G, H, I, or J).
4. Provide instructions on how to operate the device, including safety messages, maintenance, and inspection procedures.
 5. Refer to Parts 1 through 18 of the applicable standard for safety markings and messages specific to each type of device and for the
performance requirements for each device.
Portable automotive lifting devices that do not meet the requirements listed above, or are manufactured prior to 1980, must be certified by a
professional engineer and have written instructions explaining how to use them safely.
Any equipment that has been altered, appears damaged in any way, is worn, or operates abnormally must be removed from service. Such
equipment may be repaired by the manufacturer's or supplier's authorized repair facility, or following instructions of a professional engineer.

G12.74-3 Automotive lifts and other vehicle support standards - Alternate acceptable standard

Issued September 22, 2015; Editorial Revision November 21, 2017

Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.74 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) An automotive lift must meet the requirements of ANSI Standard ANSI/ALI ALCTV-1998, American National Standard for
Automotive Lifts – Safety Requirements for Construction, Testing and Validation.
(2) The operation, inspection and maintenance of an automotive lift must meet the requirements of ANSI Standard ANSI/ALI
ALOIM-2000, American National Standard for Automotive Lifts -- Safety Requirements for Operation, Inspection and
Maintenance.
(3) Portable automotive lifting devices and vehicle supports must meet the requirements of the applicable section of ANSI Standard
ASME PALD-2003, Safety Standard for Portable Automotive Lifting Devices.
Section 4.4(2) of the Regulation states in part:
(2) When this Regulation requires a person to comply with
(a) a publication, code or standard of the Board or another agency, the person may, as an alternative, comply with another
publication, code or standard acceptable to the Board
…
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to specify an alternate standard to the one listed in section 12.74(1) of the Regulation for automotive lifts.
Background Information
Section 12.74(1) of the Regulation requires automotive lifts to meet the requirements of ANSI Standard ANSI/ALI ALCTV-1998, American
National Standard for Automotive Lifts -- Safety Requirements for Construction, Testing and Validation. Section 4.4(2)(a) of the
Regulation permits WorkSafeBC to accept another standard as an alternate standard.
Acceptable standard
WorkSafeBC has determined that the European Standard EN 1493:2010 Vehicle Lifts Standard is an acceptable alternate standard for
automotive lifts. If an automotive lift meeting this standard is installed, the employer must ensure that any electrical components are either Canadian
Standards Association (CSA) approved or meet the BC Safety Authority's (operating as Technical Safety BC) Electrical Safety Regulation,
enacted under the Safety Standards Act.

G12.76 Operation

Issued August 15, 2006; Editorial Revision November 21, 2017; Editorial Revision February 15, 2019
Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.74(2) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(2) The operation, inspection and maintenance of an automotive lift must meet the requirements of ANSI Standard ANSI/ALI
ALOIM-2000, American National Standard for Automotive Lifts - Safety Requirements for Operation, Inspection and Maintenance.
Section 12.76 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Operation, inspection, repair, maintenance and modification of an automotive lift, portable automotive lifting device, or other vehicle
support must be carried out according to the manufacturer's instructions or the written instructions of a professional engineer.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to describe circumstances where automotive lifts may not be able to meet the requirements stated in
section 12.74(2) and where compliance with section 12.76 of the Regulation provides an acceptable alternative. It also describes some important
differences between successive editions of the ANSI standards for automotive lifts.
Section 12.76 as an alternative to section 12.74(2)
An owner, employer, or other person is expected to comply with section 12.74(2) of the Regulation (Standards) with regard to the operation,
inspection, and maintenance of all automotive lifts and vehicle supports. However, an owner, employer, or other person may refer to section 12.76
of the Regulation (Operation) for the operation, inspection, repair, maintenance or modification of an automotive lift, portable automotive lifting
device, or vehicle support in the following circumstances:
a) The standard referenced in section 12.74(2) of the Regulation is not applicable to the equipment given its year of manufacture
b) An earlier edition of the standard does not cover repair or modification (e.g., 1981, 1974). The 1990, 1994, and 2000 editions of the standard
only require manufacturer's consent for modification or reconstruction, not necessarily manufacturer's instructions.
c) The automobile lift apparatus is not of a type covered in the standard (e.g., vehicle display or storage lifts, and some portable lifting devices).
d) The manufacturer is no longer in business (a professional engineer can provide instructions in lieu of the manufacturer).
e) Repair or modification to structural components has not been designed or inspected by the manufacturer (a professional engineer can provide
the design, necessary instructions, and final inspection).
In some cases, such as in (d) and (e), compliance with the remainder of the requirements of the standards in 12.74(2) of the Regulation may still
be possible, and must be met.
If the services of a professional engineer are used in B.C., that engineer must be licensed to practice by Engineers & Geoscientists British
Columbia (EGBC).
Changes to ANSI automotive lift standards
The 1974 and 1981 editions of American National Standard ANSI B153.1 Safety Requirements for the Construction, Care and Use of
Automotive Lifts refer to the manufacturer for maintenance, operation, and inspection instructions, but do not explicitly include repair and
modification. The 1990 edition adds the requirement for manufacturer's consent prior to modifications.
The 1994 version, renamed ANSI/ALI ALOIM, adds instructions for repair maintenance, with reference to recommendations of the lift
manufacturer. The 1994 standard is superseded by ANSI/ALI ALOIM-2000 Safety Requirements for Operation, Inspection and
Maintenance, which references manufacturer's recommendations for maintenance, repairs, and manufacturer's permission for modification or
reconstruction. In addition, ANSI/ALI ALOIM-2000 stipulates further requirements that may not be specified by the manufacturer.
The 1993 and 2003 editions of ANSI standard ASME PALD Portable Automotive Lifting Devices references product instructions for
operation, maintenance, and inspection; they also include that repairs be performed by the manufacturer or supplier's authorized repair facility.

G12.77 Records

Issued August 15, 2006

Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.77 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
The employer must keep a maintenance, inspection, modification and repair record for each automotive lift.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to advise employers on appropriate record-keeping, and to clarify certain differences between each record.
Records
Pursuant to Regulation 12.74(2), inspection and maintenance procedures must follow the requirements of standard ANSI/ALI ALOIM-2000
Safety Requirements for Operation, Inspection and Maintenance.
A record of each periodic inspection should be prepared by a qualified automotive lift inspector as defined in ANSI/ALI ALOIM-2000. The
record should include observations of all points of inspection as recommended by the manufacturer, and the subsequent repairs or replacements
made.
In addition to the above, thorough records of all preventive maintenance and repairs performed should be prepared by the auto lift owner,
employer or others performing the work. These records should include the specific checks made, measurements taken, adjustments, parts
replaced, recommendations, and repairs performed.
The inspection, maintenance, modification and repair records should be maintained by the auto lift owner or employer and kept at the auto lift or in
a place that is immediately available to the auto lift operator or to any other person involved with inspection and maintenance of the equipment.
Examples of a preventive maintenance log, repair maintenance log, inspection checklists and an inspection certificate are provided in the
appendices of standard ANSI/ALI ALOIM-2000. Further examples of automotive lift inspection checklists are provided in OHS Guideline 12.78.

G12.78 Inspection and testing

Issued August 15, 2006; Revised February 15, 2019
Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.78 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
An automotive lift must be inspected and tested monthly, in a manner acceptable to the Board, unless the manufacturer requires more
frequent inspection and testing.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to describe who should perform the inspecting and testing of automotive lifts on a monthly basis. The ANSI
Standard ANSI/ALI ALOIM-2000, American National Standard for Automotive Lifts — Safety Requirements for Operation, Inspection
and Maintenance Regulation referenced in section 12.74(2) requires a minimum of an annual inspection; however, it also specifies that the owner
or employer must follow the manufacturer's recommendations. Section 12.78 of the Regulation requires that the inspection and testing take place
at a minimum of monthly, or more frequently, if the manufacturer requires.
Note that monthly inspections are in addition to inspections specified by the manufacturer or the ANSI standard on an annual or more frequent
basis.
Requirements of the person inspecting and testing automotive lifts on a monthly basis
The automotive lift owner or employer is responsible to ensure monthly inspection and testing is performed on each automotive lift. The monthly
inspection is typically performed by workers having the necessary training and experience, such as a qualified automotive lift operator. Personnel
performing monthly inspections should meet the automotive lift operator qualifications and training requirements specified in section 4.1 and 4.2 of
the standard ANSI/ALI ALOIM-2000. Section 5.2 of the standard provides guidance on further training recommended for automotive lift
inspectors. The following resources can be used to train operators on how to perform monthly auto lift inspections:
Manufacturer's instructions and warning labels.
Automotive Lift Institute publications, "Quick Reference Guide, Vehicle Lifting Points for Frame Engaging Lifts", "Lifting It Right", "Safety
Tips".
ANSI Standard ANSI/ALI ALOIM-2000 Safety Requirements for Operation, Inspection and Maintenance.
Qualified automotive lift inspectors (qualified pursuant to section 5 of the above standard).
Manufacturer's representatives.
The inspection and test points should include the following:
those listed for daily inspections in section 4.4.4 of ANSI ANSI/ALI ALOIM-2000; and
those required by the auto lift manufacturer to be performed on a monthly, or more frequent, basis. If the manufacturer does not specify
monthly or more frequent inspections, a monthly inspection should follow the inspection and test points that are typical in the industry for that
type of equipment.
An example of a monthly inspection checklist is provided on the "Monthly Auto Lift Inspection" form. The checklist provided may not be inclusive
for all types of automotive lifts. For a complete checklist, refer to the automotive lift manufacturer's instructions or contact the manufacturer.
Guidelines Part 12 - Miscellaneous Equipment

G12.83 Industrial robots

Issued October 28, 2019

Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.83 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
An industrial robot or robot system must be installed, safeguarded, maintained, tested and started, used, programmed and workers
trained to meet the requirements of
(a) CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z434-94, Industrial Robots and Robot Systems — General Safety Requirements, or …
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation states:
(2) When this Regulation requires a person to comply with
(a) a publication, code or standard of the Board or another agency, the person may, as an alternative, comply with another
publication, code or standard acceptable to the Board …
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to identify CSA Z434-14 as an acceptable alternate standard to Z434-94 for an industrial robot or robot system.
Background information
CSA standards are reviewed and updated on a regular basis. These updated versions generally take into account newer information and
technological advances. New equipment is generally manufactured according to the most current standard.
Acceptable standard
CSA Z434-14 has been reviewed and has been determined acceptable as an alternate standard to Z434-94 for the purpose of compliance to
section 12.83 of the Regulation.
Guidelines Part 12 - Abrasive Blasting and High Pressure Washing

G12.102(1) Abrasive blasting cleanup

Issued May 24, 2002; Revised February 11, 2004; Editorial Revision January 1, 2009
Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.102 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Used abrasive blasting materials which contain a substance designated under section 5.57 must be removed from the work area
by using effective procedures designed to minimize the generation of airborne dust, and suitable personal protective equipment.
(2) Removal under subsection (1) must take place by the end of each shift unless
(a) a risk assessment establishes that the risks from removal will exceed the risks from leaving the materials in place,
(b) no workers will be exposed to the materials before removal occurs, or
c) the materials cannot be separated from the environment in which the abrasive blasting takes place.
(3) If removal is delayed pursuant to subsection (2), the employer must assess the risks arising from delaying the removal and develop
safe work procedures.
(4) The work procedures developed under subsection (3) must be in writing.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to discuss abrasive blasting materials and the requirements under Part 5 of the Regulation for designated
substances which may be present in abrasive blasting materials.
Abrasive blasting materials
Section 12.102 of the Regulation applies to used abrasive blasting materials and the hazardous substances such materials may contain and the
potential risk for worker exposure. Section 12.102 and this guideline do not apply to new, unused abrasive blasting material.
Abrasive blasting involves the removal of a coating, or an encrustation such as dirt or rust, from an object such as a metal structure. The type of
surface coating, the nature of the encrustation, the composition of the base material being treated, as well as the abrasive material itself are some of
the sources of contaminants that may be present in used abrasive material.
Section 12.102(1) of the refers to "used abrasive blasting materials which contain a substance designated under section 5.57…" Designated
substances are identified under section 5.57(1) and in the Table of Exposure Limits for Chemical and Biological Substances (see OHS Guideline
G5.48-2) by any of the following notations, abbreviations, or endnotes:
ACGIH A1 or A2
IARC 1, 2A, or 2B carcinogen
ACGIH reproductive toxin
ACGIH sensitizer
ACGIH L endnote.
Exposure to designated substances must be kept as low as reasonably achievable.
Section 5.57 requires the employer replace a substance with one of the above designations with a material less hazardous to the worker, where
this is practicable. For the purposes of section 12.102, it is not feasible, nor practicable, for the employer to have control over the content of the
material that is being removed by the abrasive blasting process. However, there is a reasonable expectation for the employer to be aware of the
composition of the material being removed and of the base material, and to be aware of any substance with one of these designations that may end
up being present in the used abrasive material. For example, for a job involving removal of paint from a steel bridge structure, the employer is
expected to determine the composition of the coating - does it contain lead or other hazardous substances? If so, section 12.102 applies and
procedures must be established to minimize the generation of airborne dust and workers must wear suitable personal protective equipment. Note
that the employer has control over the type of abrasive grit selected for the blasting task. Where practicable, a non-silica-containing grit is to be
used as a substitute for silica-containing grits, as required by section 12.100.
Examples of substances with a designation covered in section 5.57 that could be found in used abrasive material include mercury, lead, lead
chromate, crystalline silica, asbestos, and cadmium. Used abrasive material can also contain high concentrations of fine dust, making it considerably
more hazardous than new abrasive material. Any disturbance of used abrasive material can create large amounts of airborne dusts that can be
readily inhaled. For this reason, particular attention must be paid to the handling and disposal of this material. Refer to section 12.111 and Part 8 of
the Regulation to determine the type of personal protective equipment that may be required for cleanup.
Regular removal of accumulations of used abrasive materials from the work area, such as at the end of the work shift as required by section
12.102(2), is an effective work practice for lowering the potential exposure of workers to harmful contaminants. Vacuum recovery is the most
effective method of removing large quantities of spent abrasive materials but other effective control methods may also be used, for example, a wet
floor scrubber. Wet sweeping or shoveling should not be used except where vacuuming or other effective means are not practicable. Due to the
high concentrations of airborne dust that may be generated, compressed air should not be used for cleanup. Refer to section 4.42 of the
Regulation for restrictions related to cleaning with compressed air.
It is recognized that complete removal from the work area of used abrasive blasting material containing a designated substance may not always be
possible. For example, small traces of material or dust may be unavoidably left in places that the normal methods of cleaning will not reach. Section
12.102(2) states that removal under section 12.102(1) must take place at the end of each shift except in three situations. The first of the exceptions
is where the risk of removal will exceed the risks from leaving the materials in place. Some examples of this are
The dust enters places that are difficult to access and would involve risks for workers attempting to reach the material
The used material is combined with water and forms a solid cake that is safe to work on, but would have to be broken up, with a
consequent creation of dust, in order to remove it
The second exception, section 12.102(2)(b), is where workers are not be expected to be exposed to used abrasive material containing a
substance designated under section 5.57 prior to its eventual removal. There may be no need to remove the materials if the work process results in
the used materials collecting in a location where workers are not present. Some examples are
Blasting done in a completely closed environment to which workers do not have access during the blasting process
Blasting done remotely from where the workers controlling the process are located
Blasting conducted in a frame building, either wood or steel, where the spent abrasive material tends to collect on ledges and flanges of the
structure with minimal or no impact on workers below
The third exception, section 12.102(2)(c), states that removal need not take place at the end of the shift if the used abrasive material containing a
substance designated under section 5.57 "cannot be separated from the environment in which the abrasive blasting takes place." This is intended to
cover situations where blasting takes place outdoors and the used material containing such a substance becomes inextricably mixed with the
existing natural material. Some examples are
Sandblasting non-leaded paint from a metal bridge over water where the used material falls into the water (where permitted by
environmental regulations)
Sandblasting at a location with sandy ground
For the last example above, removal may be practicable if, for example, the work creates a distinct pile of used material. In that case, it is
reasonable to expect removal of the pile of used abrasive material. Cleanup in this example may be further aided by placing a tarp or similar
covering on the ground below where the blasting will take place.
Section 12.102(3) states: "If the removal is delayed pursuant to subsection (2), the employer must assess the risks arising from delaying the
removal and develop safe work procedures." These work procedures must be available in writing, as stated in section 12.102(4). OHS Guideline
G5.54-3 provides general guidelines on conducting a risk assessment. The intent of the work procedures is to ensure
Workers are not unduly exposed to dusts from waste abrasive materials containing a substance designated under section 5.57
Steps are taken to monitor the risks imposed by the remaining quantity of waste material
Unauthorized, unprotected workers do not approach or walk through waste material
Workers involved in cleanup are wearing the appropriate personal protective equipment
There are provisions for a thorough cleanup at the end of the particular job or task
Guidelines Part 12 - Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes

G12.120 Reverse gas flow and flashback prevention

Issued June 6, 2003; Editorial Revision April 2005; Revised February 11, 2021
Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.120 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Suitable safety devices to prevent reverse gas flow and to arrest a flashback must be installed on each hose in an oxyfuel system,
between the torch and the regulator.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide guidance for the two hazard conditions addressed by section 12.120: reverse gas flow and flashbacks.
Reverse gas flow
Devices to prevent reverse gas flow, usually referred to as "reverse flow check valves," function only to stop the reverse flow of gases. They are
not designed to stop a flame in a flashback.
Reverse gas flow may happen if one of the following conditions occurs:
One of the gas cylinders empties before the corresponding valve on the torch is closed, and gas from the other hose and/or cylinder flows
back up the hose, possibly as far as the regulator.
Both cylinder valves are closed at the end of the task and both torch valves are opened to bleed off the oxygen and fuel gas, in which case
the oxygen will likely reverse flow into the lower-pressure fuel gas hose and possibly into the regulator.
The torch tip gets plugged and gas from the higher-pressure line (usually the oxygen supply) reverse flows into the line with lower pressure.
Flashback
A flashback may happen if either of the following occur:
(a) A combustible mixture of oxygen and fuel gas exists in the torch body, a hose and/or the regulator
(b) An ignition source starts the mixture burning.
The burning action in a flashback is usually explosive as the flame front travels very rapidly back through the combustible mixture. A device to
arrest such a flashback is usually referred to as a "flashback arrestor," and it works by extinguishing the flame front when it reaches the device.
Reverse flow check valve
Many new torch models have reverse flow check valves and flashback arrestors built into them. The devices are also available as separate
components that can be installed between the torch and the regulators. The best protection for the oxyfuel system is achieved if the reverse flow
check valves and flashback arrestors are installed in or at the torch. Most devices will have an arrow indicating the direction of gas flow to assist
with ensuring the devices are installed in the proper orientation. The manufacturer's name or recognized trademark should be visible on the devices.
Devices without such marking should not be used. Usually the devices are Underwriters Laboratory (UL) approved.
Installation, inspection, and testing
Section 4.3(2) of the Regulation requires the devices be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions or as specified by a
professional engineer. The devices should be inspected and tested regularly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations or as
specified by a professional engineer. Reverse flow check valves should be tested to ensure operational efficiency:
At least once each month (unless the manufacturer recommends a more frequent test interval)
If a flashback occurs
If there is a decrease in gas flow on demand with ample supply of gas in the cylinder or other source
A simple test procedure for reverse flow check valves is to remove the valves from the equipment and do the following two checks:
Submerge only the inlet end of the valve in water and blow into the opposite end. Any evidence of bubbles indicates the valve is leaking and
defective.
Blow in the inlet end of the valve to test for free flow operation. A restriction to free flow indicates the valve may be plugged with debris or
stuck to the valve seat and not operating properly.

G12.124 Respiratory protection during specific short duration welding, burning, or similar operations and during emergency work

Issued May 24, 2002; Revised February 11, 2004; Editorial Revision to include February 1, 2011 regulatory amendment; Editorial Revision
December 14, 2012; Revised March 14, 2024
Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.124 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
A respirator must be provided and worn if an effective means of natural, mechanical or local exhaust ventilation is not practicable
(a) during short duration welding, burning or similar operations, and
(b) during emergency work.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to outline a number of regulatory requirements that must be considered by the employer in determining the
effectiveness of natural, mechanical, or local exhaust ventilation for short duration welding, burning, or similar operations, and during emergency
work; as well as the requirement for respiratory protection under these conditions.
Respirators during short duration activity and emergency work
The intent of section 12.124 of the Regulation is to ensure that if an effective means of natural, mechanical, or local exhaust ventilation is not
practicable during a short duration welding, burning, or similar operation, and during emergency work, that respiratory protective equipment be
provided and worn.
Section 12.124 does not address the requirement to wear a respirator during routine work as it is dependent on many factors in the workplace
where welding, burning, and other similar operations are taking place. As such, section 12.124 should not be applied in isolation of other parts of
the Regulation nor should it be interpreted that the only time a respirator is required for welding, burning, or similar operations is where it is not
practicable to provide effective ventilation for short duration activities and emergency work.
Recent health hazard information
The International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) determined there is sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity (cancer causing) of welding
fumes in humans and categorized welding fumes as a Group 1 carcinogen. From its evaluation, the IARC determined that exposure to welding
fumes, including those from mild steel, can cause lung cancer and possibly kidney cancer. According to section 5.57(1) of the Regulation, welding
fumes are considered to be a designated substance. In addition, many of the metals themselves in welding fumes have been identified as
carcinogens, reproductive toxins, or sensitizers.
Several primary constituents of welding fumes (e.g., manganese, nickel, beryllium) have had their exposure limits significantly decrease over the
years. The reduction in these limits has resulted in the need for effective controls for even short duration activities.
If a designated substance is present in the workplace and it is not possible to substitute it for a less hazardous substance, the employer must
implement an exposure control plan to maintain workers' exposure as low as reasonably achievable below the exposure limit. To develop and
implement an exposure control plan, employers are required to conduct a risk assessment to determine the appropriate controls. It is common for
a combination of control measures (e.g., engineering, administrative controls, and respiratory protection) to control exposure to welding fumes.
Refer to the WorkSafeBC resource Controlling Exposure Risks from Welding and Cutting Processes for examples of control measures.
Effectiveness of natural, general, and local exhaust ventilation (LEV)
In assessing the effectiveness of ventilation and the need for respiratory protection, the employer must consider other requirements in the
Regulation that apply to welding or similar activities, in particular the following sections:
Section 5.48 - Exposure limits
Section 5.53 - Workplace monitoring
Section 5.54 - Exposure control plan
Section 5.55 - Type of controls
Section 5.57 - Designated substances
Sections 5.60 to 5.71 - Ventilation
Section 8.32 - When respirator required
Section 12.114 - Ventilation
Exposure control for welding fumes may include natural ventilation for processes that generate lower welding fume levels and include tasks that are
infrequent and of short duration, such as short duration tack welding on mild steel using a mild steel rod or wire. Natural ventilation is air movement
within an indoor work area provided by open doors or windows, or in an outdoor location by being exposed to natural air movement (wind).
Natural ventilation must remove the fume away from the welder's breathing zone in order to effectively control their exposure. Natural ventilation
cannot be relied upon in a work location containing structural barriers that can restrict natural air movement and allow welding fumes to accumulate
or be directed into the worker's breathing zone. For example, a worker welding on mild steel in an enclosed or partially enclosed outdoor location
with natural ventilation may be at risk of overexposure to airborne contaminants due to the welding fume passing through the welder's breathing
zone. (Enclosed or partially enclosed refers to spaces where there are obstructions, such as structures or walls, that hinder or limit the welding
fume from escaping.) Except for infrequent short duration tasks, welding outdoors requires controls such as LEV and/or respiratory protection.
The requirements for wearing respiratory protection during welding and related processes are based on the potential risk of overexposure to
airborne contaminants that may be generated by the specific welding, burning, or similar operations. Some processes pose significantly greater risk
to the worker than others. Relying solely on natural ventilation may not be effective in reducing exposure. If exposure levels could exceed an
applicable exposure limit, even with ventilation controls in place, then respiratory protection is required.
The potential for overexposure also considers factors such as the location of the welding process and the conditions in which the welder is
working. Is the area well ventilated, either by natural or mechanical means? Is the welder working in an open, limited, or confined area? Is the
welder's breathing zone in the welding plume? These questions can be answered by identifying the hazards and assessing the risks for
overexposure as specified under section 5.53 of the Regulation. Refer to OHS Guidelines G5.48-5 Welding fumes and G5.54-3 Risk
identification, assessment and control for further guidance on risk assessment.
Employers must assess their workplaces and operations to ensure that the combination of controls implemented are adequate in protecting
workers from welding fume exposure.
Employers should consult with workers and the joint health and safety committee or worker health and safety representative when identifying
hazards, assessing risks, and implementing controls.
Refer to the WorkSafeBC resource book Controlling Exposure Risks from Welding and Cutting Processes to assist in determining the
appropriate type of controls.
For further information, refer to the welding gases and fumes webpage on worksafebc.com and the risk advisory on welding fume exposure.
Guidelines Part 12 - Rail Car Movement

G12.168 Blue Flag Rule

Issued September 1999; Editorial Revision January 1, 2009; Retired July 3, 2018
The document referred to "Canadian Rail Operating Rules" is available online and this guideline is no longer required.
Guidelines Part 12 - Pressure Vessels

G12.173(1) Pressure vessels

Issued consequential to February 1, 2013 Regulatory Amendment; Editorial Revision November 21, 2017
Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.173(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) In this section "pressure vessel" has the same meaning as in the Power Engineers, Boiler, Pressure Vessel and Refrigeration Safety
Regulation, B.C. Reg. 104/2004.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to explain the intent of section 12.173(1) of the Regulation and to set out the definition of a "pressure vessel."
Intent of Regulation
The intent of this regulatory requirement is to provide safety requirements for pressure vessels not already addressed under other legislation.
Pressure vessels rated for operation at a pressure of more than 103 kPa (15 psi) are normally within the jurisdiction of the BC Safety Authority
(operating as Technical Safety BC — "TSBC"). The TSBC enforces regulations that ensure that such pressured vessels are safe, including
provisions for appropriate pressure relief devices.
Definition of pressure vessel
The Power Engineers, Boiler, Pressure Vessel and Refrigeration Safety Regulation ("Pressure Vessel Regulation") defines a pressure vessel
as "a vessel and its fittings, other than a boiler, that is capable of being used to contain, store, distribute, transfer, distil, process or otherwise handle
gas, vapour or liquids under pressure."
Guidelines Part 12 - Roll-on/Roll-off Containers

G12.175 Container safety standard for roll-on/roll-off containers

Issued consequential to February 1, 2015 Regulatory Amendment; Revised November 20, 2015
Regulatory excerpt
Section 12.175 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
In sections 12.176 to 12.183:
"container safety standard" means ANSI Standard ANSI Z245.30-2008, American National Standard for Equipment
Technology and Operations for Wastes and Recyclable Materials - Waste Containers - Safety Requirements;
"roll-on/roll-off container" means a container that
(a) is typically used to receive, store and transport refuse, and
(b) is designed to be used with a vehicle equipped with hydraulic or mechanical tilt-frame and hoist-type equipment, commonly
referred to as roll-offs or hook-lifts.
Section 12.176 of the Regulation states:
(1) A supplier of a roll-on/roll-off container manufactured on or after February 1, 2015, must ensure that the container is designed
and manufactured in accordance with the requirements of the container safety standard.
(2) Employers must ensure that workers handle roll-on/roll-off containers in accordance with the requirements of the container safety
standard.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to identify the clauses of the container safety standard (ANSI Standard ANSI Z245.30-2008, American National
Standard for Equipment Technology and Operations for Wastes and Recyclable Materials - Waste Containers - Safety Requirements) that
apply to roll-on/roll-off containers.
Applicable clauses of the standard
Roll-on/roll-off containers within the scope of sections 12.175 through 12.183 include all containers used to receive, store, and transport refuse.
This includes open-top, closed-top, and compacting refuse containers which may be used to transport construction debris or other types of refuse.
The container safety standard covers both roll-on/roll-off containers and other types of containers that are outside the scope of sections 12.175
through 12.183. This includes containers that are used to receive and store, but not to transport refuse. As a result, not all clauses of the standard
are applicable to roll-on/roll-off containers. For convenience, Table 1 identifies the applicable and inapplicable clauses of the standard.
Table 1: Applicable Container Safety Standard Clauses

Part Applicable clauses Inapplicable clauses

0. Introduction All clauses None
1. Scope All clauses None
2. Normative references References to the following standards: References to the following standards or
regulations:
ANSI Z245.60-2008
ANSI Z535.1-2002 ANSI Z245.1-2008
ANSI Z535.2-2002 ANSI Z245.21-2008
ANSI Z535.3-2002 ANSI/NFPA 82-2004
ANSI Z535.4-2002 SAE Standard J594
US Code of Federal Regulations

3. Definitions All clauses None

4. Construction, installation, All clauses other than 4.2.1.1, 4.2.1.2, and 4.2.1.1, 4.2.1.2, and 4.2.2
reconstruction, and modification 4.2.2
5. Manufacturer/ rebuilder/ modifier All clauses None
responsibilities
6. Employer, owner, employee, and other 6.1, 6.2, 6.2.1, and 6.2.4 6.1.1 through 6.1.5, 6.2.2, 6.2.3, and 6.2.5
user's responsibility for containers
7. Technical requirements 7.1 through 7.1.3.1, 7.1.5 through 7.1.6.3, and 7.1.3.2 through 7.1.4.4, 7.1.6.4 through 7.1.7,
7.2 through 7.2.1.6 and 7.2.1.7 through 7.2.5.4.1

For added clarity, sections 12.175 to 12.183 of the Regulation do not apply to carts - two-wheeled plastic refuse containers generally having a
capacity of between 75 and 450 liters. These include two-wheeled plastic carts used for the disposal of household wastes, recycling, and organic
waste.
Contents

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL

G13.1 Types of work platforms

G13.2 Standards
G13.2(1) Ships' ladders
G13.2(1)(b) Ladders in manholes
G13.2(1)-2 Application of CSA and ANSI standards for suspended stages
G13.2(1)-3 Training requirements for operators of elevating work platforms

DIVISION 2 - LADDERS

G13.4 Ladder ratings and selection

DIVISION 3 - WORK PLATFORMS

G13.8 General requirements - Chair design

DIVISION 4 - SCAFFOLDS

G13.14 Guardrails on end frame scaffolds

G13.19 When and how to ground metal scaffold

DIVISION 5 - MOVABLE WORK PLATFORMS

G13.23(1) Inspection and certification of elevating work platforms

G13.25 Warning devices
G13.28(2) Safe work procedure acceptable to WorkSafeBC to prevent two-blocking in pile driving and similar applications
G13.29 Lower travel limit devices
G13.30 Lift truck mounted work platforms
G13.32 Prior permission - Platform use in high risk situations [Retired]
G13.32-1 Work in high-risk situations - Inspection and testing requirements
Guidelines Part 13 Division 1 - General

G13.1 Types of work platforms

Issued January 1, 2005; Revised March 8, 2007; Editorial Revision June 30, 2021
Regulatory excerpt
Section 13.1 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
"boom-supported" means supported by an elevating device that telescopes, articulates, rotates or extends relative to the machine
base or vehicle, so that the platform can be positioned completely beyond the base;
"boatswain's chair" also known as a bosun's chair, means a seat attached to a suspended rope designed to accommodate one
person in a sitting position;
"elevating work platform" means a movable work platform that self-elevates to overhead work locations;
"movable work platform" means a work platform that can be re-positioned during the course of the work;
"permanent powered platform" means a movable work platform that
(a) is raised or lowered by other than manual means, and
(b) is permanently installed on or attached to a building or structure;
"portable powered platform" means a movable work platform that
(a) is raised or lowered by other than manual means, and
(b) is not permanently installed on or attached to a building or structure;
"scaffold" means any temporary elevated work platform and its supporting structure used for supporting workers, materials or
equipment;
"self-propelled" means the capability of an elevating work platform to travel under power with the primary controls on the work
platform;
"swing stage" means a work platform that is raised and lowered by manual or powered hoisting equipment, supported by 2 or more
suspension lines;
"work platform" means an elevated or suspended temporary work surface used for supporting workers and includes a scaffold and
boatswain's chair.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide a chart to show the various types of work platforms covered by Part 13 of the Regulation, and a brief
explanation of some types of movable platforms.
Chart - Types of work platforms
Explanation of terms
Confusion sometimes arises about the differences between some of the terms in the chart, particularly related to movable work platforms. The
following explanations are intended to assist the reader.
Movable work platforms: A movable work platform is a platform that can be moved, manually or by power, in either the vertical or horizontal
direction, or both, and covers a range of types of equipment. The different types of movable work platforms shown in the chart can be discussed in
three groups: suspended staging, elevating work platforms, and platforms supported by other equipment.
Suspended staging (permanent powered platforms, swing stages, and boatswain's chairs): These are all movable platforms that are
supported by line(s) from a building or structure, and can be repositioned vertically during use.

Elevating work platforms: An elevating work platform is one that self-elevates, and includes design features for lateral mobility (travel). If
the platform travels under power when operated by controls on the work platform it is termed "self-propelled." There are two types of self-
propelled units; those that are boom-supported, and other designs, such as self-propelled scissor lifts.
Alternatively, if an elevating work platform is moved by hand or is attached to the deck of a powered vehicle, it is called a "portable
elevating work platform." There are a range of types of portable elevating work platforms in use, from elevating equipment mounted on
service trucks, to compressed gas power lifts that are moved by hand. Mast climbers that provide access to the face of a building, and that
can be repositioned vertically as work proceeds, are also included in this group.

Platforms supported by other equipment (lift truck supported, and crane or hoist supported): A platform that is elevated by another
piece of equipment is not an elevating work platform because the platform itself is not designed to be capable of elevating. Examples of this
type of work platform are those that are positioned and supported by a crane, hoist, or lift truck. These platforms are movable, but they are
not elevating.

G13.2 Standards

Issued January 1, 2005; Editorial Revision May 2005; Editorial Revision August 12, 2008; Editorial Revision September 1, 2009; Editorial
Revision March 31, 2010; Editorial Revision May 17, 2012; Revised April 1, 2013; Editorial Revision July 15, 2019
Regulatory excerpt
Section 13.2(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
A ladder, window cleaner's belt or work platform must meet and be used in accordance with
(a) the applicable CSA or ANSI standard in effect when the equipment or structure was manufactured, except as otherwise
determined by the Board,
(b) another standard acceptable to the Board, or
(c) if there is no applicable standard under paragraphs (a) or (b), the requirements of a professional engineer.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide a list of some common applicable standards under section 13.2(1)(a). The guideline also provides a list
of standards acceptable to WorkSafeBC under section 13.2(1)(b). Refer to OHS Guideline G13.2(1)-2 Application of CSA and ANSI standards
for suspended stages.
List of standards under section 13.2(1)
Agency Standard number Standard title6
Mobile elevating work platforms - Design, calculations, safety requirements and test methods (ISO 16368:2010,
CSA1 B354.6:17
MOD)
Mobile elevating work platforms - Safety principles, inspections, maintenance and operation (ISO 18893:2014,
CSA B354.7:17 MOD) - the acceptance of this standard by WorkSafeBC allows it to be used retroactively for older Mobile
elevating work platforms
CSA B354.8:17 Mobile elevating work platforms – Operator (driver) training (ISO 18878:2013, MOD)
CSA B354.1 Portable Elevating Work Platforms (withdrawn in 2018)
CSA B354.2 Self-propelled Elevating Work Platforms (withdrawn in 2018)
CSA B354.4 Self-propelled Boom-Supported Elevating Work Platforms (withdrawn in 2018)
CSA B354.5 Mast-climbing work platforms
CSA C225 Vehicle-Mounted Aerial Devices
CSA S269.2 Access Scaffolding for Construction Purposes
CSA Z11 Portable Ladders
CSA Z91-02 Health and Safety Code for Suspended Equipment Operations
CSA Z185 Safety Code for Personnel Hoists
CSA Z271 Safety Code for Suspended Platforms
CSA Z323.5 Mechanical/Electromechanical Lifting Devices for Persons
CSA Z797 Code of Practice for Access Scaffold
WCB2 WPL2-2004 Design, Construction and Use of Crane Supported Work Platforms
WCB LDR1-2004 Job Built Ladders
WCB WPL3-2004 Safety Factor and Minimum Breaking Strength for Suspended Work Platforms and Associated Components
WCB WPL1-2004 Design, Construction and Use of Wood Frame Scaffolds
WCB WorkSafeBC13.30 Work Platforms Supported by Lift Trucks
ANSI3 A10.22 Safety Requirements for Rope-Guided and Non Guided Workmen's Hoists
ANSI A10.8 American National Standard for Construction and Demolition Operations - Scaffolding - Safety Requirements
ANSI A120.1 Powered Platforms for Exterior Building Maintenance
ANSI A14.1 Safety Requirements for Portable Wood Ladders
ANSI A14.2 Safety Requirements for Portable Metal Ladders
ANSI A14.3 American National Standard for Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements
ANSI A14.5 Safety Requirements for Portable Reinforced Plastic Ladders
ANSI A14.7 Safety Requirements for Mobile Ladder Stands and Mobile Ladder Stand Platforms
ANSI A39.1 Safety Code for Window Cleaning
ANSI A92.1 Mobile Ladder Stands and Scaffolds (Towers), Manually Propelled
ANSI A92.2 Vehicle-Mounted Elevating and Rotating Aerial Devices (Work Platforms)
ANSI A92.20 - 2018 Design, Calculations, Safety Requirements and Test Methods for Mobile Elevating Work Platforms (MEWP's)
ANSI A92.22 - 2018 Safe Use of Mobile Elevating Work Platforms (MEWP's)
Training Requirements for the USE, Operation, Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Mobile Elevating Work
ANSI A92.24 - 2018
Platforms (MEWP's)
ANSI A92.3 American National Standard for Manually Propelled Elevating Aerial Platforms (withdrawn in 2019)
ANSI A92.5 Boom-Supported Elevating Work Platforms (withdrawn in 2019)
ANSI A92.6 American National Standard for Self-propelled Elevating Work Platforms (withdrawn in 2019)
 American National Standard for Vehicle-Mounted Bridge Inspection and Maintenance Devices (withdrawn in
ANSI A92.8
2019)
ANSI A92.9 American National Standard for Mast-Climbing Work Platforms
ASME4 B30.23 Personnel Lifting Systems
ANSI B56.1 Safety Standard for Low Lift and High Lift Trucks
ANSI B56.6 Safety Standard for Rough Terrain Forklift Trucks
ANSI A14.4 Job-Made Ladders, Safety Requirements for
ASTM5 C 478M Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

1CSA: Canadian Standards Association (CSA Group)

2WCB: WorkSafeBC (Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia)
3ANSI: American National Standards Institute
4ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers
5ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International)
6Standard titles may vary between published editions of a Standard

G13.2(1) Ships' ladders

Issued May 25, 2005

Regulatory excerpt
Section 13.2(1) (Standards) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) A ladder, window cleaner's belt or work platform must meet and be used in accordance with
(a) the applicable CSA or ANSI standard in effect when the equipment or structure was manufactured, except as otherwise
determined by the Board,
(b) another standard acceptable to the Board, or
(c) if there is no applicable standard under paragraphs (a) or (b), the requirements of a professional engineer.
Purpose of this guideline
This guideline sets out the circumstances where a "ship's ladder" would normally be acceptable for use. It also provides guidance on the
expectations of the Board for the design, installation and use of such a ladder.
What is a ship's ladder?
A ship's ladder, as addressed by this guideline, means a permanently installed steep pitched stair-like structure having rigid treads supported by
rigid side rails, with handrails on each side. It does not include a ladder configuration made of treads or rungs supported by "side rails" made of
fibre or wire rope. While the ladder is referred to as a ship's ladder, the usage covered in this guideline is with respect to land-based applications
as described below.
Where are they appropriate?
A ship's ladder should only be considered for use where a conventional stairway cannot be installed due to limited space. Installation should be
limited to places where only occasional use is required, such as for servicing machinery or equipment on a typical frequency of less than daily.
There is no CSA or ANSI standard that has been issued to address ship's ladders. In the absence of a standard the Board has a number of
expectations for the design, installation and use of these ladders under section 13.2(1) of the Regulation, which are outlined below.
Ladder design and installation
A ship's ladder should:
be designed so the angle between the side rails and the horizontal is between 50 and 70 degrees. The preferred angle is in the range of 60 to
68 degrees.
serve only a single platform or landing and have a maximum height of 4 metres (12 feet)
have treads at least 130 millimetres (mm) (5 inches) wide, with a nonskid finish, uniformly spaced at not more than 305 mm (12 inches).
Treads should be at least 430 mm (17 inches) long, but not longer than 630 mm (24 inches).
have a minimum design working load of 1.1 kiloNewtons (kN) (250 pounds) applied uniformly to a 90 mm (3.5 inch) strip across the centre
of the tread
have handrails provided on both sides of the ladder at approximately 900 mm (36 inches) above the tread nosing
have a safety guard installed parallel to the slope of the ladder and offset approximately 150 mm (6 inches) from the rear of the treads. (This
guard is to stop a worker's leg from passing through to the backside of the ladder if a foot slips off the back side of the tread.)
Note that a ship's ladder is a permanent load-carrying structure and needs to be properly engineered, as required by section 13.2(1)(c). Design
drawings and specifications should show all information necessary for the fabrication and installation of the ship's ladder, including details on how it
is to be secured in place. The completed installation will need to be certified by a professional engineer as being fabricated and installed in
accordance with good engineering practice.
Ladder use
The user of a ship's ladder should:
be trained on the correct way to use the ladder
face the ladder when ascending or descending
have both hands free to grasp the handrails when using the ladder. Tools or other items which prevent both hands from being free to grasp
the handrails should not be carried up or down the ladder.
maintain "three points of contact" when using the ladder. Three points of contact means two feet and one hand or two hands and one foot in
contact with the ladder and handrails at all times. (This is recommended practice when using any type of ladder.)

G13.2(1)(b) Ladders in manholes

Issued January 1, 2005; Editorial Revision June 30, 2021

Regulatory excerpt
Section 13.2(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) A ladder, window cleaner's belt or work platform must meet and be used in accordance with
(a) the applicable CSA or ANSI standard in effect when the equipment or structure was manufactured, except as otherwise
determined by the Board,
(b) another standard acceptable to the Board, or
(c) if there is no applicable standard under paragraphs (a) or (b), the requirements of a professional engineer.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline sets out a standard acceptable to WorkSafeBC for the design and construction of an individual rung ladder in a manhole that is part
of a water, sewer, or storm sewer system.
Manholes
These manholes typically have an outside diameter of 1200 millimetres (48 inches) or less, and may have a tapering cone section near the top. For
these structures it is recognized that the amount of interior space for access and to perform work is limited and the access ladder arrangement
needs to provide for safe access while not protruding unnecessarily into the entry and work space. WorkSafeBC recognizes the ASTM
Specification C 478M Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections ("ASTM Specification C 478M") as a
standard acceptable to the Board under section 13.2(1)(b) for an individual rung ladder in such manholes. (Note this version is the metric
companion to ASTM Specification C 478, which is also acceptable to WorkSafeBC.) This standard refers to an individual rung as a "step."
ASTM Specification C 478M was developed for manholes assembled using precast concrete components for the base, riser, cone, and top
sections. Manholes are also assembled using components for these sections made from other materials. Manhole steps or individual rungs will be
cast, mortared, or attached by mechanical means to the walls of base, riser, or cone sections. Steps or rungs in a manhole must meet the design,
material, dimension, and testing and acceptance criteria of the ASTM Specification C 478M, regardless of the material used to make the risers or
cone sections.
Ladders in manholes
ASTM Specification C 478M requires steps in a manhole's base, riser(s), and conical top section be aligned to form a continuous ladder with
steps (rungs) equally spaced vertically at a maximum spacing of 400 millimetres (16 inches). Rungs must project a minimum clear distance of 100
millimetres (4 inches) from the wall of the base, riser, or cone section measured at the point of embedment or attachment. The minimum clear
distance between the rung and the opposite wall of the riser or cone must be 450 millimetres (18 inches) measured at the centre face of the rung.
The minimum width of a step or rung is 250 millimetres (10 inches).
The maximum distance down from the entry level (rim of the manhole cover) to the centerline of the first rung below entry level in any manhole
should be 500 mm (20 inches) where no handhold is provided above the first rung. Where a handhold is provided between the entry level and the
first rung, the maximum distance may be increased to not more than 660 mm (26 inches).
ASTM Specification C 478M does not require any additional ladder safety features, such as a cage, rest platform, or ladder climbing device,
regardless of the length of climb. Safety cages and rest platforms should not be used in a manhole as they may impede rescue or retrieval
procedures. A worker entering a deep manhole, such as one more than 5 metres (16 feet) deep, should use a personal fall protection or rescue
harness system, which will arrest a fall and allow for rescue or recovery if necessary. Such systems are often part of the employer's confined space
entry program for work in and around manholes.
Training
A worker assigned to enter manholes should receive training that includes awareness of the limited step depth and width for manhole rungs and the
need to proceed cautiously when climbing into or out of a manhole. Training should also include procedures to assess the integrity of the steps or
rungs when going into a manhole that has not been entered for a while, as rungs may have deteriorated due to corrosion or become loose due to
deterioration of the supporting concrete or other material in the riser or cone sections.
Application
The above acceptance of ASTM Specification C 478M is intended to apply to manholes where entry into such manholes is infrequent; for
example, access to manholes is typically in the range of once or twice per year. If more regular access is required, such as monthly or more
frequently, ladder access meeting the requirements of ANSI Standard A14.3 American National Standard for ladders-fixed-safety
requirements should be provided. It is not the intention of WorkSafeBC to require existing manholes which are currently used frequently to be
modified to accommodate a fixed ladder. However, new facilities where frequent entry is going to be made should be sized and installed with a
proper fixed ladder. A ladder in a well or shaft is required to meet the ANSI standard.

G13.2(1)-2 Application of CSA and ANSI standards for suspended stages

Issued December 3, 2007; Revised April 1, 2013

Regulatory excerpt
Section 13.2(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states, in part:
A ladder, window cleaner's belt or work platform must meet and be used in accordance with
(a) the applicable CSA or ANSI standard in effect when the equipment or structure was manufactured, except as otherwise
determined by the Board,
…
Purpose of guideline
WorkSafeBC has determined that suspended stage work platforms must meet and be used in accordance with specific standards. The purpose of
this guideline is to describe the required standards for suspended stage work platforms.
Background information
Suspended stages are movable work platforms that are supported by line(s) from a building or structure, and can be repositioned vertically during
use. They include permanent powered platforms, swing stages, and boatswain's (bosun's) chairs. Refer to OHS Guideline G13.1 - Types of work
platforms.
There are a number of Canadian Standards Association (CSA) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards that address design,
construction, installation, and use of work platforms. Refer to OHS Guideline G13.2 - Standards for a list of some of these standards. The listed
standards specific to suspended stages are (standard titles may vary between different published editions) as follows:
CSA Z271 Safety code for Suspended Platforms
CSA Z91-02 Health and Safety Code for Suspended Equipment Operations
ANSI A120.1 Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Building Maintenance
ANSI A10.8 American National Standard for Construction and Demolition Operations - Scaffolding - Safety Requirements
Each of these standards has multiple editions, and a number of elements of design, construction, and use are addressed in more than one standard.
This has resulted in some confusion as to which is the applicable standard.
Determination of applicable standards for design, construction, and installation of suspended stage equipment
WorkSafeBC has determined that suspended stages must meet the design, construction, and installation requirements (and any associated
maintenance requirements) of any of the following applicable CSA and ANSI standards in effect when the equipment was manufactured:
CSA Z271
ANSI A120.1
ANSI A10.8
The applicable editions of CSA Z271 standards for design, construction, and installation of suspended stages used for gaining access to exterior
and interior building surfaces and other structures for the purpose of construction, demolition, or building maintenance are as follows:
A. CSA Z271-10 Safety Code for Suspended Platforms
B. CSA Z271-98 Safety Code for Suspended Elevating Platforms
C. CSA Z271-M84 Safety Code for Suspended Powered Platforms
D. Supplement No.1-1977 to CSA Z271-1974
E. CSA Z271-1974 Safety Code for Powered Platforms
The applicable editions of ANSI A120.1 standards for design, construction, and installation of powered suspended stages used to gain access to
building surfaces for building maintenance are as follows:
A. ANSI/ASME A120.1-2008 Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms and Traveling Ladders and Gantries for Building Maintenance
B. ANSI/ASME A120.1-2006 Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms and Traveling Ladders and Gantries for Building Maintenance
C. ANSI/ASME A120.1-2001 Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Building Maintenance
D. ANSI/ASME A120.1-1996 Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Building Maintenance - Addenda A - 1997; Addenda B -
11/12/1999
E. ANSI/ASME A120.1-1992 Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Building Maintenance
F. ANSI/ASME A120.1-1970 Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Building Maintenance
Maintenance includes "specific activities such as exterior building cleaning, painting, application of sealants and insulation, brickwork repointing,
renovations, inspections, and related building/structure maintenance. … (and) may also be applied to non-traditional activities, such as observation
or photography, that may occasionally be carried out from suspended equipment." (ref. CSA Z91-02, Health and Safety Code for Suspended
Equipment Operations). Exterior building cleaning includes window cleaning.
The applicable ANSI A10.8 standards for design, construction, and installation of suspended stages used to gain access to building surfaces for
construction and demolition operations are as follows:
A. ANSI/ASSE A10.8-2011 Scaffolding Safety Requirements
B. ANSI/ASSE A10.8-2001 American National Standard for Construction and Demolition Operations - Safety Requirements for
Scaffolding
C. ANSI A10.8-1998 American National Standard for construction and demolition operations - scaffolding - safety requirements
D. ANSI A10.8-1988 American National Standard for construction and demolition operations - scaffolding - safety requirements
E. ANSI A10.8-1977 American National Standard Requirements for Scaffolding
Determination of applicable standard for the use of suspended stage equipment
WorkSafeBC has determined that the use of a suspended stage must meet the requirements of CSA Z91-02 Health and Safety Code for
Suspended Equipment Operations. This is the required standard regardless of the year of manufacture of the equipment. The standard specifies
safety requirements for use of equipment normally used for window and general cleaning, painting, maintenance, inspection, construction
operations, and similar work. The following elements of use are addressed in CSA Z91-02:
Training requirements for operation and occupancy of suspended stages
General safety requirements such as weather restrictions, equipment and tool use and storage, signage, overhead protection, and fall
protection
Equipment operation, including general safety requirements, maintenance, use of suspended lines and lifelines, fall-arrest equipment,
anchorage, support systems, work units, acceptable landings, special applications such as working from operable windows, and rigging
techniques and practices
Periodic inspection and testing of temporary and permanently installed equipment and anchor systems
Documentation, such as the equipment log, roof plan, work plan, rigging plan, and fall protection procedures
There are also informative appendices to this standard. Although these are non-mandatory parts of the standard, they provide useful safety
information for users of suspended stages. The appendices are entitled Work Plan and Emergency Response Plan and Washing Windows in
Complete Safety.
Other acceptable standards
There may be an instance where a person finds it impracticable to comply with the above standards. In this case, application should be made to
WorkSafeBC's Prevention Practice, Quality, and Engineering department for acceptance of an alternate standard.
Note that Regulation section 2.3 specifies that the provisions of the Regulation prevail if there is any conflict between a prescribed code or
standard and the Regulation.

G13.2(1)-3 Training requirements for operators of elevating work platforms

Issued December 19, 2013; Editorial Revision April 6, 2020

Regulatory excerpt
Section 13.2(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) A ladder, window cleaner's belt or work platform must meet and be used in accordance with
(a) the applicable CSA or ANSI standard in effect when the equipment or structure was manufactured, except as otherwise
determined by the Board,
(b) another standard acceptable to the Board, or
(c) if there is no applicable standard under paragraphs (a) or (b), the requirements of a professional engineer.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to clarify the training requirements for operators of elevating work platforms.
Applicable standards
Section 13.2 of the Regulation requires that elevating work platforms must be used in accordance with the applicable standards. These standards
provide information applicable to the training and retraining of the operators of this equipment, and list the topics that must be covered during the
training. The following are some of the standards that include requirements for training operators of elevating work platforms:
CSA B354.1 Portable Elevating Work Platforms
CSA B354.2 Self-Propelled Elevating Work Platforms
CSA B354.4 Boom-type Elevating Work Platforms
ANSI/SIA A92.2 Vehicle-Mounted Elevating and Rotating Aerial Devices
ANSI/SIA A92.3 Manually Propelled Elevating Aerial Platforms
ANSI/SIA A92.5 Boom-Supported Elevating Work Platforms
ANSI/SIA A92.6 Self-Propelled Elevating Work Platforms
Trainer qualifications
The CSA and ANSI standards referenced in the Regulation also set out the qualifications for the trainer. Persons providing the training must be
qualified in accordance with the requirements of the standard that the particular elevating work platform being operated has been manufactured to.
Elevating work platforms may also be manufactured to meet more than one standard, such as both the applicable CSA and ANSI standards.
The employer may choose to have the operator training provided by a training agency, a qualified person working for the employer, or by some
other qualified individual.
Proof of Training
The standards either require or recommend that upon successful completion of the training, the training provider issues the operator with a
document that indicates proof of the training received. Generally, the standards require that the following information is provided:
The name of the person trained
The date the training took place
The name of the organization or entity that provided the training
The name of the trainer(s) that delivered the training
The specific type of elevating work platform covered by the training (e.g., scissor lift, boom-supported elevating work platform, etc.)
The applicable standard under which the program of training was provided
The requirement for the retention of proof of training and retraining documents vary, depending on the applicable standard. In general, CSA
standards require that the operator keep the proof of training document with them at all times while operating the equipment; whereas ANSI
standards typically require the employer to retain training and retraining records for a period of at least four years, but place no obligation on the
operator to keep the proof of training documents with them while operating the equipment.
Retraining and upgrade training
The applicable standards do not require that retraining be conducted at a specific interval. Rather, employers are required to provide retraining to
an operator based upon their observations and evaluation of an operator's competency. Where deficiencies are identified, the employer must
arrange to provide retraining that addresses the specific operational deficiencies that were identified.
Employers may wish to provide operator retraining on a regular fixed interval. Employers have a duty under section 21(2)(e) of the Workers
Compensation Act ("Act") to provide to their workers the information, instruction, training, and supervision necessary to ensure the health and
safety of those workers in carrying out their work and to ensure the health and safety of other workers at the workplace. Provided that any
operational deficiencies that are identified in the period between the established formal retraining intervals are addressed appropriately, and
employers comply with the above requirement, they may determine the frequency of any retraining program they wish to implement.
Where operators are required to operate an elevating work platform that they are not familiar with, the employer must provide operators with
adequate upgrade training to ensure that they can demonstrate proficiency in the operation of the particular elevating work platform. Operators
must receive upgrade training when any of the following circumstances arise:
New equipment is introduced in the workplace that is unfamiliar to the operator
The equipment is modified in a manner that affects its safe operation or load capacity
The operating conditions or the environment in which the operator works has changed
The operator has been involved in an incident relating to the equipment
Skill or knowledge deficiencies have been identified
The requirements of the applicable standards or the Regulation change
Retraining or upgrade training may be provided by a training agency, a qualified person working for the employer, or by some other qualified
individual, depending on the individual learning needs of the operator at that time.
Ensuring compliance
Employers must adhere to the requirements specified in the standard that applies to the particular equipment they are using. Since the individual
elements of the various standards differ in areas such as operator training, retraining, the proof of training provided, and the retention of records,
this can present a challenge with respect to ensuring compliance on an ongoing basis.
To ensure compliance, employers are encouraged to review the training related elements of the various standards that apply to the elevating work
platforms they use, and consider adopting the most stringent elements of the standards that apply to that type of equipment. For example, ensure
that all operators possess a suitable proof of training document, and keep that document with them at all times while operating the equipment.
Employers have a duty under section 21(2)(e) of the Act to provide to their workers the information, instruction, training, and supervision
necessary to ensure the health and safety of those workers in carrying out their work and to ensure the health and safety of other workers at the
workplace.
Employers also have a duty under sections 3.23 and 3.24 of the Regulation to ensure that new workers are given health and safety orientation and
training specific to that workplace. As defined in section 3.22, a new worker is any worker who is new to the workplace, returning to a workplace
where the hazards have changed, affected by a change in the workplace hazards, or relocated to a new workplace if the hazards are different.
In addition, there must be compliance with the applicable mobile equipment requirements set out in Part 16 of the Regulation.
Guidelines Part 13 Division 2 - Ladders

G13.4 Ladder ratings and selection

Issued January 1, 2005; Revised December 19, 2014; Revised February 1, 2016; Revised July 27, 2016
Regulatory excerpt
Section 13.2(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
A ladder, window cleaner's belt or work platform must meet and be used in accordance with
(a) the applicable CSA or ANSI standard in effect when the equipment or structure was manufactured, except as otherwise
determined by the Board,
(b) another standard acceptable to the Board, or
(c) if there is no applicable standard under paragraphs (a) or (b), the requirements of a professional engineer.
Section 13.4 of the Regulation states:
A manufactured portable ladder must be marked for the grade of material used to construct the ladder and the use for which the
ladder is constructed.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to describe how portable ladders are classified under the applicable CSA and ANSI standards according to their
intended use.
Portable ladder grades and types
Section 13.2(1) of the Regulation requires ladders to meet and be used in accordance with the following:
(a) the applicable CSA or ANSI standard in effect when they were manufactured
(b) another standard acceptable to WorkSafeBC
(c) if there is no applicable standard, the requirements of a professional engineer
Under the applicable CSA and ANSI standards (listed under OHS Guideline G13.2), portable ladders are classified as follows:

Duty Rating Load Rating CSA Ladder Grade ANSI Ladder Type
Special duty 170 kg (375 lb) 1AA IAA
Extra heavy duty 136 kg (300 lb) 1A IA
Heavy duty 113 kg (250 lb) 1 I
Medium duty 102 kg (225 lb) 2 II
Light duty 91 kg (200 lb) 3 III

Note: ANSI Standard A14.2 requires the use of Type I, IA, or IAA ladders with ladder jacks, and stage and scaffold planks.
If a portable ladder meeting a CSA or ANSI standard is not marked in accordance with the classification summarized in this table, then the ladder
will not meet the requirements of section 13.4 of the Regulation.
Selecting an appropriate ladder
When considering a portable ladder for a work activity, the employer must select one of the appropriate grade/type. As described in the applicable
CSA and ANSI standards, the employer must consider the following factors when selecting a ladder: the requirements of the worker, the task, the
environment, the length required, the working load, the duty rating, and the frequency of use to which the ladder will be subjected.
For instance, depending on these factors and the particular circumstances:
Grade 1/Type I ladders (or higher) will typically be required for the types of work activities undertaken on construction sites.
Grade 2/Type II ladders will generally be appropriate for tasks such as light maintenance and light painting, but only after conducting an
assessment of the factors listed above.
Grade 3/Type III ladders are light duty and typically only suitable for household use; not workplace use.
Guidelines Part 13 Division 3 - Work Platforms

G13.8 General requirements - Chair design

Issued August 1, 1999; Revised January 1, 2005; Revised April 1, 2013

Regulatory excerpt
Section 13.8 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Each work platform must
(a) have sufficient strength to bear the load to be placed on it, and
(b) be secured against separation from the supporting equipment, structure or surface to which it is attached.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline explains design requirements for boatswain's (bosun's) chairs in order to meet strength requirements.
Design information
A boatswain's chair is a work platform under Regulation sections 13.2 and 13.8. A boatswain's chair raised and lowered by manually powered
hoisting equipment, or used with a "descent only" rigging arrangement, must be designed to support a minimum load of 250 pounds. Please refer to
the applicable CSA or ANSI standards for general requirements of a boatswain's chair design, e.g., ANSI/ASSE A10.8-2001 Safety
Requirements for Scaffolding and CSA Z271. Refer to OHS Guideline G13.2 Standards.
Guidelines Part 13 - Division 4 - Scaffolds

G13.14 Guardrails on end frame scaffolds

Issued August 1999; Revised January 1, 2005; Revised December 19, 2014
Regulatory excerpt
Section 13.14 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) The platform of each scaffold must
(a) be a minimum nominal width of 50 cm (20 in), except that a nominal 30 cm (12 in) wide work platform may be used with ladder
jacks, pump jack or similar systems,
(b) not leave more than one opening in the work platform, which must be no greater than 25 cm (10 in) in width, and
(c) if not level, be designed to ensure adequate footing for workers using the platform.
(2) Guardrails may be omitted from the edge of a work platform if
(a) the platform is adjacent to a structure that provides protection equivalent to guardrails, and
(b) the open space between the platform and the structure is equal to or less than 30 cm (12 in.)
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to set out that cross-bracing is not an acceptable alternative to guardrails.
Cross-bracing
Standard tubular or other cross-bracing that forms an "X" pattern on cross-braced end-frame scaffolding does not provide a compliant alternative
to standard guardrails because it does not provide at least equal protection to a top rail and intermediate rail.

G13.19 When and how to ground metal scaffold

Issued January 1, 2005; Editorial Revision June 30, 2021

Regulatory excerpt
Section 13.19 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
A scaffold must be effectively grounded if
(a) it is a metal scaffold and is located close to a high voltage energized electrical conductor or equipment, and
(b) a hazardous level of electrical charge is likely to be induced in the scaffold.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline is intended for metal scaffolds only and describes when a metal scaffold near an energized high-voltage conductor or equipment
should be grounded. It also provides guidance to consider grounding when a metal scaffold is near a low voltage but "high energy" system.
Grounded scaffold or grounded metal scaffold
When a metal scaffold is erected parallel to an energized high-voltage electrical conductor or equipment there is a potential hazard of voltage being
induced into the scaffold. The actual voltage level induced into the scaffold will be influenced by a number of factors such as the following:
Distance from the conductor or equipment (whether overhead or underground)
Length of the scaffold parallel to the conductor or equipment
Voltage and/or current flow in the conductor or equipment
The metal scaffold should be grounded immediately in either of the following situations:
A worker feels an electric shock at any time, including during the erection of the scaffold
A voltage potential of more than 30 volts is measured between the scaffold and a ground point at least 5 metres (15 feet) from the base of
the scaffold
The following example explains how conditions may vary. Consider a metal scaffold system being erected parallel to an energized high-voltage
conductor (power line), and about 6 metres (20 feet) away from the line. When the scaffold is about 30 metres (100 feet) long, a potential
difference of 29 volts is measured between the scaffold and the chosen ground point. A voltage less than 30 volts is not considered hazardous, so
no grounding would be required (unless workers report feeling an electric shock). When the scaffold was extended to 100 metres (300 feet) long,
the induced voltage is now measured at 90 volts. Workers touching the scaffold while standing on the ground, or touching part of an adjacent
building or structure while on the scaffold, may feel a shock. Although there may not be sufficient power to cause a direct electrical injury, the
shock could startle the worker and the worker's reaction could result in a forceful contact with an object or in a fall. In this case the scaffold should
be sufficiently grounded before further use.
If the metal scaffold is erected adjacent to the main power feed and/or distribution panel for a large building, or adjacent to the supply conductor
for a large electric motor, the voltage of the electrical equipment may be below the limit of "high voltage" (750 volts) but due to the high current
flow in the electrical equipment, a strong electric field may be present and capable of inducing a voltage in the scaffold. For example, the main
power supply to a large building may be operating at 600 volts and carrying 400 amperes of current. Likewise, an electric motor for a large saw or
pump in a mill may be operating at 440 volts and drawing 150 amperes of current. These systems are usually isolated by effective cover to
eliminate any hazard of direct electrical contact, but scaffold elements erected parallel to the electrical equipment may have a voltage induced due
to the high electric field present around such electrical equipment. If a worker reports feeling electric shocks upon touching the scaffold, or if a
voltage of more than 30 volts is measured between the scaffold and a ground point, the scaffold should be grounded.
Effective grounding
There are different methods of grounding the metal scaffold so that any induced voltage is immediately dissipated so as not to pose a hazard to
workers. The ground-connecting fixture should be connected to the scaffold with a #2 AWG copper conductor. The scaffold should be grounded
at both ends. Suitable ground-connecting fixtures are ground plates or rods.
The installation of the grounding should be in accordance with the BC Electrical Code.
Guidelines Part 13 Division 5 - Movable Work Platforms

G13.23(1) Inspection and certification of elevating work platforms

Issued January 1, 2007; Revised December 19, 2013; Revised June 19, 2020; Editorial Revision consequential to August 22, 2022 Regulatory
Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 13.23(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) A vehicle-mounted elevating work platform and a self-propelled boom-supported elevating work platform must be
(a) inspected in accordance with good engineering practice at least every 12 months, and
(b) certified in writing by the equipment manufacturer or a professional engineer as complying with this Part and safe for use.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline outlines some of the factors that should be considered when determining if an inspection has been conducted in accordance with
"good engineering practice" under section 13.23(1) of the Regulation. It also provides information on who is authorized to certify that the
inspection has been done and that the equipment complies with the Regulation and is safe for use.
Good engineering practice
The Engineers and Geoscientists of BC (EGBC), in its professional practice guideline titled Annual Equipment Inspection and Certification in
British Columbia, describes the standard of practice that engineering professionals should follow when carrying out equipment inspections and
certifications. WorkSafeBC considers following this EGBC guideline as following good engineering practice for the annual inspections and
certifications of vehicle-mounted elevating work platforms and self-propelled boom-supported elevating work platforms.
A copy of the EGBC's professional practice guideline can be accessed here - Annual Equipment Inspection and Certification in British
Columbia.
Who may do the certification?
Certification will generally be done by a professional engineer. If the inspection, assessment and any necessary repair work is done in B.C., the
professional engineer, as required by the Professional Governance Act, must be licensed to practice in B.C. If this work is being done outside of
B.C., for example in Alberta, the professional engineer must be licensed to practice in that jurisdiction.
If certification is to be provided by the equipment manufacturer, the person signing on behalf of the manufacturer must be specifically authorized in
writing by the manufacturer to make such a certification on behalf of the manufacturer.
Inspection and certification process
The EGBC has defined the annual inspection and certification process for a vehicle-mounted elevating work platform and a self-propelled boom-
supported elevating work platform in its professional practice guideline titled Annual Equipment Inspection and Certification in British
Columbia.

G13.25 Warning devices

Issued January 1, 2005; Editorial Revision June 30, 2021

Regulatory excerpt
Section 13.25 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) An elevating work platform, except a vehicle-mounted work platform, must have a warning system consisting of an intermittent
horn or flashing light that
(a) is automatically activated during any motion of the work platform, and
(b) can be seen or heard by other workers in proximity to the work platform.
(2) If the safe operation of an elevating work platform requires its carrier vehicle to be on a level surface or level within specified
degrees, the platform must be fitted, as the carrier requires, with a device to warn the operator that
(a) the carrier is not level, or
(b) the carrier is outside the permitted degrees from level.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline describes appropriate warning signals to indicate any motion of a work platform and devices to warn when the vehicle is not level.
Motion of elevated work platform
Section 13.25(1)(a) of the Regulation uses the phrase "any motion of the work platform." This phrase applies to raising and lowering the work
platform as well as movement of the support base. The raising or lowering motion may create pinch or shear points in the exposed support
mechanisms, or components of the support mechanism or platform may enter work areas occupied by other workers.
Warning system
The design or selection of an appropriate warning system (intermittent horn or flashing light) to satisfy the requirement of section 13.25(1)(b) of the
Regulation will depend on the circumstances of use of the platform.
If an audible warning device is selected, an automobile-type horn or a "backup alarm" is generally found to be satisfactory for this purpose,
provided it is loud enough to be heard by workers over the ambient noise level in the work area, including any workers wearing hearing
protection. An audible warning system may have a volume adjustment to allow the warning signal volume to be raised or lowered to
accommodate worksite conditions.
If a flashing light warning system is selected, a rotating beacon or a strobe-type light, visible for 360 degrees about the machine, is generally
found to be satisfactory.
Section 13.25(2) of the Regulation requires a device to warn the operator when the carrier is off level or beyond the tilt limit specified by the
manufacturer.
One method of complying with this section is to have a "tilt alarm" or other suitable signalling device that activates automatically when the
platform is elevated and the carrier is off level beyond the specified tilt limit. Few "finished floor" surfaces are perfectly level but they
generally do not have a slope of more than 5 degrees. A carrier vehicle tilted less than 5 degrees is generally considered as level.
If a manually read indicator is used, it should allow the operator to determine when the carrier is off level by more than the manufacturer's
specified limit or 5 degrees, whichever is less.
Tilt indicator
Some elevating work platforms are designed so the work platform always has the same tilt as the carrier or base; for example, most scissor lifts
would be this type. For such units, a manually read tilt indicator mounted where it can be viewed during operation of the unit's controls may be
suitable. A spirit level type arrangement used as a manually read tilt indicator (for example, a bent tube containing liquid or a moving ball or a cat's
eye bubble) may be suitable, as long as the device will reliably indicate when the maximum permitted tilt angle is reached or has been exceeded.

G13.28(2) Safe work procedure acceptable to WorkSafeBC to prevent two-blocking in pile driving and similar applications

Issued March 31, 2010

Regulatory excerpt
Section 13.28 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) A crane or hoist used to raise a work platform on a load line must be equipped with
(a) a device to prevent two-blocking at all points, or
(b) in the case of a lattice boom crane, a two-blocking warning device.
(2) Despite subsection (1), a work procedure acceptable to the Board may be followed to minimize the risk of two-blocking if it is
not practicable to maintain a two-blocking prevention or warning device on a conventional lattice boom crane used for pile driving
and similar applications.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide guidance on the development of an acceptable work procedure to minimize the risk of two-blocking if it
is not practicable to maintain a two-blocking prevention or warning device on a conventional lattice boom crane used for pile driving and similar
applications.
Acceptable work procedure
Regulation subsection 13.28(1) requires the use of a two-blocking prevention device or, for a lattice boom crane, a warning device when a crane
or hoist is used to raise a work platform on a load line. For a crane used for pile driving or similar applications, subsection 13.28(2) recognizes that
it may not be practicable to use a prevention or warning device. For example, a device to prevent two-blocking may not be durable enough to
withstand the work process.
When it is not practicable to use the prevention or warning device, a work procedure acceptable to WorkSafeBC may be followed to minimize
risk of two-blocking. WorkSafeBC will consider the work procedure to be acceptable if it includes all of the following:
1. The minimum separation between the travelling block and the stationary block is determined by performing a trial lift through the complete
travel path of the work platform.
2. Where the minimum separation between the travelling block and the stationary block is at least 20 feet, the load line is identified so that 20
feet of separation between the travelling and stationary block is apparent to all concerned.
3. Whenever a crane suspended work platform is utilized and the minimum separation between the travelling block and the stationary block is
less than 20 feet, the load line is flagged 6 feet above the load block or headache ball and the employer has assigned a worker to act as a
safety watch.
4. The worker assigned as a safety watch will be equipped with an air horn or similar warning device that will be activated to warn the crane
operator whenever the load block or headache ball is hoisted to within 6 feet of the boom tip.
5. The warning device is effective in alerting the crane operator in the ambient conditions at the site.
6. The crane operator will stop the hoisting operation immediately when the air horn or similar warning device is activated.
7. The line speed is kept as low as reasonably practical and will not exceed 100 feet per minute when hoisting personnel.
8. Adequate supervision is provided to ensure the safe work procedure required to comply with these conditions is followed.

In order for the work procedure to be acceptable, the above criteria will be incorporated in a specific safe written work procedure for the use of
the crane suspended work platform. The procedure should be reviewed with each worker involved in the work process in a pre-job meeting
before work commences.
Other work procedures
If an employer wishes to use a work procedure that does not meet the criteria outlined in this guideline, the employer may submit an alternative
procedure for review to WorkSafeBC's Prevention Practice, Quality, and Engineering department with a request for an acceptance of this
alternative procedure. The application should include an explanation of why the safe work procedure described in this guideline cannot be
implemented.

G13.29 Lower travel limit devices

Issued May 17, 2006

Regulatory excerpt
Section 13.29 of the OHS Regulation states:
(1) Cranes, winches and other devices used for hoisting and lowering movable work platforms must
(a) be operated as slowly as practicable while supporting the work platform,
(b) be lowered under power, if the device is powered, and
(c) not be equipped with a free running boom or hoisting winch controlled only by brakes.
(2) If a moveable work platform is suspended from a crane, winch or other device over a structure that cannot safely support its
weight or if other hazards exist below the platform, lower limit travel devices compatible with the hoist system must be used to ensure
the platform cannot be lowered beyond the safe lower limit of travel.
(2.1) If the lower limit travel devices required by subsection (2) are not practicable, the employer must ensure that work procedures
acceptable to the Board are used that will minimize the risk of the platform going beyond the safe lower limit of travel.
(3) A trial lift for a work platform suspended from or attached to a crane or hoist must be performed at all work locations before the
platform is occupied.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline provides information on the application of section 13.29(2) and (2.1) of the OHS Regulation. In particular, it addresses the issue in
subsection (2) of hazards below the platform, and in subsection (2.1) the circumstances in which lower limit travel devices may not be practicable.
Hazards below the platform
The intent of section 13.29(2) is to ensure that lower limit travel devices are used to prevent a work platform, including a permanent or portable
powered work platform, or a boatswain's chair, from being lowered beyond a safe level. These devices are needed if the work platform is
suspended over a structure that cannot safely support its weight, or if other hazards exist below the platform.
Some examples of the hazards that might exist below a work platform include water that is deep enough to present a hazard of drowning,
energized and exposed high voltage equipment, a canopy entrance to a building, the entrance to the underground parking area of a building, or
circumstances where the platform is above vehicle traffic or moving machinery.
Practicability of lower travel limit devices
Lower limit travel devices are generally practicable if the hoisting equipment being used is a powered swing stage (permanent or portable powered
platform). The CSA Standard Z271 Safety Code for Suspended Elevating Platforms, clauses 7.3.12.4.2 and 8.3.6.4.3, requires such
equipment to have lower limit travel devices if there is a hazard in the event of descent beyond a predetermined point. Most permanent powered
platforms will have automatic lower limit travel devices. Many portable powered platforms use a cable climbing hoist. For these types of hoists, the
use of cable clips positioned at the appropriate spot on the hoist line(s) may be considered a lower limit travel device.
In circumstances where section 13.29(2) and (2.1) apply, the use of a lower limit travel device is the preferred means of worker safety. The use of
work procedures will be acceptable only where lower limit travel devices do not exist or are not practicable.
Lower limit travel devices are generally not practicable for work platforms suspended from a crane load line or a winch load line. If a winch or
drum hoist is being used, painting a warning mark on the hoist line at an appropriate spot may be part of the work procedures for controlling lower
travel limits. The work procedure would need to include the use of a signaler to direct the crane, or a hoist operator where the operator does not
have an adequate view of the platform to safely move the platform under the direction of a designated signaler on the platform.

G13.30 Lift truck mounted work platforms

Issued August 1999; Revised January 1, 2005; Editorial Revision February 6, 2006; Revised February 1, 2008; Revised consequential to
February 1, 2013 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 13.30 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) In this section, "work platform" means a movable work platform that is supported by a lift truck.
(2) A work platform may be used to support workers only if other conventional means of access for the task, such as ladders,
scaffolds and elevating work platforms, are not practicable.
(3) An employer must ensure that a work platform intended for use by workers was designed, and is used by workers, in accordance
with
(a) ANSI/ITSDF B56.1-2009, Safety Standard for Low Lift and High Lift Trucks, if the platform is being used with a high lift
truck as defined in Part IV of that standard, or
(b) ANSI/ITSDF B56.6-2011, Safety Standard for Rough Terrain Forklift Trucks, if the platform is being used with a rough
terrain forklift truck as defined in section 2 of that standard.
(4) The employer must ensure that a work platform intended for use by workers is legibly marked in a conspicuous place to show
(a) the name of
(i) the manufacturer of the platform, or
(ii) the professional engineer who certified the platform as having been built to meet the applicable standard referred to in subsection
(3),
(b) if the platform was built by a manufacturer,
(i) the model number and serial number, or
(ii) other unique marking or identification that links the platform with the manufacturer's documentation respecting the platform's
design and use,
(c) if the platform was custom built, the unique identification number or code that links the platform with the professional engineer's
documentation for the platform's design and use,
(d) the title of the safety standard or standards the platform was designed to meet,
(e) the weight of the platform when the platform is empty,
(f) the rated load of the platform, and
(g) the minimum width, as measured in accordance with subsection (5), and minimum rated capacity a lift truck must have to support
the platform in a manner that complies with the applicable standard in subsection (3) when the platform is loaded to its rated load.
(5) The width of a lift truck referred to in subsection (4) (g) must be measured in a straight line from any point on the outer part of the
right load bearing tire to the corresponding point on the outer part of the left load bearing tire.
(6) The employer must ensure that a qualified person inspects both the work platform and the lift truck supporting the work platform
(a) each time the platform is mounted on the lift truck, and
(b) at the start of each work shift, if the platform is already mounted on the lift truck at the start of the work shift,
to ensure the platform is properly secured to the lift truck and the lift truck and the platform are safe for use.
(7) The employer must ensure that the inspections referred to in subsection (6) take place before either the work platform or the lift
truck is used by a worker.
(8) Only a worker who is qualified and authorized by the employer may operate a work platform, and the lift truck supporting the
work platform, for the purpose of supporting workers on the platform.
(9) A worker must not operate either a work platform or the lift truck supporting the work platform unless
(a) there is effective two-way voice communication between the lift truck operator and a worker on the platform who is designated
by the employer to provide the lift truck operator with directions for platform movement, and
(b) the lift truck operator and the designated worker on the platform prearrange hand and arm signals, if the voice communication
referred to in paragraph (a) relies on the use of a radio or other electronic system, to allow the designated worker to signal the lift
truck operator to bring the platform to the ground or floor level in the event the radio or other electronic system fails.
(10) A lift truck operator must remain at the controls of the lift truck at all times there are any workers on the platform supported by
the lift truck.
(11) Before a work platform may be used to support workers, the lift truck operator must conduct a trial lift of the platform, with no
workers on the platform, to assess the suitability of the surface bearing the weight of the lift truck and whether the platform is clear of
all obstructions, unless
 (a) the lift truck is on a type of surface the employer has identified as capable of safely supporting the lift truck and the platform when
the platform is loaded to its rated load, and
(b) the space in and around which the platform is to be raised is clear of all obstructions.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to explain selected portions of the standards referenced in section 13.30 of the Regulation that are applicable to
the design and use of lift truck mounted work platforms.
Explanatory notes for specified sections
Availability of standards (Section 13.30 (3))
Section 13.30 references two standards that apply to the design and use of lift truck mounted work platforms: ANSI/ITSDF B56.1-2009, Safety
Standard for Low Lift and High Lift Trucks and ANSI/ITSDF B56.6-2011, Safety Standard for Rough Terrain Forklift Trucks. Both
ANSI/ITSDF standards are available at no cost from the Industrial Truck Standards Development Foundation at http://www.itsdf.org.
Definitions
ANSI/ITSDF B56.1-2009 applies to both low lift and high lift trucks. "Low lift" refers to a variety of lift trucks generally designed and intended to
raise the load just enough to accommodate horizontal movement. Some equipment, such as low lift order pickers, may be capable of raising a
work platform to a maximum of 1200 mm (approx. 47 inches). "High lift" trucks are defined as a "self-loading truck equipped with an elevating
mechanism designed to permit tiering." Tiering is "the process of placing one load on or above another."
ANSI/ITSDF B56.6-2011 applies to rough terrain forklift trucks, which are defined as "a wheeled-type truck designed primarily as a fork truck
with a vertical mast and/or a pivoted boom, variable reach or of fixed length, which may be equipped with attachments. This truck is intended for
operation on unimproved natural terrain as well as the disturbed terrain of construction sites. This definition excludes machines designed primarily
for earth moving, such as loaders and dozers, even though their buckets and blades are replaced with forks, and machines designed primarily as
over-the-road trucks equipped with lifting devices."
Work platforms built prior to February 2013
Work platforms meeting the version of ANSI B56.1 or ANSI B56.6 in place when the work platform was manufactured meet a standard
acceptable to WorkSafeBC under section 4.4(1) or 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation.
Work platforms meeting WorkSafeBC Standard 13.30 Work Platforms Supported by Lift Trucks may continue to be used, subject to the
following:
Work platform floor depth does not exceed twice the load centre distance of the lift truck
Work platform width is not greater than the overall width of the truck plus 250 mm (10 inches) on either side
Marking and use requirements specified in section 13.30(4) of the Regulation are followed, regardless of the age of the work platform.
Work platforms that are designed by a professional engineer using the exemption in clause 4.7 of WorkSafeBC Standard 13.30 are no longer
acceptable for use.
Work platforms meeting the WCB A324 Standard
WCB Standard A324 was withdrawn in April 1998. Work platforms constructed to meet that standard must be permanently removed from
service as of February 1, 2013, until such time as they are evaluated by a professional engineer and brought into compliance with the applicable
standard referenced in section 13.30 of the Regulation.
Changing lift truck location
ANSI/ITSDF B56.1-2009 does not allow high lift trucks to be moved from location to location while workers are on the work platform. Minor
adjustments in horizontal positioning are permitted, but only at the request of workers on the work platform.
ANSI/ITSDF B56.6 2011 does not allow any movement of rough terrain forklifts while the platform is raised. Platforms may be raised and
lowered or the boom adjusted while the workers are on the platform, but these movements must only be done at the request of workers on the
work platform.
Custom built work platforms (Section 13.30(4))
Custom built work platforms are normally built to order on a one-off basis. Work platforms built by manufacturers are normally commercially
available, produced in larger quantities, and listed in catalogues. A custom built work platform must have a unique identification number or code
that links the platform with the professional engineer's documentation for the platform's design or use. The employer will need to have a copy of the
documentation for use and at a minimum should have a letter with the professional engineer's seal indicating that the work platform meets the
requirements of ANSI/ITSDF B56.1-2009 or ANSI/ITSDF B56.6-2011 as applicable.
Remaining at the controls (Section 13.30(10))
Lift truck operators are deemed to be at the controls of the lift truck if lift truck operators are seated in the operator's position, ready to operate
the equipment.
Trial lifts (Section 13.30(11))
A trial lift is required to verify the capability of the supporting surface to support the lift truck and that there is adequate clearance from any
obstructions, except where the following applies:
Lift truck is supported on a floor surface designed for lift truck operation or in an established yard or road area where the truck is regularly
used
Employer knows that the surface can safely support the lift truck with a load
Area is clear of obstructions such as structures, overhead electrical conductors or vegetation that may interfere with the positioning of the
platform
Lifts performed with the lift truck positioned on natural ground or disturbed ground such as that occurring on a construction site will require a trial
lift to verify the ground can support the load. The work platform does not need to be loaded with test weights for the trial lift.
Fall protection
The ANSI/ITSDF standards require that work platforms that can be elevated to a height of greater than 1200 mm (approx. 47 inches) have a
means of fall protection such as guardrails or a means for securing workers such as a body belt or lanyard. The guardrail may be hinged,
removable or consist of chains.
The standards may permit the use of body belts; however, fall protection must be selected and used in accordance with Part 11 of the Regulation.
In circumstances where a fall can occur, personal fall arrest equipment must be used.

G13.32 Prior permission - Platform use in high risk situations

Issued August 1999; Revised January 1, 2005; Revised February 8, 2007; Retired February 1, 2011
Prior permission is no longer required - see section 13.32 as amended.

G13.32-1 Work in high-risk situations - Inspection and testing requirements

Issued April 1, 2013; Revised consequential to February 1, 2015 Regulatory Amendment

Regulatory excerpt
Section 13.1 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states, in part:
"swing stage" means a work platform that is raised and lowered by manual or powered hoisting equipment, supported by 2 or more
suspension lines;
Section 13.32 of the Regulation states:
Before a swing stage, boatswain's chair or portable powered platform is used in any of the following circumstances, a professional
engineer must have certified in writing that the design, installation and proposed use of the swing stage, boatswain's chair or portable
powered platform, as the case may be, meets the requirements of CSA Standard CAN/CSA Z271-10 Safety code for suspended
platforms and CSA Standard CAN/CSA Z91-02 (R2008) Health and Safety Code for Suspended Equipment Operations:
(a) one work platform will be used above or below any portion of another work platform,
(b) a deck or planking will be used to span a gap between two independent work platforms,
(c) the work platform will exceed 10 m (32 ft) in length, or
(d) the suspension height will exceed 91 m (300 ft).
Purpose of guideline
This guideline is to clarify the requirements for inspection and testing in CSA Standard CAN/CSA Z271-10 safety code for suspended platforms
("Standard") and to identify the difference between a "swing stage" and a "multi-point suspended platform."
Background information
Section 13.32 of the Regulation requires that in high-risk situations, the design, installation, and proposed use of swing stages (including multi-
point suspended platforms), boatswain's (bosun's) chairs, or portable powered platforms meet the requirements of the Standard. This Standard
contains requirements on inspection and testing.
Inspection and testing requirements
The Standard sets out separate inspection and testing requirements for the following events or intervals, and the Standard should be reviewed for
the details of the inspections:
(a) Prior to first use of a new or altered suspended platform
(b) Prior to first use following erection or relocation of a suspended platform
(c) Each use
(d) After an accident or equipment failure
(e) Periodically
(f) Annually
(g) Five years
Performance of inspecting and testing
Many of the required inspections and tests may be performed by a service representative of the suspended platform manufacturer, a supplier, or a
competent person. The Standard's definition of 'competent person' aligns with WorkSafeBC's definition of 'qualified' under the Regulation.
For example, the Standard requires periodic inspection and testing of all electrical and mechanical parts of a suspended platform, and permits this
inspection to be done by a service representative of the suspended platform manufacturer, a supplier, or a competent person.
However the Standard does require certain inspections and tests to be performed by a professional engineer or in some cases the engineer's
delegate, as outlined below:
New or altered anchorage connectors must be inspected and tested prior to first use (professional engineer or engineer's delegate)
A multi-point suspended platform that has been erected or relocated must be inspected prior to first use (professional engineer only)
A suspended platform involved in an accident or equipment failure (professional engineer or engineer's delegate)
The structural components of a suspended platform must be inspected annually (professional engineer or engineer's delegate)
The structural components of the equipment and attachments to the structure must be inspected every five years (professional engineer or
engineer's delegate).
Multi-point suspended platforms
Multi-point suspended platforms (MPSPs) are defined in the Standard as:
A suspended platform that is supported from at least three separately spaced points and is more than 0.75 m in width
In the Regulation the definition of a "swing stage" includes work platforms suspended by two or more suspension lines, so any section of the
Regulation that refers to "swing stages" will also apply to MPSPs.
Contents

DEFINITIONS AND APPLICATION

G14.1 Elevating Devices Safety Act repealed [Retired]

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

G14.2-1 Standard - Tower cranes

G14.2(3)(c) Alternate acceptable standard
G14.3 Identification
G14.5 Rated capacity indication on bridge cranes
G14.11 Support structure
G14.13 Inspection, maintenance, and repair
G14.29 Operator protection

EQUIPMENT OPERATION

G14.34 Operator qualifications and competencies

G14.34.1 Operator certification
G14.48(2) Acceptable standard for audio and video communication

MOBILE CRANES, BOOM TRUCKS AND SIGN TRUCKS

G14.64(3) Definition of "duty cycle work"

G14.71 Mobile crane and boom truck annual inspections
G14.72(4) Crane certification during pile driving and dynamic compaction operations versus lifting service

TOWER CRANES

G14.88(5) Alternative means of jib access

CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL HOISTS

 G14.96 Light duty portable construction material hoists
Guidelines Part 14 - Definitions and Application

G14.1 Elevating Devices Safety Act repealed

Issued August 13, 2008; Retired consequential to February 1, 2012 Regulatory Amendment
Guidelines Part 14 - General requirements

G14.2-1 Standard - Tower cranes

Issued September 1999; Editorial Revision February 1, 2008; Editorial Revision consequential to December 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Sections 14.2(6) and (7) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") state:
(6) A tower, hammerhead crane or self erecting tower crane must meet the requirements of CSA Standard Z248-2004, Code for
Tower Cranes.
(7) A portal, tower or pillar crane must meet the requirements of ANSI Standard ASME B30.4-2003, Portal, Tower, and Pedestal
Cranes.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to clarify the scope and application of CSA Standard Z248-2004, Code for Tower Cranes and ANSI Standard
ASME B30.4-2003, Portal, Tower, and Pedestal Cranes.
Application of the Regulation
Both sections 14.2(6) and 14.2(7) set out standards applicable to tower cranes. However, the application of each section is determined by the
difference in the "Scope" description in each standard. The scope of the CSA Standard Z248-2004 makes it applicable to all tower cranes,
irrespective of use or industry service. The scope of the ANSI Standard ASME B30.4-2003, as it applies to tower cranes, is limited to a tower
crane not used in construction.

G14.2(3)(c) Alternate acceptable standard

Issued October 20, 2020

Regulatory excerpt
Section 14.2(3) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(3) A bridge, jib, monorail, gantry or overhead travelling crane must meet the design requirements of
(a) ANSI Standard MH27.1-2003, Specifications for Patented Track Underhung Cranes and Monorail Systems,
(b) Crane Manufacturers Association of America (CMAA) Specifications for Top Running Bridge & Gantry Type Multiple Girder
Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes - No. 70 (2004), or
(c) Crane Manufacturers Association of America (CMAA) Specifications for Top Running and Under Running Single Girder Electric
Overhead Cranes Utilizing Under Running Trolley Hoist - No. 74 (2004).
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation states:
(2) When this Regulation requires a person to comply with
(a) a publication, code or standard of the Board or another agency, the person may, as an alternative, comply with another
publication, code or standard acceptable to the Board …
Purpose of guideline
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation provides WorkSafeBC the authority to accept alternative standards to those listed in the Regulation. The
purpose of this guideline is to specify the 2015 version of the CMAA No.74 as an acceptable alternative standard under section 14.2(3)(c).
Alternative standard
The Crane Manufacturers Association of America (CMAA) Specifications for Top Running and Under Running Single Girder Electric
Overhead Cranes Utilizing Under Running Trolley Hoist - No. 74 (2015) is accepted as an alternative standard.

G14.3 Identification

Issued September 1999; Editorial Revision February 1, 2008

Regulatory excerpt
Section 14.3(2) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Each major interchangeable structural component of a crane or hoist must be uniquely identified and must be legibly marked to enable
confirmation that the component is compatible with the crane or hoist.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide information on identification of interchangeable structural components for cranes or hoists.
Identification
This requirement is applicable to, but not limited to, lattice boom mobile cranes and tower cranes. Generally the lattice boom on a mobile crane is
made up of several boom sections connected together. The configuration of the boom can be varied to meet the needs of the particular lifting task.
The crane manufacturer will specify what components must be used to make up the boom to achieve any particular allowable boom configuration.
Some components will be interchangeable, and may be shared between similar equipment from the same manufacturer.
Similarly, a tower crane is made up using tower and jib sections. The configuration of the crane at each setup can be varied, within limits set by the
manufacturer, to suit the needs of the location. As with the mobile crane boom, it is possible to interchange components from similar equipment. To
ensure that only the components that the manufacturer approves for use with the configuration are used, it is necessary to identify the components.
A catalogue or part number is sufficient for the purpose of identifying compatibility, but there are also strict inspection and certification requirements
for these components. Unique identification allows cross-referencing with the inspection or certification documents to ensure the component in use
is the component inspected or certified. Ideally, the identifier on each component will be a serial number provided by the manufacturer. However,
interchangeable components are usually only identified by the manufacturer with a part number. This satisfies one reason for the requirement
(identifying interchangeable components) but not the need to correlate documents to specific components. An additional and unique identifier is
required. The identifier must be legible and durable.

G14.5 Rated capacity indication on bridge cranes

Issued September 1999; Editorial Revision February 1, 2008; Revised consequential to May 1, 2017 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 14.5(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
The rated capacity of a crane or hoist , other than a crane or hoist to which subsection (2) or (3) applies, must be permanently
indicated on each of the following:
(a) the superstructure;
(b) the hoist;
(c) the load block.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide information on the term 'superstructure' with respect to bridge cranes.
Rated capacity indication on bridge cranes
With respect to a bridge crane, the "superstructure" refers to the bridge girders. It is not necessary to mark the rated capacity on the crane
runways or the supporting structure for the bridge crane runways.

G14.11 Support structure

Issued consequential to May 1, 2017 Regulatory Amendment

Regulatory excerpt
Section 14.11(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
The rated capacity of a crane or hoist must not exceed the rated capacity of the structure supporting the crane or hoist.
Sections 14.5(1) and (2) of the Regulation state:
(1) The rated capacity of a crane or hoist, other than a crane or hoist to which subsection (2) or (3) applies, must be permanently
indicated on each of the following:
(a) the superstructure;
(b) the hoist;
(c) the load block.
 (2) The rated capacity of a monorail crane must be permanently indicated on each of the following:
(a) the hoist;
(b) the load block;
(c) the monorail beam, at intervals not exceeding 10 m (33 ft.).
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide information on how to comply with section 14.11(1) of the Regulation.
Options for compliance
Installations where the rated capacity of the crane or hoist is greater than the rated capacity of its supporting structure are not compliant with
section 14.11(1). The installation cannot be used until section 14.11(1) has been complied with. Among the methods of complying are:
Replacing the crane or hoist with one having a rated capacity equal to or less than that of the support structure
Obtaining a certificate from a professional engineer that the support structure has a rated capacity equal to or greater than the hoist capacity,
and marking the support structure accordingly
Downgrading the rated capacity of a crane or hoist
Section 14.5 provides that the rated capacity of a crane (except a monorail crane) or hoist must be permanently indicated on the superstructure,
the hoist and the load block. It also provides that, with respect to monorail cranes, the rated capacity must be permanently indicated on the hoist,
the load block, and the monorail beam at intervals not exceeding 10 m (33 ft.). In addition, section 4.8 states that the rated capacity of a machine
is that specified by the manufacturer (or by a professional engineer if the manufacturer’s specification cannot be produced or the equipment or
machine has been modified in a manner that will change its rated capacity).
Because cranes and hoists can be inadvertently overloaded, their rated capacity cannot be downgraded by simply posting on them a rated capacity
equal to that of the support structure. In order to properly reduce the rated capacity of a crane or hoist, changes must be made in accordance with
the instructions of the manufacturer or a professional engineer (refer to sections 4.8, 14.15 and 14.16 of the Regulation).

G14.13 Inspection, maintenance, and repair

Issued September 1999; Editorial Revision February 1, 2008; Editorial Revision April 15, 2021
Regulatory excerpt
Section 14.13(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Each crane and hoist must be inspected and maintained at a frequency and to the extent required to ensure that every component is
capable of carrying out its original design function with an adequate margin of safety.
Section 14.13(3) of the Regulation states:
Any repair to load bearing components of a crane or hoist must be certified by a professional engineer or the original equipment
manufacturer as having returned the component to a condition capable of carrying out its original design function with an adequate
margin of safety.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide information about the frequency of inspections and load bearing components.
Frequency of inspections
Inspection and maintenance must be done to the extent and frequency recommended by the original equipment manufacturer or the applicable
standard referenced in Part 14 of the Regulation, whichever is more stringent, and as required based on the frequency and nature of use. (Refer to
section 14.2(1) of the Regulation for a list of the relevant standards.)
Load bearing components
"Load bearing components" include any component that transfers load through the crane or hoist to the surface supporting the crane or hoist.

G14.29 Operator protection

Issued September 1999; Editorial Revision February 1, 2008; Editorial Revision May 1, 2008; Editorial Revision April 15, 2021
Regulatory excerpt
Section 14.29 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
The operator of a crane or hoist must be protected against hazardous conditions such as falling or flying objects and excessive heat or
cold that could adversely affect the health or safety of the operator.
Section 26.13.1(1) of the Regulation states:
 (1) Protective guards must be provided and used on a self-loading log transporter or similar equipment unless
(a) it is not practicable to do so, and
(b) the absence of guards does not pose a hazard to the equipment operator.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to discuss the application of section 14.29 to self-loading log trucks under section 26.13.1(1).
Self-loading log trucks
Section 26.13.1(1) of the Regulation provides an exception to the requirements of section 14.29 that is applicable to self-loading log trucks and
similar equipment. Under section 26.13.1(1) the equipment may only be used without overhead protective guards if the absence of such guards
does not present a risk of injury to the operator.
Guidelines Part 14 - Equipment operation

G14.34 Operator qualifications and competencies

Issued October 28, 2015

Regulatory excerpt
Section 14.34 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) A crane or hoist must only be operated by a qualified person who has been instructed to operate the equipment.
(2) A person must demonstrate competency, including familiarity with the operating instructions for the crane or hoist and the code of
signals for hoisting operations authorized by the Board before operating the equipment.
Purpose of guideline
An operator of a crane or hoist (including an operator of equipment with a different primary design function that is being used in a hoisting or lifting
application) needs to be knowledgeable and competent in assembly, set-up, erection, start-up, shutdown, dismantling, maintenance, inspection,
and safe operation, as applicable and relevant to the specific equipment being operated.
This guideline outlines the requirement for the operator to be qualified and competent on the various types of equipment covered under section
14.34 of the Regulation.
The guideline also provides an explanation of the minimum qualifications that must be held and competencies that must be demonstrated by a
qualified person before the person is permitted to operate the equipment covered under section 14.34.
The requirements in section 14.34 apply to cranes and hoists of a type required to meet a standard specified in section 14.2 and to any other
equipment with a different primary design function that is being used in a hoisting or lifting application (refer also to section 14.1.1). This includes
logging equipment that uses a load line for lifting. It does not include a front end loader, an excavator, or other earth moving equipment that is being
used
(a) In applications consistent with its primary design purpose, or
(b) During a lifting task incidental to its primary design purpose if the manuals and operating instructions of the manufacturer of that equipment
provide criteria for that lifting task.
Qualifications
Equipment may only be operated by a person qualified to do so. This means that the person must be knowledgeable of the work being done, the
hazards involved, and the means to control the hazards, by reason of education, training, experience, or a combination of these. Also, the person
must have been instructed in how to operate the specific equipment being used. This applies to operation of a crane or hoist, and where other
equipment is being used in a hoisting or lifting application. For example, a rotating pipe layer or a side boom tractor is used in a hoisting or lifting
application when placing pipes into position. The requirements of section 14.34 of the Regulation apply.
For a mobile crane, tower crane, or boom truck, there are additional operator certification requirements under section 14.34.1 of the Regulation.
Competencies for equipment used in hoisting or lifting operations
Before operating a crane, hoist, or other equipment being used in a hoisting or lifting application, an operator must demonstrate competency to do
so, as appropriate to the equipment being used and as appropriate to the operator's responsibilities, including but not limited to the following:
(a) Understanding the information in the equipment manufacturer's operating manual and safety decals, including emergency procedures;
understanding the limitations of the equipment (e.g., slopes, terrain, loads, extensions); understanding the applicable requirements of the Regulation
(b) Ability to recognize worksite potential hazards, including overhead, underground, ground conditions (slope/soil/excavation), other trades in
proximity, pedestrians, and mobile traffic
(c) Ability to assemble and disassemble the crane or hoist in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and specifications
(d) Selecting the appropriate boom, jib, track/outrigger extension, parts of load line, and counterweight to meet lift requirements and determine the
net lifting capacity of this configuration
(e) Knowing, understanding, and properly using the load charts with respect to actual lifting components installed and the configuration being used
(f) Selecting, configuring, and using the controls and control panel, computer, and limiting device functions with respect to the actual machine
components installed
(g) Inspecting the equipment components (e.g., pre-operational checks and regular periodic inspections) and performing minor maintenance as
required by, and at intervals required by, the manufacturer's specifications, applicable Standard, or the employer
(h) Maintaining the equipment log book with respect to pre-shift inspections and safety checks, and entering any observed defects, operating
difficulty, or need for maintenance; reporting required repairs immediately to the employer
(i) Operating the equipment in a proper, safe, controlled, and smooth manner in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications; understanding
and implementing safe rigging and lifting procedures
(j) Understanding and using hand signals and radio protocol for hoisting operations
(k) Calculating (as necessary) and understanding lift plans
(l) Understanding critical lift definitions, supervision, planning, and meeting the applicable requirements
(m) Shutting down and securing the equipment when it is unattended
If the assessment reveals any gaps in the worker's knowledge or skills, the employer needs to ensure these gaps are addressed through further
training and instruction.
Verification of competence
As part of an inspection by a WorkSafeBC prevention officer, employers may be asked to verify compliance with the requirement that the
operator of the crane or hoist is qualified and has demonstrated competence. This verification would entail reviewing records relating to the
competency assessment and the qualifications of the operator. The extent of documentation expected would reflect the nature of the crane or
hoisting equipment, in particular the size and complexity of the equipment. For example, it is likely to be much simpler to assess competencies of an
operator of a small shop crane than it is to assess competencies for an operator of a large warehouse bridge crane.

G14.34.1 Operator certification

Issued January 1, 2007; Editorial Revision May 3, 2007; Revised December 1, 2008; Revised July 9, 2009; Revised March 7, 2011; Revised
November 21, 2017
Regulatory excerpt
Section 14.34.1 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
On and after July 1, 2007, a mobile crane, tower crane or boom truck must be operated only
(a) by a person with a valid operator's certificate issued by a person acceptable to the Board, and
(b) in accordance with any conditions stipulated on the certificate.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to identify who is considered "a person acceptable to the Board" and has the authority for certifying crane
operators in the province of British Columbia, in accordance with section 14.34.1 of the Regulation.
Types of equipment operators covered
Section 14.34.1 applies to operators of all mobile cranes, boom trucks, and tower cranes with a rated capacity equal to or greater than five tons
(4.54 tonnes) and/or with a boom length equal to or greater than 25 feet (7.62 meters) based on manufacturer's specifications. WorkSafeBC
considers this equipment to include the following:
Mobile Cranes and Boom Trucks:
As described in
CSA Standard Z150-1998, Safety Code for Mobile Cranes
ANSI Standard ANSI/ASME B30.5-2004, Mobile and Locomotive Cranes
ANSI Standard ANSI/ASME B30.22-2005, Articulating Boom Cranes
Tower Cranes
As described in
CSA Standard Z248-2004, Code for Tower Cranes
 ANSI Standard ASME B30.4-2003, Portal, Tower, and Pillar Cranes
Crane operator certification
Crane operator certification is administered through the British Columbia Association for Crane Safety (BC Crane Safety). As the administrator,
BC Crane Safety is responsible for the certification process; including application, assessment, quality assurance, and maintenance of the
certification scheme. BC Crane Safety has the authority to issue crane operator certification in B.C.
Full details on how to become certified as a crane operator are available at www.bccranesafety.ca.
Credential recognition — Other jurisdictions
Crane operators from other jurisdictions must have their credentials validated by BC Crane Safety to receive a certificate acceptable to
WorkSafeBC.
Enforcement
On inspections at workplaces, a WorkSafeBC prevention officer may require a crane operator to produce a valid BC Crane Operator Certificate.
An employer that permits a non-certified operator to operate a crane will be subject to orders from the prevention officer. In some situations, the
employer may be subject to administrative penalties. The non-certified operator may also be subject to orders prohibiting the operator from
continuing to operate a crane.

G14.48(2) Acceptable standard for audio and video communication

Issued February 11, 2009

Regulatory excerpt
Section 14.48(2) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Audio and video communication systems used in a hoisting operation must be designed, installed, operated and maintained according
to a standard acceptable to the Board.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to specify an acceptable standard for audio and video communication systems used in a hoisting operation.
Wireless systems
Section 14.48(2) of the Regulation requires that audio communication systems used in a hoisting operation be designed, installed, operated, and
maintained in accordance with a standard acceptable to WorkSafeBC. Generally, audio communication in hoisting operations will be conducted
using two-way radios. These radio communication systems are to be
Certified for use in Canada by Industry Canada
Operated in conformance with all applicable licensing requirements of Industry Canada
Designed, installed, operated, and maintained by qualified persons
Single channel radios (as required by section 14.49(2) of the Regulation)
Designed so that they do not have controls that allow the operator to vary the power output
In addition, operators of such radio communication systems are to check for interference before use, and to cease use if interference is
experienced. Radio communication systems designed, installed, operated, and maintained in accordance with these criteria are considered to meet
a standard acceptable to WorkSafeBC.
Hardwired systems
In some cases, it may be necessary to use video or audio communication systems that do not use radio frequencies. For example, a tunneling
operation where a hoist is used to lower or raise materials through a shaft may find radio communication systems unreliable. In these scenarios,
audio or video communication systems can be hardwired. Such hardwired systems are to be
Designed, installed, operated, and maintained by qualified persons
Able to immediately indicate any communication failure
Compliant with applicable codes, bylaws, or legislation governing their design, installation, operation, or maintenance. For example, such
systems are compliant with section 60 of the Canadian Electrical Code dealing with electrical communication systems
Hardwired audio or video communication systems meeting these criteria are considered to meet a standard acceptable to WorkSafeBC.
Guidelines Part 14 - Mobile cranes, boom trucks and sign trucks

G14.64(3) Definition of "duty cycle work"

Issued August 16, 2000; Editorial Revision February 1, 2008

Regulatory excerpt
Section 14.64(3) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
 A crane being used for duty cycle work is exempt from the requirements of subsection (1) if the load applied to the crane is safely
below the rated capacity of the crane and if the possibility of an unexpected overload does not exist.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide information on the concepts of 'duty cycle work,' and 'safely below the rated capacity of the crane.' The
guideline also discusses pulling and repositioning a pile, and support activities.
Duty cycle work
"Duty cycle work" means the use of a crane to do dragline, clamshell, dynamic compaction, or pile driving work, or with an electromagnet such as
for handling scrap metal. Pile extraction using a vibrating pile extraction device is also considered duty cycle work. In duty cycle operations the
loads are generally known and/or can be maintained "safely below the rated capacity" for the crane. Pile extraction without a vibrating extraction
device is not to be considered within the scope of the exemption of section 14.64(3), as the load applied to the crane cannot be assured of being
safely below the rated capacity of the crane.
Safely below the rated capacity of the crane
The phrase "safely below the rated capacity of the crane" means the total load being handled should not exceed 75% of the rated capacity of the
crane. The rated capacity of a mobile crane varies with the configuration of the crane, such as the length of boom installed, and the boom
angle/load radius. Good craning practice requires the operator to accurately know the weight of the total load to be lifted, and the rated capacity of
the crane for the full range of movement of the lifted load. Typically the lifting tasks needed to support duty cycle work should involve loads of less
than 50% of the rated capacity of the crane.
Pulling and repositioning a pile
When starting to drive a pile, occasionally the lower end of the pile will drift or move off of its intended position to the extent the crew will need to
stop driving that pile, pull the pile back out, and reposition it before resuming driving that pile. Typically the need to do this will arise once or twice
a shift, and the decision to pull and reposition the pile will be made before about 10% of the intended pile depth in the ground has been achieved.
Pulling a pile in these circumstances is not typically considered a "pile extraction" operation. Generally the friction load from the soil acting on such
a short length of a pile which has just been driven should be low relative to the weight of the pile. Provided the total lift needed in these
circumstances can be reasonably determined to be safely below the rated capacity of the crane, it may be done by the crane being used for driving
the pile without installing a load weight indicating device on that crane.
Support activities
During operations such as clam shell dredging and pile driving there are generally other lifting tasks to be performed to support the pile driving or
dredging function. For example, piling material may need to be off-loaded from a truck or repositioned on the worksite or a welder or air
compressor may need to be repositioned. Provided such support activities involve lifts of known weight that are safely below the rated capacity of
the crane, they may be done by the crane being used for the duty cycle work without installing a load weight indicating device on that crane.
A crane on site not being directly used in the duty cycle application must conform to the requirements of sections 14.64(1) and (2) of the
Regulation.

G14.71 Mobile crane and boom truck annual inspections

Issued February 1, 2008; Revised June 10, 2010; Editorial Revision February 6, 2012; Revised June 19, 2020; Editorial Revision consequential
to August 22, 2022 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 14.71 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) A mobile crane or boom truck must be inspected at least once every 12 months in accordance with good engineering practice to
ensure it meets
(a) the crane or boom truck manufacturer's specifications,
(b) the requirements of the applicable design or safety standard specified in section 14.2, and
(c) the requirements of this Regulation
(2) A mobile crane or boom truck must not be used after an inspection under subsection (1) unless a professional engineer certifies it
is safe for use on the basis of that inspection.
Section 14.2(5) of the Regulation states:
A mobile crane, telescoping or articulating boom truck or sign truck must meet the requirements of
(a) CSA Standard Z150-1998, Safety Code for Mobile Cranes,
(b) ANSI Standard ANSI/ASME B30.5-2004, Mobile and Locomotive Cranes, or
(c) ANSI Standard ANSI/ASME B30.22-2005, Articulating Boom Cranes.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to outline some of the factors that should be considered when determining if an inspection has been conducted in
accordance with "good engineering practice" under section 14.71 of the Regulation. It also provides information on who is authorized to certify
that the inspection has been done and that the crane or boom truck is safe for use.
Good engineering practice
The Engineers and Geoscientists of BC (EGBC), in its professional practice guideline titled Annual Equipment Inspection and Certification in
British Columbia, describes the standard of practice that engineering professionals should follow when carrying out equipment inspections and
certifications. WorkSafeBC considers following this EGBC guideline as following good engineering practice for the annual inspections and
certifications of mobile cranes or boom trucks.
A copy of the EGBC's professional practice guideline can be accessed here - Annual Equipment Inspection and Certification in British
Columbia.
Certification
Certification must be done by a professional engineer. If the inspection, assessment, and any necessary repair work are done in B.C., the
professional engineer, as required by the Professional Governance Act, must be licensed to practice in B.C. If this work is being done outside
B.C., for example in Alberta, the professional engineer must be licensed to practice in that jurisdiction.
Inspection and certification process
The EGBC has defined the annual inspection and certification process for a mobile crane or boom truck in its professional practice guideline titled
Annual Equipment Inspection and Certification in British Columbia.

G14.72(4) Crane certification during pile driving and dynamic compaction operations versus lifting service

Issued March 7, 2011

Regulatory excerpt
Section 14.72(4) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
A crane used in any operation described in subsection (1) or (2) must not be returned to lifting service unless a professional engineer
inspects the crane and certifies that it is safe for such use.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline explains the circumstances where engineering inspection and certification is and is not required under Regulation section 14.72(4).
Background
Regulation section 14.72(4) requires that a crane used for pile driving, pile extraction, or dynamic compaction (foundation-duty cycle work) be
inspected by a professional engineer and certified as safe to use, prior to the crane being returned to lifting service. The intention of this requirement
is to ensure that the crane is safe for lifting service after the crane has been used in foundation-duty cycle work. This requirement is in addition to
the boom inspection and engineering certification required under sections 14.72(1), (2), and (3) of the Regulation. Certification must be
performed at least quarterly for crane booms used with a vibratory hammer for driving piles or monthly for crane booms used with a vibratory pile
extractor or drop hammer, or used for dynamic compaction.
Activities in support of and ancillary to the foundation-duty cycle work
The following work activities are considered to be in support of and ancillary to the foundation-duty cycle work and do not constitute a return to
lifting service. Therefore, these activities may be performed by the crane being used for the foundation-duty cycle work without the engineering
inspection and certification required under section 14.72(4).
In each of the following activities, the load may not weigh more than 75% of the rated capacity of the crane
Lifting and loading a pile into the vertical leads
Lifting and vertically stacking (positioning) a length of piling onto a previously driven pile
Material handling, including moving piling, driving frames, equipment, or materials at the worksite, that supports the foundation-duty cycle
operation
Girder launching that is required to advance the crane onto the next bridge span or dock structure (marine or land based). This excludes the
sequential placement of multiple spans
Lifting a worker(s) on a work platform suspended from a crane to support the foundation-duty cycle work is also an activity that can be conducted
without the crane being "returned to lifting service." With respect to the work platform, Regulation section 13.27 specifies that the weight of the
work platform and its rigging, plus the rated capacity, must not exceed 50% of the rated capacity of the crane. Note that other regulatory
requirements apply, for example the following:
Part 13 specifies requirements for the crane, fall protection, trial lifts, and the design and installation of the work platform (WCB Standard
WPL 2-2004 Design, Construction and Use of Crane Supported Work Platforms)
Regulation section 20.102 regulates the use of multiple load lines
Part 14 specifies requirements for critical lifts
When the lifting is no longer in support of and ancillary to the foundation-duty cycle work being done at a work location, either because the
foundation-duty cycle work is complete or it has been suspended for an extended period of time so that lifting work can be performed, or when
the crane has been moved to a new work location or work task, the crane inspection and certification specified in section 14.72(4) is required
before the crane is used in lifting service.
Guidelines Part 14 - Tower cranes

G14.88(5) Alternative means of jib access

Issued February 1, 2008

Regulatory excerpt
Section 14.88 (Access) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) A tower crane must have a fixed ladder installed in or on the mast to provide access to the jib and crown of the crane.
(2) The ladder under subsection (1) must meet the following requirements:
(a) the ladder must be able to support two 1.1 kN (250 lbs.) point loads between any two consecutive points where the ladder is
attached to the crane;
(b) there must be a minimum horizontal distance of 15 cm (6 in.) between the rungs and the object to which the ladder is attached;
(c) landing platforms must be provided at least every 9 m (30 ft.) on the ladder;
(d) each section of the ladder must be offset horizontally from adjacent sections or the landing platforms must have trap doors;
(e) if a section of the ladder has a climb exceeding 6 m (20 ft.) in length, that section of ladder must have a ladder safety cage 68 cm
to 76 cm (27 in. to 30 in.) in diameter or a ladder safety device must be used.
(3) Each tower crane jib must have a continuous walkway from the mast to the tip.
(4) The walkway referred to in subsection (3) must meet the following requirements:
(a) the walkway must be at least 30 cm (12 in.) wide and constructed with a non-skid surface;
(b) a handline, which is approximately 1 m (39 in.) above the level of the walkway, and a midline must be provided on both sides of
the walkway not more than 30 cm (12 in.) out from the edge of the walkway and supported at intervals not exceeding 3 m (10 ft.);
(c) the handline and midline referred to in paragraph (b) must be wire rope of at least 1 cm (3/8 in.) diameter;
(d) if it is not practicable to provide handlines in accordance with paragraph (b), alternative means of fall protection, such as a
horizontal lifeline system, must be provided in accordance with the requirements of Part 11 (Fall Protection) and must be set out in
the fall protection plan.
(5) If, due to the design or size of the tower crane, it is not practicable to meet the requirements set out in subsections (1) to (4),
alternative safe means of access must be provided.
(6) The climbing space of a tower crane mast must be clear of protruding objects and must provide a safe and unobstructed passage.
(7) A written fall protection plan, which addresses the requirements of fall protection when a person is operating, inspecting, servicing
and maintaining the tower crane, must be developed and implemented.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide information on
The functions of the walkway required by section 14.88(3) & (4)
Possible alternatives where walkways as specified by section 14.88(3) & (4) are not practicable
An outline of the issues that typically need to be addressed when designing and implementing alternative safe means of access
For some tower cranes it may not be practicable to attach a walkway to the jib in a manner that would meet the requirements of section 14.88(3)
& (4). For example, in some cases, there may be a walkway that can extend only as far as the trolley drive assembly, and on others it may not be
feasible to fit a walkway at all.
Under section 14.88(5), other options for access can be considered, as long as they provide a safe means of access.
The functions of the walkway
When designing safe means of access as alternatives to walkways it is important to recognize the functions or purposes served by walkways.
The walkway is intended to provide a means of safe access by a worker to all points along the jib. Access along the full length is needed for the
purposes of inspections, maintenance, and any repairs on the jib or its support system. The walkway also provides access to the operator's cab, if
mounted on the jib. In addition, it may provide an emergency access route if it is necessary to rescue a worker from the jib.
The CSA Standard Z248-2004 Code for Tower Cranes lists the types of inspections that must be done on the components of the crane, and
their frequency. Inspections typically done from the walkway include
Daily inspections of load trolley ropes, load hoist ropes that can reasonably be expected to be used during the shift, and their points of
attachment
Weekly inspections of structural pins and keepers, trolley rollers and tracks, gear shaft and belt drives, sheaves, bushings, pins, all rope
attachments, pendant lines, cable clips, thimbles, and ferrules
Monthly inspections of all running ropes, the jib structure, sheaves, bearings, and mounts
If the crane will be in place for an extended period of time, annual inspections are needed of the jib structure using nondestructive testing methods,
all load carrying equipment (including sheaves, blocks, rings, shackles and hooks), and all wire ropes.
Possible alternatives to walkways
When provision of a walkway required by section 14.88(3) & (4) is not practicable on a tower crane there may be a number of other options for
inspection and maintenance of components. Examples include
For self erect cranes, lowering the jib to allow inspection and maintenance of jib components
Use of an elevating work platform to access the jib area
Use of a walkway narrower than specified in section 14.88(4), in combination with a horizontal lifeline along the jib
Use of a work platform (basket) attached to the tower crane trolley, in combination with a personal fall arrest system. Note: European
Standard EN14439:2006 Cranes-Safety-Tower Cranes requires both a basket attached to the trolley, and a walkway with side
protection or a horizontal lifeline along the full length of the jib.
Issues that need to be addressed with alternative means of access
When designing and implementing a means of alternative access it is essential to ensure issues such as those listed below are addressed. The issues
listed under item A would apply in all circumstances. Those listed under item B are more specific to work platforms attached to trolleys. Neither
list is intended to be complete as in the final analysis a hazard assessment specific to the equipment needs to be done and appropriate
protective measures implemented.
A. Issues of general application
Communication procedures and equipment that will allow safe use of the access system.
Assurance that any work platform or walkway used provides firm, non-slip footing.
The means of compliance with the requirements for personal fall protection in Parts 11 and 13 of the Regulation.
The means of inspection and certification of the device, in compliance with section 14.77 (Structural inspection) of the Regulation, if the
device is part of the tower crane.
An emergency procedure and means of rescuing a worker in the event that the access system fails, or the worker becomes incapacitated.
Lockout of the energy supply to the tower crane in accordance with the requirements of Part 10 (Lockout) of the Regulation, as required
for inspection and maintenance.
Where applicable, guarding meeting the provisions of CSA Standard Z248-2004, Code for Tower Cranes, as required by section 14.2(6)
of the Regulation.
Instructions for use of the system and the training of workers.
B. Additional issues specific to work platforms attached to trolleys
The means of compliance with certain provisions of CSA Standard Z248-2004, Code for Tower Cranes. (Among other things, for
trolley systems, the Standard sets out requirements for braking the trolley, the means to prevent the trolley from becoming
detached in the event of wheel or axle breakage or sideloading, and the means of stopping the outward movement of the load
trolley in the event of trolley drive rope breakage.)
The design and fabrication of the work platform and the means of attaching it to the trolley. (The platform should be designed and
fabricated by the crane manufacturer specifically for the crane on which it is used, and be permanently marked with the
manufacturer's information, the rated capacity, a part number, and the number of occupants for which it is designed (at 115 kg
(250 lbs)/occupant). The system for attaching the platform to the trolley will need to ensure the platform is securely attached and
remains level when occupied. If a platform system is built by another party, it will need to be accompanied by an engineering
certificate and drawings that address the engineering issues involved.)
The means of compliance with section 14.21 (Fenders) of the Regulation. (This section requires that trolley wheels be fitted with
fenders or guards if there is a possibility of injury to the worker from contact with trolley wheels moving along the rail.)
The means of compliance with section 4.58 (Specifications for guards and guardrails) of the Regulation, as it applies to the platform.
The means of guarding against shearing and entanglement hazards when the platform is traveled along the jib.
The means of compliance with the requirements of Part 10 (Lockout) of the Regulation so that the platform is immobilized during servicing
and inspection of machine parts, and the worker is protected from movement of any equipment while performing work.
The means of safe access to and egress from the platform.
The installation, operation, and inspection requirements for the trolley, including any additional requirements for the attached platform
provided by the tower crane manufacturer or other applicable party. (Note: The instructions for use are to include a stipulation that no
 loads are to be handled by the crane while the platform is occupied.)
Guidelines Part 14 - Construction material hoists

G14.96 Light duty portable construction material hoists

Issued May 1, 2013; Revised consequential to May 1, 2017 Regulatory Amendment

Regulatory excerpt
Section 14.96 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Before a construction material hoist is put into use, a professional engineer must certify that
(a) the hoist is safe for use, and
(b) the installation of the hoist complies with
(i) the design criteria for that installation,
(ii) the hoist manufacturer's specifications,
(iii) the requirements of CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z256-M87, Safety Code for Material Hoists, and
(iv) the requirements of this Regulation.
(2) If, after certification under subsection (1), a modification is made to the structure, mechanical components or control system of a
construction material hoist or it is changed through the addition or removal of a support section of the hoist, the hoist must not be used
until it is recertified as safe for use by a professional engineer.
(3) Subsections (1) and (2) do not apply to a light duty portable material hoist installed and operated in accordance with the hoist
manufacturer's instructions.
(4) A copy of the certifications required in subsections (1) and (2) or the manufacturer's instructions referred to in subsection (3) must
be available at the workplace where the hoist is installed.
Section 14.2(8) of the Regulation states:
(8) A construction material hoist, other than a light duty portable material hoist, must meet the requirements of CSA Standard
CAN/CSA-Z256-M87, Safety Code for Material Hoists.
Purpose of guideline
Light duty portable construction material hoists are widely used in workplaces throughout the province. While light duty, they may offer ergonomic
benefits, increased productivity, and safety when properly installed and used.
The purpose of this guideline is to provide examples of construction material hoists that are typically manufactured to be light duty and portable
under section 14.96(3) of the Regulation. The guideline also highlights some of the key requirements that apply to hoists and sets out the relevant
sections of the Regulation.
Light duty portable material hoists
Sections 14.96(1) and (2) of the Regulation require that certain certifications by a professional engineer be in place before a construction material
hoist is put into use. In particular, a professional engineer must certify that the installation of the hoist complies with CSA Standard Z256-M87,
Safety Code for Material Hoists.
These requirements do not apply to "light duty portable" material hoists (section 14.96(3)). These include, for example, track-guided, wire rope,
base-mounted drum hoists that are supported by a scaffold, as well as ladder-based hoists, provided the following occurs:
They are considered by the manufacturer to be light duty portable
Their original capacity does not exceed 500 lb.
Light duty portable material hoists are also exempted from the requirements of CSA Standard Z256-M87 under section 14.2(8) of the Regulation.
Light duty portable material hoists were not intended to be subject to the requirements of that standard. For example, the standard requires
hoistway doors to be equipped with locks, while light duty portable material hoists typically do not have doors. Likewise, there are requirements in
the standard for counterweights, which are normally not present in light duty portable material hoists. As a result, section 14.2(8) of the Regulation
does not apply to light duty portable material hoists.
Key applicable requirements
While CSA Standard Z256-M87 does not apply to light duty portable material hoists, there are still hazards associated with them that need to be
controlled. For that reason, all other relevant requirements of the Regulation apply. Some of the regulatory obligations that apply to light duty
portable material hoists are set out below (Note: This is not an exhaustive list of all applicable requirements).
Scaffold
Scaffolds that are used to support a crane or hoist (other than a manually-powered one) must be constructed, installed, and used in
accordance with the instructions of a professional engineer (section 13.11(1)(e)).
The employer must ensure that scaffolds are in a safe condition and are able to withstand the load ( section 13.13).
The major components of scaffolds must be used in accordance with technical data provided by the manufacturer, or in writing by a
professional engineer (section 13.15).
If specifications for use with a construction material hoist are not provided by the manufacturer, then the major components will need to be
used in accordance with the written instructions of a professional engineer.
Hoisting system
The hoist must meet good engineering practice and be able to safely perform its function (section 14.2(15)).
The rated capacity of the hoist must not exceed the capacity of the structure supporting the hoist (section 14.11(1)).
The hoist must be installed and operated in accordance with the hoist manufacturer's instructions (section 14.96(3)).
The hoist must be inspected and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the standard(s) it is required to meet, or
as specified by a professional engineer (section 4.3(2)).
The hoist must be inspected and maintained at a frequency, and to the extent required to ensure that every component is capable of carrying
out its original design function with an adequate margin of safety (section 14.13(1)).
In the case of track-guided, wire rope, base-mounted drum hoists, this will include inspection and maintenance of components, such as the
following:
Drum
Wire rope
Guarding of the area under the carriage
Shackles
Pins
Attachment points
Sheave
Track system
Carriage
Controls
Braking system
In the case of ladder-based hoists, this will include inspection and maintenance of components, such as the following:
Base of the unit
Set up area
Electrical connection (if electrically powered)
Guarding and safety features
Track or rail connections
Drive system
Braking system
Bracing (if required)
Carriage and attachments

Any repair to load bearing components (e.g., carriage, track, sheaves, brakes, etc.) must be certified by a professional engineer or the
original manufacturer (section 14.13(3)).
Records of inspection and maintenance must be kept (section 14.14(f)).
The manufacturer's manual (or, if not available, an engineer's instructions) must be reasonably accessible to the operator and other persons
inspecting or maintaining the hoist at the workplace (section 14.12).
The employer must ensure that the hoist is capable of safely performing the functions for which it is used (section 4.3(1)(a)).
The hoist must be selected, used, and operated in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions (if available), safe work practices, and the
requirements of the Regulation (section 4.3(1)(b)). For example, this will include the following:
The use of communication to prevent the unintended removal of the hoist, as well as procedures for guardrail removal while unloading
Barricading of the area around the hoist base to prevent inadvertent worker entry
Workers must not ride on the hoist unless it is necessary to do so for inspection and maintenance (section 14.97).
The hoist must prominently display a notice stating that no person may ride on the equipment, and the net rated capacity of the hoist must be
clearly and durably marked on its structure (section 14.98).
The components of the hoisting system must meet the requirements of all standards that apply under the Regulation.
All applicable rigging requirements in Part 15 of the Regulation must be complied with.
All applicable guarding requirements of the Regulation must be complied with to prevent shear and pinch points on each landing (for
example, sections 12.2 and 12.12).
Contents
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

G15.5 Component identification

G15.9 Wedge socket connections
Guidelines Part 15 - General requirements

G15.5 Component identification

Effective August 1, 1999; Editorial Revision June 4, 2009

Regulatory excerpt
Section 15.5 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Rigging fittings must be marked with the manufacturer's identification, product identifier and the working load limit or sufficient
information to readily determine the WLL.
(2) The WLL of existing fittings not identified as specified in subsection (1) must be determined by a qualified person, marked on the
fitting and such fittings must be removed from service by January 1, 2001.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to discuss what is considered sufficient information to readily determine the working load limit (WLL) under
subsection 15.5(1).
Sufficient information
Subsection 15.5(1) requires that rigging fittings must be marked with the manufacturer's identification and the product identifier. Subsection 15.5(1)
also requires that the rigging fitting must be marked with either the working load limit (WLL) for the fitting, or sufficient information to readily
determine the WLL.
Where the WLL is not marked on the fitting, the WLL can be determined using the manufacturer's catalogue or the manufacturer's specification
sheet. For these fittings, sufficient information for the purposes of subsection 15.5(1) includes the manufacturer's identification and the product
identifier/part number, as well as any other technical information necessary to look up the fitting in the catalogue or specification sheet. A copy of
the manufacturer's catalogue or specification sheet should be available in order for such information to satisfy the condition of being able to "readily
determine" the WLL for the fitting

G15.9 Wedge socket connections

Issued August 1, 1999; Editorial Revision April 15, 2021

Regulatory excerpt
Section 15.9 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
If a wedge socket is used as a wire rope termination, the dead end of the rope must be secured to prevent release of the wedge or
rope slippage at the socket.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to further discuss what is required if a wedge socket is used as a wire rope termination.
Securing the dead end of the rope
Section 15.9 of the Regulation states "If a wedge socket is used as a wire rope termination, the dead end of the rope must be secured to prevent
release of the wedge or rope slippage at the socket."
The dead end of the rope must be secured in accordance with the wedge socket manufacturer's instructions (refer to section 4.3(1) of the
Regulation). These manufacturers do not condone securing the dead end of the rope to the live portion of the rope using a wire rope clip. There
are a number of products available that provide a convenient means of securing the dead end of the rope and preventing rope slippage at the
socket.
Contents

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL OPERATING REQUIREMENTS

G16.8(3) Rider restriction

DIVISION 2 - GENERAL MACHINE REQUIREMENTS

G16.24 Alternate means of escape - Purpose-built window breaking device

G16.30 Load handling attachments - Forklifts
 G16.33 Protective structures for hydraulic excavators pioneering on steep side hills
G16.33-2 Protective structures - Acceptable alternate standards
G16.35 ROPS standards - Acceptable alternate standard

DIVISION 3 - ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIFIC PRIME MOVERS

G16.40(8) All terrain vehicles - Modifications

G16.43(2)-1 Lift truck operator training
G16.43(2)-2 Lift truck operator training - Alternative standards
G16.43(5) Pedestrian and equipment traffic

RETIRED GUIDELINES

Guidelines retired consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendments

Guidelines retired prior to September 1, 2021
Guidelines Part 16 - Division 1 - General Operating Requirements

G16.8(3) Rider restriction (formerly G16.31(4))

Issued August 1999; Revised consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment

Regulatory excerpt
Section 16.8(3) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(3) A person other than the operator may only ride on a ROPS-equipped prime mover for the purpose of training or maintenance
and, for that purpose, the prime mover
(a) must not be operated in a rollover hazard area, and
(b) must not be engaged in an operation that could
(i) cause the mobile equipment to become unstable, or
(ii) cause the person to fall or be ejected, pinched or dragged.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to hightlight section 16.8(3) of the Regulation that sets out certain requirements if a worker other than the operator
must ride on ROPS equipped mobile equipment.
Rider requirements
Section 16.8(5) of the Regulation outlines the safety requirements for workers riding on prime movers that are not equipped with ROPS. These
requirements include:
A seat that meets the requirements of section 16.20
A footboard or platform
Hand-holds
A safety belt, harness, guardrail, or other means of restraint
Although these requirements are not specifically mandated by section 16.8(3) for workers riding on ROPS-equipped prime movers, these or
similar requirements should be met so that the rider can be transported safely.
Section 4.3(1) of the Regulation, which relates to safe machinery and equipment, still applies.
Guidelines Part 16 - Division 2 - General Machine Requirements

G16.24 Alternate means of escape - Purpose-built window breaking device (formerly G16.17)

Issued August 18, 2014; Revised consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 16.24 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) If mobile equipment manufactured after January 1, 2000 has a single cab entrance door, the mobile equipment must have an
alternative means of escape that is clearly marked both inside and outside the cab and that
(a) is not located on the same surface as the cab entrance door,
 (b) is usable regardless of the position of movable components or accessories of the machine,
(c) does not pose additional hazards to the operator,
(d) can be opened from both the inside and outside without the use of tools when the mobile equipment is in use,
(e) requires a force of not more than 135 N (30.3 lbf) to open, and
(f) provides a clear opening, the minimum dimensions of which comply with ISO Standard 2867-2011(R2016), Earth-moving
machinery - Access systems.
(2) Mobile equipment manufactured before January 1, 2000 with a single cab entrance door must meet the requirements for an
alternative means of escape required at the date of manufacture.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline describes when a purpose-built window breaking device may meet the requirements of section 16.24 of the Regulation.
Background
Section 16.24 of the Regulation requires an alternate means of escape for mobile equipment with a single cab entrance door. The intent of this
requirement is to allow a secondary means of escape if the primary means is obstructed, e.g., due to fire, overturn, submersion, or other mishap.
In most circumstances an openable window can be built into a cab design, or a second door or hatch can be installed in the cab. This is what is
anticipated by section 16.24(1) of the Regulation.
There may be circumstances where it is not practicable to install or retrofit the cab of mobile equipment with openable windows or to install a
second door or hatch, such as the following:
Cab structural strength would be significantly altered by installing an alternate means of escape
A redesigned alternate means of escape would affect the machine capacity or range of motion
In these circumstances, it may be acceptable to install a purpose-built device to break a window in an emergency so that a person can escape from
a cab. For example, this could be a commercially available device that permanently attaches directly to the window and can be used by the
operator to break the glass by punching the device. Although the device does not open the window directly, it does open an egress point by
breaking the window.
Use of a tool
The Regulation states that the alternate means of escape must be openable without the use of a tool. Therefore, it is not acceptable to rely on a
hammer or other loose commercial glass breaking devices in the cab for the purpose of breaking a window. Even if the device is tethered to the
window, it is still not an acceptable means because there is a significant chance of the device being removed or otherwise being unavailable in an
emergency.
However, if a device can be permanently installed on a window so that it cannot be removed in any normal way (i.e., becomes integral with the
glass), and can be readily used to break the window, then it would not be considered a tool and could be acceptable under the Regulation.
Mobile equipment manufactured after January 1, 2000
For mobile equipment manufactured after January 1, 2000, all the requirements of section 16.24(1) of the Regulation apply.
As an alternate means of escape, an openable hatch or window has some important advantages in terms of reliability. For example, a hatch can be
tested and drills can be run regularly to check that the operator can open it in an emergency situation, whereas the purpose-built device cannot
readily be tested to ensure the operator can use it to break a window in an emergency. Factors that may affect the utility and reliability of the
purpose-built device include the following:
The device will only be effective with certain types of window glass, e.g., tempered glass versus non-tempered or laminated glass. Not all
window glass is tempered glass, and even when it is, it is not always labelled as such. An employer may need to contact the mobile
equipment, device, and/or glass supplier to determine whether the glass is of a type that will be broken by the device.
The device will only be effective for certain thicknesses of glass. An employer will need assurance that the device will work when required in
an emergency.
Tempered glass breaks into fragments rather than sharp shards. While the fragments do not represent the same high hazard as sharp angular
shards, there is still a danger of fragments lodging in the skin or eye, and workers need to be made aware to take precautions when
breaking the glass.
When a tempered glass window breaks, it may stay relatively in place in the frame and will then need to be pushed in order to remove it
from the frame.
All equipment operators must be trained in how to properly use the device in an emergency, and refresher training may be required
periodically.
The device needs to be part of a regular inspection regime to ensure it remains in place and undamaged. There is no practical way to test the
functioning of the device on a periodic basis. The device may have an expiry date and this will need to be part of the inspection.
A window film (e.g., advertising, anti-vandalism) or double glazing may affect performance of the device.
A purpose-built device is acceptable if the following considerations are met:
The requirements of Regulation sections 16.24(1)(a)–(f) are met.
Manufacturer's instructions are followed (both the mobile equipment and the device manufacturer).
It is not practicable to install an openable escape hatch, door, or window as the alternate means of escape.
The window is of a type and condition that will break as necessary by use of the device according to the manufacturer's instructions. The
window material and the thickness are important in this consideration.
The window can be safely broken from the inside (by the equipment operator) and the outside (by rescuers).
The window and attached device do not create an additional hazard. Tempered glass will break into fragments. Workers need to be made
aware that the fragments could become embedded in the eye or skin and precautions need to be taken. If the window is of a type that will
break into sharp shards that are likely to cause injury to a worker, then this method would not be acceptable.
The installed device does not obscure the operator's view or otherwise hinder equipment operation.
The device is installed in a location on the window so that it is likely to be readily accessible when necessary in case of mishap.
The device is part of the pre-use inspection of the mobile equipment. The presence and condition of the device must be verified.
Instructions on how to use the device are clearly visible inside and outside the window.
The device is permanently affixed at the window.
A qualified person has inspected the installed device and provided written confirmation to the employer that the device is installed in
accordance with the considerations listed here. This information is provided to the joint health and safety committee or worker
representative, as applicable, and is made available to a WorkSafeBC prevention officer upon request.
Mobile equipment manufactured prior to January 1, 2000
As per section 16.24(2) of the Regulation, mobile equipment manufactured prior to January 1, 2000 and having a single cab entrance door must
be equipped with an alternate means of escape should the primary means be blocked.
The prescriptive requirements of sections 16.24(1)(a)-(f) do not apply to this mobile equipment. Employers should provide openable hatches or
windows as an alternate means of escape wherever practicable — however, a purpose-built device such as described in this guideline is also
acceptable as an alternate means of providing escape, provided that the manufacturer's instructions are followed.

G16.30 Load handling attachments – Forklifts (formerly G16.19)

Issued September 21, 2012; Editorial Revision consequential to February 1, 2013 Regulatory Amendment; Revised consequential to
September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 16.30 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Buckets, forks, booms, hoists and other load-handling attachments must be installed on mobile equipment as specified by the
manufacturer of the mobile equipment unless otherwise certified by a professional engineer for use on the mobile equipment.
(2) The design of the attachments referred to in subsection (1) must provide for an evaluation of the stability of the mobile equipment,
including the effect of load swing.
(3) The instructions of the manufacturer or professional engineer, as applicable, for the safe use of the mobile equipment with the
attachment must be available to the operator.
Section 4.3(2) of the Regulation states:
(2) Unless otherwise specified by this Regulation, the installation, inspection, testing, repair and maintenance of a tool, machine or
piece of equipment must be carried out
(a) in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and any standard the tool, machine or piece of equipment is required to meet,
or
(b) as specified by a professional engineer.
Section 4.8 of the Regulation states:
(1) Unless provided elsewhere in this Regulation, the rated capacity or rated load of a machine or piece of equipment is that specified
by the manufacturer of the machine or piece of equipment based on its design.
(2) The rated capacity or rated load must be certified by a professional engineer if
(a) the manufacturer's specification or other acceptable warranty cannot be produced,
(b) the equipment or machine has been modified in a manner which will change its rated capacity or rated load,
(c) wear, corrosion, damage or signs of fatigue are found which may reduce the rated capacity or rated load,
(d) the equipment or machine is used in a manner or for a purpose other than that for which it was originally designed, if the use will
 change the safe working load, or
(e) in the opinion of the Board, the provision of such certification is deemed necessary.
Sections 16.43(1)(a) and (b) of the Regulation state:
(1) The design, fabrication, use, inspection, maintenance and repair of a lift truck must meet
(a) CAN/CSA Standard B335-15-Safety standard for lift trucks, or
(b) as applicable,
(i) ANSI/ITSDF B56.la-2018, Safety Standard for Low Lift and High Lift Trucks,
(ii) ANSI/ITSDF B56.6-2016, Safety Standard for Rough Terrain Forklift Trucks, or
(iii) ISO 10896 Rough-Terrain Trucks - Safety Requirements and Verification: Part 1 (2012): Variable-Reach Trucks; Part 2
(2016): Slewing Trucks; Part 4 (2015): Additional Requirements for Variable-Reach Trucks Handling Freely Suspended
Loads
or the earlier version of the applicable standard that applied on the date of manufacture of the lift truck.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline provides information regarding the Regulation requirements pertaining to installation, written instructions regarding safe use and
stability, and determination of rated capacity when a forklift (also known as a lift truck) is fitted with a load handling attachment.
Installation requirements
There are a number of load handling attachments available for low lift, high lift, and rough terrain forklifts; including fork extensions, telescoping
booms, and attachable hoisting devices (hooks, clamps, side shifters, etc.). These load handling attachments are available both from the forklift
manufacturer and from third-party manufacturers. Sections 4.3(2) and 16.30(1) of the Regulation require that installation of these attachments be
carried out by either of the following:
In accordance with instructions from the manufacturers of both the load handling attachment and the forklift, and the requirements of the
relevant forklift standard
By a professional engineer
Safe use and stability instructions
The potential for instability of the forklift when a load handling attachment is installed and when a load is applied to the attachment is a key hazard
to be considered in the development of written safe use instructions required under sections 16.30(2) and (3) of the Regulation.
Instructions for safe use of the forklift with the load handling attachment should address the following factors:
Changes to the stability of the forklift caused by the following:
Any extension of the load past the normal point for the load rating of the forklift
The swing of any suspended load
Any altered load capacity caused by the use of the load handling attachment
Any altered handling characteristics of the forklift or forklift capabilities, such as maximum fork elevation for a specific forklift
Whether the specifications and instructions of either the forklift manufacturer or the load attachment manufacturer are affected when the
forklift and attachment are combined
The relevant specifications and instructions from the appropriate standard (refer to sections 16.43(1)(b); these standards include
requirements for the use of load handling attachments
Nameplates
If a forklift is equipped with a load handling attachment, clause 4.2.3 of ANSI/ITSDF B56.1-2009 requires the forklift be marked to identify the
attachment, show the weight of the combination of the truck and attachment, and show the capacity of the truck with the attachment at maximum
elevation with the load laterally centred.
Rated capacity
Load handling attachments that do any of the following:
Allow the load to swing
Significantly elevate the normal centre of gravity of the load
Reposition the allowable centre of gravity of the load past the normal load rating position (as specified by the forklift manufacturer)
can, in addition to affecting stability of the forklift, create significant changes in the load capacity of the forklift.
The forklift manufacturer may have anticipated the effects of the use of load handling attachments and specified the rated capacity for this use.
Where the forklift manufacturer has not provided for this use in the design and specifications of the equipment and has not specified the appropriate
rated capacity, or if the manufacturer's (or authorized agent's) specifications are not available, sections 4.8(2)(a) and (b) of the Regulation require
that the modified rated capacity or rated load be certified by a professional engineer.

G16.33 Protective structures for hydraulic excavators pioneering on steep side hills (formerly G16.21)

Issued August 1999; Editorial Revision April 2005; Revised consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Sections 16.33(1) and (2) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") state:
(1) In this section and section 16.38, "tipover", in respect of mobile equipment, means a roll about the longitudinal axis of up to 90°,
or a rear or frontal pitchover about the transverse axis of up to 90°, which roll or pitchover results in the contact of the cab with a
surface.
(2) Operators of mobile equipment, and any other riders of mobile equipment authorized by section 16.8, must be protected against
any reasonably foreseeable hazards from falling, flying or intruding objects or materials, or tipovers, by means of cabs, windows,
screens, grills, shields, deflectors, guards or structures on the mobile equipment that
(a) are designed and installed to provide an adequate view for the operator to safely use the mobile equipment, and
(b) meet the requirements of
(i) at least one of the following standards, if the mobile equipment is in the scope of the standard:
(A) CSA Standard B352.0-16, Rollover protective structures (ROPS), falling object protective structures (FOPS), operator
protective structures (OPS), and tip-over protective structures (TOPS) for mobile machinery - General Canadian
requirements;
(B) Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Recommended Practice J1356 MAR2013, Performance Criteria for Falling
Object Guards for Excavators;
(C) SAE J2267 APR2007 Minimum Performance Criteria for Operator Front Protective Structures (OFPS) for Certain
Equipment;
(D) ANSI/UL 752, Standard for Bullet-Resisting Equipment, 11th edition (with revisions up to and including December 11,
2015);
(E) WorkSafeBC G601 Standard - Heavy Duty Backstops for Logs and Rocks, set out in Schedule 16-A of this Part;
(F) WorkSafeBC G603 Standard - Heavy Duty Guards for Windows, set out in Schedule 16-B of this Part;
(G) WorkSafeBC G604 Standard - Light Duty Guards for Windows, set out in Schedule 16-C of this Part, or
(ii) an earlier version of at least one of the standards set out in subparagraph (i)(A) to (D), if the earlier version applied to the cabs,
windows, screens, grills, shields, deflectors, guards or structures on the mobile equipment on the date of manufacture of the mobile
equipment.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline provides alternate standards to those listed in section 16.33(2)(b) of the Regulation when dealing with protective structures for
hydraulic excavators pioneering on steep side hills.
Alternative standards
The standards referenced in section 16.33 deal with the minimum operator protection expected on a hydraulic excavator exposed to the hazard of
intruding or flying objects, such as loose debris, snags, tree trunks, or limbs, which are conditions normally encountered in pioneering steep side hill
logging grades and right-of-way construction.
Section 4.4(2)(b) of the Regulation permits the reliance on other practices, procedures, or rules which are acceptable to WorkSafeBC. The
following applicable alternates to the standards listed in the Regulation are considered acceptable:
1. WCB Standard: G602 Log Loader and Log Yarder Raised Cabs - cab structure designed to resist a force of at least 11,500 pounds
(simulating a 2000 pound blunt log impacting the cab at approximately 4 miles per hour), and an alternative exit meeting the requirements of
section 16.17 of the Regulation.
2. WCB Standard: G608 Mobile Equipment Roof Structures - Heavy Duty (designed to absorb 8500 foot - pounds of energy). (SAE
J1043 - Minimum Performance Criteria for Falling Object Protective Structures for Industrial Equipment or equivalent standard is
an accepted option under add either WCB or WorkSafeBC G608.)
3. An adequate substitute for WCB Standard G603 window guards is polycarbonate (sold under the trade names of Lexan or Tuffac) where
it is at least 1/2 inch thick and adequately supported from behind along the perimeter with at least a one inch overlap and by members in one
direction not more than 10 inches apart.
Where boom clearance does not permit a side window guard meeting WCB Standard G603, a window guard meeting WCB Standard G604,
Standard for Light-Duty Screen Guards for Off-Highway Equipment may be used. Section 16.33(2)(b)(i)(A) of the Regulation requires each
polycarbonate window on mobile equipment manufactured after February 1, 2002, or otherwise installed on mobile equipment after that date, to
be marked to show the thickness and grade of the material.
Do not drill holes in polycarbonate windows to mount the window on the machine, or for the installation of accessories such as windshield wipers.
Email WorkSafeBC's Prevention Practice, Quality, and Engineering department for further assistance on window guards made using
polycarbonate.

G16.33-2 Protective structures - Acceptable alternate standards (formerly G16.21(2)-2)

Issued October 26, 2011; Revised consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 16.33(2) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(2) Operators of mobile equipment, and any other riders of mobile equipment authorized by section 16.8, must be protected against
any reasonably foreseeable hazards from falling, flying or intruding objects or materials, or tipovers, by means of cabs, windows,
screens, grills, shields, deflectors, guards or structures on the mobile equipment that
(a) are designed and installed to provide an adequate view for the operator to safely use the mobile equipment, and
(b) meet the requirements of
(i) at least one of the following standards, if the mobile equipment is in the scope of the standard:
(A) CSA Standard B352.0-16, Rollover protective structures (ROPS), falling object protective structures (FOPS), operator
protective structures (OPS), and tip-over protective structures (TOPS) for mobile machinery - General Canadian
requirements;
(B) Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Recommended Practice J1356 MAR2013, Performance Criteria for Falling
Object Guards for Excavators;
(C) SAE J2267 APR2007 Minimum Performance Criteria for Operator Front Protective Structures (OFPS) for Certain
Equipment;
(D) ANSI/UL 752, Standard for Bullet-Resisting Equipment, 11th edition (with revisions up to and including December 11,
2015);
(E) WorkSafeBC G601 Standard - Heavy Duty Backstops for Logs and Rocks, set out in Schedule 16-A of this Part;
(F) WorkSafeBC G603 Standard - Heavy Duty Guards for Windows, set out in Schedule 16-B of this Part;
(G) WorkSafeBC G604 Standard - Light Duty Guards for Windows, set out in Schedule 16-C of this Part, or
(ii) an earlier version of at least one of the standards set out in subparagraph (i)(A) to (D), if the earlier version applied to the cabs,
windows, screens, grills, shields, deflectors, guards or structures on the mobile equipment on the date of manufacture of the mobile
equipment.
Purpose of guideline
Section 4.4(2)(b) of the Regulation permits the reliance on other practices, procedures, or rules which are acceptable to WorkSafeBC. This
guideline describes acceptable alternate WCB G600 series standards for protective structures on mobile equipment to standards referenced in
section 16.33 of the Regulation.
Acceptable alternate standards
The following standards are acceptable alternate standards for the standards referenced in section 16.33 of the Regulation.
1. WCB Standard G602 - Log Loader and Log Yarder Raised Cabs
2. WCB Standard G605 - Mobile Equipment Half-Doors
3. WCB Standard G606 - Boom Boat Cab Protection
4. WCB Standard G607 - Medium Duty Screen Guards - Front End Log Loader
5. WCB Standard G608 - Mobile Equipment Roof Structures - Heavy Duty
6. WCB Standard G609 - Mobile Equipment Roof Structures - Light Duty
The WCB Standards G600 series listed above are alternate standards to the following standards referenced in section 16.33 of the Regulation.
1. WCB Standard G602 - Log Loader and Log Yarder Raised Cabs. Cab structure designed to resist a force of at least 11,500 pounds
(simulating a 2000 pound blunt log impacting the cab at approximately 4 miles per hour), and an alternate exit meeting the requirements of section
16.24 of the Regulation.
G602 is an alternate standard to the following standards listed in section 16.33 of the Regulation. Note: CSA Standard B352.0-16, Rollover
protective structures (ROPS), falling object protective structures (FOPS), operator protective structures (OPS), and tip-over protective
structures (TOPS) for mobile machinery - General Canadian requirements references the standards below:
A. CAN/CSA-M12117-05(R2015) Earth-moving machinery - Tip-over protection structure (TIP) for compact excavators - Laboratory
test and performance requirements
B. Can/CSA M3471-05 (R2015) Earth-moving machinery - Roll-over protective structures - Laboratory tests and performance
requirements
C. CAN/CSA-M8082-1-09 Self-propelled machinery for forestry - Laboratory tests and performance requirements for roll-over
protective structures - Part 1 General Machines
D. CAN/CSA-M8082-2-11 Self-propelled machinery for forestry - Laboratory tests and performance requirements for roll-over
protective structures - Part 2 Machines having rotating platform with a cab and boom on the platform
2. WCB G605 Standard - Mobile Equipment Half-Doors; G605 covers half-doors on skidders. No new skidders are produced with half-
doors. There are no identified accepted alternate standards for half-doors; however ISO 8084 covers full doors.
WCB Standard G605 is the alternate of ISO 8084:2003 Machinery for forestry - Operator protective structures - Laboratory tests a
performance requirements. ISO 8084:2003 is a referenced standard in CSA Standard B352.0-16.
3. WCB G606 Standard - Boom Boat Cab Protection. No new boom boats are being produced and there is no identified acceptable alternate
standard. G606 is referenced in section 26.86 of the Regulation and is included here for information purposes.
4. WCB G607 Standard - Medium Duty Screen Guards - Front End Log Loader; G607 covers log loaders operating in less hazardous
situations than those anticipated by G603. Where a G607 guard is required a G603 guard can be substituted.
5. WCB G608 Standard - Mobile Equipment Roof Structures - Heavy Duty; G608 is an alternate to ISO 8083 (11,600 J level), ISO 3449
Level II, ISO 10262 Level II FOPS as a method of compliance. All require a 500 lb. object to be dropped with 8,500 ft-lbs energy. These
standards are referenced in CSA Standard B352.0-16.
A. ISO 3449:2005 Earth-moving machinery - Falling-object protective structures - Laboratory tests and performance requirements
B. ISO 8083:2006 Machinery for forestry - Falling-object protective structures (FOPS) - Laboratory tests and performance requirements
C. ISO 10262:1998 Earth-moving machinery - Hydraulic excavators - Laboratory tests and performance requirements for operator
protective guards
6. WCB G609 Standard - Mobile Equipment Roof Structures -- Light Duty; G609 is an alternate to ISO 3449 Level I and ISO 10262 Level I
FOPS as a method of compliance. These standards are referenced in CSA Standard B352.0-16.
A. ISO 3449:2005 Earth-moving machinery - Falling-object protective structures - Laboratory tests and performance requirements
B. ISO 10262:1998 Earth-moving machinery - Hydraulic excavators - Laboratory tests and performance requirements for operator
protective guards

G16.35 ROPS standards - Acceptable alternate standard (formerly G16.23)

Issued January 1, 2005; Revised March 9, 2012; Revised consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 16.35 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) A ROPS installed on mobile equipment other than
(a) an excavator between 6 tonnes (13 250 lbs) and 50 tonnes (110 231 lbs),
(b) powered ride-on turf care equipment heavier than 400 kg (882 lbs), or
(c) a UTV must meet the requirements of the CSA Standard B352.0-16 - Roll-over protective structures (ROPS), falling object
protective structures (FOPS), operator protective structures (OPS), and tip-over protective structures (TOPS) for mobile
machinery - General Canadian requirements or the earlier version of the standard that applied on the date of manufacture of the
mobile equipment.
(2) A ROPS installed on an excavator between 6 tonnes (13 250 lbs) and 50 tonnes (110 231 lbs) must meet the requirements of the
ISO 12117-2: 2008 Earth-moving machinery - Laboratory tests and performance requirements for protective structures of
excavators - Part 2: Roll-over protective structures (ROPS) for excavators of over 6 t.
 (3) A ROPS installed on powered ride-on turf care equipment heavier than 400 kg (882 lbs) must meet the requirements of ISO
21299:2009 Powered ride-on turf care equipment- Roll-over protective structures (ROPS) - Test procedures and acceptance
criteria.
(4) A ROPS installed on a UTV must meet the requirements of section 16.41(1).
Section 4.4(2) of the Regulation states, in part:
(2) When this Regulation requires a person to comply with
(a) a publication, code or standard of the Board or another agency, the person may, as an alternative, comply with another
publication, code or standard acceptable to the Board …
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to cite an alternative standard acceptable to WorkSafeBC for section 16.35 of the Regulation.
Acceptable alternate standards for agricultural tractors
Section 16.35 of the Regulation requires rollover protective structures (“ROPSâ€​) to meet one of the applicable standards listed for
agricultural, construction, earth-moving, forestry, industrial, and mining machines. Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation permits WorkSafeBC to
accept alternative standards.
WCB Standard G602 - Log Loader and Log Yarder Raised Cabs is an alternate standard to CAN/CSA-M12117-05(R2015) Earth-moving
machinery - Tip-over protection structure (TIP) for compact excavators - Laboratory test and performance requirements and the
CAN/CSA M3471-05 (R2015) Earth-moving machinery - Roll-over protective structures - Laboratory tests and performance
requirements, which are included in the CSA Standard B352.0-16 - Roll-over protective structures (ROPS), falling object protective
structures (FOPS), operator protective structures (OPS), and tip-over protective structures (TOPS) for mobile machinery - General
Canadian requirements.
Guidelines Part 16 - Division 3 - Additional Requirements for Specific Prime Movers

G16.40(8) All terrain vehicles - Modifications (formerly G16.50)

Issued August 1999; Editorial Revision January 31, 2013; Revised consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 16.40(8) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(8) A modification or attachment to an ATV that may affect its stability must be certified by the manufacturer or a professional
engineer.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to explain the intent of section 16.40(8) of the Regulation and to give examples of modifications to all-terrain
vehicles (ATVs) that require certification by the manufacturer or a professional engineer.
Modifications to ATVs
Some modifications affecting structural integrity that fall within the intent of this section include the following:
Modifications to the frame, suspension, or steering
Critical components replaced with lower quality items
Poor repair practices, for example, bad welding or welding non-weldable parts
Increasing horsepower or torque
Some modifications affecting stability that fall within the intent of this section include the following:
Changing the centre of gravity
Changing the suspension
Changing the load distribution and size
Changing the wheelbase
Changing the horsepower or gearing
Installing tanks for carrying liquids without adequate internal baffles in the tanks

G16.43(2)-1 Lift truck operator training (formerly G16.7(j)-1)

Issued April 25, 2002; Editorial Revision June 2005; Editorial Revision August 13, 2008; Editorial Revision November 21, 2017; Revised
consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment; Editorial Revision consequential to August 22, 2022 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Sections 16.43(1) and (2) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") state:
 (1) The design, fabrication, use, inspection, maintenance and repair of a lift truck must meet
(a) CAN/CSA Standard B335-15-Safety standard for lift trucks, or
(b) as applicable,
(i) ANSI/ITSDF B56.1a-2018, Safety Standard for Low Lift and High Lift Trucks,
(ii) ANSI/ITSDF B56.6-2016, Safety Standard for Rough Terrain Forklift Trucks, or
(iii) ISO 10896 Rough-Terrain Trucks - Safety Requirements and Verification: Part 1 (2012): Variable-Reach Trucks; Part 2
(2016): Slewing Trucks; Part 4 (2015): Additional Requirements for Variable-Reach Trucks Handling Freely Suspended
Loads
or the earlier version of the applicable standard that applied on the date of manufacture of the lift truck.
(2) Operator training for lift trucks must meet the requirements of Clause 6 of the standard referred to in subsection (1)(a).
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to explain the training requirements for lift truck operators.
Background
Section 16.43(2) requires lift truck operators be trained in accordance with CSA Standard B335-15 Safety standards for lift trucks, Industrial
Lift Truck Operator Training. (Note: For a copy of CSA Standard B335-15, visit community.csagroup.org. Access is free but registration is
required.)
For the purposes of this guideline and application of section 16.43(2) of the Regulation, WorkSafeBC considers a trainee to be a person who is
taking training to become a lift truck operator. A lift truck operator is not considered a "trainee" when taking refresher or upgrading courses and
related training.
A trainee must satisfy medical and fitness criteria before starting training. These requirements are outlined in the CSA standard and are summarized
later in this guideline.
Completion of training and testing
The employer is responsible for ensuring a trainee completes training and testing that meets the performance criteria specified in section 16.43(2)
before the person is assigned tasks as a lift truck operator. If an employee claims to have past training and/or experience as a lift truck operator,
the employer is responsible for checking references and assessing the new employee's ability to meet the performance criteria specified in
section 16.43(2) before assigning the person to be a lift truck operator.
Lift truck operators do not need a certificate to confirm satisfactory performance and completion of the training mandated by section 16.43(2).
The employer has several options for achieving compliance. Completing an external training course that effectively covers the specified standard,
including the testing requirements, is one option to satisfy the Regulation. Another option is for the employer to provide in-house training and
testing, to confirm the operator's knowledge and abilities meet the specified standard. Regardless, the employer still has an obligation to provide
sufficient supervision and control in the workplace to ensure lift truck operators meet the standard on an ongoing basis.
In CSA standard B335-15, section 6.21.1 "Retraining" stipulates a lift truck operator must take a refresher course within a period "not exceeding
three years" or if there is an accident or incident attributable to operator error. The employer is responsible for assessing each lift truck operator's
performance on an ongoing basis. Training courses shall be tailored to the individual's needs as demonstrated by an evaluation, and assessment
refresher courses and retraining only need to cover the aspects of lift truck operation that the operator is considered to be deficient in relative to the
performance criteria specified in section 16.43(2). If three years after the last refresher or upgrading course an operator is not considered by the
employer to have any deficiencies relative to the performance criteria, the refresher course could simply be a general job safety review with the
operator. Training is also required any time new equipment is to be used, performance issues become evident, or there are significant changes in
the operator's job.
The employer should keep sufficient records of lift truck operator training, testing, and assessment to document compliance with 16.43(2).
Driver's licence requirements
A lift truck operator using a lift truck exclusively on the employer's private property does not need to have a valid driver's licence. However, if the
lift truck is operated on a public roadway, the provisions of the Motor Vehicle Act apply, and the operator needs a valid driver's licence of the
appropriate class, including any required endorsements such as for air brakes, if applicable.
Propane handler's certificate
A lift truck operator (or any other person) required to dispense (transfer) propane from one container to another during refuelling of a lift truck
must have a "propane handler's certificate." CSA Standard B149.2 Propane Storage and Handling Code is adopted under the Gas Safety
Regulation as a requirement in B.C. Clause 4.2.1 of the CSA standard states: "Propane shall only be transferred from one container to another
by a person who is the holder of a certificate recognized by the authority having jurisdiction." The authority having jurisdiction in British
Columbia is the Technical Safety BC Safety Manager. The Safety Manager recognizes programs that are qualified to issue certificates. Propane
suppliers are usually connected to a propane industry program recognized to provide training and certification acceptable to the Safety Manager. A
source for information on obtaining a certificate is the Propane Training Institute at 1-877-784-4636, or online at http://www.propane.ca. Workers
dispensing propane should have their certificate available at the location where the activity is being done. This is normally achieved by having the
certificate posted at or near the dispensing station. If there is a concern regarding the validity of a certificate, consult the local Gas Safety inspection
office.
If the lift truck refuelling process only involves changing propane cylinders, a propane handler's certificate is not required, but the operator or other
person doing the task should have appropriate training to perform this function. Also, if a lift truck operator is required to refuel the lift truck with a
product other than propane, or to change batteries or connect to a battery charger, the operator's training should cover these tasks.
Detailed training program requirements
Medical and Physical Fitness
A trainee must meet the medical and physical fitness requirement specified in CSA Standard B335-15 before starting training. This requirement
does not apply to existing lift truck operators who are successfully doing this work without difficulty and are taking refresher or upgrading courses.
If, however, a lift truck operator appears to have difficulty operating the lift truck in a satisfactory manner, the employer has the right and obligation
to investigate. This investigation may include requiring evidence of compliance with the medical and physical fitness criteria.
The medical and physical fitness criteria is specified in the CSA standard and should include the following:
Vision of not less than 20/40 in the better eye and good judgment of space including height and distance. If corrective eyewear is required to
comply with the above, the operator must use it while operating a lift truck.
Ability to distinguish colour, if colour differentiation is required on the assigned job.
Ability to hear warning signals. If the operator requires a hearing aid to comply with the above, it must be worn while operating a lift truck.
Full movement of trunk, neck, and upper and lower limbs, and the strength, endurance, agility, and coordination to meet the demands of the
job.
Compliance with the above medical and physical fitness requirements may be determined by a doctor, a nurse, or another responsible party who
by training has the ability to make such a determination. Trainees or operators cannot make their own determination on the above criteria.
Overview of Training Program Content
A training program will include classroom theory elements, practical (hands-on) training, and testing. The following summarizes the CSA Standard
B335-15 criteria.
Classroom theory portion
Background
Relevant legislation and fundamental safety guidelines, rules, and safety codes applicable to the job
Basic principles of lift truck operation, including a focus on lift types, reach, and stability
Main components of lift trucks
Manufacturer's operating manual for the equipment to be used
Basic principles of operation
Start-of-shift checks
Shutdown and parking procedures
Safe practices for starting, stopping, and turning
Lift truck stability factors including items such as speed, cornering, load security, centre of gravity, and grade
Capacity plate and its location
Safe procedures for operating on ramps and grades
Forward and reverse driving
Correct use of lift trucks
Driving hazards such as slippery surfaces, restricted visibility, and exhaust emissions
Lift truck safety including generic safety procedures in accordance with the manufacturer's operating manual
Lifting, lowering, or supporting people
Load handling
General safe methods and procedures for pickup, conveyance, and depositing
Selection of loads and assessing mass distribution for capacity, security, and integrity
Preparation for load pickup and placement
Assessing the safety of load-supporting structures
Loading trucks, trailers, and railway cars
Inclines or ramps
Safety equipment and devices
Hazards in the operating environment
Refuelling and/or recharging
Refuelling a permanently mounted propane fuel tank
 Changing a removable propane cylinder
Propane cylinder inspection
Charging batteries on electric trucks
Refuelling with other fuels
Reporting unsafe operating conditions of vehicles
Operational (hands-on) training
The classroom theory elements covered are to be followed with practical demonstration and supervised practice.
Testing
A trainee or operator may demonstrate proficiency in classroom theory areas by way of a written or oral test.
A trainee or operator must demonstrate proficiency through an operational test showing skill and understanding of the safe operation of the
lift truck(s).

G16.43(2)-2 Lift truck operator training - Alternative standards (formerly G16.7(j)-2)

Issued November 21, 2006; Revised consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment; Editorial Revision consequential to August 22,
2022 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Sections 16.43(1) and (2) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") state:
(1) The design, fabrication, use, inspection, maintenance and repair of a lift truck must meet
(a) CAN/CSA Standard B335-15-Safety standard for lift trucks, or
(b) as applicable,
(i) ANSI/ITSDF B56.1a-2018, Safety Standard for Low Lift and High Lift Trucks,
(ii) ANSI/ITSDF B56.6-2016, Safety Standard for Rough Terrain Forklift Trucks, or
(iii) ISO 10896 Rough-Terrain Trucks - Safety Requirements and Verification: Part 1 (2012): Variable-Reach Trucks; Part 2
(2016): Slewing Trucks; Part 4 (2015): Additional Requirements for Variable-Reach Trucks Handling Freely Suspended
Loads
or the earlier version of the applicable standard that applied on the date of manufacture of the lift truck.
(2) Operator training for lift trucks must meet the requirements of Clause 6 of the standard referred to in subsection (1)(a).
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation states:
(2) When this Regulation requires a person to comply with
(a) a publication, code or standard of the Board or another agency, the person may, as an alternative, comply with another
publication, code or standard acceptable to the Board…
Purpose of guideline
Section 16.43(2) of the Regulation requires that lift truck operators be trained in accordance with CAN/CSA Standard B335-15 - Safety
standard for lift trucks
The purpose of this guideline is to specify an alternative to the CAN/CSA standard that is acceptable to WorkSafeBC, and to summarize the
applicable requirements of the alternative standard.
ASME B56.1-2004 Safety Standard for Low Lift and High Lift Trucks
WorkSafeBC accepts the training part of this standard (but not the retraining or upgrading portions) - set out in paragraph 4.19 and the references
therein - as an alternative to the training portions of the Standard.
For retraining and upgrading, the provisions in the above noted CSA Standards are to be used.
Note: In 2005 the copyright of this ASME standard was obtained by ITSDF (Industrial Truck Standards Development Foundation) in
Washington, DC. The standard number was changed to ANSI/ITSDF B56.1-2005 (Reaffirmation of ASME B56.1-2004). This standard can be
downloaded from the ITSDF website at: www.itsdf.org/forms/regusers/standards/2154_ITSDF-B56-1-2020-rev-12-12-22.pdf.

G16.43(5) Pedestrian and equipment traffic (formerly G16.43(3))

Issued August 1999; Revised August 1, 2013; Revised consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 16.43(5) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(5) In areas where lift truck use is separated from pedestrian traffic, a lift truck may travel forward with an elevated load if such
operation will improve the operator's view of the path of travel, provided that operating conditions are maintained to ensure vehicle
stability and the specifications of the mobile equipment manufacturer are not compromised.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide information on low lift and high lift truck stability.
Lift truck stability
A lift truck works on the principle of the truck and its load balanced over a fulcrum, where the weight of the lift truck counterbalances the load on
its forks (similar to the seesaw principle). The fulcrum, located in the centreline of the front axle of the truck, is the pivot point of the seesaw. See
Figure 1.

Figure 1: Counterbalance lift truck (for illustration purposes only)

When a lift truck's load exceeds its capacity rating (weight and/or load centre), unstable conditions are introduced that may cause the truck to tip
over.
The capacity rating of a lift truck is identified on its data plate (affixed to the truck by the manufacturer) and displays the maximum load (expressed
in pounds or kilograms) it can safely raise, lower, and move. The capacity rating consists of two components: weight and load centre. The weight is
the weight of the load. The load centre is the horizontal distance between the face of the forks and the centre of gravity (CG) of the load
(expressed in inches or millimetres), and the vertical distance of the travelling surface to the load centre. The CG is the point on an object where its
weight is evenly dispersed and all its parts are in balance.
A front end attachment (e.g., fork extension, paper roll clamp) on a lift truck has its own rated capacity causing the truck's load capacity rating to
change.
As a load centre distance increases the "load moment" increases. The load moment, or moment, is the product of the load's weight multiplied by
the distance of the CG of the load to the fulcrum (pivot point). It is the moment that determines how much overturning force is being applied to the
lift truck. For example, if a forklift's stated capacity rating is 3,000 pounds at a 24 inch load centre, the load moment cannot safely exceed 72,000
inch-pounds (24 inches x 3,000 lb = 72,000 inch-pounds). If the load centre distance for the actual load is greater than 24 inches, the only way to
keep the load moment from exceeding 72,000 inch-pounds, which could result in the forklift tipping over laterally, is to reduce the load.
Stability triangle
A lift truck's steer axle is attached to the truck by a pivot pin in its rear axle's centre. When this point is connected to the centre of the two front
wheels with imaginary lines it forms a triangle called the stability triangle. A lift truck and load each has its own CG. When a load is placed on a lift
truck, the CG of the truck shifts, and a combined centre of gravity (CCG) is created. If the CCG is located outside the stability triangle, unstable
conditions are introduced causing the truck to tip over either laterally on its side or tip longitudinally forward. Tip direction is determined by where
the CCG is outside the stability triangle. See Figure 2.
Figure 2: Stability triangle
Measures to ensure stability
The following measures are not an exhaustive list and do not replace lift truck safety standards:
Ensure the lift truck is in good operating condition (e.g., the tires are inflated in accordance with the truck's manufacturer standards, brakes
are in optimal working condition).
Ensure the load is positioned against the mast, centred across the forks, and its weight evenly distributed.
Avoid tilting forks forward unless picking up or setting down a load.
Exercise caution when handling loads that are close to the truck's stated capacity rating.
When elevating a load, reduce the load capacity, and carry it at its lowest possible position.
Maintain a clear path of travel and be aware of blind spots.
Travel at a slow speed, and exercise extra caution when turning.
Keep loads elevated only for as long as required to clear the obstruction. The higher the load is elevated, the less stable the lift truck
becomes.
Be aware of the impact of dynamic forces (e.g., braking suddenly, accelerating rapidly, turning sharply, operating on uneven surfaces) as the
load moment created by these motions may cause the lift truck to tip over.
Stability references
Additional stability references can be found under the following standards:
CAN/CSA-B335-04 Safety standard for lift trucks
ANSI/ITSDF B56.1 Safety Standard for Low Lift and High Lift Trucks
Guidelines Part 16 - Retired Guidelines
The following guidelines were retired consequential to the September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendments.
G16.3 (and 4.3(3)) Tag out procedure for identifying unsafe mobile equipment

Issued August 1, 1999; Editorial Revision April 2005; Retired consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
The guideline is being retired consequential to the September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment as this procedure is covered under section 4.3 of
the OHS Regulation.

G16.3 (and 4.3(4)) Fuel tank filler and vent outlet locations

Issued August 1999; Editorial Revision April 12, 2005; Editorial Revision January 1, 2007; Retired consequential to September 1, 2021
Regulatory Amendment
This guideline is being retired as the amended OHS Regulation now covers this requirement.

G16.4(1)(c) Operating equipment with air brakes

Issued August 16, 2000; Retired consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
This guideline is being retired consequential to the September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment as the amended section 16.14(1) of the OHS
Regulation no longer allows alternatives to an air brake certificate or driver's licence with industrial air brake endorsement.

G16.13 Braking requirements - Mobile equipment - Alternate standard

Issued June 14, 2013; Retired consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
This guideline is being retired consequential to the September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment as the acceptable standards are now listed in the
revised OHS Regulation.

G16.13(3) Braking requirements - Mobile equipment

Issued April 1, 2013; Retired consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment

This guideline is being retired consequential to the September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment as the acceptable standards are now listed in the
revised OHS Regulation.

G16.18 Acceptable standards for operating controls

Issued August 1999; Revised November 18, 2009; Retired consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
This guideline is being retired consequential to the September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment as the requirements for operating controls are
covered by section 12.11(2) of the OHS Regulation.

G16.21(2)-1 Operator protective structure standards for agricultural tractors

Issued January 1, 2005; Retired consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment

This guideline is being retired consequential to the September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment as the acceptable standards for operator protective
structures are addressed by the amended section 16.33 of the OHS Regulation.

G16.22 Rollover protective structures (ROPS)

Issued February 27, 2001; Revised February 25, 2013; Editorial Revision April 6, 2020; Retired consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory
Amendment
This guideline is being retired consequential to the September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment as the amended section 16.34 of the OHS
Regulation allows for a risk assessment to determine whether a ROPS is necessary.

G16.24 ROPS certification - Damaged sweep arms

Issued August 1999; Revised February 25, 2013; Retired consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
This guideline is being retired consequential to the September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment as a new section (26.54.1) on damaged sweep
arms has been added to the OHS Regulation.

G16.28 Guarding moving parts on mobile equipment

Issued August 1999; Revised December 21, 2009; Retired consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
This guideline is being retired consequential to the September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment as the amended section 16.32 of the OHS
Regulation identifies the requirements for safeguarding moving parts.

G16.33 Use of seatbelts on forklifts

Issued June 18, 2008; Revised consequential to February 1, 2013 Regulatory Amendment; Retired consequential to September 1, 2021
Regulatory Amendment
This guideline is being retired consequential to the September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment as lift trucks are now consolidated under section
16.43 in the amended OHS Regulation with updated standards that refer to manufacturers' use and requirements of seat belts.

G16.44(2) Acceptable standard for load restraint

Issued February 11, 2009; Retired consequential to September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
This guideline is being retired consequential to the September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment as the amended section 16.12(2) of the OHS
Regulation no longer requires "meets a standard acceptable to the Board."
The following guidelines were retired prior to September 1, 2021.

G16.3, 16.19, 16.20 (and 4.3(2)) Welding repair of forks on lift trucks

Issued August 1999; Editorial Revision April 2005; Retired April 30, 2015
Refer to guideline G4.3(2) Welding repair of forks and fork extensions on lift trucks.

G16.22(2) Use of ROPS on agricultural tractors when operated on steep slopes or narrow roadways

Issued January 1, 2005; Retired consequential to February 1, 2012 Regulatory Amendment

Contents

DEFINITIONS

G20.1 Construction project – routine maintenance

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

G20.2(1)/20.2.1(1) Notice of project

G20.2(1)(e) Bell holes
G20.2.1(1) and (2) Notice of project for hazardous substances – Ongoing asbestos work
G20.2.1(2)(c) Notice of project – Significant disturbance of lead-containing material
G20.2.1(2)(d) Notice of project – Other similar exposure work activities
G20.3-1 Labour supply firms and construction employers – Responsibilities
G20.3-2 Qualified coordinators

SAFE WORK AREAS AND SAFE ACCESS

G20.4(1) Suitable ladders, work platforms, and scaffolds

G20.4(2) Suitable access for safe delivery of equipment and materials
G20.5(5) Responsibilities for employers to provide stairways to work levels during construction
G20.9 Protection from falling materials
G20.13(3.1) Ensuring loads do not exceed capacity of thrust-out platforms
G20.14 Temporary cribbing support in house lifting operations

CONCRETE FALSEWORK AND FORMWORK

G20.26 Inspections

CONCRETE PUMPING

G20.26.6 Operator certification

G20.40 Use of outriggers on concrete pumping equipment
G20.47(1) Inspection and certification of masts
G20.47(2)-(4) Inspection and certification of concrete pump and placing booms

OPEN WEB JOISTS AND TRUSSES

G20.72 Open web joists and trusses

ROOF WORK

G20.75 Roof work – Fall protection

G20.77 Mechanical equipment

EXCAVATIONS

G20.78 Qualified registered professional and engineering documents

G20.78(1)(c) Vibration, hydrostatic pressure or hazardous ground movement
G20.78(1)(d) Ground slope adjacent to excavation work
G20.79 Underground utilities
G20.81 Sloping and shoring requirements
G20.85 Trench support structures

MARINE CONSTRUCTION, PILE DRIVING AND DREDGING

G20.102 Suspended work platforms in marine construction and pile driving activities

DEMOLITION

G20.112 Hazardous materials – Asbestos

WORK IN COMPRESSED AIR

G20.123 Alternate acceptable standard

Guidelines Part 20 - Definitions

G20.1 Construction project – Routine maintenance

Issued August 1999; Editorial Revision June 14, 2013

Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.1 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states
"construction project" means any erection, alteration, repair, dismantling, demolition, structural or routine maintenance, painting,
land clearing, earth moving, grading, excavating, trenching, digging, boring, drilling, blasting, concreting, the installation of any
machinery or any other work deemed to be construction by the Board;
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to explain what routine maintenance is with respect to a construction project.
Routine maintenance
The definition of a construction project includes reference to "routine maintenance." Routine maintenance includes activities such as painting or glass
replacement that are required as part of owning and operating a building or facility. An NOP is not required unless a particular maintenance project
triggers one of the criteria listed in section 20.2 of the Regulation, for example, if the total cost of a painting project will exceed $100,000.
Guidelines Part 20 - General Requirements

G20.2(1)/20.2.1(1) Notice of project

Issued August 1999; Editorial Revision October 2004; Editorial Revision February 25, 2013; Formerly issued as part of G20.2(1) – Re-issued as
Editorial Revision consequential to May 1, 2017 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.2(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states, in part:
Subject to subsection (4) either the owner or the person engaged by the owner to be the prime contractor on a construction project
must ensure that the Board receives, in writing, a notice of project that contains the information required by subsection (2) at least 24
 hours before work on the construction project begins at the worksite if any of the following apply
…
Section 20.2.1(1) of the Regulation states:
Subject to subsections (3) and (6), if a construction project involves a work activity set out in subsection (2), all employers
responsible for the work activity and either the owner or the person engaged by the owner to be the prime contractor on a
construction project must ensure that the Board receives, in writing, a notice of project that contains the information required by
subsection (4) at least 48 hours before work activity begins at the worksite.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide information on how to submit a notice of project (NOP) and to explain WorkSafeBC's discretion with
respect to site inspections.
Submitting NOPs
NOP forms may be submitted online (preferred method) at https://www.worksafebc.com/en/for-employers/just-for-you/submit-notice-project.
A paper version of the NOP form may also be completed and submitted to WorkSafeBC. The forms can be ordered from
WorkSafeBCStore.com.
WorkSafeBC prevention officers and managers monitor the notices regarding activity in their area and select projects for follow-up in accordance
with their objectives, the nature of the project or other circumstances. WorkSafeBC is not obliged to initiate a site inspection in every case when
an NOP is received.

G20.2(1)(e) Bell holes

Issued August 1999; Editorial Revision January 1, 2009; Formerly issued as part of G20.2(1)(f) – Re-issued as Editorial Revision consequential to
May 1, 2017 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.2(1)(e) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Subject to subsection (4), either the owner or the person engaged by the owner to be the prime contractor on a construction
project must ensure that the Board receives, in writing, a notice of project that contains the information required by subsection (2) at
least 24 hours before work on the construction project begins at the worksite if any of the following apply:
…
(e) a worker may be required to enter
(i) A trench over 30 m (100 ft) long, or
(ii) An excavation, other than a trench, over 1.2 m (4 ft) deep.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to specify when bell holes are considered to be a trench.
Bell holes
Work around underground pipe and conduits usually involves digging "bell holes" for maintenance such as fixing leaks or breaks, or servicing
valves. A bell hole is considered to be a trench, as long as the criteria in the definition for a trench in section 20.1 of the Regulation are met. This
means its width at the bottom cannot exceed 3.7 metres (12 feet). If the work related to a bell hole excavation triggers one of the criteria listed in
section 20.78 requiring a qualified registered professional or engineer's instructions, or invokes one of the criteria listed in section 20.2, an NOP is
required.

G20.2.1(1) and (2) Notice of project for hazardous substances – Ongoing asbestos work

Issued November 19, 2008; Revised consequential to February 1, 2012 Regulatory Amendment; Formerly issued as part of G20.2(1)(c) – Re-
issued as Editorial Revision consequential to May 1, 2017 Regulatory Amendment; Editorial Revision November 13, 2020
Regulatory excerpt
Sections 20.2.1(1) and (2) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") state:
(1) Subject to subsections (3) and (6), if a construction project involves a work activity set out in subsection (2), all employers
responsible for the work activity and either the owner or the person engaged by the owner to be the prime contractor on the
construction project must ensure that the Board receives, in writing, a notice of project that contains the information required by
subsection (4) at least 48 hours before the work activity begins at the worksite.
 (2) The following are work activities for the purposes of subsection (1):
(a) a work activity that involves working with or in proximity to asbestos-containing material, as defined in section 6.1, that is a
moderate risk work activity or a high risk work activity as defined in that section;
(b) the alteration, repair, dismantling or demolition of all or part of a building or structure in which asbestos-containing material has
been processed, manufactured or stored;
(c) a work activity that significantly disturbs lead-containing material in buildings or structures;
(d) a work activity that is similar to those described in paragraphs (a) to (c) and that may expose workers to a significant risk of
occupational disease from a biological or chemical agent or ionizing radiation.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline outlines the requirements for the submission of a notice of project (NOP-H) specifically in regards to asbestos for short-duration,
intermittent repair, maintenance, or clean-up work. The guideline is for use by employers who conduct periodic repairs or other minor disturbances
of friable asbestos-containing materials, as part of an ongoing operations and maintenance program, and for certain types of periodic emergency
repair or debris cleanup.
Background information
There are situations where an employer may need to conduct a number of jobs that affect asbestos-containing material over an extended period.
This is typically routine work, following a set of prescribed procedures for a variety of tasks, performed by assigned staff who are trained and
supervised in these procedures. The NOP-H (specific to asbestos) for ongoing work allows the employer to perform this work without submitting
a separate NOP each time one of these routine tasks is performed.
When should an NOP-H be submitted?
The Regulation requires that an NOP-H be submitted at least 48 hours before beginning a moderate-risk work activity or a high-risk work
activity, as defined in section 6.1, involving asbestos-containing material, or the alteration, repair, dismantling, or demolition of all or part of a
building or structure where asbestos-containing material has been processed, manufactured, or stored.
NOP-H (specific to asbestos) for ongoing intermittent repair or maintenance work
With the prior permission of WorkSafeBC, an employer may submit a single NOP-H for work with asbestos-containing material that may take
place over an extended period of time. This will be of use to employers who conduct periodic minor repairs or other minor disturbances of
asbestos-containing materials as part of an ongoing operations and maintenance program, and for certain types of periodic emergency work. An
initial ongoing NOP-H will typically be accepted for a period of one year. A subsequent ongoing NOP-H may be accepted for periods of up to
three years.
Permission for an ongoing NOP-H for intermittent repair or maintenance work will normally only be granted for the following:
Moderate-risk work activity, as defined in Regulation Part 6
Routine work of short duration, not more than one day or one shift at a time
Work involving a minimal disturbance of asbestos-containing materials (e.g., replacing several loose asbestos floor tiles; drilling a few holes
through asbestos-containing drywall mud or floor tile to mount brackets, frames, or to install floor sills; replacing several asbestos-containing
ceiling tiles; removing or making minor modifications to asbestos cement products; boiler inspection and/or cleaning; repair of a small section
- less than one standard 4 ft. x 8 ft. sheet - of gypsum board that contains asbestos filler compound)
Periodic emergency cleanup of possible asbestos-containing debris or materials that have been left or dumped inappropriately
An ongoing NOP-H will not be granted for work that includes abatement or demolition of asbestos-containing materials that would normally be
performed by an asbestos abatement or restoration contractor.
A request for ongoing NOP-H should include the following information:
The information required in an NOP as specified in Regulation section 20.2.1(4)
Confirmation that the employer's exposure control plan for asbestos complies with section 5.54 of the Regulation
Evidence of an up-to-date asbestos inventory for the site(s) if applicable
The site-specific safe work procedures to be used, including maximum quantities
Confirmation that the procedures will be performed by adequately trained, instructed, and supervised employees of the applicant employer
Application/decision process
For an ongoing NOP-H, the applicant should submit the request to the applicable manager, Prevention Field Services (the Manager) or to
Prevention Support Services ([email protected] or fax 604.276.3247). To apply for the ongoing NOP-H, the online NOP form
should not be completed.
The Manager will issue a decision in a letter in consultation with a local occupational hygiene officer who may do a site visit and speak with a
number of persons as part of the consideration process.
The decision letter may contain special requirements such as the following:
 A log record must be kept of each job performed. The record should include the project location, date, duration, hours of work, number of
workers, nature/description of the work (including the amount of material that may be removed or dislodged), and confirmation of the risk
level (e.g., moderate risk)
The log record must be readily available to WorkSafeBC
The Manager will ensure an electronic copy of the decision letter is retained. The employer must ensure the decision letter and NOP-H are
available at the worksite during the work activity.
If any of the procedures, terms, or conditions of the NOP-H and the decision letter are not met or followed, the permission may be cancelled and
compliance activity undertaken.

G20.2.1(2)(c) Notice of project – Significant disturbance of lead-containing material

Issued consequential to May 1, 2017 Regulatory Amendment; Editorial Revision October 28, 2019
Regulatory excerpt
Sections 20.2.1(1) and (2) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") state:
(1) Subject to subsections (3) and (6), if a construction project involves a work activity set out in subsection (2), all employers
responsible for the work activity and either the owner or the person engaged by the owner to be the prime contractor on the
construction project must ensure that the Board receives, in writing, a notice of project that contains the information required by
subsection (4) at least 48 hours before the work activity begins at the worksite.
(2) The following are work activities for the purposes of subsection (1):
(a) a work activity that involves working with or in proximity to asbestos-containing material, as defined in section 6.1, that is a
moderate risk work activity or a high risk work activity as defined in that section;
(b) the alteration, repair, dismantling or demolition of all or part of a building or structure in which asbestos-containing material has
been processed, manufactured or stored;
(c) a work activity that significantly disturbs lead-containing material in buildings or structures;
(d) a work activity that is similar to those described in paragraphs (a) to (c) and that may expose workers to a significant risk of
occupational disease from a biological or chemical agent or ionizing radiation.
Purpose of guideline
The Regulation specifies a requirement to submit a notice of project (NOP) for certain construction activities if it is anticipated that a work activity
will significantly disturb lead-containing material in buildings or structures.
This guideline provides further explanation of the work activities that significantly disturbs lead-containing materials in buildings or structures. Also,
this guideline provides examples of work activities that normally would not require an NOP form to be submitted.
Significant disturbance of lead-containing materials
An NOP must be submitted for a work activity that significantly disturbs lead-containing materials in buildings or structures associated with a
construction project. This lead work activity may expose workers to a significant risk of occupational disease where it generates lead dust, fumes,
or mist in the air or on surfaces.
Workers are at significant risk of occupational disease if the following occurs:
They breathe airborne lead dust, mist, or fumes at or above the action limit (half of the exposure limit for lead)
There is likelihood of significant contamination of workers' hands and face with lead that there is a high risk the lead could be ingested
They breathe or ingest enough lead to increase their blood lead body burden above background levels (0.1 micromoles per litre (µmol/L),
or 2 micrograms per deciliter (µg/dL)
Section 6.59.1 of the Regulation states that an employer must ensure that a risk assessment is completed by a qualified person for the planned
lead activity. As part of the risk assessment, the scope, circumstances, and the nature of the work activity, as well as the potential routes of
exposure are considered.
The following are some activities that are not expected to cause harm to a worker and would not normally require an NOP to be submitted:
Conducting a site inspection to identify hazardous materials
Collecting samples and preparing a written report under section 20.112, hazardous materials
Determining the types of tasks required for the construction project
Estimating the cost of labour and materials for the project
Low risk and some low-moderate and moderate risk work activities that should not increase a worker's lead body burden
Examples include the following:
Light sanding or scraping a small area of lead-containing paint
 Applying lead-containing paint with a brush roller
Installing or removing sheet metal containing lead
Installing or removing bolts or screws covered with lead-containing paint
Operating an excavator (within the cab) during building demolition
Transporting sealed containers of lead waste
Cleaning up small areas of lead-containing dust or debris
More information can be found in the WorkSafeBC Publication Safe Work Practices for Handling Lead. Further explanation regarding low,
low-moderate and moderate risk activities can be found in the WorkSafeBC Publication Safe Work Practices for Handling Lead.

G20.2.1(2)(d) Notice of project – Other similar exposure work activities

Issued August 4, 2015; Formerly issued as part of G20.2(1)(c)(iv) – Re-issued as Editorial Revision consequential to May 1, 2017 Regulatory
Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Sections 20.2.1(1), (2) and (4) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") state:
(1) Subject to subsections (3) and (6), if a construction project involves a work activity set out in subsection (2), all employers
responsible for the work activity and either the owner or the person engaged by the owner to be the prime contractor on the
construction project must ensure that the Board receives, in writing, a notice of project that contains the information required by
subsection (4) at least 48 hours before the work activity begins at the worksite.
(2) The following are work activities for the purposes of subsection (1):
(a) a work activity that involves working with or in proximity to asbestos-containing material, as defined in section 6.1, that is a
moderate risk work activity or a high risk work activity as defined in that section;
(b) the alteration, repair, dismantling or demolition of all or part of a building or structure in which asbestos-containing material has
been processed, manufactured or stored;
(c) a work activity that significantly disturbs lead-containing material in buildings or structures;
(d) a work activity that is similar to those described in paragraphs (a) to (c) and that may expose workers to a significant risk of
occupational disease from a biological or chemical agent or ionizing radiation.
(4) The notice of project must contain the following information:
(a) the name and contact information of all employers responsible for the work activity, of the owner and of the person engaged to be
the prime contractor, if any;
(b) the address of the construction project or its location in relation to the nearest highway;
(c) the scope of the construction project and of the work activity;
(d) the starting date and the estimated duration of the construction project and of the work activity;
(e) the safe work procedures specific to the work activity, and the hazardous substance involved in the work activity, that will be
used to minimize the risk of occupational disease to the workers;
(f) if section 20.112 applies, a written report made under section 20.112(3)(e) and, if applicable, section 20.112(6)(e).
Purpose of guideline
The Regulation specifies a requirement to submit a notice of project (NOP) for certain construction activities related to asbestos and lead. The
Regulation also specifies that an NOP must be submitted for similar construction work activities which may expose workers to a significant risk of
occupational disease from a biological or chemical agent or ionizing radiation.
This guideline provides examples of other similar exposure work activities which may expose workers to a significant risk of occupational disease
and for which an NOP needs to be submitted.
Construction activities and occupational disease
Section 20.2.1(2)(d) of the Regulation requires that an NOP be submitted when there are work activities associated with a construction project
which may expose workers to a significant risk of occupational disease from a biological or chemical agent or ionizing radiation. Determination of
which construction work activities may expose workers to a significant risk of occupational disease includes consideration of the following criteria:
Workers may be exposed to hazardous substances during a work activity associated with a construction project (including demolition or
renovation)
Abatement or remediation activity is required before demolition or reconstruction can occur
The activity may involve exposure to unknown, undetermined, or unexpected hazardous substances. For example, there may be unknown
 hazardous substances used in grow operations and methamphetamine labs, and workers may be exposed to them when demolition or
reconstruction takes place
Emerging knowledge about hazardous substances used during construction activities, e.g., as discovered by WorkSafeBC prevention
officers or as published in the literature
The construction activities listed below may expose workers to a significant risk of occupational disease. For these activities, an NOP must be
submitted at least 48 hours before starting the project and a copy of the NOP must be posted at the construction site before work commences.
Notices of project for these activities can be submitted online from the WorkSafeBC NOP webpage (preferred method). A paper version of the
Notice of Project (NOP) for Construction Projects involving asbestos, lead, or other similar exposure work activity (Form # 52E49) can also be
used. Guidance for submitting the NOP can be found in OHS Guideline G20.2(1) Notice of Project. Refer to the Regulatory excerpt section of
this guideline for a list of the information that must be included in a submitted NOP, including safe work procedures specific to the work activity
and, if applicable, the written report made under section 20.112(3)(e) or 20.112(6)(e).
Other similar exposure construction work activities that require a notice of project to be submitted under this Regulation section
In addition to the requirements in section 20.2.1(2)(a), (b), and (c) of the Regulation for an NOP to be submitted for asbestos and lead-related
construction activities, section 20.2.1(2)(d) of the Regulation requires that an NOP be submitted for at least the following construction activities:
1. Remediation of indoor marijuana-growing operations
Marijuana-growing operations use potentially hazardous chemicals, including fertilizers and pesticides. Significant mould growth can also be
associated with these operations. Remediation of these operations will usually involve demolition and/or reconstruction and is considered to be
construction activity.
When these facilities are investigated and eventually cleaned up, workers may be exposed to harmful levels of these substances.
An NOP must be submitted for any work involving the abatement, cleanup, or demolition of indoor marijuana-growing operations.
2. Remediation of clandestine chemical labs
During the production of illegal drugs, such as methamphetamines, a number of hazardous substances may be used, including phosphorous, iodine,
ammonia, hydrochloric acid, lead, mercury, and other chemicals. These are in addition to the drugs themselves. When these facilities are
investigated and eventually cleaned up, workers may be exposed to harmful levels of these chemicals.
An NOP must be submitted for work involving the abatement, cleanup, or demolition of clandestine chemical labs.
3. Mould remediation
Mould contamination may be obvious on walls, furnishings, and equipment or may be hidden behind walls, in conduits and chases, etc.
A worker's exposure to moulds is primarily through inhalation of airborne spores that cannot be seen without magnification. These spores can be
released in very high concentrations if mouldy building material is disturbed, such as during remediation or demolition activities.
All moulds have the potential to cause health effects. Moulds produce allergens, irritants, and in some cases toxins that may cause reactions in
humans. For a worker who has a compromised or sensitized immune system, health effects can be severe. For those individuals, exposure to
pathogenic moulds or their toxic by-products may be associated with a variety of adverse health effects, including allergic reactions, asthma,
pneumonitis with flu-like symptoms, infections of the upper airways, sinusitis, or other lung diseases.
An NOP must be submitted for work involving the remediation, cleanup, or demolition of mould-contaminated areas where the total surface area
affected is greater than 10 contiguous square metres (100 contiguous square feet). Refer also to OHS Guideline G4.79 Moulds and Indoor air
quality. Also, Health Canada advises that professional assistance should be sought for remediation of these large mould problems.
4. Ionizing radiation
Ionizing radiation is a hazardous form of energy emitted by radioactive substances or generated by x-ray equipment. Ionizing radiation can be in the
form of particles (e.g., neutrons, beta, alpha) or electromagnetic waves (e.g., gamma, X-rays).
Depending on the dose of radiation received, exposure to ionizing radiation can cause adverse health effects, such as radiation burns, acute
radiation syndrome, and cancer to various tissues and organs.
Some construction-related work activities may expose workers to elevated levels of ionizing radiation that can lead to significant risk of
occupational disease.
An NOP must be submitted for construction project work activities where workers may be exposed to ionizing radiation above the action level -
effective dose of 1 milliSievert (mSv) per year, as defined in the Regulation section 7.17.
Some examples of construction work activities where workers' effective dose may exceed the action level of 1 mSv per year are as follows:
Some types of non-destructive tests (e.g., industrial radiography using radioactive sources such as cobalt-60, iridium-192)
Demolition or significant disturbance of building materials or structures that contain radioactive substances (e.g., uranium-containing glazed
tiles emitting ionizing radiation, construction sites that require the removal or remediation of radioactive wastes from buildings or structures)
Removal of significant quantities of industrial/commercial devices and equipment containing radioactive sources (e.g., some commercial
smoke detectors containing Am-241)
An employer is required to determine if a worker's exposure to ionizing radiation from the planned work activity will be over the action level of
1 mSv per year. Further information is available in the OHS Guideline G7.20(1)-1 Exposure control plan – General requirements to assist
employers in determining whether a worker's annual exposure exceeds or may exceed 1 mSv.
To be consistent with section 7.18 of the Regulation, the NOP requirement does not apply to natural background radiation.

G20.3-1 Labour supply firms and construction employers – Responsibilities

Issued February 4, 2010; Revised April 13, 2011; Editorial Revision April 6, 2020
This guideline, dealing with the responsibilities of labour supply firms and their client construction firms toward temporary labour workers, has been
expanded to apply generally to all industries. The new guideline is available here: G-P2-21(1)-2 Labour supply firms and client employers –
Responsibilities.

G20.3-2 Qualified coordinators

Issued April 27, 2010

Regulatory excerpt
Responsibilities for worker health and safety are established by the Workers Compensation Act ("Act") and the OHS Regulation ("Regulation").
Section 20.3 of the Regulation states:
20.3 Coordination of multiple employer workplaces
(2) If a work location has overlapping or adjoining work activities of 2 or more employers that create a hazard to workers, and the
combined workforce at the workplace is more than 5,
(a) the owner, or if the owner engages another person to be the prime contractor, then that person must
(i) appoint a qualified coordinator for the purpose of ensuring the coordination of health and safety activities for the location, and
(ii) provide up-to-date information as specified in subsection (4), readily available on site, and
(b) each employer must give the coordinator appointed under paragraph (a)(i) the name of a qualified person designated to be
responsible for that employer's site health and safety activities.
(3) The duties of the qualified coordinator appointed under paragraph (2)(a)(i) include
(a) informing employers and workers of the hazards created, and
(b) ensuring that the hazards are addressed throughout the duration of the work activities.
(4) The information required by subsection (2)(a)(ii) includes
(a) the name of the qualified coordinator appointed under subsection (2)(a)(i),
(b) a site drawing, which must be posted, showing project layout, first aid location, emergency transportation provisions, and the
evacuation marshalling station, and
(c) a set of construction procedures designed to protect the health and safety of workers at the workplace, developed in accordance
with the requirements of this Regulation.
1.1 Definitions
"qualified" means being knowledgeable of the work, the hazards involved and the means to control the hazards, by reason of
education, training, experience or a combination thereof;
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide information regarding the qualifications of the qualified coordinator under subsection 20.3(2)(a)(i) of the
Regulation.
Qualified Coordinator
Subsection 20.3(2)(a)(i) requires the owner or prime contractor of multiple employer construction workplaces that have more than five workers to
appoint a qualified coordinator. At multiple employer construction workplaces, the role of the qualified coordinator is crucial to maintaining an
environment that ensures worker health and safety. The qualified coordinator must ensure that there is communication to employers and workers of
hazards present at the workplace, and that those hazards are continuously addressed as they arise.
"Qualified"
The coordinator must be "qualified". "Qualified" is a term defined in the Regulation as "being knowledgeable of the work, the hazards involved and
the means to control the hazards, by reason of education, training, experience or a combination thereof". What specific qualifications are required
will depend on the nature of the work and the nature of the hazards created by that work. The qualified coordinator needs to possess experience in
and an understanding of the work, including specific work processes and equipment used. Given that in order to fulfill the duties in subsection
20.3(3), the qualified coordinator is required to work with employers and workers at the workplace, the qualified coordinator should also have the
ability to provide direction to others and to be able to effectively communicate with the employers and workers present at the workplace.
Ideally the qualified coordinator will possess some formal training or a trade certification that would suggest the person is capable of identifying and
addressing hazards. However, a trade certification is not a specific requirement, provided that the qualified coordinator is knowledgeable of and
experienced in the work being undertaken at the workplace.
Guidelines Part 20 - Safe Work Areas and Safe Access

G20.4(1) Suitable ladders, work platforms, and scaffolds

Issued August 13, 2008

Regulatory excerpt
Section 4.61 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Elevated walkways must be at least 50 cm (20 in) wide, and safe access to walkways must be provided by means of stairs, ramps or
fixed ladders.
Section 13.1 of the Regulation states, in part:
"scaffold" means any temporary elevated work platform and its supporting structure used for supporting workers, materials or
equipment;
"work platform" means an elevated or suspended temporary work surface used for supporting workers and includes a scaffold and
boatswain's chair.
Section 13.6(1) of the Regulation states:
If work cannot be done from a ladder without hazard to a worker, a work platform must be provided.
Section 13.14(1) of the Regulation states:
The platform of each scaffold must
(a) be a minimum nominal width of 50 cm (20 in), except that a nominal 30 cm (12 in) wide work platform may be used with ladder
jacks, pump jack or similar systems,
(b) not leave more than one opening in the work platform, which must be no greater than 25 cm (10 in) in width, and
(c) if not level, be designed to ensure adequate footing for workers using the platform.
Section 20.4(1) of the Regulation states:
Where practicable, suitable ladders, work platforms and scaffolds meeting the requirements of Part 13 (Ladders, Scaffold and
Temporary Work Platforms) must be provided for and used by a worker for activities requiring positioning at elevations above a
floor or grade.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to discuss suitable ladders, work platforms, and scaffoldings, and to specify that the top plate of interior or exterior
walls, the top plate, or top walers used in concrete formwork, or other elevated surfaces narrower than a nominal width of 50 cm (20 in) are not
considered suitable work platforms. Similarly, the guideline specifies that such surfaces are not acceptable elevated walkways. The guideline also
discusses when a ladder is considered suitable.
Application
Section 20.4(1) of the Regulation requires, where practicable, suitable ladders, work platforms, and scaffolds must be provided to and used by
workers when their work activities require positioning at elevations above a floor or grade. This includes heights above and below 3 m (10 ft).
Work surfaces at elevations above 3 m, or where a fall from a height of less than 3 m involves a risk of injury greater than the risk of injury from
the impact on a flat surface, must also comply with the requirements of section 11.2 of the Regulation to use appropriate fall protection.
Suitable ladders, work platforms, and scaffolding
Whether or not a ladder, work platform, or scaffolding will be considered "suitable" will depend on the intended use. For example, a ladder may
be considered suitable when the intention is to only use it for short term, light duty work. However, if the nature of the use will require the
maneuvering of heavy objects, such as guiding concrete pump hoses, a ladder would not be considered suitable, and a work platform or
scaffolding should be selected. In selecting suitable scaffolding or work platforms, employers have a number of options. Specifically, scaffoldings
using manufactured scaffolding brackets, when installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, are considered suitable.
Single-pole wood scaffolds may also be suitable when properly installed and used. For more information on suitable ladders, work platforms, and
scaffolding, refer to Safe Work Practices for House Construction.
Top plate, top waler, or other surface less than 50 cm (20 in) wide is not a suitable work platform or scaffold
Section 20.4(1) of the Regulation requires, where practicable, suitable ladders, work platforms, and scaffolds must be provided to and used by
workers when their work activities require positioning at elevations above a floor or grade. If a top plate or other elevated surface is to be used as
a temporary work surface, such surfaces must satisfy the requirements for scaffolding and work platforms under Part 13 of the Regulation. Under
section 13.14(1)(a), the work platform of a scaffolding must be a minimum nominal width of 50 cm (20 in). The top plate of interior or exterior
walls, the top plate or top waler of concrete formwork, the tops of floor or roof joists, the bottom cord of ceiling trusses, or other elevated
surfaces narrower than a nominal width of 50 cm (20 in) do not meet this condition. Accordingly, failing to provide or use suitable alternatives to
such surfaces where practicable is a violation of section 20.4 of the Regulation.
Elevated walkways
An elevated walkway includes any surface above a floor or grade used by workers or other persons at the workplace to move between two or
more areas. Under section 4.61 of the Regulation, an elevated walkway must be at least 50 cm (20 in) wide. This includes top plates used to
move from one section of a wall to another, or top walers or tops of concrete formwork used to move from one section of the formwork to
another. For a worker to use any such surfaces as an elevated walkway, the surface must be at least 50 cm (20 in) wide. Providing and/or using
the top plate of interior or exterior walls, the top plate or top waler of concrete formwork, the tops of floor or roof joists, the bottom cord of
ceiling trusses, or other surface narrower than 50 cm (20 in) as an elevated walkway is a violation of section 4.61 of the Regulation.
Use of ladders only when there is no hazard to the worker
Under section 20.4 of the Regulation, a worker who requires positioning at an elevation above a floor or grade may be provided with and use a
ladder when the ladder is considered 'suitable' and the requirements of Part 13 of the Regulation are met. Under section 13.6(1), if work cannot
be done from a ladder without hazard to the worker, a work platform must be provided. To avoid exposing a worker to a hazard, work from a
ladder should be limited to light duty work where the ladder will be at any one spot for sporadic, short-term work. This may include marking out
where floor joists or trusses will be, or other activities where the worker can reasonably maintain three points of contact with the ladder. Work
such as aligning floor joists or trusses, guiding concrete pump hoses, or other activities that require the worker to maneuver heavy objects, is not
acceptable. These activities are considered to expose the worker to a hazard if conducted from a ladder. A failure to provide or use a work
platform where work from a ladder exposes the worker to a hazard is a violation of section 13.6(1) of the Regulation.

G20.4(2) Suitable access for safe delivery of equipment and materials

Issued January 1, 2007; Editorial Revision April 6, 2020

Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.4(2) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
There must be suitable access for the safe delivery of equipment and materials to locations in the workplace where they will be used.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline provides examples of "equipment and materials" under section 20.4(2) of the Regulation, discusses coordination among workplace
parties, and provides examples of safe delivery, interior access, and material handling practices.
"Equipment and materials" under section 20.4(2)
Examples of equipment and materials delivered to building construction sites include but are not limited to drywall, appliances, cabinets, concrete,
powered concrete finishing equipment, and trusses. Examples of equipment and materials delivered to road and municipal services construction
sites include but are not limited to pipes, hydrants, valves, manhole sections, and portable powered compactors.
Coordination
Prime contractors, owners, employers, supervisors, sub-contractors, and delivery companies all have responsibilities, and must work together to
plan and ensure that suitable access is maintained for safe delivery to locations where equipment and materials will be used. See general duty
sections under the OHS provisions of the Workers Compensation Act.
Recommended planning activities include the following:
Developing company and site policy and safe work practices for delivering materials and equipment
Pre-planning the project to provide sufficient clear access points to the site to allow for the safe delivery of equipment and materials
Coordinating delivery times with delivery companies
Safe delivery practices
The following practices, where applicable, can help ensure that materials and equipment are delivered safely:
Clear ground access for telescoping boom forklifts or boom trucks, ensuring the area is
free of overhead hazards, such as power lines
graded and stabilized to provide a solid compacted soil surface or properly shored concrete slab.
Maintain access routes to allow equipment to safely maneuver.
Allow for several locations where materials can be delivered to a floor area.
 Make available access openings large enough to safely accommodate passing materials from the boom truck/forklift into the structure.
Minimize manual handling by using boom trucks, lift trucks, or similar material handling equipment to deliver materials and equipment as
close as possible to the location where they will be used. Provide sufficient clear access for the material handling equipment.
Eliminate, where practicable, situations where workers manually handle large or heavy items on stairs.
Note: Section 4.50 of the Regulation specifies the controls that are required to eliminate, if practicable, or minimize the risk of
musculoskeletal injuries.
Provide guardrail protection and/or anchor points on the structure at wall openings and balconies to enable workers to use appropriate fall
protection when transferring materials from the boom truck/forklift into the structure (see also the requirements for fall protection under Part
11 of the Regulation and guardrails under sections 4.58 and 4.58.1).
Install one or more windows temporarily on the inside of the wall to allow easy removal of the window. If windows are not large enough or
accessible for the delivery of materials create a temporary access hatch at suitable locations in walls.
Safe interior access practices
Examples of safe interior access practices include the following:
Distribute materials so that the floor in any area is not loaded beyond the permissible floor loadings
Where appropriate, ensure there is sufficient access through framed walls inside the building; for example, ensure that plumbing and
electrical wiring runs do not impede workers from carrying materials, such as wallboard, between wall studs to adjacent rooms
Use guardrails to accommodate the safe movement of materials on stairways (see also the requirements for guards and guardrails under
sections 4.58 and 4.58.1)
Install stairs leading down to the basement before the delivery of materials to the basement, or if there is no access to the basement,
designate areas on the floor where materials can be lowered
Clear hallways and stairs of debris and equipment that may cause slipping and tripping hazards
Appropriate material handling equipment
Ensure material handling equipment, such as boom trucks, rough terrain cranes, forklifts, and telescoping boom lifts, are suitable for use on the site
terrain and have sufficient reach and capacity to handle the equipment and materials to the location where workers can safely handle materials and
equipment manually.
Note: Section 4.3 of the Regulation provides that the employer must ensure that each piece of equipment in the workplace is capable of safely
performing the functions for which it is used, and is selected, used, and operated in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, safe work
practices, and the requirements of the Regulation.

G20.5(5) Responsibilities for employers to provide stairways to work levels during construction

Issued March 7, 2011

Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.5(5) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
A stairway comprised of at least framing, treads and a handrail must be provided to each floor level before construction of the next
floor or deck surface is undertaken, and the treads on the stairway must not create a tripping or slipping hazard.
Purpose of guideline
Section 20.5(5) of the Regulation requires that a stairway must be provided to each floor level "before construction of the next floor or deck
surface is undertaken." The purpose of this guideline is to specify when stairways must be installed during construction.
Next floor or deck surface
The purpose of the erection of a stairway during the building process is to provide a safe, easy method of access from one floor to the next during
the construction process. A stairway must be in place as soon as practicable once the basic structure of the next level is in place, and before
construction of the floor or deck surface on that next level begins. If work begins on the next floor or deck surface and no stairway to that level is
in place, it will constitute a violation of section 20.5(5) of the Regulation.
For example, the construction of the first level of a new residential building has been completed. The joist and beam structure for the second level
may be completed. As soon as possible and before beginning work on the floor or deck surface on the second level, a stairway must be erected
from the first level to the second. The stairway may be temporary (consisting of at least framing, safe treads, and a handrail) or permanent. Stairs
open on both sides (not against a wall or other structure) must have handrails compliant with section 4.62 of the Regulation on both sides.

G20.9 Protection from falling materials

Issued August 1999; Editorial Revision June 14, 2013

Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.9(3) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Protective canopies must be designed and constructed to safely support all loads that may reasonably be expected to be applied to
them, but in no case less than 2.4 kPa (50 psf).
Purpose of guideline
This guideline explains where more information may be found on the design of protective canopies and explains application of the regulatory
requirement.
Protective canopies
Protective canopies are usually of wood frame design. Part 9 of the BC Building Code includes design tables for roof rafters and roof joists that
are rated for 2.5 kPa. Minimum thickness for subflooring and roof sheathing are also specified. A qualified framer should be familiar with the Part 9
requirements and be able to interpret the tables correctly. Appendix A in the BC Building Code allows for the tabulated values to be extrapolated.
For example, in applications where a design loading of 5.0 kPa is more appropriate than 2.5 kPa, the spacing between rafters can be halved to
achieve the rating.
A free-spanning canopy may not be required to achieve adequate protection. For example, since the roof of a typical mobile office trailer has
probably not been designed for 2.4 kPa, additional protection could be achieved by laying sheets of plywood on the roof. Whether plywood alone
is sufficient depends on the evaluated hazard. The impact of an object falling onto the plywood represents a dynamic load, and varies in magnitude
with the falling object's mass and the fall distance. Other factors in this example include the stiffness of the falling object and of the plywood.
A heavy hard object falling from a great height onto a rigid surface will impose a high impact load. The minimum design value of 2.4 kPa may be
inadequate if this is the potential exposure. Effective implementation will require the application of good judgment to properly identify the hazards.

G20.13(3.1) Ensuring loads do not exceed capacity of thrust-out platforms

Issued June 14, 2004; Revised May 17, 2006; Editorial Revision April 6, 2020
Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.13 of the OHS Regulation states:
(1) A professional engineer must certify each thrust-out crane landing platform and certify that the building structure can adequately
support loads to be imposed by use of the platform.
(2) Thrust-out crane landing platform drawings and certification must be available on site when the platform is in place.
(3) The rated capacity of a thrust-out crane landing platform must be clearly marked on the platform and not be exceeded.
(3.1) Control measures acceptable to the Board must be implemented to ensure all loads placed on a thrust-out crane landing
platform
(a) are safely supported, and
(b) can be safely attached to and detached from the rigging.
(4) Thrust-out platform decking and supporting members must be designed to safely support any concentrated loads that may be
landed.
(5) Repealed (BC Reg. 420/2004).
Purpose of guideline
This guideline describes the measures WorkSafeBC considers acceptable under section 20.13(3.1), to ensure all loads placed on a thrust-out
crane landing platform are safely supported and can be safely attached to and detached from the rigging. If a person wishes to use a control system
not described in this guideline, an application would need to be made to WorkSafeBC, and the acceptability of that system affirmed in writing by
WorkSafeBC before such a system is implemented.
To ensure safe operations on the platform, consideration must be given to more than individual loads placed on the platform by the crane. Other
considerations include loads manually placed on the platform, multiple loads, load distribution and stability, as well as safe access for workers
connecting and detaching the rigging from the load. The control measures outlined in this guideline involve work procedures or work procedures
combined with engineering controls.
A system of nine control measures acceptable to WorkSafeBC is outlined below. The effective implementation of the system requires the fulfillment
of the responsibilities by the prime contractor and the employer. The guideline provides three options for determining the weights of loads, and
discusses two types of engineering controls that may be used as part of the system to ensure that platforms are not overloaded.
Responsibilities of the prime contractor and employers
The prime contractor, consistent with their responsibilities under section 24 of the Workers Compensation Act ("Act"), is responsible for ensuring
that a control system, including appropriate supervision, is in place to prevent thrust-out platforms from being overloaded. That responsibility
involves doing everything that is reasonably practicable to establish and maintain the system to ensure worker safety, and to ensure that the
activities of employers, workers and other persons at the workplace are coordinated. It is reasonably practicable for the prime contractor to
ensure that a control system for thrust-out platforms as described in this guideline is established and maintained.
The employer who arranges for the thrust-out platform to be brought on-site and used must also ensure the safe use of the platform, consistent with
their responsibilities under section 21(1) of the Act to protect their workers and any other workers present at the workplace where that employer's
work is being carried out. This is typically the formwork contractor.
If another employer wishes to use the thrust-out platform, or if the formwork contractor leaves the site, the ongoing responsibilities of the prime
contractor are the key to worker safety, both to ensure the activities of new employers are properly coordinated and that the necessary steps are
taken to ensure the safe use of the platform.
Control system
The system for controlling the risks when using thrust-out crane landing platforms includes assigning responsibilities to affected workers, ensuring
the rated capacities of platforms are marked and known, ensuring the weights of all loads to be placed on the platform are known, ensuring the
platform size is compatible with the loads to be placed on the platform, and a system of supervision is in place. The control system will include the
following:
1. Responsibilities of crane operator: The crane operator has responsibilities that include ensuring that the weight of any load to be landed
on the thrust-out platform does not exceed the platform capacity.
2. Responsibilities of riggers: Riggers are responsible for determining weights of loads to be lifted and communicating the weights to the
crane operator, as provided under options A, B or C below. Riggers are to be designated by a responsible authority on-site, and should be
qualified to perform their duties by reason of training, education, experience or a combination. Riggers are responsible for ensuring only
loads that can be safely attached or detached from the rigging are placed on the platform.
3. Ensuring rated capacities of platforms are known: Each thrust-out landing platform must be clearly marked with its rated capacity in
accordance with section 20.13(3) of the OHS Regulation. The rated capacities of the thrust-out landing platforms are to be made known to
the crane operator, to the rigger, and to any other affected person, such as the worker who is monitoring the accumulated loads on thrust-
out platforms. An effective means should be in place to ensure these persons can access the information on the rated capacity without delay.
4. Ensuring an effective means for determining the weights of loads to be lifted by a crane: There are three acceptable options in this
guideline for determining the weights of loads: A) an administrative option in which a list of expected weights of loads is used, B) a load cell
on the crane, and C) use of a load weighing device on-site. These options are explained in more detail at the end of this list of control
measures.
5. Ensuring an effective means for determining the weights of loads to be placed manually on the platform: The weights of materials
or equipment manually placed on the platform will be determined before they are placed. The weights may be determined by calculation, by
reference to appropriate documents, or by weighing the load.
6. Monitoring the total load placed on the platform: A person will be responsible to ensure cumulative loads placed on the platform do
not exceed the rated capacity and that the loads are evenly distributed.
7. Ensuring there is adequate space on the platform: The platform area must be sufficient to allow all loads to be placed such that they
will be stable. Generally this will require the loads to fit within the periphery of the platform. Riggers must have sufficient room to access
rigging points on the load.
8. Ensuring an effective system of supervision in place: Supervision is to be provided to ensure the required work procedures are
followed.
9. Ensuring the procedures are made known to all affected workers: This can be done by posting the written procedures on a bulletin
board and advising affected workers of them, or by other effective means. Posted procedures need to be kept in legible condition.
Options for determining the weights of loads under element #4 of the control system
A. Administrative option: For this option to be acceptable to WorkSafeBC all the following measures will be in place:
A list of the weights of items to be placed on the platform will be available.
The list will include all the equipment, materials, and other items expected to be placed and will provide the weights for each.
If a garbage box is to be used, the all-up weight of the garbage box will be included in the list. The all-up weight for a garbage box is its
dead weight (that is, weight when empty) combined with its rated capacity. For example, if the dead weight of a garbage box is 600 lbs. and
the garbage box is rated for 4,000 lbs, the list must show the all-up weight for the box, which is 4,600 lbs;
The list is to be provided to the crane operator, to the rigger, and to any other necessary person, and posted at each platform.
The rigger is responsible for ensuring the bundled loads are in accordance with the supplied list (number of pieces, size, length, etc.). In the
case of loads manually placed on the platform, the person placing the load on the platform is responsible for ensuring bundled loads are in
accordance with the supplied list.
If an item to be lifted is not on the list, the weight must be determined before it is placed on the platform. In the case of lifted loads, the rigger
is responsible to determine the weight of the item and to communicate the weight to the crane operator. If there are repeat lifts of such an
item, the list will be updated to include it. If the rigger does not know the weight of a load or cannot with substantial certainty estimate it,
then the load is not to be lifted.
B. Load cell on the crane: Under this option, the employer responsible for the crane is to ensure there is an electronic load cell that registers the
weight of each load being lifted and displays it to the operator at the controls. Administratively, this is the least complex system, as the crane
operator will know the weights directly. There is no need for the rigger to advise the operator of weight information, except when an operator
requests an advance estimate before the lift.
C. Load weighing device on-site: This option involves the use of a weighing device separate from the crane. The device is to be used whenever
the rigger and crane operator do not have advance information on the weight of a load to be lifted. If the weight displayed by the device cannot be
directly observed by the crane operator, it is the responsibility of the rigger to ensure that the weight is communicated to the crane operator.
Engineering controls for limiting the load placed on a platform by a crane
Either of the following two engineering controls may be used to help ensure that a single load placed by a crane does not exceed the rated capacity
of a thrust-out platform:
Use of a crane for which the rated capacity at the radius for placing loads on the thrust-out platform does not exceed the rated capacity of
the platform.
Adjustment of overload limit switches to effectively reduce the lifting capability of the crane so that it does not exceed the rated capacity of
the thrust-out platform.
If such controls are used, the overall control system must still ensure that the platform is not overloaded in circumstances such as multiple loads
placed by a crane on the platform, and manual placement of loads on it. In addition, the platform must have adequate space for loads.

G20.14 Temporary cribbing support in house lifting operations

Issued December 16, 2016; Editorial Revision April 6, 2020

Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.14 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
20.14 Temporary support
During the erection or dismantling of a structure or equipment the employer must ensure that all partially assembled structures or
components are supported as necessary to safely withstand any loads likely to be imposed on them.
Section 4.34 of the Regulation states:
4.34 Restricted entry
Hazardous areas not intended to be accessible to workers must be secured by locked doors or equivalent means of security, and
must not be entered unless safe work procedures are developed and followed.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide information and best practices about providing temporary supports to structures during house lifting
operations.
House lift design and planning
Lifting a house is a complex task that requires proper planning and a high level of expertise. Section 20.14 of the Regulation provides that the
employer must ensure that all partially assembled structures or components are supported as necessary to safely withstand any loads likely to be
imposed on them. In order to ensure that the temporary cribbing support system is capable of withstanding the loads, pre-planning for a house
lifting operation should generally include a design drawing prepared by a professional engineer registered in B.C. The design drawing may be site-
specific or standardized.
House lift drawing requirements
In order to demonstrate that the temporary cribbing supports can withstand any loads likely to be imposed on them, a house lift drawing (whether
site-specific or standardized) should typically include the following information:
1. The intended purpose, authorized users, and application for the drawing.
2. The requirements and restrictions for those using the drawing (such as specific material or site conditions, design wind loading, specific
aspects requiring higher level oversight or connection requirements).
3. Assumptions made, referenced codes and, where applicable, the factors of safety used in producing the drawing.
4. Limitations on the application of the drawing.
5. The maximum length of time that the house can be safely supported by temporary cribbing supports before the professional engineer
responsible for the house lift drawing must be contacted.
6. Requirements, procedures, and frequency of inspection for the temporary cribbing supports while the house is supported.
7. Critical conditions and scenarios where the design engineer must be contacted immediately.
8. The material grades and specifications of all support beams, cribbing, and temporary bracings.
9. The type of bearing (soil, concrete, etc.), allowable bearing pressure, and site preparations required to adequately support the temporary
cribbing supports and lifting/lowering operations.
10. Shimming requirements.
11. The name, signature and seal of the professional engineer responsible for the drawing.
12. The perimeter of the base of the house after it is raised to the temporary support level.
13. The location and direction of the existing horizontal framing elements, joists and beams that are to be supported at the temporary support
level.
14. The location of the existing bearing walls and post/beams above the temporary support level.
15. The location, direction and size of temporary support beams.
16. The location, size and height of temporary support cribs (including dimensions between crib centerlines and from the building perimeter to
crib centerlines) and maximum loading on the support cribs.
17. The size, orientation, and arrangement of individual timbers in the temporary support cribs.
18. The site address.
 19. A north arrow to identify the orientation of the house.
Standardized house lift drawings
A standardized house lift drawing is designed to accommodate multiple job sites that meet certain predetermined design parameters and limitations.
It allows the user to extract the engineering information required for a house lift drawing based on the specific conditions of the job site. A
standardized house lift drawing will generally include member selection tables, schematic diagrams, design limitations and engineering specifications.
It will also include the date the drawing was signed and the date after which the drawing is no longer valid or applicable.
When a standardized house lift drawing is used, the user should identify and document all site-specific details, such as the existing house plan and
framing details, and the locations of the temporary support elements (items 12 to 19 listed above). Standardized house lift drawings are intended to
be used by individuals who are knowledgeable and competent, and have adequate training and experience in house lifting.
When a standardized design drawing is used, the employer conducting the house lifting operation will normally:
1. Obtain documented authorization from the professional engineer responsible for the standardized house lift drawing that the drawing may be
used by the employer. This may include, for example: a written agreement, an email, or a notation on the drawing stating the authorized
employer's name.
2. Discuss the standardized house lift drawing with the professional engineer responsible to ensure that the limitations of the drawing are
understood by the employer.
3. Seek assistance from a professional engineer when the applicability of a standardized house lift drawing is in question or unforeseen
circumstances make the drawing not applicable.
Special considerations
There are cases where, in order to ensure that all partially assembled houses or components are supported as necessary to safely withstand any
loads likely to be imposed on them (section 20.14), the employer may need to engage a professional engineer to provide site-specific direction and
design on support beams, cribbing, other temporary support members, lifting and lowering procedures, or other measures. Some cases where site-
specific engineering direction is typically needed include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. The house is not comprised of typical wood platform frame construction.
2. The house utilizes post-and-beam or balloon frame construction.
3. The house's wall sheathing, interior wall finishing, floor sheathing, or roof sheathing is either in poor condition or not intact.
4. The house contains additions or unconventional structural elements which produce unorthodox framing or unusual load paths.
5. The house is structurally unfinished or damaged.
6. The integrity of the house and any adjoining structures could be compromised by house lifting or lowering operations.
7. The house contains masonry chimneys, masonry cladding or other non-structural elements which require temporary support or bracing prior
to house lifting operation.
Employer responsibilities
All employers involved in the house lifting operation have responsibilities to ensure worker safety at various stages of the project. Some of those
responsibilities include:
Prior to the house lifting operation
1. Ensuring all hazards associated with utility connections to the house (water, sewer, gas, electrical, etc.) have been assessed and controlled
prior to the lifting operation.
During house lifting and lowering operations
1. Ensuring site supervision responsibilities are clearly identified and assigned to a competent site supervisor, who will be on site to perform
supervisory responsibilities during house lifting and lowering operations.
2. Ensuring adequate supervision is provided during site layout, installation of support beams and cribs, and house lifting and lowering
operations.
3. Ensuring the house does not contain any unconventional structural additions, unorthodox framings, or unexpected load paths; if any such
conditions exist, the employer will seek assistance from a professional engineer.
4. Ensuring no persons occupy the house at any time during house lifting and lowering operations.
5. Prohibiting access and securing the house in accordance with section 4.34, so it is inaccessible to workers at any time during house lifting
and lowering operations.
6. Ensuring support beams and cribs are properly selected based on the house lift drawing.
7. Ensuring support beams and cribs are arranged to properly support the building and all floor joist spans in accordance with the house lift
drawing.
8. Ensuring proper bracing for non-structural parts of the house, when required, is provided in accordance with the house lift drawing or the
professional engineer's specification.
9. Ensuring all temporary support elements are made of properly graded materials in accordance with the house lift drawing.
10. Ensuring all crib timbers, timber support beams, and any other temporary timber support elements are in good condition and free of splits,
decay, or any type of physical damage which could reduce the strength of the timber.
11. Ensuring all jacking timbers are of full dimension and free of splits, checks, notches, or knots directly below the jacking point.
12. Ensuring all steel support beams are in good condition and free of any physical damage, fatigue damage, fabrication defect, deformation, or
 corrosion with noticeable section loss which could reduce the strength of the beam.
13. Ensuring all support beams, jacks, jacking timbers, and cribs are maintained plumb at a maximum half-inch in 4 feet and level to a maximum
half-inch in 4 feet at any time during house lifting and lowering operations.
14. Ensuring an adequate contact area at the contact points between all crib timbers on every layer of cribbing; wedges and shims as prescribed
on the house lift drawing may be installed to obtain the required contact area.
15. Ensuring support beams are placed on temporary cribbing supports as specified on the house lift drawing.
16. Ensuring an adequate number of load sharing blocks are provided at jacking blocks and the bearing points under support beams in
accordance with the house lift drawing.
17. Ensuring an adequate number of crib timbers are provided at the bottom layer of cribs to achieve sufficient bearing on the supporting soil in
accordance with the house lift drawing.
18. Ensuring any existing concrete slabs or pads, if present, that will be used to support cribs are adequate for this purpose.
19. Ensuring no other work is conducted during the jacking operation.
20. Ensuring the stability of the foundation walls is not jeopardized and adequate temporary supports to the walls are provided as needed.
21. Conducting and documenting visual inspections to identify any shifting of supports or movement of the house during house lifting and
lowering operations.
While a house is supported on temporary cribbing supports
1. Ensuring site supervision responsibilities are clearly identified and assigned to a competent site supervisor, who will be on site to perform
supervisory responsibilities while the house is supported on temporary cribbing supports.
2. Prohibiting access and securing the house in accordance with section 4.34, so it is inaccessible to workers at any time the house is
supported by any kind of temporary supports.
3. Ensuring the house is not left on temporary cribbing supports longer than the maximum time specified on the house lift drawings. The
employer will consult with the professional engineer responsible for the house lift drawing if the house must remain on temporary cribbing
supports beyond the maximum duration specified on the house lift drawing.
4. Ensuring regular visual inspections are conducted and documented to identify any shifting of supports or movement of the house (at a
minimum, the frequency of inspections must meet the interval specified on the house lift drawing).
5. Ensuring all support beams and cribs are maintained plumb at a maximum half-inch in 4 feet and level to a maximum half-inch in 4 feet at any
time the house is supported by any kind of temporary supports.
6. Ensuring all cribs and support beams remain undisturbed, are not exposed to any unintended loads, and are not used for any purpose other
than supporting the house.
7. Ensuring no water collects in or around the base of the cribs.
8. Ensuring there is no settlement of the ground supporting the cribs.
9. Ensuring there is no excavation below the crib base level unless authorized by a professional engineer.
Other applicable regulations
In addition to section 20.14, all other applicable sections of the Regulation and the Workers Compensation Act must be complied with during a
house lifting and lowering operation involving temporary cribbing supports. This includes, but is not limited to, the following sections:
1. Section 4.2 of the Regulation states that the employer must ensure that each building and temporary or permanent structure in a workplace
is capable of withstanding any stresses likely to be imposed on it.
2. Section 20.2(1) of the Regulation requires that, in certain circumstances, a notice of project (NOP) be filed at least 24 hours before starting
a construction project. This includes when the total cost of labour and materials for the work exceeds $100,000, or when all or part of the
permanent or temporary works (except pre-engineered or pre-manufactured building and structural components) are required to be
designed by a professional engineer.
3. Section 20.79 of the Regulation provides that before excavating or drilling with powered tools and equipment, the location of all
underground utility services in the area must be accurately determined, and any danger to workers from those utility services must be
controlled.
4. Sections 20.111-20.121 of the Regulation apply when a structure is to be demolished in whole or in part (the term "demolition" is defined
in Section 20.1).
5. Sections 21-30 of the Act set out the general duties of employers, workers and other workplace parties.
Guidelines Part 20 - Concrete Falsework and Formwork

G20.26 Inspections

Issued August 1999; Editorial Revision April 9, 2008; Revised consequential to December 1, 2013 Policy Deletion; Revised consequential to
February 1, 2015 Regulatory Amendment; Revised consequential to June 3, 2019 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.26 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states, in part:
(1) Subject to subsection (4), immediately before placement of concrete or other intended loading of specified formwork and any
associated falsework or reshoring, the employer must ensure that
(a) the formwork, falsework and reshoring are inspected by a professional engineer, and
 (b) the professional engineer issues a certificate that
(i) indicates the specific areas inspected, and
(ii) certifies that the formwork, falsework and reshoring have been erected in accordance with up-to-date worksite-specific plans.
(2) The certificate required by subsection (1) (b) must be available at the worksite for inspection by an officer.
(3) If ganged forms are being reused on the same worksite with any modification to the design or method of erection of the ganged
forms, subsection (1) applies in relation to the reuse of the ganged forms.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline discusses the following:
Meaning of "other intended loading" and "immediately before"
Engineering certification when reusing a gang form
Acceptable means of conducting inspections and issuing a certificate
Meaning of "other intended loading" — section 20.26(1)
When considering this issue, there is a need to keep a broad perspective on the application of sections 20.17 to 20.26 of the Regulation. The
broad perspective is that falsework is often used to support loads temporarily during construction which are completely unrelated to any concrete
formwork. These sections of the Regulation refer to concrete formwork and falsework.
Falsework is often used during the erection of steel structures and bridges to temporarily support members until such time as the structural elements
can be connected together and braced to be self-supporting and provide a complete structural system. Falsework may also be required and used
during the dismantling or demolition of a structure.
Section 20.26(1) of the Regulation is not intended to cover the use of falsework during the erection or demolition phases of structures. The reason
for this is that sections 20.17 to 20.26 of the Regulation only apply to specified formwork and any associated falsework or reshoring that are used
to install cast-in-place concrete (as noted in section 20.16.2 of the Regulation).
The employer has responsibility under sections 4.2, 20.6(2), 20.14, 20.15, and 20.23 (2), (3), and (4) of the Regulation to ensure that any
structures or equipment which are being erected, used or dismantled are properly managed to ensure the stability of the structure and that no
overloading of any elements takes place. It is under these sections of the Regulation that loads such as bundles of reinforcing steel or sheeting
material have to be managed. Such loads are not intended to be within the scope of "or other intended loading," in section 20.26(1). Hence no
inspection and engineering certification under section 20.26(1) should be required prior to their placement.
Meaning of "immediately before"
The phrase "immediately before" generally means the inspection be done not more than 24 hours prior to the start of concrete placing, and after
construction of the formwork for the particular concrete pour has been substantially completed. Inclement weather subsequent to the inspection, or
other causes for delay of the concrete placing, will normally necessitate an additional inspection and a professional engineer to revalidate the
inspection certificate.
Reuse of gang forms after modifications - section 20.26(3)
Section 20.26(3) of the Regulation requires that an inspection be conducted and a certificate issued by a professional engineer if ganged forms are
being reused and there has been any modification to the ganged forms or method of erection.
The ganged forms include not only the form (mould) but also the braces and other supporting elements, ties, and associated hardware. Note that
section 20.20(1)(b)(vii)states that worksite-specific plans must include details of supports, including dimensions and locations of external braces,
ties, and other supporting devices.
For the purposes of section 20.26(3), modifications to the gang form design include, but are not limited to, any change to the following:
Ganged forms' dimensions
Number of ties
Tie spacing
Bracing of the ganged forms
Connection details
Modifications to the method of erection include, but are not limited to, any change to the following:
The support elements
Design of the pick points
The attachment of work platforms
Inspections and certificates
The professional engineer who signs, seals, and issues the written certificate prior to each concrete placing, or application of other intended
loading, need not personally inspect the formwork. An inspection must be completed by a professional engineer or a directly supervised
subordinate and an engineering certificate issued immediately prior to placement of concrete or other intended load. With respect to this
certification, direct supervision of the subordinate means taking responsibility for the control and conduct of the engineering work.
Guidelines Part 20 - Concrete Pumping

G20.26.6 Operator certification

Issued consequential to the December 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment and the certification requirements that came into effect on January 1, 2024;
Editorial Revision June 18, 2024
Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.26.6 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states, in part:
(1) In this section, "certification authority" means an organization designated as the certification authority under section 20.26.5(1).
(2) On and after January 1, 2024, a person must not operate a concrete pump or placing boom at a workplace unless the person
(a) holds a valid concrete pump operator's certificate, issued by the certification authority, for the class or type of concrete pump or
placing boom being operated and operates the concrete pump or placing boom in accordance with any conditions set out on the
certificate, or
(b) operates the concrete pump or placing boom
(i) under the supervision of a person who holds a valid concrete pump operator's certificate for the class or type of concrete pump or
placing boom being operated, and
(ii) in accordance with the directions of the certificate holder.
(3) The employer must ensure that a person who operates a concrete pump or placing boom at a workplace complies with
subsection (2).
Purpose of guideline
This guideline outlines the implementation of the requirement for a person to obtain a valid certificate to operate a concrete pump or placing boom
at a workplace.
Background
Section 20.26.6(2) of the Regulation requires that on and after January 1, 2024, a person must not operate a concrete pump or placing boom at a
workplace unless the person holds a valid concrete pump operator's certificate or operates the concrete pump or placing boom under the
supervision of a person who holds a valid concrete pump operator's certificate.
Section 20.26.4(1) of the Regulation also requires that employers ensure that any person operating a concrete pump or placing boom at a
workplace must do so in a competent and safe manner, taking into account both the class or type of concrete pump or placing boom being
operated, and the circumstances of the workplace.
The certification program
Certification authority
The BC Construction Safety Alliance (BCCSA) is the only organization designated as the certification authority under section 20.26.5(1). Pursuant
to section 20.26.6(2) of the Regulation, BCCSA's Certified Concrete Pump Operator (CCPO) program offers the following five specialized
certifications:
Truck Mounted Boom Pumps (over 41 m)
Truck Mounted Boom Pumps (41 m & under)
High-Pressure Line Pumps (>1,233 psi)
Low-Pressure Line Pumps (1,233 psi & under)
Tower Placing Booms
All five certifications require passing a common written exam prior to a specialized practical proficiency assessment.
The BCCSA has indicated that there is a waiting list to evaluate operators for the purposes of completing the specialized practical proficiency
exam. This has resulted in some operators passing their written exam but being unable to complete their practical assessment by January 1, 2024.
Provisional certificates
In recognition of the time it will take for all operators covered by the requirement to be tested and become certified, BCCSA is modifying its
process and will be issuing provisional certificates when an operator has completed both the following:
Successfully completed the written exam
Paid for and scheduled a practical proficiency assessment
WorkSafeBC will recognize these provisional certificates until November 1, 2024. After that date, provisional certificates will no longer be
accepted, and operators without a full certificate may be issued orders unless they are operating the concrete pump or placing boom under the
supervision of a person who holds a valid concrete pump operator's certificate and in accordance with the directions of that certificate holder. For
more information, refer to OHS Guideline G-P2-22 Orders to workers.
Enforcement
On inspection, WorkSafeBC prevention officers will inquire with operators to determine if they possess one of the following documents:
Concrete pump operator's certificate issued by BCCSA
A provisional concrete pump operator's certificate (only until November 1, 2024)
Starting on January 1, 2024, operators who fail to possess one of these documents will be directed to the BCCSA for immediate registration in the
certification program. The prevention officer will also advise the operator's employer of the operator's failure to register with the program and the
need for the operator to become certified. The employer may also be subject to orders from WorkSafeBC.
Those operators with a provisional certificate will need to become fully certified through the program by November 1, 2024. Failure to become
fully certified may result in orders to the employer from WorkSafeBC, and those operators will be prohibited from operating in B.C. unless
supervised pursuant to section 20.26.6(2)(b) of the Regulation.
Refer to the BCCSA's Certified Concrete Pump Operator webpage for further details of the certification program.

G20.40 Use of outriggers on concrete pumping equipment

Issued August 1999; Editorial Revisions August 2004 and January 1, 2007; Revised August 31, 2007; Revised consequential to February 1, 2012
Regulatory Amendment; Editorial Revision April 6, 2020
Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.40(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Outriggers must be used in accordance with the concrete placing boom manufacturer's specifications.
Section 4.3(1) of the Regulation states:
(1) The employer must ensure that each tool, machine and piece of equipment in the workplace is
(a) capable of safely performing the functions for which it is used, and
(b) selected, used and operated in accordance with
(i) the manufacturer's instructions, if available,
(ii) safe work practices, and
(iii) the requirements of this Regulation.
Section 20.26.3 of the Regulation states:
(1) The operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of a concrete pump or placing boom manufactured before August 1, 2012
must meet the requirements of CSA Standard Z151-09, Concrete pumps and placing booms, as set out in clauses 1.1 to 3
[definitions], 4.1.9.2.3, 4.1.18.2, 4.1.19.1, 4.2.1.1, 4.2.2, 5.1.1 to 5.3.4, 5.3.7 to 6.3.4 and 6.5.1 to 6.7.3, including any table,
figure or annex referred to in those clauses.
(2) The design, manufacture, installation, operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of a concrete pump or placing boom
manufactured on or after August 1, 2012 must meet the requirements of CSA Standard Z151-09, Concrete pumps and placing
booms, as set out in clauses 1.1 to 3 [Definitions], 4.1.1.2 to 5.3.4, 5.3.7 to 6.3.4 and 6.5.1 to 6.7.3, including any table, figure or
annex referred to in those clauses.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to set out some guiding principles for determining the safe work practices to be followed for deploying outriggers
under sections 20.40(1), 4.3(1)(b)(ii), and 20.26.3 of the Regulation.
Introduction and background
Outriggers must be fully deployed and the machine leveled in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. This guideline does not address a
situation where the operator wishes to deploy outriggers in a manner contrary to the manufacturer's instructions. In that case, the concrete placing
firm can contact the manufacturer to ask for a written confirmation of an altered procedure acceptable to the manufacturer. If that is not feasible,
for example because the manufacturer is no longer in business, the firm could apply to WorkSafeBC for a variance. If shortrigging is specifically
prohibited by the manufacturer, the procedures described later in this guideline that are provided by a qualified person as an alternate cannot be
employed unless there is an approved variance.
Regulation section 20.26.3 requires that a concrete pump or placing boom be operated in accordance with prescribed clauses of CSA Z151-09,
Concrete pumps and placing booms ("Standard"). Clause 6.3.2 of the Standard states that shortrigging may be used only if
(a) it has been determined that shortrigging is unavoidable
(b) the boom is not operated beyond the area of fully extended outriggers (refer to Figure 10) unless the boom/outrigger control
system is range limiting
(c) any outriggers still retracted are jacked and the unit is leveled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures
(d) the manufacturer's or qualified person's documented procedures are followed
Note: Shortrigging is a condition in which one or more outriggers are not fully deployed on the side away from the boom operational area.
Guiding principles when shortrigging is necessary
Clause 6.3.2(a) of the Standard requires that shortrigging only be used if it is impracticable to fully deploy all outriggers. For example,
The outriggers would put the machine within an unsafe distance to hazards such as excavations and power lines
The outriggers would extend into traffic and the circumstances of the job render it impracticable to get permission to close traffic lanes
(closing traffic lanes is generally subject to municipal approval)
An adjacent structure or an excavated or natural bank restricts deployment
It is not considered impracticable to fully deploy all outriggers if the purpose is just to
Increase convenience or save money
Avoid repositioning the pump
Avoid moving stored materials that might reasonably be moved
If the manufacturer's instructions are not available, or do not address the means of deployment where full deployment is not practicable, the
following are guiding principles for determining the "safe work practices" under section 4.3(1)(b)(ii) of the Regulation:
1. As far as possible, the worksite should be organized so that concrete pumping equipment can be used with all outriggers fully deployed when
the boom is raised. Section 24 of the Workers Compensation Act establishes certain responsibilities on prime contractors at construction projects
for complying with the Regulation.
Where this section applies, the prime contractor and the employer of the concrete pump operator share responsibility for selecting the appropriate
pump to do the job and for planning the pump's location. If a smaller pump can do the job set-up with all outriggers fully deployed, then it should
be used instead of a larger pump that cannot be set up with all outriggers fully deployed. Pump location and set-up should be addressed if a pre-
job meeting is held.
2. The pump operator should be trained to recognize the circumstances that justify not fully deploying the outriggers.
Clause 6.3.2(d) of the Standard requires that any required shortrigging follow the manufacturer's or a qualified person's (defined in the Standard)
documented procedures.
Written instructions that address the following factors must be available to the operator:
Safe operating range: This refers to the regions where the boom may be positioned to maintain truck stability. Typically the safe operating
range is the area bounded by the lines extending from the centre of rotation of the boom through the centerline of the jacks of the fully
deployed outriggers. The boom must never be unfolded or extended outside of the safe operating range.
Outrigger deployment on the pumping side: Typically outriggers must be fully deployed on the side of the equipment over which the
boom is extended.
Outrigger deployment on the side opposite to the pumping side: Typically, when it is not practicable to fully deploy all outriggers, the
outriggers opposite to the pumping side outriggers must be fully retracted and all jacks lowered to the ground to level the equipment.
Structural damage or failure may occur to partially extended telescopic outriggers with the jacks lowered.
Outrigger bearing load: Proper cribbing to distribute the load may be needed if the soil conditions require it.
Procedure for unfolding the boom: Typically the boom will be raised from the cradle, rotated to a position within the safe operating range
and then unfolded. If the boom cannot be unfolded within the safe operating range, the other outriggers may have to be fully deployed while
the boom is unfolded or folded.
Precautions for over-centre booms (i.e., moving the centre of gravity toward the side that does not have fully extended
outriggers): There is the potential for backward instability with over-centre booms.
Note: The American Concrete Pumping Association Safety Bulletin "Setting outriggers to prevent accidents - Shortrigging" provides useful
guidance in preparing instructions that are specific to the site and equipment conditions. The Bulletin is intended to supplement but not replace the
manufacturer's applicable instructions.

G20.47(1) Inspection and certification of masts

Issued April 4, 2007; Revised consequential to February 1, 2012 Regulatory Amendment; Editorial Revision consequential to August 22, 2022
Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.47(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
A mast must be inspected in accordance with good engineering practice at intervals not exceeding 12 months, repaired as necessary,
and certified safe for use by a professional engineer, the manufacturer or the manufacturer's authorized agent.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to outline some of the factors that should be considered when determining if an inspection has been conducted in
accordance with "good engineering practice" under this section. It also provides information on who is authorized to certify the inspection has been
done and a mast is safe for use.
The concept of good engineering practice
The annual inspection and certification of a mast is required by the Regulation. This inspection is to be done in accordance with good engineering
practice. The concept of good engineering practice as it applies to this section means the inspection, assessment, repair (if necessary), and
certification of the equipment is to be done in consideration of the following:
Applicable regulations, safety codes, and standards (e.g., CAN/CSA-Z151-09 Concrete pumps and placing booms Clause 5 inspection
requirements for structural support systems)
Manufacturer's instructions for operation, inspection, maintenance, servicing, and repair
Operating, maintenance, and service records
Who may do the certification
Certification will generally be done by a professional engineer. If the inspection, assessment, and any necessary repair work is done in B.C., the
engineer, as required by the Professional Governance Act, must be licensed to practice in B.C. If this work is being done outside B.C., for
example in Alberta, the engineer must be licensed to practice in that jurisdiction.
If the certifying agent is a manufacturer's representative, the person signing the certification should be specifically authorized in writing by the
manufacturer to make such a certification on behalf of the manufacturer.
For convenience, the professional engineer or equipment manufacturer's representative will be referred to as the "certifying professional" in the
remainder of this guideline.
The inspection and certification process
The employer or owner of the equipment should consult the certifying professional in advance to arrange the location of the inspection, testing, and
necessary repair work, and to ensure qualified people and adequate facilities are used. Generally the "hands on" part of the inspection, testing, and
repair will be done by mechanics, service technicians, non-destructive testing (NDT) technicians, and other qualified workers as necessary (for
example, welders), working under the direction of the certifying professional.
Inspection and certification requires the assessment of the "critical components," meaning the structural, mechanical, and control system
components which affect the safe operation of the equipment. The specific identity of these components will vary from one type of equipment to
another, depending on the design and configuration of the equipment. Only the applicable components must be inspected and certified e.g., a
stationary lattice structure mast does not have mechanical and control system components whereas a self-climbing mast would have electrical
and/or hydraulic control system components.
The frequency of inspections of individual components and the extent of the inspection, including dismantling, assessment, and NDT or other
testing, will be determined by the certifying professional. The factors relevant in making these determinations include the following:
1. Requirements of the applicable regulations, safety codes, and standards
2. The equipment manufacturer's specifications and instructions
3. The certifying professional's familiarity with the particular design and model of equipment, including known reliability problems or component
problems
4. Previous inspection history and results
5. Age of the equipment and number of hours of use
6. Circumstances of use of the equipment (for example, heavy duty vs. light use) and any known incidents since the last certification
7. The general condition of the equipment
8. The available use, service, inspection, and maintenance records
9. The certifying professional's knowledge of the overall effectiveness of the service and maintenance program

Based on the outcomes of the inspection, the certifying professional will determine any necessary repair work.
The certification document will include a statement that the equipment is "safe for use" at the completion of the inspection and any necessary repair
work. This means that the equipment should then reasonably be expected to perform safely until the next inspection and certification is required if
operated according to the manufacturer's instructions.
If the certifying professional deems it necessary to provide a restricted certification statement (for example, that some components are currently
acceptable for safe use but will likely require replacement or renewal before the next annual inspection), the certifying professional will ensure the
owner or employer is made aware of these concerns and will also note the condition on the equipment inspection and maintenance records. It is
not acceptable for the certifying professional to provide a certification when there are outstanding deficiencies affecting the safe performance or
compliance of the equipment with the Regulation.

G20.47(2)-(4) Inspection and certification of concrete pump and placing boom

Issued July 14, 2020; Editorial Revision consequential to August 22, 2022 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Sections 20.47(2)-(4) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") state:
(2) A concrete pump and placing boom must be inspected in accordance with good engineering practice at intervals not exceeding 12
months to ensure that they meet
(a) the manufacturer's specifications,
(b) the requirements of the applicable standard referred to in section 20.26.3, and
(c) the requirements of this Regulation.
(3) Without limiting subsection (2), an inspection under that subsection must include an inspection of the structural, mechanical and
control system components of the concrete pump and placing boom.
(4) On and after January 1, 2021, a concrete pump and placing boom must not be used after an inspection under subsection (2)
unless a professional engineer certifies that, on the basis of that inspection, they are safe for use.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to outline some of the factors that should be considered when determining if an inspection has been conducted in
accordance with "good engineering practice" under sections 20.47(2)-(4) of the Regulation. It also provides information on who is authorized to
certify that the inspection has been done and that the concrete pump and placing boom are safe for use.
Good engineering practice
The Engineers and Geoscientists of BC (EGBC), in its professional practice guideline titled Annual Equipment Inspection and Certification in
British Columbia, describes the standard of practice that engineering professionals should follow when carrying out equipment inspections and
certifications. WorkSafeBC considers following this EGBC guideline as following good engineering practice for annual inspections and
certifications of concrete pumps and placing booms.
A copy of the EGBC's professional practice guideline can be accessed here - Annual Equipment Inspection and Certification in British
Columbia.
Certification
On and after January 1, 2021, certification must be done by a professional engineer. If the inspection, assessment, and any necessary repair work
are done in B.C., the professional engineer, as required by the Professional Governance Act, must be licensed to practice in B.C. If this work is
being done outside B.C., for example in Alberta, the professional engineer must be licensed to practice in that jurisdiction.
Inspection and certification process
The EGBC has defined the annual inspection and certification process for the concrete pump and placing boom in its professional practice
guideline - Annual Equipment Inspection and Certification in British Columbia.
Guidelines Part 20 - Open web joists and trusses

G20.72 Open web joists and trusses

Issued August 1999; Revised August 29, 2016

Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.72 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Work must not be undertaken on the erection of premanufactured open web joists and trusses until clear and appropriate written
instructions from a professional engineer or the manufacturer of the joists or trusses, detailing safe erection procedures, are available
at the worksite.
(2) Erection and temporary bracing of open web joists and trusses must be done in accordance with the written instructions required
by subsection (1).
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to clarify the intent of section 20.72 of the Regulation and to provide a list of reference materials.
Erection of open web joists and trusses
The erection of open web joists and trusses is often performed without adequate (or any) written instructions. The erector receives, with the
shipment of trusses, a set of truss design drawings that are appropriate for submission to the building inspector. Typically, these drawings indicate
permanent bracing requirements but do not address any procedure or need for temporary bracing.
Work on truss erection should not continue if any of the following conditions exist:
(a) Erection and bracing instructions are not available at the site or are obviously incomplete
(b) Work is not being done in accordance with the erection and bracing instructions
(c) Walls or skeletal structural building frame is inadequately braced
(d) Damaged trusses (those with damage such as twisted webs, bent connector plates, cracked chords) are being or have been installed
(e) Heavy loads are being applied to trusses before all bracing, bridging, and decking have been installed
It should be noted that, under section 20.72 of the Regulation, erection includes the hoisting of a partial or entire roof, floor, or other component
sections (for example, where a roof is prefabricated on the ground as a unit in one or more pieces and is then hoisted with a crane into position on
the building). This operation requires written instructions from a professional engineer or the truss manufacturer detailing all bracing needed for the
lift, and the location and construction of the lifting points, complete with rigging details as necessary for the safe lifting of the roof. This applies to
open web joists and trusses of any composition, such as wood, metal, or other material.
Reference materials
The following reference materials may be helpful:
The Western Wood Truss Association's instructional Handling, Installation and Bracing of Wood Trusses (each member of the
Association provides a copy to each site with each truss shipment)
Publications by the Structural Building Components Association, Truss Plate Institute, and Truss Plate Institute of Canada:
Building Component Safety Information BCSI Canada — Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining and Bracing of
Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses
BCSI-B1C Summary Sheet — Guide for Handling, Installing, Restraining and Bracing of Trusses
BCSI-B2C Summary Sheet — Truss Installation and Temporary Restraint/Bracing
BCSI-B3C Summary Sheet — Permanent Restraint/Bracing of Chords & Web Members
BCSI-B7C Summary Sheet — Guide for Handling, Installing and Bracing of 3x2 and 4x2 Parallel Chord Trusses
BCSI-B11C Summary Sheet — Fall Protection & Trusses
Publications by the Canadian Wood Council:
Wood Design Manual
Introduction to Wood Design
Engineering Guide for Wood Frame Construction
Canadian Span Book
Publication by the Manufacturer’s Health and Safety Association:
Structural Steel Erection Best Practices
Guidelines Part 20 - Roof Work

G20.75 Roof work – Fall protection

Issued August 1999; Revised January 1, 2005; Revised February 19, 2016
Regulatory excerpt
Sections 11.2(2) to 11.2(5) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") state:
(2) The employer must ensure that guardrails meeting the requirements of Part 4 (General Conditions) or other similar means of fall
restraint are used when practicable.
(3) If subsection (2) is not practicable, the employer must ensure that another fall restraint system is used.
(4) If subsection (3) is not practicable, the employer must ensure that a fall arrest system is used.
(5) If the use of a fall arrest system is not practicable, or will result in a hazard greater than if the system was not used, the employer
must ensure that work procedures are followed that are acceptable to the Board and minimize the risk of injury to a worker from a
fall.
Section 20.75 of the Regulation states:
If a worker is employed on a roof having a slope ratio of 8 vertical to 12 horizontal or greater, the worker must use a personal fall
 protection system or personnel safety nets must be used, and 38 mm x 140 mm (2 in x 6 in nominal) toe-holds must be used if the
roofing material allows for it.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline describes different fall protection systems for work on roofs, according to the amount of slope, using the hierarchy in section 11.2 of
the Regulation. Sections 20.74 to 20.77 also need to be considered for roof work.
Fall protection systems suitable for each type of roof
The general effect of sections 20.74 to 20.77 and Part 11 of the Regulation is to create three categories of roofs as illustrated in Figure 1 and to
provide for different fall protection systems available to be used for each category.
FIGURE 1: THREE CATEGORIES OF ROOFS

1. Fall protection available for flat roofs and roofs up to and including 4 vertical to 12 horizontal:
guardrails,
personal fall protection systems,
safety nets,
control zone,
safety monitor system with control zone, or,
other acceptable work procedures.
2. Fall protection available for roofs with a slope ratio greater than 4 vertical to 12 horizontal but less than 8 vertical to 12 horizontal:
guardrails,
personal fall protection systems,
safety nets, or
other acceptable work procedures.
The control zone and safety monitor systems are not to be employed on roofs steeper than 4 vertical to 12 horizontal. (See OHS Guideline
G11.2(5)-1.)
3. Fall protection available for roofs where the slope ratio is 8 vertical to 12 horizontal or greater
if the roofing material allows for the nailing of toe-holds, they must be used, in conjunction with personal fall protection systems or personnel
safety nets, as required by section 20.75 of the OHS Regulation, and
if the roofing material precludes the use of toe-holds, such as on metal panel, metal tile, or concrete tile, workers should use appropriate
roof ladders or acceptable work platforms in conjunction with a personal fall protection system.
Toe-holds are properly oriented with the 6-inch side perpendicular to the roof. Attachment of toe-holds to the roof will typically be accomplished
by using manufactured roof jacks according to the manufacturer's instructions. Another method may be to construct an "L" using a 2x4 and 2x6
and securely fastening this L to the roof, as illustrated in Figure 2. The attachment will need to be suitable for the roof and the application, provide
safe footing, and be able to withstand any forces likely to be imposed on it. Toe-nailing a 2x6 to the roof is not an acceptable method of securing
toe-holds.
FIGURE 2: CONSTRUCTING AN "L" ON A ROOF
It should be noted that toe-holds are intended for worker positioning, and are not to be used for the purpose of storing any material other than
what is reasonably required to complete the work at hand.
Reference should be made to the particular sections of the Regulation governing the methods of fall protection listed above to determine when
exactly they can be used and under what conditions.

G20.77 Mechanical equipment

Issued August 1999, Editorial Revision August 2004; Editorial Revision June 30, 2021
Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.77 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
Mechanical or powered equipment which has the potential to push or pull a worker over an unguarded edge must not be used unless
operated according to procedures acceptable to the Board.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide guidance to the application of section 20.77 of the Regulation.
Application
Section 20.77 of the Regulation is not intended to apply to small hand tools such as electric drills. It does apply to larger pieces of equipment such
as power sweepers. Section 4.3 of the Regulation requires that equipment must be used and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
Proximity to unguarded edge
The equipment should not be used closer than 2 metres (6.5 feet) to the unguarded edge where a safety monitor or other type of work procedure
is being used as a fall protection system. The manufacturers of roofing equipment covered by this section typically specify a limit of about this
amount in their instructions. If the instructions specify a limit greater than 2 metres, section 20.77 requires that limit be maintained.
Guidelines Part 20 - Excavations

G20.78 Qualified registered professional and engineering documents

Issued August 1999; Editorial Revision February 7, 2006; Formerly Issued in G20.78(2) - Re-issued as G20.78 January 1, 2009
Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.78 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Subject to this section, excavation work must be done in accordance with the written instructions of a qualified registered
professional if
(a) the excavation is more than 6 m (20 ft) deep,
(b) an improvement or structure is adjacent to the excavation,
(c) the excavation is subject to vibration or hydrostatic pressure likely to result in ground movement hazardous to workers, or
(d) the ground slopes away from the edge of the excavation at an angle steeper than a ratio of 3 horizontal to 1 vertical.
(2) Despite subsection (1), excavation work described in that subsection must be done in accordance with the written instructions of
a professional engineer if the excavation requires or uses support structures.
(3) The written instructions required by this section must
 (a) be certified by the qualified registered professional concerned,
(b) be available at the site, and
(c) specify the support and sloping requirements, and the subsurface conditions expected to be encountered.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide information about what is considered acceptable for written instructions required by section 20.78 of the
Regulation.
Written instructions
Verbal instructions from a qualified registered professional with no supporting documents are insufficient.
The following should be included as a minimum for a qualified registered professional's certificate on a site under this section:
Date of issue
Site address/location
Drawing/sketch, plan, and sections and/or clearly written instructions
Geotechnical description of the expected soil conditions, or confirmation upon site review
Limitations for machinery or equipment being adjacent to the excavation
Time period for which certification applies
Influence of changing weather conditions
Name of the certifying qualified registered professional, signature, and seal
Subsequent certifications may refer back to the initial certification documents, in which case such documents shall be available at the site. If
conditions and/or instructions change with respect to the conduct of the excavation work, supplementary instructions and documentation are
required.
If the certification is incomplete or deemed inadequate, work should stop in the hazard area until acceptable certification is available, or until
remedial work is done so that the excavation complies with the Regulation.

G20.78(1)(c) Vibration, hydrostatic pressure or hazardous ground movement

Issued August 1999; Editorial Revision June 6, 2007; Formerly Issued as G20.78(1) - Re-issued as G20.78(1)(c) January 1, 2009
Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.78(1)(c) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Subject to this section, excavation work must be done in accordance with the written instructions of a qualified registered
professional if
(c) the excavation is subject to vibration or hydrostatic pressure likely to result in ground movement hazardous to workers,
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide some explanation of the terms "subject to vibration" and "hydrostatic pressure likely to result in ground
movement."
Explanation of "subject to vibration"
An excavation may be considered "subject to vibration" under section 20.78(1)(c) if there is activity such as heavy vehicle traffic, blasting, road
compaction equipment, or compaction during backfill placement close to the excavation. The severity of the vibrations as well as the distance
between the activity to the excavation shall be considered.
Hydrostatic pressure and hazardous ground movement
Hydrostatic pressure is a concern if water is coming out of the sides or base of an excavation. Engineering or other work done in accordance with
the written instructions of a qualified registered professional is required unless an effective dewatering system can be implemented. If water ingress
can be prevented by the use of a dewatering system, hydrostatic pressure should not be a problem. Using a water pump to remove nominal
surface runoff (such as from rainfall) should be acceptable without engineering or other work done in accordance with the written instructions of a
qualified registered professional. If the soil adjacent to an excavation has undergone significant changes in moisture content, the stability of the
excavation sides may be in question. Soil that is frozen, or may freeze due to the ambient air temperature during the excavation work, may cause
development of hydrostatic pressure and thus such excavation work should only be undertaken following a qualified registered professional's
instructions.

G20.78(1)(d) Ground slope adjacent to excavation work

Issued February 22, 2005; Formerly Issued as G20.78(1)(e) - Re-Issued as G20.78(1)(d) January 1, 2009; Editorial Revision consequential to
September 1, 2021 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.78(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Subject to this section, excavation work must be done in accordance with the written instructions of a qualified registered
professional if
(a) the excavation is more than 6 m (20 ft) deep,
(b) an improvement or structure is adjacent to the excavation,
(c) the excavation is subject to vibration or hydrostatic pressure likely to result in ground movement hazardous to workers, or
(d) the ground slopes away from the edge of the excavation at an angle steeper than a ratio of 3 horizontal to 1 vertical.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to discuss section 20.78(1)(d) of the Regulation as it applies to excavation work that must be done in accordance
with the written instructions of a qualified registered professional.
Specific circumstances of general sloping and shoring
The requirements under section 20.78 address certain circumstances where the general sloping and shoring requirements under section 20.81 of
the Regulation do not provide adequate protection for the safety of workers. In these special circumstances, a qualified registered professional is
required to oversee assessment of the site and provide written instructions about performance of the work.
This guideline discusses the circumstance set out in 20.78(1)(d) – as it applies to construction or maintenance work performed along an established
road or other similar right of way.
Ground slopes from edge of excavation
The intent of section 20.78(1)(d) of the Regulation is to address the hazards arising from situations where the ground slopes up or down from the
top edge of an excavation. Where the ground slopes up, the concern is for the increase in lateral ground pressure that arises due to the weight of
soil positioned above a 3 horizontal to 1 vertical slope. This weight is an extra load that has not been allowed for in the sloping and shoring
requirements specified in section 20.81 of the Regulation. Where the ground slopes down and away, the concern is the lack of adequate lateral
support on the downhill side for any bracing specified in section 20.81 positioned against the downhill excavation face.
The control of surface runoff and soil erosion may also be a concern. These concerns arise particularly when the excavation work will be a side hill
cut, bulk excavation, or a trench other than in a direction in line with the natural ground slope. Stated another way, if the excavation will generally
be "across" the slope in a manner that will change the cross section profile of the slope, section 20.78(1)(d) will apply.
The slopes along a right of way will generally have been designed to provide stable faces to the extent necessary to balance safe and economical
functioning of the right of way. Where the right of way was not so designed, but has been in place for at least a year (one full season cycle of rain
and/or freezing weather as applicable for the geographical area), the slopes should have reached a natural, stable state. Any excavation activity that
will alter the design profile, or naturally stable profile, of a cross section of a slope is within the scope of section 20.78(1)(d).
Excavation work that does not change the cross section of the slope
Some maintenance or construction activities along a right of way may involve minor or localized excavation work that will not alter the "general"
cross section profile of a slope in a manner that would affect the overall stability of the slope. Some examples of excavation activity of this type are
Installing a utility pole, lamp standard, or signpost through use of an auger, drill, or similar device to dig a "post hole" or use of a back hoe or
other equipment to dig a "bell hole"
Cleaning out a drainage ditch or clearing a buffer zone to restore the original design profile and grade
Installing or repairing a shallow culvert running generally in line with the natural ground slope (or perpendicular to the centre line of the right
of way)
Shouldering work, profiling a road surface, or similar minor excavation work within a compacted roadway
Excavating a "bell hole" to repair a buried pipe or similar service
These excavations generally do not require any additional or special sloping or shoring considerations as the dimensions of the excavation are
generally small enough that the natural "bridging action" of the soil provides enough support. Also, in most of these cases a worker does not enter
into the actual excavation. These types of excavation activities generally do not require any written instructions from a qualified registered
professional.
It must be remembered however, that the hazard of loose material (such as rocks, logs, or trees) coming down from a slope above always needs
to be evaluated and considered whenever work is being done near the base of the slope. Also, hazards may develop from weather conditions,
such as extreme rainfall, or the potential for an avalanche. A "tailboard" or "tool box" meeting should be held with the crew to discuss the
conditions in the planned work area prior to starting work. Loose material and weather condition hazards need to be assessed by a qualified
person at least daily and preferably, before each work shift. The condition of the slope above must be examined and any loose material that could
be a hazard should be removed or stabilized before work starts. If the daily assessment raises any concern regarding the overall stability of the
slope, a qualified registered professional's assessment and advice should be obtained.
Excavation work that will change the cross section of the slope
There are some excavation activities related to servicing and maintaining a right of way that involve work at or near the base of an unstable or
potentially unstable slope and will alter the overall cross section of the slope. Two examples of such activity are slope stabilization and the removal
of rock or mud slide material. Prior to starting such work, a qualified registered professional should oversee the assessment of the conditions in the
area to determine if there is a significant risk of substantial material flow (either immediately or as the work proceeds) that could endanger workers.
If the qualified registered professional determines there is a significant risk, written instructions on how to proceed (covering aspects such as the
sequence of work, selection of equipment, and work methods) need to be obtained from the qualified registered professional.
If the qualified registered professional determines there is only a minimal risk of a substantial material flow, the work plan can be developed without
further input from the qualified registered professional. Work of this type generally involves powered excavating equipment that is substantial in size
and affords protection for the operator in the event of any minor material flow. If there is a danger of logs, trees, or other debris coming down the
slope, operators of mobile equipment must be protected by suitable cabs, screens, grills, shields, guards or structures (refer to section 16.33 of the
Regulation). It is necessary that such operations be carried out, as far as is practicable, so that the height of any unstable face being worked does
not exceed the maximum safe reach of the excavating equipment being used (refer to section 20.93 of the Regulation).
Pedestrian workers should stay clear of the working face, any other unstable faces, and operating equipment.
Rock scaling
Rock scaling is a form of excavation, but is not generally an activity that will change the cross section profile of a slope. Scaling of slopes is not an
activity normally considered within the scope of section 20.78, and is specifically addressed in sections 20.96 to 20.101 of the Regulation. If there
is a concern regarding the overall stability of a slope that is to be scaled, a qualified registered professional's assessment and instructions should be
obtained and followed.

G20.79 Underground utilities

Issued August 1999; Editorial Revision August 2004; Revised February 13, 2006; Revised February 24, 2006; Revised August 11, 2010;
Editorial Revision to include February 1, 2011 Regulatory Amendment; Revised July 27, 2016; Editorial Revision April 6, 2020
Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.79 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Before excavating or drilling with powered tools and equipment, the location of all underground utility services in the area must be
accurately determined, and any danger to workers from those utility services must be controlled.
(2) Excavation or drilling work in proximity to an underground utility service must be undertaken in conformity with the requirements
of the owner of that utility service.
(3) Pointed tools must not be used to probe for underground petroleum and electrical utility services.
(4) Powered equipment used for excavating must be operated so as to avoid damage to underground utility services, or danger to
workers.
Section 4.18 of the Regulation states:
If work activities conducted by or on behalf of an employer cause a utility service to be hit or damaged, the employer must notify the
owner of the utility service without delay.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to highlight the following:
Reference the practice document related to the requirements under section 20.79 of the Regulation
Explain how to obtain locate information
Describe the use of hydrovacing to expose underground utilities
Highlight some jurisdictional considerations
Explain the occupational health and safety obligations of employers when their work activities result in a hit or damage to a pipeline, buried
electrical cable, or other such utility
WorkSafeBC's practice document
Prevention of Damage to Buried Facilities in British Columbia provides practices and procedures for excavating near buried facilities. The
information in the document should be considered in conjunction with applicable legislation and regulations.
Obtaining locate information
An effective way to accurately determine the location of all underground utility services in the area is to contact BC One Call. BC One Call is the
communication link between the ground disturbance community and the owner/operator of underground facilities who are registered members of
BC One Call.
Not all utility companies are members of BC One Call. A complete list of members can be found on the BC One Call website. The person
proposing to undertake a ground disturbance will need to identify and contact directly the owners of buried facilities that are not members of BC
One Call.
BC One Call contact information:
Toll-free: 1-800-474-6886
Cellular: *6886 (free call)
Vancouver area: 604-257-1940
www.bconecall.bc.ca
Use of hydrovacing equipment for locating buried utilities
Hydrovacing is the use of pressurized water to liquefy and loosen soil, which is then removed by the use of on-truck vacuum systems and hoses. It
can be an effective, efficient, and safe means of accurately locating and exposing ("daylighting") underground utility lines.
When performed in conformity with the requirements, restrictions, and prohibitions of the utility owner, and following safe work procedures that
adequately address hazards that workers may be exposed to, hydrovacing can be as safe as hand digging. It is important to have the locate
information and any necessary permits prior to hydrovacing.
Note that the various utility owners and regulators (e.g., water, petroleum product, electrical, sanitary sewer, and steam) may have different
requirements or prohibitions and employers performing hydrovacing need to be aware of and adhere to these rules.
Other legislation governing excavations near underground utilities
Jurisdictions other than WorkSafeBC also have statutes and regulations that apply to excavation or drilling in proximity to an underground utility
service. For example, the Gas Safety Regulation specifies the means by which excavators who work near a gas installation must determine the
existence of underground gas services and the methods that excavators must use to find the exact location of services.
Refer to Prevention Manual Policy Item P1-2-1 Application of the OHS provisions of the Act - Where Jurisdictional Limits Exist for guidance on
how WorkSafeBC prevention officers will exercise their powers in situations where there are jurisdictional limits on those powers.
Regulation requirements if contact with any underground facility occurs
Notify the owner of the utility without delay
Section 4.18 of the Regulation requires that if work activities conducted by or on behalf of an employer cause a utility service to be hit or
damaged, the employer must notify the owner of the utility service without delay.
Notify WorkSafeBC where required
Damage to underground facilities can cause death or serious injury to a worker. Section 68 of the Workers Compensation Act ("Act") specifies
the accidents that an employer must immediately report to WorkSafeBC, including any accident that results in serious injury or death of a worker,
or involves the major release of a hazardous substance.
An important factor in determining whether there is a major release of a hazardous substance is the seriousness of risk to the health of workers that
the release presents. Policy includes some factors that determine the seriousness of the risk. Situations involving natural gas that should be
considered a "serious risk" include the following:
It was necessary for people to be evacuated from buildings
Gas seeped into sewers or drains
Any person required medical treatment
The gas leak ignited
Repair workers entered the gas envelope when the atmosphere contained flammable gas or vapor concentrations in excess of 20% of the
lower explosive limit (LEL)
A non-gas company worker entered an excavation, after a strike, to attempt to stop or slow the flow of gas
Policy Item P2-68-1 Accident Reporting and Investigation - Major Release of Hazardous Substance discusses the meaning of the "major release
of a hazardous substance" under section 68 of the Act.
Investigate the incident
Under section 69 of the Act employers must immediately undertake an investigation into the cause of any accident or incident that had a potential
for causing serious injury to a worker. Any gas line hit or high voltage contact is likely to fall into this category and an investigation is required.
Also, under section 69 of the Act the employer must investigate the occurrence of any accident that involved the major release of a hazardous
substance. Refer to section 69 of the Act for additional incidents that employers must investigate.

G20.81 Sloping and shoring requirements

Issued August 1999; Editorial Revision August 31, 2007; Editorial Revision January 1, 2009
Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.81(1) of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
 Subject to section 20.78, before a worker enters any excavation over 1.2 m (4 ft) in depth or, while in the excavation, approaches
closer to the side or bank than a distance equal to the depth of the excavation, the employer must ensure that the sides of the
excavation are
(a) sloped as specified in writing by a qualified registered professional,
(b) sloped at angles, dependent on soil conditions, which will ensure stable faces, but in no case may the slope or combination of
vertical cut and slope exceed that shown in Figure 20 1,
(c) benched as shown in Figure 20-2,
(d) supported as specified in writing by a professional engineer,
(e) supported in accordance with the minimum requirements of section 20.85, or
(f) supported by manufactured or prefabricated trench boxes or shoring cages, or other effective means.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide explanatory material for the Regulation requirements in sub-sections 20.81(a)–(f).
Explanatory information for subsections 20.81(a)–(f)
This section is subject to section 20.78, which requires written instructions from a qualified registered professional in certain situations.
"Excavation" is defined in section 20.1 as meaning any "cut, cavity, trench or depression in the earth's surface resulting from rock or soil removal."
This includes, for example, a hole dug in the ground, as well as the cutting of material away from a slope, such as occurs on roadway construction.
Section 20.81 requires that one of clauses (a) to (f) be met in all cases where an excavation over 1.2 m (4 ft) deep has a width that is equal to or
less than twice its depth. If the excavation is wider than twice its depth, this will only have to be done if the worker will approach "closer to the side
or bank than a distance equal to the depth of the excavation." The latter includes situations where there is no measurable width because the
excavation is, for example, a cut into a slope. In these situations, the worker must enter and exit the excavation by a safe route, for example, a
properly sloped or shored portion of the excavation.
Section 20.81(1)(e) refers to section 20.85. Section 20.85, and by reference Table 20-1, contain detailed specifications for "trench support
structures." A "trench" is defined in section 20.1 as "an excavation less than 3.7 m (12 ft) wide at the bottom, over 1.2 m (4 ft) deep, and of any
length." Section 20.81(1)(c) and section 20.85 do not apply to excavations over 12 feet wide, or excavations that have no measurable width.
Section 20.81(1)(f) permits the use of manufactured or prefabricated trench boxes or shoring cages. These may be used in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions or engineering certification for the device, unless the instructions for use do not adequately include the circumstances of
use or questions arising at the site, or where the situation is covered in the scope of section 20.78. The instructions for use and/or certification of a
trench box or cage should specify the types of soil conditions for which it is intended and the instructions relating to each. A copy of this
information should be on site.
Section 20.81(1)(f) also permits the use of "other effective means." Means of shoring other than "manufactured or prefabricated trench boxes or
shoring cages" referred to under section 20.81(f) should be done in accordance with the written instructions of a professional engineer under
section 20.81(d).

G20.85 Trench support structures

Issued August 1999; Editorial Revision January 1, 2009

Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.85 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) Trench support structures, other than those designed by a professional engineer, must comply with Table 20-1 for the following
relevant soil conditions:

Soil type Description of soil

A hard and solid
B likely to crack or crumble
C soft, sandy, filled or loose

(2) If Table 20-1 is to be used for a combination of supporting and sloping, the selection of shoring elements must be based on the
overall depth of the excavation, and the arrangement must conform to Figure 20-3.
(3) Cross braces and trench jacks must be installed in a horizontal position and must be secured against dislodgement.
(4) The minimum number of cross braces at each cross bracing location is determined by the trench depth as follows:
 Depth at location Number of braces
up to 2.4 m (8 ft) 2
2.4 m to 3.7 m (8 ft to 12 ft) 3
3.7 m to 4.6 m (12 ft to 15 ft) 4
4.6 m to 6 m (15 ft to 20 ft) 5

(5) At each cross bracing location the cross braces must be less than 1.2 m (4 ft) apart, and the uppermost cross brace must be
within 60 cm (2 ft) of ground level.
(7) Hydraulic or pneumatic trench jacks must have a means of ensuring that they will not collapse in the event of loss of internal
pressure.
(8) Uprights must not spread outwards more than 15 degrees from the vertical when viewed along the trench.
(9) Plywood may be substituted for two inch thick shoring elements provided that
(a) the plywood is not less than 19 mm (3/4 in) thick,
(b) the trench is not over 2.7 m (9 ft) in depth,
(c) uprights are installed at not over 60 cm (2 ft) centres,
(d) cross braces do not bear directly on plywood, and
(e) cross braces bearing on uprights or walers are located at all joints in plywood sheathing.
Purpose of guideline
The purpose of this guideline is to provide information about requirements for trench support structures and types of soil. The guideline also
provides information about combining sloping and shoring.
Trench support structures and soil type
Section 20.85 of the Regulation and its accompanying tables and figures set out detailed requirements for trench support structures required under
section 20.81(1)(e). Any trench support structures not covered by these requirements, other than "manufactured or prefabricated trench boxes or
shoring cages" allowed by section 20.81(f), must be covered by a professional engineer's certificate under section 20.81(d).
The requirements of section 20.85 depend on the type of soil. Type A soil is described in the section as "hard and solid." No soil is type A if it:
Is fissured
Is subject to vibration from heavy traffic, pile driving, or similar effects
Has been previously disturbed
Is part of a sloped or layered system where the layers dip towards the excavation on a slope of 4H:1V or greater
The material is subject to factors that would require it to be classified as a less stable material
Type C soil is described in section 20.85 as "soft, sandy, filled or loose." It typically has a low, unconfined compressive strength. It can be
A granular soil, including gravel, sand, and loamy sand
Submerged soil or soil from which water is freely seeping
Submerged rock that is not stable
Material in a sloped, layered system where the layers dip towards the excavation on a slope of 4H:1V or greater
A more detailed, technical classification of soil types is available in Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Part 1926, Subpart P,
Appendix A. Visual and testing parameters are provided for analysis.
Combination of sloping and shoring
Section 20.85(2) and Figure 20-3 specify an option if a combination of sloping and shoring is to be used. The following additional information may
help clarify the relationship between H, the 1:1 slope, and the 1.5H horizontal dimension in Figure 20-3. If the broken reference line extending on a
1:1 slope from the toe or base of the excavation meets the surface of undisturbed ground within a distance of 1.5 times the depth of the trench, the
trench support structures specified by section 20.85 can be used. If not, the original ground slopes upward steeper than a 1 vertical in 3 horizontal
slope, and a professional engineer's certificate must be obtained under section 20.81(d) and followed.
Guidelines Part 20 - Marine Construction, Pile Driving and Dredging

G20.102 Suspended work platforms in marine construction and pile driving activities

Issued May 17, 2006

Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.102 of the OHS Regulation states:
(1) Suspended work platforms such as gilley boards, small boats and buckets used to support workers must meet the requirements
for suspended work platforms in Part 13 (Ladders, Scaffolds and Temporary Work Platforms).
(2) Despite section 13.27(5), a secondary hoisting line on a crane may be used to suspend workers on a work platform in a marine
construction or pile driving operation if
(a) it is not practicable to provide another means for positioning workers to perform work tasks,
(b) all the crane's hoisting gear that is being used conforms to section 13.29(1), and
(c) the total load attached to or suspended from all load lines of the crane does not exceed 50% of the rated capacity of the crane for
the reach and configuration.
Purpose of guideline
This guideline provides information on the circumstances under section 20.102(2)(a) in which WorkSafeBC expects it will be practicable to use a
second crane or other hoist as a means for positioning workers to perform work tasks, and when it will not be practicable. The term "practicable"
is defined in the OHS Regulation to mean "that which is reasonably capable of being done." The guideline also provides information on the
application of section 20.102(2)(b).
Practicability of using a second crane or other hoist
The issue of practicability varies somewhat depending on whether the operations are done using equipment based on the ground or a dock, or are
performed using equipment based on a barge, scow, or similar floating support.
1. Operations where equipment is used on the ground or a dock: It is generally considered practicable to use a second crane, a boom-
supported elevating work platform, or other safe means to position workers to do tasks at height unless the area does not provide sufficient
space or there are conditions that do not permit safe positioning of additional equipment. Examples of such cases include operations done
on ground where access is limited or soil conditions preclude the use of additional equipment, and those done from a narrow wharf, jetty, or
dock area with substantial space restrictions.

If the space is adequate for the operation of a second crane or other hoisting device, it may still not be practicable to bring in the second
piece of equipment if the work is extremely short in duration or involves only a few lifts and is incidental to the job. Two examples are noted
below.
The work is solely for the purpose of routine maintenance on the crane, pile driver, or leads. For example, if it is necessary to re-
thread a pile line on the leads, or to access the upper sheaves of the crane for maintenance such as lubrication, the use of a work
platform suspended on a second load line while the pile driver and/or leads remain supported by another load line of the crane is
considered normal and acceptable practice.
During marine construction and pile driving work there may be other short duration lifting tasks that need to be done, for example the
top of a light standard may need to be installed or removed. For such tasks the pile driver and leads are disconnected from the crane,
rendering the crane available for use in its usual or normal configuration, with one load line supporting workers in a platform and the
other line used to position or support the part to be installed or removed.

However, if such crane tasks are more than incidental, for example the work will take more than a day, and equipment such as a
second crane or a boom-supported elevating work platform is reasonably available to the site, WorkSafeBC expects the work to be
planned and executed in a manner that complies with section 13.27(5).
2. Operations where equipment is used on a barge or scow: It is generally considered not to be practicable to use a second crane to
lift a work platform or use an elevating work platform when operations are done from a barge, scow or similar floating equipment.

For example, if the secondary equipment is placed on the same barge or scow there usually will not be sufficient space to safely position the
equipment. Also, in the case of an elevating work platform, it may not be possible to assure that the elevating work platform carrier will
remain level within the limits normally required for safe operation of such equipment, in circumstances where there is listing of the barge or
scow resulting from loads being handled by the crane, or as a result of wind and wave action.

If the secondary equipment is placed on another barge or scow, or on a nearby dock or land area there may be hazards to workers created
from the relative movement of the two pieces of lifting equipment, as a result of the listing of the barge or scow from loads being handled by
the crane, or from wind and wave action.
Intention of section 20.102(2)(b)
This provision references section 13.29(1) of the OHS Regulation, and broadens the application of the requirements under that section to all
hoisting gear, including the primary line, the line used to lift workers and, where applicable, the boom hoist. In other words, all hoisting lines must
be operated as slowly as practicable when workers are being lifted on the platform and must be lowered under power, and no line may be used
with a free running boom or hoisting winch controlled only by brakes. Section 13.29(2) and (3) continue to apply, but only to the line used to lift
workers.
Guidelines Part 20 - Demolition
G20.112 Hazardous materials – Asbestos

Issued June 18, 2008; Revised consequential to February 1, 2012 Regulatory Amendment; Revised consequential to February 1, 2015
Regulatory Amendment; Editorial Revision consequential to May 1, 2017 Regulatory Amendment; Revised May 29, 2018; Editorial Revision
April 6, 2020; Revised July 20, 2023; Revised consequential to January 1, 2024 Regulatory Amendment
Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.112 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
(1) In this section:
"hazardous material" means a hazardous substance, or material containing a hazardous substance, including
(a) asbestos-containing material,
(b) lead or any other heavy metal, or
(c) toxic, flammable or explosive material,
that may be handled, disturbed or removed in the course of the demolition or salvage of machinery, equipment, a building or a
structure, or the renovation of a building or structure;
"qualified person", except in subsections (7) and (8), means a person who
(a) has, through education and training, knowledge of the management and control of the hazardous materials that the qualified person
is made aware of by the employers, and the owner, or that are reasonably foreseeable by the qualified person, as being
(i) on or in the machinery, equipment, building or structure that is the subject of the demolition, salvage or renovation, or
(ii) at the worksite, and
(b) has experience in the management and control of those hazardous materials.
(2) Before work begins on the demolition or salvage of machinery, equipment, a building or a structure, or the renovation of a building
or structure, all employers responsible for that work, and the owner, must ensure that a qualified person inspects the machinery,
equipment, building or structure and the worksite to identify the hazardous materials, if any.
(3) In conducting an inspection and identifying the hazardous materials, if any, under subsection (2), a qualified person must do the
following:
(a) collect representative samples of the material that may be hazardous material;
(b) identify each representative sample and determine whether it is hazardous material;
(c) if the actions under paragraphs (a) and (b) are not practicable, or not appropriate in the circumstances, use other sufficient means
to identify the hazardous materials, if any;
(d) based on the actions taken under paragraphs (a) and (b) or (c), determine the location of each of the hazardous materials
identified;
(e) make a written report of the inspection, including,
(i) if the actions under paragraphs (a) and (b) were taken,
(A) the location of each representative sample, and
(B) the identity of each representative sample and whether it is hazardous material,
(ii) if the actions under paragraph (c) were taken, the identity of each of the hazardous materials, if any,
(iii) a description of the methods used under paragraph (b) or (c),
(iv) the location, as determined under paragraph (d), of each of the hazardous materials identified, including by using drawings, plans
or specifications, and
(v) the approximate quantity of each of the hazardous materials identified.
(4) All employers responsible for work being carried out on the worksite where the demolition or salvage of the machinery,
equipment, building or structure, or the renovation of the building or structure is taking place, and the owner, must ensure that the
following information is available at the worksite:
 (a) a report made under subsection (3)(e);
(b) a report made under subsection (6)(e);
(c) a written confirmation under subsection (8).
(5) All employers responsible for containing or removing any of the hazardous materials identified under subsection (2) or (6) must
safely contain or remove those hazardous materials.
(6) If, after written confirmation is provided under subsection (8), a person discovers material that may be hazardous material on or in
the machinery, equipment, building or structure or at the worksite, not previously determined to be hazardous material under this
section, all employers responsible for the demolition or salvage of the machinery, equipment, building or structure, or the renovation
of the building or structure, and the owner, must ensure that a qualified person does the following:
(a) collects representative samples of the material;
(b) identifies each representative sample and determines whether it is hazardous material;
(c) if the actions under paragraphs (a) and (b) are not practicable, or not appropriate in the circumstances, uses other sufficient means
to determine if the material is hazardous material;
(d) based on the actions taken under paragraphs (a) and (b) or (c), determines the location of the hazardous material, if any;
(e) makes a written report, including,
(i) if the actions under paragraphs (a) and (b) were taken,
(A) the location of each representative sample, and
(B) the identity of each representative sample and whether it is hazardous material,
(ii) if the actions under paragraph (c) were taken, the identity of the hazardous material, if any, and
(iii) if hazardous material was identified, the location of the hazardous material, including by using drawings, plans or specifications.
(7) All employers responsible for the demolition or salvage of the machinery, equipment, building or structure, or the renovation of the
building or structure, and the owner, must ensure that, with respect to the hazardous materials identified under subsection (2) or (6),
(a) no demolition, salvage or renovation work that may disturb the hazardous materials, other than work necessary to safely contain
or remove the hazardous materials, is carried out until the hazardous materials are safely contained or removed, and
(b) a qualified person complies with subsection (8).
(8) A qualified person must ensure, and confirm in writing, that the hazardous materials identified under subsection (2) or (6) are
safely contained or removed.
Purpose of guideline
Demolition, renovation, and salvage work involve the taking apart and destruction, in whole or in part, of buildings, structures, equipment, and
machinery. These processes have the potential to create harmful exposures to hazardous materials. Section 20.112(1) of the Regulation lists
several types of hazardous materials which must be identified and either safely contained or safely removed prior to demolition, renovation, or
salvage work. Asbestos is one of these materials.
The purpose of this guideline is to explain the hazards associated with the uncontrolled release of asbestos. It also provides information for owners,
employers, consultants, workers, and other involved persons on what constitutes a compliant asbestos inspection, arranging for and confirming the
safe abatement of asbestos, and what to do if additional materials suspected to contain asbestos are encountered during demolition, renovation, or
salvage work.
Demolition work is often a necessary component of restoration work following a fire or flood, and the requirements of section 20.112 of the
Regulation and the information in this guideline also apply when demolition work is part of restoration work.
Background information
Demolition, renovation, and salvage work, if performed incorrectly, can create harmful asbestos exposures to a variety of workers and other
persons, including owners, developers, demolition, renovation, and salvage workers, inspectors, transportation workers, landfill workers, and the
public. If demolition of a house or building proceeds without first ensuring the identification and safe removal of the asbestos hazards, asbestos
fibres can be released, and remain airborne for a long period of time, potentially exposing workers. During the demolition of the interior walls and
ceilings, the demolition, renovation, or salvage work, workers may be exposed to airborne asbestos fibres in the dust from the gypsum board filling
compound (sometimes called drywall mud) and from textured ceilings and walls. Vermiculite attic insulation containing asbestos fibres can spill out
of the attic when the ceiling material is removed. Asbestos-containing dusts from these activities can contaminate the site and disperse to
neighbouring properties exposing other persons. As asbestos-containing debris is loaded into a disposal truck, the excavator operator and the
truck driver can be exposed to asbestos-containing dusts which can also drift into neighbouring properties. As the disposal truck travels to the
landfill site, dust that contains asbestos can blow out of the truck, spreading asbestos dust along its travel route. When the truck discharges its
asbestos contaminated load at the landfill, unprotected landfill site workers can be exposed to the airborne hazard. These work practices are
unacceptable and non-compliant with the Regulation.
Asbestos hazards must be controlled through the identification and safe abatement of asbestos, by trained and certified persons, before demolition,
renovation, or salvage work. This guideline provides information for acceptable identification, assessment, reporting, and removal of asbestos
hazards in buildings and structures (refer also to the "10 Steps to Compliance" chart at the end of this guideline).
The requirements in section 20.112 of the Regulation are related to other requirements in both the Regulation and the Workers Compensation
Act ("Act"). For example, when asbestos is removed, other requirements in Part 6 Asbestos of the Regulation are also applicable. The
requirements in sections 21 (General duties of employers) and 25 (General duties of owner) in the Act also apply.
More information related to asbestos hazard assessment and control measures for building demolition, renovation, and salvage work can be found
in the following:
OHS Guideline G6.8 "Procedures for abatement of asbestos materials during house and building demolition/renovation"
WorkSafeBC publication BK27 Safe Work Practices for Handling Asbestos
WorkSafeBC hazard bulletin WS03-03 Asbestos Hazards in Demolition, Renovation and Salvage
Asbestos licensing and certification requirements
In 2024, WorkSafeBC implemented a mandatory licensing requirement for asbestos abatement work to help keep workers safe from exposure to
asbestos.
An employer must hold a valid asbestos licence to conduct asbestos abatement work as defined in the Act.
A person must take mandatory training and hold a valid certificate for the type of asbestos abatement work they conduct. Refer to the OHS
Guideline G6.2.1 for descriptions of the types of asbestos abatement work and the corresponding asbestos certificate levels required.
For more information on the licensing and certification requirements, refer to the Asbestos training, certification & licensing webpage on
worksafebc.com.
Responsibilities and qualifications
Sections 20.112(2), (4), (5), (6), and (7) of the Regulation specify explicit responsibilities for the owner and the employers. Pusuant to section 30
of the Act, these parties need not duplicate the same compliance efforts providing they coordinate their actions to ensure that compliance with all
provisions of section 20.112 is achieved. The following table summarizes which workplace parties, if any, are primarily responsible for the
regulatory requirements, but not be limited to those on the list:

Obligations Who's responsible (where applicable)

Ensure that a hazardous materials inspection is completed by a Owner or owner representative
qualified person Employers such as the following:
Prime contractor
Demolition contractor
Salvage contractor
Abatement contractor
Renovation contractor
Builder
Ensure that a written inspection report and other required Owner or owner representative
documentation is available at the worksite Employers such as the following:
Prime contractor
Demolition contractor
Salvage contractor
Abatement contractor
Renovation contractor
Builder
Employers of other workers on site
Conduct the hazardous materials inspection in an appropriate Certified asbestos surveyor (commonly a licensed hazardous materials
manner consultant)
Safely contain or remove hazardous materials Licensed abatement contractor
Licensed salvage contractor
Licensed demolition contractor
Licensed renovation contractor
Provide written confirmation that the hazardous materials have Qualified person (may be a different person than the qualified person
been safely contained or removed conducting the hazardous materials inspection)
Prior to asbestos removal occurring, all employers responsible for the work, as well as the owner or prime contractor must ensure that a notice of
project (NOP) for asbestos, as required under section 20.2.1 of the Regulation, is submitted to WorkSafeBC at least 48 hours in advance of the
actual removal of asbestos, including any preparatory work. The NOP must include detailed written safe work procedures and a written hazardous
materials inspection report as required under sections 20.112(3)(e) or 20.112(6)(e) of the Regulation. Only one NOP needs to be submitted.
Section 6.2.3 also states that the owner and the prime contractor must ensure that the asbestos abatement contractor holds a valid licence to
perform asbestos abatement work.
Under sections 20.112(2), (3), and (6) a qualified person has responsibilities regarding inspection, sample collection, identification, and report-
writing. The qualifications required by the person fulfilling these requirements are defined in section 20.112(1). In addition to education, training,
knowledge, and experience, the qualified person conducting a survey for asbestos-containing materials would require a valid Level S certificate to
perform that work.
A qualified person is also required to fulfill duties in sections 20.112(7) and (8). The qualifications required of this person are described in section
1.1 of the Regulation as being knowledgeable of the work, the hazards involved, and the means to control the hazards, by reason of education,
training, experience, or a combination thereof. This person may be a different person than the qualified person described in sections 20.112(2),
(3), and (6). The qualified person fulfilling the duties of sections 20.112(7) and (8) would not perform asbestos surveys, and would not require a
Level S certificate.
The following activities should also be conducted by a qualified person with education, training, and experience in the management and control of
asbestos hazards:
Collection and interpretation of air samples during asbestos abatement projects
Preparation of inspection reports
Conduction of workplace inspections
Inspection for and identification of any asbestos-containing materials
Section 20.112(2) of the Regulation requires that before work begins on the demolition or salvage of machinery, equipment, buildings, or
structures, or the renovation of a building or structure, the employer or owner must ensure a qualified person inspects the site to identify any
asbestos-containing materials. This inspection is separate from an inventory required by section 6.4 of the Regulation. The inventory prepared
under section 6.4(1) is required for the protection of workers who may occupy a building. Although it may not include asbestos that wasn't readily
accessible (e.g., hidden behind concrete walls or under a number of layers of flooring), the inventory required by section 6.4(1) will be a useful aid
in conducting the inspection and identification of hazardous materials as specified in section 20.112(2). The purpose of the inspection required by
section 20.112(2) is to locate and identify all asbestos-containing material prior to renovation, demolition, and salvage work.
The asbestos inspection process is referred to as a pre-renovation or pre-demolition asbestos survey and the person conducting the inspection is
often referred to as the surveyor (section 20.112 refers to this person as a qualified person). Pursuant to section 6.2.1 of the Regulation, a
surveyor must hold a valid asbestos Level S certificate. The asbestos survey includes a walk-through inspection, sample collection, sample
analysis, reporting, and communication of the results. Surveyors must be familiar with proper walk-through and sample collection practices. There
are a number of recognized industry standards which provide guidance on conducting asbestos surveys, and include the following:
The Ontario Regulation 278/05 Designated Substance – "Asbestos on Construction Projects and in Buildings and Repair
Operations"
Asbestos: The Survey Guide (HSE – HSG264)
EPA How to Manage Asbestos in School Buildings EPA 910-B-96-001
Managing Asbestos in Buildings: A Guide for Owners and Managers (Environmental Information Association, 2015)

For detailed information on representative sampling for asbestos surveys, including a sample template of asbestos inspection reports, refer to the
WorkSafeBC publication Safe Work Practices for Handling Asbestos.
Although this guideline is focused on asbestos, other hazardous materials must be inspected for and identified by the qualified person. Section
20.112(1) provides a definition of hazardous materials to mean a hazardous substance, or material containing a hazardous substance, including
substances other than asbestos-containing materials, such as lead, heavy metals, or toxic, flammable, or explosive material.
Bulk asbestos sample collection
During the walk-through inspection the qualified person (a certified asbestos surveyor) identifies materials suspected to contain any asbestos. To
confirm or discount the presence of asbestos, representative bulk samples must be collected. Multi-layered materials, like multiple layers of old tile
and linoleum flooring or multiple layers in wall or ceiling materials, will commonly be encountered. Careful consideration must be given to which
layers of multi-layered materials to sample. Ideally a sample should be collected from each suspected layer. The qualified person should identify the
sample location in the building with a unique sample number.
The sampling technique and quantity of material sampled are two other important factors to consider. Sufficient quantities of material must be
collected. Check the laboratory method for required sample quantities or check with the laboratory analyst. For materials like loose vermiculite,
the quantity collected is as required by the EPA/600/R-04/004 vermiculite sampling and analytical method. Sample collection methods must
minimize disturbance and exposure to the persons collecting the bulk samples. Use of protective clothing and wearing of a properly fitted approved
respirator is required. Persons collecting the samples must have a written sample collection procedure as part of their asbestos exposure control
plan. (Refer to sections 6.3 and 5.54 of the Regulation for exposure control plan requirements.) A respiratory protection program is also required.
(Refer to section 8.5 and sections 8.32 through 8.44 Regulation and the associated guidelines.)
The Regulation requires a qualified person to use their education, training, knowledge, and experience to determine which building materials
should be sampled to identify hazardous materials as some building materials may not need to be sampled. Most asbestos-containing building
materials were phased out by the early 1990s, meaning these materials are less likely to be found in newer buildings. However, hazardous materials
specialists in B.C. have found asbestos in a few types of construction materials – such as sealants, adhesives, mastics, caulking, and cement
products – in relatively new buildings (built as recently as 2018). It is also possible that asbestos-containing materials that pre-date 1990 may
have been used after 1990. A national report (Asbestos Management in Canada: Assessing the Need for a National Standard) references a
misconception that there are no asbestos-containing materials in buildings built after 1990. In general, the more recently constructed the building is,
the less likely it is to contain asbestos. The qualified person inspecting buildings to identify potential asbestos-containing materials may consider
factors, such as the age of the building and recent renovations, in determining what materials to sample.
Sample analysis
Asbestos bulk samples should be analyzed by an accredited asbestos laboratory (if the laboratory is not accredited, it must be a participant in a
quality control program). Methods accepted by WorkSafeBC for bulk sample analysis are specified in section 6.1 of the Regulation. These
methods include requirements for laboratory equipment, calibration, quality control, and result reporting. Refer also to the online WorkSafeBC
publication Safe Work Practices for Asbestos Laboratories.
Risk assessment for the abatement of identified asbestos
When the presence of asbestos is either confirmed through bulk sample analysis or a material is assumed to contain asbestos (e.g., asbestos
furnace duct tape, asbestos cement transite board, or asbestos exterior shingles), a risk assessment must be performed before demolition,
renovation, or salvage work begins to determine the exposure risk to workers and other persons. Refer to section 6.6 of the Regulation and OHS
Guidelines G6.6-1 Risk Assessment to G6.6-2 Classification of risk.
Inspection reports must be "available at the worksite"
Commonly, the qualified person is hired and prepares the report for the owner. The information contained in the inspection report is used during
the selection process for the licensed abatement contractor to scope out the work and during the planning of the work, highlighting one of the
reasons why the accuracy of the report is critical.
As per section 20.112(4) of the Regulation, a copy of the inspection reports must be available at the worksite. The site documentation must
include the inspection reports from the survey and any drawings, plans, or specifications that show the locations of any asbestos. This requirement
applies to all employers who have workers on the demolition, salvage, or renovation worksite; including contractors where workers may disturb
asbestos-containing materials by their work activities. Workers must have the information about the asbestos hazards on hand to use as a reference
in planning their work and to avoid exposure to asbestos.
As per section 20.112(8) of the Regulation, having the inspection reports available at the worksite includes a written confirmation by the qualified
person that the asbestos-containing materials specified for removal were safely contained or removed. A document such as a post-asbestos
abatement inspection report, that confirms that an inspection was conducted to verify the safe removal of identified asbestos, is acceptable for this
purpose. Refer to the Written Confirmation section of this guideline outlining the information that should be contained in a written confirmation by
the qualified person.
Safe removal of asbestos
All asbestos specified for removal must be removed by a licensed asbestos abatement contractor and performed by certified workers using safe
work practices and procedures before demolition occurs. The WorkSafeBC publication Safe Work Practices for Handling Asbestos and OHS
Guideline G6.8 describe acceptable practices. Workers and other persons must not be exposed to asbestos during the demolition, renovation, or
salvage of a building or structure. The asbestos removal practices and procedures must minimize the release of airborne asbestos fibres and must
be in compliance with all applicable asbestos requirements in Part 6 of the Regulation.
Written confirmation
The employer must ensure that a qualified person has complied with the requirement to provide written confirmation that asbestos-containing
materials have been safely contained or removed. The written confirmation is commonly referred to as the 'clearance' document or post-abatement
inspection report. The qualified person, in this case, must be familiar with the work that was conducted and can be one of the following:
Project consultant
Prime contractor
Licensed asbestos abatement contractor
Demolition contractor
Renovation contractor
Certified asbestos surveyor
The written confirmation should include information such as the following:
The date the clearance inspection was conducted
The address of the abatement project
The name of the abatement contractor
A description of the scope of work that was performed
 The notice of project (NOP) number for the asbestos work, if applicable
Waste manifest documentation
Results of any air clearance sampling, and the name and signature of the surveyor, consultant, or contractor who collected the air samples
Other relevant information, such as a reference to the hazardous materials inspection report, the name of the consultant, surveyor, or
contractor who performed the final visual inspection
A statement indicating that the abatement was conducted in accordance with regulatory requirements, and that the asbestos was safely
removed
Asbestos encountered during demolition, renovation, or salvage work
Sections 20.112(6) and (7) of the Regulation describe requirements when hazardous material not previously determined to be hazardous is
discovered. If any suspected asbestos material is encountered during demolition, renovation, or salvage work, such as in walls or some other
concealed space or location that was missed during the pre-abatement inspection process, work must cease until the actions required by this
section are completed (i.e., sample collection and identification, determination of the locations of the materials, and subsequent implementation of
the required control measures — usually removal of the asbestos). This means that the demolition, renovation, or salvage work, workers need
some basic awareness and skill in recognition of materials likely to contain asbestos. Having the ability to recognize building materials and products
that may contain asbestos is part of the training and instruction that demolition, renovation, and salvage work employers need to provide to their
workers who may be exposed to asbestos (refer to section 6.11 of the Regulation for asbestos training requirements).
Other requirements
The BC Building Code and various municipal bylaws also have requirements regarding demolition procedures. The owner or employer should
check with the appropriate local authority for further details.
10 Steps to Compliance with Asbestos Abatement Requirements
Most asbestos-containing materials were phased out by the early 1990s. However, asbestos has been found in a few types of construction
materials in relatively new buildings (as recently as 2018). The qualified person must use their education, training, and experience to determine a
sampling strategy.

(1) A home or building is to be demolished, renovated, or salvaged.

↓
(2) The building owner (or owner's representative) and the employer (e.g., builder, demolition contractor) retains a qualified person (a certified
asbestos surveyor) to perform a risk assessment and asbestos survey before conducting work where asbestos may be disturbed.
↓
(3) The qualified person inspects the home or building, collects representative bulk samples, and has the samples analyzed by a qualified
laboratory.
↓
(4) The qualified person prepares a report that identifies all inspection results (including drawings, plans, or specifications), the results of the risk
assessment, and the scope of work for abatement of the asbestos.
↓
(5) The report containing the inspection results is provided to the owner or employer. The inspection results must be available at the worksite.
↓
(6) The owner or employer retains a licensed asbestos abatement contractor with certified workers. A Notice of Project (NOP) form with
written work procedures is submitted to WorkSafeBC 48 hours before asbestos removal work begins.
↓
(7) Safe removal and disposal of identified asbestos occurs.
↓
(8) After the asbestos removal, the owner or employer receives written confirmation that the asbestos specified for removal on the NOP has
been safely removed. A copy of the inspection report is available on site.
↓
(9) The owner authorizes demolition, renovation, or salvage work on the home or building to proceed. The contractor proceeds with the work
using safe work procedures. Copies of inspection results and post-abatement reports are available on site.
↓
(10) If any material suspected to be asbestos is found during demolition, renovation, or salvage work, all work is to cease. Go back to step 2 and
retain a qualified person so that, if confirmed to be asbestos, the material is safely containe or removed by following steps 2-8.
Guidelines Part 20 - Work in Compressed Air

G20.123 Alternate acceptable standard

Issued February 11, 2021

Regulatory excerpt
Section 20.123 of the OHS Regulation ("Regulation") states:
The employer must ensure that equipment and work processes carried out at an air pressure greater than 7 kPa (1 psi) above
atmospheric pressure meet the requirements of CSA Standard CAN/CSA Z275.3-M86, Occupational Safety Code for
Construction Work in Compressed Air.
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation states:
(2) When this Regulation requires a person to comply with
(a) a publication, code or standard of the Board or another agency, the person may, as an alternative, comply with another
publication, code or standard acceptable to the Board …
Purpose of guideline
Section 4.4(2)(a) of the Regulation provides WorkSafeBC the authority to accept alternative standards to those listed in the Regulation. The
purpose of this guideline is to specify the 2009 version of CSA Z275.3 as an acceptable alternative standard under section 20.123.
Alternative standard
The CSA Standard CAN/CSA Z275.3-09, Occupational safety code for work in compressed air environments is accepted as an alternative
standard.
Table of Contents: WCB Standards
WCB Standard: G601 Heavy Duty Backstops for Logs and Rocks
WCB Standard: G602 Log Loader and Log Yarder Raised Cabs
WCB Standard: G603 Heavy Duty Guards for Windows
WCB Standard: G604 Light Duty Guards for Windows
WCB Standard: G605 Mobile Equipment Half-Doors
WCB Standard: G606 Boom Boat Operator Protective Structures
WCB Standard: G607 Medium Duty Screen Guard (Front End Log Loader)
WCB Standard: G608 Mobile Equipment Roof Structures — Heavy Duty
WCB Standard: G609 Mobile Equipment Roof Structures — Light Duty
Schedule 4-A WorkSafeBC Standard — Guardrails Using Rope or Other Non-rigid Material
WCB Standard: LDR 1-2004 Job Built Ladders
WCB Standard: PPE 1 — 1997 Leg Protective Devices
* Only applies to leg protection devices manufactured prior to February 1, 2011.
Schedule 8-A WorkSafeBC Standard — Leg Protective Devices
Applies to leg protection devices manufactured after February 1, 2011.
WCB Standard: PPE 2 High Visibility Garment — Personal Protective Equipment Standard 2
WorkSafeBC Standard 13.30 Work Platforms Supported by Lift Trucks
WCB Standard: A324 Forklift Mounted Work Platforms
* Only applies to platforms built prior to April 1998
Schedule 14-A WorkSafeBC Standard 14.116 Chimney Hoists
WCB Standard: WPL 1-2004 Design, Construction and Use of Wood Frame Scaffolds
WCB Standard: WPL 2-2004 Design, Construction and Use of Crane Supported Work Platforms
WCB Standard: WPL 3-2004 Safety Factor and Minimum Breaking Strength for Suspended Work Platforms and Associated Components

Retired Standards
The following WCB standards have been retired:
WCB Standard: A321 Self-Propelled Elevating Work Platforms has been replaced by CSA Standard CAN3-B354.3-M82, Self-Propelled
Elevating Work Platforms for Use as "Off-Slab" Unit and CSA Standard CAN3-B354.2-M82, Self-Propelled Elevating Work Platforms
for Use on Paved/Slab Surfaces
WCB Standard: A322 Elevating Rolling Scaffolds has been replaced by CSA Standard CAN3-B354.1-M82, Elevating Rolling Work
Platforms
WCB Standard: A323 Work Platforms Mounted on Industrial Lift Trucks has been replaced by ANSI Standard ASME B56.1-1993, Safety
Standard for Low Lift and High Lift Trucks
WCB Standard: A326 Design, Construction and Use of Suspended Platforms
WCB Standard OFA1: Certification of Occupational First Aid Attendants has been replaced by OHS Guidelines G3.15(b)-1 to G3.15(c),
G3.17.1 and G3.21(2).
WCB Standard: PPE 14.1 Leg Protection For Chain Saw Users (Agricultural Operations only)
WCB Standard: G601 Heavy Duty Backstops for Logs and Rocks
See Schedule 16-A in Part 16 of the OHS Regulation.
WCB Standard: G602 Log Loader and Log Yarder Raised Cabs, March 1990
© Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced, or distributed for profit or other
commercial enterprise, nor may any part be incorporated into any other publication, without written permission of the Workers' Compensation Board of B.C.

1. General

1.1. Scope
This standard pertains to log loaders and log yarders, and other mobile equipment where the operator may be exposed to hazard caused by
intruding or flying objects, such as whipping cables, loose debris, snags, tree trunks, limbs, etc. It is supplementary to G601 Standard for Log
Loader and Log Yarder Backstops, and is supplemented by G603 Standard for Log Loader and Log Yarder Window Guards.
1.2. Purpose
This standard is intended to describe the minimum requirements for the design and selection of plates, framework and supports for raised cabs on
equipment without a backstop. This will form and provide a protective structure for the operator inside the cab.

2. Design Principles and Assumptions

The following points are stated to clarify the underlying principles and assumptions of this Standard.
2.1.
A static force resistance design criteria is stipulated to ensure that intruding or flying objects will not deflect the cab beyond a certain limit.
2.2.
Also included is an energy design criterion, since in an actual situation involving flying objects, loading will be dynamic and possibly impact. Hence
the adequacy of the structure is related more to energy absorption capability and details of weld design and welding procedure rather than static
strength.
2.3.
The recommended design horizontal and vertical force will not necessarily duplicate the force imparted by an actual flying object such as trees,
whipping cables, etc.
2.4.
As the cab elevation is increased, the vertical load requirement § 3.1.1 may be reduced accordingly.
2.5.
It is assumed that if the cab/structure can resist a force of W (Appendix A), then it will have adequate resistance to whipping cables. A
magnification factor has been incorporated into the formulae to compensate for very small logs, because in such cases, other factors such as flying
debris or cables may govern. In any case, W used for design purposes should not be less than 9000 N (2000 lb).
2.6.
Although cabs meeting these criteria may not deflect within the Deflection Limiting Volume (DLV See SAE J397a) under all circumstances, it is a
minimum requirement for the Cab Protective Structure to have a "Crush Protection" design capability to withstand the force exerted on it by a
hypothetical blunt log striking end-on at a velocity of 11 km/hr.
2.7.
Furthermore, there is an impact or strength requirement which is intended to ensure that all members of the cab will have adequate resistance to
brittle fracture under cold temperatures.
2.8.
Finally, there is a visibility requirement which is to ensure that the operator's vision will not be seriously obstructed.
2.9.
The operator protective structure can be an integral part of a cab or can be a "cage" outside an existing cab. Hereinafter the term "Cab Protective
Structure" shall mean any guard that envelopes the cab or any guard that forms part of a cab. (See Appendix D.)

3. Design Loads
3.1. Vertical Load Requirement

2.5 x Wxi
Force Resistance Fv = units N, m
H
8.25 x Wxi
Fv = units lb, ft
H

H = distance from grade to top of Cab Protective Structure.

W = weight of log handled as defined in Appendix A.
Fv = vertical equivalent static force.
i = impact factor as defined in Appendix B or other acceptable method.

Energy Absorption Ev = 0.152 W units N, J

Ev = 6W units lb, lb-in

Ev = ultimate energy to be absorbed by the frame at the point of impact. (J), (lb-in).
3.2. Lateral Load Requirement

FL = equivalent lateral static force, where FL is greater than the tipping force, then FL may be reduced to that of the tipping force.

4. Design Requirements

4.1. Frame
4.1.1
All frame members of the Cab Protective Structure shall be designed to resist the applied load in accordance with Appendix C or with some other
acceptable design criteria to the Board.
4.1.2
In addition, the frame shall be designed to absorb the impact energy as given by Ev and EL of § 3.1.1 to § 3.1.2.

4.2. Cab Skin

All exposed unguarded sides of the cab should be protected with metal plates
or other suitable material. They shall be designed to resist the FL as defined in § 3.1.2.

4.3. Supports
The cab protective structure shall be secured to the structural parts of the (carrier) main frame of the log loader or log yarder. Such structural parts
shall be adequately reinforced if necessary to resist the loads imposed on them by the cab protective structure.
4.4. Fastenings
If bolts and nuts are used in the fabrication of the guard, they shall conform to or exceed the ASTM Designation A325 Requirements.
4.5. Visibility Requirements
The cab shall be equipped with adequate view areas. All such view areas shall be guarded in accordance with WCB G603 Standard for Log
Loader and Log Yarder Window Guards.
4.6. Impact Strength Requirement
All members of the guard shall be made of material with good impact absorbing properties. The following guideline may be used:
Examples of steel meeting or exceeding the above requirements:
ASTM A36, CSA G40.21 33G, 44W - for plates, bars and angles.
 CSA G40.21 50W - for HSS. (Hollow Structural Sections)
4.7. Weldment
Weldments shall conform to applicable sections of General Specification for Welding of Steel Structures, CSA W59.1-1970 (or latest revision
thereof) and shall be performed by licensed welders only.
4.8. Alternate Exit
The operator protective structure shall be provided with an alternate exit. Such exit shall have a minimum clear opening of 60 cm diameter (24").
4.9. Glazing
Only safety glass or other suitable material with similar shatter-resistant characteristics shall be used for window areas.
4.10. Sound Isolation and Absorption
The cab interior shall have a sound level reading of not more than 80 db under normal working conditions and with all openings closed. Flammable
sound absorption material should be avoided.

APPENDIX "A"

Derivation of W.

The symbol "W" represents weight of the heaviest log expected to be handled by the log yarder or loader. For the purpose or this standard, g
(density of logs) should be assigned a value of 560 kg/m3 (35 pcf) which is the arithmetic mean of the common species found in B.C. The
following formula may be used to compute the expected weight of incoming logs:

DB = butt end diameter m, ft.

DT = top end diameter m, ft.

L = average length of logs handled, m, ft.

g = density of logs handled kg/m3, pcf.

APPENDIX "B"

Impact Factor* (i)

v = velocity of approaching log.

ΔST = static deflection of guard member due to weight of approaching log.

g = acceleration due to gravity (32 ft/sec2 or 9.8m/sec2).

* Other acceptable method may be used.

APPENDIX "C"
WCB Standard: G603 Heavy Duty Guards for Windows
See Schedule 16-B in Part 16 of the OHS Regulation.
WCB Standard: G604 Light Duty Guards for Windows
See Schedule 16-C in Part 16 of the OHS Regulation.
WCB Standard: G605 Mobile Equipment Half-Doors, March 1990
© Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced, or distributed for profit or other
commercial enterprise, nor may any part be incorporated into any other publication, without written permission of the Workers' Compensation Board of B.C.

1. General

1.1. Scope
This standard pertains to any rubber-tired skidders employed in the skidding of logs or tree lengths where the operator may be exposed to flying
or other intruding objects.
1.2. Supplementary References
This standard is supplemented by G604 WCB Standard for Light-Duty Screens.
1.3. Purpose
This standard is intended to describe the minimum requirements for the design and selection of structural elements such as plates, stiffeners, sheer
deflectors, spring latches or hinges for the half-door.

2. Design Requirements

2.1. General Location

A half-door shall be installed on both side entrances to the control area.
2.2. Dimensions
2.2.1
The entrance opening width shall be a minimum of 46 cm (18 inches). Recommended opening width is 70 cm (27 inches).
2.2.2
The door height shall be a minimum of 60 cm (25 inches) from the floor and having the top of the door at least 25 cm (10 inches) above the cab
seat.
2.3. Character (Distinctive Qualities)
2.3.1
The half-door should not sweep the area of the platform or the steps on which the operator must stand to open the door. It shall sweep outward
from the cab.
2.3.2
The half-door shall be equipped with a device to cause it to return to its closed position automatically. Also, a latch, preferably of pressure
sensitive type should be used to lock the door.
2.3.3
There should be sufficient clearance between the maximum radius of door sweep and the rubber tires of the mobile equipment.
2.3.4
A sheer deflector or stiffener shall be installed on the exterior top edge of the door to act as a deflector/stopper for objects propelled upward.
2.4. Static Strength
2.4.1
The top edge of the door shall be reinforced by a ledge, (sheer deflector), a structural element capable of withstanding a concentrated force of
17800 N (4,000 lbs.) applied at 45° to the horizontal.
2.4.2
Any area of the door shall be designed to resist a 17800 N (4000 lb) static force applied over an area of 62 cm2 (9.6 in2).
2.4.3
The hinges, stops and supports shall be adequately designed and fabricated to resist any loads that the door would likely impose upon them. The
entire door assembly shall be designed to resist a static force of 17800 N (4,000 lbs.) without causing the door to spring open. On vehicles
equipped with a ROPS (Rollover Protective Structure), the door-supporting elements may be attached to parts of the ROPS providing such
attachment does not adversely affect the performance of the ROPS. This is contingent on approval by a registered professional engineer.
2.4.4
Weldments shall conform to applicable sections of General Specifications for Welding of Steel Structures CSA W59.1-1970 or most recent
version and should be performed by qualified welders only.
2.5. Impact Strength Requirement
All members of the half-door shall be fabricated of material with good impact absorbing properties. The following guideline may be used:
Low carbon content - maximum .28%
High manganese-carbon ratio
Low phosphorus content
Fine grain size
Heat treated
High ultimate energy resistance (Notch tough steel possessing acceptable impact properties)
Examples of steel meeting or exceeding the above requirements:
ASTM A36 or CSA G40.21-38W - for bars, angles and plate
CSA G40.21 42W, 55W - for HSS (Hollow Structural Sections) (CSA G40.16 and G40.17)

3. Structural Details Guidelines

The following recommendations may be used in lieu of clause 2.4.1 and clause 2.4.2
3.1.
Minimum ledge beam size shall be 2 x 2 x .188 HSS, CSA G40.21 42W.
3.2.
Door - steel plate 5 mm (3/16") minimum.
3.3.
Minimum intermediate stiffener size shall be L 2 x 2 x 3/16 CSA G40.21 33W.
3.4.
Maximum spacing of stiffeners is six inches, when L 2 x 2 x 3/16 is used.

WCB Standard: G606 Boom Boat Operator Protective Structures, March 1990
© Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced, or distributed for profit or other
commercial enterprise, nor may any part be incorporated into any other publication, without written permission of the Workers' Compensation Board of B.C.

1. General

1.1. Scope
This standard pertains to any vessel used to push or pull logs, booms, bundles or bags in booming ground operation where the operator may be
exposed to collision with water-borne logs. Examples of such vessels are dozers, side winders, boom scooters and tugs.
1.2. Purpose
This standard is intended to describe the minimum requirements for the design and selection of window guards, plates, framework and supports for
a cab which will form and provide a protective structure for the operator occupying same.

2. Design Principles and Assumptions

The following points are stated to clarify the underlying principles and assumptions of this standard.
2.1.
The stiffness of the vessel is assumed to be in direct proportion to W x GM x SIN q were W is the weight of vessel, GM is the metacentric height,
and q is the angle of heel.
2.2.
The stiffness of the operator protective structure is assumed to be very much higher than the vessel's heeling resistance. Hence the stiffness of the
entire system is approximately equal to the heeling resistance of the vessel.
2.3.
It is assumed that the elements of the operator protective structure would be arranged in such a way to elastically deflect the projectile rather than
arresting its motion.
2.4.
The derivation of the peak collision force is based on linear elastic collisions.
2.5.
It is a minimum requirement for the protective structure to have a "crush protection design capability" to withstand the force exerted on it by a
hypothetical blunt log 1 m x 12 m (3 feet x 40 feet) striking end-on at a velocity of 1.5 m/s (5 fps).
Furthermore, there is an impact or strength requirement which is intended to ensure that all members of the cab will have adequate resistance to
brittle fracture under cold temperatures.
2.6.
Finally, there is a visibility requirement which is to ensure that the operator's vision will not be seriously obstructed.
2.7.
The operator protective structure can be an integral part of a cab or it can be a "cage" outside an existing structure.

3. Design Loads

3.1.
Imperial Units

3.2.

Metric Units
W = weight of vessel, lbs. or N.
CM = distance from metacentric to hypothetic point of impact, ft. or meters, CM must not be less than 2.1 m (7 ft.).
F = dynamic design load, lbs. or N, less than or equal to the capsizing force.

4. Design Requirements

4.1. Frame
All frame members of the cab protective structure shall be designed to resist the applied load in accordance with clause 3.0 or with some other
design criteria acceptable to the Board.
4.2. Cab Skin
All exposed unguarded sides of the cab shall be protected with metal plates or other suitable material. They shall be designed to resist the force as
defined in clause 3.0.
4.3. Supports
The cab protective structure shall be secured to the structural parts of the vessel. Such structural parts shall be adequately reinforced to resist the
loads imposed on them by the cab protective structure.
4.4. Fastenings
If bolts and nuts are used in the fabrication of the guard, they shall conform to or exceed the ASTM designation A325 requirements.
4.5. Visibility Requirements
The cab shall be equipped with adequate view areas. All such view areas shall be guarded by vertical members spaced at intervals of not more
than 6 inches. These vertical members shall be designed to assist the force as defined in clause 3.1.
If flat bars are used as vertical elements, they should be in a radiating pattern to minimize interference with the operator's line of sight.
4.6. Impact Strength Requirement
All members of the half-door shall be fabricated of material with good impact absorbing properties. The following guideline may be used:
low carbon content - maximum .28%
high manganese - carbon ratio
low phosphorous content
fine grain size
 heat treated
high ultimate energy resistance (Note: tough steel possessing acceptable impact properties)
Examples of steel meeting or exceeding the above requirements:
ASTM A36 or CSA G40.21 - 38W for bars, angles and plate
CSA G40.21 42W, 55W for HSS (Hollow Structural Sections) (CSA G40.16 and G40.17)
4.7. Weldment
Weldments shall conform to the applicable sections of general specifications for welding of steel structures, CSA W59.1-1970(or latest revision
thereof) and shall be performed by licensed welders only.
4.8. Alternate Exit
The operator protective structure shall be provided with an alternate exit. Such exit shall have a minimum clear opening of 60 cm (24 inch)
diameter.
4.9. Glazing (optional)
Only safety glass or other suitable material with similar shatter-resistant characteristics shall be used for window areas and such glazing materials
shall be positioned at least 20 cm (4 inches) away from the window guard.

5. Minimum Sizes

The following recommended sizes and dimensions may be used in lieu of the design load criteria, clause 3.0.
5.1.
Minimum grid element size shall be 3/4" diameter steel rods or equivalent where a 1 1/4 x 1 1/4 x 0.10 HSS intermediate stiffener is used.
5.2.
Grid element size shall be proportionately increased as the dimension of the guard increases.
5.3.
Minimum column size shall be 3 x 3 x 0.125 HSS depending on the slope and length of the columns. 3 x 3 x 0.25 HSS is strongly recommended.
5.4.
Minimum roof beam size shall be 3 x 3 x 0.125 HSS.
5.5.
Minimum "cab skin" plate size shall be 11 ga to 16 ga depending on the size of intermediate stiffeners used.
5.6.
Gusset plates shall be incorporated where necessary.
5.7.
Materials with equal or better properties may be used in place of those stipulated in this Standard.

G606A BOOMBOAT O.P.S.

G606B TOWBIT GUARD

Back to Top
WCB Standard: G607 Medium Duty Screen Guard (Front End Log Loader), March 1990
© Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced, or distributed for profit or other
commercial enterprise, nor may any part be incorporated into any other publication, without written permission of the Workers' Compensation Board of B.C.

1. General

1.1. Scope
This standard pertains to front end log loaders - mobile machines mounted on a wheeled or tracked chassis, equipped with a front mounted
grapple, tusk, or fork-lift device and employed in the loading, unloading, stacking, sorting or handling of logs, used only in dry land sorting areas.
For other applications, please refer to G603 Standards for Log Loader and Log Yarder Window Guards.
1.2. Purpose
This standard is intended to describe the minimum requirements for the design and selection of rod-size, framework and supports for guards over
window areas of operator's cab.

2. Location of screen guards

2.1.
Front screen guard shall be provided in the area in front of the operator and shall at least extend the full height of all glazing surfaces.
2.2.
Rear screen guard, where necessary and applicable, shall be provided in the area behind the operator.
2.3.
All guards shall be positioned at least four inches away from the glazed windows.

3. Design Requirements

3.1. Strength Requirements

3.1.1 Grid Element
Each vertical element shall be designed to withstand a minimum concentrated point load of 300 lbs. being applied at a location producing the
greatest critical stresses. There should be at least three vertical elements.
3.1.2 Perimeter Frame
The outer frame shall consist of sections with the following section modulus:

S = edge beam section modulus (cm3) (in3)

W = dimension of guard (cm) (in)
f = allowable working stress MPa (psi)
3.1.3 Supports
The perimeter frame shall be secured to the structural parts of the cab. Such structural parts shall be adequately designed and constructed to resist
all loads imposed on them by the guards.
On the front end loaders equipped with a rollover protective structure (ROPS), the screen guards may be attached to parts of the ROPS,
provided that such attachment does not adversely affect the performance of the ROPS. All such attachments shall be clamped unless welding is
permitted by the ROPS manufacturer or a registered professional engineer.
3.1.4 Fastenings
If nuts and bolts are used in the fabrication of the guard, they shall conform to or exceed the ASTM Designation A325 requirements.
3.2. Impact Strength Requirement
All members of the guard shall be made of material with good impact absorbing properties. The following guideline may be used:
Low carbon content (less than 0.28%)
High ratio of manganese to carbon
Low phosphorous content
Fine grain size
Heat treated
High ultimate energy resistance
Examples of steel meeting or exceeding the above requirements:
ASTM A36, CSA G40.21 33G, 44W - for plates, bars and angles.
CSA 40.21 50W - for HSS (Hollow Structural Sections)
4. Visibility Requirement
Minimum interference with operator's visibility shall be one of the governing criteria in the design and positioning of the vertical members of the
guard. If flat bars are used as grid elements, they should be in a radiating pattern in line with the operator's line of sight. The clearance between
vertical elements shall not be greater than eight inches.
5. Minimum Recommended Sizes
Vertical elements cross-section size should not be less than 19 mm (3/4") diameter mild steel rod or 16 mm (5/8") square rod.
The openings between adjacent vertical members should not be greater than eight inches.
The perimeter frame cross-section size should not be less than 2 x 2 x .150 square hollow structural section (HSS) 50,000 psi yield or 3 x 3
x 5/16 square angle, 36,000 psi yield.
6. Weldment
Weldments shall conform to applicable sections of General Specification for Welding of Steel Structures, CSA W59.1-1970 (or latest revision
thereof) and shall be performed by licensed welders only.

Typical Design
For Illustration Only
WCB Standard: G608 Mobile Equipment Roof Structures - Heavy Duty, March 1990
© Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced, or distributed for profit or other
commercial enterprise, nor may any part be incorporated into any other publication, without written permission of the Workers' Compensation Board of B.C.

1. General

1.1. Scope
This standard pertains to mobile industrial or logging equipment where the operator may be exposed to hazards caused by falling objects such as
tree trunks, snags, limbs, rocks, etc. It is also supplementary to G602 Standard for Log Loader and Log Yarder Raised Cabs.
1.2. Purpose
This standard is intended to describe the minimum requirements for the design and selection of plates and stiffeners for roof construction. Refer to
the aforementioned G602 Standard for details on substructure construction.

2. Design Criteria

2.1. Option One - Testing Method

The roof shall be designed to meet the Minimum Performance Criteria for Falling Object Protective Structure (FOPS) - SAE J231.
2.2. Option Two - Analytical Methods
The roof shall be designed to absorb 11500 J (8,500 ft-lb) of impact energy without allowing a projectile measuring 20 cm (8 in) in diameter to
penetrate into the DLV as defined in SAE J397a.
2.3. Option Three - Minimum Recommended Size
The roof shall be designed in accordance with the minimum recommended size as outlined in §4.0.

3. Design Requirements

3.1. Superstructure of Roof

The superstructure shall be designed in accordance with the design criteria as outlined in §2.0.
3.2. Substructure of Roof
All frame members and supports of the Cab Protective Structure shall be designed to resist the applied load in accordance with G602. This applies
to all mobile equipment covered by G602. Equipment covered by SAE J1040 shall be designed in accordance with SAE J1040 or its equivalent.
3.3. Alternate Exit
The operator protective structure shall be provided with an alternate exit. Such exit shall have a minimum clear opening of 60 cm (24 in) diameter.
3.4. Impact Strength Requirement
All members of the guard shall be made of material with good impact absorbing properties. The following guideline may be used:
Low carbon content (less than 0.28%)
High ratio of manganese to carbon
Low phosphorous content
Fine grain size
Heat treated
High ultimate energy resistance
Examples of steel meeting or exceeding the above requirements:
CSA G40.21 33G, 44W - for plates, bars and angles
CSA G40.21 50W - for HSS (Hollow Structural Sections)
3.5. Weldments
Weldments shall conform to applicable sections of General Specification for welding of Steel Structures, CSA W59.1-1970 (or latest revision
thereof) and shall be performed by licensed welders only.

4. Minimum Recommended Sizes

4.1. Option One - Plate Method

The following are designed on the assumption that stiffeners will be used to limit the unstiffened areas not to exceed 700 sq. in. (4516 sq. cm)
4.1.1
Minimum thickness of roof plate shall be 3/16 in. (4.76 mm)
4.1.2
Minimum section modulus of stiffeners used shall be 0.19 in3, (3.11 cm3) i.e. L 2 x 2 x 3/16
4.2. Option Two - Grid Method
Minimum rod size shall be 3/4 inch round bars or 5/8 inch square bars. Each grid opening shall not be greater than 413 cm2 (64 square inches.) A
light gauge roof plate is recommended in conjunction with the grid.
WCB Standard: G609 Mobile Equipment Roof Structures - Light Duty, March 1990
© Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced, or distributed for profit or other
commercial enterprise, nor may any part be incorporated into any other publication, without written permission of the Workers' Compensation Board of B.C.

1. General

1.1. Scope
This Standard pertains to mobile industrial equipment exposed to hazards from falling objects such as bricks, concrete blocks, and hand tools that
may fall from relatively low heights encountered in operations such as highway maintenance or landscaping and other services on construction sites.
1.2. Purpose
This standard is intended to describe the minimum requirement for the design and selection of plates for roof construction.

2. Design Criteria

2.1. Option One - Testing Method

The roof shall be designed to the Minimum Performance Criteria for Falling Object Protective Structure (FOPS) for Industrial Equipment - SAE
J1043.
2.2. Option Two - Minimum Recommended Size
The roof shall be designed in accordance with the minimum recommended size as outlined in §4.0.

3. Design Requirements
3.1.
The roof plate shall be designed in accordance with the design criteria as outlined in §2.0.
3.2.
All frame members and supports of the Cab Protective Structure shall be designed to resist the applied load. Equipment covered by SAE J1040
shall be designed in accordance with SAE J1040 or its equivalent.
3.3. Weldments
Weldments shall conform to applicable sections of General Specifications for welding of Steel Structures, CSA W59.1-1970 (or latest revision
thereof) and shall be performed by licensed welders only.

4. Minimum Recommended Sizes

Minimum thickness of roof plate shall be 10 ga, equivalent to 3.4 mm (0.1345 in).

The above is designed on the assumption that stiffeners will be used to limit the unstiffened areas not to exceed 7740 cm2 (1200 in2).
Back to Top
WCB Standard: LDR 1-2004 Job Built Ladders
© Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced, or distributed for profit or other
commercial enterprise, nor may any part be incorporated into any other publication, without written permission of the Workers' Compensation Board of B.C.

1. Scope

This Standard only applies to portable wooden ladders built for use by workers at a job site. This Standard does not apply to ladders which
change ownership through sale or otherwise.
Figure 1: Job Built Ladder up to 5 m (16 ft.) Long

2. Design

A portable wooden ladder made at the job site must meet the following minimum requirements.
2.1 Side rails
(c) must not be notched, dapped, tapered or spliced. (2) The distance between the inner faces of the side rails must not be less than 38 cm (15 in)
nor more than 50 cm (20 in). 2.2 Rungs
(1) Rungs must be at least
(a) 19 mm x 64 mm (1 in x 3 in nominal) for ladder lengths up to 5 m (16 ft), and
(b) 19 mm x 89 mm (1 in x 4 in nominal) for ladder lengths from 5 m to 7.3 m (16 ft to 24 ft).
(2) Rungs must be
 (a) spaced at 30 cm (12 in) centres, and
(b) nailed directly onto the smaller surfaces of the side rails, using three 57 mm (2¼ in) wire nails on each end of the 89 mm (4 in)
rungs, and two nails on each end of the 64 mm (3 in) rungs.
(3) The spaces on the side rails between the rungs must be filled with close fitting and well secured filler pieces that are the same thickness
as the rungs.
(4) A double rung ladder must have 3 rails evenly spaced, and be 107 cm to 127 cm (42 in to 50 in) wide, and have continuous rungs which
extend the full width of the ladder.

3. Ladder components and coating

(1) Ladder components made from timber materials must be

(a) from lumber graded Number 2 or better and species to be limited to Douglas fir-larch, hemlock-fir, spruce-pine-fir, or coast Sitka
spruce; and
(b) graded to National Lumber Grades Authority Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, or other grading rules
acceptable to the board.
(2) A protective coating applied to a wooden ladder, other than a small amount for identification purposes, must be transparent to allow any
defects to be discovered by inspection.
Back to Top
WCB Standard: PPE 1 - 1997 Leg Protective Devices (Amended January 2008)
© Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced, or distributed for profit or other
commercial enterprise, nor may any part be incorporated into any other publication, without written permission of the Workers' Compensation Board of B.C.

1. Scope

This standard provides specifications and performance criteria for leg protection for a worker using a chainsaw.

2. Definitions

Leg protection means personal protective equipment worn for protection from leg injury due to contact with a moving saw chain.

3. Types

Pant type - the protection material is secured to and held in position by the trousers.
Apron type - the protection material is secured to an apron style garment normally worn outside the trousers and secured around the worker's legs
and waist.
Chap type - the protection material is secured to a chap style garment normally worn outside the trousers and secured around the worker's legs.

4. General Requirements

4.1
Leg protection must be of materials suitable for the intended application. The use of the leg protection must not unduly restrict the manoeuvrability
of the worker. Leg protection must not shrink more than 10% when cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions during its service
life.
4.2
The protective material of leg protection must be at least 711 mm (28 in) long and a width covering 180° in the front of both legs from inseam to
outseam plus 100 mm (4 in) on the left side of both legs.
If the 28" length requirement results in a tripping hazard, the protective pad can be shorter, as long as it covers an area extending from the crotch to
within 75 mm (3 in) of the centre of the ankle. (As amended August 2002).
4.3
When leg protection is worn by a worker, the protective material must extend at minimum from the crotch to within 75 mm (3 in) of the ankle. The
protective material must be effectively secured in this position.
4.4
Effective measures must be taken to prevent unravelling or fraying of material along any edges or other area where unravelling or fraying is likely to
occur.
NOTE: When a "heat seal" is used to control unravelling or fraying of synthetic fibres, the "heat seal" must be effective over the life of the product.
A heat seal subject to cracking must be covered to prevent abrasion of the wearer's skin.
5. Performance Requirements

5.1
Leg protection must meet the requirements of the "Threshold Chain Speed" Test. Tests must be done on leg protection samples assembled in the
manner which the leg protection will be produced for distribution.
5.2 "Threshold Chain Speed" Test
NOTE: The threshold chain speed is the chain speed at which rapid cut-through occurs and below which cut-through consistently requires 1.01
seconds or more.
5.2.1
When tested, as described in clause 5.2.2, leg protection must have a threshold chain speed of 1098 m/min (3,600 ft/min) or more.
5.2.2 Test Method
5.2.2.1
The test apparatus must have
(a) a simulated "leg" made of wood approximately 150 mm (6 in) in diameter with a 20 mm (¾ in) layer of resilient covering (Ensolite or
similar material) attached to simulate the resilience of flesh, and designed to allow the leg protection to be mounted and tested similar to the
configuration the leg protection will take when worn by a worker while his leg is "straight",
(b) the "leg" must be mounted to allow rotation about the longitudinal axis of up to 75 mm (3 in) at the outer circumference, against an
applied torque. (See Figure 1). The torque applied must be at least 1.7 Newton-metres (15 inch-pounds) and may increase as the leg
rotates,

(c) a chainsaw with Oregon 72 LP chisel chain and capable of a chain speed of at least 1,220 meter/min (4,000 ft/min). The chainsaw must
pivot in a vertical plane to contact the "leg" (see Figure 1) with a downward force of 50 ± 1 Newtons (11 ± 0.1 lb), and
(d) instrumentation to measure and record chain speed and cut-through time.
5.2.2.2
The test procedure is
(a) start the saw and set the chain speed to the constant level selected for the test cut.
(b) the bottom of the running saw chain must freefall 6 mm (¼ in) onto the test specimen mounted on the "leg",
(c) the time from contact of the saw chain with the test specimen must be recorded to the nearest 0.01 second. The chain speed during each
test must also be recorded,
(d) successive trials must be done on the same material until the maximum chain speed (± 15 metres/min or ± 50 ft/min) at which cut-
through does not occur for at least 1.01 seconds or more is determined. This will be the threshold chain speed for the tested material.
(e) the chainsaw must be maintained in good repair and the saw cutters kept sharp in accordance with the saw chain manufacturer's
recommendations.

6. Identification

Leg protection must be permanently marked on the exterior of the leg protection with characters at least 6 mm (¼ in) high to show the
manufacturer's name or recognized trademark, the design specification standard, and the performance standard and level met by the protective
material. The year of manufacture must be included on a label or be otherwise marked on the garment.
NOTE: The label must include garment level of performance. Some sample wording is "Meets WCB of BC PPE 1, 1997[3600]" or "Meets
WCB of BC PPE 1, 1997-ASTM F1414-04[CS50-3300]" or "Meets WCB of BC PPE 1, 1997-ISO 11393-2 Class 2" or "Meets WCB of
BC PPE 1, 1997-EN 381-5 (1995)[Class 2]" or similar wording.
For example, a garment that is manufactured to the design specification of the WCB PPE 1 standard and meets the performance requirements for
Class 2 garments in the ISO 11393-2 standard could incorporate a garment label as follows:
7. Care and Maintenance

7.1
Instructions on the proper care, maintenance and repair of leg protection must be provided by the manufacturer.
7.2
Leg protection which shows damage which will affect its performance must be removed from service.
NOTE: Test procedures and ratings for threshold chain speed may differ depending on the standard referenced; however performance in the field
may be similar. Comparisons of performance are best made by comparison of threshold chain speed numbers obtained using the same test
method. Under these circumstances, the higher the chain speed the greater the cut protection.
WCB Standard: PPE 2 High Visibility Garment - Personal Protective Equipment Standard 2
© Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced, or distributed for profit or other
commercial enterprise, nor may any part be incorporated into any other publication, without written permission of the Workers' Compensation Board of B.C.

This following standard outlines minimum requirements for three types of high visibility garments acceptable to the Workers' Compensation Board
of British Columbia.

In this standard, the following definitions apply:

Background: The part of the garment visible either from the front or the back of the garment when the fully assembled garment is laid flat for
inspection, not including the area of the VE trim.
Coefficient of Retroreflection: The fraction of incident light reflected by a retroreflective surface per unit area. The unit of measurement is candelas
per foot candle per square foot as measured at 0.2 degrees observation angle and -4.0 degrees entrance angle measured in accordance with
ASTM E809 - "Standard Practice for Measuring Photometric Characteristics of Retroreflectors".
Fluorescent Material: A material that absorbs ultraviolet radiation in daylight and emits it in the visible light region. This property allows the material
to radiate more visible light than is incident on it. Therefore, it looks and is brighter than a non-fluorescent material which, at best, can reflect all the
visible light that falls on it.
Retroreflective Material: A material that reflects light back to the same direction as the source of the light.
Type 1: Vest, shirt or other similar garment worn on the torso with a fluorescent background and attached VE trim.
Type 2: Jacket, coat, coverall or other garment with a bright colored background and attached VE trim.
Type 3: A harness type garment worn on the torso, fabricated from parallel strips of contrasting colors. The harness has fluorescent and
retroreflective properties.
VE Trim: Visibility enhancing trim attached to the garment. The trim has fluorescent and retroreflective properties.

Application

This standard does not apply to firefighters. High visibility garments for firefighters is provided for in the standard NFPA 1971, "Standard on
Protective Clothing for Structural Firefighters".

Requirements Applying To All Types of High Visibility Garments

The background material in fluorescent or bright color in yellow, orange or red must meet the chromaticity coordinates and minimum luminance
factor specified in Table 1.
No part of the garment may melt, separate or ignite when subjected to 500 degrees Fahrenheit air temperature for 5 minutes for high visibility
garment used in environments where exposure to elevated temperatures or open flames is possible.
Where a worker is engaged in welding or burning operations, the high visibility garment must be made from flame retardant materials.
In an environment where loose fitting clothing may be caught by moving equipment or other stationary objects, high visibility garments must have
"tear away" properties. An example of this is the use of VelcroTM strips for the fastening of the garment.

Where high visibility garments are used in potentially explosive environments, VelcroTM strips must not be used due to static electricity concerns.
All high visibility garments must be worn outside of all other clothing and must be fully fastened closed.
If the background material is of open weave construction the largest dimension in the openings of the background material must not exceed 3.2 mm
(1/8 inch).
VE trim must not be of open weave construction.
VE trim must:
1. Have a smooth flat exterior finish.
2. Be securely attached to the garment.
3. Be applied so that it is visible on the side of the garment when worn.
There must be a minimum of 77 square centimeters (12 square inches) of VE trim within a defined area below the arm hole. The
defined area below the arm hole consists of a 152 mm (6 inch) wide vertical strip centered about the center line of the arm hole.
In lieu of side VE trim, a band of 50 mm (2 inches) wide VE trim may be placed around the sleeve at the wrist or upper arm area of
the garment.
4. Be applied to form one vertical stripe on either side on the front of the garment and an "X" pattern on the back of the garment.
5. Be at least 50 mm (2 inches) wide.
6. Be made either from; combined performance material that exhibits both fluorescent and retroreflective properties, or separate fluorescent
and retroreflective materials.
The fluorescent portion of the trim must be fluorescent lime yellow if the background color is fluorescent orange, orange or red and
must be fluorescent orange if the background color is fluorescent lime yellow, fluorescent yellow or bright yellow.
The retroreflective portion of the VE trim must be continuous along the entire length of the trim and have a minimum Coefficient of
Retroreflection = 240 divided by the width in inches of the retroreflective portion of the VE trim.( e.g. if the width of the
retroreflective portion is 1/2 inch, the minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection is 480)

Type 1 Garments

The garment background must be fluorescent lime yellow, fluorescent yellow, or fluorescent orange colored.
The minimum vertical length for both front and back of the garment is 0.61 metres (24 inches).
The minimum background area for either the front or the back of the garment is 0.13 square metres (200 square inches).
The fluorescent portion of the VE trim for either the front or the back of the garment must have a minimum area of 0.05 square metres (80 square
inches).

Type 2 Garments

The background of the garment must be either fluorescent lime yellow, fluorescent yellow, bright yellow, fluorescent orange, bright orange or bright
red.
The minimum vertical length for both front and back of the garment is 0.61 metres (24 inches).
The minimum background area for either the front or the back of the garment is 0.258 square metres (400 square inches).
The fluorescent portion of the VE trim for either the front or the back of the garment must have a minimum area of 0.05 square metres (80 square
inches).

Type 3 Garments

The garment background must be fluorescent lime yellow, fluorescent yellow, or fluorescent orange colored.
The minimum background area for either the front or the back of the garment is 0.064 square metres (100 square inches).
The minimum vertical length for both front and back of the garment is 0.51 metres (20 inches).
The fluorescent portion of the VE trim for either the front or the back of the garment must have a minimum area of 0.064 square metres (100
square inches).
The garment must be designed so that there is color contrast along the entire length of at least one side of the VE trim.

Police Forces and Other Emergency Response Personnel

It is anticipated that police forces and other emergency response personnel may require greater protection in the hours after dark due to the nature
of their job function. In lieu of requirements 4, 5 and 6 above on the pattern, width and color of the VE trim specified, the VE trim used by these
personnel for all garment types must:
1. Have a minimum area of 0.05 square metres (80 square inches) for either the front or the back of the garment.
 2. Be entirely retroreflective and at least 25 mm (1 inch) wide.
3. Have a minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection of 240.
Table 1. Color, background material and VE trim

Color Chromaticity coordinates Minimum luminance factor

x y Bright color fluorescent color
Yellow .36 .50 .5 .6
.39 .61
.52 .48
.40 .45
Orange .49 .43 .3 .35
.55 .45
.66 .34
.57 .34
Red .57 .34 .2
.66 .34
.69 .31
.60 .32

Back to Top
WorkSafeBC Standard 13.30 Work Platforms Supported by Lift Trucks, February 2008
© Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced, or distributed for profit or other
commercial enterprise, nor may any part be incorporated into any other publication, without written permission of the Workers' Compensation Board of B.C.

1. Scope

1.1 This standard sets out the minimum requirements for the design and use of a work platform supported by a lift truck to elevate personnel.
1.2 This standard does not apply to an order picker or operator-up high lift truck designed to lift personnel.

2. Definitions

2.1 The definitions set out in Part 3 of CSA Standard B335-04 Safety standard for lift trucks apply to this standard.

3. Lift Truck Requirements

3.1 The lift truck used to support a work platform must meet the requirements of CSA Standard B335-04 Safety standard for lift trucks. (Note:
CSA Standard B335-04 incorporates the design and construction requirements of ANSI/ASME B56.1 Safety Standard for Low Lift and High
Lift Trucks and ANSI/ASME B56.6 Safety Standard for Rough Terrain Forklift Trucks, so a lift truck manufactured to meet the applicable
ANSI standard meets the requirements of CSA Standard B335-04.)
3.2 The lift truck must be in good working order with all controls and functions operating in accordance with the manufacturer's specification, the
requirements of the applicable safety standard, and the Occupational Health and Safety Regulation (“OHSR”).
3.3 Forks must be secured against tilting and dislodgement.
3.4 If the lift truck uses a hydraulic or pneumatic system to raise the fork carriage the system must be equipped to prevent unintended descent of
the carriage in excess of 0.6 metres per second in the event of hydraulic or pneumatic line failure.

4. Platform Requirements

4.1 The work platform must be built by the manufacturer to meet the requirements of the applicable lift truck safety standard or custom designed
by a professional engineer in accordance with design criteria from the applicable lift truck safety standard. A custom designed work platform must
be certified by a professional engineer as having been built in conformance with the engineer's design.
4.2 The work platform must be legibly marked to show
(a) The name of the manufacturer or the certifying engineer
(b) If a manufactured work platform, the part number or serial number to allow the design of the work platform to be linked to the manufacturer's
documentation
(c) If a custom built work platform, a unique identification number or code that links to the design and certification documentation from the engineer
(d) The safety standard the work platform was designed to meet
(e) The weight of the work platform when empty
(f) The rated load that may be placed on the work platform (the maximum combined weight of the people, tools, and materials permitted on the
work platform)
(g) The minimum rated capacity of the lift truck needed to safely handle the work platform either by specifying the make and model of lift truck(s)
that may be used with the platform or by specifying the minimum wheel track and lift truck capacity (Note clause 5.7 of this standard requires the
lift truck must have a minimum rated capacity of at least two times the weight of the work platform plus the rated load for a high lift truck and at
least three times the weight of the work platform plus the rated load for a rough terrain forklift truck.)
4.3 The means or method for securing the work platform to the forks or fork carriage must be specified by the manufacturer or a professional
engineer.
4.4 There must be a means to prevent the work platform and carriage from rotating and pivoting.
4.5 The floor of the work platform must have a slip resistant surface located not more than 200 mm (8 inches) above the normal load supporting
surface of the forks.
4.6 The work platform floor depth, measured from the front to the back, must not exceed two times the load centre distance specified on the lift
truck data plate. The work platform width must not be greater than the overall width of the lift truck measured to the outside of the load bearing
tires, or to the outside of the stabilizers if they are to be used, plus 250 mm (10 inches) on either side of the tires or stabilizers as applicable.
4.7 If a particular application requires a work platform with dimensions greater than specified in clause 4.6, a professional engineer must design the
work platform and limit its maximum rated load to ensure the work platform and lift truck system will maintain stability at least equivalent to the
stability performance a work platform meeting clause 4.6 would provide consistent with the factors specified in clause 5.7.
4.8 There must be guardrail or equivalent protection on all sides of the platform. Guardrails or equivalent protection must meet the requirements of
Part 4 of the OHSR. If due to the nature of the work task to be done, guardrails or equivalent protection is not practicable for one or more sides of
the work platform, there must be designated anchor points on the work platform for the securing of personal fall protection systems. There must be
sufficient anchor capacity or individual anchors to allow for the maximum permitted number of work platform occupants to secure their personal
fall protection systems. Personal fall protection systems must meet the requirements of Part 11 of the OHSR.
4.9 The work platform must be constructed so it does not cause a hazard to the occupants and so the occupants cannot reach any hazard created
by movement of the lifting mechanism of the lift truck.

5. Use Requirements

5.1 The instructions from the manufacturer or designer relating to the safe use of the work platform must be available in the workplace.
5.2 The lift truck and work platform must be in good condition and in compliance with the OHSR prior to the use of the system to raise personnel.
5.3 The lift truck must be operated by a qualified operator authorized by the employer to use the lift truck to raise personnel in the work platform.
5.4 The work platform must be secured to the forks or fork carriage in the manner specified by the work platform manufacturer or a professional
engineer.
5.5 If the carriage of the lift truck can rotate or pivot, these functions must be disabled to prevent the work platform and carriage from rotating and
pivoting.
5.6 A trial lift must be performed at each task location immediately prior to raising personnel in the work platform to ensure the lift truck can be
positioned on an appropriate supporting surface, there is sufficient reach to position the work platform to allow the task to be done, and the mast is
vertical or the boom travels vertically. The tilt function for the mast may be used to assist with final positioning the work platform at the task
location but the mast must travel in a vertical plane. The trial lift must ensure adequate clearance can be maintained between the work platform and
the elevating mechanism of the lift truck and any surrounding object such as a structure, overhead obstruction, storage rack, or scaffold, and from
any hazard such as energized electrical wires and equipment.
5.7 The weight of the work platform plus the maximum rated load for the work platform must not exceed one half the rated capacity of a high lift
truck or one third the rated capacity of a rough terrain forklift truck for the reach and configuration being used.
5.8 A system for communication between the work platform occupants and the lift truck operator must be implemented to control work platform
movement. If there is more than one occupant on the work platform, one person on the work platform must be designated to be the primary
person to signal the lift truck operator regarding work platform movement requests. If hand and arm signals are not the main communication
method, a system of hand and arm signals must be developed as an alternative in the event the primary voice or other electronic communication
means becomes ineffective during work platform use.
5.9 The work platform must be lowered to floor or grade level before a person gets on or leaves the platform.
5.10 Personnel must not be transported in the work platform, including between task locations.
5.11 If the work platform does not have guardrail or equivalent protection on all sides, each work platform occupant must use an appropriate
personal fall protection system secured to a designated anchor point on the work platform.
5.12 Platform occupants must work from the platform surface and must not stand on the guardrails or use other devices to increase the effective
working height of the work platform.
5.13 Whenever the work platform is occupied, the lift truck operator must remain within 3 metres (10 feet) of the lift truck controls and in visual
contact with the lift truck and work platform and in communication with the work platform occupants.
Back to Top
WCB Standard: A324 Forklift Mounted Work Platforms, June 1989 © Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia. All rights reserved. No part of
this document may be copied, reproduced, or distributed for profit or other commercial enterprise, nor may any part be incorporated into any other publication,
without written permission of the Workers' Compensation Board of B.C.

1. Scope

This standard defines safety requirements for forklift mounted platforms which may be used to elevate personnel. The standard covers the
following:
a. work platforms intended only for personnel and hand tools with an attendant forklift operator,
b. work platforms intended for personnel and materials
i. with an attendant forklift operator and
ii. with controls mounted on the platform without an attendant forklift operator.
Where forklift mounted work platforms are inappropriate for the job being performed, suitable elevating work platforms (scissor lifts, boom lifts,
etc.) shall be used.
WCB Standard A324 is included in I.H.&S. Regulation 32.36(2)(f) "or other standards acceptable to the Board."

2. Definitions

2.1
The following definitions apply in this standard:
Free descent means the uncontrolled and unintended descent of the platform.
Rated load means the designed carrying capacity of the work platform.
Stability means a condition of a work platform/forklift combination where the sum of the overturning moments, including the presence of
personnel or their equipment, or both, is less than the sum of the moments tending to resist overturning.
Work platform means a work platform that can be mounted on the forks of a lift truck to be elevated to overhead work locations.

3. Carrier Lift Truck Requirements

Forklifts used for elevating personnel shall be designed, fabricated, operated, inspected, tested and maintained in accordance with the following
standards:
a. ANSI B56.1 - 1983 "Safety Standard for Low Lift and High Lift Trucks",
b. CSA B335.1-1977 - "Low Lift and High Lift Trucks"
(Adopted ANSI B56.1-1975),
c. ANSI B56.6 - 1987 "Rough Terrain Forklift Trucks",
d. Other standards acceptable to the Board.
Modifications and adaptations to the forklift which will affect its operation, hydraulic system or structural integrity shall be approved by the forklift
manufacturer or a registered Professional Engineer.
Forklifts shall be maintained in accordance with service manual requirements.
Forklifts used for elevating personnel shall have a level indicating device attached to the mast to indicate when the mast is vertical. Restraints must
be provided to ensure the mast is maintained within five degrees of the vertical position when personnel are elevated.
Forks must be secured against dislodgement.
Where the elevation of the platform is accomplished by a hydraulic cylinder assembly, the system shall be equipped to prevent free descent of the
platform in the event of hydraulic line failure.

4. Responsibilities of Users

4.1
The operator must be trained to operate the forklift and must demonstrate proficient machine operation to his supervisor prior to lifting personnel
on a work platform.
4.2
Before lifting the platform:
a. Ensure that the forklift is on level, stable ground and the area is clear of overhead hazards such as powerlines.
b. Ensure that the load is centred laterally and is positioned as close to the mast as possible.
c. Ensure that the mast is vertical.

4.3
Forklifts shall be immobilized against inadvertent movement while the platform is occupied.
4.4
For those platforms requiring an attendant forklift operator, the operator shall remain within 25 feet (7.6 m) of the machine controls on ground level
with the machine and platform in his view and in communication with the workers on the platform.
4.5
The machine and platform shall be in good operating and structural condition and be maintained as required by the manufacturer.
4.6
Workers shall not climb the forklift mast.
4.7
Rated loads shall not be exceeded.
4.8
Replacement parts for the platform shall meet or exceed the requirements of the original parts.
4.9
The platform shall not be elevated higher than 30 ft. (9 m).
4.10
Workers shall not be transported on the platform.
4.11
Platform occupants shall not work from locations higher than the platform surface.
4.12
Occupants of work platforms shall wear safety belts secured to suitable and substantial anchor-points except while offloading materials from the
platforms.

5. General Platform Requirements

All work platforms shall meet the following requirements.

5.1 Design and Manufacture
5.1.1 Basic Principles
Sound engineering and manufacturing principles shall be applied in the design and manufacture of work platforms considering they will be carrying
personnel.
5.1.2 Material Requirements
Load carrying members subjected to tension or reversing stresses shall be of materials that do not become brittle at low temperatures.
Bolts, nuts and other fasteners whose failure would result in the free descent of the work platform must conform to or exceed the requirements of
ASTM Standard A325, High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. SAE Grade 5, the equivalent or better shall also be acceptable.
Wooden platform components shall be constructed from #2 grade or better; species to be limited to the following groups: - Douglas Fir-Larch;
Hem-Fir; Spruce-Pine-Fir or Coast Sitka Spruce only. All lumber shall be graded according to the National Lumber Grades Authority Rules or
other approved grading rules. All lumber shall be grade stamped by an approved agency.
5.1.3 Welding Standards
All welding shall conform to the following standards:
a. CSA Standard W59, Welded Steel Construction, (Metal Arc Welding), or
b. ANSI/AWS Standard D1.1, Structural Welding Code, or
c. CSA Standard S244, Welded Aluminum Design and Workmanship (Inert Gas Shielded Arc Process).

5.1.4 General
The work platform shall be secured to the fork carriage to prevent forward, lateral or rotational movement. Self-latching mechanisms are
acceptable.
The platform shall have suitable dimensions and/or be mounted such that the forks will support at least 75% of the platform dimension parallel to
the fork arms but will not protrude beyond the edge of the platform.
The platform shall be constructed so as not to cause any hazard to its occupant(s).
The dangerous parts of all moving machinery including the shearing hazards created by the movement of the lifting mechanism shall be securely
guarded against inadvertent contact by occupants of the platform.
The work platform shall have a slip resistant floor surface.
5.1.5 Guardrails
The platform shall have 42 in (1070 mm) high guardrails, intermediate rails and 4 in (100 mm) high toe boards on all sides or be enclosed to a
height of 42 in (1070 mm). Guardrails must be capable of withstanding a horizontal force of 200 lbs. (890 N). Chains are not to be used for
guardrails.
Guardrails may be removable or hinged for opening during loading and unloading. They shall be constructed to accomplish proper positioning and
so that a secured condition is discernible. Where removable guardrails are installed the toe boards must also be removable.
5.1.6
All work platforms shall have an emergency stop button to enable personnel on the platform to shut off power to the lift truck.
5.1.7
Substantial anchor points shall be provided for securing safety belts.
5.2 Platform Identification
Work platforms must have permanent, legible identification providing the following information:
a. Name and address of manufacturer
b. Name of engineer (if engineering certification is required)
c. Platform weight
d. Platform rated load (carrying capacity)
e. Minimum carrier forklift requirements:
wheel track
forklift rated capacity
forklift weight
5.3
Any platform with the working surface greater than 12 inches (300 mm) above the level of the forks shall be certified by a registered Professional
Engineer with consideration for the diminished fork lift capacity and system stability. The requirements of Section 6.2 apply.
5.4
Where a work platform is mounted on a forklift with side-shift or reaching capability the combination must be certified by a registered Professional
Engineer as to its stability in the least stable configuration. The requirements of Section 6.2 apply.

6. Platform Requirements

6.1
Platforms Carrying Personnel and Handtools Only With an Attendant Forklift Operator
6.1.1 Size
These shall be restricted to maximum dimensions of 4 ft. x 4 ft. (1.2 m x 1.2 m). The platform must be positioned with the shorter axis parallel to
the forks.
6.1.2 Capacity
The rated load of the platform shall conform to the manufacturer's instructions, however, in no case shall it exceed 500 lbs. (2.2 kN).
6.1.3 Carrier Forklift Requirements
Minimum carrier forklift requirements shall be as follows:
a. Forklift weight 3000 Ibs. (13.3 kN) or greater.
b. At maximum extension the forklift capacity shall be 3000 Ibs. (13.3 kN) or greater at 24 in. (0.6 m) load centre.
c. Forklift wheel track 3 ft. (0.9 m) or greater.

6.1.4
All work platforms shall be structurally sound. Damaged or deteriorated platforms shall not be used.
6.1.5
No modifications shall be made to the work platform without the approval of the manufacturer.
6.2 Platforms Carrying Personnel and Materials
Work platforms intended for carrying personnel and materials or those with a capacity or size greater than allowed for in Subsection 6.1 shall be
certified by a registered Professional Engineer and meet the following requirements:
6.2.1 Stability Requirements
a. Level Surface Stability Requirements
The work platform/forklift combination shall maintain stability while supporting a minimum static load of two times the platform rated load in
any working position on a level surface. The centre of gravity of the load shall be within 12 inches (300 mm) of the platform edge with the
unit in the least stable configuration.
b. Horizontal Stability Requirements
When carrying the platform rated load and raised to the maximum working height of the platform on a level surface, the work
platform/forklift combination must be stable while sustaining a horizontal force equal to 150 pounds (670 Newtons) or 15% of the rated
load, whichever is greater. This horizontal force shall be applied to the perimeter of the platform at the working surface elevation so as to
create the most adverse loading condition while the unit is in its least stable configuration. The centre of gravity of the vertical load shall be
within 12 inches (300 mm) of the platform edge with the unit in the least stable loading condition.
c. Five Degree Slope Stability Requirements
The work platform/forklift combination shall be able to maintain stability, while sustaining a static load of 1-1/3 times the rated load of the
platform, in every position in which the load can be placed, with the forklift on a slope of five degrees downward in the direction most likely
to cause overturning. The centre of gravity of the load shall be within 12 inches (300 mm) of the platform perimeter.
6.2.2 Structural Factors of Safety
All load supporting elements shall be designed with a safety factor of not less than:
a. 2 based on the yield strength for grades of steels or other materials having a minimum elongation at failure of 14% in a gauge length of 50
mm when tested in accordance with ASTM Standard E8, Tension Testing of Metallic Materials; or
b. 5 based on the ultimate strength for cast irons, fibreglass reinforced plastics, or other materials having an elongation at failure of less than
14% in a gauge length of 50 mm when tested in accordance with ASTM Standard E8.

The design stress used in determining the structural safety factor shall be the maximum stress induced in the element with the device operating with
its rated load.
6.2.3
Work platforms that have sustained damage such that the structural integrity is suspect shall be recertified by a registered Professional Engineer
prior to use.
6.2.4
No modifications shall be made to a work platform without the approval of a registered Professional Engineer.
6.2.5
Control Requirements for Platforms Without an Attendant Forklift Operator
Work platforms may be used without an attendant forklift operator. These shall have both remote hoist and tilt controls mounted on the work
platform. An operator is not required to attend the machine controls if the platform controls have been selected for use.
When the platform mounted hoist and tilt controls are in use, means shall be provided to render the hoist and tilt controls on the truck in- operative.
Only one set of controls shall be capable of being operated at one time. Only trained operators shall operate the controls on the platform.
An emergency lowering system available at ground level shall be provided. This device shall be protected against inadvertent application, and shall
be clearly marked.
Back to Top
WCB Standard OFA1: Certification of Occupational First Aid Attendants
Issued March 30, 2004; Revised November 1, 2004; Revised January 1, 2010; Retired September 6, 2018
This standard has been replaced by OHS Guidelines G3.15(b)-1 to G3.15(c), G3.17.1 and G3.21(2).
WCB Standard: WPL 1-2004 Design, Construction and Use of Wood Frame Scaffolds
© Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced, or distributed for profit or other
commercial enterprise, nor may any part be incorporated into any other publication, without written permission of the Workers' Compensation Board of B.C.

1. Scope

This Standard applies to the design, construction, use, and maintenance of job constructed wood frame scaffolds.
This Standard does not cover shore or lean-to scaffolds.

2. Definitions

"building tie" means a connection between a standing scaffold and a permanent structure;
"double-pole scaffold" means a scaffold with both ends of the bearers supported by connections to posts or uprights;
"guardrail" means a guard consisting of a top rail 102 cm to 112 cm (40 in to 44 in) above the work surface, and an intermediate rail located
approximately midway between the underside of the top rail and the top of the toeboard, if one is provided, or the work surface if no toeboard is
provided;
"heavy duty" means intended to support both workers and stored or stacked materials, such as bricks and masonry;
"light duty" means intended to support workers, their personal hand tools and material for immediate use only;
"running scaffold" means a double-pole scaffold comprised of 2 or more bays;
"scaffold or scaffolding" means any temporary work platform and its supporting structure used for supporting workers, or materials, or both;
"single-pole scaffold" means a scaffold with the outer ends of the bearers supported on ledgers secured to a single row of posts or uprights, and
the inner ends of the bearers supported on or in a wall;
"toeboard" means a guard with a top at least 10 cm (4 in) above the floor or platform, and the space between the bottom of the toeboard and the
floor or platform not exceeding 13 mm (1/2 in);
"work platform" means an elevated or suspended temporary work base for workers.

3. Responsibilities

1. Employers must ensure that scaffolds used by their workers are in safe condition, regardless of who erected the scaffolds.
2. A scaffold must be erected, altered and dismantled by, or under the direct supervision of, qualified workers.
3. A scaffold must be inspected daily before use and after any modification.
4. A damaged scaffold component must not be used until it has been effectively repaired.

4. Lumber for structural components

1. Unless otherwise specified in this Standard, lumber used to construct scaffolding must be graded Number 2 or better Douglas fir-larch,
hemlock-fir, spruce-pine-fir or coast-Sitka-spruce.
2. All lumber must be graded and marked to the National Lumber Grades Authority Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber or other
grading rules acceptable to the board.
5. Scaffold stability

1. A scaffold must be erected with vertical members plumb and ledgers and bearers level.
2. The lower end of the vertical support of a scaffold must be supported by firm and adequately sized foundations or sills.
3. The poles, legs and uprights of a scaffold must be securely and rigidly braced to prevent swaying and displacement.
4. A scaffold must be effectively guyed or secured to a building or structure if the height of the scaffold exceeds 3 times its minimum base
dimension.
5. If building ties or guys are used
(a) the first level of ties or guys must be placed at a height not exceeding 3 times the scaffold minimum base dimension, and additional
building ties or guys placed at vertical intervals not exceeding 6 m (20 ft), and

(b) building ties or guys must be placed at longitudinal intervals of every third bay or 6.4 m (21 ft), whichever is less, and at each end
of the scaffold.
6. Each building tie must be capable of resisting a working load of 4 kN (900 lbs), applied horizontally and perpendicular to the structure, or a
proportionately equivalent load where ties are spaced closer together or guying is employed.
7. If a scaffold is enclosed by a tarp or other cover for protection against climatic conditions, bracing for the scaffold must be installed in
accordance with the instructions of a professional engineer to meet design criteria for wind or other weather induced loads that may be
imposed.
Note: For the purpose of compliance with subsection (2), if changing weather conditions may cause freezing or thawing of the ground or other
surface supporting a scaffold, adequate precautions need to be taken to ensure the continued suitability of the supporting surface. For compliance
with subsection (6), CSA Standard CAN/CSA-S269.2-M87, Access Scaffolding for Construction Purposes, provides some examples of
typical details for building ties.

6. Guardrails and toeboards

1. Except as provided by subsections (2) and (5), a work platform 3 m (10 ft) or more above grade or floor level must have guardrails on all
open sides and ends.
2. If an edge of the work platform is adjacent to a structure that provides equivalent protection to guardrails, then guardrails may be omitted on
that edge and there may be an open space between the work platform and the structure of up to 30 cm (12 in).
3. Toeboards must be provided if there is a danger from tools, materials, equipment and debris falling off the edge of the work surface, or
there is a danger of slipping off the work surface due to the environment or work practices being used.
4. If material is stacked or stored on a platform or walkway, or near a floor opening, toeboards must be increased in height or solid or mesh
panels of appropriate height must be installed to prevent the material from falling.
5. Subsections (1) and (3) do not apply to a walkway or a platform that is on a performance stage or scenic unit and will be visible to the
audience during a rehearsal or performance, provided that effective measures are taken to protect performers and other workers from
injury.
Dimensions for guardrails are shown in Tables 1 and 2. Sample guardrails are shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1 - Single Pole Wood Scaffold (Light Duty)

7. Lumber planks

1. Except as provided elsewhere in this Standard, solid wood scaffold planks used as work platforms must be cut from Douglas fir-larch,
hemlock-fir, spruce-pine-fir or coast-Sitka-spruce species, and
 (a) for a maximum span of 3 m (10 ft), must be

(i) graded "Select Structural - Scaffold Plank" not less than 38 mm x 235 mm (2 in x 10 in nominal),

(ii) graded "Select Structural - Joists and Planks" not less than 38 mm x 235 mm (2 in x 10 in nominal),

(iii) graded "No. 2 and Better - Joists and Planks", not less than 48 mm x 251 mm (2 in x 10 in rough sawn), or

(iv) graded "No. 2 and Better - Joists and Planks", not less than 38 mm x 235 mm (2 in x 10 in nominal), provided the planks are doubled
(one on top of the other), or

(b) for a maximum span of 1.8 m (6 ft) and light-duty work only, must be graded "No. 2 and Better - Joists and Planks", not less than 38
mm x 235 mm (2 in x 10 in nominal).
2. Any lumber graded in accordance with subsection (1)(a)(ii), (iii), (iv), or (b) must be hand picked for minimal knots and straight grain to
ensure that it is suitable for use as a scaffold plank.
3. Each lumber scaffold plank must

(a) be visually inspected for defects before each installation and not used if found to be defective,

(b) except as noted in subsection 1(b), be supported at intervals not exceeding 3 m (10 ft) for lightduty activity and 2.1 m (7 ft) for
heavyduty activity,

(c) have its ends extend not less than 15 cm (6 in) and not more than 30 cm (12 in) beyond the supporting member, and

(d) for light duty activity, support no more than one worker unless it is connected to the adjoining plank.
4. (4) A work platform must

(a) consist of lumber or manufactured scaffold planks placed side by side to provide a work surface with a minimum nominal width of 50 cm
(20 in), except that a nominal 30 cm (12 in) wide work platform is acceptable for use with ladder jacks, and

(b) as far as possible, completely cover the area between front and rear vertical supports or the rear guardrail, and in no case leave more
than one opening in the work platform area, and the opening must be no greater than 25 cm (10 in) in width.

8. Manufactured planks

1. A manufactured scaffold plank must meet the requirements of

(a) CSA Standard CAN/CSA S269.2-M87, Access Scaffolding for Construction Purposes,

(b) ANSI Standard A10.8-1988, American National Standard for Construction and Demolition Operations - Scaffolding - Safety
Requirements,

(c) ANSI Standard A14.7-1991, Safety Requirements for Mobile Ladder Stands and Mobile Ladder Stand Platforms,

(d) CSA Standard CAN3-Z271-M84, Safety Code for Suspended Powered Platforms, or

(e) the written requirements of a professional engineer.

2. A manufactured scaffold plank must be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and limitations, except as provided in
subsection (3).
3. A scaffold plank fabricated at the jobsite must be made to a design certified by a professional engineer to meet the requirements of CSA
Standard CAN/CSA-S269.2 M-87, Access Scaffolding for Construction Purposes, and a copy of the design must be available on site.

9. Securing planks

Each lumber and manufactured scaffold plank installed for use must be secured against dislodgement.

10. Sloping platforms

A work platform which slopes from one end to the other must be

(a) sloped not more than 1 vertical to 5 horizontal, and

(b) fitted with cleats on its upper surface, at not more than 40 cm (16 in) intervals or other equally effective measures must be used to ensure
adequate footing for workers using the platform.
11. Access to scaffolds

1. Access to otherwise inaccessible working levels of a scaffold up to 9 m (30 ft) above a floor or grade must be provided by a vertical or
portable ladder, or stairway, attached to the scaffold.

2. Access to otherwise inaccessible working levels of a scaffold over 9 m (30 ft) above a floor or grade must be provided by

(a) a stairway erected for the full height of the scaffold,

(b) a temporary passenger hoist approved for use under the Elevating Devices Safety Regulation,

(c) an attached vertical ladder, with rest platforms at least every 9 m (30 ft) which are fully guarded except at the ladder location, or
3. A worker must not climb scaffold members between landings.

12. Vertical ladders

1. A vertical ladder providing access to working levels of a scaffold must

(a) be adequately fastened to the scaffold,

(b) be configured so that its siderails extend approximately 1 m (3 ft) above the working level,

(c) have rungs spaced at 30 cm (12 in) on centre, and

(d) have a clear space of at least 15 cm (6 in) behind each rung.

2. A ladder attached to a scaffold must be positioned so that its use will not cause the scaffold to become unstable.

13. Spacing of components

The horizontal spacing between uprights, guardrail posts and bearers in a wood scaffold must not exceed
(a) 3 m (10 ft) for a light duty scaffold, and

(b) 2 m (7 ft) for a heavy duty scaffold.

14. Bracing of uprights

Adjacent uprights must be connected with horizontal runners (ledgers and bearers) to ensure that the unbraced vertical length of an upright does
not exceed 2.4 m (8 ft).

15. Cross bracing

A scaffold must be adequately supported in two directions by a system of diagonal cross braces secured to the uprights as close to the ledgers as
possible.

16. Single-pole components

Components of a light duty single-pole wood scaffold must have minimum nominal dimensions conforming to Table 1 and grade and species in
accordance with section 4.

17. Double-pole components

Components of a double-pole wood scaffold must have minimum nominal dimensions conforming to Table 2 and grade and species in accordance
with section 4.
A sample sketch of a light duty double pole scaffold is shown in Figure 2.

Table 1: Single-pole scaffolds

Component Nominal dimensions (inches)1
Uprights - up to 6 m (20 ft) 2 x4
- 6 m to 15 m (20 ft to 50 ft) 4 x4
Bearers - 90 cm (3 ft) maximum span 1 x6
- 1.5 m (5 ft) maximum span 2 x6
Ledgers 1 x 6 or 2 x 4
Braces 1 x 6 or 2 x 4
Wall scabs and bearer blocks 2 x6
Guardrails (top rail) 2 x 4 (up to 2.4 m (8 ft) span)
2 x 6 (2.4 m - 3 m (8 ft - 10 ft) span)
Guardrails (intermediate rail) 2 x4
Toeboards 1 x4
Scaffold planks As required by section 7 or 8
Table 2: Double-pole scaffolds
Nominal dimensions (inches)1
Component Light duty Heavy duty
Uprights - up to 6 m (20 ft) 2 x4 2 x6
- 6 m to 15 m (20 ft to 50 ft) 4 x4 4 x6
Bearers - 1.5 m (5 ft) max. span 2 - 1 x 6 or 2 - 2 x 6 or
1 - 2 x6 1 - 2 x 10
Ledgers 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1 x 6 or 2 x 4
Braces 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1 x 6 or 2 x 4
Guardrails (top rail) 2 x 4 (up to 2.4 m (8 ft) span) 2 x4
2 x 6 (2.4 m - 3 m (8 ft - 10 ft) span)
Guardrails (intermediate rail) 2 x4 2 x4
Toeboards 1 x4 1 x4
Scaffold planks As required by section 7 or 8 As required by section 7 or
8
1 In Tables 1 and 2 dimensions are nominal sizes for surfaced dry lumber and have actual dimensions in millimetres as follows: 2 x 4 is 38 mm x
89 mm, 4 x 4 is 89 mm x 89 mm, 4 x 6 is 89 mm x 140 mm, 1 x 6 is 19 mm x 140 mm, 2 x 6 is 38 mm x 140 mm and 2 x 10 is 38 mm x
235 mm.
Figure 2 - Dimensions for light duty double-pole scaffold

18. Extension of uprights

 1. A wood upright may only be extended using a butt joint, strengthened by two wooden splice plates not less than 1.2 m (4 ft) long.
2. The splice plates for wood uprights must have a minimum thickness of 38 mm (2 in nominal) and must have the same width as the spliced
members.
3. The combined cross-sectional area of the splice plates must be at least that of the vertical upright member.

19. Laminated uprights

When wood uprights are fabricated by the lamination of two or more pieces of material to obtain the required cross-sectional dimensions, the
distance between joints must be at least 1.2 m (4 ft). A sample laminated upright is shown in Figure 3.

20. Bearer supports

1. The inner ends of bearers on single-pole scaffolds must be supported by bearer blocks, and securely fastened to wall scabs.
2. Manufactured bearer supports must be of a design acceptable to the board, and be secured to solid wall materials.
3. Bearer hooks which engage holes in the wall sheathing must be adequately supported by stiffeners secured to wood studs or blocking.
Note: Sample bearer connections are shown in Figure 3.
Figure 3 - Bearer Supports at Walls, Upright Extension and Laminated Upright

WCB Standard: WPL 2-2004 Design, Construction and Use of Crane Supported Work Platforms
© Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced, or distributed for profit or other
commercial enterprise, nor may any part be incorporated into any other publication, without written permission of the Workers' Compensation Board of B.C.

1. Scope

This Standard applies to the design, construction, use, and maintenance of work platforms suspended from or attached to cranes or hoists. These
work platforms are intended to support personnel and limited materials. Generally, these cranes or hoists were not specifically designed for lifting
persons.
This Standard is an update of former WCB Standard A326 Design, Construction and Use of Suspended Platforms.

2. Definitions

"brittle materials" means those materials that do not meet the requirement for ductile materials;
"crane supported work platform" means a personnel platform which is raised, lowered, and held in working position by the hoisting line of a crane
or hoist, or is attached to a crane boom, (generally the occupants of platforms suspended from cranes or attached to crane booms do not have
direct personal control over the movement of the platform);
"ductile materials" means materials having a minimum elongation of 14% in a gauge length of 50 mm;
"rigging" means fibre ropes, wire ropes, chains, slings, attachments, connecting fittings and associated components.

3. Exclusions

The following types of platforms are not governed by this Standard:

platforms which are supported by hoists or cranes designed for the suspension of work platforms (such as swing stages, digester platforms,
chimney hoists, vehicle-mounted aerial devices, digger derricks)
cranes or hoists specifically rated by the manufacturer for lifting personnel
fixed platforms suspended from structures by wire ropes or chains
platforms intended solely for lifting materials
platforms suspended under aircraft

4. Design of crane supported work platforms

Crane supported work platforms must be certified by a professional engineer or other qualified designer (i.e., an engineer registered in the
jurisdiction in which the platform was designed). Drawings and specifications containing all information necessary to construct and rig the platform
according to the design requirements must be provided and kept available for the duration of the service life of the platform.
The following information must be available on the drawings:
(a) the geometry of the platform and the sizes and required properties of all components,
(b) the type, quality and strength of materials,
(c) the fabrication details, sizes and specifications, for all bolted and welded connections,
(d) the rigging components, such as length and size of slings and the size of fittings, shackles, and any proprietary items, to permit accurate field
identification for a crane supported platform or the details for attaching a platform to the boom,
(e) the relevant data to be displayed on a data plate, as detailed in the appropriate section of the Occupational Health and Safety Regulation,
(f) the professional engineer's dated seal and signature, and the names of the platform fabricator and the owner of the platform, and;
(g) a statement by the professional engineer, or other qualified designer, indicating that the crane supported work platform design and fabrication
meets this Standard.

5. Design loads and stresses

5.1 Design loads

A specified design live load of not less than 1.1 kN (250 lb.) per occupant must be used. The design live load must be calculated from the number
of occupants and additional load due to tools, equipment, and materials carried on the work platform. The design live load must be applied to
produce the most critical stresses on the platform structure and the rigging or the attachment to the boom.
A crane supported work platform designed for transporting injured workers must be designed for a minimum 3.5 kN (800 lb.) capacity to
accommodate two occupants plus one occupied stretcher.
The guardrail must be able to withstand a concentrated force of 1000 N (225 lbf) in any direction at any point without sustaining permanent
deformation.
5.2 Load factors
The design dead load and live load must be multiplied by a stress concentration factor f1 and a dynamic loading factor f2. The values of f1 and f2
must not be less than 1.1 and 1.25, respectively.
5.3 Allowable stresses
The allowable stresses in structural components must not exceed 50% of the yield stress of ductile materials, or 20% of the ultimate stress of brittle
materials.

6. Suspension system

6.1 Work platforms suspended by load lines

Work platforms may be suspended from the main line or auxiliary line of cranes or hoists that meet the requirements the Occupational Health and
Safety Regulation and the Workers Compensation Act. The allowable load on rigging components must not exceed 10% of their breaking
strength.
The suspension system must be designed to prevent the platform from tipping when personnel are occupying the platform move. Headroom must
be provided to allow occupants to stand upright in the platform.
6.2 Platforms attached to crane booms
Work platforms may be attached to the boom tip of telescopic boom cranes that meet the requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety
Regulation and the Workers Compensation Act. The components and method of connecting a platform to a crane boom must be designed and
certified by the crane manufacturer or a professional engineer. Platforms must be designed to remain level while occupied.

7. Guardrails

The perimeter of work platforms must have standard guardrails complete with an intermediate rail and toeboard, or be fully enclosed. Screen mesh
to cover the area between the toeboard and the intermediate rail is recommended if full enclosure is not provided. The top rail must be 102 cm to
112 cm (40 in to 44 in) above the platform level. If an access door is provided, it must open inward, or have an equally effective latching
mechanism to prevent the door from inadvertently opening. Guards around the perimeter of a platform used to transport injured personnel must
consist of standard guardrails with mesh or solid enclosure at least up to the level of the midrail.

8. Construction

Crane supported platforms must be constructed accurately, according to the drawings and specifications required by section 4 of this Standard.
The welding must be carried out by firms registered under CSA W47.1 or W47.2, for steel and aluminum welding, respectively, or alternatively
welding must be inspected and certified by a professional engineer. All rough edges exposed to contact by workers must be surfaced or smoothed
to prevent injury from punctures or lacerations.

9. Data plate

A data plate displaying the following information must be permanently affixed to the platform:
(a) names of the engineer or other qualified person certifying the platform, and the fabricator of the platform,
(b) identification which correlates the platform to the relevant design drawings,
(c) date of manufacture,
(d) rated capacity,
(e) minimum rated capacity required for the crane or hoist,
(f) number of occupants for which the platform was designed,
(g) all-up weight (weight of platform and rigging plus rated capacity), and
(h) a statement that the platform conforms to this Standard.

10. Rigging

When a fibre, wire rope or chain bridle sling is used to connect a crane supported platform to the hoisting line, each bridle leg must be connected
to a master link or shackle in a manner that ensures the load is distributed amongst the bridle legs. The slings, shackles, rings, and master links must
be designed with a safety factor of 10 on the breaking strength of the component, based on the all-up weight. The working load limit (WLL) of a
bridle with more than 3 legs is limited to the WLL of any 3 legs of the bridle. All supporting hooks or shackles must be safety-wired, or must be a
type that can be closed and locked, to prevent dislodgment. All eyes in fibre or wire rope slings must be fabricated with thimbles. The rigging slings
and fittings must be permanent attachments to the platform and must not be used for other load lifting purposes.
No spreader bar(s) may be interposed between the load hook and the work platform.

11. Lifeline anchors and fall protection

11.1 Personal fall protection equipment and anchorages

Workers on a platform suspended from a crane or attached to a crane boom must wear personal fall protection equipment, including a full body
harness and shock-absorbing lanyard, secured to a designated anchorage point. Single or multiple anchorages must have an ultimate breaking
strength of at least 8 kN (1800 lb.) for each lanyard attached. The strength requirement applies only to the local attachment and not the overall
lifting capacity of the crane or hoist.
11.2 Work platform suspended from a crane
Anchorages for workers on platforms suspended from cranes may be above the load hook or on the platform.
11.2.1 Anchorage above load hook
A lifeline anchorage above the load hook may consist of an appropriate eye welded to the load block of the crane providing the modification to the
block is certified by a professional engineer or approved by the load block manufacturer. A wire rope sling may be connected to the eye on the
load block, and lanyards may be snapped onto the lower eye of the sling. Where a single part line is used, lanyards may be snapped onto the
hoisting line above the load hook, or onto a sling connected to the hoisting line above the load hook. The anchorage strength requirement applies
only to the local attachment, not the overall lifting capacity of the crane or hoist.
11.2.2 Anchorage on platform
If a platform is suspended from a crane or hoist and anchorages are provided on the platform, an additional safety sling, designed to a safety factor
of 10 based on the all-up weight of the occupied platform, must be interposed between the platform (i.e. the master link) and an anchorage above
the load hook that will prevent the platform from falling more than 15 cm (6 in.) if the platform becomes dislodged from the hook.
11.3 Work platform attached to a crane boom
Anchorage(s) must be provided on the crane boom when the work platform is attached to the boom.

12. Crane requirements

12.1 Load rating of crane or hoist

The all-up weight of the suspended platform must not exceed 50% of the manufacturer's rated capacity of the crane or hoist at the radius at which
the lift will be made.
12.2 Types of cranes and hoists
Platforms must be suspended from cranes having telescoping or fixed booms and from hoisting gear only capable of lowering under power. Free
running boom and hoisting winches, controlled only by brakes, must not be employed. Any dog-clutches in the hoisting winch drives must be
secured against inadvertent disengagement.
12.3 Two-block prevention
A crane or hoist used to suspend a work platform on the load line must have a device to prevent two-blocking if the equipment has a telescoping
boom, or a device to warn the operator of impending two-blocking if the crane has a fixed length boom.
13. Crane operation 13.1 Operator qualifications
A qualified operator, who must remain at the controls while workers occupy the crane supported work platform, must operate the crane or hoist.
Platform movements must be controlled by the Standard code of hand signals published in the Occupational Health and Safety Regulation or by
effective radio or telephone communications. The platform must not be moved except upon receipt of a clearly understood signal from the
designated signaler upon the platform.
13.2 Footing
Cranes must be set on a firm footing, uniformly level within 1%. Cranes must not travel while supporting a platform occupied by workers, except
for rail-mounted cranes.
13.3 Trial lift
A trial lift with the unloaded platform, from the location where workers enter the platform to all locations to which workers will be hoisted, must be
done prior to placing workers on the platform. The trial lift is to determine that all work locations can be reached without contacting obstructions,
that all controls function properly, and that the all-up weight indicated on the data plate remains within 50% of the crane or hoist rating throughout
the range of intended operation.

14. Maintenance and inspection

A crane supported work platform and it's rigging, must be inspected by a qualified person prior to each lift. A worker must not be hoisted in a
work platform until all deficiencies have been corrected. If broken, bent, or heavily corroded structural members, or fractured welds or otherwise
defective connections are found, the platform must be taken out of service for repair and must be re-certified by a professional engineer. A
platform must be re-certified by a professional engineer if structural modifications are made, or components are welded to the structural members
of the platform.
Back to Top
WCB Standard: WPL 3-2004 Safety Factor and Minimum Breaking Strength for Suspended Work Platforms and Associated Components
© Workers' Compensation Board of British Columbia. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced, or distributed for profit or other
commercial enterprise, nor may any part be incorporated into any other publication, without written permission of the Workers' Compensation Board of B.C.

1. Scope

This Standard applies to suspended work platforms including the following: swing stages, portable power platforms, catenary scaffolds, needle
beam scaffolds, outrigger or suspended mason's scaffold, work platform suspended from a crane and boatswain's chairs.
This Standard does not cover the following types of platforms: permanent powered platform, fixed platform suspended from structures by wire
rope or chains, platforms intended solely for lifting material or platform suspended under aircraft.
The associated components include the platform, suspension lines, rigging and anchor system except for permanently mounted roof anchors.

2. Definitions

"Safety Factor" means the theoretical reserve capability of a product, determined by dividing the breaking strength by the rated working load
unless otherwise noted.

3. Safety factor

(1) Rigging and suspension lines except for a catenary line used to support work platforms must have a safety factor of at least 10.
(2) A catenary line installed specifically to support a catenary scaffold must have a safety factor of at least 6.
(3) A hanger or stirrup used for supporting a swing stage must have a safety factor of at least 10.
(4) Cornice hook, parapet clamps, thrust out beams and other anchoring devices must have a safety factor of at least 4 based on the ultimate load
carrying capacity to the static load.
(5) A thrust out beam must be counter-balanced to support a load of at least 4 times the static load.
(6) A suspended work platform must have a safety factor of at least 4 based on the ratio of the ultimate load carrying capacity of the work
platform to the rated load.

4. Minimum breaking strength

(1) The tiebacks for anchoring devices must have a minimum breaking strength of 22 kN (5,000 lbs)
(2) A rope used to suspend a swing stage or similar equipment must be a wire rope or a synthetic rope that has a minimum breaking strength of 22
kN (5,000 lbs).
(3) A rope used to suspend a boatswain's chair by block and tackle must be a wire rope or a synthetic rope that has a minimum breaking strength
of 22 kN (5,000 lbs).
(4) A rope used to suspend a boatswain's chair by other than a block and tackle must be a synthetic rope that has a minimum breaking strength of
27 kN (6,000 lbs).
Back to Top